JP7537942B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to create an advantageous state for the player.

Conventionally, gaming machines that enhance the player's interest by providing multiple parts (such as an introductory part, a win/lose decision part, and an epilogue part) from the start to the end of the variable display are known (Patent Document 1). Also known is a gaming machine that executes a re-draw performance in which the jackpot symbol temporarily stops on a non-variable symbol (normal jackpot symbol), then the jackpot symbol changes again, and then a non-variable symbol or a variable symbol stops (Patent Document 2).

JP 2019-118411 A JP 2016-179389 A

The gaming machine described above still has room for improvement in terms of making the flow of the series of effects that are executed look better.

The present invention was conceived in light of this situation, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can more effectively display the series of effects that are executed.

(A) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is to be performed after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
The first notification performance includes a first notification performance introduction part until the result of controlling to the advantageous state is notified, a first notification performance first epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled, and a first notification performance second epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will not be controlled,
The second notification performance includes a second notification performance introduction part until the result of controlling to the advantageous state is notified, a second notification performance first epilogue part executed when it is determined that the state will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second notification performance second epilogue part executed when it is determined that the state will not be controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
In the first notification performance introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the first notification performance introduction part;
In the second notification performance introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the second notification performance introduction part;
The brightness data table corresponding to the first notification performance introduction part includes a brightness data table for a specific light-emitting mode and a brightness data table for a special light-emitting mode different from the specific light-emitting mode,
The brightness data table corresponding to the second notification performance introduction part includes a brightness data table for a specific light-emitting mode and a brightness data table for a special light-emitting mode different from the specific light-emitting mode,
The luminance data table for setting a specific light-emitting mode in the luminance data table corresponding to the first notification performance introduction part and the luminance data table for setting a specific light-emitting mode in the luminance data table corresponding to the second notification performance introduction part are a common luminance data table,
The luminance data table for the special light emission mode is composed of a plurality of luminance data representing chromatic colors.
It is characterized by:
(1) A gaming machine that can be controlled to a favorable advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) when a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed by executing a variable display of first identification information and a variable display of second identification information,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which the game is notified of the game being controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to a common introduction part in both an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be made to the advantageous state and an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be made to the advantageous state;
In a first epilogue part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be performed in the advantageous state, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
In a second epilogue part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be performed in the advantageous state, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
an average time from when one piece of luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part until when it is switched to the next piece of luminance data is set shorter than an average time from when one piece of luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part until when it is switched to the next piece of luminance data;
A rate at which information is displayed in the first epilogue part or the second epilogue part is higher than a rate at which information is displayed in the introduction part;
moreover,
A state control means capable of controlling to a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state (e.g., a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-19),
An update means capable of updating the numerical information based on the execution of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100);
The state control means can control the state to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, thereby establishing a special condition (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75, and as shown in FIG. 8-17, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173).
The update means is characterized in that it updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in Figure 8-13).
According to this feature, the notification effect can be executed with suitable brightness control, which increases the interest. Furthermore, such a configuration can suitably realize rescue of the player. Specifically, even if the game state changes and a variable display of any identification information is executed, the numerical information continues to be updated, so the player can be rescued more easily, which increases the player's motivation to play.

The embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the invention relating to the following means (A). In a conventional pachinko game machine, as shown in JP 2005-95449 A, a "jackpot" occurs when a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed as a result of the variable display of a special pattern (identification information) that is started on the variable display device based on the entry of a game ball into a start winning hole. The derived display means that a pattern (final stop pattern) is finally stopped and displayed. When a jackpot occurs, for example, the jackpot winning hole is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game moves to a jackpot game state in which a ball is likely to win. Then, when a predetermined number (e.g., 10) of jackpot winning holes are won during each opening period, the jackpot winning hole is closed. Then, the number of times the jackpot winning hole is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (e.g., 15 rounds). In addition, an opening time (e.g., 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and the large prize opening closes when the opening time has elapsed, even if the number of winnings does not reach the predetermined number. Below, the opening period of each large prize opening may be referred to as a round. Also, play during a round may be referred to as a round play.

In addition, in a state where a pattern other than the pattern that will be the final stop pattern (for example, the center pattern among the left, center, and right patterns) on a variable display device continues for a predetermined time and stops, oscillates, expands and contracts, or changes shape while matching a specific display result, or where multiple patterns fluctuate synchronously with the same pattern, or the positions of the displayed patterns are swapped, and the possibility of a jackpot occurring continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states), a reach effect is called a reach effect. Also, a reach state and its appearance are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, a variable display that includes a reach effect is referred to as a reach variable display. If the display result of the pattern variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it is a "miss" and the variable display state ends. The player plays while enjoying how to generate a jackpot.

Among such gaming machines, there are known gaming machines that can be controlled to a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. For example, Patent Document 1 describes that when the number of special game games executed in the normal gaming state (the number of times the variable display is executed) reaches 1000 times (the special number of times) but no jackpot (advantageous state) occurs (the special condition is met), the gaming state is controlled to a high probability state, the probability that a jackpot will be determined as the result of the special game is increased to about 1/100, and jackpots are more likely to occur in subsequent special games. It also describes that when the number of special game games (the number of times the variable display is executed) reaches 1000 times in the normal gaming state but no jackpot occurs, a time-saving state may be generated instead of the high probability state.

However, there was room for improvement in the control where special states could be controlled based on the number of times the variable display was executed.

The present invention aims to provide a gaming machine that suppresses the increase in gambling and achieves healthy playability.

(A) The gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and is controllable to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes a state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-19) that can control the gaming machine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and an update means (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-13) that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display (e.g., a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-14). The state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, thereby establishing a special condition (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75, and as shown in FIG. 8-17, a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173), and the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS71). With such a configuration, rescue of the player can be preferably realized. Specifically, even if the game state changes and any of the identification information is displayed variably, the numerical information continues to be updated, making it easier for the player to be rescued and increasing their motivation to play.

1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a rear perspective view of a pachinko game machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a frame lamp. A diagram to explain the special pattern LED board, the fourth pattern unit, and the relationship between the fourth pattern unit and the game effect lamp. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of a screen in an image display device. A diagram to explain the various boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine. A diagram to explain the types of wins. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining each random number. A diagram to explain the jackpot determination table and the jackpot type determination table. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a performance control command. A diagram to explain an example of a front fluctuation pattern on the main side. A figure to explain an example of a subsequent fluctuation pattern on the main side. This is a diagram to explain the subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table when a miss occurs. This is a diagram to explain the subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of a jackpot. 13 is a diagram for explaining the previous fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. A diagram to explain an example of a total fluctuation pattern on the main side. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a lottery for a presentation pattern on the sub side. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. 13 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern change process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of processing before a jackpot is released. A flowchart showing an example of processing during a jackpot opening. A flowchart showing an example of processing after a jackpot is released. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the flow of a series of presentations. This is a diagram to explain the relationship before and after the decision on whether or not to win, the SP first half reach A jackpot, and the SP final reach jackpot. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the starting part. This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the provocation part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the scenarios of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) and the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the provocation part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) and the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the reel operation part (later development of SP). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A) and the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the provocation part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B) and the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the teasing part (SP final reach). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the teasing part (SP final reach). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP final reach) and the losing epilogue part (SP final reach). FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a scenario of a relief part. A diagram to explain the scenario of the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the re-selection part (deriving an odd number pattern after a button is operated) and the fanfare part. This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the re-selection part (deriving an even number pattern after button operation) and the fanfare part. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a mechanism for outputting to an LED driver. 13 is a diagram for explaining the lighting mode of the game effect lamp. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the lighting mode of the game effect lamp. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the start part. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the start part. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the start part. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the start part. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the start part. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the start part. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the start part. FIG. This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocation part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocation part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocation part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocation part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocation part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocation part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the miss epilogue part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the miss epilogue part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocative part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocative part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocative part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocative part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocative part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocative part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the miss epilogue part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the miss epilogue part (SP first half reach B). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the reel operation part (when the SP develops in the latter half). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP second half reach B). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP final reach). 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the rescue hit part. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the rescue hit part. FIG. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving an odd number pattern after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving an odd number pattern after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving an odd number pattern after button operation). FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the fanfare part. A figure to explain the presentation mode in the re-drawing part (deriving an even number pattern after button operation). A figure to explain the presentation mode in the re-drawing part (deriving an even number pattern after button operation). A figure to explain the presentation mode in the re-drawing part (deriving an even number pattern after button operation). FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the fanfare part. A detailed explanatory diagram of parts (b11) to (b13). FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a volume level. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a volume level. A detailed explanatory diagram of parts (r24) to (r27). A detailed explanatory diagram of parts (r28) to (r31). A detailed explanatory diagram of parts (r32) to (r35). A detailed explanatory diagram of the role movements in (b18) to (i1). A detailed explanatory diagram of the role movements in (b18) to (i1). A detailed explanation of the reel action in (r54) to (s4). A detailed explanation of the reel action in (r54) to (s4). FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of subtitles and the number of lines. FIG. 2 is a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (A1) to (A23). A detailed explanatory diagram of parts (A24) to (A46). A detailed explanatory diagram of parts (b4) to (b6) and a comparison diagram during the jackpot round. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the transparency of subtitles for dialogue and sound output. 1 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (b4) to (b6) and a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (o3) to (o5). FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a comparative example of subtitles. FIG. 11 is a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (B4) to (B11). FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the pattern display. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of re-drawing. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of re-drawing. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of re-drawing. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of re-drawing. FIG. FIG. 2 is a detailed explanatory diagram of a blackout. 13A to 13C are detailed explanatory diagrams of the game effect lamp when a miss occurs and diagrams for explaining modified examples when a miss occurs. FIG. 13 is a detailed explanatory diagram of part (r48). 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a luminance data table used for a start part. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used in the start part. FIG. A figure to explain an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the first half of SP Reach A. This is a diagram to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the first half of the SP Reach A. This is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach A. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach A. A figure to explain an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the first half of the SP Reach B. A figure to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the first half of the SP Reach B. This is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach B. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach B. A figure to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the reel operation part during the development of the second half of a SP. A figure to explain an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the second half of SP Reach A. This is a diagram to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the second half of the SP, Reach A. This is a diagram to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the second half of the SP, Reach A. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach A. A figure to explain an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the second half of SP Reach B. This is a diagram to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the second half of the SP, Reach B. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the SP second half reach B. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach B. A figure to explain an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used in the promotion part of the SP final reach. A figure to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP final reach. A figure to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP final reach. This is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the epilogue part of the SP final reach. A figure to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the missed epilogue part of the SP final reach. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for a part per relief; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a luminance data table used in a re-lottery part. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the re-lottery part (before operation promotion). FIG. A figure to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the re-drawing part (pattern promotion after operation promotion). A figure to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the re-drawing part (maintaining the pattern after operation promotion). FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the fanfare part. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a smooth rainbow luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a smooth rainbow luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. FIG. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for a role lamp and a grandchild table for a left panel lamp in a smooth rainbow brightness data table. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a grandchild table for an Attacka lamp in the smooth rainbow brightness data table. FIG. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a reel operation red flashing brightness data table. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a yellow haze luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a white blinking (white flash) brightness data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a feature lamp in a common red cut-in brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a board left lamp in a common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacca lamp in a common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacca lamp in a common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a feature lamp in a common green cut-in brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the left lamp of the board in the common green cut-in brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacca lamp in a common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacca lamp in a common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a non-operation prompting tilt brightness data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the trigger display brightness data table and the operation promotion brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the shutter luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the miss luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table per repair; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table per repair; 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a hit-determined brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a hit-determined brightness data table. FIG. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the re-drawing performance brightness data table. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the re-drawing performance brightness data table. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a background luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a background luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a comparison of lamp control when a win occurs and when a miss occurs. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a comparison of lamp control when a win occurs and when a miss occurs. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a comparison of lamp control when a win occurs and when a miss occurs. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the swinging pattern of the pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the re-selection presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the re-selection presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the re-selection presentation. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining reference to a luminance data table. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining reference to a luminance data table. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining reference to a luminance data table. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining reference to a luminance data table. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table based on timer management of a child table; FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. A front view of a pachinko game machine at characteristic portion 120IW. An explanatory diagram showing an example configuration of a special variable winning ball device in characteristic section 120IW. 13 is a diagram showing the configuration of various control boards and the like in characteristic portion 120IW. FIG. An explanatory diagram showing examples of a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a time-saving miss determination table. This is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table and a small hit type determination table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a time-saving type determination table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern determination table. This is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of small hit game. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table in feature portion 120IW. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command. A flowchart showing an example of a game control main processing in the characteristic section 120IW. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special pattern process in the feature portion 120IW. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of special symbols. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of special symbols. 13 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing special pattern change processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stopping process. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stopping process. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stopping process. This is a flowchart showing the processing before the small win is released. This is a flowchart showing the processing during small win release. This is a flowchart showing the processing after a small hit is closed. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing. FIG. 11 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transitions in characteristic portion 120IW. 13 is a flowchart showing a specific example of a command analysis process. 13 is a flowchart showing a specific example of a command analysis process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process. An explanatory diagram of a rescue setting suggestion effect determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display performance process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display performance process. A flowchart showing the special chart winning waiting process. A flowchart showing the special chart winning waiting process. This is an explanatory diagram of the table for determining the setting suggestion performance when a jackpot occurs. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of presentation patterns when transitioning to rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of presentation patterns when transitioning to rescue time reduction. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stopping process in the modified example 1. A flowchart showing the processing after a small hit is closed in variant example 2. A flowchart showing the processing after a small hit is closed in variant example 3. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing in variant example 4. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of special symbols in modified example 5. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stopping process in modified example 5. 23 is a flowchart showing normal processing of special symbols in modified example 6. A timing chart showing the timing of the pre-reading preview performance restriction period in variant example 7. 13 is a timing chart showing the timing of control of various time-saving states in variant example 8. An explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table and a small hit type determination table. This is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of small hit game. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table in feature section 090IW. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table in feature section 090IW. This is a flowchart showing the processing after a small hit is closed. A flowchart showing the special chart winning waiting process. A flowchart showing the special chart winning waiting process. This is an explanatory diagram to explain a specific example of the presentation mode when a small hit occurs. This is an explanatory diagram to explain a specific example of the presentation mode when a small hit occurs. An explanatory diagram for explaining modified examples of the opening pattern of small hit games. This is an explanatory diagram to explain a specific example of the presentation mode when a small hit occurs. This is an explanatory diagram to explain a specific example of the presentation mode when a small hit occurs. An explanatory diagram for explaining modified examples of the opening pattern of small hit games. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table in feature section 113IW. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table in feature section 113IW. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a process related to output of each test signal in a test terminal process; 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a process related to output of each test signal in a test terminal process; 13 is a flowchart showing a customer waiting demo performance control process. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a caption display execution lottery table and a caption display mode determination lottery table. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a pre-reading notice setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display performance process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display performance process. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of the presentation pattern leading up to the transition to rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of the presentation pattern leading up to the transition to rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of the presentation pattern leading up to the transition to rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of the presentation pattern leading up to the transition to rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of the presentation pattern leading up to the transition to rescue time reduction. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing types of time-saving options. An explanatory diagram showing the changing patterns of special patterns and decorative patterns. An explanatory diagram showing the changing patterns of special patterns and decorative patterns. An explanatory diagram showing the changing patterns of special patterns and decorative patterns. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the first special symbol. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the first special symbol. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the first special symbol. 13 is a flowchart showing a first variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing the first special pattern change processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a first special pattern stopping process. 13 is a flowchart showing a first special pattern stopping process. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the second special pattern. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the second special pattern. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the second special pattern. 13 is a flowchart showing a second variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a second special pattern change process. 13 is a flowchart showing a second special pattern stopping process. 13 is a flowchart showing a second special pattern stopping process. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the game state transitions. 10 is a time chart for explaining an example of control of a gaming state. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation form of a time-saving entry presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation form of the time-saving entry presentation in variant example 1-3. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the game state transitions in the second embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal processing of the first special pattern in variant example 2. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal processing of the first special pattern in variant example 2. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal processing of the first special pattern in variant example 2. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal processing of the first special pattern in variant example 2. 13 is a timing chart showing the timing of executing each effect in variant example 2. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode of a provocative reach in variant example 2. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode for notifying the completion of rescue time reduction in variant example 2. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of control of a gaming state in Modification Example 2.

<Composition of pachinko machines, etc.>
Fig. 1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment. Fig. 1 shows the layout of the main components of a pachinko game machine 1, which is an example of a game machine. The pachinko game machine 1, which is an example of a game machine, is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the game is played by displaying special symbols in a variable manner. The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying multiple types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described later, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described later, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. The variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variation.

In addition, two types of special symbols are provided as special symbols that are variably displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, one special symbol is also called the "first special symbol" or "first special symbol," and the other special symbol is also called the "second special symbol" or "second special symbol." In addition, a special symbol game using the first special symbol is also called the "first special symbol game," and a special symbol game using the second special symbol is also called the "second special symbol game."

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

On the game board 2 on the left side of the image display device 5, a character called Yume Yume-chan who appears in the performance executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 is depicted. Yume Yume-chan is the main character who appears in the content used by the pachinko gaming machine 1. Also, on the game board 2 on the lower right of the image display device 5, a character called Jam-chan who appears in the performance executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 is depicted. Jam-chan is a character who appears in the content used by the pachinko gaming machine 1.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole (electric chute) that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 6). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, equipped with an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations are provided at the lower left of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), general winning openings 10 are provided that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7A having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7A has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 6), and the large winning opening door forms a large winning opening (hereinafter referred to as a regular large winning opening) as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7A has a large prize opening door in the space between the game board 2 located at the back of the pachinko game machine 1 and the glass door frame 3a (see FIG. 2) located at the front side (player side) of the pachinko game machine 1, and this large prize opening door slides open and closes horizontally between the back and front sides of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the path for the game ball to the normal large prize opening. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, the large prize opening door slides to the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the normal large prize opening, and the game ball cannot enter (pass) through the normal large prize opening. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the on state, the large prize opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the normal large prize opening, and the game ball can easily enter the normal large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the regular large prize opening, it is detected by the count switch 23 as it passes through an area provided inside the regular large prize opening. When the game ball is detected by the count switch 23 (see FIG. 6), a number of game balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls per detection) are paid out to the player as prize balls. When a game ball enters the regular large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10. When the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches an upper limit (for example, 10 balls), one round ends and the regular large prize opening is controlled to a closed state.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a V-variable winning ball device 7B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 7A. The V-variable winning ball device 7B has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 83 (see FIG. 6), and forms a large winning opening (hereinafter referred to as a V-large winning opening) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door.

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7B has a large winning port door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and this large winning port door slides open and closes horizontally between the back and front of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the path for the game ball to the V large winning port. Specifically, when the solenoid 83 is in the off state, the large winning port door slides to the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the V large winning port, preventing the game ball from entering (passing through) the V large winning port. On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 is in the on state, the large winning port door slides to the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the V large winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the V large winning port.

The game ball that enters the V large prize opening is detected by the V prize opening switch 24 (see FIG. 6) as it passes through a specific area (also called the V prize opening area) provided inside the V large prize opening. When the game ball is detected by the V prize opening switch 24, the game state is controlled to a high probability state. In other words, in this embodiment, a V prize occurs on the condition that the game ball enters the V large prize opening during a round of the high probability game state, and the game state is controlled to a high probability state. The normal high probability prize opening and the V large prize opening are collectively referred to as high probability prize openings. The high probability prize opening is also referred to as an attacca.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

In the pachinko game machine 1, normal symbols are variably displayed as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. Such variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the very bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3 to play and output sound effects, etc.

A movable body 32 that moves according to the presentation is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1). The movable body 32 is configured with the character string "POWERFUL II". "POWERFUL II" may be the model name of the pachinko game machine 1, or may be a name representing the content used in the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, the title of an anime or the name of a singer). The characters attached to the movable body 32 may also represent the name of a character that appears in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, "Yume Yume" representing the main character Yume Yume-chan). In this embodiment, the model name of the pachinko game machine 1 (Powerful II) is shown on the movable body 32.

In this embodiment, the movable body 32 is movable between a position above the image display device 5 and a position where it covers (overlaps) the front of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 1. Specifically, the movable body 32 stops at a position where it covers (overlaps) the front of the image display device 5 by causing the letters "POWER II" to fall diagonally (so that the "P" falls downward and the "II" falls upward). The movable body 32 is also referred to as a role-playing object.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or game balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area as a control stick that the player can hold and tilt (in the forward, backward, left and right directions, or by pulling it towards the player). Inside the main body of the stick controller 31A, a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 6) is provided that detects the tilting of the control stick. The stick controller 31A also has a built-in vibrator motor (not shown) for vibrating the stick controller 31A. The stick controller 31A is also called a "trigger" because it can be pulled towards the player.

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined command operation by pressing it. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 6).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a special symbol LED board 9020 at the lower left of the game board 2. The special symbol LED board 9020 is an LED board that is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 and notifies the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number by turning on/blinking/turning off the LEDs. In the special symbol LED board 9020, the type of the special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the type of the special symbol (second special symbol) in the second special symbol game are represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/turning off by multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21, for example, as shown in FIG. 4(a) described later, in the special symbol LED board 9020, the type of the first special symbol is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/turning off by multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 2 variable display unit 22, and the type of the second special symbol is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/turning off by multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 2 variable display unit 22. In this embodiment, the term "lighting mode" is used as a concept that includes lighting, blinking, and extinguishing for various lamps, such as the frame lamp described below.

The pachinko game machine 1 further includes a fourth symbol unit 9050 at the bottom left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 9050 is an LED board that is controlled by the performance control CPU 120 and notifies the change in the special symbol, the number of reserved memories, the right-hit display, and the like by turning on/off/blinking the LEDs. In the fourth symbol unit 9050, the type of the special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the type of the special symbol (second special symbol) in the second special symbol game are represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 53, for example, as shown in FIG. 4(b) described later, in the fourth symbol unit 9050, the type of the first special symbol is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 2 variable display unit 54, and the type of the second special symbol is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 2 variable display unit 54.

The pachinko game machine 1 has a plurality of lamps (also called game effect lamps) on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3. Specifically, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a role lamp 9A provided on the movable body 32, a board left lamp 9B provided on the left side of the game board 2, an attacca lamp 9E provided near the special variable winning ball device 7B, a V attacca lamp 9F provided near the special variable winning ball device 7A, a V lamp 9G that notifies the player that a round of a big win game state in which a V big winning hole is open and a V winning can occur, or that a V winning has occurred, an electric chute lamp 9H provided near the variable winning ball device 6B, a stick controller lamp 9J provided on the stick controller 31A, a push button lamp 9K provided on the push button 31B, a frame left lamp 9L provided on the left side of the game machine frame 3, and a frame right lamp 9R provided on the right side of the game machine frame 3. The V lamp may be for notifying the player that a big win has occurred.

The reel lamp 9A is composed of multiple lamps, namely reel lamps 9A1 to 9A4. Specifically, a component labeled "POWER II" and included in the movable body 32 is divided into four parts, with reel lamp 9A1 located behind the "P" and "O" parts, reel lamp 9A2 located behind the "W" and "E" parts, reel lamp 9A3 located behind the "R" and "F" parts, and reel lamp 9A4 located behind the "U" and "L" parts. As a result, when reel lamps 9A1 to 9A4 light up (emit light) behind the component labeled "POWER II", "POWER II" lights up (emits light).

The left board lamp 9B is made up of multiple lamps, such as left board lamps 9B1 to 9B5. A main character (for example, "Yume Yume", which refers to the main character Yume Yume-chan) in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1 is depicted on the left side of the game board 2, and the left board lamps 9B1 to 9B5 are each positioned behind the part of the game board 2 where the main character is depicted. As a result, when the left board lamps 9B1 to 9B5 light up (emit light) behind the part of the game board 2 where the main character is depicted, the part of the game board 2 where the main character is depicted lights up (emits light).

The attacca lamp 9E is located on the back side of the game board 2 near the special variable winning ball device 7B. As a result, when the attacca lamp 9E lights up (emits light) on the back side of the game board 2, it lights up (emits light) the area near the special variable winning ball device 7B. In addition, the V attacca lamp 9F is located on the back side of the game board 2 near the special variable winning ball device 7A. As a result, when the V attacca lamp 9F lights up (emits light) on the back side of the game board 2, it lights up (emits light) the area near the special variable winning ball device 7A.

The V lamp 9G is located behind the part of the game board 2 that is marked with a "V". As a result, when the V lamp 9G lights up (emits light) behind the part of the game board 2 that is marked with a "V", the part of the game board 2 that is marked with a "V" lights up (emits light). The electric chute lamp 9H is located near the variable winning ball device 6B, and when it lights up (emits light), it lights up (emits light) the area near the special variable winning ball device 7B.

The stick controller lamp 9J is provided on the stick controller 31A, and when lit (emits light), it lights up (emits light) the stick controller 31A. The push button lamp 9K is provided on the push button 31B, and when lit (emits light), it lights up (emits light) the push button 31B.

The left frame lamp 9L is composed of multiple lamps 9L1 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 3) provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and when each lamp is turned on (lights up), the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 is turned on (lights up). The right frame lamp 9R is composed of multiple lamps 9R2 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 3) provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3, and when each lamp is turned on (lights up), the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 is turned on (lights up). The left frame lamp 9L and the right frame lamp 9R are collectively referred to as frame lamps. The role lamp 9A, the left board lamp 9B, the attacca lamp 9E, the V attacca lamp 9F, the V lamp 9G, the electric chute lamp 9H, the stick controller lamp 9J, the push button lamp 9K, the left frame lamp 9L, and the right frame lamp 9R are collectively referred to as game effect lamps 9.

Figure 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment. The main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 (see Figure 6).

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 (see FIG. 6) is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the gaming board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacka) to the total number of winning balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacka) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

Figure 3 is a diagram for explaining the frame lamps. The frame left lamp 9L has a group of 12 lamps, frame left lamps 9L1 to 9L12, arranged counterclockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 9L lights up or blinks each of the multiple lamps (12 lamps in this example), causing the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 to glow. Meanwhile, the frame right lamp 9R has a group of 11 lamps, frame left lamps 9R2 to 9L12, arranged clockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 9R lights up or blinks each of the multiple lamps (11 lamps in this example), causing the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 to glow.

Figure 4 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol LED board 9020 and the fourth symbol unit 9050. As shown in Figure 4 (a), the special symbol LED board 9020 includes a special symbol 1 variable display section 9021 showing the variable display of the first special symbol, a special symbol 2 variable display section 9022 showing the variable display of the second special symbol, a special symbol 1 memory display section 9023 showing the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special symbol game, a special symbol 2 memory display section 9024 showing the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special symbol game, a regular symbol memory display section 9025 showing the regular symbol reserved memory number, a regular symbol display section 9026 showing the variable display of the regular symbol, a right-hit display section 9030 encouraging the player to hit the right, a special symbol display section 9028 showing the presence or absence of a special symbol state, a time-saving display section 9029 showing the presence or absence of a time-saving state, and a round display section 9027 showing the number of rounds of the jackpot. Each display unit can inform the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special or normal symbols, the results, the current game status, the number of reserved symbols, etc., by lighting or blinking with a lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being performed, and the stopping symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means. The special symbol 2 variable display unit 22 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being performed, and the stopping symbol of the second special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means.

Furthermore, the special chart LED board 9020 can prompt the player to hit to the right by lighting/blinking/turning off the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 9030. In this embodiment, when the player is prompted to hit to the right, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 9030 lights up (emits light), and when the player is not prompted to hit to the right, that is, when the player is prompted to hit to the left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 9030 turns off. After the pattern is determined, the CPU 103 transmits a right hit display lighting designation command to the performance control CPU 120 and turns on the right hit display unit 9030, and after the pattern is determined by the final variation in the high base state before returning to the normal state, it transmits a right hit display turning off designation command to the performance control CPU 120 and turns off the right hit display unit 9030. In addition, if the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 may turn on the right-hit display unit 9030 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot end designation command to the performance control CPU 120 and turns off the right-hit display unit 9030.

Here, right-hand hit refers to operating the ball-hitting handle 30 to launch the game ball toward the second flow-down path, which is one of the first and second flow-down paths through which the game medium can flow down in the game area provided on the game board 2. The first flow-down path is, for example, a path that passes through the left area of the game area, and beyond which there is a first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, but there is no second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. The second flow-down path is, for example, a path that passes through the right area of the game area, and beyond which there are a second start winning hole and a large winning hole (normal large winning hole, V large winning hole) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. When the player launches the game ball toward the first flow-down path, the game ball flows toward the first start winning hole through the first flow-down path. When a player shoots a game ball toward the second flow path, the game ball passes through the second flow path and flows toward the second start winning hole or the big winning hole (normal big winning hole, V big winning hole).

In this embodiment, in the jackpot game after the occurrence of a jackpot, and in the game state after the jackpot game (time-saving state or probability variable state), the player hits the right to make the game ball enter the second start winning hole or the large winning hole provided on the right side of the game area, and during that time, the right-hit display unit 30 urges the player to hit the right. By hitting the right while the display urging the player to hit the right is being displayed, the player can make the game ball enter the second start winning hole and a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and can obtain the right to play the second special game, or can make the game ball enter the normal large winning hole and a predetermined number (for example, ten) of prize balls are paid out. Furthermore, as will be described in detail later, during the round of the probability variable jackpot, the V large winning hole is opened, but the player can also hit the right while the display urging the player to hit the right is being displayed to make the game ball enter the V large winning hole and obtain the right to be controlled in the probability variable state. Therefore, by hitting to the right while a display is being displayed encouraging the player to hit to the right, the player may gain an overall advantage. Note that, unlike hitting to the right, operating the ball-hitting handle 30 to launch the game ball toward the first flow path (hitting style) is also called hitting to the left.

As shown in FIG. 4(b), the fourth symbol unit 9050 includes a special symbol 1 memory display section 9051 that indicates the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special symbol game, a special symbol 2 memory display section 9052 that indicates the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special symbol game, a special symbol 1 variable display section 9053 that indicates the status or display result of the variable display of the first special symbol, a special symbol 2 variable display section 9054 that indicates the status or display result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and a right hit display section 55 that encourages the player to hit to the right. Each display section can inform the player of the presence or absence of a variable display of a special symbol, the reserved number, and a right hit instruction by lighting/blinking/turning off the light using lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9053 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being performed, and the stopping symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means. The special symbol 2 variable display unit 9054 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being performed, and the stopping symbol of the second special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means.

In the following, the display of the change in the stopped pattern of the first special pattern by lighting means such as LEDs in the special pattern 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special pattern 1 variable display unit 9053 is also referred to as the change display (variable display) of the first special pattern. Also, the display of the change in the stopped pattern of the second special pattern by lighting means such as LEDs in the special pattern 2 variable display unit 9022 and the special pattern 2 variable display unit 9054 is also referred to as the change display (variable display) of the second special pattern.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the player is prompted to hit right, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 55 of the fourth symbol unit 9050 lights up (emits light), and when the player is not prompted to hit right, that is, when the player is prompted to hit left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 9055 turns off. The performance control CPU 120 turns on the right hit display unit 9055 based on receiving a right hit display lighting command from the CPU 103 after the symbol is determined, and turns off the right hit display unit 9055 based on receiving a right hit display turning off command from the CPU 103 after the symbol is determined by the final variation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot that is not controlled to the high base after the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 may turn on the right hit display unit 9055 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the right-hit display unit 55 based on receiving a jackpot end command from the CPU 103.

Figure 4(c) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the fourth symbol unit and the game effect lamp. In the pachinko game machine 1, when the performance control CPU 90120 receives a front fluctuation pattern command and a rear fluctuation pattern command, or a symbol determination command, among the performance control commands, the fourth symbol unit 9050 and the game effect lamp are made to differ in whether or not they switch their lighting state, such as on/blinking/off. The front fluctuation pattern command and the rear fluctuation pattern command are commands output from the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, which will be described later, to the performance control CPU 120 of the performance control board 12, and the front fluctuation pattern command and the rear fluctuation pattern command are output from the CPU 103 to the performance control CPU 120 as a set. Hereinafter, the front fluctuation pattern command and the rear fluctuation pattern command are collectively referred to as fluctuation pattern commands.

Specifically, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a variation pattern command from the CPU 103, it changes the lighting state of the LEDs (the special symbol 1 variable display 9053 and the special symbol 2 variable display 9054) in the fourth symbol unit 9050. For example, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol game from the CPU 103, it switches the lighting state of the special symbol 1 variable display 9053 from off, which indicates the first special symbol has stopped, to blinking, which indicates the first special symbol is varying, based on the received variation pattern command. Also, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a variation pattern command corresponding to the second special symbol game from the CPU 103, it switches the lighting state of the special symbol 2 variable display 9054 from off, which indicates the second special symbol has stopped, to blinking, which indicates the second special symbol is varying, based on the received variation pattern command.

On the other hand, even if the performance control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command from the CPU 103, it does not change the lighting state of the LEDs (frame lamps, etc.) in the game effect lamp, but maintains the lighting state before receiving the variation pattern command.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a pattern determination command from the CPU 103, it changes the lighting state of the LEDs (the special pattern 1 variable display 9053 and the special pattern 2 variable display 9054) in the fourth pattern unit 9050. For example, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a pattern determination command from the CPU 103 specifying that the pattern fluctuation is to end in the first special pattern game, it switches the lighting state of the special pattern 1 variable display 9053 from blinking, which indicates the fluctuation of the first special pattern, to off, which indicates the stop of the first special pattern, based on the received pattern determination command. In addition, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a pattern determination command from the CPU 103 specifying that the pattern fluctuation is to end in the second special pattern game, it switches the lighting state of the special pattern 2 variable display 9054 from blinking, which indicates the fluctuation of the second special pattern, to off, which indicates the stop of the second special pattern, based on the received pattern determination command.

On the other hand, even if the performance control CPU 120 receives a pattern determination command from the CPU 103, it does not change the lighting state of the LEDs (frame lamps, etc.) in the game effect lamp, but maintains the lighting state before the pattern determination command was received.

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the state of the lamp (LED) in the fourth symbol unit 9050 changes in response to receiving a variation pattern command or a symbol determination command. In contrast, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the state of the lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is maintained before and after receiving the command, regardless of whether the variation pattern command or the symbol determination command has been received. Note that the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the state of the game effect lamp 9 in response to receiving a variation pattern command. For example, when the game state changes from the normal state to the time-saving state after a jackpot, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the state of the game effect lamp 9 from the lighting state in the normal state to the lighting state in the time-saving state in response to receiving a variation pattern command that starts the time-saving state.

Figure 5 is a diagram for explaining the display mode of the screen in the image display device 5. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 is used to display images such as variable display of decorative symbols and reach effects. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game, variable display of decorative symbols (such as symbols showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "center", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The special symbol games and variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

At the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, there is provided a first pending memory display area 5D capable of displaying the first pending memory number by the number of circular pending displays, a second pending memory display area 5U capable of displaying the second pending memory number by the number of circular pending displays, and an active display area 5A for displaying the pending display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed as the active display.

A fourth pattern 5J is displayed at the top right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, indicating that the special pattern is being displayed variably. Below the fourth pattern 5J, numbers are displayed indicating the first and second reserved memory numbers. The numbers indicating the reserved numbers indicate the first and second reserved memory numbers on the left and right, respectively. Below the display indicating the reserved numbers, small patterns 5M, which are smaller than each decorative pattern, are displayed. The small patterns correspond to the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R, and are arranged horizontally. The small patterns 5M are also the patterns that are not hidden during the variable display and are always displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 5, the decorative pattern is arranged in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 5M is arranged at the right end of the screen of the image display device 5 in a size smaller than the decorative pattern. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 5M is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

As shown in FIG. 5(a), the screen of the image display device 5 is rectangular or nearly rectangular, but the game board 2 is fixed so as to cover the edges of the screen of the image display device 5. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 5(b), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front, part of the screen of the image display device 5 (especially the edges) cannot be seen or is difficult to see because of the game board 2.

<Board configuration>
6 is a diagram for explaining various boards mounted on the pachinko game machine 1. As shown in FIG. 6, the pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a relay board 15, and the like. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 connected to a power switch 91 is also mounted. The various control boards are a concept that includes not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, power from an AC power source, such as an external power source of 100V AC, such as a commercial power source, can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12, via the power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special games (including reserved game management), execution of regular games (including reserved game management), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the special LED board 9020, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and a switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23, V winning switch 24) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage is below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to solenoid 81, solenoid 82, or solenoid 83.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display device 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image, and supplies brightness data (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the LED driver in order to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The performance control CPU 120 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to the drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

As will be described in more detail later, each game effect lamp has a game effect lamp LED board equipped with an LED (lamp) and an LED driver that supplies current to the LED. The LED driver adjusts the current to each LED (lamp) included in the game effect lamp 9 based on brightness data from the performance control CPU 120, thereby turning the game effect lamp 9 on/blinking/extinct. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 controls the turning on/blinking/extinction of the game effect lamp 9.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, and luminance data signals).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12 and the sound control board 13, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

The fourth pattern unit 9050 is connected to the performance control board 12, and each display section can be lit (blinked) under the control of the performance control CPU 120.

<Outline of game progress>
In the pachinko game machine 1 having the above-mentioned configuration, the game proceeds as follows. The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period when the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is reserved up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special game is started by the special game 1 variable display unit 21 of the special game LED board 9020.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special game is started by the special game 2 variable display unit 22 of the special game LED board 9020.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (if a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, a "jackpot" occurs when the combination of the lighting modes of the multiple LEDs provided on the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21 and the special symbol 2 variable display unit 22 of the special symbol LED board 9020 corresponds to a specific special symbol (jackpot symbol, the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot described below). The lighting mode corresponding to a specific special symbol (jackpot symbol) in the combination of the lighting modes of the multiple LEDs provided on the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21 and the special symbol 2 variable display unit 22 of the special symbol LED board 9020 is also referred to as a "specific display result." In addition, a "loss" occurs when the combination of the lighting modes of the multiple LEDs provided on the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21 and the special symbol 2 variable display unit 22 of the special symbol LED board 9020 corresponds to a special symbol (loss symbol) different from the jackpot symbol. In addition, the lighting state of the combination of the lighting states of the multiple LEDs provided in the special chart 1 variable display section 21 and the special chart 2 variable display section 22 of the special chart LED board 9020 that corresponds to a special pattern (losing pattern) that is different from the jackpot pattern is also referred to as the "losing display result."

After the display result in the special game becomes "jackpot", the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player. It may also be controlled to a small jackpot game state as an advantageous state. A small jackpot is a win in which the number of times the large prize opening is allowed to open is smaller than that of a jackpot. It should be noted that when the small jackpot game state ends, the game state does not change. In other words, there is no transition from a special jackpot state to a normal state or from a normal state to a special jackpot state before or after the small jackpot game state. Also, like the jackpot types, a small jackpot type may be set for a "small jackpot".

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. This predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined upper limit number of times (10 times or 7 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a set type of jackpot. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. A high probability state and a low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special probability state after the big win game state.

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of display, the effects may be performed using audio output from the speakers 8L, 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, or any other effect device that includes some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, a reach performance is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach state being reached during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko game machine 1, a plurality of types of reach performances are executed in which the rate at which the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) becomes a "jackpot" (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation rate) differs according to the performance state. Reach performances include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach that has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach. In addition, the super reach includes the first half of the super reach that ends with the first half of the super reach, the second half of the super reach that develops from the first half of the super reach, and the final reach that develops from the first half of the super reach. In this embodiment, the jackpot reliability is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the first half of the super reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived in the normal reach. In addition, the jackpot reliability is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the second half of the super reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived in the first half of the super reach. Furthermore, the reliability of a jackpot is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the final reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived in the second half of the super reach. Note that, below, "Super Reach" is also referred to as "SP Reach," "the first half of the Super Reach" as "SP first half (SP first half reach)," "the second half of the Super Reach" as "SP second half (SP second half reach)," and "the final reach" as "SP final (SP final reach)."

When the display result of the special game is a combination of lighting patterns corresponding to a "jackpot" (the specific display result described above), a confirmed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, the odd numbered decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and the even numbered decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with a non-probability jackpot symbol, a promotion effect that finally results in a "probability jackpot" may be executed. As a promotion effect, for example, a re-lottery effect may be executed to incite whether or not to promote to a probability jackpot symbol after a non-probability jackpot symbol (normal symbol) is temporarily stopped as a jackpot display result. Also, a round promotion effect may be executed during the jackpot game state to promote from a non-probability jackpot to a probability jackpot.

When the display result of the special game is a combination of lighting patterns corresponding to a "miss" (the miss display result described above), the state of the variable display of the decorative patterns does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss", after the state of the variable display of the decorative patterns becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, other effects, such as a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability, are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect may be executed that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

Even during a jackpot game state, a jackpot performance is executed to notify the player of the jackpot game state. The jackpot performance may include a performance to notify the player of the number of rounds, or an upgrade performance to show that the value of the jackpot game state is increasing.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

<Various tables related to jackpots>
Various tables relating to big wins will be described with reference to Figures 7 and 8.

[Winning Type]
7 is a diagram for explaining the types of winning. As shown in FIG. 7, the winning type table shows the probability of winning after the end of the jackpot game state, the base after the end of the jackpot game state, and the number of openings (number of rounds) in the jackpot for each type (kind) of winning in the jackpot.

Specifically, there are three types of jackpots: normal jackpot 1 and 2, and special jackpot 1 to 9. In the following, each round may be indicated with the letter "R." For example, the first round is also called the 1st round, and the second round is also called the 2nd round.

Normal jackpot 1 is a jackpot that is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of a 3-round jackpot game state. In normal jackpot 1, this low probability high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times).

Normal jackpot 2 is a jackpot that is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot game state of three rounds. In normal jackpot 2, this low probability high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Variable jackpots 1 to 5 are jackpots that are controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of three rounds of jackpot play. In variable jackpot 1, this high probability, high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability of a jackpot 6 is a jackpot that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 5-round jackpot game state. In the probability of a jackpot 6, this high probability high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability of a jackpot 7 is a jackpot that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot game state of 7 rounds. In the probability of a jackpot 7, this high probability high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed for a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability of a jackpot being 8 or 9 is a jackpot that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 10-round jackpot game state. In the probability of a jackpot being 8 or 9, this high probability high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

[Random numbers]
Fig. 8 is a diagram for explaining each random number. As shown in Fig. 8, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, Random 1 is a random counter for determining whether or not a jackpot has been reached. Random 1 is, for example, incremented by one from 1 until it reaches its upper limit of 65536, after which it is incremented again from 1. Random 2 is a random counter (for determining the type of jackpot) that determines the type of jackpot.

Random 3 and Random 4 are random counters (for determining the later fluctuation pattern) that determine the fluctuation pattern (hereafter referred to as the later fluctuation pattern) (fluctuation time) that corresponds to the later fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern. Later fluctuation refers to the latter part of the fluctuation of the special pattern. Random 3 is a random counter that determines the later fluctuation pattern that corresponds to a miss, and for example, is updated by 1, and is incremented from 1 to its upper limit of 65519, and then is incremented again from 1. Random 4 is a random counter that determines the later fluctuation pattern that corresponds to a win, and for example, is incremented by 1, and is incremented from 1 to its upper limit of 239, and then is incremented again from 1.

Random 5 is a random counter (for determining a previous fluctuation pattern) that determines the fluctuation pattern (hereafter referred to as a previous fluctuation pattern) (fluctuation time) that corresponds to the previous fluctuation among the fluctuation patterns. A previous fluctuation refers to the fluctuation in the first half of the special pattern fluctuation. For example, Random 5 is incremented by one from 1 up to its upper limit of 251, and then incremented again from 1. Random 6 is a random counter (for determining a normal pattern hit) that determines whether or not a hit based on a normal pattern will occur. For example, Random 6 is incremented by one from 1 up to its upper limit of 201, and then incremented again from 1.

In this embodiment, whether or not the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player is determined based on the value of a random number for jackpot determination (Random 1). Then, which of the multiple types of jackpots will be the jackpot is determined based on the value of a random number for jackpot type determination (Random 2). At this time, the jackpot pattern can also be determined based on the value of Random 2.

First, the random number for determining the subsequent fluctuation pattern (Random 3, 4) is used to determine the subsequent fluctuation pattern depending on whether the result is a hit or a miss, and then the random number for determining the previous fluctuation pattern (Random 5) is used to determine the previous fluctuation pattern. In this way, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

[Big hit determination table, big hit type determination table]
9 is a diagram for explaining the big win determination table and the big win type determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

Figure 9 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value that is compared with Random 1 is set. There are two types of jackpot determination tables: a normal (non-high probability) jackpot determination table used in the normal state (a game state that is not in the high probability state, i.e., a non-high probability state), and a high probability jackpot determination table used in the high probability state.

The normal jackpot determination table has jackpot determination values set for the number of determination values listed in the upper column of FIG. 9(a), and the special jackpot determination table has jackpot determination values set for the number of determination values listed in the lower column of FIG. 9(a). The special jackpot determination table has a greater number of jackpot determination values than the normal jackpot determination table, as it is a combination of the jackpot determination values common to the normal jackpot determination table and the jackpot determination values specific to the special jackpot state. This means that in the special jackpot state, a jackpot determination is made with a higher probability than in the normal state.

At a predetermined time, the CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 and compares the extracted value with the value of the random number (Random 1) for determining a jackpot. If the random number value for determining a jackpot matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 9(a), it decides to determine a jackpot (normal jackpot or special jackpot) for the special symbol. Note that FIG. 9(a) shows the probability (percentage) of a jackpot or the probability (percentage) of a miss.

Figures 9(b) and (c) are explanatory diagrams showing jackpot type determination tables. Figure 9(b) is a first special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot based on the first special pattern. Figure 9(c) is a second special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot based on the second special pattern.

The first special chart jackpot type determination table in FIG. 9(b) is a numerical value to be compared with the Random 2 value for jackpot type determination, and the determination values are set for the number of determination values corresponding to each of normal jackpots 1 and 2 and special jackpots 1 to 4. For example, as shown in FIG. 9(b), for the first special chart, normal jackpot 1 is assigned 25 Random 2 values out of 100, normal jackpot 2 is assigned 25 Random 2 values out of 100, special jackpot 1 is assigned 5 Random 2 values out of 100, special jackpot 2 is assigned 37 Random 2 values out of 100, special jackpot 3 is assigned 4 Random 2 values out of 100, and special jackpot 4 is assigned 4 Random 2 values out of 100.

In the second special symbol jackpot type judgment table in FIG. 9(c), judgment values are set as many as the judgment value numbers corresponding to each of the special jackpots 5 to 9, which are numerical values to be compared with the value of Random 2. For example, as shown in FIG. 9(c), for the second special symbol, special jackpot 5 is assigned 10 of 100 Random 2 values, special jackpot 6 is assigned 5 of 100 Random 2 values, special jackpot 7 is assigned 5 of 100 Random 2 values, special jackpot 8 is assigned 70 of 100 Random 2 values, and special jackpot 9 is assigned 10 of 100 Random 2 values.

Using these various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type that corresponds to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 2 matches, and determines the jackpot pattern with which the value of Random 2 matches. This simultaneously determines the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern that corresponds to the jackpot type.

<Performance control command>
FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of a presentation control command. The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, which is the main control board, transmits various presentation control commands to the presentation control CPU 120 according to the game control state. The presentation control command is, for example, a two-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). Note that the command form shown in FIG. 10 is an example, and other command forms may be used. Note that, in the following, "(H)" indicates hexadecimal, but may be omitted in this specification.

Command 80XX (H) is a variation pattern command that specifies the variation pattern (previous variation pattern) corresponding to the previous variation among the variation patterns of the decorative pattern that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern (XX corresponds to the number of the previous variation pattern). The previous variation on the sub side refers to the variation of the first half of the decorative pattern that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern. When a unique number is assigned to each of the multiple types of previous variation patterns, there is a previous variation pattern command that corresponds to each of the previous variation patterns identified by that number.

Command 84XX (H) is a variation pattern command that specifies the variation pattern (post-variation pattern) corresponding to the post-variation among the variation patterns of the decorative pattern that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern (XX corresponds to the number of the post-variation pattern). The post-variation on the sub side refers to the latter half of the variation of the decorative pattern that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern. When a unique number is assigned to each of the multiple types of post-variation patterns, there is a post-variation pattern command that corresponds to each of the post-variation patterns identified by that number.

The front variation pattern command and the rear variation pattern command are sent as a set from the CPU 103 to the performance control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 cannot identify the variation pattern by receiving only one of the front variation pattern command and the rear variation pattern command, but can identify the variation pattern by receiving both the front variation pattern command and the rear variation pattern command.

Command 8101 (H) is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the first special symbol. Command 8102 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the second special symbol. When the performance control CPU 101 receives command 8101 (H) or command 8102 (H), it controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative pattern.

Command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 designation command (miss designation command) indicating that a miss has been determined. Command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (normal jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that a normal jackpot 1 has been determined. Command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (normal jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that a normal jackpot 2 has been determined. Command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (probability jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that a special jackpot 1 has been determined. Command 8C05 (H) is a display result 5 designation command (probability jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that a special jackpot 2 has been determined. Command 8C06 (H) is a display result 6 designation command (probability jackpot 3 designation command) indicating that a special jackpot 3 has been determined. Command 8C07(H) is a display result 7 designation command (probability change jackpot 4 designation command) indicating that probability change jackpot 4 has been determined. Command 8C08(H) is a display result 8 designation command (probability change jackpot 5 designation command) indicating that probability change jackpot 5 has been determined. Command 8C09(H) is a display result 9 designation command (probability change jackpot 6 designation command) indicating that probability change jackpot 6 has been determined. Command 8C10(H) is a display result 10 designation command (probability change jackpot 7 designation command) indicating that probability change jackpot 7 has been determined. Command 8C11(H) is a display result 11 designation command (probability change jackpot 8 designation command) indicating that probability change jackpot 8 has been determined. Command 8C12(H) is a display result 12 designation command (probability change jackpot 9 designation command) indicating that probability change jackpot 9 has been determined. The miss designation command, normal jackpot 1, 2 designation command, and special jackpot 1-9 designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8C commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first pattern change designation command that indicates the start of variable display of the first special pattern. Command 8D02 (H) is a second pattern change designation command that indicates the start of variable display of the second special pattern. The first pattern change designation command and the second pattern change designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D commands. Command 8F00 (H) is a pattern confirmation designation command that specifies the end of the variation of the first special pattern and/or the second special pattern.

Command 9000 (H) is an initialization command that specifies initialization (specifies that the initial screen at power on is displayed) that is sent when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is a power outage recovery command that specifies power outage recovery (specifies that the power outage recovery screen is displayed) that is sent when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. Command 9500 (H) is a normal state specification command that specifies the background of the normal state. Command 9501 (H) is a time-saving state specification command that specifies the background of the time-saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a special-variable state specification command that specifies the background of the special-variable state. The normal state specification command, time-saving state specification command, and special-variable state specification command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 95 series commands or background specification commands.

Command 9F00 (H) is a customer waiting demo designation command that designates a transition to a customer waiting demonstration display. The performance control CPU 120 determines that there is no currently reserved ball due to the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command. Then, 30 seconds after the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command, the performance control CPU 120 displays a video for demonstration on the image display device 5. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the game effect lamp 9 in a lamp mode for demonstration 30 seconds after the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 for demonstration is more lively (high brightness, more flashing modes, rainbow lighting, etc.) than the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 in the normal state. This allows the appeal of the pachinko game machine 1 to be shown to the player. In the customer waiting demonstration display, the background in the normal state (hereinafter also referred to as the normal background) is displayed, and the decorative patterns are displayed stopped in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R. In addition, during the demonstration display while waiting for customers, the title of the gaming machine 1 (for example, "POWER II") may be displayed, or an introductory image (still image or video) of part of the presentation may be displayed.

Command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that specifies the start of normal jackpot 1. Command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that specifies the start of normal jackpot 2. Command A003 (H) is a special jackpot start 3 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 1. Command A004 (H) is a special jackpot start 4 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 2. Command A005 (H) is a special jackpot start 5 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 3. Command A006 (H) is a special jackpot start 6 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 4. Command A007 (H) is a special jackpot start 7 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 5. Command A008 (H) is a special jackpot start 8 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 6. Command A009 (H) is a special jackpot start 9 command that specifies the start of special jackpot 7. Command A010 (H) is a special jackpot start 10 command that specifies the start of special jackpot 8. Command A011 (H) is a special jackpot start 11 command that specifies the start of special jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot start 1-11 commands, or all of them collectively, are also referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX (H) is a command for specifying when the large prize opening is open, indicating that the large prize opening is open for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX. The command for specifying when the large prize opening is open is also referred to as an A1 series command. A2XX (H) is a command for specifying after the large prize opening is open, indicating that the large prize opening is closed for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX. The command for specifying after the large prize opening is open is also referred to as an A2 series command.

Command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that specifies the end of normal jackpot 1. Command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that specifies the end of normal jackpot 2. Command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 1. Command A304 (H) is a jackpot end 4 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 2. Command A305 (H) is a jackpot end 5 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 3. Command A306 (H) is a jackpot end 6 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 4. Command A307 (H) is a jackpot end 7 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 5. Command A308 (H) is a jackpot end 8 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 6. Command A309 (H) is a jackpot end 9 command that specifies the end of special jackpot 7. Command A310 (H) is a jackpot end 10 command that specifies the end of special jackpot 8. Command A311 (H) is a jackpot end 11 command that specifies the end of special jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot end 1-11 commands, or all of them collectively, are also referred to as A3 series commands.

Command AD00(H) is a high probability jackpot determination device passage designation command that specifies that a V win has occurred. The high probability jackpot determination device passage designation command is a command that is sent when the game ball that has passed through the V large winning port enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 24.

Command B100(H) is a first start winning designation command that specifies that a first start winning has occurred. Command B200(H) is a second start winning designation command that specifies that a second start winning has occurred.

Command C1XX(H) is a first reserved memory number designation command that designates that the first reserved memory number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first reserved memory number designation command is also referred to as a C1 series command. Command C2XX(H) is a second reserved memory designation command that designates that the second reserved memory number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second reserved memory number designation command is also referred to as a C2 series command.

Commands C4XX(H) and C6XX(H) are presentation control commands that indicate the contents of the winning judgment results, such as a jackpot judgment, a jackpot type judgment, and a variation pattern type judgment, when a starting winning is made at the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port. Of these, command C4XX(H) is a design designation command that indicates the winning judgment results, such as whether or not a winning will occur and the type of jackpot.

C7XX(H) is a special prize opening entry designation command that indicates the passage of the game ball through the special prize opening on the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

A command in which MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-hit display off command, which indicates that the right-hit display is turned off. A command in which MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT data is 1 is a right-hit display on command, which indicates that the right-hit display is turned on. In this embodiment, the right-hit display on command is also referred to as an FD command.

At the time of start winning, the game control microcomputer 100 judges whether or not a jackpot will be reached, the type of jackpot, and the range of judgment values for the value of the random number for judging the type of fluctuation pattern. Then, a value specifying a jackpot and a value specifying the type of jackpot are set in the EXT data of the designation command, and controls the transmission of this to the performance control CPU 120. The game control microcomputer 100 also sets a value specifying the range of judgment values as the judgment result of the type of fluctuation pattern in the EXT data of the fluctuation type command, and controls the transmission of this to the performance control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 can recognize whether or not the display result will be a jackpot and the type of jackpot based on the value set in the designation command, and can recognize the type of fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type command.

<Fluctuation pattern>
The contents of the fluctuation patterns and how the fluctuation patterns are determined will be described with reference to Figures 11 to 17.

In this embodiment, multiple types of variation patterns are set by the main game control microcomputer 100. Each variation pattern is managed by a main variation number and is composed of a combination of a front variation pattern that is a variation pattern corresponding to a front variation and a back variation pattern that is a variation pattern corresponding to a back variation, and each combination contains different contents. The front variation pattern corresponds to the front variation pattern command (80XX (H)) described using FIG. 10, and the back variation pattern corresponds to the back variation pattern command (84XX (H)) described using FIG. 10.

[Main side front fluctuation pattern]
11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a previous fluctuation pattern on the main side. Among the multiple types of previous fluctuation patterns each assigned with a previous fluctuation number, previous fluctuation number 1 is a previous fluctuation pattern command (8000 (H)) that specifies a normal fluctuation (for example, a fluctuation of a decorative pattern over 13 seconds). Previous fluctuation number 2 is a previous fluctuation pattern command (8001 (H)) that specifies a shortened fluctuation (for example, a fluctuation of a decorative pattern over 7 seconds). Previous fluctuation number 3 is a previous fluctuation pattern command (8002 (H)) that specifies a super shortened fluctuation (for example, a fluctuation of a decorative pattern over 3 seconds).

Previous change number 4 is a previous change pattern command (8003 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (normal or SP first half) (a reach that ends in a normal reach or SP first half reach after entering a reach state). Previous change number 5 is a previous change pattern command (8004 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (SP second half development) (a reach that develops into an SP second half reach after entering a reach state). Previous change number 6 is a previous change pattern command (8005 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (final reach development) (a reach that develops into a final reach after entering a reach state).

Previous variation number 7 is a previous variation pattern command (8006(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (normal or SP first half) is executed after one pseudo variation. A pseudo variation is a variable display (variable display) in which the variable display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and then resumed from the start of the variable display (variable display) until the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. Such a performance in which pseudo variations are repeated is also called a pseudo consecutive. By executing a pseudo consecutive, a variable display based on one reserved memory can be made to look like multiple variable displays to the player in a pseudo manner. Note that a variable display that is temporarily stopped and then resumed is also called a "re-variable display". Previous variation number 8 is a previous variation pattern command (8007(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (SP second half development) is executed after one pseudo variation. Previous variation number 9 is a previous variation pattern command (8008(H)) that specifies a normal reach (final reach development) after one pseudo variation.

Previous change number 10 is a previous change pattern command (8009(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (normal or first half of SP) is to be executed after two pseudo changes. Previous change number 11 is a previous change pattern command (800A(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (second half of SP development) is to be executed after two pseudo changes. Previous change number 12 is a previous change pattern command (800B(H)) that specifies a normal reach (final reach development) after two pseudo changes.

A change time is specified for each previous change pattern, and an animation (video) is displayed on the image display device 5 for each change time. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it takes about 33.3 msec for one still image (called a frame) that makes up the video. For example, for patterns with previous change numbers 7 to 9, the change time is set to 41,500 msec, and the number of frames is about 1,246. For patterns with previous change numbers 10 to 12, the change time is set to 62,000 msec, and the number of frames is about 1,861.

[Main side rear fluctuation pattern]
FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining an example of a post-fluctuation pattern on the main side. Among the multiple types of post-fluctuation patterns each assigned with a post-fluctuation number, post-fluctuation number 1 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8400(H)) that specifies a 13-second fluctuation. Post-fluctuation number 2 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8401(H)) that specifies a 7-second fluctuation. Post-fluctuation number 3 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8402(H)) that specifies a 3-second fluctuation. Post-fluctuation number 4 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8403(H)) that specifies the execution of a pseudo consecutive fake. A pseudo consecutive fake is a performance that appears to execute a pseudo consecutive, but does not execute the pseudo consecutive after all.

Later change number 5 is a later change pattern command (8404(H)) that specifies a normal reach (miss) (a change in the decorative pattern that becomes a reach state but does not develop into an SP reach and becomes a miss state). Later change number 6 is a later change pattern command (8405(H)) that specifies the first half of the SP (miss) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into an SP reach but becomes a miss state in the first half of the SP reach). Later change number 7 is a later change pattern command (8406(H)) that specifies the second half of the SP (miss) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into the second half of the SP reach but becomes a miss state in the second half of the SP reach). Later change number 8 is a later change pattern command (8407(H)) that specifies a final reach (miss) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into a final reach but becomes a miss state in the final reach).

Later change number 9 is a later change pattern command (8408(H)) that specifies a normal reach (hit) (a change in the decorative pattern that becomes a reach state and then a hit state). Later change number 10 is a later change pattern command (8409(H)) that specifies the first half of the SP (hit) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into an SP reach and then becomes a hit state in the first half of the SP reach). Later change number 11 is a later change pattern command (840A(H)) that specifies the second half of the SP (hit) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into the second half of the SP reach and then becomes a hit state in the second half of the SP reach). Later change number 12 is a later change pattern command (840B(H)) that specifies a final reach (hit) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into a final reach and then becomes a hit state in the final reach).

[Determination of Later Fluctuation Pattern]
The after-variation pattern is determined by using different random counters depending on whether the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot or a miss in the jackpot determination. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the after-variation pattern determination table in the case of a miss. As shown in FIG. 13, when the jackpot is determined to be a miss in the jackpot determination, the after-variation pattern is determined by using the random 3 described in FIG. 8. Furthermore, when the jackpot is determined to be a miss in the jackpot determination, the after-variation pattern is determined by using different judgment value numbers according to the number of reserved memories after consumption, and the after-variation number determined is also different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13(a), when the number of reserved memories after consumption is 0, one of the post-change patterns is determined from post-change numbers 1, 4, and 5 to 8, and a different judgment value number is set for each post-change pattern. Note that the probability of determining one of the post-change numbers 6 to 8 that develop into an SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post-change numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

When there is only one reserved memory after consumption, one of the post-change patterns is determined from post-change numbers 1, 4, and 5-8, and a different judgment value number is set for each post-change pattern. The probability that one of the post-change numbers 6-8 that develop into an SP reach or final reach is determined (selection rate of post-change numbers 6-8) is approximately 1/102.

When the number of reserved memories after consumption is two, one of the post-change patterns is determined from post-change numbers 2, 4, and 5-8, and a different judgment value number is set for each post-change pattern. The probability that one of the post-change numbers 6-8 that develop into an SP reach or final reach is determined (selection rate of post-change numbers 6-8) is approximately 1/102.

When the number of reserved memories after consumption is three, one of the following change patterns is determined from the following change numbers 3, 4, and 5 to 8, and a different judgment value number is set for each following change pattern. The probability that one of the following change numbers 6 to 8 that develops into an SP reach or final reach is determined (selection rate of following change numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

In this way, the subsequent variation pattern is determined using a different judgment value number depending on the number of reserved memories after consumption, and further, the subsequent variation number is determined using a different judgment value number depending on the number of reserved memories after consumption, so the type of variation pattern changes depending on the number of remaining reserved memories, which adds variety to the game and increases the interest of the game.

Figure 14 is a diagram for explaining the post-fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of a jackpot. As shown in Figure 14, if a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, the post-fluctuation pattern is determined using Random 4 described in Figure 8. Furthermore, if a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, the post-fluctuation pattern is determined using different determination value numbers depending on the type of jackpot.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14(a), when a normal jackpot 1 or 2 or a special jackpot 1, 2, or 5 to 8 is determined, a post-change pattern is determined from post-change numbers 9 to 12, and a different judgment value number is set for each post-change pattern. The probability of determining one of post-change numbers 10 to 12, which develops into an SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post-change numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

If either the guaranteed jackpot 3 or 9 is determined, one of the post-change patterns is determined from the post-change numbers 9 to 12, and a different judgment value number is set for each of the post-change patterns. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-change numbers 10 to 12 that develop into the SP reach or final reach (selection rate of the post-change numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

If the probability of winning jackpot 4 is reached, one of the post-change patterns is selected from the post-change numbers 9 to 12, and a different judgment value is set for each of the post-change patterns. The probability of being selected as one of the post-change numbers 10 to 12, which develop into an SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post-change numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

In this way, the subsequent fluctuation pattern is determined using different judgment values depending on the type of jackpot, so the type of fluctuation pattern changes depending on the type of jackpot, which adds variety to the game and makes it more interesting.

Also, as shown in FIG. 13, the probability of being determined to be one of the variable numbers 6 to 8 after developing into the SP Reach or Final Reach is approximately 1/102 when there is a miss, but is higher at approximately 1/1.1 when there is a jackpot, so that if there is a development into the SP Reach or Final Reach, the player can be made to expect a jackpot to occur.

[Determination of previous fluctuation pattern]
15 is a diagram for explaining the previous fluctuation pattern determination table. The previous fluctuation pattern is determined by using the number of random 5 determination values that differ according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that is determined first. Furthermore, the previous fluctuation number that is determined also differs according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that is determined first.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15(a), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 1 is determined, the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 1 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(b), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 2 is determined, the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 2 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(c), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 3 is determined, the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 3 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(d), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 4 is determined, the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 1 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 15(e), if the post-change pattern of post-change number 5 or 9 is determined, the post-change pattern of post-change number 4 or 7 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(f), if the post-change pattern of post-change number 6 or 10 is determined, the post-change pattern of post-change number 4, 7, or 10 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(g), if the post-change pattern of post-change number 7 is determined, the post-change pattern of post-change number 5, 8, or 11 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 15(h), when the post-change pattern of post-change number 11 is determined, the post-change pattern is determined to be one of post-change numbers 5, 8, or 11. As shown in FIG. 15(i), when the post-change pattern of post-change number 8 is determined, the post-change pattern is determined to be one of post-change numbers 6, 9, or 12. As shown in FIG. 15(j), when the post-change pattern of post-change number 12 is determined, the post-change pattern is determined to be one of post-change numbers 6, 9, or 12.

[Total variation pattern]
Fig. 16 is a diagram for explaining an example of the total fluctuation pattern on the main side. When the rear fluctuation pattern and the front fluctuation pattern are determined as described in Figs. 13 to 15, the fluctuation pattern becomes one of the main fluctuation patterns 1 to 26 as shown in Fig. 16.

Figure 17 is a diagram for explaining an example of the lottery of a presentation pattern on the sub side. As shown in Figure 17, the presentation control CPU 120 on the sub side determines the presentation pattern by lottery based on the variation pattern command received from the CPU 103 on the main side.

For example, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 7 to 9 from the CPU 103, it determines from among the multiple types of reach performances to either the SP first half reach A miss pattern performance described below, or the SP first half reach B miss pattern performance. When the performance control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 18 to 20 from the CPU 103, it determines from among the multiple types of reach performances to either the SP first half reach A hit pattern performance described below, or the SP first half reach B hit pattern performance.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 10 to 12 from the CPU 103, it determines from among the multiple types of reach performances to either the SP second half reach A miss pattern performance described below, or the SP second half reach B miss pattern performance. When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 21 to 23 from the CPU 103, it determines from among the multiple types of reach performances to either the SP second half reach A hit pattern performance described below, or the SP second half reach B hit pattern performance.

<Operation>
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

[Major operations of main board 11]
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described.

(Special pattern processing)
18 is a flow chart showing an example of a game control main process. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started up, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, the CPU 103 performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, the CPU 103 judges whether the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it is sufficient to judge in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is sufficient to check or inspect the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors, and to judge whether the recovery condition can be satisfied.

When the restoration condition is met (Y in step S3), the CPU 103 executes a restoration process (step S4) and then executes a setting confirmation process (step S5). The restoration process in step S4 causes the CPU 103 to set a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (N in step S3), the CPU 103 executes an initialization process (step S6) and then executes a setting change process (step S7). The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by the operation of the ball hitting operation handle 30, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc., are stopped, and control may be performed such that a missing symbol or the like is frozen and a display corresponding to a game stop state other than a missing symbol is performed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, the CPU 103 determines whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when the power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the CPU 103 stores (updates and stores) the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 in the backup area of the RAM 102, and turns off the display monitor 29. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, it may perform control to notify the user that the setting is being checked or changed. For example, it may display a specific image on the image display device 5, output a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, or cause a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a specific manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, and it is possible to control it to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, and it is possible to control it to the setting confirmation state. When the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or if the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). The CPU 103 then sets the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (for example, every 2 ms) (step S9), and permits the interrupt (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

(Game control timer interrupt processing)
Fig. 19 is a flow chart showing an example of a game control timer interrupt process. When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flow chart of Fig. 19. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in Fig. 19 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined main side error process to perform an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After this, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined information output process to output data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots that have occurred), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the special state has been entered) to be supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, the CPU 103 executes a game random number update process to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the jackpot game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display unit 26, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting up the normal symbol memory display unit 25.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

(Special pattern processing)
Fig. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process. The special symbol process is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in Fig. 19. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 19.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S117), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "jackpot" and, if it is a "jackpot", the type of jackpot is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in preference to the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (such as whether or not there is a reach), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (such as the type of reach presentation), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process of making settings to change the special pattern in the special pattern 1 variable display section 21 and the special pattern 2 variable display section 22, and a process of measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". This special symbol stop process includes a process for stopping the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21 and the special symbol 2 variable display unit 22, and setting the special symbol to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. If the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability of winning is controlled and the end of the number of times is reached, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set one of a number of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The gameplay may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of the jackpot state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called probability loop type); when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/200, and the gameplay state after the jackpot game ends is controlled to a probability of the jackpot state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game, while the rate at which the game ball passes through the predetermined switch during the jackpot game varies depending on the variable special chart (so-called V probability of the jackpot type); and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot is 1/320, and the gameplay state is controlled to a jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during a high base (during time-saving control) (so-called type 1/2 mixed type). When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but a setting may be provided in which the probability of a jackpot is higher than when the setting value is any of 1 to 3, but the number of prize balls that can be acquired during a jackpot game is smaller (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the gameplay is changed according to the setting value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the setting value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used as a performance switch (a switch for executing a predetermined performance each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a probability variable state or a jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Start winning judgment process)
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the start winning judgment process. The CPU 103 executes the start winning judgment process in S101 of the special symbol process shown in FIG. 20. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start hole switch 22A is on or not based on a detection signal from the first start hole switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A (step S51). At this time, if the first start hole switch 22A is on (Y in step S51), it judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step S52). The CPU 103 may specify the first special symbol reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit not shown, for example. When the number of reserved first special charts is not the upper limit in step S52 (N in step S52), the storage value of a start port buffer provided in a game control buffer setting section (not shown), for example, is set to "1" (step S53).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in step S51 (N in step S51) or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in step S52 (Y in step S52), the second start port switch 22B is determined to be on or not based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B (step S54). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (Y in step S54), it is determined whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step S55). The CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol reserved memory number by, for example, reading the second reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit not shown. If the number of reserved second special charts is not the upper limit in step S55 (N in step S55), the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "2" (step S56).

After executing either step S53 or step S56, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (step S57). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. Also, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory count is also updated to add 1 (step S58). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), may be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of step S58, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value RANDOM 1 for determining a jackpot, the random number value RANDOM 2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random number values RANDOM 3 and RANDOM 4 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit (not shown) (step S59). The numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as reserved information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special chart reserved memory unit according to the start port buffer value (step S60). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random number values RANDOM 1 to RANDOM 4 are stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit (not shown), while when the start port buffer value is "2", numerical data indicating the random number values RANDOM 1 to RANDOM 4 are stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit (not shown).

The numerical data indicating the random number value RANDOM1 for determining a jackpot and the random number value RANDOM2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the result of the variable display of the special and decorative patterns is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the result of the variable display is a "jackpot". The random number values RANDOM3 and RANDOM4 for determining the variable pattern are used to determine the variable pattern including the variable display time of the special and decorative patterns. By executing the process of step S59, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special and decorative patterns.

Following the processing of step S59, the start port winning designation command is set to be sent according to the start port buffer value (step S60). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is made to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is made to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 19 after the special pattern process processing is completed.

Following the processing of step S60, the CPU 103 stores a random number value in a storage area corresponding to the reserved memory (step S61). After that, the CPU 103 clears the start port buffer and initializes the stored value to "0" (step S62), and then ends the start winning determination processing. This ensures that even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start winning of a game ball, the processing based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal special symbol processing. As shown in FIG. 22, in the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 judges whether there is reserved memory data in the first reserved memory buffer (a memory buffer for storing reserved memory information of the first special symbol) or the second reserved memory buffer (a memory buffer for storing reserved memory information of the second special symbol) (step S1001). If there is no reserved memory data in either the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer (N in step S1001), it judges whether a predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stop (step S1002). If the predetermined period has not passed since the fluctuation stop (N in step S1002), the normal special symbol processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stop (Y in step S1002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demo designation command is performed (step S1003), and the normal special symbol processing is terminated. Here, when the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, a customer waiting demo designation command transmission completion flag indicating that the customer waiting demo designation command has been transmitted is set. Then, when the special symbol normal processing is executed after the next timer interruption after the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completion flag is set, so that the customer waiting demo designation command is not transmitted again. Such a customer waiting demo designation command transmission completion flag is reset when the next variable display of the special symbol is started.

When there is reserved memory data in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer (Y in step S1001), the CPU 103 determines whether the first data among the data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating "second" (step S1004). If the first data set in the reserved specific area is not data indicating "second" (i.e., data indicating "first") (N in step S1004), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special pattern pointer (a flag indicating whether the special pattern process is being performed on the first special pattern or the second special pattern) (step S1005). If the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating "second" (Y in step S1004), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" to the special pattern pointer (step S1006).

In this embodiment, depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special pattern pointer, the display of the first special pattern and the display of the second special pattern are performed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special pattern pointer, the display of the first special pattern is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special pattern pointer, the display of the second special pattern is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the second reserved memory buffer.

By the control of steps S1004 to S1006, if there is at least one second reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer, the display of the second special symbol changes based on the data in the second reserved memory is executed in priority over the display of the first special symbol changes based on the data in the first reserved memory.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 (step S1007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number=1 in the first reserved memory buffer, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory buffer, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S1008). Specifically, when the special pattern pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. When the special pattern pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory buffer.

In other words, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "2nd", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) are extracted always matches the order of the first pending memory number (or second pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, 4.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a reserved memory number designation command indicated by the special pattern pointer to the performance control CPU 120 based on the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer after subtraction (step S1009). In this case, if the special pattern pointer is set to a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a first reserved memory number designation command. Also, if the special pattern pointer is set to a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a second reserved memory number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 sends a background designation command (step S1010), reads out Random R (random number for determining whether or not there is a jackpot) from the reserved memory buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step S1011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for determining whether or not there is a jackpot that was extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and performs a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 8) with the random number for determining whether or not there is a jackpot, and if they match, determines that there is a jackpot. In other words, it is a program that executes the process of determining whether or not there is a jackpot.

In the process of determining a jackpot, when the game state is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the probability of a jackpot is higher than when the game state is in a non-probability variable state (normal game state and time-saving state). Specifically, a probability variable jackpot determination table (table in which the numbers in the lower column of FIG. 9(a) are set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance, and a normal time jackpot determination table (table in which the numbers in the upper column of FIG. 9(a) are set) in which a smaller number of jackpot determination values are set than in the probability variable jackpot determination table are provided. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the game state is in a probability variable state, and when the game state is in a probability variable state, performs the process of determining a jackpot using the probability variable jackpot determination table, and when the game state is in a normal state or time-saving state, performs the process of determining a jackpot using the normal time jackpot determination table. That is, when the value of the random number for determining a jackpot (RANDOM 1) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 9(a), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it determines that a jackpot has occurred (Y in step S1011), the process proceeds to step S1012. Note that determining whether or not to determine whether or not to determine a jackpot means determining whether or not to transition to a jackpot game state, but also means determining whether or not to determine whether or not the stopped symbol in the special symbol is a jackpot symbol.

Whether the current game state is in a high probability state is confirmed by checking whether the high probability state flag is set. The high probability state flag is set when the game state transitions to a high probability state, and is reset when the high probability state ends. Specifically, the high probability state flag is set in the process of ending a jackpot game, and is then reset at the timing when the variable display of the special pattern ends and the stopped pattern is displayed stationary when either the variable display has been performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) or the next jackpot has been determined, whichever occurs first, is met.

If the value of the random number (Random 1) for determining a jackpot does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step S1011), proceed to step S1015 described below.

If the value of the random number (RANDOM 1) for determining a jackpot in step S1011 matches any of the jackpot determination values, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step S1012). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table to be used to determine the jackpot type as one of the multiple types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 9(b) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 9(c) are selected. Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9(b). Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 9(c). Then, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for determining the type of jackpot extracted during the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and uses the selected jackpot type determination table to determine the type of jackpot and the jackpot pattern that correspond to the value that matches the value of the random number for determining the type of jackpot (Random 2) stored in the reserved memory buffer (step S1013).

The CPU 103 also sets jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step S1014).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the special symbol to be stopped (step S1015). Specifically, if the jackpot flag is not set, the special symbol is set to a "-" symbol, which is a losing symbol. If the jackpot flag is set, the special symbol is set to the jackpot symbol determined in step S1014 according to the determination result of the jackpot type.

Then, the CPU 103 sends a display result designation command (step S1016) and updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting process (step S111) (step S1017).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 23, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines the subsequent fluctuation pattern based on Random 3 and Random 4 according to the number of reserved memories and the presence or absence of a jackpot (step S1101). Specifically, in the case of a miss, the CPU 103 selects the subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13 according to the number of reserved memories, and determines the subsequent fluctuation pattern based on the selected subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table and the value of Random 3. In addition, in the case of a jackpot, the CPU 103 selects the subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14 according to the type of jackpot, and determines the subsequent fluctuation pattern based on the selected subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table and the value of Random 4.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the front fluctuation pattern based on the random 5 (step S1102). Specifically, the CPU 103 selects a front fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 15 according to the rear fluctuation pattern determined in S1102, and determines the front fluctuation pattern based on the selected front fluctuation pattern determination table and the value of the random 5.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a change pattern command corresponding to the determined change pattern (front change pattern and rear change pattern) to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1103).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the change time corresponding to the selected change pattern in the change time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step S1104). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to send a pattern change designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1105), and updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the special pattern change process (step S112) (step S1106).

(Special pattern variation processing)
Fig. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in Fig. 24, in the special symbol variation processing, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step S1201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y in step S1202), updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (step S113) (step S1203). When the variation time timer does not time out (N in step S1202), the processing ends as it is.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 25, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets an end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and performs control to derive and display the stop symbol on the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21 or the special symbol 2 variable display unit 22 (step S1301). If data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol on the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21 is ended, and if data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the second special symbol on the special symbol 2 variable display unit 22 is ended. In addition, a symbol determination designation command is set in the performance control CPU 120 (step S1302). As a result, the symbol determination designation command is transmitted to the performance control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the big win flag is set (step S1303). If the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1303), the process proceeds to step S1309.

If the jackpot flag is set (Y in step S1303), the CPU 103 resets the probability bonus flag and the time-saving flag (step S1304). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start command and a right-hit display lighting command to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1305).

Also, by referring to the opening pattern data stored in ROM 101, data indicating the opening mode of the normal large prize winning port and the V large prize winning port, such as the number of times to open (for example, 5 times or 10 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval time between rounds (for example, 0.5 seconds), are set in a predetermined memory area (step S1306). For example, in the case of a normal jackpot of 3R, the opening mode in which the normal large prize winning port is opened in all of 1 to 3R is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM 102. In the case of a jackpot of 5R, the opening mode in which the normal large prize winning port is opened in 1 to 3R and 5R, and the V large prize winning port is opened in 4R is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM 102. In addition, in the case of a jackpot of 10R, the opening mode in which the normal large prize winning port is opened in 1 to 8R and 10R, and the V large prize winning port is opened in 9R is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM 102. The data on the number of times it was opened (5 times or 10 times) is set in an opening counter to count the number of times it was opened.

The large prize opening control timer is also set to a value equivalent to the fanfare time, which is the jackpot display time (the time during which the occurrence of a jackpot is notified, for example, on the image display device 5) (step S1307). Thereafter, in the jackpot opening pre-processing, the large prize opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it reaches 0, the large prize opening is opened and the round begins. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step S1308), and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S1303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1304), the CPU 103 determines whether or not a time-saving flag indicating that the game is in a time-saving state is set (step S1309). If the time-saving flag is not set (N in step S1309), the CPU 103 proceeds to the processing of step S1316. If the time-saving flag is set (Y in step S1309), the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the time-saving count counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in the time-saving state (step S1310). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the time-saving count counter has become 0 (step S1311). If the value of the time-saving count counter has become 0 (Y in step S1311), the CPU 103 determines that the duration of the time-saving state has ended and resets the time-saving flag (step S1312). As a result, when a fluctuation display that results in a miss display is performed a specific number of times (100 times) in the time-saving state, the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state. In step S1311, if the time-saving counter value is not 0 (N in step S1311), the process proceeds to step S1316.

After step S1312, it is determined whether or not a high probability flag indicating a high probability state is set (step S1313). If the high probability flag is set (Y in step S1313), the high probability flag is reset (step S1314). Next, in response to the game state transitioning from the time-saving state to the normal state (low probability/low base state), the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1315) and proceeds to step S1316. If the high probability flag is not set in step S1313 (N in step S1313), the process of step S1314 is not performed and the process proceeds to step S1315. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1316), and the process ends.

(Pre-opening process for big win)
Fig. 26 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win opening pre-processing. As shown in Fig. 26, in the big win opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the big win opening control timer by -1 (subtract update) (step S1401). Then, it is determined whether the value of the big win opening control timer is 0 (step S1402), and if the value of the big win opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1402), the process is terminated.

If the value of the large prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1402), a command to specify that the large prize opening is open is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the regular large prize opening (step S1404). As a result, the regular large prize opening is opened in the first round.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the large prize opening control timer to a large prize opening opening time (e.g., 29 seconds) corresponding to the maximum time that the large prize opening can be opened (large prize opening opening time) based on the opening pattern data (e.g., data stored in RAM 102 by step S1306) (step S1405). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the large prize opening process (step S115) (step S1406), and ends the process.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
27 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win opening process. As shown in FIG. 27, in the big win opening process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the big win opening control timer (step S1501).

Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the large prize opening control timer has reached 0 (step S1502). If the value of the large prize opening control timer has reached 0 (Y in step S1502), the process proceeds to step S1511. If the value of the large prize opening control timer has not reached 0 (N in step S1502), the process determines whether the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is currently open (step S1503). Whether the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is currently open can be determined from the value of the opening count counter.

If it is determined in step S1503 that the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is not open (N in step S1503), the process ends.

If the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is open (Y in step S1503), it is determined whether the count switch 23 or the V prize switch 24 is on (step S1504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V prize switch 24 is on (N in step S1504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V prize switch 24 is on (Y in step S1504), the prize number counter is incremented by +1 (updated) (step S1505).

Next, it is determined whether or not the high probability determination flag is set (step S1506). The high probability determination flag is a flag that is set when it is determined that the machine will be controlled to the high probability state when a V win occurs. If the high probability determination flag is set (Y in step S1506), the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the high probability determination flag is not set (N in step S1506), it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 24 is on (step S1507). If the V winning switch 24 is not on (N in step S1507), the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is on (Y in step S1507), the high probability determination flag is set (step S1508), a high probability determination device pass command is sent (step S1509), and the process proceeds to step S1510.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the winning number counter has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S1510). If the value of the winning number counter has not reached the predetermined number (N in step S1510), the process ends.

When the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (Y in step S1510), the CPU 103 performs either control to drive the solenoid 82 to close the normal large prize opening, or control to drive the solenoid 83 to close the V large prize opening (step S1511). Next, the CPU 103 performs a process to clear (set to 0) the value of the winning number counter (step S1512). Next, the CPU 103 updates (step S1513) the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the post-large prize opening process (step S116), and ends the process.

(Post-opening processing)
28 is a flow chart showing an example of a big win release post-processing. As shown in Fig. 28, in the big win release post-processing, the CPU 103 judges whether the value of the opening number counter is 0 or not (step S1601).

If the value of the opening count counter is 0 (Y in step S1601), a jackpot end command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1602), a value corresponding to the jackpot end time (for example, the time at which the image display device 5 notifies the user that the jackpot game has ended) is set in the jackpot entry port control timer (step S1603), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S117) (step S1604), and the process ends.

In step S1601, if the value of the opening count counter is not 0 (N in step S1601), a command to specify when the large prize opening is to be opened is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1605), and the large prize opening control timer is set to a value equivalent to the interval time from the end of a round to the start of the next round (step S1606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is before the round in which the V large prize opening is opened (also called the V opening round), i.e., whether or not the next round is a V opening round (step S1607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step S1607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 82 to open the normal large prize opening (step S1608). On the other hand, if it is before the V opening round (Y in step S1607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 83 to open the V large prize opening (step S1609).

After step S1608 or step S1609, the CPU 103 sends a command to the performance control CPU 120 to specify whether the jackpot opening is in progress (step S1610). The CPU 103 then updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (step S115) (step S1611), and ends the process.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot end process. As shown in FIG. 29, in the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot control timer in which the jackpot end time is set (step S1701). Then, the CPU 103 judges whether the value of the jackpot control timer is 0 (whether the jackpot end time has elapsed) (step S1702). If the value of the jackpot control timer is not 0 (N in step S1702), the process is terminated. If the value of the jackpot control timer is 0 (Y in step S1702), the jackpot flag is reset (step S1703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the high probability flag, which is set by passing through the V winning area, is set (step S1704). If the high probability flag is not set (N in step S1704), the process proceeds to step S1705. If the high probability flag is set in step S1704 (Y in step S1704), the high probability flag indicating that the game is in a high probability state is set (step S1707). Next, a high probability state designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1708), the high probability flag is reset (step S1709), and the process proceeds to step S1710.

In step S1710, a time-saving flag is set to indicate that the time-saving state is active (step S1710), and the time-saving count counter is set to 100 (step S1711). Then, the process proceeds to step S1712.

On the other hand, if the probability of a bonus has not been set in step S1704 (N in step S1704), then in step S1705, a time-saving flag is set indicating that the game is in a time-saving state (step S1705), the time-saving counter is set to 100 (step S1706), and the process proceeds to step S1712.

In step S1712, a time-saving state designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S110) (step S1713), and ends the process. Note that the performance control CPU 120 is able to recognize whether the game is in a special, time-saving, or normal state based on the special state designation command sent from the CPU 103.

[Major operations of the performance control board 12]
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described.

(Performance control main processing)
When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 30. Fig. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the performance control main process. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 30 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (N in step S73), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the side of the performance control board 12, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to emit an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (Y in step S73), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L, 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

(Performance control process)
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the performance control process. The performance control process is a process executed in step S76 of FIG. 30. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 31, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a judgment, decision, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice performance is performed based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the reserved display is executed based on the reserved memory number specified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S175 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag value is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (lamp control data) to the LED driver, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning waiting process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "4". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "5". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Variable display start setting process)
Fig. 32 is a flow chart showing an example of variable display start setting processing. As shown in Fig. 32, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the result of the variable display is determined to be a miss (step S7101). If it is determined to be a miss, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether a command corresponding to a non-reach variable pattern has been received as a variable pattern command (step S7103).

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received a command corresponding to a non-reach fluctuation pattern, it uses the data table for determining a losing symbol to determine the display result of a losing symbol that does not result in a reach as the final stop of the performance symbol (step S7105), and proceeds to step S7106.

If the process of step S7103 determines that the pattern is not a non-reach fluctuation pattern (if the pattern is determined to be a reach fluctuation pattern), the stopping patterns of the performance patterns that make up the reach pattern combination are determined (step S7104), and the process proceeds to step S7106.

Also, if the processing in step S7101 does not determine a miss (if a jackpot is determined), the CPU 101 for controlling the presentation determines the stopping patterns of the presentation patterns that make up the combination of jackpot patterns according to the type of jackpot (step S7102), and proceeds to step S7106.

Next, after executing the effect setting process (step S7106) for performing processing to set various effects in the variable display, the process proceeds to step S7107. For example, in the effect setting process of step S7106, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute an effect that suggests a jackpot (incites whether or not a jackpot has occurred). Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute a cut-in effect shown in FIG. 128 (r41) described later as an effect that suggests a jackpot (incites whether or not a jackpot has occurred). In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 specifies whether or not the final reach will develop based on the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command, and if the final reach will develop, specifies whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on the fluctuation pattern, and determines whether or not to execute a cut-in effect based on the result of whether or not the jackpot has been determined, and if so, the type of cut-in effect (red cut-in effect, green cut-in effect) to be executed. When executing a cut-in effect, the effect control CPU 101 sets information for executing the cut-in effect in the effect setting process.

In step S7107, the performance control pattern is determined to be one of multiple types of performance control patterns. In step S7107, depending on the various performance control (performance operation) patterns specified by the variation pattern command and the performance control pattern of the performance determined in the processing of step S7106, one of the multiple types of pattern variation control patterns stored in the pattern variation control pattern table that corresponds to the various specified performance operation patterns is selected and determined as the pattern to be used.

The control pattern table stored in ROM 121 stores multiple types of pattern change control patterns that indicate the control contents of various performance operations, such as the display operation of the changing performance patterns in the display area of the image display device 5 during the period from when the change in the performance patterns begins to when the final performance pattern is stopped and displayed, the display operation in a reach performance, the display operation due to a pseudo consecutive performance, and the display operation in a preview performance.

In addition, each pattern change control pattern includes control data for controlling various performance operations according to the display change of the performance pattern, such as a performance control process timer setting value, a performance control process timer judgment value, performance display control data, audio control data, brightness data, and an end code, and the contents of various performance controls and the switching timing of the performance controls are set in chronological order.

Next, a process table corresponding to the effect control pattern is selected (step S7108). Then, the process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data of the selected process table is started (step S7109).

After executing the processing of step S7109, control of the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) is started (step S7110) according to the contents of the process data (display control execution data, brightness data, sound number data). For example, a command is output to cause the image display device 5 to display an image (including a performance pattern) corresponding to the variable pattern according to the display control execution data. Also, a control signal (lamp control data) is output to the LED driver to control the turning on/off of light-emitting elements such as various LEDs. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 to output audio from the speakers 8L, 8R.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step S7111), the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step S7112), and the variable display start setting processing ends.

<Details of game progress>
In the pachinko game machine 1 configured as described above, the game progresses as follows. In the pachinko game machine 1, the player first hits the ball from the left to launch the game ball toward the first flow path that passes through the left side of the game area. When the launched game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started. When the first special symbol game results in the display mode of the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 showing the big win symbol, a big win occurs.

As mentioned above, the types of jackpots in the first special symbol game are normal jackpots 1 and 2, and probability jackpots 1 to 4. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare effect is executed, and a right-hit promotion effect is executed to encourage the player to make a right hit. The right-hit promotion effect is executed by displaying text (for example, "right hit") and a graphic image (for example, an arrow pointing in the right direction, which is the direction of the second flow path) on the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage a right hit, and also by lighting up the right-hit display unit 30 of the special symbol LED board 20 and the right-hit display unit 55 of the fourth symbol unit 50 with lighting means such as LEDs to encourage a right hit. This will encourage the player to make a right hit from then on.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot opening is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, three times for a 3R regular jackpot, and ten times for a 10R special jackpot). The jackpot opening is continued until a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, or until the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), whichever comes first.

When the ending performance following the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to a time-saving state for a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). Furthermore, if a V win occurs during the jackpot round, the game state is controlled to a high probability state for a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of fluctuations that are controlled to the time-saving state.

Even in the special probability state or time-saving state after the jackpot round, the right-hit promotion effect continues to be executed by the image display device 5, the right-hit display unit 30, and the right-hit display unit 55. Therefore, after the first jackpot (also called the first hit) occurs, the player is always encouraged to hit right by the right-hit promotion effect, even in the time-saving state after the jackpot round ends.

In the time-saving state, control is performed to shorten the average special chart change time (period during which the special chart changes) compared to the normal state, and control is performed to shorten the average regular chart change time (period during which the regular chart changes) compared to the normal state, and further control is performed to increase the probability of a "regular chart hit" in the regular chart game compared to the normal state. Also, in the time-saving state, electric chute support control may be performed to increase the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 6B that forms the second start winning port is opened, thereby increasing the frequency at which the game ball enters the second start winning port, making it easier to win in the second start winning port (high entry, high frequency).

In the time-saving state after the jackpot round, the released game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, starting the second special game. If the result of the second special game is that the special game 2 variable display section 22 shows a jackpot pattern, a jackpot (also called a consecutive win) occurs.

As mentioned above, the types of jackpots in the second special game include guaranteed jackpots 5 to 9. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare effect is executed. The right-hit promotion effect by the image display device 5, right-hit display unit 30, and right-hit display unit 55 continues from the first jackpot.

During a round in which a jackpot game is in progress, the jackpot opening is opened a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10 times). Each opening of the jackpot opening continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds) has elapsed or the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 10), whichever comes first.

Then, when the ending presentation after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state and the probability variable state (high probability, high base state) for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) in the same way as the first hit. Even in the probability variable state after the jackpot round in a consecutive hit, the right-hit promotion presentation continues to be executed by the image display device 5, the right-hit display unit 30, and the right-hit display unit 55. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, consecutive hits occur in the probability variable state or the time-saving state after the jackpot round ends, and the player is always encouraged to hit right by the right-hit promotion presentation, even in the probability variable state or the time-saving state after the jackpot round ends in the consecutive hit.

When the probability variable state or time-saving state ends without a jackpot occurring in either the probability variable state or time-saving state after the first jackpot round ends, or the probability variable state or time-saving state after the consecutive jackpot round ends, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability low base state), and the right-hit promotion effect by the image display device 5, right-hit display unit 30, and right-hit display unit 55 also ends. As a result, the player will again use the left hit to launch the game ball toward the first flow path that passes through the left area of the game area.

<Flow of the production>
Next, the flow of a series of effects executed in the pachinko game machine 1 will be described. FIG. 33 is a diagram for explaining the flow of a series of effects. In the pachinko game machine 1, a notification effect is executed from when the variable display starts until the variable display stops. The notification effect is an effect that notifies the player whether the variation of the special chart and the decorative pattern stops in a manner indicating a jackpot, that is, whether the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. The notification effect is formed of a plurality of parts of effects, and in this embodiment, includes a start part, an instigation part, a winning epilogue part, a losing epilogue part, a role operation part, a relief winning part, a re-lottery part, and a fanfare part. After the re-lottery part, a fanfare part is executed until the game state transitions to a jackpot game state. The instigation part is also called an introduction part. The winning epilogue part and the losing epilogue part are also collectively called an epilogue part.

[Start part]
The start part is a part where the performance corresponding to the previous variation pattern is executed. The start part is also a part that indicates the period from when the variation starts to when the pseudo consecutive or normal reach is executed until the SP reach starts. The start part also includes variations that are not reach misses.

[Inciting part (introduction part)]
The teasing part (introduction part) includes the start of the SP reach (also called super reach) (the start timing of the SP reach title display) to the timing of the branching to a big hit or a miss. The teasing part is a part that teases whether it will be a big hit or a miss depending on the performance that is executed. The teasing part includes a part corresponding to the SP first half reach A or SP first half reach B that is executed after the start part, and a part corresponding to any of the SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B, and SP final reach that develop from the SP first half reach. Note that the SP first half reach A and SP first half reach B are sometimes collectively referred to as the SP first half, and the SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B, and SP final reach are sometimes collectively referred to as the SP second half.

[Epilogue part]
The epilogue part includes a winning epilogue part which notifies the player that a jackpot display result will be obtained after each promotion part, and a losing epilogue part which notifies the player that a losing display result will be obtained. In the winning epilogue part, at least in the final part of the epilogue part, a performance is executed based on a story development such that the player is notified that the changing symbols will be a winning display result and the game will be controlled to a winning game state. In the losing epilogue part, at least in the final part of the epilogue part, a performance is executed based on a story development such that the player is notified that the changing symbols will be a losing display result and the game will not be controlled to a winning game state.

In addition, in the epilogue part, the notification of the jackpot display result may be made by moving the role when the win/loss notification is made after the introduction part, as in the final reach described later, or by the development of a story on the liquid crystal (image display device 5) without using the role, as in the SP reach other than the final reach. Among the epilogue parts, the winning epilogue part that notifies by moving the role is also called the win/loss notification part. Specifically, in the SP first half reach A, B and the SP second half reach A, B, in the epilogue part executed after the introduction part, if a jackpot occurs, the winning epilogue part as described above notifies that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state as the conclusion of the story presentation using the liquid crystal, and if a jackpot does not occur, the losing epilogue part notifies that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state as the conclusion of the story presentation using the liquid crystal. The initial story development in the story presentation may suggest whether or not there is a win. On the other hand, in the final reach, in the epilogue part executed after the introduction part, first there is a branch as to whether or not the jackpot game state will be controlled by the operation of the jackpot by the hit/miss notification part (device operation part), and then, if a jackpot occurs, the hit epilogue part as described above notifies that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state as the conclusion of the story presentation using the liquid crystal, and if a jackpot does not occur, the miss epilogue part notifies that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state as the conclusion of the story presentation using the liquid crystal. In this way, the hit epilogue part in the final reach includes a hit/miss notification part and a hit epilogue part or a miss epilogue part that comes afterwards.

In addition, in response to SP first half reach A, the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A and the missing epilogue part of SP first half reach A are executed. In response to SP first half reach B, the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach B and the missing epilogue part of SP first half reach B are executed. In response to SP second half reach A, the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A and the missing epilogue part of SP second half reach A are executed. In response to SP second half reach B, the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach B and the missing epilogue part of SP second half reach B are executed. In response to SP final reach, the winning epilogue part of SP final reach and the missing epilogue part of SP final reach are executed.

[Role actor movement part]
The reel operation part is a part corresponding to the period during which the performance indicating the progression from the first half of the SP to the second half of the SP is executed by operating the movable body 32. The reel operation part is executed after the provocation part of the SP first half reach A or the provocation part of the SP first half reach B. After the reel operation part, either the provocation part of the SP second half reach A, the provocation part of the SP second half reach B, or the provocation part of the SP final reach is executed.

[Relief part]
The rescue hit part is a part where a rescue hit performance is executed that initially appears to be a miss and then suggests a big hit. The rescue hit part may develop from any of the miss epilogue parts of the SP latter half reach A, the miss epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B, or the miss epilogue part of the SP final reach.

[Re-draw part]
The re-lottery part is a part executed after the winning epilogue part in which the big win display result is displayed. Specifically, the re-lottery performance is executed after the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach A, the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach B, the winning epilogue part of the SP second half reach A, the winning epilogue part of the SP second half reach B, the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach, and the rescue winning part. In this embodiment, the re-lottery part is always executed after each winning part (winning epilogue part, rescue winning part), but there may be cases where the re-lottery performance part is not shifted to. For example, the re-lottery part may not be executed after the rescue part, the re-lottery part may not be executed after the winning epilogue part, or the re-lottery part may not be executed when a probability variation pattern (an odd number pattern indicating a probability variation) is derived as the big win display result.

[Relationship before and after the decision]
Next, an example of a case where a series of performances is divided by the timing before and after the hit/miss determination will be described. FIG. 34 is a diagram for explaining the relationship before and after the hit/miss determination, the SP first half reach A big hit, and the SP final reach big hit. Here, the hit/miss determination is a performance that indicates a branch of whether the result is a big hit or a miss display result at the final stage of the hype part. As shown in FIG. 34(A), a series of performances can be divided into parts that are executed before and after the hit/miss determination at the timing before and after the hit/miss determination from the start of the fluctuation to the stop of the fluctuation. The part before the hit/miss determination includes a start part and a hype part. In addition, the part after the hit/miss determination includes an epilogue part (hit, miss), a relief hit part, and a re-draw part.

In this way, the series of effects from the start of fluctuation to the end of fluctuation is made up of multiple parts. Also, the period from the start of fluctuation to the end of fluctuation can be divided into before and after the start of the SP reach (start of post-fluctuation). In such a case, the period before the start of the SP reach corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the pre-fluctuation described above, and the period after the start of the SP reach corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the post-fluctuation described above.

Next, using Figure 34 (B), we will explain the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 20, which is the fluctuation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot among the various fluctuation patterns. In the fluctuation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot, the start part is from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the SP reach (later fluctuation start). Then, the instigation part (SP first half reach A) is from the start of the SP reach (later fluctuation start) to the determination of whether it is a win or a loss. In the fluctuation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot, the reels do not move at the timing of the win or a loss determination. Then, the epilogue part (SP first half reach A hit) is from the determination of whether it is a win or a loss to the start of the re-draw performance. Then, the re-draw part is from the start of the re-draw performance to the stop of the fluctuation. For example, in the variation pattern of a SP first half reach A jackpot, the start part is set to 60 seconds, the teasing part (SP first half reach A) to 20 seconds, the epilogue part (SP first half reach A hit) to 15 seconds, and the re-draw part to 20 seconds.

Next, the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 26, which is the fluctuation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot among the various fluctuation patterns, will be explained using FIG. 34 (C). In the fluctuation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot, the start part is from the start of the fluctuation to the start of the SP reach (later fluctuation start). Then, the provocation part (SP first half reach A) is from the start of the SP reach (later fluctuation start) to the development of the second half of the SP. Then, the provocation part (SP final reach) is from the development of the second half of the SP to the determination of whether it is a win or a loss. In the fluctuation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot, the reels do not move at the timing of the determination of whether it is a win or a loss. Then, the epilogue part (SP final reach hit) is from the determination of whether it is a win or a loss to the start of the re-draw performance. Then, the re-draw part is from the start of the re-draw performance to the stop of the fluctuation. For example, the fluctuation pattern for the SP final reach jackpot is set so that the start part is 60 seconds, the teasing part (SP first half reach A) is 20 seconds, the teasing part (SP final reach) is 25 seconds, the epilogue part (SP final reach hit) is 30 seconds, and the re-draw part is 20 seconds.

As shown in Figures 34 (B) and (C), the SP Final Reach, which has a higher expectation level than the SP First Half Reach A, has a longer fluctuation time. Also, the SP Final Reach, which has a higher expectation level than the SP First Half Reach A, has a longer total teasing part time and epilogue part time. This means that the higher the expectation level of the fluctuation, the longer the period of excitement for the player can be, and the longer the afterglow time when a hit is achieved, which enhances the sense of celebration.

<About the scenario>
Next, the correspondence between the performance contents executed in the series of performances and the game effect lamps 9 will be explained using the scenarios for each part. The scenario described here serves as a script summarizing the contents of each scene in the series of performances. The scenario for each part corresponds to a diagram for explaining the performance mode corresponding to each part, which will be described later. The contents of the performances executed on the screen of the image display device 5 and the mode of the game effect lamps 9 will be described in detail using diagrams for explaining the performance modes, which will be described later. Below, the correspondence between the diagrams for explaining the scenarios for each part and the diagrams for explaining the performance modes, which will be described later, will be explained.

Figure 35 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the start part. The scenario of the start part corresponding to number 1 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 55 to 61 described later. Figure 36 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the hype part (SP first half reach A). The scenario of the hype part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to number 2 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 62 to 67 described later. Figure 38 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) and the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to number 3 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 68 to 69 described later. The scenario of the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to number 4 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 70 to 71 described later.

Figure 38 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the instigation part (SP first half reach B). The scenario of the instigation part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to number 5 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of Figures 72 to 77 described later. Figure 39 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) and the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to number 6 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of Figures 78 to 80 described later. The scenario of the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to number 7 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of Figures 81 to 82 described later. Figure 40 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the reel operation part (at the time of SP second half development). The scenario of the reel operation part (at the time of SP second half development) corresponding to number 8 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of Figure 83 described later.

Figure 41 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the instigation part (SP second half reach A). The scenario of the instigation part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to number 9 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in Figures 84 to 96, which will be described later. Figure 42 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A) and the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach A). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to number 10 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in Figures 97 to 98, which will be described later. The scenario of the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to number 11 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in Figures 99 to 100, which will be described later.

Figure 43 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the provocative part (SP second half reach B). The scenario of the provocative part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to number 12 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in Figures 101 to 109, which will be described later. Figure 44 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B) and the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to number 13 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in Figures 110 to 112, which will be described later. The scenario of the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to number 14 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in Figures 113 to 114, which will be described later.

Figures 45 and 46 are diagrams for explaining the scenario of the hype part (SP final reach). The scenario of the hype part (SP final reach) corresponding to number 15 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 115 to 132 described later. Figure 47 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP final reach) and the losing epilogue part (SP final reach). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP final reach) corresponding to number 16 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 133 to 136 described later. The scenario of the losing epilogue part (SP final reach) corresponding to number 17 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 137 to 138 described later. Figure 48 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the rescue winning part. The scenario of the rescue winning part corresponding to number 18 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 139 to 140 described later.

Figure 49 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the re-draw part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). The scenario of the re-draw part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation) corresponding to number 19 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 141 to 156 described later. Figure 50 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the re-draw part (deriving odd symbols after button operation) and the fanfare part. The scenario of the re-draw part (deriving odd symbols after button operation) corresponding to number 20 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 157 to 159 described later. The scenario of the fanfare part corresponding to number 22 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of Figure 160 described later. Figure 51 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the re-draw part (deriving even symbols after button operation) and the fanfare part. The scenario for the re-selection part (deriving an even number after pressing a button) corresponding to number 21 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in FIG. 161 to FIG. 163, which will be described later. The scenario for the fanfare part corresponding to number 22 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation mode in FIG. 164, which will be described later.

<Output mechanism to LED driver (lamp driver)>
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to the LED driver. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 outputs brightness data for turning on/blinking/extinguishing one or more lamps (LEDs) among the multiple lamps (LEDs) included in the game effect lamp 9 to the LED driver (also called a lamp driver). In the following, the control of turning on/blinking/extinguishing a lamp such as an LED by the performance control CPU 120 is also called lamp control. The LED driver adjusts the current flowing through each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 to be controlled based on the brightness data received from the performance control CPU 120 in order to turn on/blink/extinguish each lamp. Each game effect lamp 9 turns on/blink/extinguish based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

To explain more specifically, the ROM 121 and RAM 122 of the performance control board 12 store brightness data tables in which brightness data for controlling each game effect lamp 9 is stored. The brightness data tables include an error brightness data table used when an error occurs, an SP reach brightness data table used in each part during the SP reach (such as the instigation part, winning epilogue part, losing epilogue part, and role operation part), and a background brightness data table.

Furthermore, the background brightness data table includes a normal background brightness data table used in a low probability low base state (normal state), a fanfare background brightness data table used in a fanfare state in which a fanfare performance is executed, a jackpot background brightness data table used during a round in a jackpot game state, an ending background brightness data table used in an ending state in which an ending performance is executed to notify the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability variable background brightness data table used in a high probability high base state (probability variable state).

The above-mentioned background brightness data tables are used without overlapping, and one of the background brightness data tables is used depending on which of the multiple game states, such as the normal state, fanfare state, jackpot game state, ending state, and probability change state, the game is controlled to. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 uses one of the background brightness data tables for each game state being controlled, and outputs brightness data based on that background brightness data table to the LED driver. This causes each game effect lamp 9 to be lamp-controlled depending on the game state being controlled.

Furthermore, a priority is set for each of the error brightness data table, the SP reach brightness data table, and the background brightness data table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52, the error brightness data table, the SP reach brightness data table, and the background brightness data table have the highest priority when used.

For example, when the SP reach develops while outputting brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table in the normal state, the performance control CPU 120 uses the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the SP reach in preference to the normal background brightness data table, and outputs brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table to the LED driver. As a result, when the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the normal state based on the normal background brightness data table and develops into an SP reach, the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the SP reach based on the SP reach brightness data table. Note that during the period when the brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table is output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table is not output to the LED driver, but when the SP reach ends and the normal state is restored, the brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table is output to the LED driver, and when a jackpot is hit and the fanfare state is entered, the brightness data based on the fanfare background brightness data table is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the game state being controlled, and outputs brightness data to the LED driver using the background brightness data table corresponding to the game state being controlled. However, when the game progresses to an SP reach, etc., the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the SP reach is used preferentially over the background brightness data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the measurement of the lamp control time using the background brightness data table. In other words, even while the performance control CPU 120 is lamp controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the SP reach brightness data table, it continues to update the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table, but since the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the SP reach brightness data table, the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. After the SP reach ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting the luminance data contained in the background luminance data table to the LED driver again, starting from the continuation of the luminance data that was being updated.

For example, when an error occurs while outputting brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table during an SP Reach, the performance control CPU 120 uses the error brightness data table corresponding to the error in preference to the SP Reach brightness data table, and outputs brightness data based on the error brightness data table to the LED driver. As a result, when an error occurs while the game effect lamp 9 is being lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the SP Reach based on the SP Reach brightness data table, the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the error based on the error brightness data table. Note that during the period when the brightness data based on the error brightness data table is being output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table is not output to the LED driver, but when the error is released and the game state returns to the SP Reach state, the brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the SP reach being controlled, and outputs brightness data to the LED driver using the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to that SP reach, but when an error occurs, it outputs brightness data to the LED driver using the error brightness data table corresponding to that error in preference to the SP reach brightness data table. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the measurement of the lamp control time using the SP reach brightness data table. In other words, even while the performance control CPU 120 is lamp controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the error brightness data table, it continues to update the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table, but since the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table has a lower priority than the brightness data included in the error brightness data table, the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. After the error is cleared, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting the luminance data contained in the SP reach luminance data table to the LED driver again, starting from the continuation of the luminance data that had been continuously updated.

<Lighting status of the game effect lamp>
In this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled by the output of brightness data to the LED driver by the performance control CPU 120 as described above. Here, the lighting state of each game effect lamp 9 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 53 and 54. Figures 53 and 54 are diagrams for explaining the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9.

In this embodiment, terms such as "off," "almost off," "on," and "flashing" are used to refer to the lighting of each game effect lamp 9, such as the frame lamp, role lamp 9A, left panel lamp 9B, attacca lamp 9E, V attacca lamp 9F, and electric chute lamp 9H. Also, as mentioned above, the state of each game effect lamp 9 when "on" or "flashing" is also referred to as the "lighting state."

The term "off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is not lit and has a brightness of 0. The term "almost off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is lit but has a very low brightness (for example, the brightness "1" described below).

For example, as shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the brightness data of the frame lamp is "000", the frame lamp is "off". Also, when the brightness data (RGB data) of the frame lamp is "111", the frame lamp lights up in white with extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the frame lamp when the RGB data is "111" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the RRRR (Red, Red, Red, Red) data defined as the brightness data of the reel lamp 9A is "0000", the reel lamp 9A is "off". Also, when the brightness data of the reel lamp 9A (RRRR data) is "1111", the reel lamp 9A is lit in red with extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the reel lamp 9A when the RRRR data is "1111" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the WWWWW (White, White, White, White, White) data defined as the brightness data of the board left lamp 9B is "00000", the board left lamp 9B is "off". Also, when the brightness data (WWWWW data) of the board left lamp 9B is "11111", the board left lamp 9B is lit at an extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the board left lamp 9B when the WWWWW data is "11111" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the brightness data of the attacca lamp 9E is "000", the attacca lamp 9E is "off". Also, when the brightness data (RGB data) of the attacca lamp 9E is "111", the attacca lamp 9E is lit at an extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the attacca lamp 9E when the RGB data is "111" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the WWW (White, White, White) data defined as the brightness data of the V attacca lamp 9F is "000", the V attacca lamp 9F is "off". Also, when the brightness data (WWW data) of the V attacca lamp 9F is "111", the V attacca lamp 9F is lit at an extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the V attacca lamp 9F when the WWW data is "111" may be referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the brightness data of the electric choke lamp 9H is "000", the electric choke lamp 9H is "off". Also, when the brightness data (RGB data) of the electric choke lamp 9H is "111", the electric choke lamp 9H is lit at an extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the electric choke lamp 9H in which the RGB data is "111" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

The term "lighting" includes constant lighting, in which the game effect lamp 9 is always on, wave lighting, in which the multiple lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are switched from off to on in sequence, and hazy lighting, in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing brightness. Specifically, "lighting" includes lighting of the game effect lamp 9 when the brightness data is any of "2" to "F." Note that the brightness data is hexadecimal data and can be specified from "0" to "F," with "0" being no brightness, "1" being the lowest brightness, and "F" being the highest brightness.

For example, as shown in FIG. 53 (X2), when the brightness data (RGB data) of the left frame lamps 9L1 to 9L12 is "AAA," the left frame lamps 9L1 to 9L12 are "lit," and in this particular case, since the brightness is high, the left frame lamps 9L1 to 9L12 are lit brightly.

As shown in Figure 53 (X3), when the brightness data (RGB data) of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is "AAA," the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 are "lit," and in this particular case, because the brightness is high, the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 are brightly lit.

As shown in FIG. 54 (X4), when the brightness data (RRRR data) of the reel lamp 9A is "AAAA", the reel lamp 9A is "lit", and in this particular case, since the brightness is high, the reel lamp 9A lights up brightly.

As shown in FIG. 54 (X5), when the brightness data (WWWW data) of the left panel lamp 9B is "AAAAA", the left panel lamp 9B is "lit", and in this particular case, since the brightness is high, the left panel lamp 9B lights up brightly.

As shown in FIG. 54 (X6), when the brightness data (RGB data) of the attacca lamp 9E is "AAA", the attacca lamp 9E "lights up", and in this case, since the brightness is particularly high, the attacca lamp 9E lights up brightly. When the brightness data (WWW data) of the V attacca lamp 9F is "AAA", the V attacca lamp 9F "lights up", and in this case, since the brightness is particularly high, the V attacca lamp 9F lights up brightly. When the brightness data (RGB data) of the electric lamp 9H is "AAA", the electric lamp 9H "lights up", and in this case, since the brightness is particularly high, the electric lamp 9H lights up brightly.

The term "blinking" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is in a state other than the above-mentioned "off" or "on" and in which the brightness of each lamp when it is on alternates between a first brightness and a second brightness higher than the first brightness. For example, "blinking" includes repeating on and off or almost off, and specifically, "blinking" includes switching over time between a case in which the brightness data is any of "2" to "F" and a case in which the brightness data is "0" or "1". As described above, in this embodiment, there is a hazy lighting as a lighting state of the lamp, but the hazy lighting is a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing its brightness, whereas the blinking is a state in which all of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are repeatedly lit and off or almost off.

<Presentation Mode of Pachinko Game Machine 1>
Next, the performance of the pachinko game machine 1 during a game will be described with reference to Figures 55 to 164. In this embodiment, the performance when any one of the main variable numbers 9, 12, 15, 20, 23, and 26 is selected will be described.

Specifically, when the variation pattern of main variation number 9 is selected, among the multiple routes shown in FIG. 33, the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), the teasing part of SP first half reach A (2), and the miss epilogue part of SP first half reach A (4), or the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), the teasing part of SP first half reach B (5), and the miss epilogue part of SP first half reach B (7).

When the variation pattern of main variation number 12 is selected, the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach A teasing part (2), role operation part (8), SP second half reach A teasing part (9), SP second half reach A miss epilogue part (11), or the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach A teasing part (2), role operation part (8), SP second half reach B teasing part (12), SP second half reach B miss epilogue part (14). ), or the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), the hype part of the SP first half reach B (5), the device operation part (8), the hype part of the SP second half reach A (9), and the miss epilogue part of the SP second half reach B (14), or the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), the hype part of the SP first half reach B (5), the device operation part (8), the hype part of the SP second half reach B (12), and the miss epilogue part of the SP second half reach B (14).

When the variation pattern of main variation number 15 is selected, the performance will transition in the following order: start part (1), SP first half reach A teasing part (2), reel operation part (8), SP final reach teasing part (15), SP final reach miss epilogue part (17), or the performance will transition in the following order: start part (1), SP first half reach B teasing part (5), reel operation part (8), SP final reach teasing part (15), SP final reach miss epilogue part (17).

When the variation pattern of main variation number 20 is selected, the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach A teasing part (2), and SP first half reach A winning epilogue part (3), or the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach B teasing part (5), and SP first half reach B winning epilogue part (6).

When the variation pattern of main variation number 20 is selected, the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach A teasing part (2), role operation part (8), SP second half reach A teasing part (9), SP second half reach A winning epilogue part (10), or the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach A teasing part (2), role operation part (8), SP second half reach B teasing part (12), SP second half reach B winning epilogue part (13). ), or the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach B teasing part (5), device operation part (8), SP second half reach A teasing part (9), SP second half reach B winning epilogue part (10), or the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach B teasing part (5), device operation part (8), SP second half reach B teasing part (12), SP second half reach B winning epilogue part (13).

When the variation pattern of main variation number 26 is selected, the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach A teasing part (2), reel operation part (8), SP final reach teasing part (15), and SP final reach winning epilogue part (16), or the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach B teasing part (5), reel operation part (8), SP final reach teasing part (15), and SP final reach winning epilogue part (16).

The figure also shows the state of each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 and the sound effects output from the speakers 8L, 8R. In this embodiment, the re-lottery part is always executed after the winning epilogue, but there may be a variation pattern in which the re-lottery effect is not executed and ends with the winning epilogue part. In addition, although the description of the variation pattern corresponding to the rescue hit part has been omitted from the example of the total variation pattern, the variation pattern corresponding to the rescue hit part will also be explained. In addition, since the variation time is longer in the case of a hit than in the variation pattern of a miss, the rescue hit part, which appears to be a miss but is actually a hit, may use that variation time to execute the effect of the rescue hit part.

[Direction in the starting part]
The presentation mode in the start part will be described with reference to Figures 55 to 61.

As shown in FIG. 55 (a1), when variable display (changing display) starts based on one reserved memory, on the screen of the image display device 5, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the fourth symbol 5J is variably displayed, and further, the small symbol 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including images of characters and scenery is displayed as the background during the variable display. In this embodiment, an image of a flying girl named Yume Yume-chan is displayed as the character that appears in the change during the normal game state. Yume Yume-chan is a main character that appears as an ally character in the performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1.

When the variation starts, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the normal background. During the variable display, sound effects are output from the speakers 8L, 8R as appropriate, but the sound effects are only shown in some of the drawings. The lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in yellow, which corresponds to the normal background, is referred to as "yellow background lighting." The performance control CPU 120 lights up the game effect lamp 9 in a yellow background lighting pattern based on the normal background brightness data table described with reference to Figure 52. Note that "lighting" here includes constant lighting, wave lighting, and hazy lighting, as described with reference to Figures 53 and 54, and the same applies in the following explanations.

As shown in FIG. 55(a2), after the left and right decorative symbols reach a reach state where they temporarily stop at the "2" symbol, the "NEXT" symbol stops as a pseudo consecutive symbol in the center symbol. The "NEXT" symbol stops, indicating that the second pseudo variation will begin. When the "NEXT" symbol stops, the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. Note that "flashing" here includes the lamp repeatedly turning on and off, as explained with reference to FIG. 53 and FIG. 54, and this also applies to the following explanation. After that, as shown in FIG. 55(a3), the letters "x2" are displayed, indicating that the second variable display will be performed by the pseudo consecutive performance. When "x2" is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white twice.

After that, as shown in FIG. 56(a4), the re-change is performed as the second change of the pseudo-change. The letters "x2" are displayed in small letters in the upper left corner of the screen, indicating that this is the second variable display. During the re-change, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a pattern with a yellow background. After that, as shown in FIG. 56(a5), after the reach state is reached, the "NEXT" symbol stops as a pseudo consecutive symbol in the middle symbol. The stopping of the "NEXT" symbol indicates that the third change of the pseudo-change will start. When the "NEXT" symbol stops, the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. After that, as shown in FIG. 56(a6), the letters "x3" are displayed, indicating that the third variable display will be performed by the pseudo consecutive performance. When "x3" is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white twice.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57(a7), a pseudo re-change is performed as the third variable display. In the upper left corner of the screen, the letters "x3" are displayed in small letters to indicate that this is the third variable display. During the re-change, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a pattern with the background lit yellow. After that, as shown in FIG. 57(a8), a "2" stops in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, and a "2" also stops in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, resulting in a reach state called reach tenpai. During reach tenpai, the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. Then, as shown in FIG. 57(a9), the background starts to darken and the screen goes dark while the middle pattern remains variable in the reach tenpai state. When the background starts to darken, the game effect lamp 9 lights up red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (a10), an image in the shape of a shutter (hereinafter simply referred to as the shutter) is displayed so as to hide the display of the decorative pattern and Yume Yume's character image. The shutter layer has a higher priority than the decorative pattern layer and the Yume Yume character layer. High priority means that the image layer is located on the front side. As shown in FIG. 58 (a10), the shutter is displayed closing from the top and bottom of the screen toward the center of the screen. The shutter image makes it impossible to see the image behind the shutter. Also, the screen brightness gradually decreases as the shutter gradually closes. When the shutter is closed as shown in (a10), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while gradually decreasing in brightness.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (a11), the shutter closes further and the screen brightness drops below that at time (a10). In the state where the shutter is closed at (a11), the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 drops further from that at time (a10) and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (a12), the shutter closes further and the screen brightness drops below that at time (a11). In the state where the shutter is closed at (a12), the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 drops further from that at time (a11) and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. The screen brightness gradually drops from (a10) to (a12) so that, for example, the relationship is (a10) 75% > (a11) 50% > (a12) 25%. Also, the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 gradually drops from (a10) to (a12).

Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (a13), the shutter closes completely. With the shutter in the closed state at (a13), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red with the brightness of the lamp 9 remaining the same as at time (a12). Thereafter, the shutter remains closed from FIG. 59 (a14) to (a15). With the shutter remaining closed at (a14) and (a15), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red with the brightness of the lamp 9 remaining the same as at time (a13).

After that, the screen brightness gradually increases as the shutter gradually opens from (a16) to (a18) in FIG. 60. When the shutter is open at (a16), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while maintaining the same brightness as at (a15). After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (a17), the shutter opens further and the screen brightness increases compared to (a16). When the shutter is open at (a17), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while maintaining the same brightness as at (a16). After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (a18), the shutter opens further and the screen brightness increases compared to (a17). When the shutter is open at (a18), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while maintaining the same brightness as at (a17).

The screen brightness gradually increases from (a16) to (a17) so that the relationship is, for example, (a16) 25% < (a17) 50% < (a18) 75%. The game effect lamp 9 is lit in red while maintaining the brightness from (a16) to (a18). Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (a19), when the shutter is fully opened, a screen corresponding to the SP first half reach A is displayed. When the shutter is open at (a19), the screen brightness is 100%. When the shutter is open at (a19), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. Note that it may be "almost turned off" instead of "turned off". When the shutter is opened, if it has been decided to move to the SP first half reach B, a screen corresponding to the SP first half reach B is displayed. If SP first half reach A is executed from the (a19) state, the performance will transition to that of Figure 62 (b1), and if SP first half reach B is executed from the (a19) state, the performance will transition to that of Figure 72 (e1).

[Performance in the provocation part (first half of SP Reach A)]
With reference to Figures 62 to 67, the presentation in the teasing part (SP first half reach A) will be described. The teasing part (SP first half reach A) is a part in which a story unfolds in which Yume Yume, an ally character, chases the enemy character Bakuchu. In the teasing part (SP first half reach A), a story unfolds in which Yume Yume will win if she can catch Bakuchu, and will lose if she cannot.

As shown in FIG. 62(b1), in the promotional part where SP first half reach A is executed, the title "Catch Bakuchu!" corresponding to SP first half reach A is displayed. The title display indicates the content of the SP first half performance that will be executed. When the title display (b1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. After that, as shown in FIG. 62(b2), the title display is erased and an image showing an enemy character called Bakuchu landing is displayed. When the title display (b2) is erased, the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. Also, when the image related to the title display (b2) disappears, BGM corresponding to SP first half reach A is output. After that, as shown in FIG. 62(b3), an image of the enemy character Bakuchu landing in the center of the screen and posing is displayed. When the enemy character (b3) appears, the game effect lamp 9 is lit red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (b4), an image of a confrontation between friendly character Yume Yume and enemy character Bakuchu is displayed in the center of the screen. In the confrontation state of (b4), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side where Yume Yume is displayed lights up in green corresponding to the Yume Yume character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side where Bakuchu is displayed lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. After that, as shown in (b5), a subtitle display "I found you" corresponding to Yume Yume's line "I found you" is displayed on the screen where the characters are confronting each other. In the confrontation state of (b5), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side flashes in green corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (b6), the subtitle "Found" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other, corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Found." In the facing state of (b6), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in green, corresponding to Yume-chan's character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side flashes in red, corresponding to Bakuchu speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64 (b7), Yume Yume, an ally character, is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (b7), on the Yume Yume close-up screen, a subtitle display "I'll catch you!" is displayed, which corresponds to Yume Yume's line "I'll catch you!". Also, in the Yume Yume close-up state of (b7), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. Then, as shown in (b8), an image of Yume Yume chasing Bakuchu is displayed. Also, in the Yume Yume chasing state of (b8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green corresponding to Yume Yume speaking the line "Too". Then, as shown in (b9), an image of Bakuchu running away from Yume Yume is displayed. Also, in the Bakuchu running away state of (b9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red corresponding to Bakuchu speaking the line "Hehehe".

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (b10), the background of the room is displayed on the screen. In the state of the room background of (b10), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (b11), an image of Yume Yume on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (b11), the subtitle display "Wait~" corresponding to Yume Yume's line "Wait~" is displayed on the screen of chasing Yume Yume. In addition, the sound of Yume Yume's footsteps "Zazz zazzazz" is output as a physical sound (hereinafter referred to as physical sound) in accordance with the image of Yume Yume. In addition, the sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "Ta-ta-ta-ta-ta" is output as a physical sound in accordance with the image of Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of chasing Yume Yume of (b11), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes in green in response to Yume Yume speaking. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red in response to the character Bakuchu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (b12), an image of Yume Yume on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (b11), the physical sound of Yume Yume's footsteps, "Zzz zazzz," is output in sync with the image of Yume Yume. Also, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, "Tatatatatat," is output in sync with the image of Bakuchu. Also, in the Yume Yume chasing state of (b12), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in green corresponding to Yume Yume's character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (b13), Bakuchu's back is displayed, along with part of Yume Yume's hand, and the screen changes to one in which Bakuchu runs away from Yume Yume. As shown in (b13), on the screen in which Bakuchu is running away, a subtitle "I won't get caught!" is displayed, which corresponds to Bakuchu's line "I won't get caught!". In addition, the physical sound of Yume Yume's footsteps "Zzz zazzz" is output in sync with the image of Yume Yume. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "Ta ta ta tat" is output in sync with the image of Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of Bakuchu running away in (b13), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red in response to Bakuchu speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (b14), an image is displayed of Bakuchu on the right side of the screen jumping to escape from Yume-chan on the left side of the screen. As shown in (b14), the sound of Bakuchu jumping "Pyoon" is output as an artificial sound (hereinafter referred to as an onomatopoeia) to accompany the image of Bakuchu jumping. Also, in the Bakuchu jump state of (b14), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white to indicate that Bakuchu is jumping. After that, as shown in (b15), the enemy character Bakuchu is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (b15), on the Bakuchu up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red to indicate the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (b16), the ally character Yume Yume-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (b16), on the Yume Yume close-up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the Yume Yume-chan character. Then, as shown in (b17), an image of Yume Yume-chan jumping and pounces on the Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (b17), on the Yume Yume Jump screen, Yume Yume-chan's line "Got it!" is output. Also, in the Yume Yume Jump state of (b17), the background music is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white three times corresponding to Yume Yume-chan jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (b18), a screen in which Yume Yume-chan is enlarged and displayed at the time of deciding whether or not the win has been determined is displayed. Also, in the scene before the win/loss decision in (b18), the game effect lamp 9 remains lit in white to correspond to the win/loss decision scene. By muting the sound in the scene before the win/loss decision, it is easy to understand that this is the branching scene for winning/loss decision. If it is determined from the state of (b18) that there will be a big win in the SP first half reach A, the performance transitions to (c1). If it is determined from the state of (b18) that there will be a miss in the SP first half reach A, the performance transitions to (d1). If it is determined from the state of (b18) that there will be a development to the latter half of the SP reach, the performance transitions to (h1).

[Performance in the epilogue part (first half of the SP Reach A)]
The performance of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) will be described with reference to Figures 68 to 69. The winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) is a part in which the story of Yume Yume catching Bakuchu unfolds, and it is announced that the game will be controlled to a big win game state.

As shown in Figure 68 (c1), in the winning epilogue part of Reach A in the first half of the SP, an image of Yume Yume catching the tail of a Bakuchu with her hand is displayed. Also, in the state of catching a Bakuchu in (c1), the physical sound of Yume Yume catching a Bakuchu, "Bam!", is output in time with the image of Yume Yume catching a Bakuchu. Also, in the state of catching a Bakuchu in (c1), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in a white lighter than the white light of (tb18) which indicates the lighting mode of (b18) in response to catching a Bakuchu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68(c2), an image of Yume-chan making a V sign after catching the Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (c2), in the state of catching the Bakuchu, a subtitle display "Easy win!" is displayed, which corresponds to Yume-chan's line "Easy win!". Also, in the state of (c2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors to indicate a big win. Hereinafter, the smooth lighting of rainbow colors is also referred to as rainbow lighting (smooth). Also, in the state of (c2), background music for a win is output. After that, as shown in (c3), an image of Yume-chan making a V sign after catching the Bakuchu is displayed as a still image in a comic book style. In the still image state of (c3), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69(c4), a pattern display effect is executed in which the decorative pattern combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (c4), the pattern "222" is enlarged and emphasized by a converging line. In the pattern display state of (c4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in a bright white color. After that, as shown in (c5), the pattern combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (c4). In the pattern display state of (c5), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (c6), the pattern combination "222" is displayed in a normal size, further reduced than in the state of (c5). In the two-pattern (normal size) state of (c6), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Performance in the Miss Epilogue Part (First Half of SP Reach A)]
The presentation in the miss epilogue part (SP first half reach A) will be described with reference to Figures 70 to 71. The miss epilogue part (SP first half reach A) is a part in which the story unfolds in which Yume Yume fails to catch the Bakuchu, and it is announced that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state.

As shown in Figure 70 (d1), in the miss epilogue part of Reach A in the first half of the SP, an image of Yume Yume failing to catch the Bakuchu is displayed. Also, in the (d1) state where the Bakuchu cannot be caught, the onomatopoeic sound of Yume Yume failing to catch the Bakuchu, "Skatch", is output in sync with the image of Yume Yume failing to catch the Bakuchu. Also, in the (d1) state where the Bakuchu cannot be caught, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (tb18) which indicates the lighting mode of (b18), in response to the failure to catch the Bakuchu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (d2), an image is displayed in which Yume Yume, who was unable to catch Bakuchu, kneels in disappointment while Bakuchu is happy. As shown in (d2), in the disappointing state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (td1) showing the lighting mode of (d1). After that, as shown in (d3), the screen goes dark. In the screen dark state of (d3), the game effect lamp 9 goes out. After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (d4), the pattern "232", which is a losing pattern combination, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state in (d4) where the normal screen is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same yellow background lighting pattern as (ta1) showing the lighting mode of (a1).

[Performance in the provocation part (first half of SP Reach B)]
With reference to Figures 72 to 77, the presentation in the hype part (SP first half reach B) will be described. The hype part (SP first half reach B) is a part in which a story unfolds in which friendly character Yume Yume and enemy character Boingo face off in hockey. In the hype part (SP first half reach B), a story unfolds to hype up the fact that if Yume Yume beats Boingo, it will be a big hit, and if she loses to Boingo, it will be a loss.

As shown in FIG. 72 (e1), in the promotional part where SP first half reach B is executed, the title "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" corresponding to SP first half reach B is displayed. The title display indicates the content of the performance of the SP first half that will be executed from now on. When the title display of (e1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (e2), an image is displayed in which the screen is cracked and the title display is erased. When the screen is cracked and the title display is erased in (e2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green. After that, as shown in (e3), an image of the opponent character appearance is displayed in which the ally character Yume Yume and the enemy character Boingo appear on the screen. When the opponent character appears in (e3), the game effect lamp 9 lights up green.

After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (e4), an image of a confrontation between Yume Yume, who is an ally character at the front left of the screen, and Boingo, who is an enemy character at the back right of the screen, is displayed. In the confrontation state of (e4), the left side of the game effect lamp 9 where Yume Yume is displayed lights up in green corresponding to the Yume Yume character. Also, the right side of the game effect lamp 9 where Boingo is displayed lights up in cream color corresponding to the Boingo character. Also, when the title display of (e4) disappears, BGM corresponding to the SP first half reach B is output. After that, as shown in (e5), a subtitle display "I won't lose" corresponding to Yume Yume's line "I won't lose" is displayed on the screen where the characters are confronting each other. In the confrontation state of (e5), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side flashes in green corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in cream color corresponding to the Boingo character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (e6), the subtitle "Come on!" corresponding to Boingo's line "Come on!" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (e6), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in green corresponding to Yume Yume's character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side flashes in cream color corresponding to Boingo speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 74 (e7), an image of Yume Yume, an ally character, shooting the puck is displayed. Also, as shown in (e7), on the screen during Yume Yume's turn, Yume Yume's line "Yaaa~" is output. Also, in the Yume Yume turn state of (e7), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green corresponding to Yume Yume's line. After that, as shown in (e8), the puck shot by Yume Yume is displayed in an enlarged manner. Also, in the puck display state of (e8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white twice corresponding to the physical sound "shoo" of the puck moving. After that, as shown in (e9), an image of Boingo blocking Yume Yume's puck is displayed. Also, in the Boingo blocking state of (e9), the game effect lamp 9 lights up cream corresponding to the Boingo character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 75 (e10), an image of the puck flying through the air is displayed. In the state of (e10) of flying through the puck, the physical sound of the puck spinning, "Shurruru," is output. Also, in the state of (e10), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in green corresponding to the character Yume Yume-chan. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in cream color corresponding to the character Boingo. After that, as shown in (e11), an image of the enemy character Boingo shooting the puck is displayed. Also, as shown in (e11), on the screen during Boingo's turn, Boingo's line "Yoisho~" is output. Also, in the state of Boingo's turn (e11), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in cream color corresponding to Boingo speaking. After that, as shown in (e12), the puck shot by Boingo is enlarged and displayed. Also, in the puck display state of (e12), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white, corresponding to the physical sound of the puck moving, "shoo."

After that, as shown in FIG. 76 (e13), Yume Yume receives damage by receiving the puck directly, and an image of electricity running through her bones is displayed. As shown in (e13), in the Yume Yume damage state, Yume Yume's line "Wow" is output. Also, in the Yume Yume damage state of (e13), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to Yume Yume receiving damage. After that, as shown in (e14), an image of Yume Yume receiving damage, electricity running through her bones is displayed. Also, in the Yume Yume damage state of (e14), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to Yume Yume receiving damage. After that, as shown in (e15), an image of Yume Yume receiving damage, electricity running through her bones is displayed in the same content as (e13). Also, in the Yume Yume damage state of (e15), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to Yume Yume receiving damage.

After that, as shown in FIG. 77 (e16), Yume Yume is damaged, and an image of electricity running through her bones is displayed in the same manner as in (e14). Also, in the Yume Yume damage state of (e16), the background music is turned off, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white in response to Yume Yume receiving damage. After that, as shown in (e17), the scene before the win/loss determination is displayed, in which the state of Yume Yume receiving damage is displayed. In the scene before the win/loss determination of (e17), the game effect lamp 9 remains lit in white to correspond to the scene before the win/loss determination. Since the scene before the win/loss determination is muted, it is easy to understand that this is the branching scene of the win/loss determination. If it is determined that the SP first half reach B will be a big hit from the state of (e17), the performance transitions to (f1). If it is determined that the SP first half reach B will be a miss from the state of (e17), the performance transitions to (g1). If it is determined that the game will progress from state (e17) to the second half of the SP Reach, the game will transition to the performance shown in (h1).

[Performance in the epilogue part (first half of the SP reach B)]
The performance of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) will be described with reference to Figures 78 to 80. The winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) is a part in which the story of Yume Yume's victory over Boingo unfolds, and it is announced that the game will be controlled to a big win game state.

As shown in Figure 78 (f1), in the winning epilogue part of Reach B in the first half of the SP, an image of Yume Yume hitting back the puck is displayed. Also, in the Yume Yume attack state of (f1) where Yume Yume attacks by hitting back the puck, the subtitle "Go!" is displayed, which corresponds to Yume Yume's line "Go!". Also, in the Yume Yume attack state of (f1), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in a brighter white than the white of (te17) which indicates the lighting mode of (e17), in response to Yume Yume attacking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 78 (f2), an image of Boingo being blown away by Yume Yume's attack is displayed. As shown in (f2), when Boingo is attacked, a subtitle display "Wow!" corresponding to Boingo's line "Wow!" is displayed. Also, in the state of (f2), the game effect lamp 9 turns into a rainbow light (smooth) indicating a big win. Also, in the state of (f2), a background music for a win is output. After that, as shown in (f3), an image of a Yume Yume victory is displayed, in which Yume Yume pumps her fist and Boingo falls down. As shown in (f3), when in the state of a Yume Yume victory, a subtitle display "Easy win!" corresponding to Yume Yume's line "Easy win!" is displayed. Also, in the state of (f3), the game effect lamp 9 turns into a rainbow light (smooth).

After that, as shown in (f4), the image of the dream victory is displayed as a still image in a comic book style. In the still image state of (f4), the game effect lamp 9 is lit in rainbow (smooth). After that, as shown in FIG. 79 (f5), a pattern display effect is executed in which the decorative pattern combination "222" indicating the big win display result is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (f5), the pattern display enlarges the "222" pattern and emphasizes the pattern with a converging line. In the pattern display state of (f5), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (f6), the pattern combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (f5). In the pattern display state of (f6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in FIG. 80 (f7), the pattern combination "222" is displayed in a normal size, further reduced than in the state of (f6). In the (f7) 2 symbol (normal size) state, the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) state.

[Performance in the Miss Epilogue Part (First Half of SP Reach B)]
The presentation of the miss epilogue part (SP first half reach B) will be described with reference to Figures 81 and 82. The miss epilogue part (SP first half reach B) is a part in which the story of Yume Yume's defeat by Boingo unfolds, and it is announced that the game will not be controlled to a big win game state.

As shown in Figure 81 (g1), in the miss epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach B, an image of Yume Yume being blown away by Boingo's attack is displayed. As shown in (g1), in the state where Yume Yume is blown away, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (te17) which indicates the lighting mode of (e17) corresponding to Yume Yume being blown away. After that, as shown in (g2), an image of Yume Yume being blown away further than in the state of (g1) is displayed. As shown in (g2), in the state where Yume Yume is blown away, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (te17) which indicates the lighting mode of (e17) corresponding to Yume Yume being blown away.

After that, as shown in FIG. 81 (g3), an image is displayed in which Yume Yume, who was defeated by Boingo, kneels in disappointment while Boingo smiles. As shown in (g3), in the disappointment state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (tg1) and (tg2) which indicate the lighting modes of (g1) and (g2). After that, as shown in FIG. 82 (g4), the screen goes dark. In the screen dark state of (g4), the game effect lamp 9 goes out. After that, as shown in FIG. 82 (g5), the pattern "232", which is a losing pattern combination, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state in (g5) where the normal screen is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a yellow background lighting pattern common to (ta1) which indicates the lighting mode of (a1).

[Performance during the role action part (later development)]
With reference to Figure 83, the presentation mode in the reel action part (later development) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 83 (h1), when the SP first half reach A or SP first half reach B develops into any of the latter half SP reaches among SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B, and SP strongest reach, the movable body 32 as the reel moves. Specifically, an effect is executed in which the reel falls while tilting diagonally from the top of the screen toward the front of the screen. As shown in (h1), a radial effect image is displayed on the screen in response to the start of the reel's fall. The effect image makes it impossible to see the Yume Yume character or the reduced decorative pattern of the "2". Also, in the (h1) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes red in response to the reel's fall.

After that, in the state (h2), the reel falls further from the state (h1). In the state (h2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red in accordance with the fall of the reel. After that, in the state (h3), the reel falls further to a position where the character "P" of the reel overlaps with the location where the reduced "2" decorative pattern was displayed. In the state (h3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. From the state (h3), a performance in which the reel rises is executed. If it is determined that the reel will develop into the SP second half reach A after the reel rises, the performance shifts to (i1). If it is determined that the reel will develop into the SP second half reach B after the reel rises, the performance shifts to (n1). If it is determined that the reel will develop into the SP final reach after the reel rises, the performance shifts to (r1).

[Performance in the provocation part (SP second half reach A)]
With reference to Figures 84 to 96, the presentation in the teasing part (SP latter half reach A) will be described. The teasing part (SP latter half reach A) is a part in which a story unfolds in which friendly characters Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan chase enemy character Bakuchu. In the teasing part (SP latter half reach A), a story unfolds in which if Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan can catch Bakuchu, it will be a big hit, but if Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan cannot catch Bakuchu, it will be a miss.

As shown in FIG. 84 (i1), in the teasing part where SP latter half reach A is executed, the title corresponding to SP latter half reach A, "Catch Bakuchu!", is displayed. The title display shows the content of the performance of the SP latter half reach that will be executed from now on. When the title display of (i1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. After that, as shown in (i2), an image of a confrontation between the friendly characters Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan (the characters on the left side) and the enemy character Bakuchu, facing each other in the center of the screen, is displayed. In the confrontation state of (i2), the game effect lamp 9 is lit in white on the left side where Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan are displayed, corresponding to the two characters. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in red on the right side where Bakuchu is displayed, corresponding to the Bakuchu character. In addition, when the image related to the title display of (i2) disappears, BGM corresponding to SP latter half reach A is output. After that, as shown in (i3), the subtitle "I won't let you get away!" corresponding to Yume Yume's line "I won't let you get away!" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (i3), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes green corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 85 (i4), the subtitle display "I'll help you too!" corresponding to Jam's line "I'll help you too!" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (i4), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes purple corresponding to Jam's line. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up red corresponding to Bakuchu's character. After that, as shown in (i5), the subtitle display "I'll run away again!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "I'll run away again!" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (i5), the game effect lamp 9 on the left lights up white corresponding to the two characters Yume Yume and Jam. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right flashes red corresponding to Bakuchu's line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 85 (i6), when Jam-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "I'll catch you!" is displayed, which corresponds to Jam-chan's line "I'll catch you!". In the Jam-chan display state of (i6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes purple, corresponding to Jam-chan speaking. After that, as shown in FIG. 86 (i7), when Yume-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "Let's go!" is displayed, which corresponds to Yume-chan's line "Let's go!". In the Yume-Yume display state of (i7), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green, corresponding to Yume-Yume speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 86 (i8), when Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Bring it on!" is displayed, which corresponds to Bakuchu's line "Bring it on!". In the Bakuchu display state of (i8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red, which corresponds to Bakuchu's line. After that, as shown in (i9), when an image of Jam chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Wait!" is displayed, which corresponds to Jam's line "Wait!". In the Jam chasing state of (i9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes purple, which corresponds to Jam speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87 (i10), when an image of Bakuchu running away from Jam-chan is displayed, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" is output. Also, in the state of Bakuchu running away in (i10), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red in response to Bakuchu running away. After that, as shown in FIG. 87 (i11), the background of the room is displayed on the screen. In the state of the room background in (i11), the game effect lamp 9 lights up yellow. After that, as shown in (i12), an image of Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. Also, as shown in (i12), the subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "Wait!" is displayed on the screen chasing Jam. As shown in (i12), the physical sound of Jam-chan's footsteps "Zzzzzzzzz" is output in accordance with the image of Jam-chan. Additionally, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, "tatatatat," is output in sync with the image of Bakuchu. Also, in the Jam chasing state of (i12), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes purple, corresponding to Jam-chan speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up red, corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (i13), an image of Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i13), the physical sound of Jam-chan's footsteps, "Zazz zazz," is output in sync with the image of Jam-chan. Also, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, "Ta-ta-ta-ta-ta," is output in sync with the image of Bakuchu. Also, in the Jam chasing state of (i13), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in purple corresponding to the Jam-chan character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. After that, as shown in (i14), an image of Jam-chan jumping and jumping on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i14), in the Jam jump state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to Jam-chan jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (i15), an image of Bakuchu on the right side of the screen jumping to escape from Jam-chan on the left side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i15), the onomatopoeic sound of Bakuchu jumping "Pyoon" is output in accordance with the image of Bakuchu jumping. Also, in the Bakuchu jump state of (i15), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to Bakuchu jumping. After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (i16), an image of Jam-chan failing to catch Bakuchu is displayed. Also, in the unable to catch Bakuchu state of (i16), a subtitle display "I can't catch it" is displayed, which corresponds to Jam-chan's line "I can't catch it". Also, in accordance with the image of Jam-chan failing to catch Bakuchu, the onomatopoeic sound of Jam-chan failing to catch it "Skatch" is output. Also, in the (i16) state where the Bakuchu cannot be caught, the left game effect lamp 9 flashes purple, corresponding to Jam-chan speaking. Also, the right game effect lamp 9 lights up red, corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (i17), when Yume Yume is displayed, the subtitle "I'm next!" is displayed, which corresponds to Yume Yume's line "I'm next!". In the Yume Yume display state of (i17), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. After that, as shown in (i18), an image of Yume Yume chasing Bakuchu is displayed. In the Bakuchu chasing state of (i18), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green corresponding to Yume Yume taking action.

After that, as shown in FIG. 90 (i19), when an image of Bakuchu running away from Yume Yume is displayed, the sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" is output as a physical sound. Also, in the state of Bakuchu running away in (i19), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red in response to Bakuchu running away. After that, as shown in FIG. 90 (i20), the background of the room is displayed on the screen. In the state of the room background in (i20), the game effect lamp 9 lights up yellow. After that, as shown in (i21), an image of Yume Yume on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i21), the subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Yume Yume's line "Wait!" is displayed on the screen of chasing Yume Yume. Also, as shown in (i21), the sound of Yume Yume's footsteps "Zazz zazz" is output as a physical sound in accordance with the image of Yume Yume. Additionally, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, "tatatatat," is output in sync with the image of Bakuchu. Also, in the Yume Yume chasing state of (i21), the left game effect lamp 9 flashes green, corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. Also, the right game effect lamp 9 lights up red, corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 91 (i22), an image of Yume Yume on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i22), the physical sound of Yume Yume's footsteps, "Zazz zazz," is output in sync with the image of Yume Yume. Also, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, "Tatatatata," is output in sync with the image of Bakuchu. Also, in the Yume Yume chasing state of (i22), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume Yume. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the character of Bakuchu. After that, as shown in (i23), an image of Yume Yume jumping and jumping on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i23), in the Yume Yume jump state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white three times corresponding to Yume Yume jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 91 (i24), an image of Bakuchu on the right side of the screen jumping to escape from Jam-chan on the left side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i24), the onomatopoeic sound of Bakuchu jumping "Pyoon" is output in accordance with the image of Bakuchu jumping. Also, in the Bakuchu jump state of (i24), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to Bakuchu jumping. After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (i25), an image of Yume-chan failing to catch Bakuchu is displayed. Also, in the unable to catch Bakuchu state of (i25), a subtitle display "I can't catch it" is displayed, which corresponds to Yume-chan's line "I can't catch it". Also, in accordance with the image of Yume-chan failing to catch Bakuchu, the onomatopoeic sound of Yume-chan failing to catch it "Skatch" is output. Also, in the state of (i25) where the Bakuchu cannot be caught, the left game effect lamp 9 flashes green, corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. Also, the right game effect lamp 9 lights up red, corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (i26), two allies, Yume Yume and Jam, are displayed. As shown in (i26), when the two allies are displayed, a subtitle "Two people next!" is displayed, corresponding to the two allies' lines "Two people next!". In the state of displaying two allies in (i26), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes purple corresponding to Jam speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right flashes green corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. After that, as shown in (i27), Yume Yume is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, in the Yume Yume up state in (i27), the game effect lamp 9 lights up green corresponding to Yume Yume's character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93 (i28), Jam-chan is displayed enlarged on the left side of the screen, and Yume-Yume-chan is displayed enlarged on the right side of the screen. As shown in (i28), when Yume-Yume and Jam-chan are up, the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in purple, corresponding to Jam-chan's character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in green, corresponding to Yume-Yume-chan's character. After that, as shown in (i29), an image is displayed of Yume-Yume-chan and Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen. As shown in (i29), when the two are chasing each other, the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in white, corresponding to the two characters. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red, corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 30 (i30), an image of Yume Yume and Jam on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen continues to be displayed. In (i30), an image is displayed in which the two are closer to Bakuchu than in (i29). As shown in (i30), the physical sounds of Yume Yume and Jam's footsteps, "Zzz zazzz," are output in sync with the image of Yume Yume and Jam. Also, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, "Ta ta ta tat," is output in sync with the image of Bakuchu. Also, in the state of the two chasing each other in (i30), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in white corresponding to the two characters. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (i31), Jam-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (i31), on the Jam Up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to the Jam-chan character. Then, as shown in (i32), an image of Jam-chan jumping and pounces on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i32), Jam-chan's line "Wow" is output on the Jam Jump screen. Also, in the Jam Jump state of (i32), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple corresponding to Jam-chan jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (i33), Yume Yume-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (i33), in the Yume Yume close-up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume Yume-chan. After that, as shown in FIG. 95 (i34), an image of Yume Yume-chan jumping and pouncing on the Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i35), Yume Yume-chan's line "Wow" is output on the Yume Yume Jump screen. Also, in the Yume Yume Jump state of (i34), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan jumping. After that, as shown in (i35), an image of both Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan jumping and pouncing on the Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i35), in the two-person jump state, the subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to the lines of the two allies "Wait!" is displayed. In the two-person jump state (i35), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white, corresponding to two people jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 95 (i36), an image of Yume Yume and Jam jumping together is displayed as still image 1. In the two-person jump state of (i36), the background music is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 flashes white to indicate that the two are jumping. After that, as shown in FIG. 96 (i37), an image of Yume Yume and Jam jumping together is displayed as still image 2. In the two-person jump state of (i37), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white to indicate that the two are jumping. After that, as shown in (i38), an image of Yume Yume and Jam jumping together is displayed as still image 3. In the two-person jump state of (i38), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white to indicate that the two are jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 96 (i39), the scene advances to the pre-decision scene where Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan are jumping, and still image 4 is displayed. In the pre-decision scene of (i39), the game effect lamp 9 remains lit in white to correspond to the scene before the decision of whether or not the winner has won. As the sound is muted in the scene before the decision of whether or not the winner has won, it is easy to understand that this is the branching scene for deciding whether or not the winner has won. If it has been determined from the (i39) state that there will be a jackpot in the SP's second half Reach A, the performance transitions to (j1). If it has been determined from the (i39) state that there will be a miss in the SP's second half Reach A, or that there will be a rescue hit, the performance transitions to (k1).

[Performance in the epilogue part (SP second half reach A)]
The presentation in the winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach A) will be described with reference to Figures 97 to 98. The winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach A) is a part in which the story of Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan catching Bakuchu unfolds, and it is announced that the game will be controlled to a big win game state.

As shown in Figure 97 (j1), in the winning epilogue part of Reach A in the second half of the SP, an image is displayed of Yume Yume and Jam catching the tail of a Bakuchu with their hands. Also, in the Bakuchu catching state of (j1), the physical sound of Yume Yume and Jam catching a Bakuchu, "Bam!", is output in time with the image of Yume Yume and Jam catching a Bakuchu. Also, in the Bakuchu catching state of (j1), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in a brighter white than the white of (ti39) which indicates the lighting state of (i39) in response to catching a Bakuchu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 97 (j2), Yume-chan, who has caught the Bakuchu, makes a V sign, and an image of Jam-chan riding on the Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (j2), in the state of catching the Bakuchu, a subtitle display "Too bad for you!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "Too bad for you!" is displayed. Also, in the state of (j2), the game effect lamp 9 turns into a rainbow light (smooth) indicating that a jackpot has been hit. Also, in the state of (j2), background music for a hit is output. After that, as shown in (j3), Yume-chan, who has caught the Bakuchu, makes a V sign, and an image of Jam-chan riding on the Bakuchu is displayed as a still image in a comic book style. In the still image state of (j3), the game effect lamp 9 turns into a rainbow light (smooth).

After that, as shown in FIG. 98 (j4), a pattern display effect is executed in which the decorative pattern combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (j4), the pattern "222" is enlarged and emphasized by a converging line. In the pattern display state of (j4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (j5), the pattern combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (j4). In the pattern display state of (j5), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (j6), the pattern combination "222" is further reduced from the state of (j5) and displayed in normal size. In the two pattern (normal size) state of (j6), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Performance in the Miss Epilogue Part (SP Second Half Reach A)]
The presentation in the miss epilogue part (SP latter half reach A) will be described with reference to Figures 99 to 100. The miss epilogue part (SP latter half reach A) is a part in which the story unfolds in which Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan fail to catch the Bakuchu, and it is announced that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state.

As shown in Figure 99 (k1), in the miss epilogue part of Reach A in the second half of the SP, an image is displayed in which Yume Yume and Jam fail to catch the Bakuchu. Also, in the failed Bakuchu state of (k1), the onomatopoeic sound of failure to catch "Skatch" is output in sync with the image of Yume Yume and Jam failing to catch the Bakuchu. Also, in the failed Bakuchu state of (k1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (ti39) which indicates the lighting mode of (i39), in response to the failure to catch the Bakuchu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99 (k2), the Bakuchu is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (k2), the subtitle display "Ushishishi!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Ushishishi!" is displayed on the Bakuchu up screen. In the Bakuchu up state of (k2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (tk1) showing the lighting mode of (k1). After that, as shown in (k3), an image is displayed in which Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan, who were unable to catch the Bakuchu, kneel down in disappointment. As shown in (k3), in the disappointment state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (tk1) showing the lighting mode of (k1). After that, as shown in FIG. 100 (k4), the screen goes dark. In the screen dark state of (k4), the game effect lamp 9 goes out. After that, as shown in (k5), the losing symbol combination "232" is displayed on the normal screen. While the normal screen of (k5) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a yellow background pattern, which is the same as (ta1) showing the lighting mode of (a1). If it is determined that a rescue win will occur from the (k5) state, the display transitions to (v1).

[Performance in the provocation part (SP second half reach B)]
With reference to Figures 101 to 109, the presentation in the hype part (SP latter half reach B) will be described. The hype part (SP latter half reach B) is a part where a story unfolds in which friendly characters Jam-chan and Nana-chan face off against an enemy character, a crab robot. In the hype part (SP latter half reach B), a story unfolds to hype up the fact that if Jam-chan and Nana-chan's crab robot beats Boingo, it will be a big win, but if Jam-chan and Nana-chan lose to the crab robot, it will be a loss.

As shown in FIG. 101 (n1), in the teasing part where the SP second half reach B is executed, the title corresponding to the SP second half reach B, "Gekishin Robo Battle", is displayed. The content of the performance of the SP second half to be executed is displayed by the title display. Below the title display, the expectation of a big win in this reach is displayed by the number of stars. Note that the display indicating the expectation of a big win may be displayed in other SP reaches. In the state where the title display of (n1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. After that, as shown in (n2), an image of a confrontation between the ally characters Jam-chan and Nana-chan (the characters on the left) and the enemy character, a crab robot, is displayed. As shown in (n2), on the screen where the characters are confronting each other, a subtitle display "I won't lose!" corresponding to the lines of the two allies "I won't lose!" is displayed. In the confrontation state of (n2), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes in white in response to the two people uttering their lines. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red, corresponding to the crab character. In addition, when the image related to the title display (n2) disappears, background music corresponding to the SP second half reach B is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 101 (n3), an image of a crab attack in which an enemy character, a crab, shoots a beam is displayed. Also, in the crab attack state of (n3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to the crab's attack. After that, as shown in FIG. 102 (n4), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan running away from the crab's beam is displayed. As shown in (n4), on the screen where the two are running away, a subtitle display "Kyaa!" corresponding to the words "Kyaa!" spoken by the two allies is displayed. In the state where the two are running away of (n4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to the action of the two running away.

After that, as shown in FIG. 102 (n5), an image is displayed in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan escape into a depression in the rocks to escape the crab's beam. In the state of two people jumping in (n5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (n6), an image is displayed in which the beam passes over the rocks. In the state of the beam passing in (n6), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in FIG. 103 (n7), an image is displayed in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan look relieved in the shadow of the rocks. As shown in (n7), the subtitle display "Haa haa" corresponding to Jam's line "Haa haa" is displayed on the screen in which the two are relieved. In the state of confrontation in (n7), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes in purple in response to Jam-chan's line. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right flashes in pink in response to Nana-chan's character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 103 (n8), Jam-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (n8), the subtitle "It's your turn!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "It's your turn!" is displayed on the jam-up screen. Also, in the jam-up state of (n8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes purple corresponding to Jam-chan speaking. After that, as shown in (n9), an image of Jam-chan attacking the crab with the technique called Delta Break is displayed. Also, in the jam attack state of (n9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes purple corresponding to Jam-chan speaking the line "Delta Break".

After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (n10), an image of the crab being damaged by Jam-chan's attack is displayed. Also, in the crab attack state of (n10), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red in response to the crab uttering the line "Grrr". After that, as shown in (n11), an image of a confrontation between Jam-chan and Nana-chan and the crab is displayed. In the confrontation state of (n11), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in white in response to the two characters. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red in response to the crab character. After that, as shown in (n12), an image of a crab attack in which the enemy character crab shoots a beam is displayed. Also, in the crab attack state of (n12), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white twice in response to the crab's attack.

After that, as shown in FIG. 105 (n13), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan running away from the crab's beam is displayed. As shown in (n13), on the screen where the two are running away, a subtitle display "Kyaa!" is displayed, which corresponds to the lines of the two allies saying "Kyaa!". In the state where the two are running away in (n13), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to the action of the two running away. After that, as shown in (n14), an image of the beam approaching Jam-chan and Nana-chan is displayed. In the beam state in (n14), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (n15), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan being hit by the crab's beam and receiving damage is displayed. Also, in the state where the two are receiving damage in (n15), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to the two receiving damage.

After that, as shown in FIG. 106 (n16), an image of the damaged Jam-chan and Nana-chan standing up is displayed. As shown in (n16), on the screen where the two stand up, a subtitle "It's about to begin!" is displayed, corresponding to the lines of the two allies "It's about to begin!" In the state where the two stand up in (n16), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in pink corresponding to Nana-chan's character. After that, as shown in (n17), Nana-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, in the Nana up state in (n17), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink corresponding to Nana-chan's character. After that, as shown in (n18), a screen is displayed where Nana-chan is praying. Nana-chan's prayer action is executed as a performance to confuse the enemy. Also, in the Nana Prayer state (n18), the game effect lamp 9 flashes pink in response to Nana's prayer action.

After that, as shown in FIG. 107 (n19), an image of the crab becoming confused due to Nana's prayer is displayed. Also, in the crab confused state of (n19), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to the crab's confused motion. After that, as shown in (n20), an image of the crab getting angry after recovering from confusion is displayed. In the crab angry state of (n20), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the crab character. After that, as shown in (n21), an image of the crab swinging its arms to attack is displayed. Also, in the crab attacking state of (n21), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red corresponding to the crab's attack.

After that, as shown in FIG. 108 (n22), an image of Nana being attacked by a crab and receiving damage is displayed. Also, in the state of Nana receiving damage in (n22), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white in response to Nana receiving damage. After that, as shown in (n23), an image of Jam holding and operating the remote control is displayed. As shown in (n23), a subtitle display "Leave it to me!" corresponding to Jam's line "Leave it to me!" is displayed on the screen of Jam remote control operation. Also, in the state of Jam remote control operation in (n23), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple in response to Jam speaking. After that, as shown in (n24), an image of Jam trying to press a button on the remote control is displayed. As shown in (n24), in the state of Jam remote control operation, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple in response to Jam operating the remote control.

After that, as shown in FIG. 109 (n25), a presentation in which a hand comes out of the sky is executed. As shown in (n25), when the hand comes out of the sky, the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white. After that, as shown in (n26), an image of a hand reaching out from the sky going to catch a crab is displayed. As shown in (n26), when the hand goes to catch a crab, the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white. After that, as shown in (n27), the scene before the winning or losing decision is displayed, in which an enlarged image of a crab and a hand is displayed. In the scene before the winning or losing decision of (n27), the game effect lamp 9 remains lit in white to correspond to the scene before the winning or losing decision. Since the scene before the winning or losing decision is muted, it is easy to understand that it is a branching scene of the winning or losing decision. If it has been determined that a jackpot will be hit in the SP latter half reach B from the state of (n27), the presentation of (o1) is transitioned to. From the (n27) state, if it is determined that there will be a miss in the second half of the SP, Reach B, or that there will be a rescue hit, the performance will move to (p1).

[Performance in the epilogue part (SP second half reach B)]
The presentation in the winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach B) will be described with reference to Figures 110 to 112. The winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach B) is a part in which the story of Jam-chan and Nana-chan's victory over the crab robot unfolds, and it is announced that the game will be controlled to a big win game state.

As shown in FIG. 110 (o1), in the epilogue part of the winning round in the second half of the SP, Reach B, an image of a hand reaching down from the sky catching a crab is displayed. Also, as shown in (o1), the screen where the crab is caught displays a subtitle "You got me" corresponding to the crab's line "You got me". Also, in the crab catching state of (o1), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in a brighter white than the white of (tn27) which indicates the lighting state of (n27) in response to catching the crab. After that, as shown in (o2), an image of the caught crab set up as the store's signboard is displayed. Also, in the state of (o2) where the crab has become the store's signboard, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow (smooth) indicating that a big win has occurred. Also, in the state of (o2), the background music for a win is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110 (o3), the screen shows Jam-chan and Nana-chan in front of the store with a crab as its signboard. Also, as shown in (o3), the subtitle "Nice sign" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "Nice sign" is displayed on the screen of the store with a crab as its signboard. Also, in the state of the store with a crab as its signboard in (o3), the game effect lamp 9 turns rainbow lit (smooth). After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (o4), the screen shows Jam-chan and Nana-chan in front of the store with a crab as its signboard, and continues. Also, as shown in (o4), the subtitle "Work hard" corresponding to Nana-chan's line "Work hard" is displayed on the screen of the store with a crab as its signboard. Also, in the state of the store with a crab as its signboard in (o4), the game effect lamp 9 turns rainbow lit (smooth). After that, as shown in (o5), the image of the store with a crab as its signboard is displayed as a still image in a comic-style style. In the still image state of (o5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow pattern (smooth).

After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (o6), a pattern display effect is executed in which the decorative pattern combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (o6), the pattern "222" is enlarged and emphasized by a converging line. In the pattern display state of (o6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in FIG. 112 (o7), the pattern combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (o6). In the pattern display state of (o7), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (o8), the pattern combination "222" is further reduced from the state of (o7) and displayed in normal size. In the state of two patterns (normal size) of (o8), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Performance in the Miss Epilogue Part (SP Second Half Reach B)]
The presentation in the failure epilogue part (SP latter half reach B) will be described with reference to Figures 113 and 114. The failure epilogue part (SP latter half reach B) is a part in which a story unfolds in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan are defeated by a crab robot, and it is announced that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 113 (p1), in the failed epilogue part of the SP's second half Reach B, an image of a hand reaching out from the sky failing to catch a crab is displayed. Also, in the crab-cannot-be-caught state of (p1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (tn27) indicating the lighting mode of (n27) corresponding to the failure to catch the crab. After that, as shown in (p2), an image of the crab running away sideways is displayed. In the crab-running state of (p2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (tp1) indicating the lighting mode of (p1). After that, as shown in (p3), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan, who have been escaped by the crab, looking down in disappointment is displayed. Also, as shown in (p3), on the disappointment screen, the subtitle "What a shame" is displayed, corresponding to the lines of the two allies saying "What a shame". Also, as shown in (p3), in the unfortunate state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white color than the white color of (tp1) that indicates the lighting state of (p1).

After that, the screen goes dark as shown in FIG. 114 (p4). In the dark screen state of (p4), the game effect lamp 9 goes out. After that, as shown in (p5), the losing symbol combination "232" is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen of (p5) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a yellow background lighting pattern common to (ta1) which indicates the lighting mode of (a1). If it has been determined that a rescue hit will occur from the state of (p5), the display transitions to (v1).

[Performance in the provocation part (SP final reach)]
With reference to Figures 115 to 132, the presentation in the teasing part (SP final reach) will be described. The teasing part (SP final reach) is a part in which a story unfolds in which six friendly characters, Yume Yume-chan, Jam-chan, Nana-chan, Maid A, Maid B, and AD, chase the enemy character Bakuchu. In the teasing part (SP final reach), a story unfolds to tease that if the six can catch Bakuchu, they will win, but if the six cannot catch Bakuchu, they will lose. The teasing part (SP final reach) is also the reach with the highest chance of winning of all the reaches.

As shown in FIG. 115 (r1), in the promotion part where the SP final reach is executed, the title corresponding to the SP final reach, "Six people, catch Bakuchu!", is displayed. The title display shows the content of the performance of the SP final reach that will be executed from now on. When the title display of (r1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. After that, as shown in (r2), an image of a confrontation is displayed in which the six friendly characters, AD, Maid A, Maid B, Nana-chan, Jam-chan, and Yume-chan, face each other in the center of the screen with the enemy character Bakuchu. On the screen where the characters are confronting each other, the lines of the six friendly characters, "This is the last one," are output. Also, in the confrontation state of (r2), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side flashes in white in response to the six characters uttering lines. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side is lit in red in response to the Bakuchu character. Additionally, when the image related to the title display (r2) disappears, background music corresponding to the SP final reach is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 115 (r3), Bakuchu's line "I'm going to run away again" is output on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (r3), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side is lit in white corresponding to the six characters. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side flashes in red corresponding to Bakuchu's line. After that, as shown in FIG. 116 (r4), when AD is displayed, the subtitle display "Leave it to me!" corresponding to AD's line "Leave it to me!" is displayed. In the AD display state of (r4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in orange corresponding to AD's line. After that, as shown in (r5), when Maid A is displayed, the subtitle display "Watch me" corresponding to Maid A's line "Watch me" is displayed. In the Maid A display state of (r5), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in blue corresponding to Maid A's line. After that, as shown in (r6), when maid B is displayed, the subtitle "I'll do my best" is displayed, which corresponds to maid B's line "I'll do my best." In the maid B display state of (r6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes Hawaiian blue, corresponding to maid B speaking the line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117 (r7), when Nana-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "I'm going to catch you" corresponding to Nana-chan's line "I'm going to catch you" is displayed. In the state of Nana-chan display in (r7), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in pink corresponding to Nana-chan's line being spoken. After that, as shown in (r8), when Jam-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "No problem" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "No problem" is displayed. In the state of Jam-chan display in (r8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's line being spoken. After that, as shown in (r9), when Yume-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "Everyone's going!" corresponding to Yume-chan's line "Everyone's going!" is displayed. In the state of Yume-chan display in (r9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in green corresponding to Yume-chan's line being spoken.

After that, as shown in FIG. 118 (r10), when Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Come on, anyone!" is displayed, which corresponds to Bakuchu's line "Come on, anyone!". In the Bakuchu display state of (r10), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red, corresponding to Bakuchu's line being spoken. After that, as shown in (r11), when an image of Maid A chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Wait!" is displayed, which corresponds to Maid A's line "Wait!". In the jam chasing state of (r11), the game effect lamp 9 flashes blue, corresponding to Maid A speaking. After that, as shown in (r12), when an image of AD and Maid A chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Wait, wait!" is displayed, which corresponds to the two allies' lines "Wait, wait!". In the (r12) AD & Maid A chasing state, the left game effect lamp 9 flashes orange, corresponding to the AD character speaking. Also, the right game effect lamp 9 flashes blue, corresponding to the maid A character speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 119 (r13), when an image of Bakuchuu escaping is displayed, a subtitle display "Will you catch me?" corresponding to Bakuchuu's line "Will you catch me?" is displayed. Also, the sound of Bakuchuu's footsteps "tatatatatap" is output as a physical sound. Also, in the state of Bakuchuu escaping in (r13), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red corresponding to Bakuchuu escaping. After that, as shown in (r14), an image of Bakuchuu escaping and running away from the screen is displayed. Also, the sound of Bakuchuu's footsteps "tatatatatap" is output as a physical sound. Also, in the state of Bakuchuu escaping in (r14), the game effect lamp 9 lights up red. After that, as shown in (r15), a city background is displayed on the screen. In the state of the city background in (r15), the game effect lamp 9 lights up yellow.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (r16), when an image of Nana chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Wait!" corresponding to Nana's line "Wait!" is displayed. In the Nana chasing state of (r16), the game effect lamp 9 flashes pink in response to Nana's line being spoken. After that, as shown in (r17), when an image of Maid B and Nana chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Wait wait!" corresponding to the two allies' lines "Wait wait!" is displayed. In the Maid B & Nana chasing state of (r17), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes Hawaiian blue in response to Maid B's character speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right flashes pink in response to Nana's character speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (r18), when an image of Bakuchu escaping is displayed, the subtitle "Whoa!" is displayed, which corresponds to Bakuchu's line "Whoa!". In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatatap" is output. In addition, in the state of Bakuchu escaping in (r18), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red, corresponding to Bakuchu escaping. After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (r19), the background of a city is displayed on the screen. In the state of the city background in (r19), the game effect lamp 9 is lit yellow.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (r20), when an image of Yume Yume chasing a Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Wait!" corresponding to Yume Yume's line "Wait!" is displayed. In the Yume Yume chasing state of (r20), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. After that, as shown in (r21), when an image of Yume Yume and Jam chasing a Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Wait wait!" corresponding to the two allies' lines "Wait wait!" is displayed. In the Yume Yume & Jam chasing state of (r21), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes purple corresponding to Jam's character speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right flashes green corresponding to Yume Yume's character speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (r22), the background of a city is displayed on the screen. In the state of the city background of (r22), the game effect lamp 9 lights up yellow. After that, as shown in (r23), when the image of Bakuchu escaping is displayed, the subtitle display "Yikes!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "That's bad!" is displayed. Also, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "Ta-ta-ta-ta-ta" is output. Also, in the state of Bakuchu escaping of (r23), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red to indicate that Bakuchu is escaping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (r24), in a scene where the AD character is up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in orange, corresponding to AD. After that, as shown in FIG. 123 (r25), in a scene where the AD jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in orange. At this time, "Ahh!" is output as AD's audible dialogue, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r26), in a scene where the maid A character is up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue, corresponding to maid A. After that, as shown in (r27), in a scene where maid A jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in blue. At this time, "Too!" is output as maid A's audible dialogue, but no subtitles are displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 124 (r28), when the character of maid B is shown up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in Hawaiian blue, which corresponds to maid B. After that, as shown in (r29), when maid B jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in Hawaiian blue. At this time, the same line as maid A, "Too!", is output as maid B's voice sound, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r30), when Nana-chan's character is shown up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink, which corresponds to Nana-chan. After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (r31), when Nana-chan jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in pink. At this time, "Teiya!" is output as Nana-chan's voice sound, but no subtitles are displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (r32), when Jam's character is shown up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple, corresponding to Jam. After that, as shown in (r33), when Jam jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple. At this time, "Gotcha!" is output as Jam's voice sound, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 126 (r34), when Yume Yume's character is shown up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green, corresponding to Yume Yume. After that, as shown in (r35), when Yume Yume jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in green. At this time, "Gotcha!" is output as Yume Yume's voice sound, but no subtitles are displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 126 (r36), an image showing a close-up of the faces of the six characters is displayed on the split screen. As shown in (r36), when the close-up image of the six allies is displayed, the subtitle "This is the last time!" is displayed, corresponding to the lines of the six allies "This is the last time!". Also, in the close-up state of the six allies in (r36), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white, corresponding to the six allies speaking. After that, as shown in FIG. 127 (r37), the close-up image of the six allies continues to be displayed. Also, in the close-up state of the six allies in (r37), the game effect lamp 9 is lit in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 127 (r38), Bakuchu is displayed against the background of the city. Also, in the Bakuchu display state of (r38), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. After that, as shown in (r39), Bakuchu is displayed in an enlarged form. Also, as shown in (r39), when the Bakuchu close-up image is displayed, the subtitle "Yabe!!!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Yabe!!!" is displayed. Also, in the Bakuchu up state of (r39), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red corresponding to Bakuchu speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 128 (r40), an image showing the push button 31B and a time gauge are displayed with a concentration line superimposed on the image of the explosive chocolate up. Also, in the explosive chocolate up + button display state of (r40), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white. After that, if the player operates the button within the button operation valid period, a cut-in display of Nana-chan, Yume-chan, and Jam-chan, the three main characters in the pachinko game machine 1, is displayed on the screen as shown in (r41). A cut-in display is a presentation in which another image is displayed by interrupting a displayed image. Also, the color of the cut-in display can indicate the probability of a jackpot. For example, if the cut-in display is red, the probability of a jackpot is higher than if it is green. Also, in the cut-in state of (r41), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red or green depending on the color of the cut-in display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 128 (r42), after the cut-in display is cleared, an image of six people jumping at the explosive chu is displayed. Also, when the cut-in display is cleared in (r42), the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white. After that, as shown in FIG. 129 (r43), when the screen shows six allies, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white. After that, as shown in (r44), when the screen shows explosive chu, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. After that, as shown in (r45), when the six allies are displayed larger than in (r43), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white. After that, as shown in FIG. 130 (r46), when the explosive chu is displayed larger than in (r44), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

Afterwards, as shown in FIG. 130 (r47), when the six allies are displayed larger than in (r45), the subtitle "I've got you cornered!" is displayed, which corresponds to the six allies' lines "I've got you cornered!". Also, in the state of (r47) where six allies are displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white, corresponding to the six allies speaking. Afterwards, as shown in (r48), the display of Bakuchu and the display of the six allies are displayed alternately. In the state of (r48), the game effect lamp 9 is lit in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 131 (r49), an image is displayed in which images corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) are gathering in the center of the screen. As shown in (r49), a sound corresponding to an operation prompt is output in response to the trigger display gathering in the center, to encourage the player to perform an operation. Also, in the state of (r49) where the trigger display is in the center, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. After that, as shown in (r50), an image is displayed in which the trigger display is gathering more in the center of the screen than in (r49). As shown in (r50), a sound corresponding to an operation prompt is output in response to the trigger display gathering in the center, to encourage the player to perform an operation. Also, in the state of (r50) where the trigger display is in the center, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 131 (r51), an image of Bakuchu is displayed as still image 1. At this time, the words "Pull!" are displayed superimposed on the image of Bakuchu, along with a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge. When the pull indication (still image 1) of (r51) is displayed, a sound corresponding to the operation prompt is output to encourage the player to operate the game. Also, when the pull indication (still image 1) of (r51) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 132 (r52), an image of the Bakuchu is displayed as still image 2. At this time, a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge are displayed together with the word "Pull!" superimposed on the image of the Bakuchu. The time gauge is decreased compared to (r51). In the state where the pull-out display (still image 2) of (r52) is displayed, a sound corresponding to the operation prompt is output, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. After that, as shown in (r53), an image of the Bakuchu is displayed as still image 3. At this time, a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge are displayed together with the word "Pull!" superimposed on the image of the Bakuchu. The time gauge is decreased compared to (r52). In the state where the pull-out display (still image 3) of (r53) is displayed, a sound corresponding to the operation prompt is output, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 132 (r54), the scene before the win/loss decision is made, in which the image of the Bakuchu is displayed as still image 4. At this time, the word "Draw!" is displayed superimposed on the image of the Bakuchu, along with a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge. The time gauge has decreased compared to (r53). In the state in which the draw display (still image 4) is displayed as the scene before the win/loss decision is made in (r54), a sound corresponding to the operation prompt is output and the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. If it has been determined that the SP final reach will result in a big win from the (r54) state, the performance transitions to (s1). If it has been determined that the SP final reach will result in a miss or a rescue win from the (r54) state, the performance transitions to (u1).

[Performance in the winning epilogue part (final SP reach)]
The performance in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach) will be described with reference to Figures 133 to 136. The winning epilogue part (SP final reach) is a part in which the story of six people catching Bakuchu unfolds, and it is announced that the game will be controlled to a big win game state.

As shown in FIG. 133 (s1), in the epilogue part of the winning SP final reach, as shown in (s1), a radial effect image is displayed on the screen in response to the start of the drop of the reel. This effect image is more showy than the effect image when developing into the latter half of the SP reach. In addition, this effect image makes it impossible to see the Bakuchu character or the reduced "2" decorative pattern. In addition, in the (s1) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors in response to the drop of the reel.

After that, in the state of FIG. 133 (s2), the reel falls further from the state of (s1). In the state of (s2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors in accordance with the fall of the reel. After that, in the state of (s3), the reel falls further to a position where the character "P" of the reel overlaps with the position where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" was displayed. In the state of (s3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. A performance in which the reel rises from the state of (s3) is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (s4), in the state after the reel rises, a scene in which Yume-Yume-chan catches Bakuchu is displayed. Also, as shown in (s4), the subtitle display "Uuu, I got caught" corresponding to the Bakuchu's line "Uuu, I got caught" is displayed. In the state of catching Bakuchu of (s4), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow (smooth). Also, in state (s4), background music for a winning combination is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (s5), an image of six people rejoicing after catching a Bakuchu is displayed. Also, as shown in (s5), a subtitle display "Good job, everyone!" is displayed, which corresponds to Yume Yume's line "Good job, everyone!". In the Bakuchu catching state of (s5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbows (smooth). After that, as shown in (s6), an image of six people rejoicing after catching a Bakuchu is displayed. Also, as shown in (s6), a subtitle display "Good job, everyone!" is displayed. In the Bakuchu catching state of (s6), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbows (smooth).

After that, as shown in FIG. 135 (s7), an image of six people rejoicing after catching a Bakuchu is displayed in a comic-style still image. In the still image state of (s7), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow (smooth). After that, as shown in (s8), a pattern display effect is executed in which the decorative pattern combination "222" indicating the big win display result is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (s8), the pattern display enlarges the "222" pattern and emphasizes the pattern with a converging line. In the pattern display state of (s8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (s9), the pattern combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (s8). In the pattern display state of (s9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10), the pattern combination "222" is displayed in a normal size, further reduced from the state of (s9). In the (s10) 2 symbol (normal size) state, the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Performance in the failed epilogue part (final SP reach)]
The presentation in the failure epilogue part (SP final reach) will be described with reference to Figures 137 to 138. The failure epilogue part (SP final reach) is a part in which a story unfolds in which the six players fail to catch the Bakuchu, thereby informing the player that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 137 (u1), in the miss epilogue part of the SP final reach, an image of Bakuchu running away is displayed. Also, in the Bakuchu escaping state of (u1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (tr54) indicating the lighting mode of (r54) in response to not being able to catch Bakuchu. After that, as shown in (u2), an image is displayed of the Bakuchu running away far away, and the six players who were unable to catch Bakuchu are disappointed. Also, as shown in (u2), on the disappointment screen, the subtitle "Sorry~" is displayed, which corresponds to Bakuchu's line "Sorry~". As shown in (u2), in the disappointment state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (tu1) indicating the lighting mode of (u1).

After that, as shown in FIG. 137 (u3), the screen goes dark. In the screen dark state of (u3), the game effect lamp 9 goes out. After that, as shown in FIG. 138 (u4), the losing symbol combination "232" is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen of (u4) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a yellow background lighting pattern common to (ta1) which indicates the lighting mode of (a1). If it has been determined that a rescue hit will occur from the (u4) state, the display transitions to (v1).

[Performance in the rescue part]
The presentation in the rescue hit part will be described with reference to Figures 139 to 140. The rescue hit part is a part where a story of rescue performance that becomes a big hit develops after the development of a losing story. In the rescue hit part, a premium character corresponding to rescue (revival) named Drum-kun, who did not appear in other reaches, appears.

As shown in FIG. 139 (v1), in the rescue hit part, a rescue effect is executed in which a character called Drum-kun is displayed on the screen. By seeing Drum-kun, the player can recognize that it is a revival hit disguised as a miss. In the rescue effect of (v1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a brighter red than (td4, tg5, tp5, tu4). After that, as shown in (v3), the screen goes white. In the whiteout of (v2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (v3), a pattern display effect is executed in which the decorative pattern combination "222" indicating the big win display result is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (v3), the pattern "222" is enlarged and emphasized by a converging line. In the pattern display state of (v3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (v4), the pattern combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (v3). In the pattern display state of (v4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (v5), the pattern combination "222" is further reduced from the state of (v4) and displayed in normal size. In the two pattern (normal size) state of (v5), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Performance in the re-draw part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation)]
With reference to Figures 141 to 156, the performance mode in the re-draw part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation) will be described. In Figures 141 to 156, the flow of a series of performances from the detailed performance of the symbol output in the fanning performance to the button operation in the re-draw performance will be described.

As shown in FIG. 141 (A1), a pattern display effect is executed in which the decorative pattern combination "222", which indicates a jackpot display result, is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (A1), in the two-pattern enlarged state, the "222" pattern is enlarged and emphasized by a converging line. In the two-pattern enlarged state of (A1), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (A2), the pattern combination "222" is displayed larger than in the state of (A1). In the two-pattern enlarged state of (A2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (A3), the pattern combination "222" is displayed in a reduced size. In the two-pattern reduced state of (A3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 142 (A4), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a further reduced size. In the two symbol reduced state of (A4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (A5), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed in normal size. In the two symbol normal size state of (A5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. After that, as shown in (A6), the background changes and the re-lottery performance starts. In the (A6) state, a shaking period occurs in which the symbol combination "222" shakes up and down. In (A6), a screen is displayed in which the symbols have risen from their normal positions to the top. In the two symbol shaking state of (A6), the game effect lamp 9 goes out.

Here, the period during which the symbols are shaking is omitted from the state (A5) to the state (A6). Specifically, the symbols are shaking when they are normal size. After they become normal size, the symbol shaking for the re-draw part continues. At this time, at the timing related to the completion of the symbol release (for example, including the timing just before the symbol becomes normal size, the timing after the symbol becomes normal size, and the timing when the symbol shaking starts), the game effect lamp 9 switches from blinking white to smoothly lighting up in rainbow colors. This allows the smooth symbol release from the symbol release to the re-draw performance, the smooth transition to the shaking period, and the celebration of the symbol alignment to be performed by the illumination of the screen and lamps. After that, during the symbol shaking period of FIG. 143 (A7), a screen in which the symbol has moved downward from the normal position is displayed. During the two-symbol shaking state of (A7), the game effect lamp 9 goes out.

After that, as shown in FIG. 143 (A8), during the pattern shaking period, a screen with the pattern displayed in the center is displayed. As shown in (A8), in the state of two-pattern shaking, the game effect lamp 9 goes out. After that, as shown in (A9), during the period when the movement due to the re-draw performance starts, the two patterns are displayed smaller than in the state of (A8). In the state of two-pattern reduction in (A9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. After that, as shown in FIG. 144 (A10), the two patterns are further reduced from the state of (A9) and displayed. In the state of two-pattern reduction in (A10), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red.

After that, the numbers used as decorative symbols fluctuate at high speed from FIG. 144 (A11) to FIG. 148 (A24), and the display is switched. When the display is switched, the decorative symbols that were temporarily stopped are sequentially replaced with other symbols, and the decorative symbols are switched one after another. For example, as shown in (A11), symbol 2 is displayed lightly during high-speed fluctuation. In the state of fluctuation of (A11), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. After that, in the state of 3 symbols in (A12), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. After that, from FIG. 145 (A13) to FIG. 148 (A23), the symbols fluctuate at high speed and are switched, such as symbol 3, symbol 4, symbol 5, symbol 6, symbol 7, and symbol 1, and light and clear displays are repeated. From Figure 145 (A13) to Figure 148 (A23), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red.

After that, in Fig. 148 (A24), where the high-speed fluctuation that started with the 2 symbols has completed one cycle and the 2 symbols are displayed clearly again, the button image and the time gauge are faintly displayed under the 2 symbols. After that, as shown in Fig. 149 (A25), the button image and the time gauge are clearly displayed while the 2 symbols are displayed faintly during the high-speed fluctuation. From then on, from Fig. 149 (A26) to Fig. 156 (A46), the symbols are switched while fluctuating at high speed, such as 3 symbols, 4 symbols, 5 symbols, 6 symbols, 7 symbols, 1 symbols, 2 symbols, 3 symbols, 4 symbols, 5 symbols, and 6 symbols, and the faint and clear displays are repeated. Also, the time gauge gradually decreases over time. From Fig. 148 (A24) to Fig. 156 (A46), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. Then, when push button 31B is operated from the (A46) state, if it has been determined that an odd numbered symbol will be generated, the display will transition to (B1). When push button 31B is operated from the (A46) state, if it has been determined that an even numbered symbol will be generated, the display will transition to (C1).

[Performance in the re-draw part (odd number pattern derived after button operation)]
With reference to Figures 157 to 160, the performance in the re-selection part (deriving odd symbols after button operation) will be described. In Figures 157 to 160, the flow of a series of performances from when a button is operated in the re-selection performance until an odd symbol is derived will be described.

As shown in FIG. 157 (B1), a pattern display effect is executed in which the decorative pattern combination "333", which indicates a jackpot display result, is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (B1), in the 3-pattern enlarged state, the background becomes brighter, the "333" pattern is enlarged, and the pattern is emphasized by a converging line. In the 3-pattern enlarged state of (B1), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (B2), the pattern combination "333" is displayed larger than in the state of (B1). In the 3-pattern enlarged state of (B2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (B3), the pattern combination "333" is displayed in a reduced size. In the 3-pattern reduced state of (B3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 158 (B4), the symbol combination "333" is further reduced and displayed. In the three symbol reduced state of (B4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (B5), the symbol combination "333" is further reduced and displayed in normal size. In the three symbol normal size state of (B5), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. After that, as shown in (B6), the symbol combination "333" enters a swinging period in which it swings up and down. In (B6), a screen in which the symbols have risen upward from their normal positions is displayed. In the three symbol swing state of (B6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. After that, the background changes to a normal background as shown in FIG. 159 (B7). The symbol swing period continues even in the normal background of (B7). In the normal background swing state of (B7), a screen in which the symbols have fallen downward from their normal positions is displayed. In the normal background shaking state (B7), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors.

After that, as shown in FIG. 159 (B8), the decorative pattern of "333" is fixed and stopped. Also, during the pattern fixing period of (B8), the small pattern is also fixed and stopped at "333". During the pattern fixing period of (B8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. After that, as shown in (B9), the pattern fixing period continues. During the pattern fixing period of (B9), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the lighting state of flashing rainbow colors. After that, during the fanfare period of FIG. 160 (D1), the same screen as in the state of (B9) is displayed. However, the state of the game effect lamp 9 is turned off corresponding to the fanfare. After that, as shown in (D2), the screen switches to a screen displaying the letters "FEVER" and Yume Yume-chan, indicating the fanfare state, with a delay from the state of the game effect lamp 9. Also, the state of the game effect lamp 9 at this time maintains the lighting state of the fanfare state.

[Performance in the re-draw part (deriving even numbers after button operation)]
With reference to Fig. 161 to Fig. 164, the performance mode in the re-selection part (deriving an even number symbol after a button operation) will be described. In Fig. 161 to Fig. 164, the flow of a series of performances from when a button operation is performed in the re-selection performance until an even number symbol is derived will be described.

As shown in FIG. 161 (C1), a pattern display effect is executed in which the decorative pattern combination "222", which indicates a jackpot display result, is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (C1), in the two-pattern enlarged state, the background becomes brighter and the "222" pattern is enlarged, and the pattern is emphasized by a converging line. In the two-pattern enlarged state of (C1), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white. After that, as shown in (C2), the pattern combination "222" is displayed larger than in the state of (C1). In the two-pattern enlarged state of (C2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white. After that, as shown in (C3), the pattern combination "222" is displayed reduced. In the two-pattern reduced state of (C3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 162 (C4), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed. In the two-symbol reduced state of (C4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (C5), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed in normal size. In the two-symbol normal size state of (C5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. After that, as shown in (C6), the background returns to the state of (A46), and the symbol combination "222" enters a swinging period in which it swings up and down. In (C6), a screen in which the symbols have risen upward from their normal positions is displayed. In the two-symbol swing state of (C6), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. After that, the background changes to the normal background as shown in FIG. 163 (C7). The symbol swinging period continues even in the normal background of (C7). In the normal background shaking state of (C7), the screen shows the pattern lowered from its normal position. In the normal background shaking state of (C7), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors.

After that, as shown in FIG. 163 (C8), the decorative pattern of "222" is fixed and stopped. Also, during the pattern fixing period of (C8), the small pattern is also fixed and stopped at "222". During the pattern fixing period of (C8), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. After that, as shown in (C9), the pattern fixing period continues. During the pattern fixing period of (C9), the game effect lamp 9 maintains its smooth rainbow lighting. After that, during the fanfare period of FIG. 164 (E1), the same screen as in the state of (C9) is displayed. However, the state of the game effect lamp 9 is turned off corresponding to the fanfare. After that, as shown in (E2), the screen switches to a screen displaying the letters "FEVER" and Yume Yume-chan, indicating the fanfare state, with a delay from the state of the game effect lamp 9. Also, the state of the game effect lamp 9 at this time maintains the lighting of the fanfare state.

<Description of Characteristic Parts in the Presentation Mode of the Pachinko Game Machine 1>
Next, the characteristics and modifications of the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be described in detail.

(Start 5)
The above-mentioned shutter is an image that makes the image of the performance being performed in the background invisible when closed, and makes the image of the performance being performed visible when opened after closing. The shutter is also executed at a timing related to the teasing part, that is, before the start of the teasing part. When the shutter is in a closing state, the screen brightness is lowered as the area in which the performance is visible becomes narrower, and when the shutter is in a opening state, the screen brightness is increased as the area in which the performance is visible becomes wider. This makes it possible to make the flow of the performance look favorable by making the closing and opening of the shutter more realistic. Note that the image of the shutter is used to make the image of the performance being performed in the background invisible or visible, but an image other than the shutter may be used, and a similar performance may be executed using a role object.

(Start 6)
The shutters described above are configured to close from the top and bottom edges of the screen toward the center of the screen. This allows the effect of gradually changing screen brightness to be displayed in an optimal manner. The shutters may be configured to close from both ends of the screen toward the center like a sliding door. The shutters may be configured to close from the top edge of the screen toward the bottom edge of the screen.

(Start 7)
Also, as shown in Fig. 58, the image of the edge of the shutter is expressed in black. This makes it possible to blur the boundary between the effect executed when the screen brightness is low and the edge of the shutter just before the shutter is completely closed as shown in Fig. 58 (a12), and eliminates the sense of incongruity. Similarly, it is possible to eliminate the sense of incongruity when the shutter begins to open as shown in Fig. 60 (a16).

(Start 8)
As shown in Figures 60 and 61, the SP first half reach begins after the shutter opens. The SP first half reach effect does not begin until the shutter is fully open, and the screen brightness gradually increases, and the SP first half effect progresses after the shutter is opened. This prevents dissatisfaction by the SP first half reach effect being executed before the shutter opens, since the SP first half reach effect is something that players want to pay attention to.

(Start 10)
Also, as shown in Fig. 57(a9) described above, the brightness of the screen is lowered before the shutter starts to close, and the shutter is completely closed in time with the shutter's closing. If the brightness of the screen were lowered in time with the shutter closing, the screen would darken too quickly. Therefore, by starting to lower the brightness of the screen in advance, the screen darkening speed can be made appropriate, and the series of effects can be made to look good.

(Start 12)
In addition, the player is not able to know which SP first half reach will start until the shutter is opened. This allows the player to have high expectations as to which performance will be executed.

(Start 13)
The above-mentioned shutter effect may be executed at a timing other than the timing of development to the first half of the SP. For example, it may be executed at the timing from the second re-variation to the third re-variation in the pseudo consecutive. Also, when the shutter is closed and then opened, an icon image (e.g., a green reserved image) indicating a change in the active reserved, which is the reserved display of the variation, may be displayed, and the active reserved may change in response to the icon image (e.g., from blue to green). Also, the shutter effect may be executed at the timing of development from the first half of the SP reach to the second half of the SP reach. This can improve the interest of the shutter effect.

(Start 15)
In addition to the above-mentioned pattern in which the shutter closes and then automatically opens, a pattern may be provided in which a button image is displayed after the shutter closes, and the shutter opens when the button is operated. This provides multiple types of shutter effects, increasing the interest of the shutter effects.

(Incitement 1)
In addition, the provocation part, which is the aforementioned provocation of winning or losing, has a performance in which the friendly character and the enemy character alternate in fighting each other (for example, SP first half reach B and SP second half reach B). In such a provocation part, there is a scene in which the friendly character takes damage. In addition, in such a provocation part, the image display switching interval is faster than in the epilogue part, and the number of image display switching is greater. Thus, by making the provocation part develop faster than the epilogue part, the provocation part can be made to look good.

(Incitement 2)
Also, as shown in Fig. 63(b5) and the like, in the provocative part, the lines of the friendly characters are spoken first, and subtitles corresponding to the lines are displayed. This allows the friendly characters to be easily recognized in the provocative part.

(Incitement 3)
The subtitle display of the ally character that is displayed first may be set to be displayed for a longer period of time than the subtitle display in other scenes in the teasing part, so that the ally character can be clearly recognized.

(Incitement 4)
Also, as shown in Fig. 67 (b17) and the like, there are scenes where subtitles are not displayed when an ally character speaks a line. This allows the screen display to be more suitable than if subtitles were displayed for all lines while still displaying the subtitles of the ally character that is displayed first.

(Incitement 5)
In addition, in the above-mentioned provocation part, there are SP first half reach A and SP first half reach B as the first provocation part executed in the first half, and SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B, and SP final reach as the second provocation part executed in the second half. In both the first and second provocation parts, there are scenes in which the ally characters play an active role. In addition, in both provocation parts, the ally characters' lines are spoken first, and subtitles corresponding to those lines are displayed. This allows the ally characters to be easily recognized in both provocation parts.

(Incitement 6)
In the above-mentioned provocation part, in the provocation part corresponding to the SP first half reach B, the character Yume Yume plays an active role, and in the provocation part corresponding to the SP second half reach B, the characters Jam and Nana play an active role. In the SP first half reach B, the ally character Yume Yume who plays the first role speaks a line, and a subtitle corresponding to the line is displayed. In the SP second half reach B, the ally characters Jam and Nana who play the first role speak a line, and a subtitle corresponding to the line is displayed. This allows the ally characters to be appropriately recognized in each provocation part. The number of characters who play an active role may be one or more. The character who plays an active role in the first half provocation part and the second half provocation part may be the same.

(Incitement 11)
Also, as shown in the above-mentioned Fig. 63 (b5) and (b6), there are scenes in which friendly and enemy characters are displayed and each character speaks lines. In such a situation, the subtitle display for the lines is of a fixed size and is displayed at a fixed display position. In this way, by not changing the display mode of the lines for each character, it is possible to reduce the opportunities for bugs to occur.

(Provocative cut-in 2)
127 (r39) to 128 (r42), at the timing when the cut-in display is executed, the subtitle display is displayed before the button image promotion display is displayed. This allows the button image to continue to be shown to the player who is watching the screen and paying attention to the subtitle display, so that the button image is not overlooked, and the cut-in display can be executed appropriately.

(Teasing cut-in 3)
As shown in the above-mentioned Figures 128 (r41) to 130 (r47), the design is such that there is no dialogue for a predetermined period of time after the cut-in display is cleared. Then, after the predetermined period of no dialogue has elapsed, a line is spoken and subtitles are displayed for that line. This allows the player to concentrate on the presentation during the period after the cut-in display, making for an ideal cut-in display.

(True or False 1)
Also, as shown in the above-mentioned FIG. 132 (r54), the scene where the winning or losing was decided was between the teasing part and the epilogue part. And, in the winning or losing decision scene, the player was notified of whether or not it was a big win by operating the trigger as the operating means. Also, in the winning or losing decision scene, if it was a big win, the role-playing device moved after the trigger was operated. In this way, the excitement of the presentation is increased by making the winning or losing decision scene suitable for using the operating means.

(True or False 2)
Also, as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 130 (r47) to 132 (r54), before the image corresponding to the operation means is displayed, subtitles are displayed by an ally character, and then the effect that was being executed cannot be seen on the screen corresponding to the operation means. Then, the effect that was being executed after that becomes recognizable together with the image of the operation means. In this way, the introduction of the operation means is displayed on the entire screen to give an impact, while the effect that was being executed is displayed firmly at the timing when the operation means can be operated, making the progress of the effect look good.

(True or False 3)
As shown in Fig. 130 (r48) to Fig. 131 (r51) above, the presentation is in progress even while the introductory images (images (r49) to (r50)) for enabling the operation of the operation means are displayed. By having the presentation proceed in the background, it is possible to draw attention to the image (image (r51)) in which the operation means can be operated, and also to draw attention to the development of the presentation.

(True or False 4)
Also, in the above-mentioned FIG. 132 (r51) to FIG. 132 (r54), when a trigger image is displayed as a promotion display, the tail of the Bakuchu image moves slightly each time the image changes. In this way, the performance may be progressed while the promotion display is being displayed. Here, the progress of the performance may not be limited to the tail moving, but may also include scene changes or character movements. This allows attention to be drawn to the development of the performance during the promotion display.

(5 correct or not)
Furthermore, the performance that progresses while the prompting display is displayed progresses slower than the performance that was executed before the prompting display was displayed. This allows the player to pay attention to the prompting display for operating the operating means, and a balance can be achieved between the prompting display and the progress of the performance. Note that the performance that progresses while the prompting display is displayed may be set to progress slower than the performance that progresses while the introduction image is displayed. This allows a difference in the progress speed of the performance between when the prompting display is displayed and when the introduction image is displayed.

(True or False: 6)
It is also preferable to echo the lines that are spoken before the introductory image is displayed, as shown in Fig. 130 (r47) above. This makes it possible to get the players excited before the introductory image is displayed.

(True or False: 7)
Also, as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 130 (r47) to 131 (r49), the introduction image is displayed after deleting the subtitle display before the introduction image is displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the timing of the introduction image and the subtitle display from overlapping.

(14 correct or not)
In addition, from the above-mentioned FIG. 95 (i36) to FIG. 96 (i39), the image in which the two characters Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan are displayed is gradually enlarged, and at the timing of (i39), one image is displayed still for a predetermined period. After that, if there is a big win, the image of the winning epilogue part is played, and if there is a loss, the image of the losing epilogue part is played. During the period in which one image is displayed still for a predetermined period, one image can be reused, so that the winning/losing decision scene can be favorably stirred up while reducing the data capacity. Note that, during the period in which the image in which the two characters are displayed is gradually enlarged and displayed, more images (for example, 10 images) may be used as shown in FIG. 95 (i36) to FIG. 96 (i39).

(16 correct answers)
Also, from the aforementioned FIG. 131 (r49) to FIG. 132 (r54), there is a display period of an introductory image in which images corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) are gathered in the center of the screen. After that, there is a period in which a prompting display for operating the trigger is displayed. During the display period of the prompting display, multiple images are gradually moved to make the character appear to be moving. After that, by operating the trigger at the branching scene of winning or losing, an image of the winning epilogue part is played if it is a big win, and an image of the losing epilogue part is played if it is a loss. All of these periods are periods in which a dynamic display in which the images appear to be moving is performed. This allows a series of performances to be executed in a dynamic flow, and a suitable flow of performances can be achieved.

(18 correct or not)
In addition, the winning epilogue part and the losing epilogue part after the winning/losing decision scene shown in the above-mentioned Figures 133 (s1) to 136 (s10) and Figures 137 (u1) to 138 (u4) will be explained. In the winning epilogue part, the image corresponding to the winning epilogue part is played after the performance of the role-playing action. In the losing epilogue part, the screen goes dark after the performance corresponding to the losing epilogue part, and then returns to the normal screen. According to this, since the flow is such that multiple images are switched after the winning/losing decision scene, it is possible to achieve a suitable flow of performance.

(Epilogue 1)
The aforementioned winning epilogue part is a part that does not transition when a miss occurs, and is a part that contains scenes in which enemy characters are at a disadvantage and scenes in which friendly characters are at an advantage. Also, in the winning epilogue part, the number of image display switches in the performance is less than in the teasing part. This allows appropriate performance to be executed in each part, and the flow of the series of performances can be displayed in an optimal manner.

(Epilogue 4)
As shown in Fig. 104 (n10) above, subtitles are not displayed for the lines of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character receives damage in the provocative part. In contrast, as shown in Fig. 110 (o1), subtitles are displayed for the lines of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character receives damage in the winning epilogue part (the scene where he catches a crab). In this way, subtitles that were not displayed in the provocative part are displayed in the winning epilogue part, emphasizing the feeling of celebration.

(Epilogue 6)
As shown in (s5) to (s6) of FIG. 134, the subtitle display displayed in the winning epilogue part is designed to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitle display displayed in the teasing part. According to this, by displaying the subtitle display in the final winning epilogue part for a longer period, the player can be immersed in the afterglow of the big win and the feeling of celebration can be emphasized. Note that when displaying the subtitle display, the display may be made to be longer when the number of characters is greater than when the number of characters is smaller. Even in such a case, if the winning epilogue part and the teasing part have the same number of subtitles (for example, 5 characters), the display may be designed so that the period during which the subtitle display is displayed in the winning epilogue part is longer.

(Epilogue 15)
As shown in Fig. 134 (s6) to Fig. 135 (s8) above, the final subtitle display for the final line in the winning epilogue part is designed to be erased before the pattern presentation is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the subtitle display from being covered by the decorative pattern and from being mistaken for a message in the pattern presentation. Therefore, the presentation in the winning epilogue part can be displayed in an optimal manner.

(Epilogue 17)
As shown in Fig. 136 (s10) described above, when the symbol presentation is completed and the player can recognize the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol and the image of the character or the like displayed as the background are still images. This makes it possible to prevent the decorative symbol from becoming difficult to see due to the background of the decorative symbol being animated.

(Epilogue 18)
As shown in Fig. 135 (s7) above, the image that was playing in the winning epilogue part becomes a still image at the timing before the pattern release performance is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the pattern from becoming difficult to see from the timing when the pattern release starts.

(Epilogue 19)
As shown in Fig. 135 (s7) above, the still image displayed in the winning epilogue part has a special aspect like a comic strip. By adding a special aspect effect to the still image, it is possible to emphasize that the image has stopped and to suggest that the scene has changed, making it a suitable winning epilogue part.

(Epilogue 21)
It is preferable that the subtitle display before the pattern display shown in Fig. 134 (s6) described above does not have a fade effect that gradually erases the display. However, the subtitle display displayed at other times may have a fade effect that gradually erases the display. In this way, the fade effect can be applied to all subtitle displays except the final one to provide an effective switching effect, and the final subtitle display can be prevented from being covered by a decorative pattern by instantly erasing it, and from being mistaken for a message in the pattern display performance. Therefore, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be displayed in a favorable manner.

(Epilogue 22)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) above, when the pattern is displayed, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed. Then, the decorative pattern is added with an effect image using a convergent line, but the small pattern is not added with an effect image. Furthermore, the decorative pattern has a higher priority than the decorative pattern and the effect image, and is displayed in front. This makes it possible to recognize that the small pattern is being displayed in a variable manner while enhancing the performance effect of the effect image for the decorative pattern, and can be a suitable winning epilogue part.

(Epilogue 23)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) above, when the pattern is displayed, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed. Here, the movement of the decorative pattern and the small pattern may be synchronized at the timing when the display of the decorative pattern is completed. Specifically, during the pattern swing period when the display of the decorative pattern is completed and the pattern is swinging up and down, the small pattern may also swing up and down in the same manner as the decorative pattern. According to this, by matching the movement of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, the flow of the performance in the winning epilogue part can be displayed in a favorable manner.

(Epilogue 24)
As shown in Fig. 157 (B1) to Fig. 158 (B5) above, when the re-draw part is performed, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed. Then, the decorative pattern is added with an effect image using a convergent line, but the small pattern is not added with an effect image. Furthermore, the decorative pattern has a higher priority than the decorative pattern and the effect image, and is displayed in front. This makes it possible to recognize that the small pattern is being displayed in a variable manner while enhancing the performance effect of the effect image for the decorative pattern.

(Epilogue 25)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) above, when the pattern is displayed, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern may be displayed in a state where the patterns are aligned. Then, in conjunction with the transition to the re-selection part, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern may be changed again. This allows the decorative pattern and the small pattern to be displayed in a synchronized manner.

(Re-selection effect 3)
As shown in FIG. 142 (A5) above, in the final state of the pattern release performance in the winning epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed swaying and an effect image with concentrated lines is added. When switching from that state to the background of the re-lottery performance as shown in (A6), the effect image with concentrated lines continues to be added. Also, the game effect lamp 9 switches from a smooth rainbow light to an off state. In other words, from the pattern release to the re-lottery performance, the pattern swaying and effect mode continue, and the background and lamp are designed to switch. This makes it easy to understand which decorative pattern the re-lottery performance started from.

(Re-draw performance 6)
As shown in the above-mentioned flow of Fig. 144 (A10) to Fig. 156 (A46) and Fig. 157 (B1) to Fig. 158 (B5), in the re-lottery presentation, the symbol feed is performed by the reduced-sized decorative symbols, and a button action prompt is displayed. Then, when the player operates the button, a symbol release presentation is performed in which the symbols are enlarged and displayed. In other words, the decorative symbols that will be finally notified are enlarged and displayed from the moment the symbols are released. In this way, since the symbols that will finally be notified start to be enlarged, it is possible to easily show the player what the final notification symbol will be.

(Re-draw performance 16)
The above-mentioned pattern display in the FIG. 141 (A1) to FIG. 142 (A5) parts and the pattern display in the FIG. 161 (C1) to FIG. 162 (C5) parts are executed using substantially the same image. Specifically, the same image is used for the pattern display and effect image of the "2" symbol, and the pattern display is executed in a manner in which the background part is different. According to this, since the image of the pattern display can be made substantially the same, it is possible to easily show the player that the game has not been promoted to the probability variation pattern. It is also possible to make the image of the pattern display part, including the background, completely the same.

(Re-draw performance 17)
In the aforementioned pattern display performance, a series of performances is executed in which the pattern is once enlarged and then returned to the normal size at the center of the screen. This allows the series of pattern display performances to be displayed in a favorable manner by enlarging and reducing the pattern.

(Re-draw performance 18)
In the above-mentioned pattern display performance, the data of the pattern display performance in the winning epilogue part and the data of the pattern display performance in the re-draw performance may use the same pattern display data. Then, a series of pattern display performances may be executed using the common pattern display data and a combination of multiple decorative patterns. This makes it possible to reduce the data capacity while making the pattern display performance look good. Note that the data of the pattern display performance in the winning epilogue part and the data of the pattern display performance in the re-draw performance may use substantially the same data.

<Detailed explanation of the performance mode>
Next, with reference to Figures 165 to 191, the following will explain in detail the characteristics and variations of the above-mentioned presentation aspects that should be particularly mentioned.

[Regarding instigation 12, 13, and 15]
In Figure 165, the characteristic parts of the provocative part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of parts (b11) to (b13))
FIG. 165 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (b11) to (b13) portions of the SP first half reach A described above. As shown in FIG. 165 (b11), the relationship between Yume Yume-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that Yume Yume-chan is on the left and Bakuchu is on the right in the left-right direction. In accordance with this character arrangement, the frame left lamp lights up green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan, and the frame right lamp lights up red corresponding to Bakuchu. Also, in the (b11) state, Yume Yume-chan's line "Wait~" is output as a dialogue sound, Yume Yume-chan's footsteps "Zazz zazz" are output as a physical sound, and Bakuchu's footsteps "Ta-ta-ta-ta-ta" are output as a physical sound.

Also, as shown in (b11), the relationship between Yume Yume-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that, in the front-to-back direction, Bakuchu is in front and Yume Yume-chan is in the back. From the player's perspective, their positions are such that Bakuchu is close by and Yume Yume-chan is far away. In contrast, the relationship in terms of volume is as follows: Yume Yume-chan's line "Wait~" > Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatatap" > Yume Yume-chan's footsteps "za za za". In this way, the volume data is set so that the line sound of Yume Yume-chan, which is far away, is louder than the footsteps of Bakuchu, which is close by.

In FIG. 165 (b12), the relationship between Yume Yume-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is the same as in the state of (b11) in both the left-right and front-back directions. In (b12), no dialogue sounds are output, and the physical sounds of Yume Yume-chan's footsteps "za za za" and Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" are output. The volume relationship is Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" > Yume Yume-chan's footsteps "za za za". In this way, when no dialogue sounds are output, the volume data is set so that the closer Bakuchu's footsteps are louder than the farther Yume Yume-chan's footsteps to match the front-to-back relationship on the screen.

In FIG. 165 (b13), the relationship between Yume Yume-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that Yume Yume-chan is on the left and Bakuchu is on the right in the left-right direction. Also, in the state of (b13), Bakuchu's line "I won't get caught!" is output as a dialogue sound, Yume Yume-chan's footsteps "Zzz za za" are output as a physical sound, and Bakuchu's footsteps "tata tata tata" are output as a physical sound. Also, as shown in (b13), the relationship between Yume Yume-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that Yume Yume-chan is in front and Bakuchu is behind in the front-to-back direction. The positional relationship as seen by the player is such that Yume Yume-chan is close and Bakuchu is far away. In contrast, the relationship in volume is such that Bakuchu's line sound "I won't get caught!" > Yume Yume-chan's footsteps "Zzz za za" > Bakuchu's footsteps "tata tata tata". In this way, the volume data is set so that Bakuchu's lines, which are far away, are louder than Yume-chan's footsteps, which are closer.

(Incitement 12)
In the provocation part, the background music for the SP reach is output, and there is a scene where the dialogue sound and the physical sound (also called the operation sound) are output at the same time. When the dialogue sound and the physical sound are output at the same time, the dialogue sound is output at a louder volume than the physical sound when output from the speakers 8L, 8R. By outputting the physical sound as part of the presentation, the reality of the presentation is brought out, and by outputting the dialogue sound louder when the dialogue sound and the physical sound overlap, the content of the presentation can be easily conveyed to the player. As a result, the presentation in the provocation part can be made to look better.

(Incitement 13)
Here, the work process when various effects in the pachinko game machine 1 are actually created will be described. First, an image for each effect corresponding to a variable time such as SP reach is created in the pachinko game machine 1. In accordance with this image, sound effects such as background music, physical sounds, onomatopoeia, sound effects, and dialogue sounds are added one by one using dedicated software. The completed image and sound are played, and the sound is further strengthened. In this series of work processes, sound data is set so that a sound that ignores the actual distance feeling that is easily conveyed to the player is output, abandoning reality, rather than outputting the sound with reality while keeping the actual distance feeling on the image. This allows a series of effects to be displayed in an appropriate manner.

(Incitement 15)
In addition, when the dialogue sound of a character that the player feels is far away overlaps with a physical sound that the player feels is close, the sound data is set so that the dialogue sound sounds louder than the physical sound. This discards reality and outputs sounds that ignore the actual sense of distance that is easily conveyed to the player, making it easier for the player to understand the content of the presentation.

[Regarding instigation 14 and 16]
In Figures 166 and 167, the characteristic parts of the provocative part are numbered and explained.

(Volume level explanation)
Fig. 166 is a diagram for explaining volume levels. As shown in Fig. 166(A), the relationship between the volume levels of dialogue sounds, physical sounds (footsteps), and BGM for SP reach among the sounds output from the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained. The output volume levels have the relationship dialogue sounds>physical sounds (footsteps)>BGM for SP reach. In addition, when these three sounds overlap, the way in which the sounds are output differs between dialogue sounds with subtitles and dialogue sounds without subtitles.

As shown in FIG. 166(B), in the case of dialogue sounds with subtitles, when the dialogue sounds (with subtitles) are output at a timing when the dialogue sounds (with subtitles) overlap with the physical sounds and the BGM for the SP reach, the volume level of the BGM for the SP reach is controlled to be output at a lower level. In contrast, as shown in FIG. 166(C), in the case of dialogue sounds without subtitles, when the dialogue sounds (without subtitles) overlap with the physical sounds and the BGM for the SP reach, the volume level of none of the sounds is changed while maintaining the relationship of dialogue sounds > physical sounds (footsteps) > BGM for the SP reach.

(Incitement 14)
In this way, when the physical sound of the character and the dialogue sound are outputted in an overlapping manner, the dialogue sound is adjusted and outputted so that it sounds louder than the physical sound. For example, when the physical sound and the dialogue sound are outputted in an overlapping manner, as shown in Fig. 166(B), the background music of the SP reach is adjusted to be quieter in accordance with the output period of the dialogue sound. In this way, the content of the presentation can be easily conveyed to the player while creating a sense of reality.

(Incitement 16)
166(B) and (C), when comparing a case where the dialogue sound overlapping the physical sound has subtitles and a case where the dialogue sound overlapping the physical sound does not have subtitles, the dialogue sound with subtitles is adjusted to sound louder by lowering the volume of the BGM for the SP reach. The dialogue sound with subtitles is more related to the content of the SP reach than the dialogue sound without subtitles. Therefore, by outputting the dialogue sound with subtitles related to the content of the SP reach louder, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the presentation.

(Volume level explanation)
Fig. 167 is a diagram for explaining volume levels. Fig. 167 explains a method for effectively outputting volume using a method different from that of Fig. 166. In Fig. 167 and Fig. 166, the relationship of the output volume levels is the same, that is, dialogue sound>physical sound (footsteps)>BGM for SP reach. However, as shown in Fig. 167(B), when the physical sound of a character and the dialogue sound are outputted overlapping each other, the dialogue sound is adjusted to be louder than the physical sound.

(Incitement 16)
167(B) and (C), when there is a dialogue sound overlapping with a physical sound and there is a subtitle, the volume is adjusted to be louder only when there is a subtitle for the dialogue sound overlapping with the physical sound. This makes it easier for the player to understand the content of the presentation by loudly outputting the dialogue sound with subtitles related to the content of the SP reach.

[About provocations 7 and 8]
In Figures 168 to 170, the characteristic parts of the provocative part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanation of parts (r24) to (r27))
FIG. 168 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r24) to (r27) portions of the final reach described above. As shown in (r24), when the AD character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in orange, which corresponds to the AD. After that, as shown in (r25), when the AD jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes orange. At this time, "Ahh!" is output as the AD's speech sound, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r25'), when the AD leaves the screen, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white three times.

After that, as shown in (r26), when the character of maid A is shown up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue, corresponding to maid A. After that, as shown in (r27), when maid A jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes blue. At this time, "Too!" is output as the voice spoken by maid A, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r27'), when maid A leaves the screen, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white three times.

(Detailed explanation of (r28) to (r31))
FIG. 169 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r28) to (r31) portions of the final reach described above. As shown in (r28), when the character of maid B is in a close-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in Hawaiian blue, which corresponds to maid B. After that, as shown in (r29), when maid B jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in Hawaiian blue. At this time, the same line as maid A, "Too!", is output as maid B's speech sound, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r29'), when maid B leaves the screen, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white three times.

After that, as shown in (r30), in a scene where Nana's character is shown up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink, corresponding to Nana. After that, as shown in (r31), in a scene where Nana jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in pink. At this time, "Teiya!" is output as Nana's spoken line, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r31'), in a scene where Nana leaves the screen, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white three times.

(Detailed explanation of parts (r32) to (r35))
FIG. 170 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r32) to (r35) portions of the final reach described above. As shown in (r32), when the character of Jam-chan is up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple, which corresponds to Jam-chan. After that, as shown in (r32), when Jam-chan jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple. At this time, "Gotcha!" is output as Jam-chan's speech sound, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r32'), when Jam-chan leaves the screen, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white three times.

After that, as shown in (r34), when Yume Yume's character is shown up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green, corresponding to Yume Yume. After that, as shown in (r35), when Yume Yume jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes green. At this time, "Oryah!" is output as Yume Yume's speech sound, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r35'), when Yume Yume leaves the screen, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white three times.

Here, in scenes such as r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35, the lines output are one-liners that seem to express enthusiasm. In these particular scenes, the scene changes faster than in other scenes. Also, in these particular scenes, the subtitles are not directly related to the storyline compared to other scenes with subtitles. For these reasons, subtitles corresponding to the lines are not displayed.

(Incitement 7)
As shown in Figures 168 to 170, there are scenes in the teasing part where the character speaks lines but no subtitles are added (for example, scenes r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35). However, even in such specific scenes, the brightness data of the game effect lamp 9 (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to the character. In this way, even in scenes where no subtitles are displayed for the sound of the lines, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. This makes it possible to preferably execute the effect corresponding to the character, and to preferably show the teasing part to the player.

(Incitement 8)
Also, as shown in FIG. 168 to FIG. 170, in the scenes where characters appear (for example, r24, r26, r28, r30, r32, r34), the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to light up in a color other than the color corresponding to the character in the previous scene. Specifically, before the scene (r24), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in yellow (r22) or red (r23), and then lights up in orange corresponding to the AD character. Also, before the scene (r26), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in orange (r25) or white (r25'), and then lights up in blue corresponding to the maid A character. Also, before the scene (r28), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in blue (r27) or white (r27'), and then lights up in Hawaiian blue corresponding to the maid B character. Also, before the scene (r30), the game effect lamp 9 is turned on/flashed in Hawaiian blue (r29) or white (r29'), and then the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in pink corresponding to the character Nana-chan. Also, before the scene (r32), the game effect lamp 9 is turned on/flashed in pink (r31) or white (r31'), and then the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in purple corresponding to the character Jam-chan. Also, before the scene (r34), the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in purple (r33) or white (r33'), and then the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in green corresponding to the character Yume-Yume. In this way, before a character appears, control is performed to turn on the game effect lamp 9 in a color different from the color corresponding to the corresponding character, and then control is performed to turn on the game effect lamp 9 in the color corresponding to the character. Therefore, the change in the displayed character and the fact that the changed character is easily indicated to the player can be expressed by the lamp, making it a suitable entertainment part.

[About Starts 1 to 4]
The characteristic parts of Figures 171 and 172 will be numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanation of the role movement in (b18) to (i1))
FIG. 171 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the operation of the role in (b18) to (i1). In the scene before the winning or losing decision shown in (b18), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the white lighting state. After that, when the game progresses to the SP second half reach, the movable body 32 as the role operates. Specifically, the role falls while tilting diagonally from the top of the screen to the front of the screen. As shown in (h1), a radial effect image is displayed on the screen in accordance with the start of the role fall. The effect image makes it impossible to see the Yume Yume character or the reduced "2" decorative pattern. Also, in the state of (h1), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red in accordance with the role fall.

After that, in state (h2), the reel falls further so that the letter "P" of the reel overlaps with the location where the reduced "2" decorative pattern was displayed. In state (h2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. In addition, a reel-related sound corresponding to the falling of the reel is output as a sound effect. After that, in state (h3), the position of the reel is maintained at the position where it fell in state (h2). In state (h3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red.

After that, as shown in (h4), the reel starts to rise (the reel moves from the advanced position to the retreated position). In the (h4) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes yellow. When changing from the (h3) state to the retreating state (h4), the brightness data table output from the brightness data table of the reel operation part to the brightness data table of the SP latter half reach A (teasing part) changes. After that, in the (h5) state, the reel rises further. In the (h5) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes yellow.

Figure 172 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the role operation in (b18) to (i1). After (h5), in the state of (h6), the role rises further. In the state of (h6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in yellow. After that, as shown in (h7), the effect image displayed corresponding to the role becomes lighter when the role rises further. As the effect image becomes lighter (transmittance becomes higher), the background corresponding to the SP second half reach A begins to be faintly seen. In the state of (h7), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. In addition, as a sound effect, a sound corresponding to the second half of the SP, which is BGM corresponding to the SP second half reach, is output. Note that sound effects related to the title of the second half of the SP may be output together with the BGM. After that, in the state of (h8), the role rises further from the state of (h7). In the state of (h8), the effect image becomes lighter than in the state of (h7), so the background display becomes easier to see. In state (h8), the game effect lamp 9 lights up yellow.

After that, in the (h9) state, the reel rises further. In the (h9) state, the effect image is lighter than in the (h8) state, so the background display becomes easier to see. In the (h9) state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, in the (h10) state, the reel rises further. In the (h10) state, the effect image is lighter than in the (h9) state, so the background display becomes easier to see. In the (h10) state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, in the (i1) state, the effect image disappears and the title corresponding to the start scene of the SP second half Reach A is clearly displayed. In the (i1) state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

(Start 1)
As shown in FIG. 171 and FIG. 172, the action of the reel switches the action from the SP first half reach A to the SP second half reach A. Also, an effect image corresponding to the action of the reel is displayed according to the action of the reel falling. After that, while the reel is rising, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the reel action to the screen corresponding to the SP second half reach A. Also, while the reel is rising, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table of the reel action part (child table WD8 shown in FIG. 202 to be described later) to the brightness data table of the SP second half reach A (child table WD9 shown in FIG. 204 and FIG. 205 to be described later). Also, while the reel is rising, a sound corresponding to the SP second half (for example, BGM of the SP second half) is output. Here, the effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed on the premise that the reel is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the latter half of the SP before the reel has completed its return to its initial position, the aesthetics of the display can be prevented from being spoiled. Also, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the latter half of the SP while the reel is returning to its initial position, the promotional part of the latter half of the SP can be displayed optimally.

(Start 2)
As shown in FIG. 171 and FIG. 172, the action of the role switches the action from the SP first half reach A to the SP second half reach A. Also, before the action of the role, the "2" symbol is displayed in a reduced form in the lower left and right corners of the screen. When the role operates, the role falls so that the "P" character among the letters of the role is located at a position where it overlaps with the location where the reduced "2" decorative symbol was displayed. Also, according to the action of the role falling, an effect image corresponding to the role action is displayed in a layer that is prioritized in front of the reduced "2" symbol. Then, after the role rises from the drop position and the "2" symbol is in a position where it does not overlap with the role, the effect image gradually fades and the background corresponding to the SP second half reach A and the "2" symbol are faintly displayed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the display from being unsightly due to the reduced decorative symbol being displayed during the action of the role. In addition, the effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed on the assumption that the reel is in a position where it overlaps the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the latter half of the SP before the reel completes its return to the initial position, the display can be made to look good. In addition, since a reduced decorative pattern is displayed during the reel's rise, it is possible to switch to a suitable performance according to the reel action.

(Start 3)
As shown in Fig. 171, the effect image is displayed before the reel moves and reaches the bottom of the drop. This allows the reduced decorative pattern to be hidden early, allowing for a suitable switching of effects involving the reel.

(Start 4)
In addition, when switching from the effect image to the image of the performance that develops in the latter half, an image related to the reel may be displayed. Specifically, in the scenes corresponding to (h7) to (h10) of FIG. 172, when the reel rises, the word "POWER II" or images of the main characters Yume Yume, Jam, and Nana may be displayed. In this way, by providing linkage when the performance is switched, it is possible to show a suitable switching of the performance that includes the reel.

[About Epilogues 7, 8, 10-14, and 20]
In Figures 173 to 174, the characteristic parts of the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanation of the role operation in (r54) to (s4))
FIG. 173 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the operation of the accessory in (r54) to (s4). In the scene before the winning/losing decision in (r54), a sound corresponding to the operation prompt is output, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red. At this time, an operation image corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) is displayed on the screen together with the Bakuchu character. In addition, a time gauge is displayed below the operation image as an operation prompt display for prompting the operation. When the player executes the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A within a predetermined period, or when a predetermined period has elapsed, the movable body 32 as the accessory operates. Specifically, an effect is executed in which the accessory falls while tilting obliquely from the top of the screen toward the front of the screen. Here, the time during which the accessory falls in the winning/losing notification scene is longer than the time during which the accessory falls in the scene that develops into the latter half of the SP.

As shown in (s1), as the reel starts to fall, a radial effect image is displayed on the screen in response to the reel. This effect image is more showy than the effect image when the reel develops into the latter half of the SP reach. Specifically, the effect image in the win/loss notification scene like (s1) is rainbow colored. Note that the effect image in the scene developing into the latter half of the SP is blue or red. Also, the effect image makes it impossible to see the Bakuchu character or the reduced "2" decorative pattern. Also, in the (s1) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors as the reel falls.

After that, in state (s2), the reel falls so that the letter "P" of the reel overlaps with the location where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" was displayed. In state (s2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. After that, in state (s3), the position of the reel is maintained at the position where it fell in state (s2). In state (s3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors.

After that, as shown in (s3-2), the reel starts to rise (the reel moves from the advanced position to the retreated position). In the (s3-2) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white. When changing from the (s3) state to the retreating state (s3-2), the brightness data table output changes from the brightness data table for the reel operation in the winning epilogue part to the brightness data table for the winning epilogue in the winning epilogue part. After that, in the (s3-3) state, the reel rises further. In the (s3-3) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white.

Figure 174 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the role operation in (r54) to (s4). After (s3-3), in the state (s3-4), the role rises further. In the state (s3-4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (s3-5), the effect image displayed corresponding to the role becomes lighter when the role rises further. As the effect image becomes lighter (transmittance becomes higher), the background corresponding to the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach begins to be faintly seen. In the state (s3-5), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. In addition, as a sound effect, a winning epilogue part corresponding sound, which is BGM corresponding to the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach, is output. After that, in the state (s3-6), the role rises further from the state (s3-5). In the state (s3-6), the effect image becomes lighter than in the state (s3-5), so the background display becomes easier to see. In state (s3-6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white.

After that, in the (s3-7) state, the reel rises further. In the (s3-7) state, the effect image is lighter than in the (s3-6) state, so the background display becomes easier to see. In the (s3-7) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, in the (s3-8) state, the reel rises further. In the (s3-8) state, the effect image is lighter than in the (s3-7) state, so the background display becomes easier to see. In the (s3-8) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, in the (s4) state, a scene in which Yume-Yume catches Bakuchu is displayed. At this time, a sound that indicates a successful performance is output as a sound effect. In addition, subtitles are displayed along with Bakuchu's line, "Uuu, I got it." In the (s4) state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors.

(Epilogue 7)
As shown in Figs. 173 to 174, an effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed according to the action of the reel falling. After that, the reel moves to the initial position according to a predetermined retreat pattern. While the reel rises, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the reel action to a screen corresponding to the epilogue part of the SP final reach. Here, the effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed on the premise that the reel is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, the beauty of the display can be prevented by switching to a background display corresponding to the SP first half reach before the reel completes the return action to the initial position.

(Epilogue 8)
On the premise that the reel will perform an action to return to its initial position, the timing of switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue will be the timing during the ascent related to the timing of the start of the return action. According to this, since the display corresponding to the epilogue is switched to at the timing related to the start of the return action, the display of the effect image corresponding to the reel action ends before the reel returns to its initial position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the effect image is displayed when the reel returns to its initial position, and the aesthetics of the presentation are not impaired. The timing of switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue may be the same as the timing when the reel starts to rise. Also, the reel may perform a rotation action or a movement action at the falling position.

(Epilogue 10)
The BGM corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the return of the reel to its initial position and the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue. In this way, the start of the epilogue part is suggested by the BGM, so that the epilogue part can be started appropriately.

(Epilogue 11)
A sound effect corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the return of the reel to its initial position and the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue. In this way, the start of the epilogue part is suggested by the sound effect, so that the epilogue part can be started appropriately.

(Epilogue 12)
BGM and sound effects corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the return of the reel to its initial position and the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue. In this way, the start of the epilogue part is suggested by the BGM and sound effects, so that the epilogue part can be started appropriately.

(Epilogue 13)
When the reel returns to its initial position and a display corresponding to the epilogue is being displayed, the dialogue sound is not output, and when the reel returns to its initial position and the epilogue is displayed, the dialogue sound is output and the subtitles are displayed. This makes it possible to avoid displaying the subtitles at a time when they are difficult to see, and to execute the epilogue part in an optimal manner.

(Epilogue 14)
When the props return to their initial positions, the dialogue sound can be output and subtitles can be displayed in the epilogue display. This allows the dialogue to be clearly recognized, and the epilogue part can be executed appropriately.

(Epilogue 20)
As shown in FIG. 173 to FIG. 174, the appearance of the performance is switched to the winning epilogue part by the movement of the reel from the scene before the winning or losing decision in the instigation part. Also, an effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed according to the action of the reel falling. After that, while the reel is rising, the display is gradually switched from the effect image corresponding to the reel action to the screen corresponding to the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach. Also, while the reel is rising, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the reel action to the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part. Also, while the reel is rising, a sound corresponding to the winning epilogue part is output. Also, during the background display corresponding to the winning epilogue part displayed from (s3-5) to (s3-8) until the reel is changed to the initial position, no dialogue sound is output. After that, in the state (s4) where the movement of the reel to the initial position is completed and the display of the effect image is finished, the dialogue sound is output and the subtitle display is displayed. Here, the effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed on the assumption that the reel is in a position where it overlaps the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the winning epilogue part before the reel completes its return to the initial position, the display can be made to look good. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the winning epilogue part during the rise of the reel, the winning epilogue part can be displayed appropriately. Furthermore, since the subtitles are displayed after the return to the initial position is completed, the winning epilogue part can be displayed appropriately.

[About Epilogues 2, 3, and 5]
In FIG. 175, the characteristic parts of the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

(Relationship between number of subtitles and number of lines)
FIG. 175 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of subtitles and the number of lines. In FIG. 175, for each type of SP reach and the type of epilogue corresponding to each SP reach, the number of lines of the character during the performance and the number of subtitles corresponding to the lines are shown. For example, in the case of SP first half reach A, the number of lines is 8 and the number of subtitles is 5. Also, in the case of a winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A, the number of lines is 1 and the number of subtitles is 1. In the case of a losing epilogue part of SP first half reach A, there are no lines and therefore no subtitles.

In the case of SP first half reach B, there are 5 lines and 3 subtitles. In the case of the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach B, there are 3 lines and 3 subtitles. In the case of the losing epilogue part of SP first half reach B, there are no lines and therefore no subtitles. In the case of SP second half reach A, there are 16 lines and 14 subtitles. In the case of the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A, there is 1 line and 1 subtitle. In the case of the losing epilogue part of SP second half reach A, there is 1 line and 1 subtitle.

In the case of SP second half reach B, there are 9 lines and 7 subtitles. In the case of the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach B, there are 3 lines and 3 subtitles. In the case of the losing epilogue part of SP second half reach B, there is 1 line and 1 subtitle. In the case of SP final reach, there are 27 lines and 19 subtitles. In the case of the winning epilogue part of SP final reach, there are 2 lines and 2 subtitles. In the case of the losing epilogue part of SP final reach, there is 1 line and 1 subtitle.

(Epilogue 2)
As shown in FIG. 175, the ratio of subtitles displayed for the lines of the characters in the epilogue part is higher than the ratio of subtitles displayed for the characters in the SP reach, which is the provocative part. According to this, by displaying the subtitles clearly in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the characters are saying. Also, in the winning epilogue part, the subtitles can enhance the feeling of celebration. Also, since there are more screen changes in the provocative part than in the epilogue part, even if the subtitles are displayed, the display time is shorter, so that the auxiliary subtitle display does not interfere with the performance, and the primary focus is to convey the performance by switching images. This allows for a suitable performance to be executed in the provocative part.

(Epilogue 3)
As shown in Fig. 175, in the epilogue part, subtitles are always displayed for the dialogue. This makes it possible to emphasize the sense of celebration by clearly showing what the characters are saying in the epilogue part.

(Epilogue 5)
As shown in FIG. 175, there are several types of SP reach, which is the provocative part, and each type has a different development of the performance and the number of lines. However, in any SP reach, the ratio of subtitles displayed for the character's lines in the epilogue part is higher than the ratio of subtitles displayed for the character during the SP reach. According to this, in any SP reach that is executed, by displaying the subtitles firmly in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying. In addition, in the winning epilogue part, the subtitles can be used to coordinate the feeling of celebration. In addition, since the screen is switched more frequently in the provocative part than in the epilogue part, it is possible to prioritize conveying the performance by switching the images and prevent the performance from being disturbed by the auxiliary subtitle display. This allows a suitable performance to be executed in the provocative part.

[About re-draw performances 1, 4, 5, 7 to 18]
In Figures 176 and 177, the characteristic parts of the re-selection part are numbered and explained.

(Details of the re-draw part)
Fig. 176 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (A1) to (A23) parts in the re-selection part. Fig. 177 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (A24) to (A46) parts in the re-selection part.

When the big win display result is derived, the pattern is enlarged as shown in (A1) and (A2), and then reduced as shown in (A3) and (A4). After that, the pattern becomes normal size as shown in (A5). Then, as shown in (A6), the background is switched to the background for the re-draw performance and the re-draw performance starts. Here, the period during which the pattern is shaking is omitted from the state (A5) to the state (A6). Specifically, the pattern is shaking when it is normal size. Then, after it becomes normal size, the pattern shaking of the re-draw part continues. At this time, at the timing related to the completion of the pattern output (for example, including the timing just before it becomes normal size, the timing after it becomes normal size, the timing when the pattern shaking starts, etc.), the game effect lamp 9 switches from flashing white to smoothly lighting in rainbow colors. This allows for a smooth pattern appearance from the time the patterns are released until the re-draw performance, a smooth transition to the shaking period, and a celebration when the patterns line up, all through the illumination of the screen and lamps.

After that, as shown in (A7) and (A8), there is a period of oscillation in which the symbols oscillate up and down. After that, as shown in (A9) and (A10), the "2" symbol in the center is temporarily reduced in size. After that, high-speed oscillation occurs in a manner in which the "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1" symbols used as decorative symbols from (A11) to (A23) are all displayed. After that, high-speed oscillation occurs again in a manner in which the "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1" symbols used as decorative symbols from (A10') to (A23') are all displayed.

Then, as shown in (A24), after all the decorations have completed two cycles, the button image is faintly displayed along with the initially displayed "2" symbol. Then, from (A25) to (A46), the decoration symbols change rapidly from "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", to "1", while the time gauge displayed below the button image decreases as time passes. The time gauge is a display that indicates the valid period for button operation. If the push button 31B is operated within the valid operation period, or if the push button 31B is not operated within the valid operation period and the valid button operation period ends, an odd number symbol or an even number symbol is derived and displayed as shown in Figs. 157 to 164, and the game moves to a jackpot.

(Re-draw performance 1)
As shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the re-lottery performance is started using the "2" symbol as it is. When the re-extraction performance starts, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery performance starts from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol-sending performance is executed in which symbols are replaced by rapid variation from the "2" symbol. In this way, the re-lottery performance is started using the decorative symbol that was temporarily stopped, and when the re-lottery performance starts, the symbol-sending performance is executed using the symbol that was temporarily stopped, so that the player can easily understand which decorative symbol the re-lottery started from. As a result, the flow of the series of performances can be clearly seen.

(Re-selection effect 4)
When the symbol transfer performance in the re-lottery performance starts, the decorative symbols that have been displayed since the winning epilogue part start to change from a reduced state. This makes it possible to show the flow of the series of performances well without executing a process to change to a different decorative symbol.

(Re-selection effect 5)
In the symbol forwarding performance, the movement starts with a reduced symbol, and the size of the symbol during the movement is a uniform reduced size. This makes it possible to make the movement during the symbol forwarding performance look smooth, and makes the flow of the series of performances look good.

(Re-selection effect 7)
As shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the re-lottery performance is started using the "2" symbol as it is. When the re-extraction performance starts, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery performance starts from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol-sending performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed variation from the "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, all the decorative symbols are sent in order, such as "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1", and then the symbol-sending performance is executed in which the "2" symbol is displayed again. In this way, the re-lottery performance is started using the decorative symbol that was temporarily stopped, and the decorative symbol that was initially temporarily stopped is displayed again after the variation of multiple types of decorative symbols. According to this, the pattern-sending performance in which all the decorative symbols are displayed without the final display result being displayed immediately can make the flow of the series of performances look good.

(Re-selection effect 8)
In the symbol transfer performance in the re-draw performance, all the decorative symbols are transferred in order: "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1", and then all the decorative symbols are transferred again in order: "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1". In this way, the numbers of the decorative symbols are transferred in order, so that the flow of the series of performances can be clearly seen.

(Re-draw performance 9)
In the symbol forwarding performance in the re-draw performance, all symbols are displayed with the transparency of the symbol when it is temporarily stopped, and the transparency is increased during the change. Specifically, the symbols are switched such as a "2" symbol with a transparency of 0%, a "2" symbol with a transparency of 50%, a "3" symbol with a transparency of 0%, a "3" symbol with a transparency of 50%, a "4" symbol with a transparency of 0%, and a "4" symbol with a transparency of 50%. According to this, since all symbols can be displayed with a low transparency during the symbol forwarding performance, it is possible to grasp what symbol is being sent.

(Re-draw performance 10)
In the symbol transfer effect in the re-draw effect, all the decorative symbols are transferred in order: "2,""3,""4,""5,""6,""7," and "1." The time each symbol is displayed is the same. This allows all symbols to be displayed for a fixed period of time, making the flow of the series of effects look good.

(Re-draw performance 11)
During the symbol forwarding performance, a promotion display formed of a button image and a time gauge is displayed. The position where the promotion display is displayed is a position where it does not overlap with the position where the change in the decorative symbol during the symbol forwarding performance is displayed. In this way, since the promotion display does not overlap with the decorative symbol during the symbol forwarding performance, it is possible to make the symbol forwarding easily visible to the player. Note that a part of the promotion display may overlap with the decorative symbol during the symbol forwarding performance.

(Re-draw performance 12)
As shown in Figures 176 and 177, the promotion display starts at (A24) and (A25) after all the decorative symbols in the symbol forwarding effect have been displayed twice. Since the promotion image is not displayed until the predetermined symbol forwarding pattern is repeated twice, the player can be made to recognize the symbol forwarding effect clearly.

(Re-draw performance 13)
In addition, the symbol at the start of the re-draw performance may be other than the 2 symbol. Even in such a case, the timing at which the button image is displayed as the action prompt display is constant. For example, in the case of the 2 symbol, the timing at which the action prompt display is displayed is the timing at which the 2 symbol is displayed again. Similarly, in the case of the 5 symbol, the timing at which the action prompt display is displayed may be the timing at which the 5 symbol is displayed again. In other words, regardless of which symbol starts the re-draw performance, the number of symbols sent is the same. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load by making the control constant.

(Re-draw performance 14)
In the lottery performance, a pattern of displaying an even number symbol (for example, 2 symbol) followed by an even number symbol (for example, 2 symbol) and a pattern of displaying an odd number symbol (for example, 3 symbol) followed by an even number symbol (for example, 2 symbol) are provided. In addition to this, a pattern of displaying an odd number symbol (for example, 7 symbol) followed by an odd number symbol (for example, 7 symbol) may be provided. In the performance of sending symbols from an odd number symbol to an odd number symbol, it is sufficient that the same odd number symbol is sent when sending symbols. However, in either pattern, the length of the performance during the symbol sending period in the re-lottery performance may be designed to be the same. This allows for a suitable re-lottery performance in either pattern without increasing the data capacity.

(Re-draw performance 15)
In the lottery performance, common data is used regardless of whether the pattern is an even number symbol (e.g., 2 symbol) followed by an even number symbol (e.g., 2 symbol), an even number symbol (e.g., 2 symbol) followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., 3 symbol), or an odd number symbol (e.g., 7 symbol) followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., 7 symbol). In other words, the performance data is the same, and the design changes the data related to the decorative symbols depending on the pattern. This eliminates the need for a dedicated pattern, and reduces the amount of data.

[About provocations 21-27]
In Figures 178 to 181, the characteristic parts of the provocative part are numbered and explained.

(Fade effect)
FIG. 178 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (b4) to (b6) parts in the provocative part and a comparison diagram during the big win round. In the provocative part, a fade effect is applied to the subtitles for the dialogue. The fade effect is an effect consisting of a fade-in where the display gradually becomes clearer, and a fade-out where the display gradually disappears. FIG. 178(A) describes a part of the performance with a fade effect applied in the provocative part, the SP first half reach A.

In the (b4) state, a screen showing Yume Yume and Bakuchu facing each other is displayed. After that, as shown in (b4'), the subtitle "I found you" corresponding to Yume Yume's line is displayed with a transparency of 70%. After that, as shown in (b5), the subtitle "I found you" corresponding to Yume Yume's line is displayed with a transparency of 0%. In this way, a fade-in effect is applied when the subtitle corresponding to the line is displayed. Note that in the (b4') state, the sound of the line "I found you" is not output, and the sound of the line is output when the subtitle transparency is 0% as in the (b5) state.

After that, as shown in (b5'), the subtitle "Found it" corresponding to Bakuchu's line is displayed with a fade-in effect on a layer below the subtitle "I found it" corresponding to Yume-chan's line with a 0% transparency, as shown in (b5''). Then, as shown in (b5"), the subtitle "Found it" and the subtitle "Found it" are both displayed with a 40% transparency. After that, as shown in (b6), the subtitle "Found it" corresponding to Bakuchu's line is displayed with a 0% transparency. In this way, the subtitle "I found it" corresponding to Yume-chan's line gradually fades out from (b5') to (b6). In contrast, the subtitle "Found it" corresponding to Bakuchu's line gradually fades in from (b5') to (b6). In addition, in the (b5') and (b5'') states, the dialogue sound of "Found" is not output, but is output when the subtitle transparency is 0%, as in the (b6) state.

As shown in Figure 178 (B), during the jackpot round, a performance is executed in which the characters sing along with the music. For example, in Figure 178 (B), subtitles (lyrics) are displayed in time with the song sung by Nana, saying "Someday I'll get it," followed by subtitles (lyrics) "I'll grab it with these little hands," in time with the song. When subtitles (lyrics) like this are displayed continuously during the jackpot round, no fade effect is applied. This is because, since the progression of the music can be understood from the rhythm while the music is playing, it is easy to tell when the subtitles (lyrics) are to be switched without a fade effect.

(Incitement 21)
In the provocative part, as shown in Fig. 178(A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed in response to the lines of a character. When subtitles are displayed, there is a period in which the display period of a first subtitle that is displayed first and the display period of a second subtitle that is displayed next are displayed so as to overlap. When the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap, a fade effect is applied. The fade effect causes a change in the transparency of the displayed characters to differ. This makes it possible to make the change in subtitles easier to understand, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, by making it easier to understand the change in subtitles.

(Incitement 22)
As shown in Fig. 178(A), in a scene where characters face each other, a first subtitle corresponding to the lines of one character may be displayed, followed by a second subtitle corresponding to the lines of another character. In this case, the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 70% and overlaps the first subtitle displayed with a transparency of 0%. After that, the first subtitle fades out and the second subtitle fades in and is displayed with a transparency of 0%. This makes it easy to tell when the subtitles are switching over due to the fade effect, even when the subtitles are displayed overlapping each other.

(Modification of subtitle display)
When the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed at a timing where they overlap, the fade effect may be applied to one of the two subtitles instead of to both of them. Specifically, a pattern in which the fade effect is not applied to the first subtitle display and the fade effect is applied to the second subtitle display, and a pattern in which the fade effect is applied to the first subtitle display and the fade effect is not applied to the second subtitle display may be considered. Either pattern may be applied by replacing the above-mentioned pattern in which the fade effect is applied to the first subtitle display and the fade effect is applied to the second subtitle display. In addition, when the fade effect is applied, the second subtitle display may be overlapped on the first subtitle display, or the second subtitle display may be overlapped under the first subtitle display.

Also, in the above, subtitles for lines of a first character and a second character are described as being displayed at the same time. However, when the same character speaks lines consecutively, the subtitles for the first line may be displayed so that they overlap with the subtitles for the second line. In such a case, a fade effect may be applied to the subtitle display.

(Incitement 24)
As shown in FIG. 178 (B), during the big win round, a performance in which the character sings along with the music is executed. Then, subtitles (lyrics) are displayed along with the progression of the song. However, during the big win round, even if the subtitles (lyrics) are displayed continuously, the fade effect is not applied. This is because, since the progression of the music can be understood by the rhythm while the music is playing, even if the subtitles (lyrics) are switched without the fade effect, the timing of the switch is easy to understand. Also, since the music during the big win round is a representative music of the content installed in the pachinko game machine 1, the lyrics to be displayed next are easy for the player to understand even without the fade effect. This allows the task of applying the fade effect to be omitted during the big win round, and the series of performances can be made to look good.

(Relationship between subtitle transparency and sound output)
FIG. 179 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the transparency of subtitles for lines and sound output. FIG. 179 shows the situation when Yume Yume's line "I found it" and Bakuchu's line "I found it" in FIG. 178(A) are uttered. In FIG. 179, the horizontal axis of the graph indicates the number of frames. The subtitle "I found it" is displayed at a transparency of 70% one frame after the transparency of 100%. Furthermore, one frame after that, it is displayed at a transparency of 0%. As a result, the subtitle "I found it" is displayed with a fade-in effect over a period of two frames. The sound of the line "I found it" is not output during this period.

After that, while the sound of the line "I found it" is being output, the subtitle "I found it" is displayed with a transparency of 0%. Then, during the period T1, which is a silent period of three frames after the output of the sound of the line "I found it", the subtitle "I found it" continues to be displayed with a transparency of 0% for two frames. After that, for the remaining one frame period of T1, the subtitle "I found it" is displayed with a transparency from 0% to 100%. This causes the subtitle "I found it" to be displayed with a fade-out effect for the period of one frame.

In addition, during the period T1, the sound of the line "Found" is not output, but starting one frame after the start of the period T1, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a fade-in effect. Specifically, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a transparency of 70% one frame after changing from 100% transparency. Then, one frame after that, it is displayed with a transparency of 0%. As a result, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a fade-in effect over a period of two frames.

After that, for the period during which the sound of the line "Found" is being output, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a transparency of 0%. Then, during the period T2, which is a silent period of three frames after the output of the sound of the line "Found", the subtitle "Found" continues to be displayed with a transparency of 0% for two frames. After that, for the remaining one frame period of T2, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a transparency from 0% to 100%. As a result, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a fade-out effect for the period of one frame.

As shown in FIG. 179, the first subtitle "I found it" corresponding to the Yume Yume character and the second subtitle "I found it" corresponding to the Bakuchu character are given the same fade-in and fade-out fade effects. Also, the fade-in is performed over a period of two frames, while the fade-out is performed over a period of one frame.

(Incitement 23)
As shown in Fig. 179, the output timing of the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle "Found" is such that the first and second subtitles are displayed overlapping each other and are not output during the period when the fade effect is applied. The dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is output from the time when the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 0%. In this way, the fade effect makes it easy to see the change in subtitles, and since the dialogue sound is output after the second subtitle is displayed, the content of the production can be easily understood by both sight and sound.

(Comparison of subtitles in the promotional and epilogue parts)
FIG. 180 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (b4) to (b6) and portions (o3) to (o5). FIG. 180(A) is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (b4) to (b6) in the provocative part. FIG. 180(B) is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (o3) to (o5). FIG. 180(A) and FIG. 180(B) have in common the fact that subtitles are displayed consecutively to the lines spoken by two characters. However, the period from when the first subtitle is displayed to when the second subtitle is displayed is different between FIG. 180(A) and FIG. 180(B).

As shown in FIG. 180(A), in the (b4) to (b7) portions, Yume Yume and Bakuchu are displayed facing each other in (b4). Then, in (b5), a first subtitle corresponding to Yume Yume's line "I found you" is displayed. Then, in (b6), a second subtitle corresponding to Bakuchu's line "I found you" is displayed. Then, in (b6'), Yume Yume is enlarged on the screen. Then, a subtitle corresponding to Yume Yume's line "I'll catch you!" is displayed. The time t1 from the start of (b4) to the end of (b6) is about 3 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 180(B), in the (o3) to (o5) sections, a shop with the crab that Jam-chan and Nana-chan defeated in (o3) as its signboard is displayed, and a first subtitle corresponding to Jam-chan's line, "Nice signboard," is displayed. Then, from (o3') to (o3''), the background of the shop with the crab as its signboard is displayed without subtitles. Then, in (o4), a second subtitle corresponding to Nana-chan's line, "Work hard," is displayed. Then, the background of the shop with the crab as its signboard becomes a still image. The time t1 from the start of (o3) to the end of (o5) is about 10 seconds.

As shown in Figures 180(A) and 180(B), in the promo and epilogue parts, subtitles corresponding to lines may be displayed multiple times in one scene (the period from 0 to t1 or the period from 0 to t2). When subtitles are displayed multiple times, if there is ample time, it may be possible to make the change in subtitle display easier to see by erasing the subtitle display once. However, if there is not enough time, such as in the period from 0 to t1, it is difficult to take the measure of erasing the subtitle display once. For this reason, as shown in Figures 178 and 179, a fade effect can be applied to the subtitle display to make the change in subtitles easier to see.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the video is created first, and then the dialogue and other sounds are added. After that, subtitles corresponding to each line are added. If the video were to be remade with a longer period for erasing the subtitles during the period from 0 to t1, when there is not much time available, it would be time-consuming. By adding a fade effect, it is possible to make the change in subtitles easier to understand without having to remake the video. Even in cases where there is ample time available, such as the epilogue part where the shop with the crab sign is displayed, the fade effect can be applied uniformly to reduce the overall workload and prevent a sense of incongruity when the subtitles change.

(Incitement 26)
As shown in Fig. 180, a fade effect is applied to the subtitle display even in a certain scene in the portion (o3) to (o5) where the first subtitle and the second subtitle do not overlap. The fade effect may be at least one of a fade-in and a fade-out. In the subtitle display created after the video is created, it is time-consuming to apply a fade effect depending on whether the subtitle display overlaps. Therefore, by applying a fade effect to the subtitle display uniformly, an increase in the workload can be prevented.

(Incitement 25)
Although not shown, there are cases where the subtitle display timing overlaps even in the epilogue part. However, as shown in FIG. 180, there are many scenes in the epilogue part where the period from subtitle display to subtitle display is longer than in the teasing part. This is because the performance progresses quickly in the teasing part, and not as quickly in the epilogue part. As a result, the teasing part is more likely to be displayed at a timing where the subtitle displays overlap than the epilogue part. In such cases, by effectively applying a fade effect to the subtitle display, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity when switching subtitles.

[Regarding Incitement 27]
In Figure 181, the characteristic parts of the provocative part are numbered and explained.

(Incitement 27)
FIG. 181 is a diagram for explaining a comparative example of subtitle display. For example, as shown in Comparative Example 1 of FIG. 181(A), subtitle displays for similar lines such as "I found it" and "I found it" may be displayed consecutively. In such a case, if the subtitle display is switched without any fade effect and without a blank period, it becomes difficult to understand the switching of the subtitle display. Also, regarding the subtitle display for a long line or a line that progresses quickly, there is a possibility that an awkward feeling will occur if the subtitle display is switched without a blank period. In such a case, the awkward feeling can be eliminated by applying a fade effect to the subtitle display. Also, as shown in Comparative Example 2 of FIG. 181(B), it is possible to overlap "I found it" with the subtitle display of "I found it" and then display "I found it". In such a case, it becomes difficult to see the subtitle display by not applying a fade effect. Also, as shown in Comparative Example 3 of FIG. 181(C), it is possible to display the subtitle display of "I found it" and the subtitle display of "I found it" in two rows, one above the other. In such a case, the display area for the effect is reduced by the subtitle display, which interferes with the effect in areas other than the area where the subtitle display is displayed. By contrast, this embodiment can solve this problem by applying a fade effect to the subtitle display.

[About Epilogue 23]
In FIG. 182, the characteristic parts of the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

Figure 182 is a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (B4) to (B11). With reference to Figure 182, the correspondence between the effects using the decorative symbols and small symbols on the screen and the effects using the game effect lamp 9 will be explained. As shown in (B4), in the effect of the re-selection part's symbol display, the enlarged "3" symbol is reduced. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. Next, as shown in (B5), the "3" symbol is displayed in normal size. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. Next, as shown in (B6), the "3" symbol is displayed shaking slightly up and down. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors.

Next, as shown in (B7), the screen changes from the re-draw background to the normal background, and the "3" symbol continues to be displayed with slight up and down swinging on this normal background. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. After that, based on receiving the symbol determination command, the decorative symbol and small symbol are fixed and stopped as shown in (B8). At this time, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. As shown in (B9), the symbol determination period continues for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 s), and the same display as (B8) is maintained on the screen. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 maintains its rainbow flashing illumination.

After that, based on the reception of the fanfare command, the state of the game effect lamp 9 changes after about 10 msec to correspond to the fanfare. Also, based on the reception of the fanfare command, the screen changes after about 33 msec to change to a state in which "FEVER" is displayed. Specifically, as shown in (D1), during the fanfare period after the fanfare command is received, the screen maintains the state of (B9). In contrast, the state of the game effect lamp 9 changes to correspond to the fanfare earlier than the state of the screen. The state of the game effect lamp 9 in (D1) is off. Next, as shown in (D2), the screen changes to a screen in which the letters "FEVER" and Yume Yume-chan, indicating the fanfare state, are displayed, with a delay after the state of the game effect lamp 9. Also, at this time, the game effect lamp 9 maintains the lighted state corresponding to the fanfare.

[About Epilogue 28-31]
In FIG. 183, the characteristic parts of the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

Figure 183 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the pattern display. In the modified example, the pattern display may be performed in the order of (Y1) to (Y7). Specifically, as shown in (Y1), in the scene where the Bakuchu is caught, the reduced decorative patterns (reduced patterns) are aligned in the upper left corner of the screen in the form of "222". The game effect lamp 9 at this time is in a rainbow light (smooth) state. Next, as shown in (Y2), the screen becomes a still image and the reduced patterns flicker slightly up and down. The game effect lamp 9 at this time is in a rainbow light (smooth) state.

Next, as shown in (Y3), the reduced decorative pattern in the upper left corner of the screen is erased. The state of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is rainbow lit (smooth). Next, as shown in (Y4), the decorative pattern "222" that was erased from the center of the screen is enlarged and displayed. The state of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is flashing white. Next, as shown in (Y5), the decorative pattern "222" is enlarged from the state of (Y4) and displayed. The state of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is flashing white. Next, as shown in (Y6), the decorative pattern "222" is enlarged from the state of (Y5) and displayed. The state of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is flashing white. Next, as shown in (Y7), the decorative pattern "222" is enlarged from the state of (Y6) and displayed. The state of the game effect lamp 9 at this time is flashing white.

In the modified pattern display, the decorative pattern moves to the upper left corner of the screen in a reach mode when the SP reach begins, and the patterns line up during the winning epilogue part as shown in (Y1). Then, after the reduced pattern oscillation period as shown in (Y2), the reduced pattern is deleted, and is enlarged from the center of the screen, and the second pattern performance is executed.

(Epilogue 28)
In the winning epilogue part, when the images constituting the winning epilogue are displayed in sequence (when the winning epilogue video is playing), the decorative symbol is located at the edge of the display area of the screen (the position of the upper left corner of the screen). In relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the winning epilogue video ends, the reduced symbol is erased and the central area of the screen is used to enlarge and display the symbol, and the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part to the brightness data table corresponding to the symbol display in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image. According to this, when the video of the winning epilogue part is playing, the reduced symbol is positioned at the edge of the screen so as not to interfere with the video of the winning epilogue part, and when the video of the winning epilogue part ends and the symbol is displayed, the decorative symbol is enlarged and displayed continuously using the edge and center of the screen, so that the big win symbol can be emphasized and shown to the player. Furthermore, by switching the brightness data table, the scene change can be made to look good, and the epilogue part can be made to look good.

(Epilogue 29)
In the winning epilogue part, when the images constituting the winning epilogue are displayed in sequence (when the winning epilogue video is playing), the decorative symbols are displayed aligned with "222" at the edge of the display area of the screen (the position in the upper left corner of the screen). This allows the player to recognize that the big win display result has occurred due to the reduced decorative symbols even while the winning epilogue video is playing.

(Epilogue 30)
In the winning epilogue part, when the images constituting the winning epilogue are displayed in sequence (when the winning epilogue video is playing), the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area of the screen (the upper left corner of the screen). In addition, in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the winning epilogue video ends, the subtitle display displayed at (Y1) is erased, the reduced pattern at the upper left corner is erased, and the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the central area of the screen. This makes it possible to prevent the subtitle display from overlapping with the decorative pattern, and to prevent the user from mistaking the display of the pattern for a message, and makes the winning epilogue part look good.

(Epilogue 31)
In a modified example, the decorative symbol moves to the upper left corner of the screen in a reach mode when the SP reach starts. By positioning it from the start of the SP reach, it is possible to avoid interfering with the development of the performance during the SP reach, and the series of performances can be displayed in a favorable manner.

Figures 184 to 187 are diagrams for explaining modified examples of re-drawing. In the modified example, for example, a case where a re-drawing is performed from the pattern display in the order of (F1) to (F12) will be explained. Specifically, the pattern is enlarged and displayed as shown in (F1) and (F2), and then reduced as shown in (F3) and (F4). Thereafter, the pattern returns to normal size as shown in (F5). Then, as shown in (F6), the background is switched to a background for the re-drawing performance, and the re-drawing performance starts. After that, a shaking period occurs in which the pattern shakes up and down as shown in (F7). After that, the "3" pattern is displayed in a reduced size from (F8) to (F9).

After that, as shown in (F10), a button image and a time gauge are faintly displayed below the "3" symbol. After that, as shown in (F11), the button image and time gauge are clearly displayed with the "3" symbol displayed. Then, as shown in (F12), the time gauge decreases over time. The time gauge indicates the valid period for which the button operation is active.

Figure 185 shows the case where the player operates the push button 31B from the (F12) state. In Figure 185, the re-draw effect executed from (G1) to (G27) will be explained. When the player operates the push button 31B from the (F12) state, high-speed fluctuation is performed in a manner in which the "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and "2" used as decorative symbols from (G1) to (G13) are all displayed. After that, as shown in (G14), the "3" symbol that was displayed before the high-speed fluctuation is displayed.

Then, the pattern is enlarged as shown in (G15) and (G16), and then reduced as shown in (G17) and (G18). The pattern then returns to normal size as shown in (G19). The background is then switched to a pattern swing background. Here, the pattern swing is performed by rotating the pattern back and forth on the screen. Specifically, the pattern swings back from (G20) to (G21), and then swings forward from (G22) to (G23), changing to the initial position. The pattern swings forward from (G24) to (G25), and then swings back from (G26) to (G27), changing to the initial position.

Figure 186 shows a case where the player does not operate the push button 31B from the (F12) state. In Figure 186, the re-draw effect executed from (H1) to (H27) will be explained. If the player does not operate the push button 31B from the (F12) state, the "3" symbol remains displayed from (H1) to (H6), and the time gauge decreases as time passes. After that, as shown in (H7), the button image is faintly displayed and then erased. After that, from (H8) to (H20), high-speed fluctuation is performed in a mode in which the "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and "2" used as decorative symbols are all displayed. After that, as shown in (H21), the "3" symbol that was displayed before the high-speed fluctuation is displayed.

Then, the symbols are enlarged as shown in (H22) and (H23), and then reduced as shown in (H24) and (H25). Then, the symbols return to normal size as shown in (H26). Then, the background is switched to the background shown in (G20) to (G27) as shown in (H27). The movement of the symbols in (H22) to (H26) when the push button 31B is not operated is the same as the movement of the symbols in (G15) to (G19) when the push button 31B is operated. However, when the push button 31B is operated, the time that the time gauge decreases when the push button 31B is not operated is absorbed by the period during which the performance of shaking the three symbols is executed. In other words, regardless of when the button is operated, the period until the button is operated is absorbed by the duration of the performance of shaking the three symbols.

Then, after (G27) or (H27), the effect shown in FIG. 187 is executed. In FIG. 187, the re-draw effect executed in (J1) to (J18) will be explained. After (G27) or (H27), the screen goes white for a moment as shown in (J1). Then, the "3" symbol rotates once from (J2) to (J9). Specifically, from the (J2) state, it rotates counterclockwise around the vertical axis of the "3" symbol, from (J3), (J4), (J5), (J6), (J7), (J8), to (J9). The rotation is fast, so the symbol appears to rotate in an instant.

After that, as shown in (J10), the "3" symbol is displayed in a reduced size, and then the symbol swings backward from (J11) to (J12), and then swings forward from (J13) to (J14), changing to its initial position. After that, the symbol swings forward from (J15) to (J16), and then swings backward from (J17) to (J18), changing to its initial position. The movement of the symbol swing from (J11) to (J18) is the same as the movement of the symbol swing from (G20) to (G27). Then, at (J18), the symbol stops neatly in its normal position.

[About Losers 1 to 7]
The characteristic parts of the failed epilogue part will be numbered and explained.

(About the design confirmation period)
FIG. 188 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the pattern determination period. (X1) in FIG. 188 is a diagram showing the timing of winning/losing determination corresponding to (r54) in FIG. 132. Details of the pattern determination period when moving from this state to the winning epilogue part are explained in (X2) to (X5). Also, details of the pattern determination period when moving from the (X1) state to the losing epilogue part are explained in (X6) to (X9).

When moving from state (X1) to the winning epilogue part, an image of the state (s5) in which a Bakuchu has been caught is displayed as shown in (X2). After that, as shown in (X3), the screen is controlled to the normal screen, followed by a pattern determination period in which a pattern such as (B8) is determined and stopped. The pattern determination period continues for 0.5 seconds after the pattern determination command is received. After that, as shown in (X4), a fanfare period such as (B11) occurs. After that, as shown in (X5), a jackpot round period occurs.

When moving from the (X1) state to the failure epilogue part, an image of the regrettable (u2) state where the Bakuchu was not caught is displayed as shown in (X6). After that, as shown in (X7), the background goes black and a symbol combination showing the failure display result of "232" is displayed. After that, as shown in (X8), an eye-catching image depicting a character image that has the effect of attracting the player's attention is displayed. After that, the screen is controlled to the normal screen, and then a symbol determination period occurs in which the symbol as shown in (X9) is determined and stopped. The symbol determination period continues for 0.5 seconds after the symbol determination command is received. If there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display after the symbol determination period ends, the next variable display will begin.

(Detailed explanation of the blackout)
FIG. 189 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the blackout. Details of the blackout will be explained in the order of FIG. 189 (X10) to (X22). As shown in (X10), an image of the regrettable (u2) state where the Bakuchu was not caught is displayed. From this state, the blackout background is displayed with gradually decreasing transparency, and the background of the middle pattern showing "3", one of the decorative patterns displayed in the center, is displayed with gradually decreasing transparency. By decreasing the transparency, the blackout background becomes gradually darker and the middle pattern appears gradually more clearly.

After (X10), as shown in (X11), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 70% and the middle symbol is displayed with a transparency of 100%. Then, as shown in (X12), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 60% and the middle symbol is displayed with a transparency of 90%. Then, as shown in (X13), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 50% and the middle symbol is displayed with a transparency of 80%. Then, as shown in (X14), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 40% and the middle symbol is displayed with a transparency of 60%. Then, as shown in (X15), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 30% and the middle symbol is displayed with a transparency of 40%. Then, as shown in (X16), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 20% and the middle symbol is displayed with a transparency of 20%. Then, as shown in (X17), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 10% and the middle symbol is displayed with a transparency of 0%. After that, as shown in (X18), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 0%, and the center pattern is displayed with a transparency of 0%.

After that, a pattern fluctuation period occurs in which the middle symbol "3" fluctuates up and down from (X19) to (X20). After the pattern fluctuation period, an eye-catching image is displayed as shown in (X21). Then, a pattern determination period occurs as shown in (X22). As shown in FIG. 189, the background blackout begins earlier than the middle symbol fade-in, and the background blackout has more stages of transparency change than the middle symbol fade-in.

(Lose 1)
As shown in FIG. 188, if the winning/losing result is a loss after the winning/losing determination, a loss pattern is displayed against a black background in the loss epilogue part. After that, a transition image based on the eye-catching screen is displayed, and then the screen switches to the normal background at the start of the reach. This allows the screen transition at the time of a loss to be viewed in an optimal way by the eye-catching screen.

(Loser 2)
As shown in Fig. 189, in the losing epilogue part, the background when losing gradually blacks out, while the middle pattern gradually fades in. According to this, the image when losing and the middle pattern are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between the blackout and the fade-in, so that the display when losing can be made to look good due to the relationship between the two.

(Missed 3)
As shown in FIG. 189, in the losing epilogue part, the number of steps required to black out the background when losing from 100% to 0% transparency is greater than the number of steps required to fade in the middle pattern from 100% to 0% transparency. Specifically, the background blacks out in eight steps from (X11) to (X18), while the middle pattern fades in in six steps from (X12) to (X17). According to this, the image and the middle pattern when losing are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between the blackout and the fade-in, and the number of steps of the change in transparency is different, so that the display when losing can be made to look good depending on the relationship between the two.

(Loss 4)
As shown in Fig. 189, the change of the background to black out when a winning combination is lost starts before the change of the center pattern to fade in. According to this, the image and center pattern when a winning combination is lost are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between the black out and the fade in, and since the black out is faster than the pattern fade in, the relationship between the two makes the display when a winning combination is lost look favorable.

(Loss 5)
In the image before the blackout, the displayed image changes, whereas in the image at the time of the blackout, the displayed image does not change. In this way, the blackout can be made to look good by starting with an image that does not change. Note that a change in image includes a change in the picture on the screen, a change in the angle of the image, and a change in the displayed scene itself. Also, no change in the image includes the same still image, and even if it is a moving image, the angle of the image does not change, and even if there is movement, only a part of the image moves slightly.

(6th place)
As the background of the loss is blacked out, the middle pattern fades in, and as a result, as shown in (X18) to (X20), the middle pattern with a transparency of 0% and the blacked-out background with a transparency of 0% are displayed for a predetermined period. This predetermined period includes a pattern swing period as shown in (X19) to (X20). The pattern swing period may be repeated for at least two periods, with one period being the period in which the middle pattern moves from the center position to the upper position, the center position, the lower position, and the center position. The predetermined period including such a period may be set longer than the period during which the middle pattern fades in from a transparency of 100% to a transparency of 0%. In addition, the predetermined period may be set longer than the period during which the eye-catcher is displayed. According to this, since there is a predetermined period during which the middle pattern is displayed in a clear state in a display in which the background is blacked out with a transparency of 0%, it is possible to appropriately show that it is a loss.

(Loser 7)
188 and 189, the eye-catching screen displays the title "POWER II" and images of the main characters Yume Yume, Jam, and Nana as information about the pachinko gaming machine 1. This allows the information about the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be accurately conveyed by the eye-catching image.

[About losers 8, 10-17]
The characteristic parts of the failed epilogue part will be numbered and explained.

(About the game effect lamp when you lose)
FIG. 190 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp when it is a miss and a diagram for explaining a modified example when it is a miss. FIG. 190 also describes the lighting mode of the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 50. FIG. 190 (X30) to (X36) are detailed explanatory diagrams of the game effect lamp when it is a miss, and (X40) to (X46) are diagrams showing modified examples when it is a miss. Note that the example shown in FIG. 190 shows the performance when it is a miss in the SP final reach, but the technology shown in FIG. 190 may be applied to the performance when it is a miss in other reaches, such as SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B.

In this embodiment, the brightness data table for a miss is used from the scene where the six friendly characters look disappointed in (X30) to the scene where the background image goes black in (X31). Note that the brightness data table for a miss shown in FIG. 190 corresponds to the grandchild table specified by times tu1 to tu3 of child table WD17 in the miss epilogue part shown in FIG. 216, which will be described later.

After the background image goes black, an eye-catching image is displayed. An eye-catching image is an image that attracts the player's attention, and in this embodiment, as a result of a series of effects in the SP reach, the eye-catching image is displayed before a losing symbol is derived (temporarily stopped) and the screen returns to the normal screen.

The brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used from the period when switching to the eye-catching screen (X32) to the display of the eye-catching screen (X33). After that, the brightness data table for background is used through the period when switching to the normal screen (X34) and the period when the pattern is determined (X35), and until the next variation (X36) that is executed when a variation pattern command is received when there is a hold. Note that the brightness data table for background shown in FIG. 190 corresponds to the grandchild table 26 specified at time tu4 of the child table WD17 in the losing epilogue part shown in FIG. 216 described later.

The background brightness data table is maintained even when a customer waiting command is received when there are no reserved balls after the pattern determination period (X35). In response to receiving a customer waiting command, the performance screen may be switched to a demonstration display, and a demonstration brightness data table may be used.

In relation to the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 50, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 50 flashes from (X30) to (X34). Then, by receiving a pattern determination command, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 50 goes off in the (X35) state. After that, by receiving a variable pattern command when there is a reserved ball, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 50 flashes in the (X36) state. Note that if there is no reserved ball after the pattern determination period of (X35), the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 50 will remain off even if a customer waiting command is received.

As a variation for when a win occurs, the brightness data table for each state may be different from that of this embodiment. Specifically, the brightness data table for when a win occurs is used from the disappointment of (X40) to the background blackout of (X41). After that, the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) may be used for the eye-catching screen switching period of (X42), the eye-catching screen of (X43), the normal screen switching period of (X44), and the pattern determination period of (X45). Then, in the next variation of (X36), the brightness data table for the background may be used.

Here, the initial brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is brighter than the final brightness data (light off) in the brightness data table before the eye-catching is displayed (when it misses). Also, the initial brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is brighter than the initial brightness data in the brightness data table (light off not included) that corresponds to the background when the change starts.

(8th loss)
The characteristic part of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 at the time of failure will be explained. The performance screen is switched to the image at the time of failure after the performance of the winning or losing decision. After that, after the blackout display in which the losing display result is displayed, it is switched to the eye-catching screen. After that, it is switched to the normal screen and the screen in which the pattern is confirmed and stopped is displayed. Also, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table at the time of winning or losing decision to the brightness data table at the time of failure. Then, it is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching). After that, it is switched to the brightness data table of the background at the time of starting the variation. Here, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen. Also, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table of the background at the timing of switching to the normal screen. And, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 50 is switched from flashing to off by receiving the pattern confirmation command, but the brightness data table for the background is not switched even by receiving the pattern confirmation command. In addition, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 50 switches from off to flashing when the next variation pattern command is received, but the background brightness data table does not switch even when the pattern determination command is received. According to this, the brightness data table is switched to the background brightness data table when the eye-catching screen ends, and the brightness data table continues until the next variation, so there is no need to create a separate brightness data table corresponding to the reception of the pattern determination command, and the lamp performance can be displayed without any sense of incongruity from the performance at the time of failure to the next variation, and the series of performances can be displayed appropriately.

(Missed 10)
After the brightness data table is switched to the background brightness data table with the end of the eye-catching screen, the background brightness data table continues to be used even if there is no reserved memory and a customer waiting demo designation command is received. According to this, since the same brightness data table can be used continuously after switching to the background brightness data table, the lamp performance can be shown without discomfort, and the series of performances can be shown appropriately.

(Loser 11)
The special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 switches from blinking to off upon receiving a symbol determination command which is a trigger for the effect of the symbol being determined and stopped. This allows the player to easily understand the flow of the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 when it is a miss.

(Missed 12)
The special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 switches from off to blinking upon receiving a variation pattern command for the next variation, which is the trigger for the start of the next variation. This allows the player to easily understand the flow of the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 when it is a miss.

(Missed 13)
A modified example of a miss will be described. From the performance where the six friendly characters are disappointed at (X40) to the performance where the background image is blacked out at (X41), the brightness data table at the time of miss is used. After the background image is blacked out, the eye-catching image is displayed. From the switching period to the eye-catching screen at (X42) to the pattern determination period at (X45), the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used. After that, when a variation pattern command is received when there is a hold, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for background. That is, at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching), and the brightness data table is maintained during the pattern determination period, and at the timing of switching to the next variation, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for background. Also, during the pattern determination period, the final brightness data of the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used, which is the light-off. According to this, after switching to the background brightness data table, the final brightness data of the switching (eye-catching) brightness data table is maintained until the next variation pattern command is received, making it easier to recognize a miss, and as a result, the miss can be made to look good.

(Missed 14)
The final brightness data in the switching (eye-catching) brightness data table is data for turning off and maintaining the brightness. The background brightness data table does not use data for maintaining the brightness off. According to this, since the background brightness data table does not use brightness data for maintaining the brightness off, turning off when the background is displayed is unique to a failure, making it easier to recognize that it is a failure.

(Missed 15)
If there is no reserved memory after the pattern is determined, the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is switched to the brightness data table for background by receiving a customer waiting command. According to this, since the brightness data table for background is switched to by receiving a customer waiting command, it is easy to recognize that it is a miss.

(Loser 16)
The initial brightness data of the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is brighter than the final brightness data (off) of the brightness data table before the eye-catching image is displayed (when the game is lost). This allows the game effect lamp 9 to be illuminated with a higher brightness than before switching to the eye-catching screen, making it easier to recognize the switch by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9.

(Loser 17)
The initial brightness data of the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is brighter than the initial brightness data of the brightness data table (not including the off state) corresponding to the background at the start of the change. This allows the game effect lamp 9 to emit light at high brightness when switching to the eye-catching screen, making it easy to recognize the switch by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9.

[About 8 to 12]
The characteristic parts related to the decision on whether or not a prize is awarded will be numbered and explained below.

(Detailed explanation of (r48) part)
FIG. 191 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r48) portion. FIG. 191 (r48) is a scene in which the final teaser before the winner is decided is executed. FIG. 191 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the switching of the screen, and FIG. 191 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the switching of the screen and time. As shown in FIG. 191 (A), in the (r48) portion, after the display of the explosive chocolate as in (r48-1), the display of the six allies as in (r48-2) is performed. After that, the display of the explosive chocolate as in (r48-1) is performed again, and then the display of the six allies as in (r48-2) is performed. After that, the switching of the still images between (r48-1) and (r48-2) is repeated, and the switching speed gradually increases as shown in FIG. 191 (B). The images of the ally characters and the enemy characters are gradually enlarged and displayed as time passes.

(True or False: 8)
The scene before the winning or losing decision of (r48) in the provocation part is a slow-motion period in which the movement of the image slows down. In addition, the performance executed before (r48) depicts the movement of the character from multiple image data, while the performance executed in (r48) is executed using the image of Bakuchu and the images of the six allies. The images of the ally character and the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed over time to make the characters look like they are moving. Here, if the image is created during the slow-motion period using the same amount of image data as during the period other than the slow-motion period, the amount of data is small and the movement is awkward. However, if a large amount of data is used to make the movement during the slow-motion period smooth, the capacity becomes too large. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced by reducing the number of images used during the slow-motion period and making the character look like he is moving by switching and enlarging the display. The number of images used during the slow-motion period may be any number as long as it is smaller than the number of images used during the period other than the slow-motion period.

(9 correct or not)
As shown in Fig. 191 (B), the speed of switching between the images of the ally character and the enemy character gradually increases. In this way, after the image switching speed reaches its fastest, a prompting display for trigger operation is displayed, making it possible to tease the player as to whether a scene in which the ally character has an advantage or an enemy character has an advantage will develop, increasing interest. In addition, by switching between images alternately, it becomes difficult to notice that one image is used for each of the ally character and the enemy character.

(10% correct)
The slow motion period performance in (r48) may be executed at the timing of development from the SP first half reach to the SP second half reach or the SP final reach. In this way, the performance can be executed appropriately even at the timing of development from the SP first half reach.

(11 correct answers)
During the slow-motion period in (r48), at least one of the friendly character and the enemy character may be constructed using two or more images. For example, for a friendly character, four images may be repeatedly used, such as image 1, image 2, image 3, image 4, image 1, etc., to make the character's hair and clothes appear to move gradually. In this way, the data of the character itself is reused while only a portion of the data is changed, thereby reducing the amount of work required for data change and more faithfully expressing the character's movements.

(12 correct answers)
In the slow-motion period in (r48), when the character's hair or clothes are made to appear to move gradually from multiple images, the movement of the hair or clothes may be designed to appear to move at the same speed as during periods other than the slow-motion period. Here, if the number of images is increased to match the slow-motion movement in order to make the movement appear smooth during the slow-motion period, the capacity will increase. However, by speeding up the movement during the slow-motion period, the movement does not become awkward even if the number of images used is reduced, and the movement can be more faithfully expressed while reducing the data capacity.

<Explanation about the game effect lamp>
Next, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 will be explained with reference to Figures 192 to 260.

[Regarding lamp control of game effect lamps using brightness data tables]
The performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table stored in the ROM 121 or RAM 122 to control one or more of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 to light/blink/turn off through lamp control.

Specifically, the display control unit 124 sets the sub-variation time according to the variation pattern command transmitted from the CPU 105 mounted on the main board 11. The sub-variation time is a counter that is decremented by one for each frame (33 msec) of the image to be displayed. When the sub-variation time reaches the timing to start a display corresponding to each part (for example, various displays (reach display, etc.) in each part such as the start part and the promotion part), the display control unit 124 performs display control of the image display device 5 based on image data (video data, animation data) stored in the ROM 121 or the RAM 122. The display control unit 124 sets an extension command corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) to be displayed on the image display device 5 according to the display control performed by itself, and transmits the extension command to the performance control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) for which display control is performed by the display control unit 124 based on the extension command received from the display control unit 124.

For example, FIG. 272 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 272, when the display control unit 124 performs display control in the winning epilogue of the SP first half reach A, it sends an extension command to the performance control CPU 120 to specify the winning epilogue of the SP first half reach A. Based on the extension command received from the display control unit 124, the performance control CPU 120 identifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the winning epilogue of the SP first half reach A.

In the parent table, information is stored that specifies the lamps (lighting points) that are the subject of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, information that specifies the maximum time that lamp control is performed for each lamp, and information that specifies the child table that is referenced when lamp control is performed for each lamp (designated address of the child table). Note that in the parent table, only the lamps that are the subject of lamp control are designated, and lamps that are not the subject of lamp control are not designated. For example, in the parent table shown in FIG. 192 described later, the frame lamp, the role lamp 9A, the left panel lamp 9B, the attacca lamp 9E, the V attacca lamp 9F, and the electric chute lamp 9H are designated as the subjects of lamp control, and 600,000 msec is designated as the maximum time that lamp control is performed for each lamp. In the parent table shown in FIG. 192, child table WD1 is specified for the frame lamp, child table YD1 is specified for the reel lamp 9A, child table LD1 is specified for the left panel lamp 9B, and child table AD1 is specified for the attacca lamp 9E, V attacca lamp 9F, and electric chute lamp 9H.

Details will be described later using FIG. 206, but as shown in FIG. 272, in the parent table for the SP first half reach A hit epilogue, 600,000 msec (10 minutes) is specified as the maximum time for lamp control to be performed on the frame lamp, and the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the counter every 10 msec to time this 600,000 msec (10 minutes). In other words, the performance control CPU 120 performs the counter subtraction process 60,000 times to time 600,000 msec (10 minutes). The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control using the child table specified by the parent table until a maximum of 600,000 msec (10 minutes) is timed. In the parent table for the SP first half reach A hit epilogue, WD3 is specified as the child table.

The child table stores information specifying the lamp (illuminated location) that is the target of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the grandchild table to be referenced at each time when the lamp control is performed (specified address of the grandchild table). For example, in the child table for the frame lamp shown in FIG. 193 described below, the grandchild tables (W4, W11, W12, W21, etc.) to be referenced for each time such as ta1 to ta19 are specified.

Details will be given later using Figure 206, but as shown in Figure 272, in child table WD3 for the epilogue of the SP first half reach A hit, 300 msec is specified as the time for lamp control of the frame lamp, and the performance control CPU 120 counts 3000 msec by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and performs lamp control using the grandchild table specified by child table WD3 until the count reaches 3000 msec. In child table WD3 for the epilogue of the SP first half reach A hit, W4 is specified as the grandchild table.

The grandchild table stores information specifying the lamps (illuminated locations) that are the subject of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and brightness data used at each time that the lamp control is performed. For example, grandchild table W4 shown in FIG. 230, which will be described later, stores brightness data corresponding to RGB used every 30 msec.

The brightness data value corresponds to the current value output to the lamp that is the target of lamp control. For example, a frame lamp is composed of LEDs consisting of three elements, "R", "G", and "B", and the brightness data for each element corresponds to the current value output to that element. Specifically, the brightness data has 16 current values from 0 to F, and when the brightness data is 0, the current value is the minimum value (for example, 0), and when the brightness data is F, the current value is the maximum value. For example, when brightness data "A" is output to the "R" element, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "A" flows through the "R" element, when brightness data "1" is output to the "G" element, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "1" flows through the "G" element, and when brightness data "F" is output to the "G" element, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "F" flows through the "G" element.

The frame lamp can emit light in various colors by passing a current corresponding to the brightness data through each of the RGB elements. The frame lamp can also be lit in a color corresponding to each of the characters mentioned above by emitting light based on the brightness data. As an example, in a performance in which Yume-chan appears, the data "F00" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as the brightness data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light up in red. In a performance in which Maid A appears, the data "00F" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as the brightness data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light up in blue. In a performance in which Maid B appears, the data "0AC" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as the brightness data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light up in Hawaiian blue. In a performance in which AD appears, the data "FF0" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as the brightness data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light up in yellow. In a performance in which Jam-chan appears, brightness data "A5F" is output from the LED lamp to the LED, and a current corresponding to that data flows, causing the LED to light up purple. In a performance in which Nana-chan appears, brightness data "F3F" is output from the LED lamp to the LED, and a current corresponding to that data flows, causing the LED to light up pink. In a performance in which Bakuchu appears, brightness data "F00" is output from the LED lamp to the LED, and a current corresponding to that data flows, causing the LED to light up red. In a performance in which Boingo appears, brightness data "FEA" is output from the LED lamp to the LED, and a current corresponding to that data flows, causing the LED to light up cream.

Details will be described later using FIG. 230, but as shown in FIG. 272, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are alternately specified as brightness data (RGB data) for each lamp at 30 msec intervals. The performance control CPU 120 counts up the time specified by the child table, 3000 msec, by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and outputs brightness data to the LED driver at 30 msec intervals based on the grandchild table W4 until the count reaches 300 msec. Then, based on the received brightness data, the LED driver passes a current corresponding to the brightness data through the specified LED. This allows the performance control CPU 120 to control each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 via the LED driver.

As described above, the performance control CPU 120 has timers corresponding to each of the parent table, child table, and grandchild table, and performs lamp control based on the parent table, child table, and grandchild table while decrementing the timer at regular intervals (for example, 10 msec intervals).

Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting brightness data from the first specified location in the grandchild table, and when it has completed outputting brightness data up to the last specified location in the grandchild table, if the timer value corresponding to the child table specifying that grandchild table still remains, it starts outputting brightness data again from the first specified location in the grandchild table. On the other hand, if the timer value corresponding to the child table specifying that grandchild table becomes 0 while the performance control CPU 120 is outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table, it sets a timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table specifying that child table, and starts outputting brightness data from the first specified location in the grandchild table specified by that child table. This switches the grandchild table, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table after the switch.

Timer management of child tables by the performance control CPU 120 will be explained with reference to the figure. Figure 273 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table by timer management of a child table. As shown in Figure 273, in the child table for the SP first half reach A hit epilogue, 3000 msec is specified as the time for lamp control for the frame lamp, and W4 is specified as the grandchild table. In the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are specified alternately at 30 msec intervals as the brightness data (RGB data) for each lamp. For ease of explanation, the data "000" in the first 30 msec will be referred to as data 1, the data "AAA" in the next 30 msec as data 2, the data "000" in the next 30 msec as data 3, the data "AAA" in the next 30 msec as data 4, the data "000" in the next 30 msec as data 5, the data "AAA" in the next 30 msec as data 6, and the data "000" in the next 30 msec as data 7.

The performance control CPU 120 counts the 3000 msec specified by the child table WD3 by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and outputs the brightness data of data 1 to data 7 to the LED driver at 30 msec intervals based on the grandchild table W4 until the count reaches 3000 msec. However, if the count has not yet reached 3000 msec after outputting data 1 to data 7, it again outputs the brightness data to the LED driver in order starting from the first data 1. When the count eventually reaches 3000 msec, the performance control CPU 120 stops outputting the brightness data based on the grandchild table W4 at that point, and starts outputting the brightness data based on the next grandchild table W1 specified by the child table. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 loops the output of the brightness data until the time specified by the child table has elapsed.

As shown in the parent table in FIG. 192, which will be described later, child data is specified over a period of 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and the 10-minute data in such a parent table serves as a measure against malfunctions. That is, the performance control CPU 120 switches parent tables based on the performance control command from the CPU 103 to control the lamps, but even if some malfunction occurs while lamp control is being performed based on a certain parent table and the performance control CPU 120 does not receive a performance control command from the CPU 103, lamp control is performed based on the same parent table for 10 minutes, so it is possible to prevent different lamp controls from being performed one after another from the point where the malfunction occurred.

Also, as in the child table shown in Figure 193 described later, grandchild data is specified over 600,000 msec (10 minutes) at the final specified location, and the 10-minute data in this child table serves to prevent lamp control from being performed again from the first specified location in the child table when the value of the timer corresponding to the child table becomes 0, because the parent table's timer is still remaining.

Also, as in the grandchild table shown in Figure 235 described later, brightness data is specified for 600,000 msec (10 minutes) at the final specified location, and the 10-minute data in this grandchild table serves to prevent lamp control from being performed again from the first specified location in the grandchild table when the value of the timer corresponding to the grandchild table reaches 0, because the timer of the child table is still remaining.

In this way, by specifying 10-minute brightness data at the end of the grandchild table, the lamp is maintained at a fixed light emission, which prevents the lamp from continually changing in illumination. Furthermore, by specifying 600,000 msec (10 minutes) of brightness data at the end of the grandchild table specified at the end of the child table, the lamp can be more effectively prevented from continually changing in illumination.

As mentioned above, the luminance data table is composed of a parent table, a child table, and a grandchild table, but in the luminance data table used in each part described below, only characteristic tables among the parent table, child table, and grandchild table are shown, and other tables may be omitted.

[Luminance data table used in the beginning part]
Fig. 192 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the start part. As shown in Fig. 192, the parent table in the brightness data table used in the start part stores information specifying 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and child tables (WD1, YD1, LD1, AD1) to be referenced when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

Figure 193 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for the start part. As shown in Figure 193, in the frame lamp child table WD1, the time of the start part for the frame lamp is subdivided and a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that in this embodiment, only particularly distinctive grandchild tables are described in the child table, and other grandchild tables are marked "omitted" and their description is omitted.

For example, at times ta1, ta4, and ta7, grandchild table W21 is specified. Grandchild table W21 is included in the normal background luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52, and corresponds to grandchild table W21 for the frame lamp in the background luminance data table shown in FIG. 260 described later. As shown in FIG. 260, in grandchild table W21, "550", "770", or "880" is specified as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W21, thereby lighting the frame lamps in yellow (yellow background lighting pattern) corresponding to the normal background.

At time ta3 and time ta6, grandchild table W4 is specified. Grandchild table W4 corresponds to grandchild table W4 for the frame lamp in the white blinking (white flash) brightness data table shown in FIG. 230 described later. As shown in FIG. 230, in grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are specified alternately at 30 msec intervals as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 causes the frame lamp to blink in white by performing lamp control based on grandchild table W4. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 causes the frame lamp to blink in white twice by performing lamp control over 150 msec (30 msec x 5) based on grandchild table W4.

At times ta10 to ta12, grandchild table W11 is specified. Grandchild table W11 corresponds to grandchild table W11 for the frame lamp in the shutter 1 brightness data table shown in FIG. 251, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 251, grandchild table W11 specifies that the brightness data is gradually lowered from "A00" to "600" at 30 msec intervals as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W11, and lights up the frame lamp in red while gradually lowering the brightness in response to the performance of the shutter closing as shown in FIG. 58 (a10) to (a12).

At times ta13 to ta18, the grandchild table W12 is specified. The grandchild table W12 corresponds to the grandchild table W12 for the frame lamp in the shutter 2 brightness data table shown in FIG. 251, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 251, in the grandchild table W12, "600" is specified at 30 msec as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W12, and lights up the frame lamp in red while maintaining a reduced brightness, corresponding to the performance in which the shutter opens in stages after being maintained for a predetermined time from a fully closed state as shown in FIG. 59 (a13) to (a15) and FIG. 60 (a16) to (a18).

In this way, in the child table WD1 of the start part, during the time ta1-ta12 before the shutters are completely closed, the brightness data switches so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks while changing color and brightness, such as background yellow, flashing red, flashing white, and then lighting up red, whereas during the time ta13-ta18 after the shutters are completely closed, the brightness data is maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining a reduced brightness. This allows the lighting state of the frame lamp to liven up the presentation in the start part before the shutters close, and by maintaining the lighting state of the frame lamp when the shutters are closed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the content of the presentation when the shutters open, and as a result, the presentation in the subsequent teasing part can be better viewed by the player.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59(a13), the brightness data is maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining a reduced brightness from the timing when the shutter is completely closed, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the brightness data may be maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining a reduced brightness after a predetermined time (e.g., one second) has elapsed after the shutter is completely closed. Alternatively, the brightness data may be maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining a reduced brightness from a timing related to the shutter closing operation (e.g., the timing when the shutter starts to close, the timing immediately before the shutter starts to close, etc.).

At time ta19, which is the end of the start part, the frame lamp is turned off in response to the effect of the shutter being maintained in a fully open state as shown in FIG. 61 (a19). Note that "off" here refers to a state in which the brightness data is "0" as explained with reference to FIG. 53, but at time ta19, it may be almost off, with the brightness data being "1". Note that in the following explanation, "off" may also mean "almost off". At time ta19, lamp control is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on the grandchild table, and the frame lamp remains off based on the grandchild table for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD1 reaches 0.

In this way, the frame lamp goes out when the shutter is fully open, so the lighting state of the frame lamp makes it possible to clearly communicate to the player when the shutter is fully open. Also, the teasing part of SP first half reach A and the teasing part of SP first half reach B, which are executed after the start part, start with the shutter fully open and the frame lamp off, and the frame lamp starts to light up or flash based on the brightness data table corresponding to each SP first half reach. In this way, after the shutter is fully open and the frame lamp goes out, the frame lamp starts to light up in accordance with the progress of the performance in the SP first half reach, so it is possible to clearly communicate to the player that the SP first half reach has started.

[Brightness data table used in the first half of the SP Reach A provocation part]
Fig. 194 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP first half reach A. As shown in Fig. 194, the parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP first half reach A stores information specifying 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and child tables (WD2, YD2, LD2, AD2) to be referred to when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

Figure 195 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of SP first half reach A. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD2 is included in the SP reach brightness data table explained with reference to Figure 52. As shown in Figure 195, in the frame lamp child table WD2, the time of the provocative part of SP first half reach A for the frame lamp is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W3 is specified for 1560 msec of time tb10. Grandchild table W3 corresponds to grandchild table W3 for the frame lamp in the yellow haze brightness data table shown in FIG. 229, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 229, in grandchild table W3, "440", "660", and "880" are sparsely specified at 180 msec intervals as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W3, causing the frame lamps to light up in a hazy yellow color that corresponds to the background of the SP reach.

During the 150 msec interval of time tb14 and the 210 msec interval of time tb17, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to flash in white.

As shown in FIG. 230, in the grandchild table W4, the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp is specified as "000" and "AAA" alternately at 30 msec intervals, with the first 30 msec being "000" (off), the next 30 msec being "AAA" (on in white), the next 30 msec being "000" (off), the next 30 msec being "AAA" (on in white), the next 30 msec being "000" (off), the next 30 msec being "AAA" (on in white), and the last 30 msec being "000" (off). In other words, the frame lamp alternates between "off" and "on" over one cycle of 210 msec (30 msec x 7), causing the frame lamp to flash in white (white flash) multiple times. For example, if the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 over one period of 210 msec (30 msec x 7), the frame lamp will flash white three times, and if the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 over 150 msec (30 msec x 5), the frame lamp will flash white twice.

At both time tb14 and time tb17, grandchild table W4 is specified, but at time tb14, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4 in a time that is shorter than one cycle of 150 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white twice, and at time tb17, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4 in a time that is one cycle of 210 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white three times.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at multiple different timings in one child table WD2, thereby flashing the frame lamp in white at multiple different timings, while varying the time for which the grandchild table W4 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, making it possible to set the number of times the frame lamp flashes in white to two or three times. This makes it possible to vary the number of white flashes while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W4 but changing the reference time, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different timings. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

At time tb18, which is the end of the teasing part of the SP first half reach A, the frame lamp lights up in white in response to the performance of teasing whether Yume-chan will catch the Bakuchu before the decision of the win/loss branch (jackpot, miss, SP reach second half development) as shown in FIG. 67 (b18). At time tb18, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8 for a maximum of 10 minutes. For example, the grandchild table W8 corresponds to the grandchild table W8 for the frame lamp in the teasing 2 brightness data table without operation promotion shown in FIG. 249 described later. As shown in FIG. 249, in the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100000 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and the frame lamp maintains the white lighting based on the grandchild table W8 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD2 becomes 0.

As a result, in the winning/losing branch in the teasing part of Reach A in the first half of the SP, as shown in Figure 67 (b18), the frame lamp will remain lit white with the sound muted, making it possible to clearly communicate to the player the winning/losing branch (decisive timing).

In addition, in the child table WD2 of the SP first half Reach A provocation part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to that character, and when the character speaks, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp flashes in a color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time tb4, the performance control CPU 120 lights the frame left lamp in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan and lights the frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu, corresponding to a performance in which Yume Yume-chan, located on the left side of the screen, and Bakuchu, located on the right side of the screen, face each other as shown in FIG. 63 (b4). At time tb5, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame left lamp in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan, corresponding to a performance in which Yume Yume-chan, located on the left side of the screen, speaks a line as shown in FIG. 63 (b5). At time tb6, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu, corresponding to a performance in which Bakuchu, located on the right side of the screen, speaks a line as shown in FIG. 63 (b6).

As a result, in scenes where multiple characters are displayed speaking lines, the frame lamp can be lit/blinking to clearly indicate which character is speaking, allowing the player to see the effects of the provocative part in an optimal way.

In addition, in the child table WD2 of the first half of the SP's Reach A provocation part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time tb11, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame left lamp in green, corresponding to Yume Yume, located on the left side of the screen, chasing Bakuchu, as shown in FIG. 65 (b11). Furthermore, at times tb8 and tb9, when there is a character speaking but no subtitles, as shown in FIG. 63 (b8) and (b9), the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in the color corresponding to the character.

In this way, as shown in Figures 64 (b8) and (b9), even if a character is speaking but there are no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to ideally express that a character is speaking through the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9, even in scenes where there are no subtitles displayed, and allows the player to see the effects of the provocative part in an ideal way.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach A]
FIG. 196 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach A.

As shown in FIG. 196 (a1), the parent table for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach A stores information specifying 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and the child tables (WD3, YD3, LD3, AD3) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 196 (a2), in the child table WD3 for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach A, for the frame lamp, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach A is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD3 for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, at time tc1, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 67 (b18), causes the frame lamp to flash in white, corresponding to the performance of catching a Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 68 (c1).

As mentioned above, the white light at the win/lose branch (tb18) indicates that the RGB data is "FDC," whereas the white flashing at tc1 after a win is confirmed indicates that the RGB data is "FFF." As a result, when a win occurs, the frame lamp flashes in the same color (white) as the win/lose branch but brighter than the win/lose branch, making it easy for the player to understand that they have won based on the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9.

At times tc2 and tc3, grandchild table W1 is specified. Grandchild table W1 corresponds to grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp in the smooth rainbow brightness data table shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 225, in grandchild table W1, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at 30 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W1, thereby lighting up the frame lamps in rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed win, in response to the performance of catching a Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 68 (c2) and (c3).

As shown in FIG. 196 (b1), the parent table for displaying common symbols used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach A stores information specifying 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and the child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) to be referenced when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 196 (b2), in the child table WD0 for displaying common symbols used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of the SP reach A, the time for displaying symbols in the winning epilogue part of the first half of the SP reach A for the frame lamp is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD0 for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. Also, the child table WD0 for displaying common symbols is used in common in the first half of the SP reach A and B, the second half of the SP reach A and B, and the final SP reach.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for the 5000 msec period between time tc4 and time tc5. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in a bright white color corresponding to the display of a winning pattern, as shown in Figures 69 (c4) and (c5).

At time tc6, which is the end of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps light up smoothly in rainbow colors, corresponding to the final winning symbol being displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 69 (c6). At time tc6, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamps continue to light up in rainbow colors based on grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD3 reaches 0.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, grandchild table W1 is specified for time tc2 and time tc3, and based on this grandchild table W1, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors in response to an effect of catching a chu, and further, grandchild table W1 is specified for time tc6, and based on this grandchild table W1, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors in response to an effect of displaying a winning symbol in the center of the screen. In this way, in the winning epilogue part, by sharing the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when announcing a win and the grandchild table for displaying the winning symbol, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control to light up in rainbow colors without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different timings, while enhancing each effect with a unified effect. As a result, the effect in the winning epilogue part can be made to look better to the player using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in the first half of the SP Reach A Miss Epilogue part]
Figure 197 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach A.

As shown in FIG. 197 (a1), the parent table for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach A stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 197(a2), in the child table WD4 for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the SP first half reach A, for the frame lamp, the time of the miss epilogue part in the SP reach first half A is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD4 for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. Also, the child table WD4 for the common miss epilogue is used in common in the SP reach first half A and B, the SP reach second half A and B, and the SP final reach.

For example, the grandchild table W13 is specified for 200 msec of time td1. The grandchild table W13 corresponds to the grandchild table W13 for the frame lamp in the miss 1 brightness data table shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 252, in the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified for the first 10 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "444" is specified for the next 190 msec. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W13, and after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 67 (b18), lights up the frame lamps in white to correspond to the performance of failing to catch the explosive chocolate as shown in FIG. 70 (d1).

As mentioned above, the white light at the win/lose branch (tb18) indicates that the RGB data is "FDC", whereas the white light at td1 after the loss notification indicates that the RGB data is "888" or "444". This allows the frame lamp to light up in a dimmer white color when a loss occurs, while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white light at the win/lose branch (tb18), so that the player can be conveniently notified that a loss has occurred.

During the 5,800 msec period of time td2, grandchild table W14 is specified. Grandchild table W14 corresponds to grandchild table W14 for the frame lamp in the Loss 2 Brightness Data Table shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 252, in grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at 250 msec intervals as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. By controlling the lamps based on grandchild table W14, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamps in a darker white color than td1, corresponding to the performance shown in FIG. 70 (d2) in which Yume-Yume is disappointed after losing.

As mentioned above, when a win occurs (tc2, tc3), the RGB data changes at 30 msec intervals for the rainbow lighting, whereas when a loss occurs (td2), the RGB data changes at 250 msec intervals, which is longer than when a win occurs. As a result, when a win occurs, the frame lamp changes color at shorter intervals than when a loss occurs, so the player can easily understand that he or she has won based on the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, when a win occurs, the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized than when a loss occurs, while when a loss occurs, the lighting of the frame lamp is more subdued than when a win occurs, and as a result, a win or loss can be easily communicated to the player through the contrasting lamp states.

At time td3, grandchild table W15 is specified. Grandchild table W15 corresponds to grandchild table W15 for the frame lamp in the Miss 3 brightness data table shown in FIG. 253, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 253, in grandchild table W15, "444" is specified for the first 10 msec, "111" is specified for the next 550 msec, and "111" is specified for the final 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W15, and turns off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a miss is announced and the screen goes dark, as shown in FIG. 70 (d3).

At time td4, grandchild table W21 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W21, lighting the frame lamp in a yellow background lighting pattern to correspond to a performance in which the normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 71 (d4). In other words, the grandchild table W21 used when the normal screen is displayed in the event of a miss has a lighting mode that corresponds to the normal background, and is the same as the grandchild table W21 specified at time ta1, time ta4, and time ta7 in the start part.

At time td4, lamp control is performed by repeatedly referring to the brightness data contained in the grandchild table W21. Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control by switching RGB data based on the grandchild table W21 shown in FIG. 260 described later, until a fluctuation pattern command specifying the next fluctuation is received if there is a hold, or until a customer waiting command is received over time if there is no hold, and if the fluctuation pattern command or customer waiting command has not yet been received even after performing lamp control based on the final RGB data, lamp control is performed again based on the initial RGB data.

As shown in FIG. 190, from the time the frame lamp goes out at time td3 until the frame lamp lights up in a yellow background pattern at time td4 in response to the effect of displaying the normal screen, the eye-catching screen is displayed and the frame lamp lights up based on the brightness data table corresponding to the eye-catching screen. In this way, in lamp control of the frame lamp when a miss occurs, the brightness data table (grandchild table) corresponding to the eye-catching screen is used, and then the grandchild table W21, which is also used in the start part as the brightness data table corresponding to the normal screen, is used. This eliminates the need to prepare a separate brightness data table to be used after the eye-catching screen is displayed and before the pattern is determined, and by controlling the lamp based on the grandchild table W21, which is also used in the start part, the effect using the frame lamps can be viewed by the player without any sense of incongruity.

[Brightness data table used in the first half of the SP Reach B provocation part]
Fig. 198 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP first half reach B. As shown in Fig. 198, the parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP first half reach B stores 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD5, YD5, LD5, AD5) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

Figure 199 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP first half reach B. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD5 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to Figure 52. As shown in Figure 199, in the frame lamp child table WD5, the time of the provocative part of the SP first half reach B for the frame lamp is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 150 msec at time te8 and for 210 msec at time te12. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to flash white. Grandchild table W4 is specified at both time te8 and time te12, but at time te8, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4 in a time shorter than one cycle of 150 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white twice, and at time te12, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4 in a time period of one cycle of 210 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white three times.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at multiple different timings in one child table WD5, thereby flashing the frame lamp in white at multiple different timings, while varying the time for which the grandchild table W4 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, making it possible to set the number of times the frame lamp flashes in white to two or three times. This makes it possible to vary the number of white flashes while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W4 but changing the reference time, without having to prepare a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

At time te17, which is the end of the teasing part of the SP first half reach B, the frame lamp lights up in white, corresponding to the effect of teasing whether Yume Yume will lose or not in the win/loss branch (jackpot, miss, SP reach second half development) as shown in Figure 77 (e17). At time te18, the lamps are controlled based on the grandchild table W8 for a maximum of 10 minutes.

As a result, in the winning/losing branch in the teasing part of the first half of the SP, Reach B, as shown in Figure 77 (e17), the frame lamp will remain lit white with the sound muted, making it possible to clearly communicate to the player the winning/losing branch (decisive timing).

In addition, in the child table WD5 of the SP first half reach B teasing part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to that character, and when the character speaks, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp flashes in a color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time te4, the performance control CPU 120 lights the frame left lamp in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan and lights the frame right lamp in cream corresponding to Boingo, corresponding to a performance in which Yume Yume-chan, located on the left side of the screen, and Boingo, located on the right side of the screen, face each other as shown in FIG. 73 (e4). At time te5, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame left lamp in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan, corresponding to a performance in which Yume Yume-chan, located on the left side of the screen, speaks a line as shown in FIG. 73 (e5). At time te6, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame right lamp in cream corresponding to Boingo, corresponding to a performance in which Boingo, located on the right side of the screen, speaks a line as shown in FIG. 73 (e6).

As a result, in scenes where multiple characters are displayed speaking lines, the frame lamp can be lit/blinking to clearly indicate which character is speaking, allowing the player to see the effects of the provocative part in an optimal way.

In addition, in the child table WD5 of the SP first half reach B provocation part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time te11, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in cream color, which corresponds to Boingo, in response to the performance of Boingo shooting the puck as shown in FIG. 75 (e11). Furthermore, at time te7, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in green, which corresponds to Yume Yume, in the case where Yume Yume has a line but there are no subtitles as shown in FIG. 74 (e7).

In this way, as shown in Figure 74 (e7), even if a character is speaking but there are no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to ideally express that a character is speaking through the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9, even in scenes where there are no subtitles displayed, and allows the player to see the effects of the provocative part in an ideal way.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per reach B in the first half of the SP]
FIG. 200 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach B.

As shown in FIG. 200 (a1), the parent table for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach B stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD6, YD6, LD6, AD6) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 200(a2), in the child table WD6 for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach B, for the frame lamp, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach B is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD6 for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, at time tf1, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 77 (e17), causes the frame lamp to flash in white, corresponding to the performance of Yume Yume hitting the puck back as shown in FIG. 78 (f1).

The white lighting at the win/lose branch (te17) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in Figure 249 described below, and its RGB data is "FDC," whereas the white flashing at tf1 after a win is confirmed has RGB data of "FFF." As a result, when a win occurs, the frame lamp flashes in the same color (white) as the win/lose branch and brighter than the win/lose branch, making it easy for the player to understand that they have won based on the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9.

From time tf2 to tf4, grandchild table W1 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W1, and smoothly lights up the frame lamps in rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed win, in accordance with the performance shown in Fig. 78 (f2) to (f4) in which Boingo is attacked and Yume-Yume wins.

As shown in Figure 200 (b1), the parent table for displaying common symbols used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach B stores information specifying 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and the child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) to be referenced when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in Figure 200 (b2), in the child table WD0 for displaying common symbols used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP reach B, the time for the symbol display part in the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP reach B for the frame lamp is subdivided, and a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified between time tf5 and time tf6, which is 5000 msec. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in a bright white color corresponding to the display of a winning pattern, as shown in Figures 79 (f5) and (f6).

At time tf7, which is the end of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps light up smoothly in rainbow colors, corresponding to the final winning symbol being displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 80 (f7). At time tf7, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamps will continue to light up in rainbow colors based on grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD6 reaches 0.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is specified for times tf2 to tf4, and the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors based on the grandchild table W1 in response to an effect in which Boingo is attacked and Yume-chan wins. Furthermore, the grandchild table W1 is also specified for time tf7, and the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors based on the grandchild table W1 in response to an effect in which the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen. In this way, in the winning epilogue part, by sharing the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when announcing a win and the grandchild table for displaying the winning symbol, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control to light up in rainbow colors without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different timings, while enhancing each effect with a unified effect. As a result, the effect in the winning epilogue part can be made to look better to the player using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in the first half of the SP Reach B Miss Epilogue part]
Figure 201 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the first half of the SP reach B.

As shown in FIG. 201 (a1), the parent table for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach B stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in Figure 200 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the SP first half reach B, for the frame lamp, the time of the miss epilogue part in the SP reach first half B is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, the grandchild table W13 is specified between time tg1 and time tg2, which is a period of 200 msec. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W13, and after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 77 (e17), the frame lamps are lit in white to correspond to the performance in which Yume Yume is sent flying as shown in FIG. 81 (g1).

The white lighting at the win/lose branch (te17) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "FDC," whereas the white lighting at tg1 after the loss notification is based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "888" or "444." This allows the frame lamp to light up in a dimmer white color when a loss occurs, while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting at the win/lose branch (te17), so that the player can be conveniently notified that a loss has occurred.

During the 5,800 msec period of time tg3, grandchild table W14 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W14, and lights up the frame lamp in a darker white color than tg1, corresponding to the performance in which Yume Yume is disappointed at losing, as shown in Figures 70 (g2) and (g3).

The rainbow lighting during a win (tf2-tf4) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at 30 msec intervals, while the darker white lighting during a loss (tg3) is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at 250 msec intervals, which is longer than during a win. As a result, during a win, the frame lamp's lighting color switches at shorter intervals than during a loss, so the player can easily understand that he or she has won based on the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, during a win, the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized than during a loss, while during a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued than during a win, and as a result, a win or loss can be easily communicated to the player by the contrasting lamp states.

At time tg4, grandchild table W15 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W15, and turns off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a miss is announced and the screen goes dark, as shown in FIG. 82 (g4).

At time tg5, grandchild table W21 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W21, thereby lighting the frame lamp in a yellow background lighting pattern in response to a performance in which a normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 81 (g5). Also, at time tg5, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the brightness data contained in grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in the character movement part during the latter half of the SP development]
FIG. 202 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the part of the reel action during the latter half of the SP development. The grandchild table included in the child table WD8 of the frame lamp is included in the brightness data table for SP reach explained with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 202, in the child table WD8 of the frame lamp, a grandchild table to be referred to in the part of the reel action is specified for the frame lamp. The child table WD8 is used for lamp control of the frame lamp corresponding to the first half (falling part) of the part action shown in FIG. 171 (h1) to (h3) (FIG. 83 (h1) to (h3)).

For example, grandchild table W2 is specified for 7000 msec from time th1 to th3. Grandchild table W2 corresponds to grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp in the reel operation red flashing brightness data table shown in FIG. 228, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 228, in grandchild table W2, "A00" is specified for the first 40 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "333" is specified for the next 30 msec. By controlling the lamps based on grandchild table W2, the performance control CPU 120 causes the frame lamps to flash red in response to the performance of a reel falling as shown in FIG. 83 (h1) to (h3) after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 77 (e17).

In addition, during the 7000 msec period from time th1 to time th3 during which the reel falls, lamp control is also performed on the reel lamp 9A. For example, during the 7000 msec period from time th1 to time th3 during which the reel falls, the performance control CPU 120 causes the reel lamp 9A to flash in red based on the child table corresponding to the falling action of the reel in the reel lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table.

This allows the lighting pattern of the frame lamp and the reel lamp 9A to more effectively draw the player's attention to the falling reel.

[Brightness data table used in the second half of the SP Reach A promotion part]
Fig. 203 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP latter half reach A. As shown in Fig. 203, the parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP latter half reach A stores 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD9, YD9, LD9, AD9) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

Figures 204 and 205 are diagrams for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of SP latter half reach A. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD9 is included in the SP reach brightness data table explained with reference to Figure 52. As shown in Figures 204 and 205, in the frame lamp child table WD9, the time of the provocative part of SP latter half reach A for the frame lamp is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

The brightness data corresponding to times th4 to th10 is used to control the frame lamps corresponding to the latter half (rising part) of the role action shown in Figure 171 (h4) to Figure 172 (h10). Specifically, from times th4 to th6, the frame lamps flash yellow in response to the performance of the role rising, and then from times th7 to th10, based on the grandchild table W3, the frame lamps light up in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP reach. This allows the player to easily understand that the game has progressed to the SP latter half reach A by gradually changing the frame lamps from flashing yellow to lighting up in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP latter half reach A.

In addition, during the time th4 to th10 when the reel rises, lamp control is also performed on the reel lamp 9A. For example, during the time th4 to th10 when the reel rises, the performance control CPU 120 gradually reduces the brightness of the reel lamp 9A so as to gradually turn off the reel lamp 9A based on the child table corresponding to the reel rise action in the reel lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table.

As a result, the lighting pattern of the reel lamp 9A does not make the player aware of the reel rising, while the lighting pattern of the frame lamp draws the player's attention to the screen indicating that the game has progressed to Reach A in the latter half of the SP.

Grandchild table W3 is specified for 1130 msec at time ti1, 1330 msec at time ti20, and 1560 msec at time ti11. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W3, causing the frame lamp to light up in a hazy yellow color that corresponds to the background of the SP reach.

As shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, the brightness data of the frame lamp switches over one period consisting of 720 msec (180 msec x 4). At times th7 to th10 and ti1, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1130 msec, which is more than one period, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1130 msec. At time ti20, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1330 msec, which is more than one period, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1330 msec. At time ti11, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1560 msec, which is more than two periods, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1560 msec.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at multiple different timings in one child table WD9, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow at multiple different timings, while varying the time for which the grandchild table W3 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, thereby changing the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow. This makes it possible to vary the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow, corresponding to the background of an SP reach, while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using a common grandchild table W3 but varying the reference time, without having to prepare a separate grandchild table for each of multiple different timings in one child table WD9. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

Grandchild table W4 is specified for the 150 msec interval between time ti15 and time ti24, and for the 210 msec interval between time ti14, ti23, and time ti35. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to flash in white. At times ti15, ti24, ti14, ti23, and ti35, grandchild table W4 is specified, but at times ti15 and ti24, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4 in a time that is shorter than one cycle of 150 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white twice, and at times ti14, ti23, and ti35, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4 in a time that is 210 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white three times.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at multiple different timings in one child table WD9, thereby flashing the frame lamp in white at multiple different timings, while varying the time for which the grandchild table W4 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, making it possible to set the number of times the frame lamp flashes in white to two or three times. This makes it possible to vary the number of white flashes while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W4 but changing the reference time without having to prepare a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

During the 1000 msec period from time ti36 to ti38, grandchild table W7 is specified. Grandchild table W7 corresponds to grandchild table W7 for the frame lamp in the non-operation prompting provocation 1 luminance data table shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 249, in grandchild table W7, "FDC" and "300" are specified alternately at 30 msec intervals as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W7, causing the frame lamps to flash in white.

At time ti39, which is the end of the teasing part of the SP second half Reach A, the frame lamps light up in white, corresponding to the effect of teasing whether Yume Yume and Jam will catch the Bakuchu at the win/lose branch (jackpot, miss) as shown in Figure 95 (i39). At time ti39, lamp control is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on the grandchild table W8. As shown in Figure 249, in the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100,000 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and the frame lamps will maintain the white light based on the grandchild table W8 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD2 reaches 0.

In this way, in child table WD9 in SP latter half Reach A, which is a reach without operation prompting, the frame lamp flashes in white based on grandchild table W7, and then lights up in white based on grandchild table W8. Specifically, in the win/loss branch in the provocation part of SP latter half Reach A where no operation prompting is performed, the brightness data (RGB data) of grandchild table W8 is designed to use "FDC" (white lighting), which is the last brightness data (RGB data) of grandchild table W7, so that the win/loss branch (decisive timing) can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner without increasing the data capacity used for lamp control too much.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 95 (i39), the frame lamp remains lit in white even with the sound muted, making it possible to clearly communicate to the player the winning/losing branch (decisive timing).

Also, as shown in FIG. 249, the final RGB data of grandchild table W7 used during the 1000 msec period from time ti36 to ti38 is specified as "FDC", and furthermore, the final RGB data of grandchild table W8 used thereafter at time ti39 is also specified as "FDC". As a result, the performance control CPU 120 maintains the state in which the luminance data of "FDC" based on grandchild table W7 is output to the LED driver, and then continues to output the luminance data of "FDC" to the LED driver based on grandchild table W8, so that the timing for deciding whether to win or lose can be optimally produced with simpler lamp control without increasing the amount of data too much.

In addition, in the child table WD9 of the second half of the SP's Reach A provocation part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to that character, and when the character speaks, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp flashes in a color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time ti2, the performance control CPU 120 lights the frame left lamp in white corresponding to Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan, and lights the frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu, in response to a performance in which Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan, located on the left side of the screen, face off against Bakuchu, located on the right side of the screen, as shown in Figure 84 (i2). At time ti3, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame left lamp in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan, in response to a performance in which Yume Yume-chan, located on the left side of the screen, speaks a line, as shown in Figure 84 (i3). At time ti4, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame left lamp in purple corresponding to Jam-chan, in response to a performance in which Jam-chan, located on the left side of the screen, speaks a line, as shown in Figure 85 (i4). At time ti5, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame right lamp in red, which corresponds to Bakuchu, to the performance of Bakuchu, located on the right side of the screen, speaking lines, as shown in Figure 85 (i5).

As a result, in scenes where multiple characters are displayed speaking lines, the frame lamp can be lit/blinking to clearly indicate which character is speaking, allowing the player to see the effects of the provocative part in an optimal way.

In addition, in the child table WD9 of the Reach A provocation part in the second half of the SP, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time ti21, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame left lamp in green, corresponding to Yume Yume, located on the left side of the screen, chasing Bakuchu, as shown in Fig. 90 (i21). Furthermore, at times ti32 and ti34, when there is dialogue from a character but no subtitles, as shown in Fig. 94 (i32) and Fig. 95 (i34), the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in the color corresponding to that character.

In this way, as shown in Figures 94 (i32) and 95 (i34), even when a character is speaking but there are no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to ideally express that a character is speaking through the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9, even in scenes where there are no subtitles displayed, and allows the player to see the effects of the provocative part in an ideal way.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach A]
FIG. 206 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the SP second half reach A.

As shown in FIG. 206 (a1), the parent table for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach A stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD10, YD10, LD10, AD10) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 206 (a2), in the child table WD10 for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach A, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach A is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD10 for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, from time tj1 to tj3, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 96 (i39), the frame lamp flashes in white to correspond to the performance of catching a Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 97 (j1).

The white lighting at the win/lose branch (ti39) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in Figure 249 described below, and its RGB data is "FDC," whereas the white flashing at tj1 after a win is confirmed has RGB data of "FFF." As a result, when a win occurs, the frame lamp flashes in the same color (white) as the win/lose branch and brighter than the win/lose branch, making it easy for the player to understand that they have won based on the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9.

At times tj2 and tj3, grandchild table W1 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W1, and smoothly lights up the frame lamps in rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed win, in response to the performance of catching a Bakuchu as shown in Figures 97 (j2) and (j3).

As shown in FIG. 206 (b1), the parent table for displaying common symbols used in the winning epilogue part of Reach A in the second half of the SP stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) to be referenced when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 206 (b2), in the child table WD0 for displaying common symbols used in the winning epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach A, the time for displaying symbols in the winning epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach A for the frame lamp is subdivided, and a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified between time tj4 and time tj5, which is 5000 msec. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in a bright white color, which corresponds to the display of winning symbols as shown in Figure 98 (j4) and (j5).

At time tj6, which is the end of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps light up smoothly in rainbow colors, corresponding to the final winning symbol being displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 98 (j6). At time tj6, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamps continue to light up in rainbow colors based on grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD10 reaches 0.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, grandchild table W1 is specified for times tj2 and tj3, and based on this grandchild table W1, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors in response to an effect of catching a Bakuchu, and further, grandchild table W1 is specified for time tj6, and based on this grandchild table W1, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors in response to an effect of displaying a winning symbol in the center of the screen. In this way, in the winning epilogue part, by sharing the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when announcing a win and the grandchild table for displaying the winning symbol, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control to light up in rainbow colors without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different timings, while enhancing each effect with a unified effect. As a result, the effect in the winning epilogue part can be made to look better to the player using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in the SP second half Reach A Miss Epilogue part]
Figure 207 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach A.

As shown in FIG. 207(a1), the parent table for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach A stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 207 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the second half of the SP reach A, the time of the miss epilogue part in the first half of the SP reach B is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, during the 200 msec period of time tk1, the grandchild table W13 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, and after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 96 (i39), the frame lamp is lit in white to correspond to the performance of failing to catch the explosive chu as shown in FIG. 99 (k1).

The white lighting at the win/lose branch (ti39) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "FDC," whereas the white lighting at tk1 after the loss notification is based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "888" or "444." This allows the frame lamp to light up in a dimmer white color when a loss occurs, while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting at the win/lose branch (ti39), so that the player can be conveniently notified that a loss has occurred.

During the 5,800 msec period between time tk2 and time tk3, grandchild table W14 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W14, and lights up the frame lamp in a darker white color than tk1, corresponding to the performance shown in Figures 99 (k2) and (k3) in which Yume-chan is disappointed at losing.

The rainbow lighting during a win (tj2, tj3) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at 30 msec intervals, while the darker white lighting during a loss (tk2, tk3) is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at 250 msec intervals, which is longer than the interval during a win. As a result, during a win, the frame lamp's lighting color switches at shorter intervals than during a loss, so that the player can easily understand that he or she has won based on the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, during a win, the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized than during a loss, while during a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued than during a win, and as a result, the player can easily understand whether they have won or lost with the contrasting lamp states.

At time tk4, grandchild table W15 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W15, and turns off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a miss is announced and the screen goes dark, as shown in FIG. 100 (k4).

At time tk5, grandchild table W21 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W21, thereby lighting the frame lamp in a pattern with the background lit yellow, corresponding to a performance in which a normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 100 (k5). Also, at time tk5, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the brightness data contained in grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in the second half of the SP Reach B promotion part]
Fig. 208 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP latter half reach B. As shown in Fig. 208, the parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP latter half reach B stores 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD12, YD12, LD12, AD12) to be referred to when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

Figure 209 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of SP second half reach B. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD12 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to Figure 52. As shown in Figure 209, the frame lamp child table WD12 subdivides the time of the provocative part of SP second half reach B for a frame lamp, and specifies the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period.

The brightness data corresponding to times th4 to th10 is used to control the frame lamps corresponding to the latter half (rising part) of the role action shown in Figure 171 (h4) to Figure 172 (h10). Specifically, from times th4 to th6, the frame lamps flash yellow in response to the performance of the role rising, and then from times th7 to th10, based on the grandchild table W3, the frame lamps light up in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP reach. This allows the player to easily understand that the game has progressed to the SP latter half reach B by gradually changing from a flashing yellow color to a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP latter half reach B.

In addition, during the time th4 to th10 when the reel rises, lamp control is also performed on the reel lamp 9A. For example, during the time th4 to th10 when the reel rises, the performance control CPU 120 gradually reduces the brightness of the reel lamp 9A so as to gradually turn off the reel lamp 9A based on the child table corresponding to the reel rise action in the reel lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table.

As a result, the lighting pattern of the reel lamp 9A does not make the player aware of the reel rising, while the lighting pattern of the frame lamp draws the player's attention to the screen indicating that the game has progressed to Reach B in the latter half of the SP.

Grandchild table W3 is specified for 1130 msec at time tn5, 1330 msec at time tn14, and 1560 msec at time tn6. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W3, causing the frame lamp to light up in a hazy yellow color that corresponds to the background of the SP reach.

As shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, the brightness data of the frame lamp switches over one period of 720 msec (180 msec x 4). At times th7 to th10, tn1, and tn5, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1130 msec, which is more than one period, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1130 msec. At time tn14, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1330 msec, which is more than one period, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1330 msec. At time tn6, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1560 msec, which is more than two periods, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1560 msec.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at multiple different timings in one child table WD12, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow at multiple different timings, while varying the time for which the grandchild table W3 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, thereby changing the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow. In this way, without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings in one child table WD12, it is possible to vary the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow, which corresponds to the background of an SP reach, while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W3 but varying the reference time. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

Grandchild table W4 is specified for each of the 150 msec intervals of time tn3, tn12, and tn25, and the 210 msec intervals of time tn4, tn13, tn15, tn19, and tn22. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamps to flash in white. At times tn3, tn12, tn25, tn4, tn13, tn15, tn19, and tn22, grandchild table W4 is specified, but at times tn3, tn12, and tn25, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4 in a time that is shorter than one cycle of 150 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white twice, and at times tn4, tn13, tn15, tn19, and tn22, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4 in a time that is 210 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white three times.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at multiple different timings in one child table WD12, thereby flashing the frame lamp in white at multiple different timings, while varying the time for which the grandchild table W4 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, making it possible to set the number of times the frame lamp flashes in white to two or three times. This makes it possible to vary the number of white flashes while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W4 but changing the reference time without having to prepare a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

At time tn27, which is the end of the teasing part of the SP second half Reach B, the frame lamp lights up in white, corresponding to the effect of teasing whether or not to catch the crab at the hit/miss branch (hit, miss) as shown in Figure 109 (n27). At time tn27, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8 for a maximum of 10 minutes.

As a result, in the winning/losing branch in the teasing part of Reach B in the second half of the SP, as shown in Figure 109 (n27), the frame lamp will remain lit white with the sound muted, making it possible to clearly communicate to the player the winning/losing branch (decisive timing).

In addition, in the child table WD12 of the SP's second half Reach B teasing part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to that character, and when the character speaks, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp flashes in a color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time tn2, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame left lamp in white, corresponding to Jam-chan and Nana-chan, and lights up the frame right lamp in red, corresponding to the crab, to correspond to the performance shown in FIG. 101 (n2), in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan, who are located on the left side of the screen, face off against the crab, located on the right side of the screen. Furthermore, because Jam-chan and Nana-chan, who are located on the left side of the screen, are speaking, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame left lamp in white.

As a result, in scenes where multiple characters are displayed speaking lines, the frame lamp can be lit/blinking to clearly indicate which character is speaking, allowing the player to see the effects of the provocative part in an optimal way.

In addition, in the child table WD12 of the SP's second half Reach B provocation part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time tn18, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in pink, which corresponds to Nana praying, as shown in FIG. 106 (n18). Furthermore, at time tn10, when there is dialogue from a character (crab) but no subtitles, as shown in FIG. 104 (n10), the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in the color (red) corresponding to the character (crab).

In this way, as shown in FIG. 104 (n10), even if a character is speaking but there are no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to ideally express that a character is speaking through the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9, even in scenes where there are no subtitles displayed, and allows the player to see the effects of the provocative part in an ideal way.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part in the second half of the SP Reach B]
FIG. 210 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the SP second half reach B.

As shown in FIG. 210 (a1), the parent table for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach B stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD13, YD13, LD13, AD13) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 210(a2), in the child table WD13 for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B, for the frame lamp, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD13 for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, at time to1, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 109 (n27), the frame lamp flashes in white to correspond to the performance of catching a crab as shown in FIG. 110 (o1).

The white lighting at the win/lose branch (tn27) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in Figure 249 described below, and its RGB data is "FDC," whereas the white flashing at to1 after a win is confirmed has RGB data of "FFF." As a result, when a win occurs, the frame lamp flashes in the same color (white) as the win/lose branch and brighter than the win/lose branch, making it easy for the player to understand that they have won based on the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9.

At times to2 to to5, grandchild table W1 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W1, and makes the caught crab act as a store signboard as shown in FIG. 110 (o2) to FIG. 111 (o5) to make Jam-chan and Nana-chan happy, and smoothly lights up the frame lamp in rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed win.

As shown in FIG. 210 (b1), the parent table for displaying common symbols used in the winning epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach B stores information specifying 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and the child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) to be referenced when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 210 (b2), in the child table WD0 for displaying common symbols used in the winning epilogue part of the second half of the SP reach B, the time for displaying symbols in the winning epilogue part of the second half of the SP reach B for the frame lamp is subdivided, and a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified between time to6 and time to7, which is 5000 msec. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in a bright white color corresponding to the display of a winning pattern, as shown in FIG. 111 (o6) and FIG. 112 (o7).

At time to8, which is the end of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps light up smoothly in rainbow colors, corresponding to the final winning symbol being displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 112 (o8). At time to8, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamps continue to light up in rainbow colors based on grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD13 reaches 0.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is specified for times to2 to to5, and based on the grandchild table W1, the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors in response to an effect in which the caught crab serves as the store's signboard and Jam-chan and Nana-chan are happy, and further, the grandchild table W1 is specified for time to8, and based on the grandchild table W1, the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors in response to an effect in which the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen. In this way, in the winning epilogue part, by sharing the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when announcing a win and the grandchild table for displaying the winning symbol, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control to light up in rainbow colors without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different timings, while enhancing each performance with a unified performance. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be made to look better to the player using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in the SP second half Reach B Miss Epilogue part]
Figure 211 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the second half of the SP reach B.

As shown in FIG. 211 (a1), the parent table for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach B stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 211 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the SP second half reach B, the time of the miss epilogue part in the SP reach second half B is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, during the 200 msec period of time tp1, the grandchild table W13 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, and after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 109 (n27), the frame lamp is lit in white to correspond to the performance of failing to catch the crab as shown in FIG. 113 (p1).

The white lighting at the win/lose branch (tn27) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "FDC," whereas the white lighting at tp1 after the loss notification is based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "888" or "444." This allows the frame lamp to light up in a dimmer white color when a loss occurs, while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting at the win/lose branch (tn27), so that the player can be conveniently notified that a loss has occurred.

During the 5,800 msec period between time tp2 and time tp3, grandchild table W14 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W14, and lights up the frame lamp in a darker white color than tp1, corresponding to the performance shown in Figures 113 (p2) and (p3) in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan are disappointed at losing.

The rainbow lighting during a win (to2 to to5) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at 30 msec intervals, while the darker white lighting during a loss (tp2, tp3) is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at 250 msec intervals, which is longer than during a win. As a result, during a win, the frame lamp's lighting color switches at shorter intervals than during a loss, so the player can easily know that he or she has won based on the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, during a win, the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized than during a loss, while during a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued than during a win, and as a result, a win or a loss can be easily communicated to the player by the contrasting lamp states.

At time tp4, grandchild table W15 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W15, and turns off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a miss is announced and the screen goes dark, as shown in FIG. 114 (p4).

At time tp5, grandchild table W21 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W21, thereby lighting the frame lamp in a pattern with the background lit yellow, corresponding to a performance in which a normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 114 (p5). Also, at time tp5, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the brightness data contained in grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in the SP final reach promotion part]
Fig. 212 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocation part of the SP final reach. As shown in Fig. 212, the parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocation part of the SP final reach stores information specifying 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and child tables (WD15, YD15, LD15, AD15) to be referred to when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

Figures 213 and 214 are diagrams for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the stimulating part of an SP final reach. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD15 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to Figure 52. As shown in Figures 213 and 214, in the frame lamp child table WD15, the time of the stimulating part of the SP final reach for a frame lamp is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

The brightness data corresponding to times th4 to th10 is used to control the frame lamps corresponding to the latter half (rising portion) of the role action shown in Figure 171 (h4) to Figure 172 (h10). Specifically, from times th4 to th6, the frame lamps flash yellow in response to the performance of the role rising, and then from times th7 to th10, based on the grandchild table W3, the frame lamps light up in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP reach. This allows the player to easily understand that the game has progressed to the SP final reach by gradually changing from a flashing yellow color to a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP final reach.

In addition, during the time th4 to th10 when the reel rises, lamp control is also performed on the reel lamp 9A. For example, during the time th4 to th10 when the reel rises, the performance control CPU 120 gradually reduces the brightness of the reel lamp 9A so as to gradually turn off the reel lamp 9A based on the child table corresponding to the reel rise action in the reel lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table.

As a result, the lighting pattern of the reel lamp 9A does not make the player aware of the reel rising, while the lighting pattern of the frame lamp draws the player's attention to the screen indicating that the SP final reach has been reached.

Grandchild table W3 is specified for 1130 msec at time tr1, 1330 msec at times tr19 and tr22, and 1560 msec at time tr15. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W3, causing the frame lamp to light up in a hazy yellow color that corresponds to the background of the SP reach.

As shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, the brightness data of the frame lamp switches over one period consisting of 720 msec (180 msec x 4). At times th7 to th10 and tr1, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1130 msec, which is more than one period, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1130 msec. At times tr19 and tr22, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1330 msec, which is more than one period, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1330 msec. At time tr15, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1560 msec, which is more than two periods, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1560 msec.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at multiple different timings in one child table WD15, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow at multiple different timings, while varying the time for which the grandchild table W3 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, thereby changing the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow. In this way, without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of multiple different timings in one child table WD15, it is possible to vary the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow, which corresponds to the background of an SP reach, while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W3 but varying the reference time. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

Furthermore, in each of child table WD9 used in the provocation part of SP second half reach A, child table WD12 used in the provocation part of SP second half reach B, and child table WD15 used in the provocation part of SP final reach, a common grandchild table W3 is used but its reference time is changed without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings, so that the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach can be changed while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control in multiple reach performances. Similarly, in child table WD2 used in the provocation part of SP first half reach A and child table WD5 used in the provocation part of SP first half reach B, a common grandchild table W3 is used but its reference time is changed without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings, so that the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach can be changed while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control.

Grandchild table W4 is specified for 150 msec at time tr36 and for 210 msec at times tr40 and tr47. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to flash white. Grandchild table W4 is specified at times tr36, tr40, and tr47, but at time tr36, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4 in a time shorter than one cycle of 150 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white twice, and at times tr40 and tr47, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4 in a time period of one cycle of 210 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white three times.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at multiple different timings in one child table WD15, thereby flashing the frame lamp in white at multiple different timings, while varying the time for which the grandchild table W4 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, making it possible to set the number of times the frame lamp flashes in white to two or three times. This makes it possible to vary the number of white flashes while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W4 but changing the reference time, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different timings. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

Furthermore, in each of child table WD2 used in the provocation part of the SP first half reach A, child table WD5 used in the provocation part of the SP first half reach B, child table WD9 used in the provocation part of the SP second half reach A, child table WD12 used in the provocation part of the SP second half reach B, and child table WD15 used in the provocation part of the SP final reach, it is possible to vary the number of white flashes while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W4 but changing its reference time without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

At time tr41, grandchild table W5 or grandchild table W6 is specified. If information to execute a red cut-in effect is set in the effect setting process, grandchild table W5 is specified at time tr41, and if information to execute a green cut-in effect is set in the effect setting process, grandchild table W6 is specified at time tr41.

The grandchild table W5 corresponds to the grandchild tables W5a to W5e for the frame lamp in the common red cut-in brightness data table shown in Figures 233 to 235 described later. As shown in Figures 233 to 235, in the grandchild table W5 (W5a to W5e), as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data showing various brightnesses for only the R data is specified at first at 30 msec intervals, data showing various brightnesses for only the R data is specified at the next 20 msec intervals, and finally data showing various brightnesses for only the R data is specified alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W5, thereby lighting up the frame lamp in red in response to the cut-in performance (red cut-in performance) shown in Figure 128 (r41).

The grandchild table W6 corresponds to the grandchild tables W6a to W6e for the frame lamp in the common green cut-in brightness data table shown in Figures 242 to 244 described later. As shown in Figures 242 to 244, in the grandchild table W6 (W6a to W6e), as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data showing various brightnesses for only the G data is specified at first at 30 msec intervals, data showing various brightnesses for only the G data is specified at the next 20 msec intervals, and finally data showing various brightnesses for only the G data is specified alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W6, thereby lighting up the frame lamp in green in response to the cut-in performance (green cut-in performance) shown in Figure 128 (r41).

As shown in Figures 128 (r40) and (r41), when push button 31B is displayed and a cut-in performance is executed, the character does not speak and subtitles are not displayed. Furthermore, in the SP final reach, the frame lamp that is the subject of lamp control in scenes other than the cut-in performance continues to be the subject of lamp control in the cut-in performance.

This prevents the display (button display) that prompts the player to operate push button 31B to execute the cut-in effect from overlapping with the subtitle display, preventing the two from overlapping and making either display difficult to recognize or causing the player to misinterpret the content of the display. Furthermore, the brightness data for the lamp control in the cut-in effect and the button display for that cut-in effect (RGB data in grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) is designed to use the same frame lamps as the lamp control in the teasing part of the SP final reach, preventing the mixing of unnecessary lamps lighting/flashing, etc., which would spoil the aesthetic appearance, and providing a suitable teasing part performance.

In this embodiment, the button display and cut-in effects and other effects in the final SP reach have the same target of lamp control in that they both use frame lamps, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the button display and cut-in effects and other effects in the final SP reach may have the same target of lamp control in that they only use one or more of the game effect lamps 9, such as the frame lamp, the role lamp 9A, and the left panel lamp 9B, or they may have the same target of lamp control in that they all use all of the game effect lamps 9.

At 860 msec, at times tr49 and tr50, grandchild table W9 is specified. Grandchild table W9 corresponds to grandchild table W9 for the frame lamp in the trigger display brightness data table shown in FIG. 250, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 250, in grandchild table W9, "D00" is specified at 30 msec as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W9, lighting up the frame lamp in red in response to a performance in which the stick controller 31A (trigger) is displayed in the center, as shown in FIG. 131 (r49) and (r50).

Grandchild table W10 is specified for times tr51 to tr54, which are the last time of the provocation part of the SP final reach. Grandchild table W10 corresponds to grandchild table W10 for the frame lamp in the operation promotion brightness data table shown in Figure 250, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 250, in the grandchild table W10, "500" or "D00" is specified at 30 msec intervals as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The presentation control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W10 to cause the frame lamp to flash red in response to a presentation that prompts the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger) as shown in FIG. 131 (r51) to FIG. 132 (r54). During times tr51 to tr54, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10 for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamp continues to flash red based on the grandchild table W10 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD15 reaches 0.

As a result, at the win/loss branch in the provocation part of the SP final reach, as shown in Figure 131 (r49) to Figure 132 (r54), the frame lamp will switch between flashing white, lit red, and flashing red in succession while sounds corresponding to operation promotions and sounds (BGM) corresponding to the reach are output, enhancing the presentation of operations promotions for the player at the win/loss branch (decisive timing).

Here, if no operation prompting the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger) is given, such as with child table WD2 used in the teasing part of the first half of SP Reach A, child table WD5 used in the teasing part of the first half of SP Reach B, child table WD9 used in the teasing part of the second half of SP Reach A, and child table WD12 used in the teasing part of the second half of SP Reach B, the frame lamp will remain lit in white at the final win/loss branch of the teasing part, and then it will move to the win epilogue part or the miss epilogue part. On the other hand, when an operation is promoted to encourage the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger), such as in the child table WD15 used in the provocation part of the SP final reach, the frame lamp flashes white in a performance that provokes the player as to whether or not the ally character will catch the Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 130 (r47), and then lights up red in response to a performance in which the Bakuchu and the ally character are displayed alternately as shown in FIG. 130 (r48), and then switches to the grandchild table W9, and based on that grandchild table W9, the frame lamp lights up red in response to a performance in which the stick controller 31A (trigger) is displayed in the center as shown in FIG. 131 (r49) and (r50).

In this way, in the SP Reach performance where no operation prompt is given to encourage the player to operate at the win/loss branch, the sound is muted and the frame lamp is kept lit in white, making it appear to the player that the performance has stopped, and the win/loss branch (decisive timing) can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. On the other hand, in the SP Reach performance where operation prompt is given to encourage the player to operate at the win/loss branch, a state is set in which a sound corresponding to the operation prompt or a sound (BGM) corresponding to the reach is output, and further, by switching the grandchild table multiple times to control the frame lamp to a mode corresponding to the operation prompt, the timing of the decision of the win/loss branch can be suitably presented by the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In this way, the timing of the decision of the win/loss branch can be suitably presented by different sound control and lamp control between the case where operation prompt is not given at the win/loss branch and the case where operation prompt is given. Furthermore, in the SP final reach, where a player is encouraged to make an operation at the win/loss branch, the brightness data (RGB data) switches sequentially between "500" and "D00" at 30 msec intervals based on the grandchild table W10. This allows the timing of the win/loss branch to be appropriately presented by the lighting state of the frame lamp.

In addition, in the child table WD15 of the SP final reach teasing part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to that character, and when the character speaks, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp flashes in a color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time tr2, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame left lamp in white corresponding to the six ally characters and lights the frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu, corresponding to a performance in which six ally characters located on the left side of the screen confront Bakuchu, as shown in FIG. 115 (r2). Furthermore, because the six ally characters located on the left side of the screen are speaking, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame left lamp in white. Also, at time tr3, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu, corresponding to a performance in which Bakuchu, located on the right side of the screen, is speaking, as shown in FIG. 115 (r3).

As a result, in scenes where multiple characters are displayed speaking lines, the frame lamp can be lit/blinking to clearly indicate which character is speaking, allowing the player to see the effects of the provocative part in an optimal way.

In addition, in the child table WD15 of the SP final reach teasing part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time tr11, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in blue corresponding to maid A, in response to the performance shown in FIG. 118 (r11) in which maid A chases a smash. Furthermore, at times tr25, tr27, tr29, tr31, tr33, and tr35, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in the color corresponding to the character when there is a character's line but no subtitles, as shown in FIG. 123 (r25), (r27), FIG. 124 (r29), FIG. 125 (r31), (r33), and FIG. 126 (r35).

In this way, as shown in Figures 123 (r25), (r27), 124 (r29), 125 (r31), (r33), and 126 (r35), even when a character is speaking but there are no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to ideally express that a character is speaking through the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9, even in scenes where there are no subtitles displayed, and allows the player to ideally see the performance in the provocative part.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part of the SP final reach]
FIG. 215 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the epilogue part of the SP final reach.

As shown in FIG. 215 (a1), the parent table for the device operation used in the epilogue part of the SP final reach hit stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD16a, YD16a, LD16a, AD16a) to be referenced when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 215(a2), in the child table WD16a for the reel operation used in the epilogue part of the SP final reach, the time of the reel operation part in the epilogue part of the SP final reach is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD16a for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, the grandchild table W18 is specified for 10,000 msec from time ts1 to ts3. The grandchild table W18 corresponds to the grandchild table W18 for the frame lamp in the winning confirmation brightness data table shown in FIG. 256, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 256, in the grandchild table W18, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data of various brightnesses corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec, and "333" is specified in the next 30 msec, and such RGB data is repeatedly specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W18, and after the winning/losing branch shown in FIG. 132 (r54), causes the frame lamp to flash in seven colors in response to the performance of a falling role as shown in FIG. 133 (s1) to (s3).

As shown in FIG. 215 (b1), the parent table for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD16b, YD16b, LD16b, AD16b) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 215(b2), in the child table WD16b for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD16b for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, from time ts3-2 to ts3-8, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in white, which corresponds to the rising of the reel as shown in Figure 173 (s3-2) to Figure 174 (s3-8), in response to the performance in which the reel rises and a display appears that looks like a Bakuchu has been caught.

From time ts4 to ts7, grandchild table W1 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W1, and smoothly lights up the frame lamps in rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed win, in response to the performance of catching a Bakuchu as shown in Figure 134 (s4) to Figure 135 (s7).

As shown in FIG. 215 (c1), the parent table for displaying the common symbols used in the epilogue part of the winning SP final reach stores information specifying 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and the child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) to be referenced when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 215 (c2), in the child table WD0 for displaying common symbols used in the epilogue part of the winning SP final reach, the time for displaying symbols in the epilogue part of the winning SP final reach for the frame lamp is subdivided, and a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified between time ts8 and time ts9, which is 5000 msec. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in a bright white color, which corresponds to the display of a winning pattern, as shown in FIG. 135 (s8) and (s9).

At time ts10, which is the end of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps light up smoothly in rainbow colors, corresponding to the effect of the winning symbol being displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 136 (s10). At time ts10, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamps continue to light up in rainbow colors based on grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD16 reaches 0.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, grandchild table W1 is specified for times ts4 to ts7, and based on this grandchild table W1, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors in response to an effect of catching a Bakuchu, and further, grandchild table W1 is specified for time ts10, and based on this grandchild table W1, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors in response to an effect of displaying a winning symbol in the center of the screen. In this way, in the winning epilogue part, by making the grandchild table used when announcing a win and the grandchild table used when displaying the winning symbol common, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control to light up in rainbow colors without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different timings, while enhancing each effect with a unified effect. As a result, the effect in the winning epilogue part can be made to look better to the player using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

In addition, in child table WD16 of the epilogue part of the SP final reach hit, in an effect where a reel falls, the frame lamp is controlled so that rainbow chromatic colors and achromatic colors (RGB data of "333") alternate. This allows for an effect where achromatic colors are occasionally inserted between rainbow chromatic colors to emphasize the jackpot and congratulate the player. After that, in an effect where an ally character catches a Bakuchu, a smooth rainbow light without achromatic colors is used to congratulate the player in a calm manner on the jackpot. As a result, the effect in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be viewed favorably by the player.

[Brightness data table used in the SP final reach miss epilogue part]
FIG. 216 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the missed epilogue part of the SP final reach.

As shown in FIG. 216 (a1), the parent table for the miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the SP final reach stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD17, YD17, LD17, AD17) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 216 (a2), in the child table WD17 for the miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the SP final reach, the time of the miss epilogue part in the SP final reach is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD17 for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, during the 200 msec period of time tu1, grandchild table W13 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W13, and after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 132 (r54), lights up the frame lamp in white to correspond to the performance of the Bakuchu escaping as shown in FIG. 137 (u1).

The red flashing at the win/lose branch (tr54) is based on the grandchild table W10 shown in FIG. 250 (described later), whose RGB data includes "D00", whereas the white lighting at tu1 after the loss notification is based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252 (described later), whose RGB data is "888" or "444". This allows the frame lamp to light up in white when a loss occurs, dimmer than the red flashing at the win/lose branch (tr54), making it possible to conveniently notify the player that they have lost.

During the 3900 msec period of time tr2, the grandchild table W14 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14, and lights up the frame lamp in a darker white color than tu1, corresponding to the performance shown in FIG. 137 (u2) in which six friendly characters are disappointed at having lost.

The rainbow lighting during a win (ts4-ts7) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at 30 msec intervals, whereas the darker white lighting during a loss (tu1) is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at 250 msec intervals, which is longer than during a win. As a result, during a win, the frame lamp's lighting color switches at shorter intervals than during a loss, so that the player can easily understand that he or she has won based on the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, during a win, the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized than during a loss, while during a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued than during a win, and as a result, a win or loss can be easily communicated to the player by the contrasting lamp states.

In addition, in child table WD4 of SP first half reach A, child table WD7 of SP first half reach B, child table WD11 of SP second half reach A, and child table WD14 of SP second half reach B, the frame lamps are lit in a lighting mode at the time of a miss based on the grandchild table W14, similar to child table WD17 of the SP final reach. However, while the performance control CPU 120 controls the frame lamps based on the grandchild table W14 for 5800 msec in the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, it controls the frame lamps based on the grandchild table W14 for 3900 msec in the SP final reach. In this way, while the grandchild table used for lamp control at the time of a miss is common between different reaches, the time for lamp control by referring to the grandchild table can be made different. This allows the child table used for each of the different reaches to use a common grandchild table W4 without preparing a grandchild table dedicated to when a win occurs for each of the different reaches, and by changing the reference time, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for lamp control while varying the time for which the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode corresponding to a loss. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of a loss in an appropriate manner for each of the different reaches.

At time tu3, grandchild table W15 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W15, and turns off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a miss is announced and the screen goes dark, as shown in FIG. 137 (u3).

At time tu4, the grandchild table W21 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21, thereby lighting the frame lamp in a pattern with the background lit yellow, corresponding to a performance in which a normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 138 (u4). Also, at time tu4, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the brightness data contained in the grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in each part of the rescue]
Fig. 217 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for a part per relief. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD18 of the frame lamp is included in the brightness data table for SP reach described with reference to Fig. 52. As shown in Fig. 217, in the child table WD18 of the frame lamp, the time of the part per relief is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, at 1980 msec of time tv1, grandchild table W16 is specified. Grandchild table W16 corresponds to grandchild table W16 for the frame lamp in the one brightness data table per rescue shown in FIG. 254 described later. As shown in FIG. 254, in grandchild table W16, "D00" is specified for each lamp in the first 30 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "B00" is specified for each lamp in the next 30 msec. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W16, thereby lighting up the frame lamps in red in accordance with the rescue performance shown in FIG. 139 (v1).

In this way, the frame lamp lights up even brighter by switching from the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W21 last specified on each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used when a loss occurs to the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W16 first specified on the child table WD18 used when a rescue hit occurs. As a result, when a rescue hit occurs, the frame lamp lights up brighter than it did after a loss notification, so the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 makes it easier for the player to understand the loss notification and the subsequent rescue hit notification.

In this embodiment, the frame lamp lights up once in yellow, which corresponds to the normal background, after the miss notification, and furthermore, when the rescue hits, the frame lamp lights up even brighter in red, which corresponds to the rescue performance. However, this is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, at the end of each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used at the time of the miss, the grandchild table W15 may be specified, and "111" may be specified as the final brightness data (RGB data). As a result, at the end of the miss, the frame lamp goes out in a white system. Furthermore, "AAA" may be specified as the first brightness data (RGB data) in the grandchild table W16 specified first of the child table WD18 used at the time of the rescue hit. As a result, at the beginning of the rescue hit after the miss notification, the frame lamp lights up brightly in a white system. In this way, when a rescue hit occurs, the frame lamp lights up in the same color (white) as it did after the loss notification and brighter than it did after the loss notification, so the loss notification and the subsequent rescue hit notification can be more easily seen by the player depending on the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9.

At 700 msec of time tv2, grandchild table W17 is specified. Grandchild table W17 corresponds to grandchild table W17 for the frame lamp in the 2 brightness data table per rescue shown in FIG. 255, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 255, in grandchild table W17, white-color data such as "AAA" or "DDD" is specified for each lamp at 30 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W17, thereby lighting up the frame lamp in white in accordance with the whiteout performance shown in FIG. 139 (v2).

During the 5000 msec period between time tv3 and time tv4, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, causing the frame lamp to flash in white in accordance with the pattern display performance shown in Figures 140 (v3) and (v4).

At time tv5, which is the end of the rescue hit part, grandchild table W1 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W1, and smoothly lights up the frame lamp in rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed hit, in accordance with the pattern display performance shown in FIG. 140 (v5). At time tv5, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamp continues to be lit in rainbow colors based on grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD18 reaches 0.

[Brightness data table used in the re-draw part]
Fig. 218 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the re-draw part. As shown in Fig. 218, the parent table in the brightness data table used in the re-draw part stores information specifying 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and child tables (WD19, YD19, LD19, AD19) to be referred to when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

(Brightness data table used before operation promotion)
Fig. 219 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in a re-draw part (before operation promotion). As shown in Fig. 219, a child table used before the pattern starts moving and a child table used after the pattern starts moving are prepared as a child table WD19 of a frame lamp. In each child table in the re-draw part, the time of the re-draw part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

Figure 219 (a) shows a child table used just before the pattern starts to move. For example, a grandchild table for turning off the frame lamp is specified from time tA6 to tA8. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, and as shown in Figures 142 (A6) to 143 (A8), once the re-draw performance has started, but before the pattern starts to move due to the re-draw performance, turns off the frame lamp.

In this way, after the frame lamp goes out, it lights up in a lighting mode that corresponds to the effect of the re-draw performance causing the patterns to start moving, so the lighting mode of the frame lamp makes it easy for the player to understand that the patterns will start moving due to the re-draw performance.

Figure 219 (b) shows the child table used after the pattern starts to move. At times tA9 and tA10, grandchild table W19 is specified. Grandchild table W19 corresponds to grandchild table W19 for the frame lamp in the re-draw performance brightness data table shown in Figure 257 described later. As shown in Figure 257, in grandchild table W19, "F00" and "700" are specified alternately at 60 msec intervals as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W19, and causes the frame lamp to flash in red in response to a performance in which the "2" pattern shrinks as shown in Figures 143 (A9) and 144 (A10).

At times tA11 to tA46, grandchild table W20 is specified. Grandchild table W20 corresponds to grandchild table W20 for the frame lamp in the re-draw performance brightness data table shown in FIG. 258, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 258, in grandchild table W20, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at 30 msec intervals, which is shorter than the grandchild table W20, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. By controlling the lamps based on grandchild table W20, the performance control CPU 120 causes the frame lamps to flash rapidly in red in response to a performance in which the patterns change rapidly while switching as shown in FIG. 144 (A11) to FIG. 156 (A46).

(Brightness data table used when the design is promoted after the operation is promoted)
Fig. 220 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in a re-draw part (pattern promotion after operation promotion). The child table WD20 of the frame lamp shown in Fig. 220 is a continuation of the child table WD19 of the frame lamp shown in Fig. 219. As shown in Fig. 220, in the child table WD20 of the frame lamp, the time of the re-draw part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, during the 5000 msec period from time tB1 to tB4, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in white in response to a pattern presentation in which the "3" symbol is enlarged after an operation prompt is executed in the re-selection part, as shown in FIG. 157 (B1) to FIG. 158 (B4).

From time tB5 to tB9, grandchild table W18 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W18, and causes the frame lamp to flash in rainbow colors in response to a performance in which the "3" symbol, as shown in FIG. 157 (B5) to (B9), is reduced and displayed at normal size, and the "3" symbol flickers before being finalized.

The flashing of rainbow colors caused by lamp control from time tB5 to tB9 is more intense than the smooth rainbow lighting caused by lamp control based on the grandchild table W1. For example, the flashing is more intense than the smooth rainbow lighting caused by lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 from time tB5 to tB9. Lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes from time tB5 to tB9, and the frame lamp continues to flash in rainbow colors based on the grandchild table for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD20 reaches 0.

In this way, in child table WD20 in the re-draw part, the frame lamp lights up in rainbow colors as the lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-draw, just like child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 in the winning epilogue part, but the flashing of rainbow colors from time tB5 to tB9 when the symbol "2" is promoted to a "3" through the re-draw is more intense than the smooth rainbow lighting when the symbol "2" temporarily stops in the winning epilogue part. This allows the player to be more effectively congratulated on the promotion of the winning symbol through the re-draw by the lighting of the frame lamp.

In addition, when the symbols start to move and sway due to the re-draw performance after the lights are turned off, the frame lamp flashes red in a lighting pattern different from the smooth rainbow colors based on the brightness data corresponding to the re-draw performance (for example, the RGB data in the grandchild table W19). This prevents the player from mistaking the lighting pattern of the frame lamp for the winning symbol that was provisionally stopped in the winning epilogue part to be confirmed.

In addition, since the frame lamp is designed to flash in rainbow colors when the effect of the number "3" being displayed swaying and then finalized as shown in Figures 159 (B7) to (B9) begins, it is easy for the designer to decide when to start flashing the frame lamp in rainbow colors.

Furthermore, the flashing of rainbow colors when the "3" symbol is displayed swaying as shown in FIG. 159 (B7) continues during the symbol determination period as shown in FIG. 159 (B8) and (B9). In this way, during the short symbol determination period, the system is designed so that lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is carried out as is without preparing a brightness data table for special lamp control, so there is no unnecessary increase in data capacity.

(Brightness data table used when the pattern does not increase after the operation is promoted)
Fig. 221 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the re-lottery part (after operation promotion). The child table WD21 of the frame lamp shown in Fig. 221 is a continuation of the child table WD19 of the frame lamp shown in Fig. 219. As shown in Fig. 221, in the child table WD21 of the frame lamp, the time of the re-lottery part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, during the 5000 msec period from time tC1 to tC4, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in white in response to a pattern presentation in which the "2" symbol is enlarged after an operation prompt is executed in the re-selection part, as shown in FIG. 161 (C1) to FIG. 162 (C4).

From time tC5 to tC9, grandchild table W1 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W1, and smoothly lights up the frame lamp in rainbow colors to correspond to the performance in which the "2" symbol flickers and is then confirmed as shown in Figures 162 (C5) to 163 (C9). From time tC5 to tC9, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamp continues to be lit in rainbow colors based on grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD21 reaches 0.

In this way, in child table WD21 of the re-draw part, grandchild table W1 is used in common with child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part for lamp control when the pattern is finally determined after the re-draw. This eliminates the need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting rainbow colors in the winning epilogue part and the re-draw part, reducing the data capacity used for lamp control while allowing the player to see a unified presentation even in different parts (timings). As a result, the presentation in the winning epilogue part and the re-draw part can be better shown to the player while reducing the data capacity.

In addition, when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, then goes out, and the symbol starts to move due to the re-draw performance. When the symbol is displayed swaying, the frame lamp flashes red in a lighting pattern different from the smooth rainbow colors based on the brightness data corresponding to the re-draw performance (for example, the RGB data in grandchild tables W19 and W20). This prevents the player from mistaking the lighting pattern of the frame lamp for the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part to be confirmed.

In addition, the rainbow lighting from time tB5 to tB9 when the "2" symbol is upgraded to a "3" symbol through a redraw is more intense than the smooth rainbow lighting from time tC5 to tC9 when the "2" symbol is maintained without being upgraded through a redraw. As a result, if the winning symbol is upgraded through a redraw, the player can be more effectively congratulated on the promotion of the winning symbol through the redraw by the lighting mode of the frame lamp, and if the winning symbol is not upgraded through a redraw, the data capacity can be reduced by using the grandchild table W1 used in the winning epilogue part and the grandchild table W1 in common.

In addition, since the frame lamp is designed to light up in rainbow colors when the effect of the "2" becoming normal size and finalizing after the "2" pattern has finished being displayed as shown in Fig. 163 (C7) to (C9) begins, it is easy for the designer to decide when to start lighting up the frame lamp in rainbow colors.

Furthermore, the rainbow lighting that occurs when the "3" symbol is displayed swaying as shown in FIG. 163 (C7) continues even during the symbol determination period as shown in FIG. 163 (C8) and (C9). In this way, during the short symbol determination period, the system is designed so that lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is carried out as is without preparing a brightness data table for special lamp control, so there is no unnecessary increase in data capacity.

[Luminance data table used in the fanfare part]
Fig. 222 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for the fanfare part. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD22 is included in the SP reach brightness data table explained with reference to Fig. 52. As shown in Fig. 222, in the frame lamp child table WD22, the time of the fanfare part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and grandchild tables to be referenced in each time period are specified.

For example, at times tD1 and tE1, a grandchild table is specified for turning off the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, and turns off the frame lamp once before the fanfare display is performed, as shown in FIG. 160 (D1) or FIG. 164 (E1).

At times tD2 and tE2, a grandchild table is specified for lighting the frame lamp in a fanfare mode. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, thereby lighting the frame lamp in a fanfare mode in accordance with the fanfare performance, as shown in FIG. 160 (D2) or FIG. 164 (E2). At times tD2 and tE2, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamp maintains its fanfare mode illumination based on the grandchild table for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD22 reaches 0.

[Smooth Rainbow Luminance Data Table]
Fig. 223 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in Fig. 223, the parent table in the smooth rainbow luminance data table stores information specifying 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and child tables (WS1, YS1, LS1, AS1) to be referred to when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

Figure 224 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in Figure 224, in the child table in the smooth rainbow luminance data table, for each game effect lamp 9, a grandchild table (W1, Y1, L1, A1) to be referenced in a specific time period is specified.

Figure 225 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in a smooth rainbow brightness data table. As shown in Figure 225, in the grandchild table W1 for frame lamps, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at 30 msec intervals as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 smoothly lights up the frame lamps in the rainbow colors corresponding to the confirmed win by controlling the lamps based on the grandchild table W1.

Figure 226 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the reel lamp and a grandchild table for the left panel lamp in the smooth rainbow brightness data table. As shown in Figure 226, in the grandchild table Y1 for the reel lamp, data "FFFF" is specified for 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the data "RRRR" output to the reel lamp 9A. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the reel lamp 9A in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table Y1. In the grandchild table L1 for the left panel lamp, data "FFFFF" is specified for 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the data "WWWWW" output to the left panel lamp 9B. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the left panel lamp 9B in white by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table L1.

Figure 227 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the attacca lamp in the smooth rainbow brightness data table. As shown in Figure 227, in the grandchild table A1 for the attacca lamp, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at 30 msec intervals as the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacca lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table A1, causing the attacca lamp 9E, V attacca lamp 9F, and electric chute lamp 9H to light up smoothly in the rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed win.

[Data table of red flashing brightness during reel operation]
Fig. 228 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a role object operation red flashing brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 228, in the grandchild table W2 for a frame lamp, "A00" is specified in the first 40 msec as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "333" is specified in the next 30 msec. The performance control CPU 120 causes the frame lamp to flash in red by controlling the lamp based on the grandchild table W2.

[Yellow Haze Luminance Data Table]
Fig. 229 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a yellow haze brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 229, in the grandchild table W3, "440", "660", and "880" are sparsely specified at 180 msec intervals as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W3 to light the frame lamp in a hazy yellow color.

[White flash brightness data table]
Fig. 230 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a white blinking (white flash) brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 230, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are alternately specified at 30 msec intervals as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, with the first 30 msec being "000" (off), the next 30 msec being "AAA" (on in white), the next 30 msec being "000" (off), the next 30 msec being "AAA" (on in white), the next 30 msec being "000" (off), the next 30 msec being "AAA" (on in white), and the last 30 msec being "000" (off). That is, the frame lamp alternates between "off" and "on" over one period of 210 msec (30 msec x 7), causing the frame lamp to blink in white (white flash) multiple times. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W4, causing the frame lamp to blink in white.

[Common red cut-in luminance data table]
Fig. 231 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in Fig. 231, the parent table in the common red cut-in luminance data table stores information specifying 3970 msec as the time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and child tables (WS5, YS5, LS5, AS5) to be referred to when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

Figure 232 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in Figure 232, in the child table in the common red cut-in luminance data table, grandchild tables (W5 (W5a to W5e), Y5 (Y5a to Y5e), L5 (L5a to L5e), A5 (A5a to A5e)) that are referenced in a specific time period are specified for each game effect lamp 9.

233 to 235 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a common red cut-in brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 233 to 235, in the grandchild tables W5a, W5b, and W5c, data showing various brightnesses for only the R data at 30 msec intervals is specified as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. In the grandchild table W5d, data showing various brightnesses for only the R data at 20 msec intervals is specified as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. In the grandchild table W5e, data showing various brightnesses for only the R data alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamp in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild tables W5 (W5a to W5e).

Figure 236 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a reel lamp in a common red cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Figure 236, in the grandchild tables Y5a, Y5b, and Y5c for the reel lamp, data showing various brightnesses at 30 msec intervals is specified as the "RRRR" data output to the reel lamp 9A. In the grandchild table Y5d, data showing various brightnesses at 20 msec intervals is specified as the "RRRR" data output to the reel lamp 9A. In the grandchild table Y5e, data showing various brightnesses alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the "RRRR" data output to the reel lamp 9A. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild tables Y5 (Y5a to Y5e) to light or blink the reel lamp 9A in a color corresponding to the common red cut-in.

Figure 237 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the left board lamp in the common red cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Figure 237, in the grandchild tables L5a, L5b, and L5c for the left board lamp, data showing various brightnesses at 30 msec intervals is specified as the data for "WWWWW" output to the left board lamp 9B. In the grandchild table L5d, data showing various brightnesses at 20 msec intervals is specified as the data for "WWWWW" output to the left board lamp 9B. In the grandchild table L5e, data showing various brightnesses alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the data for "WWWWW" output to the left board lamp 9B. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild tables L5 (L5a to L5e) to light or flash the left board lamp 9B in a color corresponding to the common red cut-in.

238 and 239 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the attacca lamp in the common red cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 238 and Fig. 239, in the grandchild tables A5a, A5b, and A5c for the attacca lamp, data showing various brightnesses at 30 msec intervals are specified as the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacca lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H. In particular, data showing various brightnesses are specified for only the R data as the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H. In the grandchild table A5d, data showing various brightnesses are specified at 20 msec intervals as the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacca lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H. In particular, the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H are specified as data showing various brightnesses for only the R data. In the grandchild table A5e, the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacca lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H are specified as data showing various brightnesses alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec. In particular, the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H are specified as data showing various brightnesses for only the R data. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild tables A5 (A5a to A5e) to light or flash the attacca lamp 9E, V attacca lamp 9F, and electric chute lamp 9H in a color corresponding to the common red cut-in.

[Common green cut-in luminance data table]
Fig. 240 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the common green cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 240, the parent table in the common green cut-in brightness data table stores information specifying 3970 msec as the time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and child tables (WS6, YS6, LS6, AS6) to be referenced when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

Figure 241 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a common green cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Figure 241, in the child table in the common green cut-in brightness data table, grandchild tables (W6 (W6a to W6e), Y6 (Y6a to Y6e), L6 (L6a to L6e), A6 (A6a to A6e)) that are referenced in a specific time period are specified for each game effect lamp 9.

242 to 244 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a common green cut-in brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 242 to 244, in the grandchild tables W6a, W6b, and W6c, data showing various brightnesses for only the G data at 30 msec intervals is specified as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. In the grandchild table W6d, data showing various brightnesses for only the G data at 20 msec intervals is specified as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. In the grandchild table W6e, data showing various brightnesses for only the G data alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamp in green by performing lamp control based on the grandchild tables W6 (W6a to W6e).

Figure 245 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a reel lamp in a common green cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Figure 245, in the grandchild tables Y6a, Y6b, and Y6c for the reel lamp, data showing various brightnesses at 30 msec intervals is specified as the "RRRR" data output to the reel lamp 9A. In the grandchild table Y6d, data showing various brightnesses at 20 msec intervals is specified as the "RRRR" data output to the reel lamp 9A. In the grandchild table Y6e, data showing various brightnesses alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the "RRRR" data output to the reel lamp 9A. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild tables Y6 (Y6a to Y6e) to light or blink the reel lamp 9A in a color corresponding to the common green cut-in.

Figure 246 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the left board lamp in the common green cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Figure 246, in the grandchild tables L6a, L6b, and L6c for the left board lamp, data showing various brightnesses at 30 msec intervals is specified as the data for "WWWWW" output to the left board lamp 9B. In the grandchild table L6d, data showing various brightnesses at 20 msec intervals is specified as the data for "WWWWW" output to the left board lamp 9B. In the grandchild table L6e, data showing various brightnesses alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the data for "WWWWW" output to the left board lamp 9B. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild tables L6 (L6a to L6e) to light or flash the left board lamp 9B in a color corresponding to the common 6 cut-in.

247 and 248 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the attacca lamp in the common green cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 247 and Fig. 248, in the grandchild tables A6a, A6b, and A6c for the attacca lamp, data showing various brightnesses at 30 msec intervals are specified as the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacca lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H. In particular, data showing various brightnesses are specified for only the G data as the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H. In the grandchild table A6d, data showing various brightnesses are specified at 20 msec intervals as the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacca lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H. In particular, the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H are specified as data showing various brightnesses for only the G data. In the grandchild table A6e, the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacca lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H are specified as data showing various brightnesses alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec. In particular, the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H are specified as data showing various brightnesses for only the G data. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild tables A6 (A6a to A6e) to light or flash the attacca lamp 9E, V attacca lamp 9F, and electric chute lamp 9H in a color corresponding to the common green cut-in.

[Data table of illumination brightness when no operation prompt is given]
Fig. 249 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a non-operation-prompting luminance data table. As shown in Fig. 249, in the grandchild table W7, "FDC" and "300" are alternately specified at 30 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by controlling the lamp based on the grandchild table W7.

In the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100,000 msec as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W8, causing the frame lamps to light up in white.

[Data table of illumination brightness when operation is promoted]
Fig. 250 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the trigger display brightness data table and the operation promotion brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 250, in the grandchild table W9, "D00" is specified at 30 msec as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamp in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W9.

In the grandchild table W10, "500" or "D00" is specified at 30 msec intervals as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W10, causing the frame lamps to flash in red.

[Shutter brightness data table]
Fig. 251 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a shutter brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 251, in the grandchild table W11, the brightness data is specified to be gradually decreased from "A00" to "600" at 30 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W11 to light up the frame lamp in red while gradually decreasing the brightness.

In the grandchild table W12, "600" is specified at 30 msec as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W12, causing the frame lamps to light up in red.

[Failed brightness data table]
252 and 253 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a miss brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 252, in the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified in the first 10 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "444" is specified in the next 190 msec. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamp in white by controlling the lamp based on the grandchild table W13.

In the grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at 250 msec intervals as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W14, lighting the frame lamps in a white color that is darker than td1.

As shown in FIG. 253, in the grandchild table W15, "444" is specified as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp for the first 10 msec, "111" is specified for the next 550 msec, and "111" is specified for the final 600,000 msec (10 minutes). The performance control CPU 120 turns off the frame lamp by controlling the lamps based on the grandchild table W15.

[Brightness data table per relief]
254 and 255 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table per rescue. As shown in FIG. 254, in the grandchild table W16, "D00" is specified for each lamp in the first 30 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "B00" is specified for each lamp in the next 30 msec. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamp in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W17.

As shown in FIG. 255, in the grandchild table W17, white-color data such as "AAA" or "DDD" is specified for each lamp at 30 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamp in white by controlling the lamps based on the grandchild table W18.

[Hit confirmation brightness data table]
Fig. 256 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a winning determination brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 256, in the grandchild table W18, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data of various brightnesses corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec, and "333" is specified in the next 30 msec, and such RGB data is repeatedly specified. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W18 to make the frame lamp flash in seven colors.

[Redraw performance brightness data table]
257 and 258 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a re-lottery performance brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 257, in the grandchild table W19, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at 60 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in red by controlling the lamp based on the grandchild table W19.

As shown in FIG. 258, in the grandchild table W20, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at 30 msec intervals as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 causes the frame lamp to flash in red. In this way, the grandchild table W20 is designed to cause the frame lamp to flash in red while switching the brightness data more quickly than the grandchild table W19.

[Background luminance data table]
Fig. 259 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the background brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 259, in the child table in the background brightness data table, for each game effect lamp 9, a grandchild table (W21 (W21a, W21b), Y21 (Y21a, Y21b), L21 (L21a, L21b), A21 (A21a, A21b)) to be referred to in a predetermined time period is specified.

Figure 260 is a diagram illustrating an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a background brightness data table. As shown in Figure 260, in the grandchild table W21a, "550" or "880" is specified as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21a to light the frame lamp in yellow (yellow background lighting pattern).

In the grandchild table W21b, "550", "770", or "880" is specified as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W21b, causing the frame lamps to light up in yellow (yellow background lighting pattern).

<About brightness data reference>
The brightness data table has been explained above, but below, the brightness data table used by the lamp control after the winning epilogue part will be explained while being organized according to the performance content.

Figures 268 to 271 are diagrams for explaining the reference of the brightness data table. As shown in Figure 268, during times ts1 to ts3 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for the operation of the reel during the winning epilogue part is used, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W18. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W18, and after the win/lose branch shown in Figure 132 (r54), the frame lamp flashes in seven colors in response to the performance of the reel falling as shown in Figures 133 (s1) to (s3).

During the time ts3-2 to ts3-8 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for the winning epilogue in the winning epilogue part is used, and lamp control is performed based on grandchild table 4. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in white corresponding to the rising of the reel, in response to the performance in which the reel rises and a display appears that looks like a Bakuchu has been caught, as shown in Figure 173 (s3-2) to Figure 174 (s3-8).

During the time ts4 to ts7 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for the winning epilogue in the winning epilogue part is used, and lamp control is performed based on grandchild table 1. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W1, and smoothly lights up the frame lamp in rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed win, corresponding to the performance of catching a Bakuchu as shown in Figure 134 (s4) to Figure 135 (s7).

As shown in FIG. 269, during times tA1 to tA4 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for displaying the symbols during the winning epilogue part is used, and lamp control is performed based on grandchild table 4. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in a bright white color corresponding to the display of symbols in response to the performance of displaying the winning symbols as shown in FIG. 141 (A1) to FIG. 142 (A4).

At time tA5 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for displaying the symbols during the winning epilogue part is used, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, and the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors to correspond to the performance in which the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 141 (A5).

As shown in FIG. 270, during times tA6 to tA8 in the re-draw part, the child table before the pattern starts to move during the re-draw part is used, and lamp control based on the grandchild table for turning off the lamp is performed. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, and turns off the frame lamp once after the re-draw performance starts and before the pattern starts to move due to the re-draw performance, as shown in FIG. 142 (A6) to 143 (A8).

At times tA9 and tA10 of the re-draw part, the child table after the start of the movement of the pattern during the re-draw part is used, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W19. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W19, and causes the frame lamp to flash in red in response to the performance in which the "2" pattern shrinks as shown in Figures 143 (A9) and 144 (A10).

During the re-draw part, times tA11 to tA46, the child table from the beginning of the movement of the pattern during the re-draw part is used, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W20. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W20, and causes the frame lamp to flash rapidly in red in response to the performance in which the patterns change and fluctuate rapidly as shown in Figures 144 (A11) to 156 (A46).

As shown in FIG. 271, during times tC1 to tC4 of the re-draw part, the child table for displaying the symbols during the re-draw part is used, and lamp control is performed based on grandchild table 4. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in white in response to the performance of displaying symbols such as an enlarged display of the symbol "2" after the operation prompt is executed in the re-draw part, as shown in FIG. 161 (C1) to FIG. 162 (C4).

During the time tC5 to tC9 of the re-draw part, the child table for displaying the symbols during the re-draw part is used, and lamp control is performed based on grandchild table 1. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W1, and smoothly lights up the frame lamp in rainbow colors to correspond to the performance in which the symbol "2" is displayed swaying and then confirmed, as shown in Figures 162 (C5) to 163 (C9).

At time tE1 of the fanfare part, the child table for the fanfare part is used, and a grandchild table for turning off the frame lamp is specified. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, and turns off the frame lamp once before the fanfare display is performed, as shown in FIG. 160 (D1) or FIG. 164 (E1).

At time tE2 of the fanfare part, a child table for the fanfare part is used, and a grandchild table is specified for lighting the frame lamp in a fanfare mode. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, and lights up the frame lamp in a fanfare mode lighting mode in response to the fanfare performance, as shown in FIG. 160 (D2) or FIG. 164 (E2).

In this way, a predetermined child table is set at each timing of each performance part, and the performance control CPU 120 refers to the child table set at each timing of each performance part, and performs lamp control corresponding to the performance using the brightness data (for example, RGB data) contained in the grandchild table (brightness data table) specified by the child table.

Note that in Figures 268 to 271, child tables from the winning epilogue through the re-draw part to the fanfare part when the pattern does not advance are shown as examples, but for other routes, such as child tables from the winning epilogue through the re-draw part to the fanfare part when the pattern advances, predetermined child tables are set at each timing of each performance part, as shown in Figures 192 to 260.

<Description of Characteristic Parts in Lamp Control of Pachinko Game Machine 1>
Next, the characteristics and modifications of the lamp control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be described in detail.

(Start 9)
As shown in Fig. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, the frame lamp goes off when the shutter is fully open, so the timing when the shutter is fully open can be easily communicated to the player by the lighting state of the frame lamp. In addition, the prodding part of the SP first half reach A and the prodding part of the SP first half reach B executed after the start part start with the shutter fully open and the frame lamp off, and the frame lamp starts to light up or blink based on the brightness data table corresponding to each SP first half reach. In this way, after the shutter is fully open and the frame lamp goes off, the frame lamp starts to light up according to the progress of the performance in the SP first half reach, so that the start of the SP first half reach can be easily communicated to the player.

(Start 11, Start 14)
As shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, during the time ta1 to ta12 before the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamp is lit in yellow, flashing red, flashing white, and lit in red. While the brightness data is switched so that the light turns on/blinks while changing color and brightness, during the time period ta13 to ta18 after the shutter is completely closed, the frame lamp remains in a reduced brightness state and is red. By this, the lighting state of the frame lamp is maintained to enhance the performance of the start part before the shutter closes, and the lighting state of the frame lamp is maintained when the shutter is closed, This allows the player to focus on the content of the presentation when the reel opens, and as a result, the player can better enjoy the presentation in the subsequent teasing part.

(Incitement 7, Incitement 9)
As shown in Fig. 64(b8), (b9), Fig. 74(e7), Fig. 94(i32), Fig. 95(i34), Fig. 104(n10), Fig. 123(r25), (r27), Fig. 124(r29), Fig. 125(r31), (r33), and Fig. 126(r35), even when a character has a line but no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks in a color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to suitably express that the character is speaking by the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 even in a scene without subtitles, and to suitably show the performance in the provocative part to the player.

(Teasing 10)
When a character appears, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to the character, and when the character speaks a line, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp flashes in a color corresponding to the character. For example, in response to a performance in which Yume Yume-chan, located on the left side of the screen, and Bakuchu, located on the right side of the screen, face each other as shown in FIG. 63 (b4), the frame left lamp is lit in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan, and the frame right lamp is lit in red corresponding to Bakuchu. At time tb5, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame left lamp in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan, in response to a performance in which Yume Yume-chan, located on the left side of the screen, speaks a line as shown in FIG. 63 (b5). At time tb6, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu, in response to a performance in which Bakuchu, located on the right side of the screen, speaks a line as shown in FIG. 63 (b6). This allows, in a scene in which multiple characters are displayed speaking lines, to conveniently indicate which character is speaking by lighting/flashing the frame lamp, allowing the performance in the provocative part to be conveniently shown to the player.

(Incitement 17)
The CPU 120 for controlling the performance performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at different timings in one child table used in the hype part, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow at different timings, while changing the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 in the lamp control between different timings, thereby changing the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow. This allows the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach to be changed while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of different timings in one child table WD9. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

(Incitement 18)
The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at multiple different timings in one child table used in the hype part, thereby blinking the frame lamp in white at multiple different timings, while varying the time for referencing the grandchild table W4 in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, making it possible to make the frame lamp blink in white two or three times. This allows the number of white blinks to be different while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing the data capacity.

(Incitement 19)
In each of the child table WD9 used in the stimulating part of the SP second half reach A, the child table WD12 used in the stimulating part of the SP second half reach B, and the child table WD15 used in the stimulating part of the SP final reach, a common grandchild table W3 is used but its reference time is changed without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings, so that the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach can be made different while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control in a plurality of reach performances. Similarly, in the child table WD2 used in the stimulating part of the SP first half reach A and the child table WD5 used in the stimulating part of the SP first half reach B, a common grandchild table W3 is used but its reference time is changed without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings, so that the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach can be made different while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control.

(Teasing 20)
In each of the child table WD2 used in the provocative part of the SP first half reach A, the child table WD5 used in the provocative part of the SP first half reach B, the child table WD9 used in the provocative part of the SP second half reach A, the child table WD12 used in the provocative part of the SP second half reach B, and the child table WD15 used in the provocative part of the SP final reach, it is possible to vary the number of white flashes while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the different timings. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing the data capacity.

(Provocative cut-in 1)
The brightness data (RGB data in grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) of the lamp control in the cut-in performance and the button display for the cut-in performance is designed to use the same frame lamp as the lamp control in the provocative part of the SP final reach. This prevents unnecessary lighting/flashing of lamps from being mixed in and spoiling the aesthetic, and provides a suitable performance in the provocative part.

(True or False 13)
In the SP reach performance where no operation prompt is given to encourage the player to operate at the win/fail branch, the sound is muted and the frame lamp is kept lit in white, so that the player can see the performance as if it has stopped, and the win/fail branch (decision timing) can be easily conveyed to the player. On the other hand, in the SP reach performance where operation prompt is given to encourage the player to operate at the win/fail branch, a state is set in which a sound corresponding to operation prompt or a sound (BGM) corresponding to a reach is output, and further, the grandchild table is switched multiple times to control the frame lamp so as to be in a mode corresponding to operation prompt, so that the timing of the decision of the win/fail branch can be suitably presented by the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In this way, the timing of the decision of the win/fail branch can be suitably presented by different sound control and lamp control between the case where operation prompt is not given at the win/fail branch and the case where operation prompt is given.

(15 correct answers)
In the child table WD9 in the SP latter half reach A, which is a reach without operation prompting, the frame lamp flashes in white based on the grandchild table W7, and then lights up in white based on the grandchild table W8. Specifically, in the win/loss branch in the provocation part of the SP latter half reach A where no operation prompting is performed, the brightness data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W8 is designed to use "FDC" (white lighting), which is the last brightness data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W7, so that the win/loss branch (decision timing) can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner without increasing the data capacity used for lamp control too much.

(17 correct or incorrect)
In child table WD15 in the SP final reach, as shown in Figures 131 (r49) to 132 (r54), sounds corresponding to operation promotion and sounds (BGM) corresponding to the reach are output, and the frame lamp changes in succession from flashing white to lighting red to flashing red, etc., thereby enhancing the presentation of the operation promotion for the player at the win/loss branch (decisive timing).

(20% correct)
In the child table WD4 of the SP first half reach A, the child table WD7 of the SP first half reach B, the child table WD11 of the SP second half reach A, and the child table WD14 of the SP second half reach B, the frame lamps are lit in a lighting mode at the time of a miss based on the grandchild table W14, similar to the child table WD17 of the SP final reach. However, the performance control CPU 120 controls the frame lamps based on the grandchild table W14 for 5800 msec in the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, whereas in the SP final reach, the frame lamps are controlled based on the grandchild table W14 for 3900 msec. In this way, the grandchild table used for lamp control at the time of a miss is common between different reaches, but the time for lamp control by referring to the grandchild table can be made different. In this way, in the child table used for each of the different multiple reaches, instead of preparing a grandchild table dedicated to when a win occurs for each of the different multiple reaches, the common grandchild table W4 is used while changing its reference time, thereby reducing the data capacity used for lamp control and making it possible to vary the time for lighting the frame lamp in the lighting mode corresponding to a loss. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of a loss in a suitable manner for each of the multiple reaches.

(21 right or wrong)
The frame lamp is lit in the same color (yellow) and brighter by switching from the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W26 last specified in each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used when losing to the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W16 first specified in the child table WD18 used when winning a rescue. As a result, when a rescue is won, the frame lamp is lit in the same color (yellow) as after the loss notification and brighter than after the loss notification, so that the loss notification and the subsequent rescue hit notification can be more easily seen by the player depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9.

(Epilogue 9)
When the reel rises, the performance control CPU 120 gradually reduces the brightness of the reel lamp 9A so as to gradually turn off the reel lamp 9A based on the child table corresponding to the rising action of the reel in the reel lamp 9A and the grandchild table designated by the child table. In this way, the lighting state of the reel lamp 9A does not make the player aware of the rising of the reel, while the lighting state of the frame lamp makes the player pay attention to the screen indicating the development to the latter half of the SP Reach A.

(Epilogue 26)
In the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table used when announcing a winning is shared with the grandchild table used when displaying the winning pattern, so that it is not necessary to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of different timings, and it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control to light up in rainbow colors while enhancing each performance with a unified performance. As a result, it is possible to make the performance in the winning epilogue part look better to the player by using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

(Epilogue 27)
In the child tables WD21 and WD22 of the re-drawing part, the grandchild table W1 is used in common with the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part as lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-drawing. This eliminates the need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting in rainbow colors for the winning epilogue part and the re-drawing part, and allows the player to see a unified presentation even in different parts (timings) while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control. As a result, the presentation in the winning epilogue part and the re-drawing part can be seen better by the player while reducing the data capacity.

(Re-draw performance 2)
As shown in FIG. 142 (tA6), when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped while the frame lamp is smoothly lit in rainbow colors in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp goes out once before the re-draw performance is executed, and then lights up in a lighting mode corresponding to the re-draw performance, so that the player can be easily informed that the re-draw performance is about to begin by the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

(Re-draw performance 7, Re-draw performance 14, Re-draw performance 16)
In the winning epilogue part, when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped, the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors, and then goes off, and when the re-lottery performance is executed and the symbols are displayed swaying, the frame lamp flashes red in a lighting mode different from the smooth rainbow colors based on the brightness data corresponding to the re-lottery performance (for example, RGB data in the grandchild table W25). This prevents the player from mistaking the lighting mode of the frame lamp for the winning symbol temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part to be confirmed. Furthermore, the lighting of the rainbow colors when the symbols "3" and "2" are displayed swaying is continued even during the period when the symbols are confirmed. In this way, the system is designed so that the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed as it is during the symbol confirmation period, which is performed in a short period, without preparing a brightness data table for special lamp control, and therefore does not increase the data capacity excessively.

(Re-draw performance 19)
In the child table WD21 of the re-drawing part, the grandchild table W1 is used in common with the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part as lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-drawing. This eliminates the need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting rainbow colors in the winning epilogue part and the re-drawing part, and while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control, it is possible to present to the player a performance with a sense of unity even in different parts (timings). As a result, it is possible to present to the player the performance in the winning epilogue part and the re-drawing part better while reducing the data capacity.

(Re-draw performance 20)
In the child table WD20 in the re-draw part, the frame lamp is lit in the same rainbow color as the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 in the winning epilogue part as the lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-draw, but the rainbow lighting during the time tB7 to tB9 when the symbol "2" is upgraded to "3" by the re-draw is more intense than the smooth rainbow lighting when the symbol "2" temporarily stops in the winning epilogue part. This allows the player to be more effectively congratulated on the promotion of the winning symbol by the re-draw by the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

<Details on Lamp Control>
Next, with reference to Figures 261 to 263, the above-mentioned lamp control will be described in detail with respect to its characteristic features that are particularly worthy of mention.

[Comparison of lamp control when winning and losing]
261 to 263 are diagrams for explaining a comparison of the lamps when you win and when you lose.

First, referring to FIG. 261, the lamp control at the time of a miss will be described. As shown in FIG. 261, at the end of the stimulating part in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8. In the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100000 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W8 to light the frame lamp in white in response to the performance of the win/lose branch (decisive timing). In addition, at the end of the stimulating part in the SP final reach, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10. In the grandchild table W10, "500" or "D00" is specified as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W10 to flash the frame lamp in red in response to the performance of the win/lose branch (decisive timing).

After that, in the losing epilogue part that follows the teasing parts in each of the SP first half reach A and B, SP second half reach A and B, and SP final reach, lamp control is first performed based on the grandchild table W13. In the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified for the first 10 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "444" is specified for the next 190 msec. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamp in white to correspond to a performance in which an ally character is defeated in the reach performance after the win/lose branch.

After lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W13, lamp control is then performed based on grandchild table W14. In grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at 250 msec intervals as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. By performing lamp control based on grandchild table W14, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamp in a dimmer white color than the white color based on grandchild table W13, corresponding to the performance of an ally character feeling disappointed.

After lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W14, lamp control is then performed based on grandchild table W15. In grandchild table W15, "444" is specified for the first 10 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, "111" is specified for the next 550 msec, and "111" is specified for the final 600,000 msec (10 minutes). By performing lamp control based on grandchild table W15, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a miss is announced and the screen goes dark.

After lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W15, as explained with reference to FIG. 190, lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching), and then lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W26 that was also used in the start part before the reach. In the grandchild table W26, data corresponding to a yellow pattern that corresponds to the normal background is specified as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W26, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamps in yellow (yellow background lighting pattern) that corresponds to the normal background, just like in the start part before the reach.

Next, referring to FIG. 262, we will explain the lamp control at the time of a hit when transitioning to the hit epilogue part via the teasing part in each of the first half SP reach A, B and second half SP reach A, B.

As shown in FIG. 262, at the end of the teasing part in each of the SP first half reach A and B and SP second half reach A and B, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W8, and lights up the frame lamp in white in response to the performance of the win/lose branch (decisive timing).

After that, in the epilogue part that comes after passing through the teasing parts in each of the SP first half reach A and B and SP second half reach A and B, lamp control is first performed based on the grandchild table W19. In the grandchild table W19, "FFF" is specified for the first 40 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "333" is specified for the next 30 msec. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W19, causing the frame lamp to flash in white to correspond to a performance in which the ally character wins.

After lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W19, lamp control is then performed based on grandchild table W1. In grandchild table W1, data of various brightnesses corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at 30 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W1, causing the frame lamps to smoothly light up in the rainbow colors corresponding to confirmed wins.

After lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W1, lamp control is then performed based on grandchild table W21. In grandchild table W21, "AAA" is assigned to each lamp in turn at 20 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and finally "000" is assigned to each lamp at 600,000 msec (10 minutes). By performing lamp control based on grandchild table W21, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamps in a bright white color corresponding to the display of a winning pattern, in response to a performance that produces a winning pattern.

After lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W21, lamp control is performed again based on grandchild table W1. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W1, and causes the frame lamps to light up smoothly in rainbow colors to correspond to a performance in which the winning symbol is ultimately displayed in the center of the screen.

Next, referring to Figure 263, we will explain the lamp control when a hit occurs when transitioning to the winning epilogue part via the teasing part in the SP final reach.

As shown in FIG. 263, at the end of the teasing part in the SP final reach, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W10, and causes the frame lamp to flash red in response to the performance of the win/loss branch (decisive timing).

After that, in the winning epilogue part after passing through the teasing part in the SP final reach, lamp control is first performed based on the grandchild table W20. In the grandchild table W20, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data of various brightnesses corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec, and "333" is specified in the next 30 msec, with such RGB data being specified repeatedly. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W20, the performance control CPU 120 causes the frame lamp to flash in seven colors in response to a performance in which a role object falls.

After lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W20, lamp control is then performed based on grandchild table W1. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W1, causing the frame lamps to light up smoothly in rainbow colors that correspond to a confirmed win.

After lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W1, lamp control is then performed based on grandchild table W21. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W21, and lights up the frame lamp in a bright white color corresponding to the display of a winning pattern, in response to the performance of displaying a winning pattern.

After lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W21, lamp control is performed again based on grandchild table W1. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W1, and causes the frame lamps to light up smoothly in rainbow colors to correspond to a performance in which the winning symbol is ultimately displayed in the center of the screen.

The following describes the characteristic parts of the embodiment described with reference to Figures 261 to 263.

(19)
As shown in FIG. 261, when the game moves to the miss epilogue part via the provocative part in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the provocative part is "FDC", whereas the initial brightness data (RGB data) in the miss epilogue part is "888" or "444". As a result, when the game loses in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, the frame lamp can be lit in white more dimly while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting in the win/lose branch, so that the player can be suitably notified that the game has lost. Also, when the game moves to the miss epilogue part via the provocative part in the SP final reach, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the provocative part includes "D00", whereas the initial brightness data (RGB data) in the miss epilogue part is "888" or "444". As a result, when the SP final reach is a miss, the frame lamp can be lit in white, which is dimmer than the red flashing that occurs during the win/loss branch, so that the player can be conveniently notified that he or she has missed.

(Role action 1)
As shown in Fig. 262 and Fig. 263, in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp is smoothly lit in rainbow colors based on the grandchild table W1, and the RGB data is switched at 30 msec intervals. On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 261, in the losing case, the frame lamp is lit in a dim white color based on the grandchild table W14, and the RGB data is switched at 250 msec intervals, which is longer than the winning case. As a result, in the winning case, the lighting color of the frame lamp is switched at shorter intervals than the losing case, so that the winning case can be easily conveyed to the player by the lighting mode of the frame lamp. Furthermore, in the winning case, the lighting of the frame lamp can be emphasized more than in the losing case, while in the losing case, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made calmer than in the winning case, and as a result, the winning case and the losing case can be easily conveyed to the player by the contrasting lamp modes.

(Role Action 2)
As shown in FIG. 263, in the epilogue part of the SP final reach, in the performance where the role object falls, the frame lamp is controlled based on the grandchild table W20, and the frame lamp is turned on so that the rainbow chromatic color and the achromatic color (RGB data of "333") are alternately switched. In this way, by occasionally inserting the achromatic color between the rainbow chromatic color, it is possible to execute a performance that emphasizes the big win and congratulates the player. After that, in the performance where the ally character wins, the frame lamp is controlled based on the grandchild table W21, and the frame lamp is turned on in a smooth rainbow color without an achromatic color, so that it is possible to execute a performance that congratulates the player in a calm manner on the big win. As a result, the performance in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be preferably shown to the player.

(Regarding the swinging pattern of the design)
Here, the pattern swinging mode will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 264. FIG. 264 is a diagram for explaining the pattern swinging mode. In the pattern swinging period in the above-mentioned instigation part and re-lottery part, the decorative pattern moves as in the first mode to the third mode shown in FIG. 264(a) or the first mode to the third mode shown in FIG. 264(b). Specifically, the first mode shown in FIG. 264(a) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is located at the center of the screen. The second mode shown in FIG. 264(a) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is located above the first mode. The third mode shown in FIG. 264(a) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is located below the first mode.

The first mode shown in FIG. 264(b) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is located at the center of the screen when viewed from the front. The second mode shown in FIG. 264(b) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is rotated right around the vertical axis, with the center of the decorative pattern facing more left than in the first mode. The third mode shown in FIG. 264(b) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is rotated left around the vertical axis, with the center of the decorative pattern facing more right than in the first mode.

(Variation of re-selection effect)
FIG. 265 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the re-draw performance. FIG. 265(A) is a detailed explanatory diagram of the re-draw performance by the 7 symbol. Also, FIG. 265(B) is a timing chart of each re-draw performance. As shown in FIG. 265(A), the symbol is enlarged and displayed as shown in (D1) and (D2), and then reduced as shown in (D3) and (D4). Then, the symbol becomes normal size as shown in (D5). Then, as shown in (D6), the background is switched to the background for the re-draw performance, and the re-draw performance starts. Then, as shown in (D7), the symbol is swayed up and down during the shaking period. Then, the "7" symbol is reduced and displayed from (D8) to (D9).

After that, as shown in (D10), a button image and time gauge are faintly displayed below the "7" symbol. After that, as shown in (D11), the button image and time gauge are clearly displayed with the "7" symbol displayed. Then, as shown in (F12), the time gauge decreases over time. The time gauge is an indication that shows the valid period for button operation. If the player operates the push button 31B from the (D12) state, the "7" will rapidly change, and a faint and clear display will be repeated, as shown in (D13) to (D20). Similar rapid changes are repeated after (D20).

As shown in FIG. 265(B) and the timing chart for each re-lottery performance, the pattern forwarding period when a re-lottery performance in which the patterns change rapidly by button operation is executed is the same for all re-lottery performances. Here, there are a first re-lottery performance in which an even number symbol rises to an odd number symbol, a second re-lottery performance in which an even number symbol does not change to an even number symbol, and a third re-lottery performance in which a 7 symbol does not change to a 7 symbol. For example, in the first re-lottery performance, if the button is operated immediately after the timing at which the pattern forwarding performance can be performed and the pattern forwarding performance is started, there is a period (t1) in which the decorative symbols shake after the pattern forwarding period ends, and then the symbol is finalized.

In addition, in the second re-draw performance, if the button is operated t2 after the button can be operated and the symbol forwarding performance is started, there is a decorative symbol shaking period (t1-t2) after the symbol forwarding period ends, and then the symbol is finalized. In the third re-draw performance, if the button is operated t1 after the button can be operated and the symbol forwarding performance is started, there is no decorative symbol shaking period after the symbol forwarding period ends, and the symbol is finalized. In this way, the symbol forwarding period is constant no matter when the button is operated, and the time from the subsequent symbol shaking period to the button operation is absorbed in the period from the button operation to the symbol determination. This relationship is the same when the button is operated in any of the first to third re-draw performances.

[About re-draw performances 26-28]
The characteristic parts of the re-drawing part will be numbered and explained.

(Variation of re-selection effect)
FIG. 266 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the re-draw performance. As shown in (K1) to (K3) of FIG. 266, no matter when the button is operated during the winning/losing scene, the decorative pattern moves in the same way after the whiteout. Specifically, when the button is operated immediately after the promotion display is displayed as shown in (K1), the role movement and the winning epilogue part are executed, and the pattern is displayed in the epilogue part as shown in (K4). After that, 5 seconds later during the pattern shaking period, the three patterns face forward as shown in (K5).

Also, as shown in (K2), if the button is operated one second after the prompt display is displayed when the winner is determined, the reel moves and the winning epilogue part is executed, and the pattern is displayed in the epilogue part as shown in (K4). After that, four seconds into the pattern swing period, the three symbols face leftward from the front as shown in (K6). Also, as shown in (K3), if the button is operated two seconds after the prompt display is displayed when the winner is determined, the reel moves and the winning epilogue part is executed, and the pattern is displayed in the epilogue part as shown in (K4). After that, three seconds into the pattern swing period, the three symbols face rightward from the front as shown in (K7).

In this way, at the first operation timing, the pattern will be in a forward position after the pattern shaking period, at the second operation timing, the pattern will be in a position facing left after the pattern shaking period, and at the third operation timing, the pattern will be in a position facing right after the pattern shaking period. However, even if the orientation of the pattern differs depending on the operation timing during the pattern shaking period, a common effect is then executed, as shown in (K8) to (K17), in which the pattern is rotated and reduced after whiteout. Then, after (K17), a pattern advance effect is executed. Note that although FIG. 266 has been explained using odd-numbered patterns, a similar effect is also executed with even-numbered patterns.

(Re-draw performance 26)
As shown in FIG. 266, when the image showing the stick controller 31A and the time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, no matter when the stick controller 31A is operated, a time for the symbols to shake for absorbing the scale may be provided during the time until the predetermined timing at which the re-lottery performance is executed (the symbol shaking period from (K4)). Then, when the predetermined timing is reached and the re-lottery performance is executed, a common performance accompanied by a whiteout as shown in (K8) to (K17) may be executed. According to this, no matter when the stick controller 31A is operated, the symbols are once displayed shaking, and then the common performance accompanied by a whiteout is executed, and then the re-lottery performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the movement of the symbols at the start of the re-lottery from being unnatural, and the series of performances can be displayed in a favorable manner.

(Re-draw performance 27)
The time from when the whiteout screen appears until the re-lottery effect is executed may be the same for any of a plurality of reach effects. This can reduce the data capacity of the effect data.

(Re-draw performance 28)
The movement of the pattern after the whiteout screen may be an extension of the movement of the pattern before the whiteout screen. For example, if the movement of the pattern before the whiteout screen is a movement of swinging around an axis around the vertical direction of the pattern to the front and back sides on the spot, the movement after the whiteout screen may be a movement of rotating clockwise around an axis around the vertical direction of the pattern while expanding. According to this, by displaying a whiteout between the movement of the pattern on the extension of the same axis, it is possible to prevent the pattern movement from feeling unnatural, and to make the series of performances look good.

(Re-draw performance 29)
Among the multiple SP reaches, there are some that do not notify the user of a button operation or other operation promotion at the branch when determining whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state. In such SP reaches, no time shift occurs due to the operation. However, even in such SP reaches, a re-draw performance similar to that of an SP reach in which a time shift occurs can be executed. In this way, a common performance can be used regardless of the time shift, so that no discomfort is felt even when there is only one re-draw performance. In addition, by limiting the re-draw performance to one, the data capacity can be reduced.

(Re-draw performance 30)
As shown in FIG. 266, the timing of the movement of the pattern after the whiteout screen is set so that it is an extension of the movement of the pattern before the whiteout screen. For example, the movement of the pattern before the whiteout screen is designed to be one of a series of movements in which the pattern moves from the right position (K3) to the left position (K6) via the front position (K5). In other words, when the pattern is swinging in a clockwise direction, the whiteout by the re-lottery performance is executed, and then the pattern is enlarged and rotates to the right. According to this, the series of right-rotating pattern movements from the pattern swinging period to the re-lottery performance can prevent the pattern movement from feeling strange.

[About re-draw performances 21-25]
The characteristic parts of the re-drawing part will be numbered and explained.

(Variation of re-selection effect)
FIG. 267 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the re-draw performance. (L1) is a diagram of the case where the button is operated at an earlier timing after the action prompt display is displayed during the pattern forwarding period. (L2) is a diagram of the case where the button is operated at a later timing than (L1) after the action prompt display is displayed. (L3) is a diagram of the case where the button is operated at a later timing than (L2) after the action prompt display is displayed. And, as shown in (L1) to (L3) of FIG. 267, the pattern is produced in the same way regardless of the timing at which the button is operated during the pattern forwarding period in the re-draw performance. Then, the decorative pattern with the whiteout in between moves in the same way and then stops. Specifically, as shown in (L1), when the button is operated immediately after the action prompt display is displayed, the pattern is produced as shown in (L4) to (L5), and then the pattern becomes normal size. Then, as shown in (L6), the pattern starts to shake, and after a predetermined period has passed, the three patterns are in a state of facing rightward rather than forward as shown in (L7).

Also, as shown in (L2), if the button is operated later than (L1) after the action prompt is displayed, the pattern is displayed as shown in (L4) to (L5), and then the pattern becomes normal size. Then, as shown in (L6), the pattern starts to shake, and after a shorter pattern shaking period than (L1), the three patterns face to the right rather than the front as shown in (L8). Also, as shown in (L3), if the button is operated later than (L2) after the action prompt is displayed, the pattern is displayed as shown in (L4) to (L5), and then the pattern becomes normal size. Then, as shown in (L6), the pattern starts to shake, and after a shorter pattern shaking period than (L2), the three patterns face to the front as shown in (L9).

In this way, at the first operation timing, the pattern may be in a position facing to the right after the pattern shaking period, at the second operation timing, the pattern may be in a position facing to the left after the pattern shaking period, and at the third operation timing, the pattern may be in a position facing forward after the pattern shaking period. However, even if the orientation of the pattern differs depending on the operation timing during the pattern shaking period, a common effect is then executed in which the pattern is rotated and reduced after a whiteout, as shown in (J1) to (J10). Then, the pattern stops after the pattern shaking period, as shown in (J11) to (J17). Note that although FIG. 267 has been explained using odd-numbered patterns, a similar effect is also executed with even-numbered patterns.

(Re-draw performance 21)
In the modified example, as shown in (L1) to (L3) of FIG. 267, an action prompt display using a button image and a time gauge is displayed during the re-lottery effect. During the period in which the action prompt display is displayed, the player operates the push button 31B to execute a common pattern display effect shown in (L4) to (L6). Regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, a common pattern display effect using the enlargement and reduction of the patterns as shown in (L4) to (L5) is executed. After that, the pattern is swayed during the pattern swaying period. The pattern swaying period differs depending on the button operation timing. Thus, after the pattern swaying period, for example, at the first operation timing, the pattern may be in a position facing the right, at the second operation timing, the pattern may be in a position facing the left, and at the third operation timing, the pattern may be in a position facing the front. However, regardless of the operation timing, a whiteout effect is inserted as a common effect from (J1) to (J18) thereafter, and an effect in which the symbols rotate, shrink, and then sway is executed. By performing the common effect regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, the symbols can be stopped cleanly, and the series of effects can be displayed in a favorable manner.

(Re-draw performance 22)
When the push button 31B is operated at the first timing during the operation valid period, after the notification of whether or not the player will be promoted, the display of the decorative pattern shaking is displayed (an example of no operation in FIG. 267 (L3)). When the push button 31B is operated at the second timing earlier than the first timing during the operation valid period, after the notification of whether or not the player will be promoted, the display of the decorative pattern shaking is extended by the amount of time that it was earlier than the first timing (an example of the operation in FIG. 267 (L2) during the operation valid period). When the push button 31B is operated at the third timing earlier than the second timing during the operation valid period, after the notification of whether or not the player will be promoted, the display of the decorative pattern shaking is extended by the amount of time that it was earlier than the second timing (an example of the operation in FIG. 267 (L1) during the operation valid period). In this way, regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, the length of the performance can be absorbed by the shaking time of the pattern. By performing a common performance after that, the pattern can be stopped cleanly, and the series of performances can be displayed in a favorable manner.

(Re-draw performance 23)
As shown in Fig. 267, after executing a whiteout as a common effect, a different effect from the previous pattern mode is executed in which the swaying decorative pattern is enlarged and rotated once. According to this, no matter what the pattern position is in the swaying of the scale absorption pattern, by executing a different mode of effect after the whiteout, it is possible to avoid a sense of incongruity in the flow of the effect until the pattern is stopped.

(Re-draw performance 24)
As shown in FIG. 267, during the symbol swing period, the symbol swings backward from (J10) to (J12), then swings forward from (J13) to (J14), changing to the initial position. After that, the symbol swings forward from (J15) to (J16), then swings backward from (J17) to (J18), changing to the initial position. Such a series of movements may be repeated multiple times. However, during the symbol determination period, the symbol is designed to always be located at the initial position facing forward as shown in (J18). This allows the symbol to be determined and stopped in a manner that does not give the player a sense of incongruity.

(Re-draw performance 25)
The game effect lamp 9 is designed to light up in rainbow colors at the whiteout timing of (J1) in FIG. 267. The timing of (J1) is an effect that is executed as a common effect regardless of the operation timing. By setting the point where such a common effect is executed as the starting point for changing the game effect lamp 9, it is easy for the designer to decide the start trigger. Note that the start trigger may be the timing of (J2) when the common start display starts, rather than the timing of (J1), and the start trigger may be any timing of the commonly executed effect.

<Main components and effects>
Below, the technical effects obtained by the various configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are listed individually.

(F2019-116)
A gaming machine (e.g., gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
A movable body (e.g., a role object, a movable body 32),
A display means (for example, an image display device 5),
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled (for example, a notification effect that notifies whether or not a jackpot is hit),
The notification performance includes an introductory part (for example, a teasing part) until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified, and a hit/miss notification part (for example, a hit epilogue part) in which the hit/miss notification part is notified. A winning/losing notification part that notifies the player of a winning or losing jackpot by moving the role of the winning or losing jackpot, and an epilogue part (for example, a winning epilogue part) that is executed after the winning or losing notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state. The present invention relates to a method for manufacturing a computer-implemented ...
In the introduction part, a line sound uttered by a character is output, and the first character for which a line subtitle is displayed in response to the line sound is an ally character (for example, the example shown in FIG. 115 (r2)).
The display means displays the introduction display of the promotion display that prompts a specific action in preference to the performance display in the introduction part at the timing of transition from the introduction part to the winning/losing notification part, thereby making it difficult to visually recognize the performance display. Then, in a state where the performance display is visible, a promotion display is performed (for example, the examples shown in FIG. 131 (r49) to FIG. 132 (r54)),
In the winning/losing notification part of the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body is moved from a first position (for example, a retreated position) to a second position on the front side of the display means. advance to a position (e.g., an advance position) (e.g., the example shown in FIG. 133 );
The display means includes:
When the movable body advances to the second position, an effect display for moving the movable body is performed, and when the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, the effect display is terminated; Displaying the epilogue part (for example, examples shown in Figs. 173 and 174),
In the epilogue part, the final line subtitle is displayed in response to the final line sound uttered by the character, and then, after the display of the final line subtitle ends, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area (for example, (Examples shown in Figures 134 to 136)
In the epilogue part, the proportion of dialogue subtitles displayed for the lines spoken by the character is higher than the proportion of dialogue subtitles displayed for the lines spoken by the character in the introduction part (for example, the example shown in FIG. 175). .

Specifically, the character who speaks the first line in each SP reach as the provocation part is an ally character (for example, FIG. 115 (r2)). This allows the player to accurately recognize the ally character at the start of the SP reach. Also, at the timing of transition from the provocation part to the win/loss notification part, the display of the provocation part's performance is made invisible by displaying the introductory image of the trigger display encouraging the player to operate the trigger with priority over the display of the performance in the provocation part, and then the image of operating the trigger button and the performance in the provocation part become visible (for example, FIG. 131 (r48) to (r51)). This allows the player to get excited because the introductory image gives an impact while the introductory image changes to the image of the trigger button, allowing the player to confirm the performance of the provocation part. Also, it is possible to prevent the aesthetics of the display from being damaged in the flow of the performance in which the winning epilogue part becomes the background display until the retraction of the role is completed. In addition, in the winning epilogue part, the pattern is enlarged after the display of the final dialogue subtitle is finished, so that it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from overlapping the pattern and from being mistaken for a message for displaying the pattern. In addition, the above-mentioned provocation part, which performs the provocation of winning or losing, has a performance in which the friendly character and the enemy character alternately fight each other (for example, SP first half reach B and SP second half reach B). In the performance of such a provocation part, there is a scene in which the friendly character receives damage. In addition, the performance of such a provocation part has a faster image display switching interval than the epilogue part, and the number of image display switching is also larger. According to this, by making the provocation part a faster development performance than the epilogue part, the provocation part can be made to look good. In addition, in the winning epilogue part, which develops slowly, the subtitles are firmly attached, so that it is easy to understand what the character is saying and the feeling of celebration can be emphasized. Also, in the fast-paced promotional parts, the content can be conveyed primarily through video changes, and supplemental subtitles can be displayed without interfering with the video progression. This allows the entire production to be presented in an optimal way.

(F2019-117)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and a part after the result/informative part is notified. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a character's speech sound is output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a dialogue subtitle is not displayed.
The number of lines spoken by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
The ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed for the dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification performance is greater than the ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed for the dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the introduction part of the first notification performance. high,
The ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed for the dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the epilogue part of the second notification performance is greater than the ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed for the dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the introduction part of the second notification performance. expensive.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, the rate at which subtitles are displayed for the lines of characters in the epilogue part is higher than the rate at which subtitles are displayed for characters in the SP reach, which is the teasing part. By clearly displaying subtitles in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the characters are saying. Furthermore, in a successful epilogue part, subtitles can enhance the feeling of celebration. Furthermore, since there are more screen changes in the teasing part than in the epilogue part, even if subtitles are displayed, the display time may be shorter, which prevents the auxiliary subtitle display from interfering with the performance, and makes it possible to prioritize conveying the performance through image changes. This allows for an optimal performance to be executed in the teasing part.

(F2019-118)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and a part in which the control to the advantageous state is notified after the result/informative part is notified. and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the game is controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-drawing effects, a first re-drawing effect is a first re-drawing effect in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in a second half part. It is possible to perform the performance,
When it is determined that the game is controlled to the first advantageous state, among the plurality of types of re-lottery performances, the first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part. A second re-selection effect can be executed,
Execute the first re-selection performance or the second re-selection performance using the first symbol displayed in the epilogue part;
The light emission control means
In an epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-draw part, the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-draw performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-draw performance, and the first re-draw performance is a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect,
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect is switched to a brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode, and the rainbow light-emitting mode is made. and controlling the light emitting means by using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period.
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emission means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. do.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the re-lottery performance is started using the "2" symbol as is. When the re-extraction performance starts, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the re-lottery performance starts to change from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol advance performance is executed in which symbols are replaced by rapid changes starting from the "2" symbol. In this way, the re-lottery performance is started using the decorative symbol that was temporarily stopped, and when the re-lottery performance starts, the symbol advance performance is executed using the symbol that was temporarily stopped, so that it is easy for the player to understand which decorative symbol the re-lottery started from. As a result, the flow of the series of performances can be clearly seen.

(F2019-119)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and a part after the result/informative part is notified. and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the game is controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery performances, a replacement display in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol after the first symbol is displayed in the first half part is performed. In the latter half of the game, a first re-draw effect is executed to display the second symbol.
When it is determined that the game is controlled to the first advantageous state, among the plurality of types of re-lottery performances, the replacement display is performed in a first half part and the first pattern is displayed again in a second half part. It is possible to execute a re-draw performance,
The first re-selection performance is a performance in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the second symbol is displayed in the second half part. can be,
The second re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the first symbol is displayed in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means
In an epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-draw part, the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-draw performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-draw performance, and the first re-draw performance is a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect,
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect is switched to a brightness data table for making the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is made. and controlling the light emitting means by using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period.
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emission means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. do

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-draw performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped before the re-draw is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the re-draw performance is started using the "2" symbol as it is. When the re-extraction performance starts, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the re-draw performance starts to change from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-draw performance, a symbol-sending performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations starting from the "2". During the re-draw performance, all the decorative symbols are sent in order, from "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1", and then a symbol-sending performance is executed in which the "2" symbol is displayed again. In this way, the re-draw performance is started using the decorative symbol that was temporarily stopped, and the decorative symbol that was initially temporarily stopped is displayed again after multiple types of decorative symbols change. In this way, the final display result is not displayed immediately, and the symbol-sending performance in which all the decorative symbols are displayed can make the flow of the series of performances look good.

(F2019-120)
(5) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and a part after the result/informative part is notified. and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the game is controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery performances, a replacement display in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol after the first symbol is displayed in the first half part is performed. In the latter half of the game, a first re-draw effect is executed to display the second symbol.
When it is determined that the game is controlled to the first advantageous state, among the plurality of types of re-lottery performances, the second re-lottery performance is a re-lottery performance in which the replacement display is performed in a first half part and the first pattern is displayed again in a second half part. It is possible to execute a lottery performance,
When it is determined that the second advantageous state is to be controlled, a repeat display is performed in which the second symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the second symbol is repeatedly displayed, and the second symbol is displayed in the second half part. A third re-selection effect can be executed to display the third re-selection effect again.
The first re-selection effect, the second re-selection effect, and the third re-selection effect are configured to have the same performance length,
The light emission control means
In an epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-draw part, the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-draw performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-draw performance, and the first re-draw performance is a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect,
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect is switched to a brightness data table for making the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is made. and controlling the light emitting means by using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period.
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emission means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. do.

Specifically, there are provided patterns in which an even number symbol (e.g., 2) is displayed followed by an even number symbol (e.g., 2), and an even number symbol (e.g., 2) is displayed followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., 3). In addition, there may be a pattern in which an odd number symbol (e.g., 7) is displayed followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., 7). In a performance in which symbols are sent from odd number symbols to odd number symbols, it is sufficient that the same odd number symbols are sent in all symbol transfers. However, in either pattern, the length of the symbol transfer period in the re-draw performance can be designed to be the same. This allows for an optimal re-draw performance in either pattern without increasing data capacity.

(F2019-121)
(6) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and a part after the result/informative part is notified. and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the game is controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-drawing effects, a first re-drawing effect is a first re-drawing effect in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in a second half part. It is possible to perform the performance,
When it is determined that the game is controlled to the first advantageous state, among the plurality of types of re-lottery performances, the first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part. A second re-selection effect can be executed,
The first symbol is displayed with the same or substantially the same animation when the first symbol is displayed once in the epilogue part and when the first symbol is displayed again in the latter half part of the second re-draw performance;
The light emission control means
In an epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-draw part, the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-draw performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-draw performance, and the first re-draw performance is a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect,
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect is switched to a brightness data table for making the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is made. and controlling the light emitting means by using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period.
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. do.

Specifically, the symbol display in the aforementioned FIG. 141 (A1) to FIG. 142 (A5) portions and the symbol display in the FIG. 161 (C1) to FIG. 162 (C5) portions are executed using approximately the same images. Specifically, the same images are used for the symbol display of the "2" symbol and effect images, and the symbol display is executed in a manner in which the background portion is different. In this way, the symbol display images can be made approximately the same, making it easy for the player to understand that the symbol has not been upgraded to a special symbol. Note that the image of the symbol display portion, including the background, may be made exactly the same.

(F2019-122)
(7) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and a part after the result/informative part is notified. and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the game is controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-drawing effects, a first re-drawing effect is a first re-drawing effect in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in a second half part. It is possible to perform the performance,
When it is determined that the game is controlled to the first advantageous state, among the plurality of types of re-lottery performances, the first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part. A second re-selection effect can be executed,
In the latter half of the game, the display mode of the first symbol is changed from the first symbol to the second symbol to the third symbol until the symbol determination period begins. A shaking display is performed to display the first symbol as if it is shaking,
In the latter half part, from when the second pattern is displayed until the pattern determination period, the display mode of the second pattern is changed to the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode. A shaking display is performed to display the second symbol as if the second symbol is shaking,
The first mode is a mode in which a player can easily visually recognize the symbols compared to either the second mode or the third mode,
The performance execution means includes:
In the re-lottery part, a display for prompting a player to take an action can be executed;
When the action is performed at a first timing while the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-selection performance, when a predetermined timing comes after the performance corresponding to the first re-selection performance is executed. The second symbol is displayed in a swaying manner while maintaining a swaying speed of the swaying display of the second symbol so that the second symbol is in the second mode.
When the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-selection performance, if the action is executed at a second timing different from the first timing, after executing a performance corresponding to the first re-selection performance, The second symbol is displayed in a swaying manner while maintaining a swaying speed of the swaying display of the second symbol so that the second symbol becomes the third mode at the predetermined timing;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-draw performance, regardless of whether the action is executed at the first timing or the second timing, the shaking display of the second symbol is started from the predetermined timing. A display that makes it difficult to see is performed, and then the second pattern is displayed again in a swaying display, and then, when the pattern determination period begins, the second pattern is displayed in a swaying display while maintaining the swaying speed of the swaying display of the second pattern. The two symbols are stopped and displayed in the first mode,
When the action prompting display is being executed in the second re-selection performance, if the action is executed at the first timing, the predetermined timing is reached after the performance corresponding to the second re-selection performance is executed. The first symbol is displayed in a swaying manner while maintaining a swaying speed of the swaying display of the first symbol so that the first symbol becomes the second mode when the first symbol is displayed in a swaying manner.
When the action prompting display is being executed in the second re-selection performance, if the action is executed at the second timing, the predetermined timing is reached after the performance corresponding to the second re-selection performance is executed. The first symbol is displayed in a swaying manner while maintaining a swaying speed of the swaying display of the first symbol so that the first symbol becomes the third mode when the first symbol is displayed in a swaying manner.
When the action prompting display is being executed in the second re-selection performance, regardless of whether the action is performed at the first timing or the second timing, the swinging display of the first symbol is started from the predetermined timing. A display that makes it difficult to see is performed, and then the first pattern is displayed again in a swaying display, and then, when the pattern determination period begins, the first pattern is displayed in a swaying display while maintaining the swaying speed of the swaying display of the first pattern. One symbol is displayed in the first mode,
The light emission control means
In an epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-draw part, the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-draw performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-draw performance, and the first re-draw performance is a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect,
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect is switched to a brightness data table for making the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is made. and controlling the light emitting means by using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period.
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emission means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. do.

Specifically, as shown in (L1) to (L3) of FIG. 267, an action prompt display using a button image and a time gauge is displayed while the symbols are being sent in the re-draw effect. During the period in which the action prompt display is displayed, the player operates the push button 31B to execute the common symbol release effect shown in (L4) to (L6). Regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, a common symbol release effect is executed by enlarging and reducing the symbols as shown in (L4) to (L5). After that, the symbols are wobbled during the symbol wobbled period. The symbol wobbled period differs depending on the timing of the button operation. Thus, after the symbol wobbled period, for example, at the first operation timing, the symbols may be in a position facing to the right, at the second operation timing, the symbols may be in a position facing to the left, and at the third operation timing, the symbols may be in a position facing forward. However, regardless of the operation timing, a whiteout effect is inserted as a common effect from (J1) to (J18) afterwards, and an effect in which the symbols rotate, shrink, and then sway is executed. In this way, by executing the common effect regardless of the timing of the push button 31B operation, the symbols can be stopped cleanly, and the series of effects can be displayed in an optimal manner.

(F2019-126)
(8) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and a part after the result/informative part is notified. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The introduction part is
A scene in which a character's dialogue sound is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed;
a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed;
The brightness data table used in a scene in which a character's speech sound is output and no dialogue subtitles for the speech sound are displayed is such that the brightness data using the emission color corresponding to the character is switched in response to the action of the character. It is composed of.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 168 to 170, there are scenes in the teasing part where a character speaks lines but no subtitles are added (for example, scenes r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35). However, even in such specific scenes, the brightness data of the game effect lamp 9 (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to the character. In this way, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 even in scenes where no subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sounds. This allows the effect corresponding to the character to be executed appropriately, and the teasing part can be shown to the player in an appropriate manner. Also, as shown in Fig. 64 (b8), (b9), Fig. 74 (e7), Fig. 94 (i32), Fig. 95 (i34), Fig. 104 (n10), Fig. 123 (r25), (r27), Fig. 124 (r29), Fig. 125 (r31), (r33), and Fig. 126 (r35), even when a character has a line but no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to appropriately express that the character is speaking by the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, and allows the player to appropriately see the performance in the provocative part.

(F2019-127)
(9) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A sound output means;
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and a part after the result/informative part is notified. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the winning/losing notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays the effect while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. The display ends, and the display corresponding to the scene after the switch is performed.
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a movable body movement luminance data table when the movable body advances to the second position, and the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. while the moving body is being moved to the next scene, the moving body moving luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the scene after the switching, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after the switching.
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a switching sound when the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Outputs a sound corresponding to the later scene.

Specifically, the performance may be switched from the performance at the start of the reach to the performance of the SP first half reach by the operation of the reel. Also, an effect image corresponding to the reel operation may be displayed according to the action of the reel falling. After that, the display may be gradually switched from the effect image corresponding to the reel operation to the screen corresponding to the SP first half reach while the reel is rising. Also, the brightness data table may be switched from the brightness data table of the reel operation part to the brightness data table of the SP first half reach while the reel is rising. Also, a sound corresponding to the SP first half reach may be output while the reel is rising. Here, the effect image corresponding to the reel operation is displayed on the premise that the reel is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, the beauty of the display can be prevented by switching to the background display corresponding to the SP first half reach before the reel completes the return operation to the initial position. In addition, the sound effects and the brightness data table for the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the first half of the SP while the reel is rising, allowing the promotional part of the first half of the SP to be displayed optimally.

(F2019-128)
(10) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and a part after the result/informative part is notified. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The display means is
In the introductory part, a prompt is displayed to encourage the player to perform a specific action, and when the player performs the specific action, a cut-in is displayed.
In the introductory part, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output, and a dialogue subtitle is displayed in a specific area of the display means in response to the dialogue sound;
At the timing when the promotion display is performed in the introduction part, dialogue subtitles are not displayed in the specific area,
the luminance data table includes a luminance data table for cut-in display corresponding to the cut-in display, and a luminance data table for an introduction part corresponding to an introduction part,
The light emitting means for which luminance data is set in the luminance data table for cut-in display includes at least the same portions as the light emitting means for which luminance data is set in the luminance data table for the introduction part.

Specifically, the brightness data for the cut-in effects and the lamp control in the button displays for said cut-in effects (RGB data in grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) is designed to use the same frame lamps as the lamp control in the teasing part of the SP final reach. This prevents unnecessary lamps from lighting/flashing, etc., from mixing in and spoiling the aesthetic, and provides an ideal teasing part performance.

(F2019-129)
(11) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A sound output means;
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and a part after the result/informative part is notified. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
During the period before the transition from the introduction part to the winning/losing notification part in the first notification performance,
the display means displays a prompt to prompt a specific action by a player,
The sound output means continues to output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a first notification performance luminance data table,
During the period before the transition from the introduction part to the winning/losing notification part in the second notification performance,
The display means does not display the prompting display for prompting the specific action, but displays a win/lose indicator,
The sound output means does not output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a second notification performance luminance data table,
The first notification performance luminance data table is configured so that the luminance data is switched,
The brightness data table for the second notification performance is configured so that the brightness data does not switch.

Specifically, in an SP reach performance where no operation prompt is given to encourage the player to operate at the win/loss branch, the sound is muted and the frame lamp is kept lit in white, making it appear to the player that the performance has stopped, and the win/loss branch (decisive timing) can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. On the other hand, in an SP reach performance where operation prompt is given to encourage the player to operate at the win/loss branch, a sound corresponding to the operation prompt or a sound (BGM) corresponding to the reach is output, and further, by switching the grandchild table multiple times to control the frame lamp to a mode corresponding to the operation prompt, the timing of the decision of the win/loss branch can be suitably presented by the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In this way, the timing of the decision of the win/loss branch can be suitably presented by different sound control and lamp control between when no operation prompt is given at the win/loss branch and when operation prompt is given.

(F2019-130)
(12) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and a part in which the control to the advantageous state is notified after the result/informative part is notified. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The introductory part includes a first scene and a second scene that follows the first scene,
In the first scene, first moving image data is used;
In the second scene, second video data is used;
The second scene is slower in speed than the first scene,
the first moving image data is moving image data in which a movement of a specific character is expressed by a plurality of specific character images;
The second video data is video data in which the movement of a specific character is expressed by one specific character image and an effect image.

Specifically, the scene before the winning or losing decision of (r48) in the provocation part is a slow-motion period in which the movement of the image slows down. Also, while the performance executed before (r48) depicts the movement of the character from multiple image data, the performance executed in (r48) is executed using an image of Bakuchu and images of six allies. The images of the ally character and the enemy character are gradually enlarged over time to make the characters appear to be moving. Here, if the image is created during the slow-motion period using the same amount of image data as outside the slow-motion period, the amount of data will be small and the movement will be awkward. On the other hand, if a large amount of data is used to make the movement during the slow-motion period smooth, the capacity will become too large. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced by reducing the number of images used during the slow-motion period and making the character appear to be moving by switching and enlarging the display. Note that the number of images used during the slow-motion period can be any number as long as it is smaller than the number of images used outside the slow-motion period.

(F2019-131)
(13) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and a part after the result/informative part is notified. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
There is a shielding display that makes the display invisible by going through a closing operation to a closed state, and makes the display visible by performing an opening operation after the closed state,
The shielding display can be performed at a timing related to the introduction part,
When the blocking display performs a closing operation, the brightness of the effect display decreases as the area in which the effect display is visible becomes smaller,
When the shielding display performs an opening operation, the brightness of the performance display increases as the area in which the performance display is visible becomes larger.

Specifically, the shutter described above is an image that, when closed, makes the image of the performance being performed in the background invisible, and when opened after closing, makes the image of the performance being performed visible. The shutter is also executed at a timing related to the teasing part, that is, before the start of the teasing part. When the shutter is closing, the screen brightness is lowered as the area in which the performance is visible becomes narrower, and when the shutter is opening, the screen brightness is increased as the area in which the performance is visible becomes wider. This makes the closing and opening of the shutter more realistic, making the flow of the performance look favorable. Note that, although the image of the shutter is used to make the image of the performance being performed in the background invisible or visible, it may be an image other than a shutter, or a similar performance may be executed using a prop.

(F2019-132)
(14) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and a part after the result/informative part is notified. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the introduction part, there is a specific scene in which the character's dialogue sound and the action sound corresponding to the character's action are output,
In the specific scene, the dialogue sounds are outputted louder than the action sounds.

Specifically, in the titillation part, the background music for the SP reach is output, and there are scenes where dialogue sounds and physical sounds (also called operation sounds) are output at the same time they overlap. When dialogue sounds and physical sounds are output at the same time, the dialogue sounds are output at a louder volume than the physical sounds when output from speakers 8L, 8R. In this way, the realism of the presentation is brought out by outputting the physical sounds as part of the presentation, while the content of the presentation can be more easily conveyed to the player by outputting the dialogue sounds at a louder volume when the dialogue sounds and physical sounds overlap. As a result, the presentation in the titillation part can be made to look better.

(F2019-133)
(15) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and a part after the result/informative part is notified. and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the game is controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-drawing effects, a first re-drawing effect is a first re-drawing effect in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in a second half part. It is possible to perform the performance,
When it is determined that the game is controlled to the first advantageous state, among the plurality of types of re-lottery performances, the first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part. A second re-selection effect can be executed,
In the epilogue part, when the first pattern is displayed once, the display mode of the first pattern is changed to a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode so that the first pattern appears to be swaying. The first design is displayed,
In the case of transitioning from the epilogue part to the re-draw part, when the first symbol is displayed in the first mode and the epilogue part is transitioned to the re-draw part, and when the first symbol is displayed in the second mode, There are a time when the first pattern is displayed at a timing when the epilogue part is shifted to a re-selection part, and a time when the first pattern is displayed at a timing when the epilogue part is shifted to a re-selection part,
The performance execution means performs a transition from an epilogue part to a re-selection part at a timing when the first symbol is displayed in the first mode, and a transition from an epilogue part to a re-selection part at a timing when the first symbol is displayed in the second mode. The first symbol is visually recognized both when the epilogue part is shifted to the re-selection part and when the epilogue part is shifted to the re-selection part at the timing when the first symbol is displayed in the third mode. A specific display that is difficult to select is performed, and the first pattern is displayed in a common display mode to execute the first re-draw performance or the second re-draw performance;
The light emission control means
In an epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-draw part, the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-draw performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-draw performance, and the first re-draw performance is a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect,
At a specific timing in the latter half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect is switched to a brightness data table for making the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is made. and controlling the light emitting means by using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period.
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emission means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. do.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 266, when an image showing the stick controller 31A and a time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, no matter when the stick controller 31A is operated, a period of time for the symbols to shake to absorb the scale may be provided in the time until the specified timing when the re-selection performance is executed (the symbol shaking period from (K4)). Then, when the specified timing arrives and the re-selection performance is executed, a common performance accompanied by a white-out as shown in (K8) to (K17) may be executed. In this way, no matter when the stick controller 31A is operated, the symbols are first displayed shaking, then the common performance accompanied by a white-out is executed, and then the re-selection performance is executed. This makes it possible to prevent discomfort from occurring in the pattern movement at the start of the re-selection, and makes the series of performances look good.

(F2020-005)
(16) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and a part after the result/informative part is notified. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which a first dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a first dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a second dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a second dialogue sound uttered by the character;
In the specific scene, while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, the second dialogue subtitle is started to be displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed. This is the state where
A fade effect is applied at least either when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends or when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts.

Specifically, in the provocative part, as shown in FIG. 178(A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed over the lines of a character. When subtitles are displayed, there is a period during which the display period of a first subtitle that is displayed first and the display period of a second subtitle that is displayed next are displayed so as to overlap. When the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap, a fade effect is applied. The fade effect causes a change in the transparency of the displayed characters to differ. With this, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the fade effect makes the change in the subtitles easier to see, making it easier to see the change in subtitles.

(F2020-006)
(17) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the control will be made to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the result of the control being made to the advantageous state is notified, and a part after the result is notified. and a first epilogue part in which the user is notified that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the control will not be made to the advantageous state is an introduction part until the result of the control being made to the advantageous state is notified, and after the result of the notification, and a second epilogue part in which the user is notified that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The display means includes:
In the second epilogue part, a display is made to inform the player that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state;
After that, the display will be switched,
Then, display the background.
After that, the pattern is displayed in a stopped state when the pattern confirmation command is issued.
After that, the display of the pattern changes in response to the change command.
The light emission control means
in the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means for effect using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
When the display switching is performed, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the display switching, and the light-emitting means for effect is controlled;
When the background display is performed, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the background display, and the light-emitting means for effect is controlled;
When the stop display of the pattern is performed, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the fourth pattern stop, the light emitting means for the fourth pattern is controlled, and the brightness data table corresponding to the background display is continued. using the light emitting means for effect control,
When the variable display of the pattern is started, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the fourth pattern variation to control the light emitting means for the fourth pattern, and the brightness data table corresponding to the background display is continued. The light emitting means for effecting the performance is controlled by using the light emitting means.

Specifically, the characteristic parts of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 when it is lost will be explained. The production screen is switched to the image when it is lost after the production of the winning or losing decision. After that, after the blackout display in which the losing display result is displayed, it is switched to the eye-catching screen. After that, it is switched to the normal screen and the screen in which the pattern is confirmed and stopped is displayed. Also, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table when the winning or losing is decided to the brightness data table when it is lost. After that, it is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching). After that, it is switched to the brightness data table of the background when the variation starts. Here, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen. Also, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table of the background at the timing of switching to the normal screen. Then, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 50 is switched from flashing to off by receiving the pattern confirmation command, but the brightness data table for the background is not switched even by receiving the pattern confirmation command. In addition, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 50 switches from off to flashing when the change pattern command for the next change is received, but the background brightness data table does not switch even when the pattern confirmation command is received. This means that the brightness data table switches to the background brightness data table when the eye-catching screen ends, and this brightness data table continues until the next change, so there is no need to create a separate brightness data table that corresponds to the reception of the pattern confirmation command, and the lamp effects can be displayed without any sense of incongruity from the effect when a miss occurs to the next change, making the series of effects look good.

[Start 1]
In the winning/losing notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and ends the effect display while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and displays a display corresponding to the scene after the switching;
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using the movable body movement brightness data table when the movable body advances to the second position, switches from the movable body movement brightness data table to a brightness data table corresponding to a post-switching scene while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and controls the light emission means using the brightness data table corresponding to the post-switching scene;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to the scene after switching while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 171 and FIG. 172, the action of the reel switches the action from the SP first half reach A to the SP second half reach A. Also, an effect image corresponding to the action of the reel is displayed according to the action of the reel falling. After that, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the reel action to the screen corresponding to the SP second half reach A while the reel is rising. Also, while the reel is rising, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table of the reel action part (child table WD8 shown in FIG. 202 described later) to the brightness data table of the SP second half reach A (child table WD9 shown in FIG. 204 and FIG. 205 described later). Also, while the reel is rising, a sound corresponding to the SP second half (for example, BGM for the SP second half) is output. Here, the effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed on the premise that the reel is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the second half of the SP before the reel has completed its return to its initial position, the aesthetics of the display can be avoided. Also, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the second half of the SP while the reel is returning to its initial position, the promotional part of the second half of the SP can be displayed optimally.

[Start 2]
Before the movable body is moved, a reduced image is displayed at a specific display position,
The movable body is moved so that the movable body covers a specific display position,
In response to the movement of the movable body, an effect corresponding to the movement of the movable body is displayed in a layer having priority over the display layer of the reduced-displayed pattern;
After the movable body starts to retreat and is no longer located at the specific display position, the effect display is switched to a display corresponding to the post-switching performance in which a reduced pattern is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 171 and FIG. 172, the action of the reel switches the action from the SP first half reach A to the SP second half reach A. Also, before the action of the reel, the "2" symbol is displayed in a reduced form in the lower left and right corners of the screen. When the reel is actuated, the reel falls so that the "P" character among the letters of the reel is positioned to a position where it overlaps with the location where the reduced "2" decorative symbol was displayed. Also, according to the action of the reel falling, an effect image corresponding to the action of the reel is displayed in a layer that is prioritized in front of the reduced "2" symbol. Then, after the reel rises from the drop position and the "2" symbol is in a position where it does not overlap with the reel, the effect image gradually fades and the background corresponding to the SP second half reach A and the "2" symbol are faintly displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the display from becoming unattractive due to the reduced decorative symbol being displayed during the action of the reel. Furthermore, the effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed on the assumption that the reel is in a position where it overlaps the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to its initial position, the display will not look aesthetically pleasing. Therefore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the latter half of the SP before the reel completes its return to its initial position, the aesthetics of the display can be prevented from being marred. Also, because a reduced decorative pattern is displayed while the reel is rising, it is possible to switch to an appropriate presentation according to the reel action.

[Start 3]
The movable body moves, and an effect display is performed before the movable body reaches the specific display position.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 171, the reel operates and displays the effect image before it reaches the bottom of the drop. This allows the reduced decorative pattern to be hidden early, resulting in a suitable switching of effects that incorporate the reel.

[Start 4]
When switching from the effect display to the display of the developed performance, the effect display is switched using an image related to the movable body.

Specifically, an image related to the prop may be displayed when switching from an effect image to an image of the performance that develops into the latter half. Specifically, in the scenes corresponding to FIG. 172 (h7) to (h10), when the prop rises, the letters "POWER II" and images of the main characters Yume Yume, Jam, and Nana may be displayed. In this way, by linking the performance change, it is possible to show a suitable change in performance involving the prop.

[Start 5]
There is a shielding display that makes the display invisible by going through a closing operation to a closed state, and makes the display visible by performing an opening operation after the closed state,
The occlusion display can be performed at a timing related to the introduction part,
When the obscuring display performs a closing operation, the brightness of the effect display decreases as the area in which the effect display is visible becomes smaller,
When the shielding display performs an opening operation, the brightness of the performance display increases as the area in which the performance display is visible becomes larger.

Specifically, the shutter described above is an image that, when closed, makes the image of the performance being performed in the background invisible, and when opened after closing, makes the image of the performance being performed visible. The shutter is also executed at a timing related to the teasing part, that is, before the start of the teasing part. When the shutter is closing, the screen brightness is lowered as the area in which the performance is visible becomes narrower, and when the shutter is opening, the screen brightness is increased as the area in which the performance is visible becomes wider. This makes the closing and opening of the shutter more realistic, making the flow of the performance look favorable. Note that, although the image of the shutter is used to make the image of the performance being performed in the background invisible or visible, it may be an image other than a shutter, or a similar performance may be executed using a prop.

[Start 6]
An image corresponding to the blocking display has a shape in which doors close from both ends of the screen in the center of the screen, or a shape in which doors close from one end of the screen to the other end.

Specifically, the shutters described above are configured to close from the top and bottom edges of the screen toward the center of the screen. This allows the effect of gradually changing screen brightness to be displayed in an optimal way. The shutters may also be configured to close from both ends of the screen toward the center, like a sliding door. The shutters may also be configured to close from the top edge of the screen toward the bottom edge of the screen.

[Start 7]
In the occlusion display, the edges of the opposing doors that make the performance display invisible are colored black.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 above, the image of the edge of the shutter is rendered in black. This makes it possible to blur the boundary between the effect executed when the screen brightness is low and the edge of the shutter just before the shutter is completely closed as shown in FIG. 58 (a12), eliminating any sense of incongruity. Similarly, it is possible to eliminate any sense of incongruity when the shutter begins to open as shown in FIG. 60 (a16).

[Start 8]
After the blocking display undergoes a closing operation and then an opening operation, a display corresponding to the introduction part is displayed.
A display corresponding to the introduction part is performed during an intermediate stage in which the shielding display is being released, and the brightness of the display corresponding to the introduction part increases stepwise, while the display corresponding to the introduction part does not progress until the release operation of the shielding display is completed, and the display corresponding to the introduction part starts to progress after the release operation of the shielding display is completed.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 60 and 61 above, after the shutter opens, the SP first half reach begins. Until the shutter is fully open, the SP first half reach effect does not begin, and the screen brightness gradually increases, and after the shutter is opened, the SP first half effect progresses. In this way, since the SP first half reach effect is an effect that players want to pay attention to, it is possible to prevent dissatisfaction by having the effect executed before the shutter opens.

[Start 9]
When the release operation of the shielding display is completed, the light emitting means is turned off.
After the release operation of the masking display is completed and one frame of image is displayed, the display corresponding to the introductory part progresses and the light emitting means starts emitting light.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, in child table WD1 of the start part, the frame lamp goes out when the shutter is fully open, so the timing when the shutter is fully open can be clearly communicated to the player by the lighting state of the frame lamp. Also, the provocative part of SP first half reach A and the provocative part of SP first half reach B, which are executed after the start part, start with the shutter fully open and the frame lamp off, and the frame lamp starts to light up or flash based on the brightness data table corresponding to each SP first half reach. In this way, after the shutter is fully open and the frame lamp goes out, the frame lamp starts to light up in accordance with the progress of the performance in the SP first half reach, so it is possible to clearly communicate to the player that the SP first half reach has started.

[Start 10]
The performance display starts to go dark before the closing operation of the shielding display starts, and the closing operation ends in time with the performance display going completely dark.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 57(a9) described above, the screen brightness is first lowered before the shutter starts to close, and the shutter is fully closed in time for it to close. Here, if the screen brightness were lowered in time with the shutter closing, there is a risk that the screen will darken too quickly. Therefore, by starting to lower the screen brightness in advance, the screen will darken at an appropriate speed, making the series of effects look optimal.

[Start 11] (2019-1944)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an execution part when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified. and an epilogue part in which
The display means can perform a shielding display in which the effect display is made invisible by going through a closing operation to a closed state, and the effect display is made visible by performing an opening operation after the closed state. can be,
The occlusion display is performed at a timing related to the introduction part,
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means by using a brightness data table for the shielding display when performing the shielding display;
The brightness data table for the shielding display is configured so that the brightness data is switched when the shielding display performs a closing operation, and the brightness data is not switched during the period from when the shielding display is in the closed state until when the shielding display performs an opening operation. It is composed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, in child table WD1 of the start part, during times ta1-ta12 before the shutters are completely closed, the brightness data is switched so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks while changing color and brightness, such as background yellow, flashing red, flashing white, and lighting red, whereas during times ta13-ta18 after the shutters are completely closed, the brightness data is maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining a reduced brightness. In this way, the lighting state of the frame lamp before the shutters closes enhances the presentation in the start part, and by maintaining the lighting state of the frame lamp when the shutters are closed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the content of the presentation when the shutters open, and as a result, the presentation in the subsequent teasing part can be better viewed by the player.

[Start 12]
The performance display includes a display before the introduction part starts and a display during the introduction part,
During the start part, while a display corresponding to a predetermined effect is being performed, the blocking display performs a closing operation, and then the blocking display performs an opening operation, thereby starting the introduction part;
There are a plurality of types of introduction parts, and it is not possible to know which introduction part is to be executed until the operation of releasing the shielding display is completed.

Specifically, the player is not able to know which SP first half reach will start until the aforementioned shutter opens. This allows the player to have hope of which performance will be executed.

[Start 13]
The shielding display may also be performed at times other than the timing of the transition to the introduction part.

Specifically, the shutter effect described above may be executed at a timing other than the timing of development into the first half of the SP. For example, it may be executed from the second re-fluctuation to the third re-fluctuation in a pseudo consecutive win. Also, when the shutter closes and then opens, an icon image (for example, a green hold image) may be displayed that suggests a change in the active hold, which is the hold display for that fluctuation, and the active hold may change in response to that icon image (for example, changing from blue to green). Also, the shutter effect may be executed at the timing of development from the first half of the SP reach to the second half of the SP reach. This can increase the interest of the shutter effect.

[Start 14]
The timing at which the luminance data is maintained is the timing at which the closing operation of the shielding display is completed, the timing at which a predetermined period has elapsed since the closing operation of the shielding display is completed, or the timing related to the closing operation of the shielding display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, in child table WD1 of the start part, during times ta1-ta12 before the shutters are completely closed, the brightness data is switched so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks while changing color and brightness, such as background yellow, flashing red, flashing white, and lighting red, whereas during times ta13-ta18 after the shutters are completely closed, the brightness data is maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining a reduced brightness. In this way, the lighting state of the frame lamp before the shutters closes enhances the presentation in the start part, and by maintaining the lighting state of the frame lamp when the shutters are closed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the content of the presentation when the shutters open, and as a result, the presentation in the subsequent teasing part can be better viewed by the player.

[Start 15]
The period during which the brightness data is maintained is the period from when the shielding display becomes closed until the release action is taken, or the period from when the shielding display becomes closed until a prompting display is taken to encourage the player to take an action.

Specifically, in addition to the pattern described above where the shutter closes and then automatically opens, a pattern may be provided where the shutter closes and then a button image is displayed, and the shutter opens when the button is operated. This provides multiple types of shutter effects, which increases the interest of the shutter effects.

[Start 16]
At the timing when the blocking display becomes the closed state and the promotion display is performed, the maintained luminance data is switched to the changing luminance data, and after the promotion display is performed, the luminance data is switched back to the maintained luminance data.

Specifically, in a performance using a shutter display as shown in FIG. 58 and FIG. 59, after the shutter is displayed in a closed state, a prompting display is displayed to prompt the player to perform an action (for example, pressing a button, placing a hand over an infrared sensor, etc.), and when the player's action corresponding to the prompting display is detected, a performance in which the shutter opens may be performed. Then, while such a shutter display is in a closed state, lamp control is performed based on a brightness data table in which the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 (for example, a frame lamp) is maintained, while at the timing when the shutter display is in a closed state and the prompting display is performed, the brightness data table is switched to one in which the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 changes, and lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table, and after the prompting display is performed (while the prompting display is continuing), lamp control may again be performed based on a brightness data table in which the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained. Note that the brightness data table for maintaining the lighting state used again after the prompting display is performed may be the same as or different from the brightness data table for maintaining the lighting state used before the prompting display is performed. This keeps the game effect lamp 9 lit while the shutter display is in the closed state, making it easier for the player to focus on the next performance that will be performed after the shutter display is in the open state.

[Start 17]
The prompting display is a display including a button image and prompting text for encouraging the player to take an action.
When a promotion character is displayed, a sound corresponding to the promotion character is output, and luminance data is incorporated such that the luminance data changes in association with the sound.

Specifically, in the performance using the shutter display as shown in FIG. 58 and FIG. 59, after the shutter is displayed in a closed state, a prompting display is displayed to prompt the player to take an action (for example, pressing a button, holding a hand over an infrared sensor, etc.), and when the player's action corresponding to the prompting display is detected, the shutter may be opened. In the prompting display, a sound (for example, the sound "push") that prompts the player to take an action may be output, and text (for example, the text "push") that prompts the player to take an action may be displayed. Furthermore, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 may be performed based on a brightness data table that changes the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 (for example, a frame lamp) in response to the sound that prompts the player to take an action. In this way, the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 changes in response to the sound that prompts the player to take an action, so that the text display that prompts the player to take an action can be emphasized by the sound that prompts the player to take an action and the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9, and the player can be made to take an action corresponding to the prompting display more effectively.

[Incitement 1]
The introduction part is
This is the part until the result of controlling the game to an advantageous state is notified.
The game includes scenes in which the display is updated as friendly characters and enemy characters fight, and scenes in which friendly characters take damage.
The display switching interval is faster than in the epilogue part.
There are more display changes than in the epilogue part.

Specifically, the provocation part, which involves the aforementioned provocation of whether or not the player will win, is updated with an alternating battle between friendly and enemy characters (for example, SP first half reach B and SP second half reach B). Such provocation parts include scenes in which friendly characters take damage. Also, the image display switching intervals in such provocation parts are faster than in epilogue parts, and the number of image display switches is greater. Thus, by making the provocation part develop faster than the epilogue part, the provocation part can be made to look good.

[Incitement 2]
In the introductory part, first, the dialogue sound of an ally character is output, and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63(b5) and the like, in the provocative part, the first thing the ally character says is a line, and subtitles corresponding to that line are displayed. This allows the ally character to be easily recognized in the provocative part.

[Incitement 3]
In the introductory part, the display duration of the first dialogue subtitle is set to be longer.

Specifically, the subtitle display of the first friendly character to be displayed may be set to be displayed for a longer period of time than the subtitle display in other scenes in the teasing part. This allows the friendly character to be clearly recognized.

[Incitement 4]
There are scenes in which the dialogue sounds of friendly characters are output but the dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67 (b17) and the like, there are scenes where subtitles are not displayed when an ally character speaks a line. This allows the screen display to be more suitable than if subtitles were displayed for all lines, while still displaying the subtitles for the ally character that is displayed first.

[Incitement 5]
It may be expanded from the first introduction part to the second introduction part,
In both the first and second introduction parts, the friendly characters play an active role.
In the first introduction part, the dialogue sound of an ally character is output first, and the dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.
In the second introduction part, first, the dialogue sound of an ally character is output, and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, in the aforementioned provocation part, there are SP First Half Reach A and SP First Half Reach B as the first provocation part executed in the first half, and SP Second Half Reach A, SP Second Half Reach B, and SP Final Reach as the second provocation part executed in the second half. Furthermore, there are scenes in which ally characters play an active role in both the first and second provocation parts. Furthermore, in both provocation parts, the first thing an ally character says is a line, and subtitles corresponding to that line are displayed. This allows the ally characters to be easily recognized in both provocation parts.

[Incitement 6]
In the first introductory part, the first character plays an active role.
In the second introductory part, the second character plays an active role.
In the first introduction part, a line sound of a first character is output first, and a line subtitle corresponding to the line sound is displayed;
In the second introduction part, the dialogue sound of the second character is output first, and the dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, in the aforementioned provocation part, in the provocation part corresponding to the SP first half reach B, Yume Yume's character plays an active role, and in the provocation part corresponding to the SP second half reach B, Jam and Nana's characters play an active role. In the SP first half reach B, the first ally character, Yume Yume, speaks a line, and subtitles corresponding to said line are displayed. In the SP second half reach B, the first ally characters, Jam and Nana, speak a line, and subtitles corresponding to said line are displayed. This allows the ally characters to be appropriately recognized in both provocation parts. Note that there may be one or more characters playing an active role. Also, the character playing an active role in the first half provocation part and the second half provocation part may be the same.

[Incitement 7]
The introduction part is
A scene in which a character's dialogue sound is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed;
a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed;
The brightness data table used in a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and no dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is displayed is configured so that brightness data using an emission color corresponding to the character is switched in response to the action of the character.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 168 to 170, there are scenes in the teasing part where a character speaks lines but no subtitles are added (for example, scenes r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35). In these specific scenes, sounds that are difficult to express in subtitles are output as lines, so the setting is such that subtitles are not displayed. However, even in these specific scenes, the brightness data of the game effect lamp 9 (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to the character. In this way, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed for the dialogue sounds. This allows the effect corresponding to the character to be executed appropriately, and the teasing part can be shown to the player in an appropriate manner. Also, as shown in Fig. 64 (b8), (b9), Fig. 74 (e7), Fig. 94 (i32), Fig. 95 (i34), Fig. 104 (n10), Fig. 123 (r25), (r27), Fig. 124 (r29), Fig. 125 (r31), (r33), and Fig. 126 (r35), even when a character has a line but no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to appropriately express that the character is speaking by the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 even in a scene where there is no subtitle display, and allows the player to appropriately see the performance in the provocative part.

[Incitement 8]
In a scene in which a character appears, the light emitting means emits light in a color other than the color corresponding to the character.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 168 to 170, in scenes in which a character appears (for example, r24, r26, r28, r30, r32, r34), control is performed to light up the game effect lamp 9 in a color other than the color corresponding to the relevant character in the previous scene. Specifically, before scene (r24), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in yellow (r22) or red (r23), and then lights up in orange corresponding to the AD character. Also, before scene (r26), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in orange (r25) or white (r25'), and then lights up in blue corresponding to the maid A character. Also, before the scene (r28), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in blue (r27) or white (r27'), and then lights up in Hawaiian blue corresponding to the character Maid B. Also, before the scene (r30), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in Hawaiian blue (r29) or white (r29'), and then lights up in pink corresponding to the character Nana. Also, before the scene (r32), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in pink (r31) or white (r31'), and then lights up in purple corresponding to the character Jam. Also, before the scene (r34), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple (r33) or white (r33'), and then lights up in green corresponding to the character Yume Yume. In this way, before a character appears, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to light up in a color different from the color corresponding to the character, and then the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to light up in the color corresponding to that character. Therefore, the change in the displayed character and the fact that the changed character is clearly indicated to the player can be expressed by the form of the lamp, making it a suitable provocation part.

[Incitement 9]
The light emitting means emits light in a color corresponding to a character located on one side of the screen, and the light emitting means emits light in a color corresponding to a character located on the other side of the screen.

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 64 (b8), (b9), Fig. 74 (e7), Fig. 94 (i32), Fig. 95 (i34), Fig. 104 (n10), Fig. 123 (r25), (r27), Fig. 124 (r29), Fig. 125 (r31), (r33), and Fig. 126 (r35), even when a character is speaking but there are no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to appropriately express that the character is speaking through the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 even in scenes where there are no subtitles displayed, and allows the player to appropriately see the performance in the provocative part.

[Incitement 10] (2019-1930)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is to be performed after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The introduction part is
a first scene in which a first character and a second character are displayed and a line sound uttered by the first character is output;
a second scene in which a first character and a second character are displayed and a line sound uttered by the second character is output;
The light emission control means
In the first scene, a light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table corresponding to the first scene;
In the second scene, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table corresponding to the second scene;
the luminance data table corresponding to the first scene is configured such that when luminance data, in which the light-emitting means on the side where a first character is displayed among the plurality of light-emitting means has a light emission color corresponding to the first character and the light-emitting means on the side where a second character is displayed among the plurality of light-emitting means has a light emission color corresponding to the second character, is switched in response to a line sound uttered by the first character, the luminance of the light-emitting means on the side where the first character is displayed among the plurality of light-emitting means switches, but the luminance of the light-emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed among the plurality of light-emitting means does not switch;
The luminance data table corresponding to the second scene is configured so that when the luminance data, in which the light-emitting means on the side where the first character is displayed among the plurality of light-emitting means has a light color corresponding to the first character and the light-emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed among the plurality of light-emitting means has a light color corresponding to the second character, is switched in response to the dialogue sound uttered by the second character, the luminance of the light-emitting means on the side where the first character is displayed among the plurality of light-emitting means does not switch but the luminance of the light-emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed among the plurality of light-emitting means is switched.

Specifically, when a character appears, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to the character, and when the character speaks, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp flashes in a color corresponding to the character. For example, in response to a performance in which Yume Yume-chan, located on the left side of the screen, and Bakuchu, located on the right side of the screen, face each other as shown in FIG. 63 (b4), the frame left lamp is lit in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan, and the frame right lamp is lit in red corresponding to Bakuchu. At time tb5, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame left lamp in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan, in response to a performance in which Yume Yume-chan, located on the left side of the screen, speaks a line as shown in FIG. 63 (b5). At time tb6, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu, in response to a performance in which Bakuchu, located on the right side of the screen, speaks a line as shown in FIG. 63 (b6). This allows the player to conveniently see which character is speaking in a scene in which multiple characters are displayed, by lighting/flashing the frame lamp, and allows the player to easily see the effects of the provocative part.

[Incitement 11]
In a state in which the first character and the second character are displayed, dialogue subtitles are displayed in each of a scene in which the dialogue sound of the first character is output and a scene in which the dialogue sound of the second character is output, and the dialogue subtitles are displayed in a fixed font and at a fixed position.

Specifically, as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 63 (b5) and (b6), there are scenes in which friendly and enemy characters are displayed and each character speaks lines. In such a situation, the subtitle display for the lines is a fixed size and is displayed at a fixed display position. In this way, by not changing the display mode of the lines for each character, it is possible to reduce the opportunities for bugs to occur.

[Incitement 12]
In the introduction part, there is a specific scene in which the character's dialogue sound and the action sound corresponding to the character's action are output,
In the specific scene, the dialogue sounds are outputted louder than the action sounds.

Specifically, in the titillation part, the background music for the SP reach is output, and there are scenes where dialogue sounds and physical sounds (also called operation sounds) are output at the same time they overlap. When dialogue sounds and physical sounds are output at the same time, the dialogue sounds are output at a louder volume than the physical sounds when output from speakers 8L, 8R. In this way, the realism of the presentation is brought out by outputting the physical sounds as part of the presentation, while the content of the presentation can be more easily conveyed to the player by outputting the dialogue sounds at a louder volume when the dialogue sounds and physical sounds overlap. As a result, the presentation in the titillation part can be made to look better.

[Incitement 13]
Various sounds such as background music, action sounds, sound effects, and dialogue sounds are output in accordance with the performance in the introductory part.
During the design stage, various sounds are output together with displays corresponding to the performances performed in the introductory part, and the volume of the various sounds is adjusted.

Specifically, the work process when actually creating various effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. First, images for each effect corresponding to variable times such as SP reach are created in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Sound effects such as background music, physical sounds, onomatopoeia, sound effects, and dialogue sounds are added one by one using dedicated software to match this image. The completed image and sound are played, and the volume of the sound is then adjusted. In this series of work processes, the sound data is set so that, rather than outputting the sound with the same realism as the actual sense of distance on the image, the reality is abandoned and a sound that ignores the actual sense of distance is output, which is more easily conveyed to the player. This allows the series of effects to be presented in an optimal way.

[Incitement 14]
When the output of an action sound and a dialogue sound corresponding to one character overlap, the volume of the dialogue sound is adjusted so that it is louder than the volume of the action sound.

Specifically, when a character's physical sound and dialogue sound are output together, the dialogue sound is adjusted so that it sounds louder than the physical sound. For example, when a physical sound and dialogue sound are output together, as shown in FIG. 166(B), the background music for the SP reach is adjusted to be quieter to match the output period of the dialogue sound. In this way, it is possible to convey the content of the presentation to the player more easily while still creating a sense of realism.

[Incitement 15]
When the dialogue sound output of a first character, which is far away, overlaps with the action sound output of a second character, which is close, when viewed from the front of the screen, the volume is adjusted so that the dialogue sound volume is louder than the action sound volume.

Specifically, when the dialogue sound of a character that the player feels is far away overlaps with a physical sound that the player feels is close, the sound data is set so that the dialogue sound sounds louder than the physical sound. This discards realism and outputs sounds that ignore the actual sense of distance that is easily conveyed to the player, making it easier for the player to understand the content of the presentation.

[Incitement 16]
In a case where the output of the operation sound and the dialogue sound overlap and the subtitles are not displayed, and a case where the output of the operation sound and the dialogue sound overlap and the subtitles are displayed, the volume is adjusted so that the volume of the dialogue sound with the subtitles displayed is larger than the volume of the dialogue sound with the subtitles not displayed.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 166 (B) and (C), when the dialogue sound overlapping with the physical sound has subtitles compared to when the dialogue sound overlapping with the physical sound does not have subtitles, the dialogue sound with subtitles is adjusted to sound louder by lowering the volume of the BGM for the SP reach. The dialogue sound with subtitles is more related to the content of the SP reach than the dialogue sound without subtitles. Therefore, by outputting the dialogue sound with subtitles, which is related to the content of the SP reach, louder, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the presentation.

[Incitement 17] (2019-1933)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table configured with luminance data in accordance with time data set in a higher-level table;
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The luminance data table includes a specific luminance data table,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is to be performed after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The light emission control means
In a first scene in the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a first upper table and a specific luminance data table;
In a second scene in the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a second upper table and a specific luminance data table;
The specific luminance data table used in the first scene in the introduction part and the specific luminance data table used in the second scene in the introduction part are a common luminance data table,
the specific luminance data table is configured with a plurality of luminance data, and configured so that the total time during which each of the plurality of luminance data is used is a specific time;
the first higher level table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a first time period longer than the specific time period;
The second higher-level table is made up of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a second time period that is longer than the specific time period.

Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at multiple different timings in one child table used in the hype part, lighting the frame lamp in yellow at multiple different timings, while varying the time for which the grandchild table W3 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, thereby changing the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow. In this way, without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different timings in one child table WD9, the common grandchild table W3 is used while changing the reference time, thereby reducing the data capacity used for lamp control and varying the time for which the frame lamp is lit in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

[Incitement 18] (2019-1934)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table configured with luminance data in accordance with time data set in a higher-level table;
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The luminance data table includes a specific luminance data table,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is to be performed after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The light emission control means
In a first scene in the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a first upper table and a specific luminance data table;
In a second scene in the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a second upper table and a specific luminance data table;
The specific luminance data table used in the first scene in the introduction part and the specific luminance data table used in the second scene in the introduction part are a common luminance data table,
the specific luminance data table is configured with a plurality of luminance data, and configured so that the total time during which each of the plurality of luminance data is used is a specific time;
The first higher-level table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a specific period of time,
The second higher-level table is made up of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a predetermined time period shorter than the specific time period.

Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at multiple different timings in one child table used in the promotion part, thereby flashing the frame lamp in white at multiple different timings, while varying the time for which the grandchild table W4 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, making it possible to set the number of times the frame lamp flashes in white to two or three times. This makes it possible to vary the number of white flashes while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W4 but changing the reference time without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

[Incitement 19] (2019-1935)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table configured with luminance data in accordance with time data set in a higher-level table;
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The luminance data table includes a specific luminance data table,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is to be performed after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
The light emission control means
In one scene of an introduction part in a first notification performance, the light emitting means is controlled by using a first higher level table and a specific brightness data table;
In one scene of the introduction part in the second notification performance, the light emitting means is controlled using a second higher level table and a specific brightness data table;
The specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the first notification performance and the specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the second notification performance are a common luminance data table,
the specific luminance data table is configured with a plurality of luminance data, and configured so that the total time during which each of the plurality of luminance data is used is a specific time;
the first higher-level table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a first time period longer than the specific time period;
The second higher level table is made up of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a second time period longer than the specific time period.

Specifically, in each of child table WD9 used in the provocation part of SP second half reach A, child table WD12 used in the provocation part of SP second half reach B, and child table WD15 used in the provocation part of SP final reach, a common grandchild table W3 is used but its reference time is changed without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings, so that the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach can be changed while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control in multiple reach performances. Similarly, in child table WD2 used in the provocation part of SP first half reach A and child table WD5 used in the provocation part of SP first half reach B, a common grandchild table W3 is used but its reference time is changed without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings, so that the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach can be changed while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control.

[Incitement 20] (2019-1936)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table configured with luminance data in accordance with time data set in a higher-level table;
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The luminance data table includes a specific luminance data table,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is to be performed after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
The light emission control means
In one scene of the introduction part in the first notification performance, the light emitting means is controlled by using a first higher level table and a specific brightness data table;
In one scene of the introduction part in the second notification performance, the light emitting means is controlled using a second higher level table and a specific brightness data table;
The specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the first notification performance and the specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the second notification performance are a common luminance data table,
the specific luminance data table is configured with a plurality of luminance data, and configured so that the total time during which each of the plurality of luminance data is used is a specific time;
The first higher-level table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a specific period of time,
The second higher-level table is made up of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a predetermined time period shorter than the specific time period.

[Incitement 21]
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which a first dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a first dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a second dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a second dialogue sound uttered by the character;
In a specific scene, while a first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, a second dialogue subtitle is started to be displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed;
A fade effect is applied at least either when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends or when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts.

Specifically, in the provocative part, as shown in FIG. 178(A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed over the lines of a character. When subtitles are displayed, there is a period during which the display period of a first subtitle that is displayed first and the display period of a second subtitle that is displayed next are displayed so as to overlap. When the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap, a fade effect is applied. The fade effect causes a change in the transparency of the displayed characters to differ. With this, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the fade effect makes the change in the subtitles easier to see, making it easier to see the change in subtitles.

[Incitement 22]
In a provocative scene where multiple characters confront each other,
When a line sound of one character is output, a first subtitle corresponding to the line sound is displayed, and thereafter, when a line sound of the other character is output, a second subtitle corresponding to the line sound is displayed;
The second subtitle is displayed at a transparency of 50% so as to overlap the portion where the first subtitle is displayed at a transparency of 0%, and thereafter, when the second subtitle is displayed at a transparency of 0%, the display of the first subtitle is terminated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 178(A), in a scene where characters confront each other, a first subtitle corresponding to the lines of one character may be displayed, followed by a second subtitle corresponding to the lines of another character. In this case, the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 70% and overlaps the first subtitle displayed with a transparency of 0%. The first subtitle then fades out and the second subtitle fades in, displaying with a transparency of 0%. This makes it easy to tell when the subtitles are switching, due to the fade effect, even when the subtitles are displayed overlapping each other.

[Incitement 23]
The dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is
When the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap each other and at least one of them has a fade effect applied, the subtitle is not output.
It is output when only the secondary subtitle is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 179, the output timing of the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle "Found" is such that the first and second subtitles are displayed overlapping each other and are not output during the period when the fade effect is applied. The dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is output from the time when the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 0%. In this way, the fade effect makes it easy to see when the subtitles change, and since the dialogue sound is output after the second subtitle is displayed, the content of the production can be easily understood both visually and aurally.

[Incitement 24]
In the advantageous state, music is output and lyrics are displayed.
When the display of the lyrics is switched from the first subtitle to the second subtitle, no fade effect is applied to either subtitle display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 178 (B), during the jackpot round, a performance in which a character sings along with the music is executed. Then, subtitles (lyrics) are displayed as the song progresses. However, during the jackpot round, no fade effect is applied, even if the subtitles (lyrics) are displayed continuously. This is because, since the progression of the music can be understood from the rhythm while the music is playing, it is easy to understand the timing of the change in the subtitles (lyrics) even if the fade effect is not applied. Also, since the music during the jackpot round is a representative piece of content installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the player can easily understand the lyrics to be displayed next even without the fade effect. This makes it possible to omit the task of applying the fade effect during the jackpot round, and makes it possible to show the series of performances clearly.

[Incitement 25]
In both the introduction and epilogue parts, the characters' lines may overlap.
The dialogue sounds overlap more frequently in the introduction part than in the epilogue part.

Specifically, although not shown, there are cases where the timing of subtitle display overlaps even in epilogue parts. However, as shown in FIG. 180, there are many scenes in epilogue parts where the period between subtitle display is longer than in teasing parts. This is because the performance progresses quickly in teasing parts, but not as quickly in epilogue parts. As a result, teasing parts are more likely to be displayed with overlapping subtitle displays than epilogue parts. In such cases, by effectively applying a fade effect to the subtitle display, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity when switching subtitles.

[Incitement 26]
Even in certain scenes where the subtitles do not overlap,
A fade effect is applied when the subtitles are displayed or when the display of the subtitles disappears.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 180, a fade effect is applied to the subtitle display even in certain scenes in the portions (o3) to (o5) where the first subtitle and the second subtitle do not overlap. The fade effect may be at least one of a fade-in and a fade-out. When the subtitle display is created after the video is created, it is time-consuming to apply fade effects depending on whether the subtitle display overlaps. Therefore, by applying a fade effect to the subtitle display uniformly, an increase in the workload can be prevented.

[Incitement 27]
The display of the first subtitle without the fade effect and the display of the second subtitle may be switched.
It is possible to provide a blank period in which nothing is displayed between the display of the first subtitle and the display of the second subtitle, but this would create an awkward feeling when long lines of dialogue or lines with a fast tempo are output, so such a blank period is not provided.

Specifically, FIG. 181 is a diagram for explaining a comparative example of subtitle display. For example, as shown in Comparative Example 1 of FIG. 181(A), subtitle displays for similar lines such as "I found it" and "I found it" may be displayed consecutively. In such a case, if the subtitle display is switched without any fade effect and without a blank period, it becomes difficult to understand the switching of the subtitle display. In addition, for subtitle displays for long lines or lines that progress quickly, there is a possibility that a sense of incongruity may occur when subtitles are switched without a blank period. In such a case, the sense of incongruity can be eliminated by applying a fade effect to the subtitle display. Also, as shown in Comparative Example 2 of FIG. 181(B), it is possible to overlap "I found it" with the subtitle display of "I found it" and then display "I found it". In such a case, it becomes difficult to see the subtitle display by not applying the fade effect. Also, as shown in Comparative Example 3 of FIG. 181(C), it is possible to display the subtitle display of "I found it" and the subtitle display of "I found it" in two rows, one above the other. In such cases, the display area for the effects is reduced by the subtitle display, which ends up interfering with the effects in areas other than the area where the subtitle display is displayed. By contrast, this embodiment of the invention solves this problem by adding a fade effect to the subtitle display.

[Provocative cut-in 1]
The display means is
In the introductory part, a prompt is displayed to encourage the player to perform a specific action, and when the player performs the specific action, a cut-in is displayed.
In the introductory part, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output, and a dialogue subtitle is displayed in a specific area of the display means in response to the dialogue sound;
At the timing when the promotion display is performed in the introduction part, the dialogue subtitles are not displayed in the specific area,
the luminance data table includes a luminance data table for cut-in display corresponding to the cut-in display, and a luminance data table for an introduction part corresponding to an introduction part,
The light emitting means for which luminance data is set in the luminance data table for cut-in display includes at least the same portions as the light emitting means for which luminance data is set in the luminance data table for the introduction part.

Specifically, the brightness data for the cut-in effects and the lamp control in the button displays for said cut-in effects (RGB data in grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) is designed to use the same frame lamps as the lamp control in the teasing part of the SP final reach. This prevents unnecessary lamps from lighting/flashing, etc., from mixing in and spoiling the aesthetic, and provides an ideal teasing part performance.

[Provocative cut-in 2]
Dialogue subtitles are displayed in the scene before the button promotion is performed.

Specifically, as shown in the above-mentioned FIG. 127 (r39) to FIG. 128 (r42), at the timing when the cut-in display is executed, the subtitle display is displayed before the button image promotion display is displayed. This allows the button image to continue to be shown to the player who is watching the screen and paying attention to the subtitle display, so that the button image is not overlooked, and the cut-in display can be executed optimally.

[Provocative cut-in 3]
At the timing when the cut-in display ends, the subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are not displayed, and after a period in which the dialogue sound is not output, the dialogue sound is output and the subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 128 (r41) to 130 (r47), the design is such that there is no dialogue for a predetermined period of time after the cut-in display is cleared. Then, after the predetermined period of no dialogue has elapsed, dialogue is spoken and subtitles are displayed for that dialogue. This allows the player to concentrate on the presentation during the period after the cut-in display, resulting in an ideal cut-in display.

[True or False 1]
In the part where the winner is notified,
The player is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state.
A prompt is displayed to encourage the player to take a specific action,
It is executed between the introduction and epilogue parts,
After the promotion display is performed, the movable body is moved.

Specifically, as shown in the above-mentioned FIG. 132 (r54), the scene where the win or loss was determined was between the teasing part and the epilogue part. Then, in the scene where the win or loss was determined, the player was notified of whether or not they had won the jackpot after operating a trigger as an operating means. Also, in the scene where the win or loss was determined, if a jackpot was reached, the reel moved after operating the trigger. This increases the interest of the presentation by creating an ideal scene where the win or loss was determined using the operating means.

[True or False 2]
In the winning/losing notification part that is executed after the introduction part,
When the introduction display of the promotion display is performed while the unfolded display is being performed before the promotion display is performed, the unfolded display becomes invisible, and then the promotion display is performed while the unfolded display is visible.

Specifically, as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 130 (r47) to 132 (r54), subtitles are displayed by ally characters before the image corresponding to the operating means is displayed, and then the effect that was being executed becomes invisible due to the screen corresponding to the operating means. Then, the effect that was being executed after that becomes recognizable together with the image of the operating means. In this way, the introduction of the operating means is displayed on the entire screen to create an impact, while the effect that was being executed is displayed properly when the operating means can be operated, making it possible to optimally show the progression of the effect.

[True or False 3]
The deployment display is shown behind the introduction display.

Specifically, as shown in the above-mentioned FIG. 130 (r48) to FIG. 131 (r51), the presentation is in progress even while the introductory images (images (r49) to (r50)) for enabling the operation of the operating means are displayed. In this way, by having the presentation proceed in the background, it is possible to draw attention to the image in which the operating means can be operated (image (r51)), and also to the development of the presentation.

[True or False 4]
The expansion display is performed while the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, in the above-mentioned Figures 132 (r51) to 132 (r54), when a trigger image was displayed as a promotion display, the tail of the Bakuchu image moved slightly each time the image changed. In this way, the performance may be allowed to progress while the promotion display is displayed. Here, the progression of the performance may not be limited to the tail moving, but may also include scene changes or character movements. This makes it possible to draw attention to the development of the performance during the promotion display.

[5 correct or not]
When an unfolding display is performed while a promotion is in progress, it proceeds slower than it did before the promotion was in progress.

Specifically, the presentation that progresses while the prompting display is displayed progresses slower than the presentation that was being executed before the prompting display was displayed. This allows the player to focus on the prompting display, which is intended to cause the player to operate the operating means, and a balance can be achieved between the prompting display and the presentation progress. Note that the presentation that progresses while the prompting display is displayed can be made to progress slower than the presentation that progresses while the introductory image is displayed. This allows a difference in the speed of presentation progress between when the prompting display is displayed and when the introductory image is displayed.

[True or False 6]
The dialogue before the introductory text is echoed.

Specifically, it is preferable to have an echo added to the lines that are spoken before the introductory image is displayed, as shown in FIG. 130 (r47) above. This will get the players excited before the introductory image is displayed.

[True or False 7]
The introduction display is performed after terminating the output of the dialogue sound that was displayed during the development display before the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 130 (r47) to 131 (r49), the introduction image is displayed after deleting the subtitles displayed before the introduction image is displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the timing of the introduction image and the subtitles from overlapping.

[True or False 8]
The introduction part is composed of a predetermined period and a slow motion period after the predetermined period and before the announcement of the result.
A character's movement is depicted using a plurality of image data during a predetermined period of time;
During the slow motion period, a single image data is provided with a special effect to depict the character's movement.

Specifically, the scene before the winning or losing decision of (r48) in the provocation part is a slow-motion period in which the movement of the image slows down. Also, while the performance executed before (r48) depicts the movement of the character from multiple image data, the performance executed in (r48) is executed using an image of Bakuchu and images of six allies. The images of the allied characters and the enemy characters are gradually enlarged over time to make the characters appear to be moving. Here, if the image is created during the slow-motion period using the same amount of image data as outside the slow-motion period, the amount of data will be small and the movements will be awkward. On the other hand, if a large amount of data is used to make the movements during the slow-motion period smooth, the capacity will become too large. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced by reducing the number of images used during the slow-motion period and making the characters appear to be moving by switching and enlarging the display. Note that the number of images used during the slow-motion period can be any number as long as it is smaller than the number of images used outside the slow-motion period.

[True or False 9]
The game has an introductory part where friendly and enemy characters appear, and a conclusion part after the introductory part.
The introduction section has a set period of time during which scenes showing allies and enemies alternate.
When the prompting display is being displayed during a predetermined period, the player can move on to the conclusion part,
During a predetermined period of time, the speed at which the scenes displaying the ally and the scenes displaying the enemy alternate is gradually increased, and the promotion display is performed when the speed reaches its fastest;
Even in depictions in which scenes showing allies and scenes showing enemies alternate, each of the allies and enemies is reproduced using a single image data.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 191(B), the speed at which the images of the ally character and the enemy character switch gradually becomes faster. In this way, a prompting display encouraging the player to operate the trigger is displayed after the image switching speed has reached its fastest, making it possible to tease the player as to whether a scene in which the ally character has an advantage or an enemy character has an advantage will unfold, increasing interest. In addition, by switching between images alternately, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that a single image is being used to represent both the ally character and the enemy character.

[10% correct]
The above-mentioned predetermined period during which the scene in which an ally is displayed and the scene in which an enemy is displayed are alternately switched over is also applied to a scene in which one reach effect develops into another reach effect.

Specifically, the slow motion period in (r48) may be performed at the timing when the SP first half reach develops into the SP second half reach, or into the SP final reach. This allows the performance to be performed appropriately even when developing from the SP first half reach.

[True or False 11]
An enemy character is depicted using a plurality of image data in order to change a portion of the enemy character, but the image data of the enemy character itself is reused and only that portion is changed.

Specifically, during the slow-motion period in (r48), at least one of the friendly and enemy characters may be constructed using two or more images. For example, for an friendly character, four images may be used repeatedly: image 1, image 2, image 3, image 4, image 1, ... to make the character's hair and clothes appear to move gradually. In this way, by reusing the data for the character itself and changing only some of the data, it is possible to more faithfully express the character's movements while reducing the amount of work required to change the data.

[True or False 12]
During the slow motion periods, parts of the characters change.

Specifically, when a character's hair or clothes are made to appear to move gradually from multiple images during a slow-motion period in (r48), the movement of the hair or clothes may be designed to appear to move at the same speed as during periods other than the slow-motion period. Here, if the number of images is increased to match the slow-motion movements in order to make the movements appear smoother during the slow-motion period, the capacity will increase. However, by speeding up the movements during the slow-motion period, the movements do not become awkward even if fewer images are used, and the movement can be more faithfully represented while reducing the data capacity.

[True or False 13]
During the period before the transition from the introduction part to the winning/losing part in the first notification performance,
The display means displays a prompting display for prompting a specific action by a player,
The sound output means continues to output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using the first notification performance luminance data table,
During the period before the transition from the introduction part to the winning/losing part in the second notification performance,
The display means does not display a prompting display for a specific action, but displays a winning or losing indicator,
The sound output means does not output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a second notification performance luminance data table,
The first notification performance luminance data table is configured so that the luminance data is switched,
The brightness data table for the second notification performance is configured so that the brightness data does not switch.

Specifically, in an SP reach performance where no operation prompt is given to encourage the player to operate at the win/loss branch, the sound is muted and the frame lamp is kept lit in white, making it appear to the player that the performance has stopped, and the win/loss branch (decisive timing) can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. On the other hand, in an SP reach performance where operation prompt is given to encourage the player to operate at the win/loss branch, a sound corresponding to the operation prompt or a sound (BGM) corresponding to the reach is output, and further, by switching the grandchild table multiple times to control the frame lamp to a mode corresponding to the operation prompt, the timing of the decision of the win/loss branch can be suitably presented by the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In this way, the timing of the decision of the win/loss branch can be suitably presented by different sound control and lamp control between when no operation prompt is given at the win/loss branch and when operation prompt is given.

[True or False 14]
When the promotion display is not performed, the display transitions in the order of a first display period consisting of a moving image, a second display period consisting of a still image, and a third display period consisting of a moving image that branches depending on whether the display is correct or not.

Specifically, from the aforementioned Fig. 95 (i36) to Fig. 96 (i39), the image in which the two characters Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan are displayed is gradually enlarged, and at the timing of (i39), one image is displayed still for a predetermined period of time. After that, if there is a big win, the video of the hit epilogue part is played, and if there is a loss, the video of the loss epilogue part is played. During the period in which one image is displayed still for a predetermined period of time, one image can be reused, so it is possible to reduce data capacity while ideally stirring up the scene of the win/loss decision. Note that during the period in which the image in which the two characters are displayed is gradually enlarged, more images (for example, 10 images) may be used as shown in Fig. 95 (i36) to Fig. 96 (i39).

[True or False 15]
A scenario for controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data when the promotion display is not performed is as follows:
a first scenario corresponding to a first display period;
a second scenario corresponding to a second display period; and
a third scenario corresponding to a third display period;
The first scenario is a scenario in which multiple luminance data are switched,
The second scenario is a scenario in which the predetermined luminance data is maintained;
The third scenario is a scenario in which a plurality of luminance data are switched.

Specifically, in child table WD9 in SP latter half Reach A, which is a reach without operation prompting, the frame lamp flashes in white based on grandchild table W7, and then lights up in white based on grandchild table W8. Specifically, in the win/loss branch in the provocation part of SP latter half Reach A where no operation prompting is performed, the brightness data (RGB data) of grandchild table W8 is designed to use "FDC" (white lighting), which is the last brightness data (RGB data) of grandchild table W7, so that the win/loss branch (decisive timing) can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner without increasing the data capacity used for lamp control too much.

[True or False 16]
When the promotion display is performed, the display transitions in the following order: a first display period in which an introductory display is performed before the promotion display is performed, a second display period consisting of moving images, and a third display period consisting of moving images that branches depending on whether the display is correct or not.

Specifically, from the aforementioned FIG. 131 (r49) to FIG. 132 (r54), there is a display period of an introductory image in which images corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) are displayed gathering in the center of the screen. After that, there is a period in which a prompting display for operating the trigger is displayed. During the display period of the prompting display, multiple images are gradually moved to make the character appear to be moving. After that, by operating the trigger at the branching scene for deciding whether or not to win, an image of the win epilogue part is played if it is a jackpot, and an image of the miss epilogue part is played if it is a miss. All of these periods are periods in which a dynamic display in which the images appear to be moving is displayed. This allows a series of performances to be executed within a dynamic flow, resulting in a favorable flow of performances.

[True or False 17]
A scenario for controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data when the promotion display is performed is as follows:
a first scenario corresponding to a first display period;
a second scenario corresponding to a second display period; and
a third scenario corresponding to a third display period;
The first scenario is a scenario in which multiple luminance data are switched,
The second scenario is a scenario in which multiple luminance data are switched.
The third scenario is a scenario in which a plurality of luminance data are switched.

Specifically, in child table WD15 in the SP final reach, as shown in Figure 131 (r49) to Figure 132 (r54), sounds corresponding to operation promotion and sounds (BGM) corresponding to the reach are output, and the frame lamps change in sequence from flashing white to lit red to flashing red, etc., enhancing the presentation of operations to encourage the player at the winning/losing branch (decisive timing).

[True or False 18]
Following on from the winning/losing announcement part,
When it has been determined that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state, a display for when it has been determined that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state is displayed, and then a display corresponding to the normal background is displayed.

Specifically, the winning epilogue part and losing epilogue part following the winning/losing determination scene shown in the above-mentioned Figures 133 (s1) to 136 (s10) and 137 (u1) to 138 (u4) will be explained. In the winning epilogue part, the image corresponding to the winning epilogue part is displayed after the performance of the reel action. In the losing epilogue part, the screen goes dark after the performance corresponding to the losing epilogue part and then returns to the normal screen. This allows for a flow of switching between multiple images following the winning/losing determination scene, which can be an ideal flow of performance.

[Right or Wrong 19] (2019-1937)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which the game is notified of the game being controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part;
in the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The luminance data used first in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part is set to a lower luminance than the luminance data used last in the luminance data table corresponding to the introduction part.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 261, when moving to the miss epilogue part via the teasing part in each of the SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the teasing part is "FDC", whereas the initial brightness data (RGB data) in the miss epilogue part is "888" or "444." As a result, when there is a miss in each of the SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B, the frame lamp can be lit in a dimmer white color while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting in the win/lose branch, so that the player can be appropriately notified that there has been a miss. Also, when moving to the loss epilogue part via the teasing part in the SP final reach, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the teasing part includes "D00", while the initial brightness data (RGB data) in the loss epilogue part is "888" or "444". This allows the frame lamp to light up in white when there is a loss in the SP final reach, which is darker than the red flashing in the win/lose branch, making it possible to conveniently notify the player that there has been a loss.

[Yes or No 20] (2019-1938)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance, and the first notification performance for notifying the fact that the control will be made to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the fact that the control will be made to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part for notifying the fact that the control will be made to the advantageous state,
The first notification performance for notifying the user that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the user is informed of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and an epilogue part for notifying the user that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state,
The second notification performance for notifying the user that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the user is informed of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and an epilogue part for notifying the user that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The second notification performance for notifying the user that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the user is informed of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and an epilogue part for notifying the user that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table configured with luminance data in accordance with time data set in a higher-level table;
The upper level table includes a first upper level table, a second upper level table, a third upper level table, and a fourth upper level table;
The luminance data table includes a luminance data table for a first notification performance, a luminance data table for a second notification performance, and a specific luminance data table,
The light emission control means
In an introduction part of a first notification performance for notifying that the advantageous state is not being controlled, the light emitting means is controlled using a first higher level table and a brightness data table for the first notification performance;
In an introduction part of a second notification performance for notifying that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state, the light emitting means is controlled using a second higher level table and a second notification performance brightness data table;
In an epilogue part of the first notification performance for notifying that the advantageous state is not being controlled, the light emitting means is controlled using a third higher-level table and a specific brightness data table;
In an epilogue part of the second notification performance for notifying that the advantageous state is not being controlled, the light emitting means is controlled using a fourth higher level table and a specific brightness data table;
The specific brightness data table used in the epilogue part in the first notification performance for notifying the user that the advantageous state will not be achieved and the specific brightness data table used in the epilogue part in the second notification performance for notifying the user that the advantageous state will not be achieved are a common brightness data table.
The third higher-level table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a first time period,
The fourth higher level table is made up of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a second time period different from the first time period.

Specifically, in child table WD4 of SP first half reach A, child table WD7 of SP first half reach B, child table WD11 of SP second half reach A, and child table WD14 of SP second half reach B, the frame lamps are lit in a lighting mode at the time of a miss based on the grandchild table W14, similar to child table WD17 of the SP final reach. However, while the performance control CPU 120 controls the frame lamps based on the grandchild table W14 for 5800 msec in the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, it controls the frame lamps based on the grandchild table W14 for 3900 msec in the SP final reach. In this way, while the grandchild table used for lamp control at the time of a miss is common between different reaches, the time for lamp control by referring to the grandchild table can be made different. This allows the child table used for each of the different reaches to use a common grandchild table W4 without preparing a grandchild table dedicated to when a win occurs for each of the different reaches, and by changing the reference time, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for lamp control while varying the time for which the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode corresponding to a loss. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of a loss in an appropriate manner for each of the different reaches.

[Right or Wrong 21] (2019-1939)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification effect to be executed when it is determined that the advantageous state is to be controlled is as follows:
A first pattern including an introduction part until the result of control to the advantageous state is notified, and a first epilogue part in which the result of control to the advantageous state is notified;
a second pattern including an introduction part until it is notified whether or not the advantageous state will be achieved, a second epilogue part in which it is notified that the advantageous state will not be achieved, and a relief notification part that is executed after the second epilogue part and in which it is notified that the advantageous state will be achieved;
The notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
In a second epilogue part in the second pattern of the notification performance, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
In a relief notification part in the notification performance of the second pattern, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table corresponding to the relief notification part;
The luminance data used first in the luminance data table corresponding to the relief notification part is set to be higher in luminance than the luminance data used last in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.

[Loser 1]
Following on from the winning/losing announcement part,
When it is determined that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state, an image for when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state is displayed, and an epilogue part for when the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state is executed, in which the determination that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state is notified by a decorative pattern;
Thereafter, the display is switched to an image corresponding to the background at the start of the reach.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 188, if the result is a loss after the win/loss determination, a loss symbol is displayed against a blackout background in the loss epilogue part. After that, a transition image based on the eye-catching screen is displayed, and then the screen switches to the normal background seen when a reach begins. This allows the eye-catching screen to optimally show the screen transition when a loss occurs.

[Loser 2]
In the epilogue part when a winning combination is lost, an image when it has been determined that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state is displayed in a blacked-out state, and the central pattern of the decorative pattern is displayed in a fade-in state.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, in the losing epilogue part, the background gradually blacks out when there is a loss, while the center pattern gradually fades in. This allows the image and center pattern when there is a loss to be displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between the blackout and the fade-in, so the relationship between the two makes the display when there is a loss look optimal.

[Loser 3] (2020-400)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which the game is notified of the game being controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
the display means displays a decorative pattern in the second epilogue part so as to become gradually clearer, and displays a display in the story development corresponding to the second epilogue part so as to become gradually darker, thereby displaying a notification that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state;
The number of stages by which the display in the story development corresponding to the second epilogue part is made darker is greater than the number of stages by which the decorative pattern is made clearer.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, in the losing epilogue part, the number of steps required to black out the background when losing from 100% to 0% transparency is greater than the number of steps required to fade in the center pattern from 100% to 0% transparency. Specifically, the background is blacked out in eight steps from (X11) to (X18), while the center pattern is faded in in six steps from (X12) to (X17). According to this, the image and center pattern when losing are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between the blackout and fade-in, and because the number of steps of the change in transparency are different, the relationship between the two makes the display when losing look favorable.

[Loss 4]
When it is determined that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state, the image is blacked out before the center pattern of the decorative pattern is faded in.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, when a winning combination is lost, the background blacks out before the center pattern fades in. This allows the image and center pattern when a winning combination is lost to be displayed in inverse proportion to the blackout and fade-in relationship, and because the blackout is faster than the pattern fades in, the relationship between the two makes the display when a winning combination is lost look favorable.

[Loss 5]
When it is decided that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state before the blackout, the cut of the displayed image changes,
When it has been determined that control will not be performed in an advantageous state during blackout, the cut of the displayed image does not change.

Specifically, the image displayed during a miss before the blackout changes, whereas the image displayed during the blackout remains unchanged. This allows the blackout to be viewed favorably by starting the blackout with an image that remains unchanged. Note that a change in image includes a change in the picture on the screen, a change in the angle of the image, and a change in the displayed scene itself. Furthermore, no change in the image includes the same still image, or even if it is a moving image, the angle of the image does not change, and even if there is movement, only part of the image moves very slightly.

[Loser 6]
The image when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state goes black, and the center pattern of the decorative pattern fades in, so that the transmittance of the center pattern becomes 0%, and the period during which the transmittance of one image required for blackout becomes 0% is maintained for a predetermined period of time.
In a predetermined period of time, the symbol itself is caused to oscillate for at least two periods,
The predetermined period is longer than the period during which the image of the middle pattern changes from a state of 100% transparency to a state of 0% transparency, and is longer than the period during which the switching display is performed.

Specifically, when the winning combination is lost, the background blacks out and the middle pattern fades in, resulting in a 0% transparency middle pattern and a 0% transparency blacked-out background being displayed for a predetermined period of time, as shown in (X18) to (X20). This predetermined period includes a pattern swing period as shown in (X19) to (X20). The pattern swing period may be repeated for at least two periods, with the middle pattern moving from the center position to the upper position, center position, lower position, and back to the center position as one period. The predetermined period including such a period may be set longer than the period during which the middle pattern fades in from a 100% transparency to a 0% transparency state. The predetermined period may also be set longer than the period during which the eye-catcher is displayed. This allows the winning combination to be displayed in a favorable manner, since the middle pattern is displayed clearly for a predetermined period of time in a display with a 0% transparency blacked-out background.

[Loser 7]
The switching display is a display that includes information about the gaming machine.

Specifically, as shown in Figs. 188 and 189, the eye-catching screen displays the title "POWER II" and images of the main characters Yume Yume, Jam, and Nana as information about the pachinko gaming machine 1. This allows the eye-catching image to accurately convey information about the pachinko gaming machine 1.

[Loser 8]
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the result of the game is notified, and a first epilogue part in which the game is notified of the fact that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state after the result of the game is notified,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the result of the game is notified, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state after the result of the game is notified,
The display means is
In the second epilogue part, a display is made to inform the player that the game is not controlled to an advantageous state;
After that, the display will be switched,
Then, display the background.
After that, the pattern is displayed in a stopped state when the pattern confirmation command is issued.
After that, the display of the pattern changes in response to the change command.
The light emission control means includes:
in the second epilogue part, controlling a light-emitting means for effecting the performance by using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
When the display is switched, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the display, thereby controlling the light-emitting means for the effect;
When the background display is performed, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the background display, and the light-emitting means for the effect is controlled;
When the stop display of the pattern is performed, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for the fourth pattern stop to control the light emitting means for the fourth pattern, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is continuously used to control the light emitting means for the performance;
When the variable display of the patterns is started, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table for the fourth pattern variation to control the light emitting means for the fourth pattern, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is continuously used to control the light emitting means for the performance.

Specifically, the characteristic parts of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 when it is lost will be explained. The production screen is switched to the image when it is lost after the production of the winning or losing decision. After that, after the blackout display in which the losing display result is displayed, it is switched to the eye-catching screen. After that, it is switched to the normal screen and the screen in which the pattern is confirmed and stopped is displayed. Also, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table when the winning or losing is decided to the brightness data table when it is lost. After that, it is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching). After that, it is switched to the brightness data table of the background when the variation starts. Here, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen. Also, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table of the background at the timing of switching to the normal screen. Then, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 50 is switched from flashing to off by receiving the pattern confirmation command, but the brightness data table for the background is not switched even by receiving the pattern confirmation command. In addition, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 50 switches from off to flashing when the change pattern command for the next change is received, but the background brightness data table does not switch even when the pattern confirmation command is received. This means that the brightness data table switches to the background brightness data table when the eye-catching screen ends, and this brightness data table continues until the next change, so there is no need to create a separate brightness data table that corresponds to the reception of the pattern confirmation command, and the lamp effects can be displayed without any sense of incongruity from the effect when a miss occurs to the next change, making the series of effects look good.

[No. 9]
The brightness data table corresponding to the background at the start of the reach is a table that loops and references the brightness data until the change condition is met,
In the introductory part, the luminance data corresponding to the background is not used, but the luminance data corresponding to the background is updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52, when a specific change condition is met, such as when the game progresses to an SP reach, the lamp control based on the background brightness data table is switched to the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the SP reach or other performance after the change, and thereafter, the lamp control based on the SP reach brightness data table is performed. In this case, while the SP reach performance is being performed, in the background of the lamp control based on the SP reach brightness data table, the switching of the brightness data in the background brightness data table continues without stopping as time passes. Also, when a specific change condition is met, such as when an error occurs, the lamp control based on the background brightness data table is switched to the error brightness data table corresponding to the error state, and thereafter, the lamp control based on the error brightness data table is performed. In this case, in the error state, in the background of the lamp control based on the error brightness data table, the switching of the brightness data in the background brightness data table continues without stopping as time passes. This makes it possible to make the series of performances that are being performed look more suitable.

[Loser 10]
After being switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introductory part, the luminance data table corresponding to the background is used even if a pattern determination command is received, and thereafter, when there is no reserved ball, the luminance data table corresponding to the background continues to be used even if a customer waiting command is received.

Specifically, after the brightness data table is switched to the background brightness data table when the eye-catching screen ends, the background brightness data table continues to be used even if there is no pending memory and a customer waiting demo designation command is received. This means that the same brightness data table can be used continuously after switching to the background brightness data table, so the lamp effects can be displayed without any sense of incongruity, and the series of effects can be displayed optimally.

[Loser 11]
When the pattern is confirmed, the light emitting means of the special pattern stops,
Upon receiving the symbol determination command, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol switches from flashing to off.

Specifically, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 switches from flashing to off when a symbol determination command is received, which is the trigger for the effect of the symbol being determined and stopped. This makes it possible to clearly show the player the flow of the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 when it loses.

[Loser 12]
When the next change begins, the light emitting means of the special chart flashes,
When the next variation command is received, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol changes from off to flashing.

Specifically, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 switches from off to flashing when a next variation pattern command is received, which is the trigger for the start of the next variation. This makes it possible to clearly show the player the flow of the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 when it loses.

[Loser 13] (2020-401)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which the game is notified of the game being controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The display means is
In the second epilogue part, a display is made to inform the player that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state;
After that, the display will be switched,
Then, display the background.
After that, the pattern is displayed in a stopped state when the pattern confirmation command is issued.
After that, the display of the pattern changes in response to the change command.
The light emission control means
in the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
when the display is switched, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the display is switched;
When the background display is performed, the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is continuously used to control the light emitting means;
When the stop display of the symbols is performed, the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is continuously used to control the light emitting means;
When the varying display of the patterns is started, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the varying display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the varying display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 190, the brightness data table for misses is used from the effect where the six friendly characters are disappointed at (X40) to the effect where the background image blacks out at (X41). After the background image blacks out, the eye-catching image is displayed. The brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used from the switching period to the eye-catching screen at (X42) to the pattern determination period at (X45). After that, when a variation pattern command is received when there is a hold, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for background. In other words, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen, and the brightness data table is maintained during the pattern determination period, and is switched to the brightness data table for the background at the timing of switching to the next variation. Also, during the pattern determination period, the final brightness data of the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used, which is the light-off. With this, after switching to the background brightness data table, the final brightness data in the switching (eye-catching) brightness data table is maintained until the next variation pattern command is received, making it easier to recognize a miss, and as a result, making the miss look favorable.

[Loser 14]
The final luminance data is off data, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introductory part does not include luminance data for maintaining the light off.

Specifically, the final brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is data for keeping the light off. The brightness data table for the background does not use data for keeping the light off. As a result, since the brightness data table for the background does not use brightness data for keeping the light off, being off when the background is displayed is unique to a miss, making it easier to recognize that it is a miss.

[Loser 15]
By receiving the customer waiting command, the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the customer waiting command.

Specifically, if there is no reserved memory after the design is confirmed, the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is switched to the brightness data table for background by receiving a customer waiting command. In this way, since the brightness data table for background is switched to by receiving a customer waiting command, it is easy to recognize that it is a miss.

[Loser 16] (2020-402)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance for notifying the user that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the user is informed of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part for notifying the user that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification performance for notifying the fact that the advantageous state will not be controlled includes an introduction part until the fact that the advantageous state will be controlled is notified, and a second epilogue part for notifying the fact that the advantageous state will not be controlled,
The display means is
In the second epilogue part, a display is made to inform the player that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state;
After that, the display will be switched,
Then, display the background.
After that, the pattern is displayed in a stopped state when the pattern confirmation command is issued.
The light emission control means
in the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
when the display is switched, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the display is switched;
switching the luminance data table to a luminance data table corresponding to the background display when the background display is performed, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
The luminance data used first in the luminance data table corresponding to the switch display is set to a higher luminance than the luminance data used last in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.

Specifically, the initial brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is brighter than the final brightness data (off) in the brightness data table before the eye-catching image is displayed (when a miss occurs). This allows the game effect lamp 9 to be illuminated at a higher brightness than before switching to the eye-catching screen, making it easier to recognize the switch by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9.

[Loser 17]
The initial luminance data of the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is set to a higher luminance than the initial luminance data of the luminance data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introductory part.

Specifically, the initial brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is brighter than the initial brightness data in the brightness data table (not including turning off) that corresponds to the background at the start of the change. This allows the game effect lamp 9 to be illuminated at a high brightness when switching to the eye-catching screen, making it easy to recognize the switch by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9.

[Role-player Action 1] (2019-1940)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which the game is notified of the game being controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to a common introduction part in both an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be made to the advantageous state and an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be made to the advantageous state;
In a first epilogue part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be performed in the advantageous state, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
In a second epilogue part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be performed in the advantageous state, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part until it is switched to the next luminance data is set shorter than the average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part until it is switched to the next luminance data.

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 262 and Fig. 263, in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps light up smoothly in rainbow colors based on the grandchild table W1, and the RGB data switches at 30 msec intervals. In contrast, as shown in Fig. 261, in the case of a loss, the frame lamps light up dimly in white based on the grandchild table W14, and the RGB data switches at 250 msec intervals, which is longer than when there is a win. As a result, when there is a win, the frame lamps change color at shorter intervals than when there is a loss, so that the player can easily understand that there is a win by the lighting mode of the frame lamps. Furthermore, when there is a win, the lighting of the frame lamps is more emphasized than when there is a loss, while when there is a loss, the lighting of the frame lamps can be made more subdued than when there is a win, and as a result, the player can easily understand whether there is a win or a loss by the contrasting lamp modes.

[Role-player Actions 2] (2019-1941)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed,
In a win/loss notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means
In the winning/losing notification part, when the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for moving the movable body;
in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The luminance data table for moving the movable body is configured so that the luminance data representing chromatic colors and the luminance data representing achromatic colors are used in sequence,
The luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured so that luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors, including luminance data representing a first chromatic color and luminance data representing a second chromatic color, are used in sequence.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 263, in the epilogue part of the SP final reach, in the performance where the reel falls, the frame lamp is lamp-controlled based on the grandchild table W20, and the frame lamp is lit so that the rainbow chromatic colors and the achromatic colors (RGB data of "333") alternate. This allows for a performance where the achromatic colors are occasionally inserted between the rainbow chromatic colors to emphasize the big win and congratulate the player. After that, in the performance where the ally character wins, the frame lamp is lamp-controlled based on the grandchild table W21, and the frame lamp is lit in smooth rainbow colors without achromatic colors, allowing for a performance where the player is calmly congratulated on the big win. As a result, the performance in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be viewed favorably by the player.

[Epilogue 1]
The epilogue part is a congratulatory part that occurs after a decision to control the game to an advantageous state is announced, and includes a scene in which an enemy character is defeated, no scene in which an ally character is damaged, and has fewer display changes than the introduction part.

Specifically, the aforementioned winning epilogue part is a part that does not transition in the event of a miss, and is a part that contains scenes in which enemy characters are at a disadvantage and scenes in which friendly characters are at an advantage. Also, in the winning epilogue part, the number of image display switches in the presentation is less than in the teasing part. This allows appropriate presentation to be executed in each part, and the flow of the series of presentations can be displayed in an optimal way.

[Epilogue 2]
In the epilogue part, the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for the lines of the character is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for the lines of the character in the introduction part.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, the rate at which subtitles are displayed for the lines of characters in the epilogue part is higher than the rate at which subtitles are displayed for characters in the SP reach, which is the teasing part. By clearly displaying subtitles in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the characters are saying. Furthermore, in a successful epilogue part, subtitles can enhance the feeling of celebration. Furthermore, since there are more screen changes in the teasing part than in the epilogue part, even if subtitles are displayed, the display time may be shorter, which prevents the auxiliary subtitle display from interfering with the performance, and makes it possible to prioritize conveying the performance through image changes. This allows for an optimal performance to be executed in the teasing part.

[Epilogue 3]
In the epilogue part, dialogue subtitles are always displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, subtitles are always displayed for the dialogue in the epilogue part. This makes it easy to see what the characters are saying in the epilogue part, emphasizing the sense of celebration.

[Epilogue 4]
In the introduction, when an enemy character is injured, the dialogue sound is output and the dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
In the epilogue part, when a dialogue sound is output in a scene in which an enemy character is damaged, a dialogue subtitle is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104 (n10) above, subtitles are not displayed for the lines of the enemy character in the scene in the teasing part where the enemy character receives damage. In contrast, as shown in FIG. 110 (o1), subtitles are displayed for the lines of the enemy character in the scene in the winning epilogue part where the enemy character receives damage (the crab catching scene). In this way, subtitles that were not displayed in the teasing part are displayed in the winning epilogue part, emphasizing the sense of celebration.

[Epilogue 5]
There are a first introduction part and a second introduction part, each of which has a different development and number of lines, but the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to the output of a character's dialogue sound in the epilogue part is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to the output of a character's dialogue sound in the introduction part.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, there are multiple types of SP reach, which is the provocative part, and each has a different development of the performance and the number of lines. However, regardless of the SP reach, the rate at which subtitles are displayed for the character's lines in the epilogue part is higher than the rate at which subtitles are displayed for the character during the SP reach. This makes it easier to understand what the character is saying by clearly displaying subtitles in the epilogue part, regardless of which SP reach is executed. Also, in a successful epilogue part, subtitles can be used to enhance the feeling of celebration. Also, since there are more screen changes in the provocative part than in the epilogue part, the primary focus is on conveying the performance through image changes, and auxiliary subtitle display can be used to prevent the performance from being a hindrance. This allows for an optimal performance to be executed in the provocative part.

[Epilogue 6]
The dialogue subtitles that are displayed finally in the epilogue part are displayed longer than the dialogue subtitles with the same number of characters that are displayed in other scenes.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 134 (s5)-(s6) above, the subtitle display displayed in the winning epilogue part is designed to be displayed for a longer period of time than the subtitle display displayed in the teasing part. In this way, by displaying the subtitle display in the final winning epilogue part for a longer period of time, it is possible to make the player bask in the afterglow of the big win and emphasize the sense of celebration. Note that when displaying subtitles, it is also possible to display them for longer when the number of characters is greater than when the number of characters is smaller. Even in such a case, if the winning epilogue part and the teasing part have the same number of subtitles (for example, 5 characters), it is sufficient to design the winning epilogue part so that the period for which the subtitle display is displayed is longer.

[Epilogue 7]
When the movable body is located at the advanced position, a background display for the movable body is performed,
The movable body operates according to a retraction pattern in which the movable body is retracted, and the background display for the movable body is switched to an epilogue display before the retraction pattern is completed.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 173 to 174, an effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed in accordance with the action of the reel falling. After that, the reel moves to the initial position according to a predetermined evacuation pattern. As the reel rises, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the reel action to a screen corresponding to the epilogue part of the SP final reach. Here, the effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed on the premise that the reel is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, the aesthetics of the display can be prevented by switching to a background display corresponding to the SP first half reach before the reel completes its return action to the initial position.

[Epilogue 8]
The deformed member performs a storage operation and a return operation.
The timing of switching to the epilogue display is linked to the start of the return movement.

Specifically, the premise is that the reel will return to its initial position, and the timing for switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue will be during the ascent related to the start of the return motion. In this way, the display corresponding to the epilogue is switched to at a timing related to the start of the return motion, so the display of the effect image corresponding to the reel motion ends before the reel returns to its initial position. This prevents a situation in which the effect image is displayed when the reel returns to its initial position, and does not impair the aesthetics of the presentation. The timing for switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue may be the same as the timing when the reel starts to rise. The reel may also perform a rotation or movement motion at the falling position.

[Epilogue 9]
During the return movement, the light emitting means of the movable body fades out and approaches extinction.

Specifically, when the reel rises, the performance control CPU 120 gradually reduces the brightness of the reel lamp 9A so as to gradually turn off the reel lamp 9A based on a child table corresponding to the rising action of the reel in the reel lamp 9A and a grandchild table specified by the child table. In this way, the lighting mode of the reel lamp 9A does not make the player aware of the reel rising, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp makes the player pay attention to the screen indicating that the game has progressed to the latter half of the SP Reach A.

[Epilogue 10]
The transition is suggested by the background music that is linked to the image that corresponds to the epilogue.
In conjunction with the start of the epilogue display, background music is output.

Specifically, the BGM corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the return of the reel to its initial position and the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue. In this way, the BGM can be used to suggest the start of the epilogue part, allowing the epilogue part to start in an optimal manner.

[Epilogue 11]
In conjunction with the start of the epilogue display, a sound effect indicating the change is output.

Specifically, a sound effect corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the return of the reel to its initial position and the start of a display corresponding to the epilogue. In this way, the start of the epilogue part is indicated by the sound effect, allowing the epilogue part to start in an appropriate manner.

[Epilogue 12]
In conjunction with the start of the epilogue display, background music and a sound effect indicating a change are output.

Specifically, background music and sound effects corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the return of the reel to its initial position and the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue. In this way, the start of the epilogue part is indicated by the background music and sound effects, allowing the epilogue part to start in an optimal manner.

[Epilogue 13]
When the epilogue is displayed while the moving object is returning, the dialogue sound is not output.
In the epilogue display after the movable body is stored, a dialogue sound is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, when the reel returns to its initial position and the display corresponding to the epilogue is displayed, the dialogue sound is not output, and when the epilogue display is made after the reel returns to its initial position, the dialogue sound is output and subtitles are displayed. This avoids the subtitles being displayed at a time when they are difficult to see, and allows the epilogue part to be executed optimally.

[Epilogue 14]
A dialogue sound is output when the moving object is retracted.
At the timing when the retraction of the movable body is completed, a dialogue sound is outputted, and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, when the props return to their initial positions, the dialogue sound is output in the epilogue display and subtitles are displayed. This allows the dialogue to be clearly recognized, and the epilogue part can be executed smoothly.

[Epilogue 15]
The display of the dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds output at the end of the epilogue part ends at the timing when the image display starts.

Specifically, as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 134 (s6) to 135 (s8), the final subtitle display for the final line in the winning epilogue part is designed to be erased before the pattern presentation is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the subtitle display from overlapping with the decorative pattern and from being mistaken for a message in the pattern presentation. This makes it possible to present the presentation in the winning epilogue part in an optimal way.

[Epilogue 17]
The video that was played during the epilogue becomes a still image when the symbols are finally displayed and the player recognizes the final completed symbols.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) above, when the symbol presentation is complete and the player is able to recognize the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol and the characters and other images displayed as the background are still images. This prevents the decorative symbol from becoming difficult to see because the background to the decorative symbol is a moving image.

[Epilogue 18]
The video that plays before the pattern starts to appear is treated as a still image.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 (s7) above, the image that was playing during the winning epilogue part becomes a still image just before the pattern release performance is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the pattern from becoming difficult to see from the timing when the pattern release starts.

[Epilogue 19]
Special effects are applied at the same time as the image freezes.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 (s7) above, the still image displayed in the winning epilogue part has a special aspect reminiscent of a comic strip. By adding a special effect to the still image, it is possible to emphasize that the image has stopped and to suggest that the scene has changed, making it a suitable winning epilogue part.

[Epilogue 20] (2019-1931)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A sound output means;
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed,
In a win/loss notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, terminates the effect display while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, displays a display corresponding to an epilogue part, and displays a dialogue subtitle for a dialogue sound uttered by a character after the movable body has retreated to the first position;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to an epilogue part, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to an epilogue part while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position.

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 173 to Fig. 174, the appearance of the performance is switched to the winning epilogue part by the movement of the reel from the scene before the winning or losing decision in the instigation part. Also, an effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed according to the action of the reel falling. After that, while the reel is rising, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the reel action to the screen corresponding to the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach. Also, while the reel is rising, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the reel action to the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part. Also, while the reel is rising, a sound corresponding to the winning epilogue part is output. Also, during the background display corresponding to the winning epilogue part displayed from (s3-5) to (s3-8) until the reel changes to the initial position, no dialogue sound is output. After that, in the state (s4) where the movement of the reel to the initial position is completed and the display of the effect image is finished, the dialogue sound is output and the subtitle display is displayed. Here, the effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed on the assumption that the reel is in a position where it overlaps the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the winning epilogue part before the reel completes its return to its initial position, the aesthetics of the display can be prevented from being marred. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the winning epilogue part while the reel is rising, the winning epilogue part can be displayed appropriately. Furthermore, since the subtitles are displayed after the return to the initial position is completed, the winning epilogue part can be displayed appropriately.

[Epilogue 21] (2019-1932)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is to be performed after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
A first scene in which dialogue subtitles are displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in an introductory part;
a second scene in which, in the epilogue part, a final line subtitle is displayed in response to the final line sound uttered by the character, and then, after the display of the final line subtitle is terminated, a decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area;
While no switching effect is applied when the display of the final dialogue subtitle is terminated in the second scene, a switching effect is applied when the display of the dialogue subtitle is terminated in the first scene.

[Epilogue 22]
When the pattern is displayed, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed.
Although an effect is applied to the decorative pattern, the display layer of the small pattern is displayed with priority, so that the effect does not interfere with the visibility of the small pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) above, when the symbols are displayed, both the decorative symbol and the small symbol are displayed. Then, an effect image using converging lines is added to the decorative symbol, but no effect image is added to the small symbol. Furthermore, the decorative symbol has a higher priority than the decorative symbol and the effect image, and is displayed in front. This enhances the effect of the effect image for the decorative symbol, while allowing the player to recognize that the small symbol is being displayed in a changing state, making it a suitable epilogue part for winning.

[Epilogue 23]
When the pattern is displayed, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed.
The movements of the decorative pattern and the small pattern are synchronized at the timing when the display of the decorative pattern is completed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) above, both the decorative and small patterns are displayed during the pattern presentation. Here, the movement of the decorative and small patterns may be synchronized at the timing when the presentation of the decorative patterns ends. Specifically, during the pattern swing period when the presentation of the decorative patterns ends and the patterns are swinging up and down, the small patterns may also swing up and down in the same manner as the decorative patterns. In this way, by synchronizing the movements of the decorative and small patterns, the flow of the presentation in the winning epilogue part can be made to look good.

[Epilogue 24]
When the symbols are drawn in the re-draw part, both the decorative symbols and the small symbols are displayed.
Although an effect is applied to the decorative pattern, the display layer of the small pattern is displayed with priority, so that the effect does not interfere with the visibility of the small pattern.

Specifically, as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 157 (B1) to 158 (B5), when the symbols are displayed in the re-draw part, both the decorative symbols and the small symbols are displayed. Then, an effect image using converging lines is added to the decorative symbols, but no effect image is added to the small symbols. Furthermore, the decorative symbols have a higher priority than the decorative symbols and effect images, and are displayed in the foreground. This makes it possible to increase the effect of the effect image for the decorative symbols, while letting the player know that the small symbols are being displayed in a changing state.

[Epilogue 25]
Before the redraw part, the small symbols are in a state indicating that it has been determined that they will be controlled to an advantageous state, and the small symbols change again in conjunction with the transition to the redraw part.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) above, when the patterns are displayed, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern may be displayed in a aligned state. Then, in conjunction with the transition to the re-selection part, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern may change again. This allows the decorative pattern and the small pattern to be synchronized for optimal display.

[Epilogue 26] (2019-1942)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a higher-level table configured with storage destination data indicating a storage destination of a luminance data table and a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is to be performed after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The epilogue part is,
A first scene in which a story development corresponding to an epilogue part is displayed;
A second scene in which the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area,
The light emission control means
in a first scene in the epilogue part, a first upper table is used to control the light emitting means;
in a second scene in the epilogue part, a second upper table is used to control the light emitting means;
in a first scene in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and at a specific timing, switching from the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part to a luminance data table for a rainbow light emitting mode, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table for the rainbow light emitting mode;
In a second scene in the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for enlarged display, and at a timing related to the end of the enlarged display of the decorative pattern, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for changing the light emitting mode to a rainbow light emitting mode from the luminance data table for enlarged display;
the luminance data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode used in the first scene in the epilogue part and the luminance data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode used in the second scene in the epilogue part are a common luminance data table,
The first higher-level table is composed of storage destination data of a luminance data table corresponding to an epilogue part and storage destination data of a luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode,
The second higher-level table is made up of storage destination data for a luminance data table for enlarged display and storage destination data for a luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, by sharing the grandchild table used during the winning notification performance and the grandchild table used when displaying the winning pattern, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used to control the lamps to light up in rainbow colors without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different timings, while enhancing each performance with a unified performance. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be made to look better to the player using frame lamps, while reducing data capacity.

[Epilogue 27] (2019-1943)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a higher-level table configured with storage destination data indicating a storage destination of a luminance data table and a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result of the notification, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The epilogue part includes a result notification scene in which the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display area and the result of the notification performance is notified,
The re-draw part includes a re-draw result notification scene in which the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display area and the result of the re-draw is notified,
The light emission control means
in a result notification scene in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a first upper table;
In a re-lottery result notification scene in the re-lottery part, the light emitting means is controlled using a second superior table;
In the result-informing scene in the epilogue part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for enlarged display of the result-informing scene, and at a timing related to the end of the enlarged display of the decorative pattern, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for changing the light-emitting mode to a rainbow light-emitting mode from the luminance data table for enlarged display of the result-informing scene;
In a re-draw result notifying scene in the re-draw part, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for enlarged display of the re-draw result notifying scene, and at a timing related to the end of the enlarged display of the decorative pattern, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for making the re-draw result notifying scene into a rainbow light emitting mode from the luminance data table for enlarged display of the re-draw result notifying scene;
The brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode used in the result notifying scene in the epilogue part and the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode used in the re-lottery result notifying scene in the re-lottery part are a common brightness data table,
The first higher level table is composed of storage destination data of a luminance data table for enlarging and displaying the result-announcement scene, and storage destination data of a luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light-emitting mode,
The second higher level table is made up of storage destination data of a luminance data table for enlarged display of the re-lottery result informing scene, and storage destination data of a luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode.

Specifically, in child tables WD21 and WD22 of the re-draw part, grandchild table W1 is used in common with child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part for lamp control when the pattern is finally determined after the re-draw. This eliminates the need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting rainbow colors for the winning epilogue part and the re-draw part, reducing the data capacity used for lamp control while allowing the player to see a unified presentation even in different parts (timings). As a result, the presentation in the winning epilogue part and the re-draw part can be better shown to the player while reducing the data capacity.

[Epilogue 28] (2020-399)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is to be performed after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The display means includes:
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area while displaying the story development corresponding to the epilogue part;
After that, the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part ends,
At a timing related to the end of the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area;
The light emission control means
in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
When the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a brightness data table for enlarged display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for enlarged display.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, when the images constituting the winning epilogue are displayed in sequence (when the winning epilogue video is playing), the decorative symbol is located at the edge of the display area of the screen (the position in the upper left corner of the screen). In relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the winning epilogue video ends, the reduced symbol is erased and the central area of the screen is used to enlarge and display the symbol. In addition, in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image, the brightness data table switches from the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part to the brightness data table corresponding to the symbol display. According to this, when the winning epilogue part video is playing, the reduced symbol is positioned at the edge of the screen so as not to interfere with the winning epilogue part video, and when the winning epilogue part video ends and the symbol is displayed, the decorative symbol is enlarged and displayed continuously using the edge and center of the screen, so that the big win symbol can be emphasized and shown to the player. Furthermore, by switching the brightness data table, scene changes can be made to look good. In this way, the epilogue part can be made to look good.

[Epilogue 29]
In the epilogue part,
While the image corresponding to the epilogue is being displayed, the decorative patterns are aligned and positioned at the edge of the display area.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are displayed in sequence (when the winning epilogue video is playing), the decorative symbols are displayed aligned with "222" at the edge of the display area of the screen (the position in the upper left corner of the screen). This allows the player to recognize that a big win has been displayed due to the reduced decorative symbols, even while the winning epilogue video is playing.

[Epilogue 30]
In the epilogue part,
While the image corresponding to the epilogue is being displayed, a decorative pattern is positioned on an edge of the display area;
In relation to the timing when the display of the image corresponding to the epilogue ends, the output of the displayed dialogue ends, the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed on the edge side of the display area ends, and the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are displayed in sequence (when the winning epilogue video is playing), the decorative pattern is displayed at an edge position in the display area of the screen (the upper left corner of the screen). In addition, in relation to the timing when the screen becomes still and the winning epilogue video ends, the subtitle display displayed at (Y1) is erased, the reduced pattern in the upper left corner is erased, and the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the central area of the screen. This prevents the subtitle display from overlapping with the decorative pattern, and prevents the user from mistaking the display of some kind of message for another when the pattern is displayed, allowing the winning epilogue part to be displayed in an optimal way.

[Epilogue 31]
At the start of the introductory part, a decorative pattern is located at the edge of the display area.

Specifically, the decorative pattern may be set to move to the upper left corner of the screen in a reach mode when the SP reach begins. By positioning it from the start of the SP reach, it is possible to avoid interfering with the development of the performance even during the SP reach, and to make the series of performances look optimal.

[Re-draw performance 1]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/fail notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the result/fail notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The means of performance execution are:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first replay effect is executed among a plurality of types of replay effects, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance can be executed among a plurality of types of re-draw performances, in which the first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
Execute the first re-draw performance or the second re-draw performance using the first symbol displayed in the epilogue part;
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the luminance data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or a luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection performance to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the re-lottery performance is started using the "2" symbol as is. When the re-extraction performance starts, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the re-lottery performance starts to change from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol advance performance is executed in which symbols are replaced by rapid changes starting from the "2" symbol. In this way, the re-lottery performance is started using the decorative symbol that was temporarily stopped, and when the re-lottery performance starts, the symbol advance performance is executed using the symbol that was temporarily stopped, so that it is easy for the player to understand which decorative symbol the re-lottery started from. As a result, the flow of the series of performances can be clearly seen.

[Re-draw performance 2]
When an image corresponding to the background where the arrangement of decorative symbols is temporarily stopped is displayed, the light emitting means is turned off, and when a screen is shifted to a re-lottery screen, the light emitting means emits light in a light emitting mode corresponding to the re-lottery.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 142 (tA6), when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped while the frame lamp is smoothly lit in rainbow colors in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp goes out once before the re-draw performance is executed, and then lights up in a lighting mode corresponding to the re-draw performance, so that the player can be easily informed that the re-draw performance is about to begin by the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

[Re-selection effect 3]
When moving to the re-draw screen, the decoration pattern alignment is temporarily stopped,
When the display is temporarily stopped, the decorative pattern alignment is displayed with a swaying effect, but the image corresponding to the background and the light emission mode of the light-emitting means are switched to those for re-drawing while the swaying display with the effect is maintained.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 142 (A5) above, in the final state of the pattern release presentation in the winning epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed swaying and an effect image with converging lines is added. When switching from that state to the background of the re-draw presentation as shown in (A6), the effect image with converging lines continues to be added. Also, the game effect lamp 9 switches from a smooth rainbow light to being turned off. In other words, from the pattern release to the re-draw presentation, the pattern swaying and effect mode continue, while the background and lamps switch. This makes it easy to understand which decorative pattern the re-draw presentation started from.

[Re-selection effect 4]
When the pattern feed begins, the decorative pattern that has been displayed since the epilogue shrinks,
The image is reduced and then the image begins to move.

Specifically, when the symbol-sending effect in the re-draw effect starts, the decorative symbol that has remained displayed since the winning epilogue part starts changing from a reduced state. This makes it possible to clearly show the flow of the series of effects without having to execute a process to change to a different decorative symbol.

[Re-selection effect 5]
The image feed starts at a reduced size, and all other images are reduced to the same size.

Specifically, in the symbol advance performance, the change begins with a reduced symbol, and the size of the symbol during the change is a uniform reduced size. This makes the change during the symbol advance performance appear smoother, and makes the flow of the series of performances look better.

[Re-selection effect 6]
While a plurality of kinds of decorative patterns are being sent in a reduced size, the display changes in the order of an action prompt display, acceptance of the action, display of a decorative pattern slightly larger than the reduced size, and display of the enlarged decorative pattern.

Specifically, as shown in the flow of Fig. 144 (A10) to Fig. 156 (A46) and Fig. 157 (B1) to Fig. 158 (B5) described above, in the re-lottery presentation, a reduced-sized decorative pattern is used to advance the pattern, and a button action prompt is displayed. Then, when the player operates the button, a pattern release presentation is executed in which the pattern is enlarged and displayed. In other words, the decorative pattern that will be finally notified is enlarged and displayed from the moment the pattern is released. In this way, since the pattern that will finally be notified begins to expand, it is possible to clearly show the player what the final notification pattern will be.

[Re-selection effect 7]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/fail notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the result/fail notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The means of performance execution are:
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first re-selection performance can be executed, among a plurality of types of re-selection performances, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol, and a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the game is controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance is executed among the multiple types of re-draw performance, in which a replacement display is executed in a first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
The first re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the second symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The second re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the first symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the luminance data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or a luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection performance to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-draw performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped before the re-draw is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the re-draw performance is started using the "2" symbol as it is. When the re-extraction performance starts, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the variation of the re-draw performance starts from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-draw performance, a symbol-sending performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by rapid variation from the "2" symbol. During the re-draw performance, all the decorative symbols are sent in order, such as "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1", and then the symbol-sending performance is executed in which the "2" symbol is displayed again. In this way, the re-draw performance is started using the decorative symbol that was temporarily stopped, and the decorative symbol that was initially temporarily stopped is displayed again after multiple types of decorative symbols are changed. In this way, the final display result is not displayed immediately, and the symbol-sending performance in which all the decorative symbols are displayed can make the flow of the series of performances look good. In addition, when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors, then goes off, and a re-lottery performance is executed, and when the symbol is displayed swaying, the frame lamp flashes red in a lighting mode different from the smooth rainbow colors based on the brightness data corresponding to the re-lottery performance (for example, RGB data in the grandchild table W25). This prevents the player from mistaking the lighting mode of the frame lamp for the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part to be confirmed. Furthermore, the lighting of the rainbow colors when the symbols "3" and "2" are displayed swaying is continued even during the period when the symbol is confirmed. In this way, the system is designed so that the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed as it is during the short symbol confirmation period without preparing a brightness data table for special lamp control, so there is no need to increase the data capacity excessively.

[Re-selection effect 8]
The pattern transfer according to a predetermined pattern is a performance in which the pattern is temporarily stopped and then the next pattern is transferred in order, and after the last pattern is transferred, the pattern is returned to the temporarily stopped pattern and then the next pattern is transferred in order.
The predetermined pattern is 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 in that order, which is then looped.

Specifically, in the symbol sending performance during the re-draw performance, all the decorative symbols are sent in order: "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and then all the decorative symbols are sent again in order: "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1". In this way, the numbers of the decorative symbols are sent in order, which makes the flow of the series of performances look good.

[Re-draw performance 9]
While the patterns are being sent in a predetermined pattern, all the decorative patterns being sent are displayed with the same resolution as when the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped.

Specifically, in the symbol forwarding performance during the re-draw performance, all symbols are displayed with the transparency of the symbol when it was temporarily stopped, and the transparency is increased during the change. Specifically, the symbols are switched as follows: "2" symbol with 0% transparency, "2" symbol with 50% transparency, "3" symbol with 0% transparency, "3" symbol with 50% transparency, "4" symbol with 0% transparency, and "4" symbol with 50% transparency. This allows all symbols to be displayed properly with low transparency during the symbol forwarding performance, so it is possible to know what symbol is being sent.

[Re-draw performance 10]
After the symbol transmission is started, the display time of each of the multiple types of decorative symbols is the same until a notification is made as to whether or not the symbol will be promoted.

Specifically, in the symbol-sending performance during the re-draw performance, all the decorative symbols are sent in order: "2," "3," "4," "5," "6," "7," and "1," but the time each symbol is displayed is the same. This allows all symbols to be displayed for a fixed period of time, making the flow of the series of effects look good.

[Re-draw performance 11]
The action prompt is displayed while the pattern is being sent.
The action prompting display is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the pattern being fed.

Specifically, during the symbol forwarding performance, a promotion display formed from a button image and a time gauge is displayed. The position at which the promotion display is displayed is a position that does not overlap with the position at which the change in the decorative symbol during the symbol forwarding performance is displayed. In this way, the promotion display does not overlap with the decorative symbol during the symbol forwarding performance, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the symbol forwarding. Note that a portion of the promotion display may overlap with the decorative symbol during the symbol forwarding performance.

[Re-draw performance 12]
The action prompting display is started during the advancement of the symbols, that is, during the second loop of a predetermined pattern.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 176 and 177, the promotion display begins at (A24) and (A25) after the change in which all decorative symbols are displayed during the symbol advance performance has been repeated twice. In this way, the promotion image is not displayed until the predetermined symbol advance pattern has been repeated twice, allowing the player to clearly recognize the symbol advance performance.

[Re-draw performance 13]
When the symbol feed starts from the symbol "1", the timing when the action prompt display is performed is, for example, the symbol "5",
When the symbol advance starts from the symbol "4", the timing when the action prompting display is performed is, for example, the symbol "8".

Specifically, the symbol at the start of the re-draw performance may be other than symbol 2. Even in such cases, the timing at which the button image is displayed as the action prompt is constant. For example, in the case of symbol 2, the timing at which the action prompt is displayed is the timing at which symbol 2 is displayed again. Similarly, in the case of symbol 5, the timing at which the action prompt is displayed should be the timing at which symbol 5 is displayed again. In other words, no matter which symbol starts the re-draw performance, the number of symbols sent is the same. This allows for constant control, reducing the processing burden.

[Re-draw performance 14]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/fail notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the result/fail notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The means of performance execution are:
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first re-selection performance can be executed, among a plurality of types of re-selection performances, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol, and a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the game is controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance is executed among a plurality of types of re-draw performances, in which the replacement display is executed in a first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the second advantageous state, a repeat display is performed in which the second symbol is repeatedly displayed after displaying the second symbol in the first half part, and a third re-selection performance is executed in which the second symbol is displayed again in the second half part;
The first re-selection effect, the second re-selection effect, and the third re-selection effect are configured to have the same duration,
The light emission control means includes:
In an epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a brightness data table corresponding to a first re-drawing performance or a brightness data table corresponding to a second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection performance to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.

Specifically, there are provided patterns in which an even number symbol (e.g., 2) is displayed followed by an even number symbol (e.g., 2), and an even number symbol (e.g., 2) is displayed followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., 3). In addition, there may be a pattern in which an odd number symbol (e.g., 7) is displayed followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., 7). In a performance in which symbols are sent from odd number symbols to odd number symbols, it is sufficient that the same odd number symbols are sent in all symbol transfers. However, in either pattern, the length of the symbol transfer period in the re-draw performance may be designed to be the same. This allows for an appropriate re-draw performance in either pattern without increasing data capacity. In addition, when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors, then goes off, and a re-lottery performance is executed, and when the symbol is displayed swaying, the frame lamp flashes red in a lighting mode different from the smooth rainbow colors based on the brightness data corresponding to the re-lottery performance (for example, RGB data in the grandchild table W25). This prevents the player from mistaking the lighting mode of the frame lamp for the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part to be confirmed. Furthermore, the lighting of the rainbow colors when the symbols "3" and "2" are displayed swaying is continued even during the period when the symbol is confirmed. In this way, the system is designed so that the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed as it is during the short symbol confirmation period without preparing a brightness data table for special lamp control, so there is no need to increase the data capacity excessively.

[Re-draw performance 15]
The re-draw performance is displayed by combining display data other than the decorative pattern with display data of various decorative patterns, reproducing each pattern of multiple types of re-draw performance.
By using common display data in each re-draw performance, the performance time is common between the respective re-draw performances, and only the type of symbols being sent and the symbols to be displayed in the symbol output are different in each re-draw performance.

Specifically, the lottery presentation uses the same data whether the pattern is to display an even number symbol (e.g., 2) followed by an even number symbol (e.g., 2), an even number symbol (e.g., 2) followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., 3), or an odd number symbol (e.g., 7) followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., 7). In other words, the presentation data is the same, and the design changes the data related to the decorative symbols depending on the pattern. This eliminates the need for dedicated patterns, reducing the amount of data.

[Re-draw performance 16]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/fail notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the result/fail notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The means of performance execution are:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first re-draw performance is executed among a plurality of types of re-draw performances, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance can be executed among a plurality of types of re-draw performances, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
The first symbol is displayed with the same or substantially the same animation when the first symbol is displayed once in the epilogue part and when the first symbol is displayed again in the latter half part of the second re-draw performance;
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the luminance data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or a luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection performance to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.

Specifically, the pattern display in the above-mentioned FIG. 141 (A1) to FIG. 142 (A5) parts and the pattern display in the FIG. 161 (C1) to FIG. 162 (C5) parts are executed using approximately the same image. Specifically, the same image is used for the pattern display and effect image of the "2" symbol, and the pattern display is executed in a manner in which the background part is different. According to this, since the image of the pattern display can be made approximately the same, it is possible to easily show the player that the promotion to the probability variable symbol has not been made. It is also possible to make the image of the pattern display part, including the background, exactly the same. Also, in a state in which the winning symbol is temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part, after the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors, a re-draw performance is executed with a turn-off in between, and when the symbol is displayed swaying, the frame lamp flashes red in a lighting mode different from the smooth rainbow color based on the brightness data corresponding to the re-draw performance (for example, RGB data in the grandchild table W25). This prevents the player from mistakingly believing that the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part has been confirmed based on the lighting state of the frame lamp. Furthermore, the rainbow lighting that occurs when the "3" and "2" symbols are displayed swaying continues during the period in which the symbols are confirmed. In this way, during the short symbol confirmation period, the system is designed so that lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed as is without preparing a brightness data table for special lamp control, so there is no need to increase data capacity excessively.

[Re-draw performance 17]
The animation when the first identification information is displayed includes an animation in which the pattern is displayed and then enlarged until it reaches the first position.

Specifically, in the aforementioned pattern display performance, a series of effects is executed in which the pattern is first enlarged and then returned to normal size in the center of the screen. This allows the pattern display performance to be displayed optimally by enlarging and reducing the pattern.

[Re-draw performance 18]
When temporarily stopping the arrangement of decorative symbols before the re-draw is performed and when informing whether the arrangement of decorative symbols will be upgraded in the notification part, the display means refers to common display data;
The common display data is combined with display data for a plurality of kinds of decorative patterns to display a plurality of kinds of patterns.

Specifically, in the pattern display performance described above, common pattern display data may be used for the data for the pattern display performance in the winning epilogue part and the data for the pattern display performance in the re-draw performance. Then, a series of pattern display performances may be executed using the common pattern display data and a combination of multiple decorative patterns. This makes it possible to reduce data capacity while still providing a good appearance for the pattern display performance. Furthermore, substantially the same data may be used for the data for the pattern display performance in the winning epilogue part and the data for the pattern display performance in the re-draw performance.

[Re-draw performance 19]
In the event that you are not promoted in the re-selection,
The light emission mode in displaying the symbols is the same when the decorative symbol arrangement is temporarily stopped before the re-draw is performed and when a notice is given that the decorative symbol arrangement will not be upgraded by the re-draw.

Specifically, in child table WD21 of the re-draw part, grandchild table W1 is used in common with child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part for lamp control when the final pattern is determined after the re-draw. This eliminates the need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting rainbow colors for the winning epilogue part and the re-draw part, reducing the data capacity used for lamp control while allowing the player to see a unified presentation even in different parts (timings). As a result, the presentation in the winning epilogue part and the re-draw part can be better shown to the player while reducing the data capacity.

[Re-draw performance 20]
In the case of promotion in the re-draw performance,
The lighting state of the pattern is different when the decorative pattern alignment is temporarily stopped before the re-draw is performed and when the decorative pattern alignment is promoted by the re-draw.
The light emission mode in the pattern display is more intense when a notice is given that the decorative pattern arrangement will be upgraded by the re-draw than when the decorative pattern arrangement is temporarily stopped before the re-draw is executed.

Specifically, in child table WD20 in the re-draw part, the frame lamps are lit in the same rainbow colors as child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 in the winning epilogue part as part of the lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-draw, but the rainbow lighting during times tB5 to tB9 when the symbol "2" is upgraded to a "3" through the re-draw is more intense than the smooth rainbow lighting when the symbol "2" temporarily stops in the winning epilogue part. This allows the player to be more effectively congratulated on the promotion of the winning symbol through the re-draw by the lighting of the frame lamps.

[Re-draw performance 21]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/fail notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the result/fail notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The means of performance execution are:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first replay effect is executed among a plurality of types of replay effects, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance can be executed among the multiple types of re-draw performance, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
In the latter half part, from when the first pattern is displayed again until a pattern determination period begins, a swinging display is performed in which the first pattern is displayed as if it is swinging by changing the display mode of the first pattern to a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode;
In the latter half part, from when the second pattern is displayed until a pattern determination period begins, a swinging display is performed in which the display mode of the second pattern is changed to a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode so that the second pattern is displayed as if it is swinging;
The first mode is a mode in which the player can easily visually recognize the symbols compared to either the second mode or the third mode,
The means of performance execution are:
In the re-selection part, a display for prompting the player to take an action can be executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-draw performance, if the action is performed at a first timing, the second symbol is displayed in a shaking display while maintaining a shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol so that the second symbol will be in a second mode when a predetermined timing is reached after the performance corresponding to the first re-draw performance is executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-selection performance, if the action is executed at a second timing different from the first timing, the second symbol is displayed in a shaking display while maintaining a shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol so that the second symbol becomes a third mode at a predetermined timing after the performance corresponding to the first re-selection performance is executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-lottery performance, regardless of whether the action is performed at the first timing or the second timing, a display is performed in which the swaying display of the second pattern is difficult to see from a predetermined timing, and then the second pattern is displayed again in a swaying display, and then, when a pattern determination period is reached, the second pattern is displayed stopped in the first mode while maintaining the swaying speed of the swaying display of the second pattern;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the second re-draw performance, if the action is performed at a first timing, the first symbol is displayed in a shaking display while maintaining a shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol so that the first symbol becomes a second mode at a predetermined timing after the performance corresponding to the second re-draw performance is executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the second re-selection performance, if the action is executed at a second timing, the first symbol is displayed in a shaking display while maintaining a shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol so that the first symbol will be in a third mode at a predetermined timing after the performance corresponding to the second re-selection performance is executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the second re-selection performance, regardless of whether the action is performed at the first timing or the second timing, a display is performed in which the swaying display of the first pattern is made difficult to see from a predetermined timing, and then the first pattern is displayed again in a swaying display, and then, when a pattern determination period is reached, the first pattern is displayed stopped in a first manner while maintaining the swaying speed of the swaying display of the first pattern;
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the luminance data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or a luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection performance to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.

Specifically, as shown in (L1) to (L3) of FIG. 267, an action prompt display using a button image and a time gauge is displayed while the symbols are being sent in the re-draw effect. During the period in which the action prompt display is displayed, the player operates the push button 31B to execute the common symbol release effect shown in (L4) to (L6). Regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, a common symbol release effect is executed by enlarging and reducing the symbols as shown in (L4) to (L5). After that, the symbols are wobbled during the symbol wobbled period. The symbol wobbled period differs depending on the timing of the button operation. Thus, after the symbol wobbled period, for example, at the first operation timing, the symbols may be in a position facing to the right, at the second operation timing, the symbols may be in a position facing to the left, and at the third operation timing, the symbols may be in a position facing forward. However, regardless of the operation timing, a whiteout effect is inserted as a common effect from (J1) to (J18) afterwards, and an effect in which the symbols rotate, shrink, and then sway is executed. In this way, by executing the common effect regardless of the timing of the push button 31B operation, the symbols can be stopped cleanly, and the series of effects can be displayed in an optimal manner.

[Re-draw performance 22]
When an operation is performed at a first timing of the effective period of the operation, after a notification of whether or not the player has been promoted is made, the decorative pattern is displayed flickeringly until a predetermined timing for the change arrives;
When an action is performed at a second timing earlier than the first timing of the valid period of the action, after notification of whether or not the action is to be promoted, a decorative pattern is displayed flickeringly by the amount by which the action was earlier than the first timing until a predetermined timing of the change arrives, and the time is absorbed.

Specifically, when the push button 31B is operated at the first timing during the effective operation period, the display of the swaying decorative pattern is displayed after the notification of whether or not the promotion will occur (an example of no operation in FIG. 267 (L3)). When the push button 31B is operated at the second timing earlier than the first timing during the effective operation period, the display of the swaying decorative pattern is extended by the amount of time that it was earlier than the first timing after the notification of whether or not the promotion will occur (an example of the operation in FIG. 267 (L2)). When the push button 31B is operated at the third timing earlier than the second timing during the effective operation period, the display of the swaying decorative pattern is extended by the amount of time that it was earlier than the second timing after the notification of whether or not the promotion will occur (an example of the operation in FIG. 267 (L1)). In this way, regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, the duration of the performance can be absorbed by the swaying time of the pattern. By performing a common performance after that, the pattern can be stopped cleanly, and the series of performances can be displayed in a favorable manner.

[Re-draw performance 23]
The predetermined performance starts when the swaying decorative pattern starts to expand and rotate while a white light flashes.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 267, after a whiteout is executed as a common effect, a different effect is executed in which the swaying decorative pattern is enlarged and rotated once, which is different from the previous pattern appearance. In this way, regardless of the pattern position in the swaying of the scale absorption pattern, a different appearance is executed after the whiteout, so that the flow of the appearance until the pattern stops does not feel unnatural.

[Re-draw performance 24]
The decorative pattern is displayed so as to sway around the first position as an axis.
The swaying display is such that the decorative patterns are positioned in the order of the first position, the second position, the third position, the second position, the first position, the fourth position, the fifth position, the fourth position, the first position, and the second position, and the predetermined performance is designed so that when the fixed period is reached, the decorative patterns are always swayed and displayed in the order of the second position, the first position, and so on.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 267, during the symbol shaking period, the symbol shakes backward from (J10) to (J12), and then shakes forward from (J13) to (J14), changing to the initial position. After that, the symbol shakes forward from (J15) to (J16), and then shakes backward from (J17) to (J18), changing to the initial position. This series of movements may be repeated multiple times. However, during the symbol determination period, the symbol is designed to always be in the initial position facing forward, as shown at (J18). This allows the symbol to be determined and stopped in a manner that does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

[Re-draw performance 25]
The starting point when the light emitting means is caused to emit rainbow light during the second part is when the light emitting means is caused to emit rainbow light at the start of the predetermined performance.

Specifically, it is designed so that the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow colors at the whiteout timing of (J1) in Figure 267. The timing of (J1) is an effect that is executed as a common effect regardless of the operation timing. By setting the point where such a common effect is executed as the starting point for changing the game effect lamp 9, it is easy for the designer to decide the start trigger. Note that the start trigger may be the timing of (J2) when the common start display starts rather than the timing of (J1), and the start trigger may be any timing of the commonly executed effect.

[Re-draw performance 26]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/fail notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the result/fail notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The means of performance execution are:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first replay effect is executed among a plurality of types of replay effects, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance can be executed among the multiple types of re-draw performance, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
In the epilogue part, when the first pattern is displayed once, the display mode of the first pattern is changed to a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode, so that the first pattern is displayed as if it is swaying;
In the case of transition from the epilogue part to the re-selection part, there are a time when the epilogue part transitions to the re-selection part at a timing when the first symbol is displayed in a first manner, a time when the epilogue part transitions to the re-selection part at a timing when the first symbol is displayed in a second manner, and a time when the epilogue part transitions to the re-selection part at a timing when the first symbol is displayed in the third manner.
The performance execution means performs a specific display that makes the first pattern difficult to see when the epilogue part transitions to the re-selection part at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the first mode, when the epilogue part transitions to the re-selection part at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the second mode, and when the epilogue part transitions to the re-selection part at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the third mode, and displays the first pattern in a common display mode to execute the first re-selection performance or the second re-selection performance;
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the luminance data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or a luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection performance to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 266, when an image showing the stick controller 31A and a time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, no matter when the stick controller 31A is operated, a period of time for the symbols to shake to absorb the scale may be provided in the time until the specified timing when the re-lottery performance is executed (the symbol shaking period from (K4)). Then, when the specified timing arrives and the re-lottery performance is executed, a common performance accompanied by a white-out as shown in (K8) to (K17) may be executed. In this way, no matter when the stick controller 31A is operated, the symbols are first displayed shaking, then the common performance accompanied by a white-out is executed, and then the re-lottery performance is executed. This makes it possible to prevent discomfort from occurring in the pattern movement at the start of the re-lottery, and makes the series of performances look good.

[Re-draw performance 27]
Regardless of which of the multiple types of introduction parts you win from, the re-draw performance is the same.

Specifically, the time from when the whiteout screen appears until the re-draw effect is executed can be made the same for any of the multiple reaches. This can reduce the data size of the effect data.

[Re-draw performance 28]
The movement of the decorative pattern after the specific display is an extension of the movement of the decorative pattern that was once swaying before the specific display.

Specifically, the movement of the pattern after the white-out screen may be an extension of the movement of the pattern before the white-out screen. For example, if the movement of the pattern before the white-out screen is a movement in which the pattern sways from the front to the back on the spot on an axis around the vertical direction of the pattern, the movement after the white-out screen may be a movement in which the pattern expands and rotates once in the clockwise direction on an axis around the vertical direction of the pattern. In this way, by displaying a white-out between the movement that is an extension of the same axis rotation, it is possible to prevent the pattern movement from feeling unnatural, and to make the series of performances look good.

[Re-draw performance 29]
The plurality of types of introduction parts include a predetermined introduction part which is a branch of notification as to whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state and is not notified by operation of the operation means as a trigger,
In the predetermined introduction part, since there is no point where the scale is shifted, if it is determined that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state in the predetermined introduction part, there is no shaking in the swaying display of the temporary stop of the decorative pattern until the re-draw performance is executed, but the same re-draw performance as that of a reach where the scale shift occurs is executed.

Specifically, among the multiple SP reaches, there are some that do not notify the player of any prompt to operate a button or the like at the branching point when determining whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state. In such SP reaches, no time shift occurs due to the operation. However, even in such SP reaches, a re-draw performance can be executed in the same way as in SP reaches that do cause a time shift. In this way, a common performance can be used regardless of whether or not there is a time shift, so that no sense of incongruity is created even when there is only one re-draw performance. Furthermore, by limiting the re-draw performance to one, the data volume can be reduced.

[Re-draw performance 30]
In the flow of going to the re-draw performance after the swinging display of the decorative pattern at the big win in the specified introduction part,
The timing of the transition to the re-draw performance is designed so that the movement is an extension of the decorative pattern after the specific display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 266, the timing of the movement of the patterns after the white-out screen is set so that it is an extension of the movement of the patterns before the white-out screen. For example, the movement of the patterns before the white-out screen is designed to be one of a series of movements in which the patterns move from a right-side position (K3) to a front position (K5) to a left-side position (K6). In other words, when the patterns are swinging in a clockwise direction in one of a series of movements, a white-out due to a re-draw performance is executed, and then the patterns continue to expand and rotate to the right. In this way, the series of clockwise movements of the patterns from the pattern swinging period to the re-draw performance can be used to prevent the movement of the patterns from feeling unnatural.

<Terminology>
The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has been described above. In the following, some terms used in the present specification will be explained.

"Variable display" (fluctuating display) includes the variable display of multiple types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), multiple types of normal symbols, and multiple types of decorative symbols.

The "changes" in the patterns include updating the display of multiple types of patterns, such as multiple types of special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern), multiple types of normal patterns, and multiple types of decorative patterns, scrolling the display of multiple types of patterns, transforming one or more patterns, enlarging/reducing one or more patterns, turning on/flashing/turning off lamps (fourth pattern unit 50, special pattern 1 variable display unit 53, special pattern 2 variable display unit 54, etc.), etc.

The "decorative symbols" include symbols that are variably displayed in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative symbol display areas in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game.

"Reduced symbols" are symbols that are smaller than the decorative symbols when they are reduced in size. When the reduced symbols are displayed, a number symbol that is the same as the decorative symbol is displayed on the edge of the screen, but smaller than the decorative symbol.

The "small patterns" include patterns that correspond to the changing display of the decorative patterns that are displayed in a smaller size than the decorative patterns. The small patterns are arranged horizontally in a row and correspond to the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R.

"Confirmation of the pattern" includes the stopping of the fluctuations of the fourth pattern unit 50, the special pattern 1 variable display section 53, the special pattern 2 variable display section 54, the decorative patterns, etc., which had been changing, and the final determination of the pattern in that special pattern game. For example, this includes a state in which the fluctuations of the decorative patterns changing in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns changing in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative patterns changing in the right decorative pattern display area 5R have all stopped.

The "pattern determination period" includes a period during which the display result is determined by stopping the fluctuations of the fourth pattern unit 50, the special pattern 1 variable display unit 53, the special pattern 2 variable display unit 54, the decorative patterns, etc., which had been changing. For example, it includes a state in which the fluctuations of the decorative patterns changing in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns changing in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative patterns changing in the right decorative pattern display area 5R each stop, and the display result is displayed definitively.

"Reach" includes the situation where decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be displayed in a variable manner when the decorative symbols that have been stopped and displayed form part of a winning combination, and includes a situation where, for example, the decorative symbol "2" stops in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol "2" stops in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, but the decorative symbol display in the center decorative symbol display area 5C continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

"Turning off" of the lighting means (light emitting means) includes a state in which the value of the luminance data for turning on (emitting light from) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is "0" (the value indicating the lowest luminance). Note that "turning off" of the lighting means (light emitting means) may also include a state in which the value of the luminance data for turning on (emitting light from) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is a value close to the luminance data "0" corresponding to turning off, such as "1" or "2". Note that a state in which the value of the luminance data for turning on (emitting light from) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is a value close to the luminance data "0" corresponding to turning off, such as "1" or "2", may be included in "turning on" or "almost turning off".

"Lighting" or "light emission" of the lighting means (light emitting means) refers to a state in which the value of the luminance data for lighting (emitting light) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is higher than when it is off, and includes a state in which the value of the luminance data is equal to or greater than the luminance data value ("0") corresponding to the above-mentioned "off." "Lighting" refers to constant lighting, in which the lamp is always on, wave lighting, in which multiple lamps are switched from off to on in sequence, and hazy lighting, in which the lamp is dimly lit while changing its luminance.

"Flashing" of a lighting means (light-emitting means) includes a state in which the lamp (lighting means, light-emitting means) is in a state other than "off", "almost off", or "on", and includes the lamp repeating "on" and "off" over time. Also, "flash" of a lighting means (light-emitting means) includes the lamp repeating "on" and "almost off" over time.

"Brightness" is a value indicating the brightness of a lamp (lighting means, light emitting means), and in this embodiment, the brightness data is expressed in hexadecimal as data corresponding to brightness. For example, when the brightness data used to control a specific lamp is "0", the lamp is controlled so that the brightness of the specific lamp is the lowest (the lamp is dimmed), and when the brightness data used to control a specific lamp is "F", the lamp is controlled so that the brightness of the specific lamp is the highest (the lamp is brightest). As described above, the brightness data corresponds to the value of the current flowing through the lamp, and when the brightness data used to control a specific lamp is "0", the current flowing through the specific lamp is the smallest, and when the brightness data used to control a specific lamp is "F", the current flowing through the specific lamp is the largest. Note that "lamp" is not limited to LED (light emitting diode) lamps, but includes any type of lamp, such as EL (electroluminescence) lamps and incandescent light bulbs.

The "lighting color" or "emission color" of a lamp includes colors represented by the light emitted by one or more light-emitting elements contained in the lamp. For example, if a lamp is composed of an LED consisting of three light-emitting elements, such as "R" (red), "G" (green), and "B" (blue), the LED lights up in various colors as the three light-emitting elements emit light depending on the current to the three light-emitting elements, which is adjusted by an LED driver based on brightness data. Note that the "lighting color" of a lamp varies depending on the color of the light-emitting element; for example, in the case of an LED consisting of only "W" (white) light-emitting elements, the lamp lights up in white, although the brightness varies depending on the current flowing, and in the case of an LED consisting of only "R" (red) light-emitting elements, the lamp lights up in red, although the brightness varies depending on the current flowing.

The "rainbow colors" (seven colors) of the lamp's lighting colors include colors that are made up of seven different colors. For example, the "rainbow colors" include red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple. Note that the "rainbow colors" are not limited to the colors mentioned above, and may be made up of the other seven colors. Even with the same "rainbow colors," the lighting pattern of rainbow colors may differ depending on the set brightness data, just as the lighting pattern differs between smooth lighting based on the brightness data table (grandchild table) shown in FIG. 225 and blinking based on the brightness data table (grandchild table) shown in FIG. 256.

"Colors corresponding to characters" include colors that are predefined for each character that appears in the effects of the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the color corresponding to the character Yume Yume-chan is green, the color corresponding to Jam-chan is purple, and the color corresponding to Bakuchu is red, and so on.

"The light color corresponding to a character" is the lighting color (light emission color) of the game effect lamp 9, and includes colors that are predetermined for each character that appears in the effects of the pachinko game machine 1. For example, "the light color corresponding to a character" includes the lighting color (light emission color) of the game effect lamp 9 in green corresponding to the Yume Yume character, the lighting color (light emission color) of the game effect lamp 9 in purple corresponding to Jam-chan, and the lighting color (light emission color) of the game effect lamp 9 in red corresponding to Bakuchu.

"Dialogue sounds" include sounds that correspond to words spoken by characters appearing in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and are output in time with the words spoken by those characters. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, sounds (dialogue sounds) that correspond to words spoken by characters are output in time with the image of the character that appears in the performance.

"Dialogue subtitles" include characters corresponding to dialogue sounds that are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 when the dialogue sounds are output. Dialogue subtitles are also referred to as subtitle displays.

"Physical sounds" include physical sounds that are generated by the movements of objects such as characters and objects that appear in the performance. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, physical sounds that would be generated by the movements of objects such as characters and objects that appear in the performance are output in accordance with the images of the objects.

"Onomatopoeia" includes simulated sounds that express the movements of objects such as characters and objects that appear in the performance. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, simulated sounds (onomatopoeia) that express the movements of objects such as characters and objects that appear in the performance are output in accordance with the images of the objects.

"Character action" includes a performance in which a character appearing in the performance of the pachinko gaming machine 1 performs some kind of action. For example, it includes an action in which the Yume Yume character chases the Bakuchu character.

The "re-draw effect" includes an effect that is executed before the pattern is determined, in which a normal jackpot pattern that does not result in a special jackpot (for example, an even number pattern such as a "2") is temporarily stopped and displayed in the changing display of the decorative pattern, and then the normal jackpot pattern is upgraded to a special jackpot pattern (for example, an odd number pattern such as a "3") to arouse interest in whether or not the normal jackpot pattern will be upgraded to a special jackpot pattern (for example, an odd number pattern such as a "3").

"Replacement display" is an effect included in the "re-draw effect", and includes the display of an image in which a temporarily stopped decorative symbol is replaced by other symbols in sequence, causing the decorative symbols to change one after another. In this embodiment, "replacement display" includes a display in which the symbol "2" fluctuates at high speed and is replaced by other symbols in sequence, until the symbol "2" or "3" finally stops.

"Repeated display" refers to the repetition of the same display, and refers to the repetition of a display using the same animation. This is an effect included in the "re-lottery effect", and includes a display in which a decorative pattern that has been temporarily stopped is displayed multiple times with the same animation. As an example, "repeated display" includes a display in which the "7" pattern changes rapidly and is replaced by other patterns in sequence, until the "7" pattern finally stops.

"Shaking display" refers to the display of a decorative pattern that sways, indicating that the change has not ended and is still ongoing.

A "stop display" is when the decorative pattern is displayed still and not moving, indicating that the fluctuation has ended.

"Swing speed" refers to the speed at which the decorative pattern moves from the first position to the second position while being displayed swinging.

The "first pattern aspect," "second pattern aspect," and "third pattern aspect" are aspects that indicate the position of the decorative pattern. For example, when the decorative pattern is displayed swinging up and down, if the first aspect is in the center position, the second aspect is the upper position, and the third aspect is the lower position. Also, when the decorative pattern is displayed swinging back and forth, if the first aspect is in the front position, the second aspect is the left-facing position, and the third aspect is the right-facing position.

The "fanfare effect" is an effect that is executed at the start of a jackpot game state, and notifies the player that a jackpot game state has been reached.

"Advancing a movable body (prop)" refers to the action of the movable prop moving from its initial position. The edge of the movable area within which the prop moves is the advancing position.

"Retreating a movable body (prop)" refers to the action of the movable body (prop) moving from an advanced position to an initial position. The initial position of the movable area within which the prop moves is the retrenched position.

"Effect display for moving movable body" is a display to enhance the visual effect around the reel on the screen as the reel moves to the advance position as a movable body. For example, an effect image is displayed to make the reel movement stand out when the reach develops into the latter half or when a jackpot is announced.

"Story development" refers to the progression of a story or a series of performances. In other words, the story is presented to the player in a continuous flow, without interruption by scene changes or the like.

"Part" and "scene" each refer to a section that makes up a performance, with a part being a larger section than a scene. Parts are divided according to roles.

"Scene change"
A scene change mainly refers to a change in the display, and in particular to a change in the background, characters, etc. that are displayed.

A "cut-in display" is an effect in which another image is displayed by interrupting the currently displayed image. The cut-in display can also indicate the likelihood of a jackpot by the color of the cut-in display. For example, if the cut-in display is red, the likelihood of a jackpot is higher than if it is green.

The "switching display (eye-catching display)" is a presentation that is displayed when the scene changes. In this embodiment, the eye-catching display is used when the scene changes from a state indicating a loss to a state of normal play. The eye-catching display has the role of making it easy to understand that the Super Reach has ended.

"Shielding display (shutter display)" is a display in which the image display device 5 displays an image such as a shutter so as to cover the entire area displayed by the image display device 5, shielding the image that was displayed before the shielding display was performed. The shielding display may also be performed by displaying something other than a shutter to shield the image.

"The brightness data changes" means that the timer for the brightness data defined in the grandchild table reaches 0, and the next brightness data is used. The change in brightness data means that the light emission mode of the lamp changes. The change in the light emission mode of the lamp gives the player the impression that the story development of the currently displayed scene has been updated.

"Brightness data does not switch" means that the timer for the brightness data defined in the grandchild table does not reach 0, and that brightness data continues to be used. By not switching brightness data, the light emission mode of the lamp remains constant. By keeping the light emission mode of the lamp constant, the player is given the impression that the story development of the currently displayed scene has stopped and is not being updated.

"Video data" is data for displaying videos, including animations. Images displayed on the image display device 5 are switched at high speed, several tens of images per second, to give the appearance of movement. Video data may be compressed before being stored.

The "first video data" is video data that is created using many images to move a character.

The "second video data" is video data that is created using fewer images to move the character.

"Specific character movement" refers to the movement that corresponds to a specific character among the multiple characters that appear in the performance.

"Blackout" is an effect in which a black image is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, causing the display area to go dark (black out) so that the image displayed in the display area cannot be seen. The blackout may be performed in such a way that the expectation (reliability) of a jackpot varies depending on the duration of the darkened state.

"Whiteout" is an effect in which a white image is displayed (whiteout) in the display area of the image display device 5 to make the image displayed in the display area unrecognizable. The whiteout may be in a form in which the expectation (reliability) of a jackpot varies depending on the duration for which the white image is displayed.

"A specific display that is difficult to see" refers to an image displayed on the screen that hides the displayed decorative symbols from the player. For example, a white image is displayed across the entire screen (whiteout), making the decorative symbols invisible to the player.

"Fade effect" refers to fade-in and fade-out used in video technology. Fade-in means gradually changing from a state where a background image is displayed to a state where a specific image is visible. In this embodiment, for example, from a state where the room background is displayed, an image showing dialogue is gradually displayed. Gradually displaying means gradually decreasing the transparency of the image showing dialogue. For example, after displaying the dialogue image at 100% transparency, the transparency is decreased by 10% every 0.1 seconds, and the dialogue image is displayed after 1 second. Moreover, fade-out means, in contrast to fade-in, gradually changing from a state where a specific image is visible superimposed on the background image to only the background image. In this embodiment, for example, from a state where an image showing dialogue is displayed on top of the room background, the image showing dialogue is gradually made invisible. Gradually making invisible means gradually increasing the transparency of the image showing dialogue. For example, after displaying a dialogue image with 0% transparency, the transparency is increased by 10% every 0.1 seconds, and after 1 second the dialogue image becomes invisible. The fade effect also includes a crossfade, which simultaneously fades in and fades out, swapping images.

<Example of time-saving control without going through a hit>
Next, an example of executing time-saving control without going through a win (a big win, a small win, etc.) as a time-saving state will be described.
(Example of time-saving control using time-saving symbols)

(A1) In each of the above-mentioned characteristic parts and modified examples, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) is exemplified as always passing through a big win state or a small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7A is activated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) may be made without activating the special variable winning ball device 7A. In other words, the time-saving state may be controlled to not pass through a win (big win, small win, etc.).

(A2) In addition, the time-saving symbols described above may be part of the losing symbols or part of the small winning symbols.

(A3) In addition, when performing lottery processing for the derivation and display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using a random number dedicated to the lottery of time-saving symbols, or the lottery may be performed using a random number for other lotteries, such as a lottery random number for a losing symbol, a lottery random number for a jackpot symbol, a lottery random number for a small jackpot symbol, a random number for judging a jackpot, or a lottery random number for a fall lottery.

(A4) Furthermore, these time-saving symbols may be of multiple types, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as small win symbols and loss symbols. In this case, the small win symbol used in combination may determine whether or not to transition to the time-saving state. However, when a time-saving symbol is selected, no further lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to transition to the time-saving state, and no lottery is conducted to determine the number of times the time-saving state will be used.

(A5) In addition, when a lottery is held for the time-saving symbols and the setting value can be changed, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols does not change according to the setting value. In other words, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols is the same for all setting values, but the probability of drawing these time-saving symbols may be different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

(A6) In addition, the timing of obtaining the random number when drawing the time-saving pattern may be when the ball enters the start hole (first start hole, second start hole), regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used.

(A7) In addition, for winning when a lottery for a time-saving pattern is conducted, if a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used, the result of the lottery using the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is the winning value, if a small win pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific small win pattern random number value is the winning value, and if a random number for a fall lottery judgment value is used to draw the time-saving pattern, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value is the winning value. Also, a lottery using a structure, for example, a time-saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the passage of the game ball through the time-saving area may be the winning of the time-saving pattern.

(A8) In addition, when the lottery for the time-saving symbol is performed using a structure and the small winning symbol is used in combination with the time-saving symbol, the variable display count of the time-saving state (time-saving count) is set so as not to change depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed through.

(A9) In addition, when a lottery is held for the time-saving pattern, if a losing pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific losing pattern random number value can be the winning value, and if a winning pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific winning pattern random number value can be the winning value. However, when these random numbers are used as the winning value, this is only possible for machines whose settings cannot be changed, since performance other than the probability of winning varies depending on the settings.

(A10) The timing of determining the result of the lottery for the time-saving symbol may be performed after the determination of a jackpot. The lottery for the time-saving symbol is not performed in the time-saving state (high base) or when there is a high probability, regardless of the random number value used in the lottery, but is performed only in the low probability low base state. However, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed when the time-saving state is already established, the number of times the time-saving symbol is reset or the lottery is not performed, as long as it is determined for each gaming machine.

(A11) In addition, the number of times the time-saving symbol is displayed when it is derived can have multiple predetermined times depending on the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, the conditions for granting the time-saving symbol can be different for each time-saving symbol.

(A12) In addition, when the number of times the time-saving pattern is used varies depending on the time-saving pattern, the lottery for allocating the time-saving pattern can be changed between special pattern 1 and special pattern 2.

(A13) In addition, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-saving times awarded may differ depending on the game state at that time. However, this must be determined in advance for the game state.

(A14) In addition, the lottery result for the time-saving pattern in a low-probability, low-base state can include the lottery result of "0 time-saving times."

(A15) In addition, a lottery for deriving a time-saving end pattern (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of time-saving times may be set to the number of times after the start of the time-saving period until the time-saving end pattern is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of time-saving times may not be set, and may be unlimited in principle.

(A16) In addition, the number of time-saving times and the conditions for granting the time-saving times may be different between the time-saving times controlled by the time-saving symbols and the time-saving times controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

(A17) In addition, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the point at which the symbol determination time for the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, when a small win symbol random number is used to select the time-saving symbol, if a small win is won and the time-saving state is entered, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the end of the small win operation.

(A18) In addition, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled in the case of a lottery using a structure is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in a game state in which the structure is operated (for example, a small win state).

(A19) In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high-probability, low-base state for a predetermined number of variable displays after a jackpot (a so-called specified-number-of-times-variable-game machine (ST machine)), the gaming machine may be in the high-probability, low-base state when the gaming center opens, and after the high-probability, low-base state has ended after the specified number of variable displays have been executed, it may be controlled to a time-saving state.

(A20) In addition, if a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times the time-saving limiter is activated is updated.

(A21) The time required for the time-saving symbol to be determined may also be different from the time required for the other symbols to be determined.

(Other examples of time-saving control using time-saving symbols)
As another time-saving control using the time-saving symbol, the control described below may be executed.

(B1) In the normal state, game control may be performed to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of the variable display result of the time-saving pattern with a special pattern (special display result), and game control may not be performed to transition from the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state based on the display of the variable display result of the time-saving pattern with a special pattern in the time-saving state (even if the time-saving pattern is displayed, game state switching control such as overwriting the time-saving state (such as the time-saving state occurring again) may not be performed). In addition, different effects may be performed when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern with a special pattern is displayed in the normal state and when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern with a special pattern is displayed in the time-saving state (for example, for decorative patterns, a special pattern is displayed as the time-saving pattern in the normal state and a general losing pattern is displayed in the time-saving state). This allows suitable control depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed (for example, the interest is increased by executing effects depending on whether the state is changed or not).

(B2) In a gaming machine controlled as in (B1), when the display result of a special symbol is a time-saving symbol, the special symbol may be a time-saving symbol that is common in both the normal state and the time-saving state, and the decorative symbol may be a different symbol displayed as the display result in the normal state and the time-saving state (for example, the decorative symbol may be a special symbol that corresponds to the time-saving symbol in the normal state, but a symbol that simply corresponds to the time-saving symbol may be displayed in the time-saving state, such as a missing symbol). This prevents the player from feeling that they have lost out due to the display result of the decorative symbol in the time-saving state, and suppresses a decline in interest in the game.

(B3) In a gaming machine controlled as in (B1), in the normal state, a presentation is executed that suggests whether the display result of the decorative pattern will be a special pattern (time-saving pattern), but in the time-saving state, the presentation that suggests whether the display result of the decorative pattern will be a special pattern (time-saving pattern) may not be executed. This prevents the player from feeling that they have lost out due to the display result of the decorative pattern due to the presentation in the time-saving state, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

(B4) In a gaming machine controlled as in (B1), the fixed display time of the decorative symbols (the time for which the display state is maintained after the fixed surface result is displayed) may be controlled to be different between the normal state and the time-saving state. This prevents the player from feeling that they have lost out due to the presentation of the decorative symbols in the time-saving state, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

(B5) After the first variable display using the first special pattern has been performed, and after the second variable display using the second special pattern has been performed, the state can be controlled to be advantageous to the player, and game control may be performed to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of a variable display result of a time-saving pattern using a special pattern (special display result) in the normal state, and game control may not be performed to transition from the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state based on the display of a variable display result of a time-saving pattern using a special pattern in the time-saving state (game state switching control may not be performed to overwrite the time-saving state (such that the time-saving state occurs again) even if a time-saving pattern is displayed). The second variable display has a higher rate of displaying the variable display result of the time-saving pattern than the first variable display, and information about the variable display is stored as reserved memory information, and different effects can be executed depending on whether the reserved memory information is stored when the time-saving state ends (such as a display of continued time-saving when switching to time-saving control, and an effect that can identify that time-saving control is not being executed when switching to time-saving control is not switched to), and during the time-saving state, right-hit play is performed in response to a right-hit notification (an indication instructing right-hit), until all variable displays based on the reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends are completed. It is also possible to disable a left-hit notification (an indication instructing left-hit). This allows for suitable control depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed (for example, interest is increased by executing an effect depending on whether the state is switched or not).

(B6) After the first variable display using the first special pattern has been performed, and after the second variable display using the second special pattern has been performed, the state can be controlled to be advantageous to the player, and game control may be performed to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of a variable display result of a time-saving pattern using a special pattern (special display result) in the normal state, and game control may not be performed to transition from the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state based on the display of a variable display result of a time-saving pattern using a special pattern in the time-saving state (game state switching control may not be performed to overwrite the time-saving state (such that the time-saving state occurs again) even if a time-saving pattern is displayed). The second variable display has a higher rate of displaying the variable display result of the time-saving pattern than the first variable display, and information about the variable display is stored as reserved memory information, and different effects can be executed depending on whether the reserved memory information is stored when the time-saving state ends (such as a display of continued time-saving when transitioning to time-saving control, and an effect that can identify that time-saving control is not being executed when not transitioning to time-saving control), and during the time-saving state, right-hitting play is performed in response to a right-hitting notification, until all variable displays based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends are completed. It is also possible to disable a left-hitting notification (a notification instructing left-hitting). This allows for suitable control depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed (for example, interest is increased by executing effects depending on whether the state is transitioned or not).

(B7) A left hit notification may be executed in the variable display (first variable display) that is executed after the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends is completed. This allows the game to proceed smoothly because instructions on how to hit are displayed appropriately, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

(B8) The notification mode of the right-hit notification executed in response to a win may be different between when the display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends and when a win (small win, big win) occurs in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining reserved memory information is executed. This prevents the player from feeling like they have lost out due to the display result of the decorative pattern through the presentation of the notification mode of the right-hit notification, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

(B9) In the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends, when there is reserved memory information that displays the display result of a time-saving pattern and when there is no reserved memory information, it may be possible to execute a different effect after executing a common effect (for example, when the fourth of four remaining reserved memories has reserved memory information that displays the display result of a time-saving pattern, a common effect that suggests whether or not to return to the time-saving state can be executed up to the variable display based on the third reserved memory information, and a time-saving state return effect different from the common effect can be executed with the variable display based on the fourth reserved memory information). This prevents the player from feeling that they have lost out due to the display result of the decorative pattern due to the effect of the notification mode of the right-hit notification, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

(B10) The notification mode of the right-hit notification executed in response to a win may be different between the presentation at the time of transition to the time-saving state based on the display result of the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends and the presentation at the time of transition to the time-saving state based on the display result of the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining reserved memory information is executed. This allows the presentation to change depending on the game state, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(B11) The final display time (the time from when the finalized surface result is displayed to when the display state is maintained) of the display result in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends may be the same as the final display time of the display result in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining reserved memory information is executed. This can suppress an increase in control data.

(B12) During the period in which the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends is executed, the right-hit notification may not be executed, and when the time-saving pattern display result is displayed in the variable display based on the remaining reserved memory information, the right-hit notification may be executed during the initial period at the start of the next variable display. This allows the player to play smoothly because the instructions on how to play are given appropriately, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(B13) In the normal state, a game is controlled to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving pattern with a special pattern, and a common specific effect (reach effect, advance notice effect) can be executed when the variable display result is a winning pattern (specific display result) such as a small win pattern or a big win pattern, and when the variable display result is a time-saving pattern (special display result), and the rate at which the time-saving pattern (special display result) is displayed may differ depending on which of the multiple types of common specific effects is executed. And when the display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed in the variable display, a right-hit notification may be executed during the initial period at the start of the next variable display. This allows the effect to be controlled appropriately depending on the game state when the time-saving pattern (special display result) is displayed.

(B14) After executing the common specific effect, the display result may be a winning pattern (specific display result) or a time-saving pattern (special display result). This increases the variety of variable display results, making the game more interesting.

(B15) The game control CPU 103 can select a common variation pattern for when a winning symbol (specific display result) is obtained, when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained, or when a losing symbol (predetermined display result) is obtained, and the presentation control CPU 120 can execute different presentations in the variable display depending on the type of pattern designation command that designates the display result, even when it receives a command designating the same variation pattern from the game control CPU 103. This increases the variety of presentations in the variable display, making the game more interesting.

(B16) After the common specific effect is executed, a special effect can be executed when a time-saving pattern (special display result) is obtained. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game by the special effect after the execution of the common specific effect.

(B17) Depending on the type of common specific effect, a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving pattern (special display result) is achieved may or may not be executed (for example, a special effect may not be executed when an effect with a higher expectation of a win among multiple types of super reach effects is executed). This allows the expectation of a win to be maintained without excessively encouraging the time-saving state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(B18) The expectation (proportion) of the time-saving symbol (special display result) appearing when the special effect is executed may be different depending on the type of common specific effect. This allows the expectation of a win to be maintained without executing an effect that excessively stimulates only the time-saving state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(B18) The expectation (proportion) of the time-saving symbol (special display result) appearing when the special effect is executed may be different depending on the type of common specific effect. This allows the expectation of a win to be maintained without executing an effect that excessively stimulates only the time-saving state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(B19) The expectation level (proportion) of a time-saving pattern (special display result) may be different depending on the presentation mode of a predetermined presentation different from the common specific presentation (for example, a presentation that displays an active display (a display that has moved from the display position of a pending display to another display position, and that performs a presentation that can suggest the expectation level of a hit corresponding to the currently active variable display) that can change the display mode depending on the expectation level of a hit)). This allows for an increase in interest in the game, as a presentation that excessively stimulates only the time-saving state is not executed and the expectation of a hit is maintained.

(B20) In a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is reached, an effect that indicates a winning symbol (specific display result) (such as a special jackpot with a higher play value than the time-saving state) may be executed after an effect that suggests the time-saving symbol (special display result) is reached (such as a time-saving suggestion effect). This increases the interest in the game because the expectation of a win is maintained without excessively emphasizing only the time-saving state.

(B21) The game control CPU 103 can control a time-saving state (special state) with a different number of time-saving times (duration of time-saving times) depending on the type of the multiple types of time-saving patterns (special display results) provided (for example, first time-saving pattern: 50 time-saving times, second time-saving pattern: 100 time-saving times, etc.), and the presentation control CPU 120 can execute a presentation in which the number of time-saving times (duration) granted when the time-saving pattern stops varies depending on the type of presentation executed (for example, the type of reach presentation, etc.). This allows the player's attention to be focused on the number of time-saving times that will follow depending on the type of presentation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(B22) In the normal state, a game control is performed to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving pattern with a special pattern, and a command is sent from the game control CPU 103 (game control means) that controls the progress of the game, and the performance control CPU 120 (performance control means) that receives the command can execute a performance based on the command. The command sent includes a special command that can specify the transition (control) from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state), and when the performance control CPU 120 receives multiple types of commands including a special command, it may limit the execution of the pre-reading preview performance for the reserved memory information that occurs after the reserved memory information that is specified to execute a variable display that can transition to the time-saving state (special state) based on the pre-reading of the reserved memory information (such as not executing it at all or allowing it to be executed rarely). This allows the performance control to be executed appropriately according to the game state when the time-saving pattern (special display result) is displayed.

(B23) It is also possible to restrict the execution of a pre-reading preview performance for reserved memory information that occurs after reserved memory information that has been identified as a variable display that can transition (control) to a jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) based on a pre-reading of the reserved memory information. In addition, it is also possible to make it possible to execute a performance of a common aspect as a pre-reading preview performance during the execution restriction of such a pre-reading preview performance. In this way, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game by restricting the execution of performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state as the gaming state transitions.

(B24) In both cases where the variable display based on the reserved memory information for the pre-reading target is a variable display that displays a time-saving pattern (special display result) and a variable display that appears to display a time-saving pattern (special display result) but does not, the execution of the pre-reading preview performance for the reserved memory information that occurs after the reserved memory information may be restricted. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game by restricting the execution of performance control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state changes.

(B25) During the execution restriction of the above-mentioned look-ahead preview performance, the look-ahead preview performance does not execute a performance with a higher expectation level than a specific expectation level (for example, when the expectation level of the color of the reserved display is blue < green < red, the color of the reserved display is not changed to red). This restricts the execution of performance control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state changes, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

(B26) During the execution restriction of the above-mentioned look-ahead preview performance, the look-ahead preview performance does not execute a specific type of performance (for example, when the expected color of the reserved display is blue < green < red, the color of the reserved display is not changed to red). This restricts the execution of performance control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state changes, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

(Example of time-saving control using the number of variable display times resulting in a predetermined display result, such as the number of variable display times of failure)
Next, an example of time-saving control using the number of variable displays (the number of times that a variable display that has become a miss) that have become a predetermined display result (such as a miss display result, a small hit display result that does not become a big hit, etc.) in the normal state will be described. As described below, the time-saving state (special state) may be executable on the condition that the number of times that a variable display that has become a predetermined display result (such as a miss display result, a small hit display result that does not become a big hit, etc.) has continued has reached a special number (for example, 1000 times). Note that, as the predetermined result, the time-saving state (special state) may be executable on the condition that the number of times that a variable display that has become a miss display result has continued has reached a special number.

(C1) After the first variable display by the first special symbol is performed and after the second variable display by the second special symbol is performed, the game can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the fact that the variable display result has become a specific display result, and the numerical information of the number of times the variable display has been executed that has become a predetermined display result (such as a miss display result, a small win display result that does not become a big win, etc.) in the normal state is updated, and when a special condition is established in which the number of times the variable display that has become the predetermined display result (the number of times it continues) has reached a special number (for example, 1000 times, etc.) based on the numerical information, the game can be controlled to transition from the normal state to a time-saving state (special state). The numerical information may be updated both when the predetermined display result is achieved in the first variable display and when the predetermined display result is achieved in the second variable display. As a result, the numerical information of the number of times the predetermined display result has been achieved continues to be updated regardless of whether the first variable display or the second variable display is executable, making it easier for the player to be rescued by the time-saving state and increasing the player's motivation to play. This makes it possible to optimally rescue players by reducing the time.

(C2) The special condition may be established when it is determined based on the numerical information that a predetermined display result different from the specific display result has been displayed a special number of times (e.g., 1000 times) in succession. This allows the player to be rescued by transitioning to a time-saving state (special state) when a series of display results unfavorable to the player are displayed, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

(C3) The numerical information may be updated when a variable display is executed even in a state other than the normal state (a high probability state, a time-saving state). This allows the player to be appropriately rescued when a series of display results that are unfavorable to the player are displayed.

(C4) The numerical information may be initialized when a predetermined initialization condition is met. Such an initialization condition may be met by control to the advantageous state. This makes it possible to suppress rescue when there is no longer a need to rescue the player, such as when an advantageous state is reached that is advantageous to the player, and to prevent the player's gambling tendency from increasing more than necessary.

(C5) When a special display result (time-saving pattern) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result in the normal state, control for transitioning to a time-saving state (special state) can be executed, and the predetermined condition may be established when the special display result is displayed. This makes it possible to suppress rescue when there is no longer a need to rescue the player, such as when the time-saving state (special state) that is advantageous to the player is reached, and to prevent the tendency to gamble more than necessary.

(C6) The predetermined condition may be satisfied when the variable display is executed a special number of times. This effectively makes it possible to control the game to a time-saving state (special state) until the next advantageous state occurs, thereby increasing the degree of relief for the player.

(C7) When the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored, and when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is met, the backed up and stored data can be initialized, and the numerical information can be initialized when the specific condition is met. This prevents the numerical information backed up in the event of a power outage from being initialized and remaining when the data is initialized, thereby preventing the amusement center from being disadvantaged.

(C8) The time-saving state (special state) for a period of more than the special number (for example, 1000 times or more) can be controlled based on the numerical information becoming the special number (for example, 1000 times or more), and during the time-saving state (special state), the time-saving state (special state) can be controlled again based on the numerical information becoming the special number, and different effects can be executed in the first time-saving state (special state) and the second time-saving state (special state). As a result, in a game in an extremely unfavorable state such as being controlled in the second time-saving state (special state), it is possible to change the appearance of the effects, such as shortening the variable display time in the second time-saving state more than in the first time-saving state, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. It is also possible to execute similar effects in the first time-saving state (special state) and the second time-saving state (special state) without executing such effects. This makes it possible to prevent players from being overly aware that they are in an extremely unfavorable state, such as being controlled to the second time-saving state (special state), and prevents a decline in interest in the game.

(C9) When the value of the special chart process flag is a first value (0 to 2), a first process related to variable display is executed, when the value of the special chart process flag is a second value (4 or more) different from the first value, a second process related to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) is executed, and when the value of the special chart process flag is a third value (3) different from the first and second values, a third process for controlling to a time-saving state (special state) based on the establishment of the special condition is executed. Also. The game ball can be hit into the first path (left game area) and the second path (right game area), and in the normal state, the game ball is hit into the first path, and in the time-saving state (special state), the game ball is hit into the second path to play. And, during the execution of the third process, although it is not controlled to the time-saving state (special state), a notification that the ball should be shot into the second path (for example, a right-hit notification by a right-hit lamp, etc.) may be issued. In addition, during execution of the third process, a notification effect may be given to indicate that the game will transition to a time-saving state (special state). This allows for suitable control even if new functions are added to the gaming machine and the specifications become more complex. For example, by turning on the right-hit lamp using the gaming control CPU 103, it is possible to execute a notification effect regarding the launch direction early (before the actual time-saving fluctuation begins) when the game actually transitions to the time-saving state (special state).

(C10) When the specific display result is displayed in a variable display where the special condition is met, the second process may be executed after the first process is executed, and the third process may not be executed. This gives priority to control to an advantageous state over control to a time-saving state (special state) based on the fulfillment of a special condition, so that the result is not more advantageous to the player, and it is possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game.

(C11) The numerical information is updated when the variable display starts, and based on the updated numerical information becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, the time-saving state (special state) is controlled after the variable display in which the numerical information has become a specific value ends (next fluctuation starts, waiting for customers) and when the updated numerical information becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, the special information (special number of times reached flag) is changed from a first value to a second value (flag set), and when controlling to the time-saving state (special state), the special information is changed from the second value to the first value (flag reset). This makes it possible to preferably execute control to transition to the time-saving state (special state) by managing the special information.

(C12) The game control CPU 103 may select and determine a variation pattern of the variable display, and may select and determine a variation pattern of the symbol determination time that differs when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information. This makes it possible to preferably execute a performance when the variable display of the special number of times is executed.

(C13) When the value of the special chart process flag is a first numerical value (0 to 2), a first process related to variable display is executed, when the value of the special chart process flag is a second numerical value (4 or more) different from the first numerical value, a second process related to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) is executed, and when the value of the special chart process flag is a third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, a third process for controlling to a time-saving state (special state) based on the establishment of a special condition is executed. Also. A command is transmitted from the CPU 103 (game control means) for game control that controls the progress of the game, and a performance based on the command can be executed by the CPU 120 (performance control means) for performance control that receives the command. And, it may be possible to transmit specific information (background designation, variable pattern) according to when the value of the special chart process flag is the second numerical value and when it is the third numerical value when in the special state. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. For example, different game states can be suitably identified, making game control easier. Then, by varying the command depending on the game state identified at that time, the presentation control CPU 120 (presentation control means) can execute suitable presentation control depending on the game state.

(C14) When the special condition is established during the time-saving state (special state), the value of the special chart process flag may be set to a fourth value different from the first value, the second value, and the third value, so that the time-saving state (special state) can be controlled again. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if new functions are installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become more complex.

(C15) During the time-saving state (special state), different effects may be executed depending on whether the time-saving state (special state) is entered based on the display of the specific display result (winning symbol) or whether the special condition (condition for the variable display count) is met and the time-saving state (special state) is entered (for example, when the time-saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display count is equal to or greater than the special count, a time-saving state effect with a shorter fluctuation time is executed than when the time-saving state is entered after the end of a jackpot game state). This makes it possible to execute effects for the time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(C16) During the time-saving state (special state), it may be possible to execute similar effects when the time-saving state (special state) is entered based on the display of the specific display result (winning symbol) and when the special condition (condition for the variable display count) is met and the time-saving state (special state) is entered (for example, a time-saving state effect with a similar variable time may be executed when the time-saving state is entered because the variable display count is equal to or greater than the special count and when the time-saving state is entered after a jackpot has ended). This does not require new performance data, so development costs do not increase, and interest in the game can be increased by not confusing the player.

(C17) During the time-saving state (special state), different effects may be executed depending on whether the time-saving state (special state) is entered based on the display of the special display result (time-saving pattern) or whether the special condition (condition for the number of variable displays) is met and the time-saving state (special state) is entered (for example, when the time-saving state is entered under the condition that the number of variable displays is equal to or greater than the special number, a time-saving state effect with a shorter fluctuation time than when the time-saving state is entered after the end of a jackpot is executed). This makes it possible to execute effects for the time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(C18) During the time-saving state (special state), it may be possible to execute the same effects when the time-saving state (special state) is entered based on the display of the special display result (time-saving pattern) and when the special condition (condition for the variable display count) is met and the time-saving state (special state) is entered (for example, when the time-saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display count is equal to or greater than the special count, a time-saving state effect with a shorter fluctuation time than when the time-saving state is entered after the end of a jackpot is executed). This does not require new effect data, so development costs do not increase, and interest in the game can be increased by not confusing the player.

(C19) In the event of a power outage or other power outage, various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored, and when the power is turned on, the game control CPU 103 can send predetermined information (a RAM clear command at cold start, and a command notifying the number of variable displays until the end of the time-saving state at hot start) to the presentation control CPU 120 based on the backed up data, and the presentation control CPU 120 can execute suggestive presentations (such as a different early morning number roll, a different background image, or a presentation that suggests whether a 100-spin variation is far or close) regarding the number of times the variable display has been executed in a predetermined period after the power is turned on, based on receiving the predetermined information. This gives players a motivation to play early in the morning, increasing the operating rate of the gaming machine while preventing an increase in the processing burden.

(C20) The game control CPU 103 may transmit specific information (a command capable of identifying information related to the time-saving state) to the presentation control CPU 120 in relation to the execution of the variable display, and the presentation control CPU 120 may execute a special presentation (such as a presentation suggesting the end of the time-saving state count) in relation to the control to the special state based on the establishment of a special condition based on the specific information. The specific information may include first specific information (first background designation, dedicated countdown presentation information) capable of identifying that the difference between the number of times the variable display has been executed and the special number is less than a predetermined value (for example, 127), and second specific information (such as a command to count down every 100 spins) capable of identifying that the difference between the number of times the variable display has been executed and the special number is greater than a predetermined value (for example, 127). This can reduce the risk of the player unknowingly losing money by periodically suggesting a function to the player, and can also suitably realize command processing.

(C21) The presentation control CPU 120 can execute a suggestion presentation (for time-saving state suggestion presentation control) that suggests that the game will be controlled to a time-saving state (special state) when a special condition is met, based on the execution of a first predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 300 times) that are less than the special number of times, and can execute a suggestion presentation each time a second predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 100 times) that are less than the first predetermined number are executed before the execution of the special number of variable displays. This reduces the risk of the player unknowingly incurring losses by periodically suggesting functions to the player.

(C22) When the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored, and the game control CPU 103 can initialize the backed up data when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is met, and the presentation control CPU 120 executes different presentations (such as different presentations when transitioning to the time-saving state) when it is controlled to the time-saving state (special state) based on the establishment of the special condition (condition for variable display count) before the specific display result is displayed after the backup-stored data is initialized and before the specific display result is displayed, and when it is controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition after the backup-stored data is initialized. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if new functions are installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. In addition, because the difference in the presentation allows the player to know whether the backed-up data has been initialized, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the setting of the jackpot probability can be changed, the player can know that the setting may have been changed, which increases the number of factors for guessing the setting and improves the interest in the game.

(C23) When the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored, and the game control CPU 103 can initialize the backed up data when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is met, and the performance control CPU 120 executes different performances after being controlled to the time-saving state (special state) (e.g., different performances after transitioning to the time-saving state) when the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition (condition for the variable number of displays) before the specific display result is displayed after the backup-stored data is initialized and before the specific display result (winning pattern) is displayed and the special state is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition after the backup-stored data is initialized. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if new functions are installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. In addition, because the difference in the presentation allows the player to know whether the backed-up data has been initialized, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the setting of the jackpot probability can be changed, the player can know that the setting may have been changed, which increases the number of factors for guessing the setting and improves the interest in the game.

(D1) The execution rate of the group preview effect may be different depending on whether the result of the variable display is a time-saving pattern, a jackpot, or a miss.

This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Each configuration related to the features of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be combined as appropriate with some or all of each configuration related to other features. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined as appropriate with some or all of each configuration related to other features.

The above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 1 is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a winning prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a winning prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (for example, slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of a performance (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a percentage of "0%". For example, this also includes one being a percentage of "0%" and the other being a percentage of "100%" or a percentage less than "100%".

The embodiments disclosed herein should be considered to be illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

The present invention is not limited to the above description. Furthermore, the specific configuration includes the above-mentioned embodiment and other examples described below, as well as modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

Furthermore, among the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described below, all or part of the configurations may be combined in any manner.

The above-mentioned and hereinafter-described embodiments disclosed herein should be considered as illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above-mentioned and hereinafter-described descriptions, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention may also be a gaming machine that can be controlled to a favorable advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) when a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed by executing a variable display of first identification information and a variable display of second identification information,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which the game is notified of the game being controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to a common introduction part in both an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be made to the advantageous state and an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be made to the advantageous state;
In a first epilogue part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be performed in the advantageous state, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
In a second epilogue part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be performed in the advantageous state, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
an average time from when one piece of luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part until when it is switched to the next piece of luminance data is set shorter than an average time from when one piece of luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part until when it is switched to the next piece of luminance data;
A rate at which information is displayed in the first epilogue part or the second epilogue part is higher than a rate at which information is displayed in the introduction part;
moreover,
A state control means capable of controlling to a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state (e.g., a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-19),
An update means capable of updating the numerical information based on the execution of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100);
The state control means can control the state to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times and a special condition is established (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75, and as shown in FIG. 8-17, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173).
The update means may be a gaming machine that updates numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in Figure 8-13).
According to this feature, the notification effect can be executed with suitable brightness control, which increases the interest. Furthermore, such a configuration can suitably realize rescue of the player. Specifically, even if the game state changes and a variable display of any identification information is executed, the numerical information continues to be updated, so the player can be rescued more easily, which increases the player's motivation to play.

In other words, by setting different brightness depending on whether or not the notification effect is controlled to be in an advantageous state, a suitable effect is executed to create a sense of anticipation for an advantageous state, while the numerical information is updated when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, so that the numerical information is more likely to reach the special number of times and the player is more likely to be rescued than, for example, when the numerical information is updated only when either the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information is executed, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is less likely to reduce the player's interest in playing when installed in an amusement facility and can increase the player's motivation to play.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can enhance interest, the gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine that can execute variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes state control means that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., as shown in Figure 8-17, a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100, and as shown in Figure 8-19, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100), and update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display (e.g., as shown in Figure 8-13, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100). The state control means can control the state to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, and a special condition is met (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75, and as shown in FIG. 8-17, a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173), and the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS71). An example of the form of this game machine will be described below as another example.

(Other examples)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
Fig. 274 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by being shot from a predetermined ball shooting device.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the right side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 274), a first special pattern display device 4A and a second special pattern display device 4B are provided which perform a variable display (also called a special pattern game) of special patterns (also called special patterns) as multiple types of special identification information. Each of these is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special patterns are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The special patterns may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled vertically or updated) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 275). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 274, four positions are provided at the lower left and right of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 275), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into a starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 274). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the left of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A normal symbol pending display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal symbol pending memory count, which is the number of normal symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and gaming effect lamps 9 for gaming effects are provided around the periphery of the gaming area. The gaming effect lamps 9 are composed of LEDs.

A movable body 32 that moves according to the performance is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in Figure 274).

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. Below the upper tray, a ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 275).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 275).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by a player rotating a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through a passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If a game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period when the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4).

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a "losing" symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a jackpot type set. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc., as described below), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that allow many prize balls to be obtained, and jackpot types that allow few or no prize balls to be obtained.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small wins".

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special probability state after the big win game state.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed by sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and/or by turning on/off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, etc.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a look-ahead preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a look-ahead preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a big win game state, a big win performance is executed to notify the player of the big win game state. As a big win performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or a promotion performance to indicate that the value of the big win game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small win game state, a small win performance to notify the player of the small win game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small win game state and a big win game state for some big win types (a big win type of a big win game state in the same manner as a small win game state, for example, a big win type in which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot know whether he is currently in a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in Fig. 275. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, a power supply board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1.

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 according to the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations in the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 276 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 in the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 276, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on or not (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch in the on state, the output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the working area.

The CPU 103 also transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct initialization (step S9). When the presentation control CPU 120 receives the presentation control command, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the machine becomes unable to operate due to the power supply being stopped. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, etc. are executed. The data protection process includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The backed up data includes various data for progressing the game (including various flags, the status of various timers, etc.), as well as the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, a parity bit or a checksum is used to determine whether the data in RAM 102 matches the data at the time the power supply was stopped. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be restored to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped, so an initialization process (step S8) is performed.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal (Step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (Step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a working area based on the memory contents of RAM 102 (contents of the backed-up data). This restores the game state to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped, and if the special symbols were changing, the change of the special symbols will be resumed from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt process described below.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S7). In conjunction with this, a presentation control command specifying the backed-up game state before the power outage, or, if a special symbol game was being played, a presentation control command specifying the display result of the special symbol game being played may be transmitted. These commands can be the same as the commands transmitted and set in the special symbol process processing described below. When the presentation control CPU 120 receives a presentation control command specifying the time of recovery from the power outage, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that recovery from the power outage has been achieved or that recovery from the power outage is in progress. The presentation control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the presentation control command.

After completing the recovery or initialization process and sending a performance control command to the performance control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 277. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 277 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, it performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1, and if necessary, it is possible to issue a warning according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output processing, data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, management of the execution and reservation of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (described in detail later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 278 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 277. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 277.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in preference to the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and setting the jackpot opening port to an open state, based on the display result being "jackpot", etc. When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 279. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 279 is started, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 280 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 279 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 280, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing a look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the start winning. In addition, processing is executed to display a hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". Once the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special drawing hit waiting process ends.

The small win presentation process of step S174 is executed when the presentation control process flag value is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process in step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation control process flag is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, they also include one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic portion 120IW)
Next, the characteristic part 120IW of this embodiment will be described. In this characteristic part 120IW, the game state is controlled to either the normal state (non-time-saving state) or the time-saving state. In this example, in the time-saving state, the average special chart fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, and the average normal chart fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of "normal chart winning" in the normal chart game is higher compared to the normal state. For example, while the normal chart winning probability is 10% in the normal state, the normal chart winning probability is increased to 90% in the time-saving state, making it easier for the game ball to win the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port). It is not limited to such a mode, and for example, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be lengthened compared to the normal state, so that the game ball is easier to win the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port).

In addition, in this example, in addition to the case where the variable display result is a jackpot and the game is controlled to the time-saving state after the jackpot game ends, there are also cases where the variable display result is a miss and the game is controlled to the time-saving state based on the derived display of a time-saving miss pattern.

In addition, in this example, even if the next jackpot or time-saving miss occurs after the specified number of times (900 times in this example) of changing displays have ended after the gaming machine is powered on, after a jackpot occurs, or after the time-saving miss occurs, the machine may be controlled to the time-saving state (rescue time-saving).

In the time-saving state, (1) control to increase the probability of hitting a normal symbol, (2) control to shorten the time for which the normal symbol changes, (3) control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port), and (4) control to shorten the time for which the special symbol changes can be performed. All of the controls (1) to (4) may be performed, or some of the controls (1) to (4) may not be performed. For example, the controls (1) to (4) performed may be different or the same in the time-saving state via a jackpot, the time-saving state via a missed time-saving state, and the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state.

In addition, it is preferable to define the number of fluctuations n until control is applied to the rescue time reduction and the number of time reductions N in the rescue time reduction as follows.
2.5P≦n≦3.0P
0.4P≦N≦3.8P
(P = denominator of the jackpot probability ML, n = number of operations, N = number of time-saving operations)
Specifically, for example, when the probability of a jackpot is 1/300, the number of fluctuations n is 750 to 900, and the number of time-saving periods N is 120 to 1140.

In this example, the second special symbol is more likely to change display during the time-saving state, but as described below, the probability of a small win is increased when the second special symbol is changed display, so the time-saving state is more likely to be controlled to a small win game state.

(Board configuration)
281-1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine in the characteristic part 120IW. In the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 120IW, in the game area, a first path among the flow paths through which the game balls flow down is mainly provided in an area to the left of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front, and a second path among the flow paths through which the game balls flow down, which is different from the first path, is mainly provided in an area to the right of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front.

Hitting a game ball into the left area (left game area) of the image display device 5 to make the game ball flow down the first path is called a left hit. Hitting a game ball into the right area (right game area) of the image display device 5 to make the game ball flow down the second path is called a right hit. The first path is a path that allows the game ball to flow down by hitting the game ball into the left side of the game area, so it may be called the left hit path. Also, the second path is a path that allows the game ball to flow down by hitting the game ball into the right side of the game area, so it may be called the right hit path.

The first path and the second path may be separate paths, or may be paths that are partially shared. The left and right play areas may be separated, for example, by the end face of the image display device 5 or the arrangement of the play nails within the play area.

When a game ball is launched from the ball launching device in response to the operation of the ball operating handle 30 and hit into the game area, if it is guided to the left game area, it will be guided, for example, along the arrangement of the game nails, making it impossible or difficult to guide it to the right game area. Also, when a game ball is guided to the right game area, it will be guided, for example, along the arrangement of the game nails, making it impossible or difficult to guide it to the left game area.

A winning ball device 6A that constitutes the first starting winning hole is provided as a structure through which game balls that are hit into the left game area of the game area can enter.

The structures through which game balls that are hit into the right game area can enter include a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B that constitutes the second start winning port, a special variable winning ball device 120IW17 that constitutes the special winning port, and a special variable winning ball device 7 that constitutes the large winning port.

In the left play area, game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the winning ball device 6A of the winning hole structure. Therefore, when aiming to make the game ball enter the winning ball device 6A, the player only needs to hit the game ball to the left. Also, in the right play area, game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the variable winning ball device 6B, the passing gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17, and the special variable winning ball device 7 of the winning hole structure. Therefore, when aiming to make the game ball enter the variable winning ball device 6B, the passing gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17, and the special variable winning ball device 7, the player only needs to hit the game ball to the right.

It is also possible for a game ball hit into the right game area to have the potential to enter the winning ball device 6A, but from the standpoint of playability, it is desirable to make this possibility extremely low compared to the possibility of a game ball hit into the left game area entering them. Conversely, it is also possible for a game ball hit into the left game area to have the potential to enter the passing gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, but from the standpoint of playability, it is desirable to make this possibility extremely low compared to the possibility of a game ball hit into the right game area entering them.

The special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is a device for determining whether a game ball has entered the V-shaped area, which is a condition for generating a big win, when a small win occurs.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 120IW, in addition to the board configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 274, a right-hit LED 120IW10 is provided below the normal reserve display 25C as shown in FIG. 281-1. Also, as shown in FIG. 281-1, a right-hit notification LED 120IW20 is provided to the right of the image display device 5.

(Special variable winning ball device)
FIG. 281-2 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 in the present characteristic part 120IW. As shown in FIG. 281-2, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is provided with a plate-shaped bottom member 120IW17a formed as the bottom of the flow path through which the game ball flows down, and in a small win game state, the bottom member 120IW17a is moved forward from a closed state in which it is moved forward to the rear, and the special winning port, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has entered the special winning port is detected by the special winning port switch 120IW24.

In this example, when a game ball enters the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning hole) and is detected by the count switch 23, 15 prize balls are awarded, whereas when a game ball enters the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning hole) and is detected by the special winning hole switch 120IW24, 3 prize balls are awarded.

The bottom member 120IW17a is also controlled to change from a closed state to an open state by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) driving the solenoid 120IW83.

As shown in FIG. 281-2, in this characteristic part 120IW, a game ball that enters the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning port) is further guided to the guide path 120IW01 provided to the right of the special variable winning ball device 120IW17. The guide path 120IW01 further branches into two paths 120IW02, 03, and a game ball guided to the guide path 120IW01 is guided to the left path 120IW02 or the right path 120IW03. The left path 120IW02 is a V winning port, and a game ball that enters the V winning port is detected by the V winning port switch 120IW20a.

As shown in FIG. 281-2, a V prize opening opening plate 120IW20 is provided near the entrance of the left side path 120IW02 (V prize opening), and when the V prize opening opening plate 120IW20 is open, the game ball guided to the guide path 120IW01 enters the left side path 120IW02 (V prize opening) and becomes the V prize opening. Also, when the V prize opening opening plate 120IW20 is closed, the game ball guided to the guide path 120IW01 enters the right side path 120IW03 and is discharged to the back side of the game area.

The V winning opening opening plate 120IW20 is controlled from a closed state to an open state by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) driving the solenoid 120IW84.

In addition, when this feature unit 120IW is controlled to a small win game state, it is controlled to a big win game state after the small win game ends, provided that a game ball enters the V winning hole 120IW02 during the small win game state and is detected by the V winning hole switch 120IW20A.

In addition, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is formed with a number of regulating pieces that slow down the speed at which the game ball flows down the bottom member 120IW17a. In this example, the provision of the regulating pieces in the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 changes the flow direction of the game ball as it flows down from the upper right to the lower left, causing it to snake with a forward-backward component of motion, and the time it takes for the game ball to flow down is delayed compared to when there are no regulating pieces.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 281-2, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning port) has a special winning port switch 120IW24 provided on the upstream side, and the device branches into a V winning port and a discharge port on the downstream side, with a V winning port switch 120IW20A provided on the V winning port side, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning port) may be configured so that the device branches into a V winning port side and a general winning port side on the upstream side, with a V winning port switch 120IW20A provided on the V winning port side, and a special winning port switch 120IW24 provided on the general winning port side.

(Board configuration)
Fig. 281-3 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards in the characteristic part 120IW. As shown in Fig. 281-3, in this characteristic part 120IW, the switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as detection signals indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from the gate switch 21, the start port switch (the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B), the count switch 23, the special winning port switch 120IW24, and the V winning port switch 120IW20a, and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81, solenoid 82, solenoid 120IW83, and solenoid 120IW84) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device, the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (special variable prize ball device 7), the solenoid 120IW83 for the special variable prize ball device 120IW17, and the solenoid 120IW84 for the V prize opening opening plate 120IW20.

(Probability of winning big, probability of winning small, probability of losing)
FIG. 281-4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the probability of a big win and a small win for each setting value. Among these, FIG. 281-4(A) shows the probability of a big win and a small win when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Also, FIG. 281-4(B) shows the probability of a big win and a small win when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

In this example, the setting can be set to one of a number of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a setting confirmation process or setting change process is executed, making it possible to check the current setting value or change the setting value. Also, as shown in FIG. 281-4, this example shows a case where the setting can be changed to six levels, from "1" to "6." Note that the setting is not limited to being changeable to six levels, and it may be changed to, for example, two to five levels, or seven or more levels.

As shown in Figure 281-4 (A), when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "205/65536", which is the most unfavorable setting for the player. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and the setting value "6" has the highest jackpot probability of "328/65536", which is the most favorable setting for the player.

On the other hand, as for small wins, as shown in Figure 281-4 (A), when the variable display of the first special pattern is executed, the probability of a small win is constant at "164/65536" (approximately 1/400), regardless of the setting value being "1" to "6."

In addition, for a miss with time reduction, as shown in Figure 281-4 (A), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the probability of a small win is constant at "328/65536" (approximately 1/200) regardless of the setting value "1" to "6."

On the other hand, in terms of misses without time-saving, as shown in Figure 281-4 (A), when time-saving is included and the first special symbol variable display is executed, the setting value "1" has the highest probability of a big hit of "64,839/65,536", the miss probability decreases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", setting value "5", and the miss probability is the lowest at "6" at "6".

As shown in FIG. 281-4(B), when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "205/65536", which is the most unfavorable setting for the player. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and the setting value "6" has the highest jackpot probability of "328/65536", which is the most favorable setting for the player.

On the other hand, as for small wins, as shown in Figure 281-4 (B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the probability of a small win is constant at "9362/65536" (approximately 1/7) regardless of the setting value of "1" to "6."

In addition, for a miss with time reduction, as shown in Figure 281-4 (B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the probability of a small win is constant at "164/65536" (approximately 1/400) regardless of the setting value "1" to "6."

On the other hand, in terms of misses without time-saving, as shown in Figure 281-4 (B), when time-saving is included and the first special symbol variable display is executed, the setting value "1" has the highest probability of a jackpot at "55,805/65,536", while the miss probability decreases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and the miss probability is the lowest at "55,682/65,536" for setting value "6".

As shown in FIG. 281-4, in this example, when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the probability of a small win is approximately 1/400, whereas when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the probability of a small win is higher at approximately 1/7.

(Big hit type determination table, small hit type determination table)
281-5(A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 281-5(A) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Also, FIG. 281-5(B) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 281-5(A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is a table that is referenced when a decision is made to make the variable display result a jackpot symbol, to determine the type of jackpot as either "6R time-saving jackpot A" or "6R time-saving jackpot B" based on a random number for type determination.

As shown in FIG. 281-5(B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is a table that is referenced to determine the type of jackpot to be a "10R time-limited jackpot" based on the random number for type determination when a decision is made to make the variable display result a jackpot symbol.

A "6R time-saving jackpot A" is a jackpot that controls the game to a 6-round jackpot game state, and transitions to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends. A "6R time-saving jackpot B" is a jackpot that controls the game to a 6-round jackpot game state, and transitions to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends. Note that "6R time-saving jackpot A" and "6R time-saving jackpot B" have different stopping patterns for the jackpot pattern of the first special pattern that is derived and displayed. A "10R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the game to a 10-round jackpot game state, and transitions to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends.

As shown in FIG. 281-5(A), in this example, when the first special symbol is displayed and a jackpot is reached, there is a 70% probability that it will be a "6R time-saving jackpot A," and a 30% probability that it will be a "6R time-saving jackpot B." Also, as shown in FIG. 281-5(B), in this example, when the second special symbol is displayed and a jackpot is reached, there is a 100% probability that it will be a "10R time-saving jackpot."

Figures 281-5(C) and (D) are explanatory diagrams showing the small win type determination table stored in ROM 101. Of these, Figure 281-5(C) shows a specific example of a small win type determination table for the first special symbol. Also, Figure 281-5(D) shows a specific example of a small win type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in Figure 281-5 (C), the small win type determination table for the first special symbol is a table that is referenced to determine the type of small win as "small win A" based on the random number for type determination when a determination is made to make the variable display result a small win symbol.

As shown in FIG. 281-5 (D), the small win type determination table for the second special symbol is a table that is referenced to determine the type of small win as "small win A" or "small win B" based on the random number for type determination when a determination is made to make the variable display result a small win symbol.

A "small hit A" is a small hit that, on the condition that a V is won during a small hit game (first round), controls the game to a big hit game state from the second round to the sixth round, and transitions to a time-saving state after the big hit game state ends. A "small hit B" is a small hit that, on the condition that a V is won during a small hit game (first round), controls the game to a big hit game state from the second round to the tenth round, and transitions to a time-saving state after the big hit game state ends.

As shown in Figure 281-5 (C), in this example, when the variable display of the first special pattern is executed and a small win occurs, it is determined to be a "small win A" with a 100% probability. Also, as shown in Figure 281-5 (D), in this example, when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed and a small win occurs, it is determined to be a "small win A" with a 30% probability, and a "small win B" with a 70% probability.

(Time-saving type determination table)
281-6(A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing time-saving type determination tables stored in the ROM 101. Among these, FIG. 281-6(A) shows a specific example of a time-saving type determination table for the first special symbol. Also, FIG. 281-6(B) shows a specific example of a time-saving type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 281-5(A), the time-saving type determination table for the first special symbol is a table that is referenced when a determination is made that the variable display result is a time-saving miss symbol to determine the type of time-saving miss as either "Time-saving miss A," "Time-saving miss B," or "Time-saving miss C" based on a random number for type determination.

As shown in FIG. 281-5(B), the time-saving type determination table for the second special symbol is a table that is referenced when a determination is made that the variable display result is a time-saving miss symbol to determine the type of time-saving miss as either "Time-saving miss A," "Time-saving miss B," or "Time-saving miss C" based on a random number for type determination.

As shown in FIG. 281-6(A), in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the time-saving miss occurs, there is an approximately 33% probability that it is determined to be "Time-saving miss A," an approximately 33% probability that it is determined to be "Time-saving miss B," and an approximately 33% probability that it is determined to be "Time-saving miss C." Also, as shown in FIG. 281-6(B), in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the time-saving miss occurs, there is an approximately 33% probability that it is determined to be "Time-saving miss A," an approximately 33% probability that it is determined to be "Time-saving miss B," and an approximately 33% probability that it is determined to be "Time-saving miss C."

(Pattern Determination Table)
FIG. 281-7 and FIG. 281-8 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the symbol determination table stored in the ROM 101. Among them, FIG. 281-7(A) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for 6R time-saving big win A. Also, FIG. 281-7(B) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for 6R time-saving big win B. Also, FIG. 281-7(C) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for 10R time-saving big win. Also, FIG. 281-7(D) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for small win A. Also, FIG. 281-7(E) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for small win B. Also, FIG. 281-8(F) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for time-saving miss A. Also, FIG. 281-8(G) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for time-saving miss B. Also, Fig. 281-8 (H) shows a specific example of a symbol determination table for time-saving miss C. Also, Fig. 281-8 (I) shows a specific example of a symbol determination table for miss (no time-saving).

As shown in FIG. 281-8, the pattern determination table is a table that is referenced to determine the special pattern to be stopped based on the random numbers used for pattern determination, depending on the type of big win, small win, time-saving type, etc.

As shown in Figure 281-7(A), if a "6R time-saving big win A" occurs, the pattern "3" is determined with a 100% probability. As shown in Figure 281-7(B), if a "6R time-saving big win B" occurs, the pattern "5" is determined with a 100% probability. As shown in Figure 281-7(C), if a "10R time-saving big win" occurs, the pattern "7" is determined with a 100% probability. As shown in Figure 281-7(D), if a "small win A" occurs, the pattern "1" is determined with a 100% probability. As shown in Figure 281-7(E), if a "small win B" occurs, the pattern "9" is determined with a 100% probability.

As shown in Figure 281-8 (F), if "Time-saving Miss A" occurs, there is a 50% chance that the pattern will be determined to be "6", and a 50% chance that the pattern will be determined to be "8". As shown in Figure 281-8 (G), if "Time-saving Miss B" occurs, there is a 100% chance that the pattern will be determined to be "4". As shown in Figure 281-8 (H), if "Time-saving Miss C" occurs, there is a 100% chance that the pattern will be determined to be "9". As shown in Figure 281-8 (I), if it is a miss (no time-saving), there is a 100% chance that the pattern will be determined to be "-".

Specific examples of the stopping patterns of the special patterns are not limited to those shown in this example. For example, in this example, the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B are each configured with one 7-segment LED, and the stopping patterns of the special patterns are represented by one-digit numbers, but they may be configured with two 7-segment LEDs, and the stopping patterns of the special patterns may be represented by two-digit numbers. In this case, for example, even if the result is "6R time-saving big win A", "6R time-saving big win B", "10R time-saving big win", "small win A", "small win B", "time-saving miss B", "time-saving miss C", or "miss (no time-saving)", the stopping patterns of multiple types of special patterns may be determined.

In this example, as shown in Figures 281-7 and 281-8, the case where the stopping symbols of the special symbols are determined using the symbol determination random number is shown, but this is not limited to the above, and for example, the type determination random number may also be used to determine the stopping symbols of the special symbols. When the type determination random number is used in combination, for example, when the jackpot type is determined to be "6R time-saving jackpot A", the value of the type determination random number is 0 to 125 (see Figure 281-5 (A)), so the symbol determination value in Figure 281-7 (A) is assigned 0 to 125 to configure a symbol determination table for 6R time-saving jackpot A. Also, for example, if the time-saving type is determined to be "Time-saving Miss A," the value of the type determination random number is between 0 and 59 (see FIG. 281-6), so in FIG. 281-8 (F), the pattern determination value is assigned from 0 to 29 to the pattern "6" and from 30 to 59 to the pattern "8," thereby constructing a pattern determination table for time-saving Miss A.

(Small win game opening pattern)
Next, the opening pattern of the small win game will be explained. Figure 281-9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of the small win game. As shown in Figure 281-9, after the small win game is started at timing S1, when 8 seconds have passed (timing S2), the V winning hole opening and closing plate 120IW20 is controlled to be in an open state, and then the open state of the V winning hole opening and closing plate 120IW20 is continued until 8 seconds have passed (see Figure 281-9 (C)).

When a small win (small win A, small win B) occurs, 8 seconds is set as the time before the special winning hole is opened (fanfare time) from the start of the small win game until the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is controlled to the open state, and the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning hole) is controlled to the open state at the same time that the V winning hole opening and closing plate 120IW20 is controlled to the open state. Also, as shown in FIG. 281-9 (A), the special winning hole is opened four times for 0.016 seconds during the period when the V winning hole opening and closing plate 120IW20 is controlled to the open state. Therefore, in the case of a small win (small win A, small win B), the special winning hole is opened four times for 0.016 seconds during the period when a V win is possible.

In this example, the opening time of each special winning port in the case of a small win (small win A, small win B) is extremely short at 0.016 seconds, but as already explained, multiple regulating pieces are formed in the special variable winning ball device 120IW17, and about 2 to 3 game balls flow down in a serpentine manner on the bottom member 120IW17a of the special variable winning ball device 120IW17. Therefore, even if the opening time is short, if the bottom member 120IW17a is controlled to the open state, the game balls on the bottom member 120IW17a can fall into the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 and win a prize.

If a game ball enters the special winning port and a V win occurs, after the final opening of the special winning port, a predetermined period of closing time (interval time) and the end time of the small win (ending time) have elapsed, and then the game moves to a big win game state, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be in the open state from the second round to the sixth or tenth round, as shown in Figure 281-9 (B).

In this example, when the final opening of the special winning port in a small winning game is completed, the small winning game ends based on the lapse of the closing time (interval time) and the small winning end time (ending time), but this is not limited to the above. For example, detection switches capable of detecting game balls are provided in two locations, upstream and downstream, in the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning port), and after the final closing time (interval time) has elapsed, the device waits until the detection numbers of the upstream detection switch and the downstream detection switch match (all game balls that have entered the special winning port are discharged), and then transitions to the small winning end time (ending time), and ends the small winning game when the small winning end time (ending time) has elapsed.

In addition, in this example, a configuration is shown in which a V win is possible during small win play in both small win A and small win B, but it may also be configured to provide a type of small win in which a V win is difficult or impossible during small win play.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
FIG. 281-10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the feature part 120IW. Among these, FIG. 281-10(A) and (B) show a specific example of a variation pattern table for the first special symbol. Also, FIG. 281-10(C) and (D) show a specific example of a variation pattern table for the second special symbol. Also, FIG. 281-10(E) and (F) show a specific example of a variation pattern table for time-saving failure (for non-time-saving state). Also, FIG. 281-10(G) shows a specific example of a variation pattern table for time-saving relief.

First, the variation pattern of the first special symbol will be explained using Fig. 281-10 (A) and (B). As shown in Fig. 281-10 (A), in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if there is a miss during the normal state, the variation pattern is determined to be one of the variation patterns PT1-1 (normal variation), PT1-2 (shortened variation), PT1-3 (normal reach), and PT1-4 (super reach). Also, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if there is a big win during the normal state, the variation pattern is determined to be one of the variation patterns PT1-5 (normal reach) and PT1-6 (super reach). Also, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if there is a small win during the normal state, the variation pattern is determined to be one of the variation patterns PT1-7 (normal reach) and PT1-8 (super reach).

As shown in FIG. 281-10 (B), in this example, when the first special symbol is displayed, if there is a miss during the time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be fluctuation pattern PT2-1 (high-speed miss fluctuation). Also, when the first special symbol is displayed, if there is a jackpot during the time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be fluctuation pattern PT2-2 (high-speed jackpot fluctuation). Also, when the first special symbol is displayed, if there is a small jackpot during the time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be fluctuation pattern PT2-3 (high-speed small jackpot fluctuation).

Next, the variation pattern of the second special symbol will be explained using Figures 281-10 (C) and (D). As shown in Figure 281-10 (C), in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if there is a miss during the normal state, the variation pattern is determined to be one of the variation patterns PT4-1 (normal variation), PT4-2 (shortened variation), PT4-3 (normal reach), and PT4-4 (super reach). Also, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if there is a big win during the normal state, the variation pattern is determined to be one of the variation patterns PT4-5 (normal reach) and PT4-6 (super reach). Also, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if there is a small win during the normal state, the variation pattern is determined to be one of the variation patterns PT4-7 (normal reach) and PT4-8 (super reach).

As shown in FIG. 281-10(D), in this example, when the second special symbol variable display is executed, if a miss occurs during the time-saving state (including both the first and second time-saving states), the variable pattern is determined to be one of the following: variable pattern PT5-1 (shortened variable), variable pattern PT5-2 (ultra-shortened variable), variable pattern PT5-3 (normal reach), or variable pattern PT5-4 (super reach). Also, when the second special symbol variable display is executed, if a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state (including both the first and second time-saving states), the variable pattern is determined to be one of the following: variable pattern PT5-5 (normal reach) or variable pattern PT5-6 (super reach). In addition, when the second special symbol variation display is executed, if a small win occurs during the time-saving state (including both the first and second time-saving states), the variation pattern is determined to be either variation pattern PT5-7 (normal reach) or variation pattern PT5-8 (super reach).

Next, the fluctuation pattern of the time-saving failure (for non-time-saving state) will be explained using Figures 281-10 (E) and (F). As shown in Figure 281-10 (E), in this example, when the time-saving failure occurs in the non-time-saving state as A to C (patterns "2", "4", "6"), the fluctuation pattern is determined to be either fluctuation pattern PT6-1 (normal fluctuation) or fluctuation pattern PT6-2 (time-saving teaser effect).

As shown in Figure 281-10 (F), in this example, when the time-saving feature is not activated and a time-saving feature A (symbol "8") occurs, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PT7-1 (normal fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PT7-2 (time-saving teaser effect), or fluctuation pattern PT7-3 (time-saving revival effect).

In this example, if the time-saving state is in a state where the time-saving effect is lost (A to C), the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the same as when the time-saving effect is lost (no time-saving effect).

Next, the fluctuation pattern of the rescue time reduction will be explained using Figure 281-10 (G). As shown in Figure 281-10 (G), in this example, when the rescue time reduction occurs, if there is a small hit or a miss, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be fluctuation pattern PT8-1 (rescue time reduction entry effect).

In this example, in the normal symbol process processing (step S26), the CPU 103 determines whether the result of the normal symbol variable display is a hit (normal symbol hit), and controls the execution of the normal symbol variable display based on the result of the determination. In this example, in the normal state, it is determined that there is a 10% probability of a normal symbol hit, and in the time-saving state, it is determined that there is a 90% probability of a normal symbol hit. In addition, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) to an open state based on the determination that there is a normal symbol hit in the normal symbol process processing (step S26).

(Performance control command)
281-11 and 281-12 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the performance control command sent to the performance control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIG. 281-11 and FIG. 281-12, the command 80XX (H) is a performance control command (variation pattern command) that specifies the variation pattern of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern. The performance control command that specifies the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, when the performance control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 80XX (H), it controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Command 9001 (H) is a performance control command (display result 1 designation command) (miss designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a non-time-saving miss. Command 9002 (H) is a performance control command (display result 2 designation command) (miss designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a time-saving miss A (pattern "8"). Command 9003 (H) is a performance control command (display result 3 designation command) (miss designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a time-saving miss A (pattern "6"). Command 9004 (H) is a performance control command (display result 4 designation command) (miss designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a time-saving miss B (pattern "4"). Command 9005 (H) is a performance control command (display result 5 specification command) (miss specification command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is to be a time-saving miss C (pattern "2").

Command 9006 (H) is a presentation control command (display result 6 designation command (6R time-saving jackpot A designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a 6R time-saving jackpot A. Command 9007 (H) is a presentation control command (display result 7 designation command (6R time-saving jackpot B designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a 6R time-saving jackpot B. Command 9008 (H) is a presentation control command (display result 8 designation command (10R time-saving jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a 10R time-saving jackpot.

Command 9009 (H) is a presentation control command (display result 9 designation command (small win A designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is to be small win A. Command 900A (H) is a presentation control command (display result 10 designation command (small win B designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is to be small win B.

Command A000 (H) is a presentation control command (first pattern determination A designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 20 seconds. Command A001 (H) is a presentation control command (first pattern determination B designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 10 seconds. Command A002 (H) is a presentation control command (first pattern determination C designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 0.5 seconds.

Command A100 (H) is a presentation control command (second pattern determination A designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 20 seconds. Command A101 (H) is a presentation control command (second pattern determination B designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 10 seconds. Command A102 (H) is a presentation control command (second pattern determination C designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 0.5 seconds.

Command B000 (H) is a presentation control command (jackpot start designation command: fanfare designation command) that specifies the start of a jackpot game. Command B001 (H) is a presentation control command (jackpot end designation command: ending designation command) that specifies the end of a jackpot game.

Command B1XX (H) is a presentation control command (command for displaying while the large prize opening is open) that specifies the display during a round during a jackpot game. The number of rounds to be displayed is set in "XX." Command B2XX (H) is a presentation control command (command for displaying after the large prize opening is open) that specifies the display after a round during a jackpot game (displaying the interval between rounds).

Command B300 (H) is a presentation control command (small win start designation command) that specifies the start of small win play. Command B301 (H) is a presentation control command (small win end designation command) that specifies the end of small win play.

Command B400 (H) is a presentation control command (large prize opening entry designation command) that specifies that the game ball has entered the large prize opening. Command B401 (H) is a presentation control command (special prize opening entry designation command) that specifies that the game ball has entered the special prize opening. Command B402 (H) is a presentation control command (V prize opening entry designation command) that specifies that the game ball has entered the V prize opening inside the special prize opening.

Command C000 (H) is a presentation control command (first pending memory number addition command) that specifies that the first pending memory number has increased by 1. Command C001 (H) is a presentation control command (second pending memory number addition command) that specifies that the second pending memory number has increased by 1. Command C100 (H) is a presentation control command (first pending memory number subtraction command) that specifies that the first pending memory number has decreased by 1. Command C101 (H) is a presentation control command (second pending memory number subtraction command) that specifies that the second pending memory number has decreased by 1.

Command E000 (H) is a presentation control command (normal state designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the normal state. Command E001 (H) is a presentation control command (time-saving state A designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time-saving state when a jackpot game ends. Command E002 (H) is a presentation control command (time-saving state B designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time-saving state when the time-saving state is lost. Command E003 (H) is a presentation control command (time-saving state C designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time-saving state during a rescue time-saving state.

Command E100 (H) is a presentation control command (right hit notification start command) that specifies the start of the right hit notification. Command E101 (H) is a presentation control command (right hit notification end command) that specifies the end of the right hit notification.

Command E2XX(H) is a performance control command (setting value command) that specifies the currently set setting value. The setting value set to "XX" is set. For example, if the setting value is set to "1", command E201(H) is sent, and if the setting value is set to "6", command E206(H) is sent.

When the performance control CPU 120 (specifically, the performance control CPU 120) mounted on the performance control board 12 receives the above-mentioned performance control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, it changes the display state of the image display device 5 according to the contents shown in Figures 281-11 and 281-12, changes the display state of the lamp, and outputs sound number data to the sound control board 13. Note that performance control commands other than those shown in Figures 281-11 and 281-12 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. For example, more detailed performance control commands related to jackpot games and performance control commands indicating the game status (for example, a performance control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

(Game control main processing)
281-13 is a flowchart showing the game control main process in the characteristic unit 120IW. In this example, the processes of steps S1 to S2, steps S3 to S9, and steps S10 to S12 are the same as those shown in FIG.

In this example, once the initial settings are made in step S2, the CPU 103 performs a setting change/confirmation process (step 120IWS11). The setting change/confirmation process makes it possible to confirm the current setting value and change the setting value. Next, the CPU 103 performs control to send a setting value command corresponding to the currently set setting value to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS12).

Also, when a presentation control command instructing initialization is sent in step S9, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time reduction counter to "900" (step 120IWS13). Therefore, in this example, if the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is turned on, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "900". That is, in this example, after the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is turned on, if neither a jackpot nor a time reduction miss occurs even after 900 variable display cycles, the rescue time reduction is entered and the machine is controlled to the time reduction state. Note that, in this example, the initial value to be set in the rescue time reduction counter can be specified based on the presentation control command instructing initialization sent in step S9.

In this example, the rescue time reduction counter is initially set to "900" when the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, but this is not the only option, and the rescue time reduction counter may not be initially set when the RAM clear process is executed. If configured in this way, gameplay can be started from the continuation of the value of the rescue time reduction counter from the previous day, reducing the amount of investment required to reach the rescue time reduction, and the game can be configured in a way that does not disadvantage the player.

In addition, when configured as described above, the system may be configured so that the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is not performed only when the clear switch is detected as being on (Y in step S3) and the RAM clear process is performed, and the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is performed when a RAM abnormality is detected (N in steps S4 and S5) and the RAM clear process is performed.

(Special pattern processing)
FIG. 281-14 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process in the feature unit 120IW. In this example, the start winning judgment process (step 120IWS101) is generally similar to the start winning judgment process (step S101) shown in FIG. 278. In addition, the special symbol normal process (step 120IWS110) to the special symbol stop process (step 120IWS113) are generally similar to the special symbol normal process (step S110) to the special symbol stop process (step S113) shown in FIG. 278. However, in this example, when a small winning symbol is derived and displayed, the process proceeds to the small winning opening pre-process (step 120IWS114). In addition, when a big winning symbol is derived and displayed (when a so-called direct hit occurs), the process proceeds to the big winning opening pre-process (step 120IWS117).

Small win pre-opening processing (step 120IWS114): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The game control microcomputer 100 executes processing to control the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 to an open state, and updates the internal state (specifically, the value of the special symbol process flag) to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to the small win opening processing (step 120IWS115).

Small winning opening process (step 120IWS115): Executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is 5. If the opening time has elapsed while the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is open, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is controlled to the closed state, and if the closing time has elapsed while the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is closed and there are still opening times remaining, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is controlled to the open state. Also, when it is time to open the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20, the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20 is controlled to the open state, and when it is time to close the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20, the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20 is controlled to the closed state. Also, it is confirmed whether the V winning opening switch 120IW20a is on, and if the V winning opening switch 120IW20a is on, the V winning flag is set. When all openings of the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 have been completed and the closing time (interval time) has elapsed, the internal state (special pattern process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) corresponding to the small win closing post-processing (step 120IWS116).

Processing after closing of small win (step 120IWS116): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. If the V winning flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (7 in this example) corresponding to the processing before opening of the big win (step 120IWS117). If the V winning flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to the normal processing of special symbols (step 120IWS110).

The process before the jackpot opening (step 120IWS117) to the process after the jackpot ending (step 120IWS120) is generally similar to the process before the jackpot opening (step S114) to the process after the jackpot ending (step S117) shown in FIG. 278.

In this example, the game immediately transitions to the big win game after a big win is determined and the big win/small win symbols are derived and displayed, or after a V win occurs during a small win game and the small win game ends, but this is not limited to the above. For example, instead of immediately transitioning to the big win game, the game may be configured to transition to the big win game on the condition that the game ball passes through an operating gate (which may also serve as the passing gate 41) provided in the game area.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIG. 281-15 and FIG. 281-16 are flow charts showing the normal special symbol processing (step 120IWS110) in the special symbol process processing. In the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total reserved memory number (step 120IWS51). Specifically, the count value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is checked. If the total reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the second reserved memory number is 0 or not (step 120IWS52). Specifically, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is 0 or not. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" to the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) (step 120IWS53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (i.e., if only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special pattern pointer (step 120IWS54).

In this characteristic section 120IW, the processing of steps 120IWS52 to S54 is executed, so that the display of the second special symbol changes is executed with priority over the display of the first special symbol changes. In other words, the second start condition for starting the display of the second special symbol changes is controlled to be satisfied with priority over the first start condition for starting the display of the first special symbol changes.

In addition, the present invention is not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, and may be configured to, for example, execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the RAM 102 corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 120IWS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer corresponding to the first reserved memory number=1, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 120IWS56). Specifically, when the special pattern pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer. When the special pattern pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer.

In other words, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "2nd", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) are extracted always matches the order of the first pending memory number (or second pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, 4.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the combined pending memory count by 1. That is, the count value of the combined pending memory count counter is decremented by 1 (step 120IWS57). The CPU 103 stores the value of the combined pending memory count counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a specified area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to send a setting value command capable of identifying the currently set setting value to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS58). Note that in this example, a setting value command is sent at the start of each change in the display, but this is not the only possible mode. For example, the setting value command may be sent at the end of the change.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination from the random number buffer area (step 120IWS61) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 120IWS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination extracted in the start winning determination process (step 120IWS101) and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and performs a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process to compare a predetermined jackpot determination value with the random number for hit determination, and decides to determine a jackpot if they match. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process. When the value of the random number for hit determination matches any of the jackpot determination values, the CPU 103 decides to determine a jackpot for the special pattern. If it is decided to determine a jackpot (Y in step 120IWS63), the process proceeds to step 120IWS64. On the other hand, if it is decided not to be a jackpot (N in step 120IWS63), the process proceeds to step 120IWS66. Note that deciding whether or not to be a jackpot means deciding whether or not to transition to a jackpot game state, but also deciding whether or not to set the stopped pattern on the special pattern display as a jackpot pattern.

In step 120IWS64, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot. The CPU 103 also selects the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer (step 120IWS65). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 281-5 (A) is selected, and if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 281-5 (B) is selected. Then, the CPU 103 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to determine the type (6R time-saving jackpot A, 6R time-saving jackpot B, 10R time-saving jackpot) corresponding to the value that matches the value of the type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area as the jackpot type (step 120IWS91). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for type determination extracted in the start winning determination process (step 120IWS101) and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and determines the type of jackpot. The CPU 103 also sets data indicating the determined type of jackpot in the jackpot type buffer in RAM 102. Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS92.

Meanwhile, in step 120IWS66, the CPU 103 selects the small win judgment table indicated by the special symbol pointer. In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the small win judgment table for the first special symbol is selected, and if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the small win judgment table for the second special symbol is selected. Then, the CPU 103 uses the selected small win judgment table to perform a lottery process based on the random number for winning judgment, and determines whether or not to determine a small win (step 120IWS67). In this example, as shown in Figures 281-4 (A) and (B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the probability of determining a small win is about 1/400, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of determining a small win is about 1/7.

If it is decided that a small win will occur (Y in step 120IWS68), the CPU 103 sets a small win flag indicating that it is a small win (step 120IWS69). Then, the CPU 103 selects the small win type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer (step 120IWS70). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the small win type determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 281-5 (C) is selected, and if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the small win type determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 281-5 (D) is selected. After the small win type determination table is selected, the process proceeds to step 120IWS71.

If it has not been decided that a small win will occur (N in step 120IWS68), the CPU 103 proceeds to step 120IWS71.

In step 120IWS71, the CPU 103 checks whether the small hit counter, which counts the number of times controlled to a small hit during the time-saving state, is 0 (step 120IWS71). If the value of the small hit counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS76.

If the value of the small hit counter is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step 120IWS72). If the small hit flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 120IWS76.

If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the small hit counter by 1 (step 120IWS73).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the small hit counter after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS74). If the value of the small hit counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS76.

If the value of the small hit counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a time-saving end flag indicating that the time-saving state will end when the fluctuation ends (step 120IWS75). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS76.

In step 120IWS76, the CPU 103 checks whether any time-saving flags are set (step 120IWS76). If none of the time-saving flags are set, the process proceeds to step 120IWS83. If any of the time-saving flags are set, the CPU 103 decrements the total time-saving counter by 1 (step 120IWS77).

Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the count value of the combined time-saving counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS74), and if so, proceeds to step 120IWS82. If the count value of the combined time-saving counter after the subtraction is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether it is time to start the variable display of the second special symbol (step 120IWS79). Note that whether it is time to start the variable display of the second special symbol can be determined, for example, by checking whether data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. If it is not time to start the variable display of the second special symbol, proceeds to step 120IWS83.

When starting the variable display of the second special symbol, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second time-saving counter (step 120IWS80) and checks whether the count value of the second time-saving counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS81). If the count value of the second time-saving counter after the subtraction is not 0, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 120IWS83, whereas if the count value of the second time-saving counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 120IWS82.

In step 120IWS82, the CPU 103 sets a time-saving end flag indicating that the time-saving state will end when the fluctuation ends (step 120IWS82).

In this example, steps 120IWS76 to S82 are executed to perform the subtraction process of the time-saving counter before the count process of the number of fluctuations until the time-saving relief after step 120IWS83, but the processing is not limited to this. For example, the subtraction process of the time-saving counter may be executed after the count process of the number of fluctuations until the time-saving relief after step 120IWS83. In this case, for example, in the case of a fluctuation display that results in a time-saving relief, if the subtraction process is executed after setting the time-saving counter to "900" (see step 120IWS149), the value of the time-saving counter will be subtracted by one extra, so the value of the time-saving counter may be added by one again after the subtraction process in the case of a fluctuation display that results in a time-saving relief. Also, the time-saving counter may be set to "901", which is one more than the time-saving counter, in advance.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 120IWS83). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS87. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the rescue time reduction counter (step 120IWS84). Note that in this example, the process of step 120IWS83 is executed, and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether the game state is the normal state or the time reduction state. Also, in this example, the process of step 120IWS83 is executed, and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether the first special symbol variable display is executed or the second special symbol variable display is executed.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS85). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 120IWS87. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a rescue time reduction determination flag indicating that the rescue time reduction has occurred and that the time reduction state will be controlled at the end of the fluctuation (step 120IWS86). Then, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 120IWS87.

In this example, the processing of steps 120IWS83 to S86 is executed not only in the case of a miss variation but also in the case of a small win variation, so the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0 and the variation display that causes a rescue time reduction may be a small win variation. On the other hand, in this example, in the case of a jackpot variation, the processing of steps 120IWS83 to S86 is not executed, so if the variation display that would cause a rescue time reduction is a jackpot variation, rescue time reduction control is not performed and normal jackpot control is performed.

In step 120IWS87, the CPU 103 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step 120IWS87). If the small hit flag is set, the process proceeds to step 120IWS91. In this case, the CPU 103 uses the small hit type determination table selected in step 120IWS70 to determine the type of small hit (small hit A or small hit B) that corresponds to the value that matches the value of the type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area (step 120IWS91). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the type determination random number extracted in the start winning determination process (step 120IWS101) and stored in advance in the second reserved memory buffer, and determines the type of small hit. The CPU 103 also sets data indicating the determined type of small hit in the small hit type buffer in RAM 102. Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS92.

If the small win flag is not set, the CPU 103 performs a lottery process based on the random number for time-saving loss judgment using a time-saving loss judgment table for determining whether or not to make the time-saving loss, and determines whether or not to make the time-saving loss (step 120IWS88). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the time-saving loss judgment table for the first special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time-saving loss has a probability of about 1/200 (see FIG. 281-4(A)). Also, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the time-saving loss judgment table for the second special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time-saving loss has a probability of about 1/400 (see FIG. 281-4(B)). If it is not determined that the time-saving loss is to be made (if it is determined that the time-saving loss is not to be made), the process proceeds to step 120IWS93.

If it is decided that the time-saving miss is to occur (Y in step 120IWS89), the CPU 103 selects the time-saving type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer (step 120IWS90). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first," the time-saving type determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 281-6 (A) is selected, and if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second," the time-saving type determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 281-6 (B) is selected. The CPU 103 then determines the type of time-saving miss to be the type (time-saving miss A, time-saving miss B, or time-saving miss C) that corresponds to the value that matches the value of the type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area (step 120IWS91). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for type determination extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and determines the time-saving type. Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS92.

When the processing of step 120IWS91 is completed, the CPU 103 selects a symbol determination table (see Figures 281-7 (A) to 281-8 (H)) according to the result of the type determination performed in step 120IWS91 (step 120IWS92). In the case of a miss without time reduction, the symbol determination table shown in Figure 281-7 (I) is selected and the process proceeds to step 120IWS93.

In step 120IWS93, the CPU 103 determines the pattern corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number for pattern determination stored in the random number buffer area (step 120IWS93).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting process (step S111) (step 120IWS94).

(Variation pattern setting process)
281-17 is a flow chart showing the variable pattern setting process (step 120IWS111) in the special symbol process. In the variable pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) checks whether the story has been set (step 120IWS1701). The story refers to the variable pattern and variable time according to the number of times the symbol changes, and whether the story has been set is checked by whether the flag or data set according to the story when a big win occurs is set.

If the story has already been set, the CPU 103 checks whether the rescue time reduction determination flag (see step 120IWS86) is set (step 120IWS1702). If the rescue time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 selects a rescue time reduction fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 281-10 (G)) and proceeds to step 120IWS1710.

If the story has not been set or the rescue time-saving determination flag has not been set, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the time-saving effect has failed (step 120IWS1704). If the time-saving effect has not failed, the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern table (see FIG. 281-10 (A) to (D)) according to the special symbol, game status, and display result (step 120IWS1709), and proceeds to step 120IWS1710. Therefore, in this example, even if the variation display is a rescue time-saving effect, if the story has not been set, the variation pattern is uniformly determined to be the normal variation pattern, not the rescue time-saving variation pattern.

If the time-saving effect is not achieved, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving effect flag (see steps 120IWS150, 120IWS160, and 120IWS537) is set (step 120IWS1705). If the time-saving effect flag is set, the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern table (see FIG. 281-10 (A) to (D)) according to the special symbol, game status, and display result (step 120IWS1709), and proceeds to step 120IWS1710. Therefore, in this example, even if the time-saving effect is not achieved, if the time-saving effect is in progress, a variation pattern similar to that of a miss (no time-saving effect) is determined.

If the time-saving flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the pattern has been determined to be "8" in the pattern determination (see step 120IWS93) (step 120IWS1706). If the pattern is not "8", the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern table for when the time-saving function is not activated (pattern other than "8") (see FIG. 281-10 (E)) (step 120IWS1707) and proceeds to step 120IWS1710. If the pattern is "8", the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern table for when the time-saving function is not activated (pattern "8") (see FIG. 281-10 (F)) (step 120IWS1708) and proceeds to step 120IWS1710.

In step 120IWS1710, the CPU 103 determines which of the variation patterns shown in FIG. 281-10 to use based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 120IWS1703, S1707, S1708, and S1709, and the random number for determining the variation pattern stored in the reserved memory buffer indicated by the special symbol pointer (step 120IWS1710). In this example, the variation pattern is determined to determine the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Note that after the variation time is determined, the variation pattern to which the determined variation time is set may be selected from among multiple variation patterns.

Once the variation pattern is determined, the CPU 103 performs control to send a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1711).

When the change time (change pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined in step 120IWS1710, the CPU 103 sets the change time data indicating the determined change time in the change time timer and starts measuring the change time (step 120IWS1712), and starts the change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the change display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 120IWS1713). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol change processing (step 120IWS1714).

(Special pattern variation processing)
281-18 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation process (step 120IWS112) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first controls to transmit, if not yet transmitted, any of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 10 designation command) to the performance control CPU 120 based on the decision result of whether or not to make it a big win, the decision result of whether or not to make it a small win, the decision result of whether or not to make it a time-saving miss, the decision result of the big win type, the decision result of the small win type, and the decision result of the time-saving miss type (step 120IWS1121).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step 120IWS1122), and when the variable time timer times out (step 120IWS1123), it checks whether the relief time reduction determination flag (see step 120IWS86) is set (step 120IWS1124). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process proceeds to step 120IWS1139.

If the rescue time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right hit LED 120IW10 (step 120IWS1125). The CPU 103 also performs control to send a right hit notification start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1126).

In this example, when the processing of step 120IWS1126 is executed and a rescue time reduction occurs, the right-hit LED 120IW10 starts to light up at the start of the pattern determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "20 seconds" to a pattern determination period timer for measuring the determined display period of the first special pattern and the second special pattern (step 120IWS1127). The CPU 103 also controls to send a first pattern determination A designation command or a second pattern determination A designation command that can specify that the pattern determination period is 20 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1128). In this case, if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls to send a first pattern determination A designation command, and if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls to send a second pattern determination A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS1139.

On the other hand, if the rescue time-saving flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving will not occur (step 120IWS1129). Note that whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving will not occur can be determined, for example, by checking the stopping pattern of the special pattern stored in the stopping pattern memory area in step 120IWS93.

If it is decided that the time-saving feature should be over, the CPU 103 controls the right-hit LED 120IW10 to start lighting up (step 120IWS1130). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a right-hit notification start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1131).

In this example, when the processing of step 120IWS1131 is executed and a time-saving missing pattern is derived and displayed, the right-hit LED 120IW10 starts to light up at the start of the pattern determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag A, the time-saving flag B, or the time-saving flag C is set (step 120IWS1132). If none of the time-saving flag A, the time-saving flag B, or the time-saving flag C is set (i.e., in the normal state), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "20 seconds" to a pattern determination period timer for measuring the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern (step 120IWS1133). The CPU 103 also controls to transmit a first pattern determination A designation command or a second pattern determination A designation command that can specify that the pattern determination period is 20 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1134). In this case, if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls to transmit a first pattern determination A designation command, and if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls to transmit a second pattern determination A designation command. Then proceed to step 120IWS1139.

If the time-saving flag A, time-saving flag B, or time-saving flag C is set (i.e., if the time-saving state is in effect), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "10 seconds" to a pattern determination period timer for measuring the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern (step 120IWS1135). The CPU 103 also controls to send a first pattern determination B designation command or a second pattern determination B designation command that can specify that the pattern determination period is 10 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1136). In this case, if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls to send a first pattern determination B designation command, and if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls to send a second pattern determination B designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS1139.

If it is not determined that the time reduction is to be missed (N in step 120IWS1129), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "0.5 seconds" to a pattern determination period timer for measuring the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern (step 120IWS1137). The CPU 103 also controls to send a first pattern determination C designation command or a second pattern determination C designation command that can specify that the pattern determination period is 0.5 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1138). In this case, if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "first", it controls to send a first pattern determination A designation command, and if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "second", it controls to send a second pattern determination A designation command. Then, it proceeds to step 120IWS1139.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the special pattern stop processing (step S113) (step 120IWS1139).

(Special symbol stop processing)
281-19 to 281-21 are flow charts showing the special symbol stop process (step S113) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol determination period timer (step 120IWS131), and checks whether the value of the symbol determination period timer after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS132).

If the value of the pattern determination period timer after subtraction is not 0 (i.e., the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern has not yet ended), the special pattern stop process ends. If the value of the pattern determination period timer after subtraction is 0 (i.e., the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern has ended), the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot flag is set (step 120IWS133). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time-saving flag (time-saving flag A, time-saving flag B, time-saving flag C) and the time-saving count counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the time-saving state (step 120IWS134).

The time-saving counters include a special 2 time-saving counter that corresponds to the number of times the second special symbol changes, and a combined time-saving counter that corresponds to the number of times both the first special symbol and the second special symbol change. When simply referred to as a "time-saving counter," it refers to both the special 2 time-saving counter and the combined time-saving counter.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time-saving counter to "900" (step 120IWS135). Therefore, in this example, the rescue time-saving counter is set to "900" in response to a jackpot, and if neither a next jackpot nor a time-saving miss occurs even after 900 variable display cycles have been performed after the jackpot game ends, the rescue time-saving state will be entered and the game will be controlled to the time-saving state.

In this example, by executing the processing of step 120IWS135, when a jackpot is hit, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "900" at the start of the fanfare period of the jackpot to initialize it, but this is not the only possible mode. For example, the rescue time reduction counter may be set to "900" during a round of jackpot play, or may be configured to be initially set to "900" at the start or end of the ending period of the jackpot play.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the right hit LED 120IW10 to start lighting up (step 120IWS136). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a right hit notification start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS137).

Next, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a jackpot start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS138). Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer for time before the large prize opening to measure the time before the large prize opening is opened (fanfare time) until the special variable prize ball device 7 is controlled to the open state (step 120IWS139). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S144) (step 120IWS140).

If the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 120IWS133), the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving end flag is set (step 120IWS141). If the time-saving end flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 120IWS148. If the time-saving end flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time-saving end flag (step 120IWS142). Next, the CPU 103 resets any of the time-saving flags that are set (any of time-saving flags A to C) and ends the time-saving state (step 120IWS143).

Next, if the values are set, the CPU 103 resets the small win counter, the combined time-saving counter, and the special 2 time-saving counter (step 120IWS144), and controls the right-hit LED 120IW10 to stop lighting (step 120IWS145). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a right-hit notification end command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS146). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a normal state designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS147). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS148.

In this example, the process of steps 120IWS141 to S147 is executed to transition to the normal state at the end of the pattern determination period during the final time-saving fluctuation and to end the right-hit notification, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the system may be configured to transition to the normal state and end the right-hit notification at the start of the fluctuation or the start of the pattern determination period during the final time-saving fluctuation.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the rescue time-saving determination flag is set (step 120IWS148). If the rescue time-saving determination flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "900", the combined time-saving count counter to "900", the rescue time-saving count counter to "900", and the small win count counter to "1" (step 120IWS149). The CPU 103 also sets the time-saving flag C and controls the time-saving state (step 120IWS150). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a time-saving state C designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS151). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS164.

In this example, even if there is a small win fluctuation, if the rescue time-saving determination flag is set in 120IWS148 at the timing when the pattern determination period ends, step 120IWS150 is executed, and the small win game state thereafter is controlled to time-saving state C.

If the rescue time-saving flag is not set, it is checked whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving will not occur (step 120IWS152). Note that whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving will not occur can be determined, for example, by checking the stopping pattern of the special pattern stored in the stopping pattern memory area in step 120IWS93.

If it is decided that the time-saving effect has been lost, the CPU 103 checks whether any of the time-saving flags (time-saving flags A to C) are set (step 120IWS153). If none of the time-saving flags are set (i.e., if the normal state exists), the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "100" and the total time-saving count counter to "900" if the time-saving effect has been lost (Y in step 120IWS154). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS160.

If the time-saving miss is not A, but B (Y in step 120IWS156), the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "50" and the total time-saving count counter to "900" (step 120IWS157). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS160.

If the time-saving miss is not B (N in step 120IWS156), that is, if the time-saving miss is C, the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "30" and the total time-saving count counter to "900" (step 120IWS158). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS160.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the time-saving flag B and controls the time-saving state (step 120IWS160).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time-saving counter to "900" (step 120IWS161). Therefore, in this example, the rescue time-saving counter is set to "900" in response to a time-saving miss, and if neither the next jackpot nor the time-saving miss occurs even after 900 variable display cycles have been performed after the time-saving miss, the rescue time-saving state will be entered and the game will be controlled to the time-saving state.

The CPU 103 also subtracts 1 from the small win counter (step 120IWS162) and transmits a time-saving state B designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS163). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS164.

Also, if any of the time-saving flags are set (Y in step 120IWS153), the process proceeds to step 120IWS164. Therefore, in this example, even if the time-saving has been removed, if the time-saving state is in effect, no new time-saving state is set based on the time-saving removal, and the current time-saving state continues (therefore, the values of the special 2 time-saving count counter and the combined time-saving count counter remain at their current values).

In step 120IWS164, the CPU 103 checks whether the small win flag is set (step 120IWS164). If the small win flag is set, the CPU 103 controls the right hit LED 120IW10 to start lighting up (step 120IWS165). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a right hit notification start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS166).

Next, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a small win start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS167). Next, the CPU 103 sets the special winning port opening time timer (step 120IWS168). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small win opening pre-processing (step S118) (step 120IWS169).

If the small win flag is not set, the CPU 103 resets the rescue time reduction determination flag if it is set (step 120IWS170).

In step 120IWS171, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (step S110) (step 120IWS171).

(Pre-opening processing for small hits)
281-22 is a flow chart showing the small win opening pre-processing (step 120IWS114) in the special symbol process. In the small win opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 first checks whether the special winning opening pre-opening timer has timed out (step 120IWS401). If the special winning opening pre-opening timer has not timed out (i.e., if the fanfare time has not elapsed), the process ends.

If the timer for the time before the special winning opening has timed out (i.e., if the fanfare time has elapsed), the CPU 103 starts driving the solenoid 120IW83 and controls the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 to the open state (step 120IWS402). The CPU 10103 also sets the opening time timer to a value equivalent to the first opening time of the special winning opening (0.016 seconds in this example) (step 120IWS403).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the small win opening process (step 120IWS115) (step 120IWS404).

(Small hit open processing)
281-23 is a flow chart showing the small win opening process (step 120IWS115) in the special symbol process. In the small win opening process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the special winning hole switch 120IW24 is turned on (step 120IWS421). If the special winning hole switch 120IW24 is turned on (i.e., if the winning of a game ball into the special winning hole is detected), the CPU 103 performs control to send a special winning hole winning designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS422).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the V winning port switch 120IW20a is in the ON state (step 120IWS423). If the V winning port switch 120IW20a is in the ON state (i.e., if the entry of a game ball into the V winning port is detected), the CPU 103 performs control to send a V winning port winning designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS424). The CPU 103 also sets a V winning flag indicating that a V winning has occurred (step 120IWS425).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether it is time to open the V winning opening plate 120IW20 (step 120IWS426). Whether it is time to open the V winning opening plate 120IW20 can be determined, for example, by setting a timer when the small win game starts and checking whether the time since the start of the small win game has reached a predetermined time (8 seconds in this example). If it is time to open the V winning opening plate 120IW20, the CPU 103 starts driving the solenoid 120IW84 and controls the V winning opening plate 120IW20 to the open state (step 120IWS427).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether it is time to close the V winning opening plate 120IW20 (step 120IWS428). Whether it is time to close the V winning opening plate 120IW20 can be determined, for example, by setting a timer when the V winning opening plate 120IW20 starts to open, and checking whether the time since the V winning opening plate 120IW20 started to open has reached a predetermined time (8 seconds in this example). If it is time to close the V winning opening plate 120IW20, the CPU 103 stops driving the solenoid 120IW84 and controls the V winning opening plate 120IW20 to a closed state (step 120IWS429).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the open time timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning opening is 0 (step 120IWS430). If the value of the open time timer is not 0 (i.e., if the special winning opening is open), the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the open time timer (step 120IWS431) and checks whether the value of the open time timer after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS432). If the value of the open time timer is 0, the CPU 103 stops driving the solenoid 120IW83 and controls the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 to a closed state (step 120IWS433). The CPU 103 also sets a value equivalent to a predetermined closing time (interval time) to the closing time timer for measuring the closing time after the special winning opening is opened (step 120IWS434). Then, the process ends.

If the open time timer is 0 in step 120IWS430 (i.e., if the special prize opening is closed), the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the close time timer (step 120IWS435) and checks whether the value of the close time timer after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS436). If the value of the close time timer is 0, the CPU 103 checks whether all of the special prize openings have already been opened (step 120IWS437). In this example, if the special prize openings have already been opened four times, the answer is Y in step 120IWS437 and the process proceeds to step 120IWS440.

If all of the special winning ports have not been opened (i.e., if the second to fourth openings remain), the CPU 103 starts driving the solenoid 120IW83 to control the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 to the open state (step 120IWS438). The CPU 103 also sets the closing time timer to a value equivalent to the opening time (0.016 seconds in this example) (step 120IWS439). Then, the process ends.

If all special winning ports have been opened (Y in step 120IWS437), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the small win post-closing processing (step 120IWS116) (step 120IWS440).

(Processing after closing small hit)
FIG. 281-24 is a flow chart showing the small win closing post-processing (step 120IWS116) in the special symbol process processing. In the small win closing post-processing, the CPU 103 checks whether the small win end display timer is set (step 120IWS451), and if the small win end display timer is set, proceeds to step 120IWS453. If the small win end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 sets the small win end display timer to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the small win end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (small win end display time) (step 120IWS452), and ends the processing.

In step 120IWS453, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the small win end display timer. The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the small win end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the small win end display time has elapsed (step 120IWS454). If it has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the small win end display time has elapsed, the CPU 103 checks whether the V winning flag is set (step 120IWS455). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time-saving flag and the time-saving count counter (step 120IWS456). The CPU 103 also resets the V winning flag (step 120IWS457). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a big win start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS458). The CPU 103 also sets the time timer before the big win opening (step 120IWS459).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the pre-hit processing (step 120IWS117) (step 120IWS460).

If it is confirmed in the processing of step 120IWS456 that the V winning flag is not set, the CPU 103 resets the small win flag (step 120IWS461). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a small win end designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS462). If the flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the rescue time reduction determination flag (step 120IWS463) and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special symbol processing (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS464).

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 281-25 is a flow chart showing the jackpot end process (step 120IWS121) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot end display timer is set (step 120IWS531), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, proceeds to step 120IWS535. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot flag or the small jackpot flag (step 120IWS532) and performs control to transmit the jackpot end designation command (step 120IWS533). Then, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot end display timer to a value equivalent to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) (step 120IWS534), and ends the process.

In step 120IWS535, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot end display timer. The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 120IWS536). If it has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 120IWS536), the CPU 103 sets the time-saving flag A (step 120IWS537) and checks whether the rescue time-saving flag is set (step 120IWS538). If the rescue time-saving flag is set, the rescue time-saving display is a small jackpot change, and a V win occurs during the small jackpot play, ending the jackpot play to which the rescue time-saving display has been switched. In this case, the CPU 103 resets the rescue time-saving flag (step 120IWS539), sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "1", sets the combined time-saving count counter to "99", and sets the small jackpot count counter to "1" (step 120IWS540). Next, the CPU 103 performs a story setting process (step 120IWS546).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS547).

On the other hand, if the rescue time-saving flag is not set, it is checked whether the jackpot occurred in the time-saving state (step S120IWS541). Whether the jackpot occurred in the time-saving state can be determined, for example, by checking whether the time-saving flag is set at the start of the jackpot game before the processing of steps S120IWS134 and S120IWS456 is executed and the time-saving flag is reset, and if the time-saving flag is set, a jackpot time-saving flag is set, indicating that the time-saving state was in effect when the jackpot occurred, and in step S120IWS541, it is checked whether the jackpot time-saving flag is set.

If the jackpot occurred during the time-saving state, the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "7", the total time-saving count counter to "99", and the small win count counter to "1" (step 120IWS540). Next, the CPU 103 performs a story setting process (step 120IWS546).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS547).

If the jackpot did not occur in the time-saving state (if the jackpot occurred in the normal state), it is checked whether the jackpot game state that ended was based on the variation of the first special symbol (step 120IWS543). Whether the jackpot was based on the variation of the first special symbol can be determined, for example, by checking whether data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer. If the jackpot game state that ended was based on the variation of the first special symbol, the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "1", sets the combined time-saving count counter to "99", and sets the small win count counter to "1" (step 120IWS544). Next, the CPU 103 performs a story setting process (step 120IWS546).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS547).

If the completed jackpot game state is not based on the variation of the first special symbol (if it is based on the variation of the second special symbol), the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "99", the total time-saving count counter to "99", and the small win count counter to "1" (step 120IWS545). Next, the CPU 103 performs a story setting process (step 120IWS546).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS547).

In this example, when the above process is performed and the variable display of the first special pattern is executed, if a jackpot occurs during the normal state, the time-saving state is controlled to one time (see step 120IWS544), and if a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state, the time-saving state is controlled to seven times (see step 120IWS542). Therefore, when the variable display of the first special pattern is executed, the time-saving state (in this example, the number of time-saving times is greater) is controlled to be more favorable if a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state than if a jackpot occurs during the normal state.

In addition, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if a jackpot occurs during the normal state, the time-saving state is controlled to 99 times (see step 120IWS545), and if a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state, the time-saving state is controlled to 7 times (see step 120IWS542). Therefore, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the time-saving state (in this example, the number of time-saving times is greater) is controlled to be more favorable if a jackpot occurs during the normal state than if a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state.

Furthermore, in this example, if the change display where the rescue time reduction has occurred is a small win change, and if a V win occurs during the small win game and the transition to the big win game is terminated, the time reduction state is controlled to one time reduction (see step 120IWS540). Therefore, if the change display where the rescue time reduction has occurred is a small win change, and if a V win occurs during the small win game and the transition to the big win game is terminated, the time reduction state is controlled to one with a lower advantage (in this example, the time reduction state is one time, which is small).

For example, if the change display that caused the rescue time-saving function to occur was a small win change, and a V win occurs during the small win game and the transition to a big win game is terminated, if the V win occurs due to a small win change based on the change display of the second special pattern, the function may be configured to control the game to a time-saving state with 99 time-saving times (hence, a time-saving state with a high degree of advantage).

(state transition)
Next, the state transition in the feature part 120IW will be described. FIG. 281-26 is a state transition diagram for explaining the state transition in the feature part 120IW. As shown in FIG. 281-26, in the normal state, when a jackpot is hit, the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot) is controlled (see step 120IWS537). In addition, even in the normal state, when a miss occurs, when a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the time-saving state B (time-saving state via time-saving miss) is controlled (see step 120IWS160). Furthermore, even in the case of a miss, when a rescue time-saving state occurs (after RAM clear processing, or after a jackpot or a time-saving miss, when the number of fluctuations reaches 900 times without the next jackpot or time-saving miss occurring), the time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving) is controlled (see step 120IWS150).

Also, as shown in FIG. 281-26, in the case of a big win in time-saving state A, the state is controlled again to time-saving state A (time-saving state via big win) (see step 120IWS537). Also, as shown in FIG. 281-26, in the case of a small win in time-saving state A, the state is controlled to a small win state (see step 120IWS69), and in the case of a V-winning in the small win state, the state is controlled to time-saving state A (time-saving state via big win) via a big win (see step 120IWS537). Also, in the case of a miss in time-saving state A, if a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the state is controlled to time-saving state B (time-saving state via time-saving miss) (see step 120IWS160). In addition, in the time-saving state A, even if no small win occurs, if the variable display of the second special pattern ends 1, 7, or 99 times without a big win occurring, the state is controlled to the normal state (see steps 120IWS82, S143). In addition, in the time-saving state A, if a small win occurs once, the state is controlled to the normal state (see steps 120IWS73-75).

Also, as shown in FIG. 281-26, in the case of a big win in the time-saving state B, the state is controlled to the time-saving state A (the time-saving state via the big win) (see step 120IWS537). In the case of a small win in the time-saving state B, the state is controlled to the small win state (see step 120IWS69). In the time-saving state B, even if a small win does not occur, if the variable display of the second special pattern is completed 30 times, 50 times, 100 times, or 200 times without a big win, the state is controlled to the normal state (see steps 120IWS82, S143). In the time-saving state B, even if a miss occurs, if a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the state is controlled to the time-saving state B (the time-saving state via the time-saving miss) (see step 120IWS160). In the time-saving state B, if a small win occurs once, the state is controlled to the normal state (see steps 120IWS73-75).

Also, as shown in FIG. 281-26, in the case of a big win in time-saving state C, the state is controlled to time-saving state A (time-saving state via big win) (see step 120IWS537). In the case of a small win in time-saving state C, the state is controlled to a small win state (see step 120IWS69). In the case of time-saving state C, if the 900 fluctuation displays are completed without a big win, the state is controlled to time-saving state C again (see step 120IWS150). In the case of time-saving state C, if the number of fluctuations reaches 900, the state is controlled to time-saving state C again (see steps 120IWS149, 150). In the case of time-saving state C, if a small win occurs once, the state is controlled to the normal state (see steps 120IWS73-75).

In addition, if a small hit occurs during time-saving state A but does not result in a V win, time-saving state A will continue as is after the small hit play ends. Also, if a small hit occurs during time-saving state B but does not result in a V win, time-saving state B will continue as is after the small hit play ends. Also, if a small hit occurs during time-saving state C but does not result in a V win, time-saving state C will continue as is after the small hit play ends.

(Command analysis process)
Next, the operation of the performance control means will be described. Figures 281-27 to 281-28 are flow charts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The performance control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, and in the command analysis process, the performance control CPU 120 checks the contents of the command stored in the command received buffer.

In the command analysis process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks whether a received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 120IWS611). Whether a command is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception counter with the read pointer. If the two match, no received command is stored. If a received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the performance control CPU 120 reads out the received command from the command reception buffer (step 120IWS612). After reading out, the read pointer value is incremented by +2 (step 120IWS613). The increment of +2 is because 2 bytes (1 command) are read out at a time.

If the received performance control command is a variation pattern command (step 120IWS614), the performance control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 120IWS615). Then, it sets a variation pattern command reception flag (step 120IWS616).

If the received performance control command is a display result designation command (step 120IWS617), the performance control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in a display result designation command storage area formed in RAM 122 (step 120IWS618).

If the received performance control command is any of the pattern determination designation commands (first pattern determination A designation command, first pattern determination B designation command, first pattern determination C designation command, second pattern determination A designation command, second pattern determination B designation command, second pattern determination C designation command) (step 120IWS619), the performance control CPU 120 sets the determination command reception flag according to the received pattern determination designation command (step 120IWS620). For example, when the first pattern determination A designation command is received, the first determination A command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the first pattern determination B designation command is received, the first determination B command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the first pattern determination C designation command is received, the first determination C command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second pattern determination A designation command is received, the second determination A command reception flag is set. Also, for example, if a second symbol determination B designation command is received, a second determination B command reception flag is set. Also, for example, if a second symbol determination C designation command is received, a second determination C command reception flag is set.

If the received presentation control command is a jackpot start command (step 120IWS621), the presentation control CPU 120 sets the jackpot start command reception flag (step 120IWS622). If the received presentation control command is a jackpot end command (step 120IWS623), the presentation control CPU 120 sets the jackpot end command reception flag (step 120IWS624).

If the received performance control command is a large prize slot winning designation command (step 120IWS625), the performance control CPU 120 sets the large prize slot winning designation command reception flag (step 120IWS626). If the received performance control command is a special prize slot winning designation command (step 120IWS627), the performance control CPU 120 sets the special prize slot winning designation command reception flag (step 120IWS628). If the received performance control command is a V prize slot winning designation command (step 120IWS629), the performance control CPU 120 sets the V prize slot winning designation command reception flag (step 120IWS630).

If the received performance control command is a normal state designation command (step 120IWS631), the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to switch to a background image corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue background image corresponding to the sea mode) (step 120IWS632).

If the received presentation control command is a command to specify time-saving state A (step 120IWS633), the presentation control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to switch to a background image corresponding to time-saving state A (time-saving state via a jackpot) (for example, a yellow background image corresponding to sunset mode) (step 120IWS634).

If the received performance control command is a command to specify time-saving state B (step 120IWS635), the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to switch to a background image corresponding to time-saving state B (a time-saving state after the time-saving state has ended) (for example, a green background image corresponding to forest mode) (step 120IWS636).

If the received performance control command is a time-saving state C designation command (step 120IWS637), the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not a special performance mode flag is set, indicating that the performance mode is set to the special performance mode (step 120IWS638). If the special performance mode flag is not set, the image display device 5 is controlled to switch to a background image corresponding to the time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving) (for example, an orange background image corresponding to the tangerine orchard mode) (step 120IWS638). On the other hand, if the special performance mode flag is set, the image display device 5 is controlled to switch to a background image corresponding to the special performance mode (for example, a red background image corresponding to the flame mode) (step 120IWS640).

If the received performance control command is a setting value command (step 120IWS641), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to store the setting value in the setting value storage area (step 120IWS642).

If the received performance control command is a right-hit notification start command (step 120IWS643), the performance control CPU 120 controls the right-hit notification LED 120IW20 to start lighting up (step 120IWS644). Note that in this example, the right-hit notification start command is sent at the start of the pattern determination period when a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed or when a time-saving rescue is activated (see steps 120IWS1126, S1131), so the right-hit notification LED 120IW20 starts lighting up at the start of the pattern determination period.

If the received performance control command is a command to end the right-hit notification (step 120IWS645), the performance control CPU 120 controls the right-hit notification LED 120IW20 to stop lighting (step 120IWS646) and starts the execution of the left-hit notification performance (step 120IWS647).

If the received performance control command is any other command, the performance control CPU 120 executes processing to store the received performance control command and set a flag corresponding to the received performance control command (step 120IWS648). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS611.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 281-29 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 280. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads out a variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 120IWS801). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop pattern) of the decorative pattern according to the variable pattern command read out in step 120IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 120IWS802). That is, the performance control CPU 120 executes the process of step 120IWS802, thereby realizing a display result determination means that determines the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the stop pattern of the decorative pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. In addition, when a pseudo consecutive win is specified by the variation pattern command, the performance control CPU 120 also determines a chance pattern (for example, a combination of patterns that are not a reach but are one pattern away from the jackpot pattern, such as "223" or "445") as a provisional stop pattern during the pseudo consecutive win in step 120IWS802. The performance control CPU 120 stores data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. In addition, in step 120IWS802, the performance control CPU 120 may determine whether or not a jackpot has been reached based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop pattern of the decorative pattern based only on the variation pattern command.

In step 120IWS802, if the received display result designation command indicates "big win" or if the received display result designation command indicates "small win", the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative patterns (big win pattern, small win pattern) in which three symbols are aligned as the stopping symbols. Note that, although this example shows a case in which a combination of decorative patterns in which three symbols are aligned as the same pattern for both the big win pattern and the small win pattern is determined, this is not the only possible embodiment. For example, if the received display result designation command indicates "small win", the performance control CPU 120 may be configured to determine a combination of decorative patterns of "135" as the stopping symbol as the small win pattern.

In the case of a "miss", a combination of decorative symbols other than those mentioned above is determined. However, if a reach performance is involved, a combination of decorative symbols where the two symbols on the left and right are aligned is determined. Also, even if there is a miss, if it is a "time-saving miss", a combination of decorative symbols of the losing symbols including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) is determined. Note that the system may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of the losing symbols including different special symbols (for example, a heart-shaped symbol or a diamond symbol) depending on the type of time-saving.

The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for determining the stopping pattern, and determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern using a stopping pattern determination table in which data indicating the combination of decorative patterns is associated with a numerical value. In other words, the stopping pattern is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative patterns that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

As for decorative patterns, stopping patterns that evoke a jackpot (a combination of patterns in which the left, center, and right are all the same) are called jackpot patterns. Stopping patterns that evoke a loss are called loss patterns.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command read out in step 120IWS801 is fluctuation pattern PT8-1 (see FIG. 281-10 (G)) that specifies a rescue time short entry performance (step 120IWS803). If it is fluctuation pattern PT8-1, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the setting value is one of the settings "4" to "6" based on the setting value specified by the setting value command (the setting value stored in the setting value storage area (see step 120IWS642)) (step 120IWS804). If the setting value is not one of the settings "4" to "6", it proceeds to step 120IWS808.

If the setting value is any of settings "4" to "6", the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform a rescue setting performance and the type of performance depending on whether the setting value is "4" to "6" (step 120IWS805). Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not it has been decided to perform a rescue setting performance (step 120IWS806). If it has been decided not to perform a rescue setting performance, the process proceeds to step 120IWS808. If it has been decided to perform a rescue setting performance, the performance control CPU 120 sets the special performance mode flag (step 120IWS807) and proceeds to step 120IWS808.

In step 120IWS808, if the CPU 120 for effect control has decided to execute a rescue time short period entry effect or a rescue time setting suggestion effect, it selects a process table that includes the rescue time setting suggestion effect (step 120IWS808). Then, it proceeds to step 120IWS814.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command read in step 120IWS801 is not fluctuation pattern PT8-1, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command read in step 120IWS801 is fluctuation pattern PT6-2 (see FIG. 281-10(E)) that specifies a time-saving stimulation performance or fluctuation pattern PT7-2 (see FIG. 281-10(F)) that specifies a time-saving stimulation performance (step 120IWS809). If it is fluctuation pattern PT6-2 or fluctuation pattern PT7-2, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the time-saving stimulation performance (step 120IWS810). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS814.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern is not PT6-2 or PT7-2, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command read out in step 120IWS801 is fluctuation pattern PT7-3 (see FIG. 281-10 (F)) that specifies a time-saving revival performance (step 120IWS811). If it is fluctuation pattern PT7-3, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the time-saving revival performance (step 120IWS812). Then, proceed to step 120IWS814. If it is not fluctuation pattern PT7-3, the performance control CPU 120 selects a normal process table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (step 120IWS813). Then, proceed to step 120IWS814.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer for process data 1 of the process table selected in step 120IWS808, step 120IWS810, step 120IWS812, or step 120IWS813 (step 120IWS814).

The process table is a table in which process data is set that the performance control CPU 120 refers to when controlling the performance device. That is, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (performance parts) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data that is a collection of multiple combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating the manner of change that constitutes the change manner during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is included. In addition, the process timer setting value is set to the change time for that change manner. The performance control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display of the decorative pattern in the change manner set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer setting value. In addition, the process table is stored in the ROM in the performance control board 80. In addition, a process table is prepared according to each change pattern.

The process table used when controlling the performance of a variation pattern involving a reach performance has process data set therein which indicates that the left pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and that the right pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a further predetermined time has elapsed. In addition, instead of setting the pattern to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the pattern may be generated by synthesizing according to the determined stopping pattern, or the provisional stopping pattern in the pseudo consecutive or sliding performance.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 120IWS815). For example, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the audio control board 13 to output audio from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In this characteristic section 120IW, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern command.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value equivalent to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 120IWS816).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 120IWS817).

(Rescue setting suggestion performance determination table)
Figure 281-30 is an explanatory diagram of a rescue setting suggestion performance determination table used in step 120IWS805 of Figure 281-29 when the fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern PT8-1 (see Figure 281-10 (G)).

As shown in Figure 281-30, in the rescue setting suggestion effect determination table, when the setting value is set to "4", the judgment values are allocated so that the selection rate for no rescue setting suggestion effect is 50%, the selection rate for rescue setting suggestion effect A is 40%, the selection rate for rescue setting suggestion effect B is 5%, and the selection rate for rescue setting suggestion effect C is 5%.

In addition, when the setting value is set to "5", the judgment value is allocated so that the selection rate for no rescue setting suggestion effect is 30%, the selection rate for rescue setting suggestion effect A is 10%, the selection rate for rescue setting suggestion effect B is 50%, and the selection rate for rescue setting suggestion effect C is 10%.

In addition, when the setting value is set to "6", the judgment value is allocated so that the selection rate for no rescue setting suggestion effect is 10%, the selection rate for rescue setting suggestion effect A is 15%, the selection rate for rescue setting suggestion effect B is 15%, and the selection rate for rescue setting suggestion effect C is 60%.

Therefore, in this example, if rescue setting suggestion effect A is executed, it suggests that the setting value is likely to be set to "4", if rescue setting suggestion effect B is executed, it suggests that the setting value is likely to be set to "5", and if rescue setting suggestion effect C is executed, it suggests that the setting value is likely to be set to "6".

The rescue setting suggestion effect is a setting value suggestion effect that is executed on the image display device 5 when the rescue time reduction entry effect is executed.

In this example, the rescue setting suggestion effect is configured to be executable when the setting value is set to "4" to "6," so the rescue setting suggestion effect is a setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting is set to a relatively high value.

(Variable display performance processing)
281-31 and 281-32 are flow charts showing the variable display performance process (step S172) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 280. In the variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 120IWS841) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step 120IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 120IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer is set to the next process timer setting value in the process table (step 120IWS844). In addition, the control state for the performance device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data that are set next (step 120IWS845).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command has been received (step 120IWS846). Specifically, it checks whether the first confirmation A command reception flag or the second confirmation A command reception flag has been set in the command analysis process. If the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the mode transition performance (a performance that notifies the player of a transition to a time-saving state (time-saving mode)) and the right-hit notification (step 120IWS847). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table (step 120IWS848). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 120IWS849). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 20 seconds to a determined performance period timer for measuring the pattern determination period on the performance control means side (step 120IWS850). Then, it proceeds to step 120IWS867.

If neither the first pattern confirmation A designation command nor the second pattern confirmation A designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the first pattern confirmation B designation command or the second pattern confirmation B designation command has been received (step 120IWS851). Specifically, it checks whether the first confirmation B command reception flag or the second confirmation B command reception flag has been set in the command analysis process. If the first pattern confirmation B designation command or the second pattern confirmation B designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the continuation performance (performance that notifies the user that the time-saving state will continue) (step 120IWS852). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table (step 120IWS853). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 120IWS854). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds to a determined performance period timer for measuring the pattern determination period on the performance control means side (step 120IWS855). Then, it proceeds to step 120IWS867.

If neither the first pattern confirmation B designation command nor the second pattern confirmation B designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the first pattern confirmation C designation command or the second pattern confirmation C designation command has been received (step 120IWS861). Specifically, it checks whether the first confirmation C command reception flag or the second confirmation C command reception flag has been set in the command analysis process. If the first pattern confirmation C designation command or the second pattern confirmation C designation command has been received, it proceeds to step 120IWS863.

If neither the first pattern determination C designation command nor the second pattern determination C designation command is received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variable time timer has timed out (step 120IWS862). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the first pattern determination C designation command or the second pattern determination C designation command is received (Y in step 120IWS861), or when the variable time timer has timed out (Y in step 120IWS862), the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the normal pattern determination display (step 120IWS863). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 120IWS864). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 120IWS865). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds to a determined performance period timer for measuring the pattern determination period on the performance control means side (step 120IWS866). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS867.

In this example, in addition to when a pattern determination command is received, if the variable time timer times out (see step 120IWS862), the process proceeds to step 120IWS862 and onwards, and the pattern determination period begins. However, unless a pattern determination command is missed, step 120IWS862 will normally be judged as Y and the process will not proceed to step 120IWS862 and onwards.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the special chart hit waiting process (step S173) (step 120IWS867).

(Waiting for special drawing)
281-33 and 281-34 are flow charts showing the waiting process for a special drawing (step S173) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 280. In the waiting process for a special drawing, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the determined performance period timer (step 120IWS871), and checks whether the value of the determined performance period timer after subtraction has timed out (step 120IWS872). If the value of the determined performance period timer after subtraction has not timed out, the CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 120IWS873), and executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of the process data n (display control execution data n, lamp control execution data n, sound number data n) (step 120IWS874).

When the process timer times out (step 120IWS875), the performance control CPU 120 switches the process data (step 120IWS876). The performance control CPU 120 also sets the process timer to the next process timer setting value in the process table, and starts the process timer (step 087IWS877).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the decorative symbol stopping pattern is currently being displayed (step 120IWS878). If the decorative symbol stopping pattern is currently being displayed, the process ends. If the decorative symbol stopping pattern is not currently being displayed, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the determined stopping pattern (non-time-saving losing pattern, time-saving losing pattern, big win pattern, small win pattern) to stop (step 120IWS879).

If the jackpot pattern is displayed as stopped in the processing of step 120IWS879 (Y in step 120IWS880), the presentation control CPU 120 sets a jackpot stop flag indicating that the jackpot pattern has been confirmed and displayed (step 120IWS881). Then, the processing ends.

When the small win symbol is stopped and displayed in the processing of step 120IWS879 (Y in step 120IWS882), the presentation control CPU 120 sets a small win stop flag indicating that the small win symbol has been confirmed and displayed (step 120IWS883A). Then, the presentation control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start the execution of a V winning promotion presentation that encourages the game ball to win the V winning hole (step 120IWS883B), and ends the processing.

If the value of the fixed performance period timer after subtraction has timed out (i.e., the pattern fixed period has elapsed), the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the jackpot stop flag is set (step 120IWS884). If the jackpot stop flag is set, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether a jackpot start command has been received (step 120IWS885A). Note that whether a jackpot start command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether a jackpot start command reception flag (see step 120IWS622) has been set. If a jackpot start command has not been received, the process ends.

If a jackpot start command has been received, the presentation control CPU 120 resets the jackpot stop flag (step 120IWS885B). Then, based on the setting value specified by the setting value command (the setting value stored in the setting value storage area (see step 120IWS642)), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether or not to display a setting suggestion presentation at the time of the jackpot and the type of presentation (step 120IWS886).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table for the performance during the jackpot according to the presence or absence of a setting suggestion performance at the time of the jackpot and its type (step 120IWS887). The performance control CPU 120 then starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 120IWS888), and executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as a performance component, and speaker 27 as a performance component) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 120IWS889).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during the jackpot (step 120IWS890).

If the big win stop flag is not set, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the small win stop flag is set (step 120IWS891). If the small win stop flag is set, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether a small win start command has been received (step 120IWS892). Whether a small win start command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether a flag indicating that a small win start command has been received is set in the command analysis process. If a small win start command has not been received, the process ends.

If a small win start command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 resets the small win stop flag (step 120IWS893). Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the small win performance (step 120IWS894). Then, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 120IWS895), and executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as a performance component, and speaker 27 as a performance component) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 120IWS896).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during the small win (step 120IWS897).

If the small win stop flag is also not set (i.e., if a non-time-saving losing pattern or a time-saving losing pattern is stopped and displayed), the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 120IWS898).

(Table for deciding the setting suggestion effect when the jackpot occurs)
Figure 281-35 is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot setting suggestion performance determination table used in step 120IWS886.

As shown in Figure 281-35, in the setting suggestion effect determination table when the setting value is set to "1", the judgment values are allocated so that the selection rate for no setting suggestion effect when a jackpot occurs is 65%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect A when a jackpot occurs is 10%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect B when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect C when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect D when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect E when a jackpot occurs is 5%, and the selection rate for setting suggestion effect F when a jackpot occurs is 5%.

In addition, when the setting value is set to "2", the judgment values are allocated so that the selection rate for no setting suggestion effect when a jackpot occurs is 65%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect A when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect B when a jackpot occurs is 10%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect C when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect D when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect E when a jackpot occurs is 5%, and the selection rate for setting suggestion effect F when a jackpot occurs is 5%.

In addition, when the setting value is set to "3", the judgment values are allocated so that the selection rate for no setting suggestion effect when a jackpot occurs is 65%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect A when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect B when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect C when a jackpot occurs is 10%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect D when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect E when a jackpot occurs is 5%, and the selection rate for setting suggestion effect F when a jackpot occurs is 5%.

In addition, when the setting value is set to "4", the judgment values are allocated so that the selection rate for no setting suggestion effect when a jackpot occurs is 60%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect A when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect B when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect C when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect D when a jackpot occurs is 15%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect E when a jackpot occurs is 5%, and the selection rate for setting suggestion effect F when a jackpot occurs is 5%.

In addition, when the setting value is set to "5", the judgment values are allocated so that the selection rate for no setting suggestion effect when a jackpot occurs is 60%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect A when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect B when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect C when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect D when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect E when a jackpot occurs is 15%, and the selection rate for setting suggestion effect F when a jackpot occurs is 5%.

In addition, when the setting value is set to "6", the judgment values are allocated so that the selection rate for no setting suggestion effect when a jackpot occurs is 60%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect A when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect B when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect C when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect D when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect E when a jackpot occurs is 5%, and the selection rate for setting suggestion effect F when a jackpot occurs is 15%.

Therefore, in this example, if jackpot setting suggestion performance A is executed, it is suggested that there is a relatively high possibility that the setting value is set to "1", if jackpot setting suggestion performance B is executed, it is suggested that there is a relatively high possibility that the setting value is set to "2", if jackpot setting suggestion performance C is executed, it is suggested that there is a relatively high possibility that the setting value is set to "3", if jackpot setting suggestion performance D is executed, it is suggested that there is a relatively high possibility that the setting value is set to "4", if jackpot setting suggestion performance E is executed, it is suggested that there is a relatively high possibility that the setting value is set to "5", and if jackpot setting suggestion performance F is executed, it is suggested that there is a relatively high possibility that the setting value is set to "6".

The setting suggestion effect at the time of a jackpot is a setting value suggestion effect that is executed on the image display device 5 when a jackpot symbol is displayed.

(Example of performance)
Next, a specific example of the presentation mode of the rescue time-saving entry presentation and the rescue setting suggestion presentation when transitioning to the time-saving state C, which is the rescue time-saving, will be described. Fig. 281-36 to Fig. 281-37 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until transitioning to the time-saving state. In Fig. 281-36 to Fig. 281-37, the presentation screen transitions in the order of (A) (B) (C) ... (G).

As shown in Figure 281-36 (A), the display of the decorative pattern 120IW100 begins to change one change before the transition to the rescue time reduction.

As shown in Figure 281-36 (B), when the display of the decorative pattern 120IW100 starts to change, the rescue time-saving entry effect starts. In the rescue time-saving entry effect, first, while the display of the decorative pattern 120IW100 changes, the entry suggestion display 120IW105, which suggests entry into the rescue time-saving mode and says "Super hot!", is displayed, and the rescue time-saving entry effect starts. Note that from then on, in the rescue time-saving entry effect, the decorative pattern 120IW100 is not displayed, and only the small pattern 120IW101 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 281-36(C), an operation suggestion image 120IW106 is displayed, which suggests operating (pressing) the push button 31B (see FIG. 281-1). For example, the operation suggestion image 120IW106 displays the word "press" together with an image encouraging the user to press the push button 31B.

As shown in FIG. 281-36(D), when the push button 31B is operated when the operation suggestion image 120IW106 is displayed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the operation suggestion image 120IW106, the text display 120IW107 "V STOCK x 1" is displayed, and the player is notified that the rescue time reduction will begin. In addition, a right-hit instruction display 120IW108 instructing a right hit is displayed next to the small symbol 120IW101. Furthermore, if it has been decided that a rescue setting suggestion effect should be executed, the rescue setting suggestion effect is executed, and a setting value suggestion display 120IW200 suggesting a setting value is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen. This suggests that the setting value is one of settings "4" to "6."

For example, when rescue setting suggestion performance A is executed, the setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed in blue, when rescue setting suggestion performance B is executed, the setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed in green, and when rescue setting suggestion performance C is executed, the setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed in red, and the display color of the setting value suggestion display can be configured to differ depending on the type of rescue setting suggestion performance.

In addition, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when a rescue setting suggestion performance A is executed, a triangular setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed, when a rescue setting suggestion performance B is executed, a diamond-shaped setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed, and when a rescue setting suggestion performance C is executed, a star-shaped setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed, and the display shape of the setting value suggestion display may be changed depending on the type of rescue setting suggestion performance.

In this example, even if a jackpot is hit, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) can be configured to execute a presentation that displays the text "V STOCK x 1" in the same manner as in FIG. 281-36 (D). In this case, for example, in the start winning judgment process (step S101), the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs a look-ahead judgment process to determine whether or not a jackpot will be hit and the type of fluctuation pattern, and transmits a look-ahead judgment result designation command that can identify the look-ahead judgment result. Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes a performance (so-called reserved consecutive performance) in the same manner as in FIG. 281-36 (D) based on the look-ahead judgment result designation command received. For example, if it is determined that there is one item in the reserved memory that will be a jackpot based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command, the reserved consecutive performance is executed by displaying the text "V STOCK x 1". Also, for example, if it is determined based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command that there are two jackpots in the reserved memory, the text display "V STOCK x 2" is displayed to execute the reserved consecutive performance.

On the other hand, when the rescue time reduction is activated, there is a high probability that the extremely short change display time of 0.5 seconds will be executed during the time reduction state via the rescue time reduction (see FIG. 281-10(B)). Therefore, the change display will be consumed very quickly and a jackpot is likely to occur at a relatively early timing. Therefore, during the change display that has been activated in the rescue time reduction (in this example, the pattern determination period), the effect of displaying the text display "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 281-36(D) is executed without checking the results of the pre-reading judgment. Therefore, the effect of displaying the text display "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 281-36(D) is an effect in the same manner as the pseudo-reserved consecutive effect, and is an effect that notifies the user that the rescue time reduction has been activated.

In addition, if the fluctuation that has reached the rescue time reduction is a jackpot fluctuation, for example, 30 seconds may be secured as the fluctuation time, and a presentation similar to that of FIG. 281-36 may be executed to produce a presentation that appears to be the rescue time reduction, and then a presentation that notifies of a jackpot may be executed.

The example shows a case where the right hit instruction display 120IW108 starts to be displayed from the timing of the display of the text display 120IW107 "V STOCK x 1", but the timing of the start of the display of the right hit instruction display 120IW108 is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, the right hit instruction display 120IW108 may start to be displayed from the timing of the confirmation display of the previous stopping pattern, and various modes are possible.

In addition, this example shows a case where a setting suggestion effect is executed when a rescue time reduction occurs and a pseudo consecutive hold effect is executed, but this is not limited to this. It may also be configured to execute a setting suggestion effect when a jackpot occurs and a consecutive hold effect is executed, or it may be configured not to execute a setting suggestion effect when a jackpot occurs and a consecutive hold effect is executed. Also, when executing a setting suggestion effect when a jackpot occurs and a consecutive hold effect is executed, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect may be different from when a rescue time reduction occurs, or the execution mode of the setting suggestion effect may be different.

Then, as shown in FIG. 281-37(E), a mode selection screen 120IW109 is displayed to select the presentation mode during rescue time reduction. For example, a screen to select one of modes A to D is displayed. The mode is selected by moving the cursor by operating the stick controller 31A, and is confirmed by operating the push button 31B. If a predetermined time has passed without selecting a presentation mode, the presentation mode that the cursor is aligned with is automatically confirmed. Also, even when the mode selection screen 120IW109 is displayed, the right hit instruction display 120IW108 remains displayed next to the small pattern 120IW101. Also, the rescue setting suggestion presentation continues to be executed, and the setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed on this screen as well.

Then, as shown in FIG. 281-37(F), when the selection of the presentation mode is completed, a start notification screen 120IW110 is displayed to notify the user that the rescue time reduction will begin. For example, the words "Rescue time reduction has begun" are displayed. At this time, the small symbols 120IW101 stop.

Then, as shown in FIG. 281-37(G), when the next change starts, the game transitions to time-saving state C, and the rescue time-saving mode starts. At this time, the background image changes to the background image (red) for the special performance mode.

In this example, the rescue time-saving entry effect is executed one change before entering the rescue time-saving mode, but it is also possible to display the number of spins remaining until the rescue time-saving mode, explain the effects during the rescue time-saving mode, and display a countdown before that change.

In addition, in this example, a pattern determination period of 20 seconds is secured in the variable display that results in rescue time reduction, and a mode transition effect and right-hit notification are executed, but the pattern determination period may remain the usual 0.5 seconds, and the game may be configured to transition directly to the time-saving state via rescue time reduction without performing a mode transition effect, etc.

In addition, this example shows a case where the rescue time-saving counter is initially set to "900" when the RAM clear process is executed, when a jackpot is hit, or when the time-saving function is not activated, but for example, when a story-based effect (such as a story reach effect or a story about whether to perform high-speed fluctuation) is to be executed, the selection buffer and story counter for that story may also be cleared. Also, it may be possible to configure the game so that a story can be set when the rescue time-saving function is activated, or so that different stories can be set depending on the game state.

(Variation 1)
In the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW, the case where the time-saving state continues until a small hit occurs uniformly in the time-saving state A via a big win, the time-saving state B via a time-saving miss, and the time-saving state C via a rescue time-saving is shown, but it is not limited to such a form. For example, the time-saving state may be configured to continue until a different number of small hits occur depending on whether it is the time-saving state A via a big win, the time-saving state B via a time-saving miss, or the time-saving state C via a rescue time-saving. Below, a modified example 1 in which the time-saving state continues until a different number of small hits occur depending on whether it is the time-saving state A via a big win, the time-saving state B via a time-saving miss, or the time-saving state C via a rescue time-saving is described.

Figure 281-38 is a flow chart showing the special symbol stop processing in modified example 1. In modified example 1, the processing of steps 120IWS131 to S148 of the special symbol stop processing is the same as those shown in Figures 281-19 and 281-20. In modified example 1, if the rescue time-saving determination flag is set (Y in step 120IWS148), the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "900", the combined time-saving count counter to "900", the rescue time-saving count counter to "900", and the small win count counter to "2" (X in step 120IWS149). In addition, the processing from step 120IWS150 onwards is the same as those shown in Figure 281-20.

By executing the above process, in variant 1, in the case of time-saving state A via a big win and time-saving state B via a missed time-saving state, the time-saving state continues until one small win occurs, whereas in the case of time-saving state C via a rescue time-saving state, the time-saving state continues until two small wins occur.

In addition, the present embodiment is not limited to this embodiment. For example, the time-saving state may be configured to continue until a different number of small wins occur between time-saving state A via a big win and time-saving state B via a missed time-saving state. In addition, in this embodiment, the time-saving state is configured to continue until two small wins occur in time-saving state C via a rescue time-saving state, but the time-saving state may be configured to continue until another number of small wins occur, such as three.

(Variation 2)
In the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW, the case where the subtraction process of the small hit counter is executed at the start of the small hit fluctuation (see steps 120IWS71 to S75) is shown, but it is not limited to such a processing mode. For example, it may be configured to execute the subtraction process of the small hit counter at the end of the small hit game after the small hit fluctuation. Below, we will explain the modified example 2 in which the subtraction process of the small hit counter is executed at the end of the small hit game after the small hit fluctuation.

Figure 281-39 is a flow chart showing the processing after the small hit is closed in Modification 2. In Modification 2, the processing of steps 120IWS451 to S463 is the same as those shown in Figure 281-24. Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the small hit counter is 0 (step 120IWS463A). If the value of the small hit counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS464.

If the value of the small hit counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the small hit counter (step 120IWS463B).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the small hit counter after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS463C). If the value of the small hit counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS464.

If the value of the small win counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 resets the time-saving flags (time-saving flags A to C) that have been set and ends the time-saving state (step 120IWS463D). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS464.

The processing of step 120IWS464 is the same as that shown in FIG. 281-24.

(Variation 3)
In addition, in the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW, when the rescue time reduction is to be performed, the time reduction state is uniformly controlled at the end of the pattern determination period, but it is not limited to such a form, and when the variable display that is the rescue time reduction is a small win variable, it may be configured to be controlled to the time reduction state at the end of the small win game. Below, we will explain a modified example 3 in which the time reduction state is controlled at the end of the small win game when the variable display that is the rescue time reduction is a small win variable.

Figure 281-40 is a flowchart showing the process after the small win is closed in Modification 3. Note that in Modification 3, even if the rescue time reduction determination flag is set in step 120IWS148 during the special symbol stop process, if the small win flag is set, the process in steps 120IWS149 to S151 is not executed.

In the third modification, the processing of steps S120IWS451 to S462 is the same as those shown in FIG. 281-24. Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the rescue time-saving determination flag is set (step S120IWS462A). If the rescue time-saving determination flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set rescue time-saving determination flag (step S120IWS462B). The CPU 103 also sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "900", the combined time-saving count counter to "900", the rescue time-saving count counter to "900", and the small win count counter to "1" (step S120IWS462C). The CPU 103 also sets the time-saving flag C and controls it to the time-saving state (step S120IWS462D). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a time-saving state C designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS462E). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS464.

The processing of step 120IWS464 is the same as that shown in FIG. 281-24.

(Variation 4)
In addition, in the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW, when the change display in which the rescue time reduction has occurred is a small win change, when a V winning occurs during the small win game and the transition to the big win game is terminated, the case of controlling to the time reduction state with a lower advantage (time reduction state with one time reduction) has been shown, but it is not limited to such a form. For example, it may be configured to control to the time reduction state with a lower advantage (for example, a time reduction state with seven time reductions). Below, a description will be given of a modified example 4 in which, when the change display in which the rescue time reduction has occurred is a small win change, when a V winning occurs during the small win game and the transition to the big win game is terminated, the time reduction state with a higher advantage (time reduction state with seven time reductions) is controlled.

Figure 281-41 is a flow chart showing the jackpot end processing in variant 4. In variant 4, the processing of steps 120IWS531 to S539 in the jackpot end processing is the same as those shown in Figure 281-25. Next, the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "7", sets the combined time-saving count counter to "99", and sets the small win count counter to "1" (step 120IWS540X). Note that the processing of steps 120IWS541 to S541 is the same as those shown in Figure 281-25.

In the fourth modified example, by executing the above process, if the change display in which the rescue time reduction has occurred is a small win change, and if a V win occurs during the small win game and the transition to the big win game is terminated, the time reduction state is controlled to a time reduction state with 7 times of time reduction (see step 120IWS540). Therefore, when considering the case where the change display of the first special pattern is executed, if the change display in which the rescue time reduction has occurred is a small win change, and if a V win occurs during the small win game and the transition to the big win game is terminated, the time reduction state is controlled to a time reduction state with a higher advantage (in this example, a time reduction state with 7 times of time reduction, which is more than 1 time). On the other hand, when considering the case where the change display of the second special pattern is executed, if the change display in which the rescue time reduction has occurred is a small win change, and if a V win occurs during the small win game and the transition to the big win game is terminated, the time reduction state is controlled to a time reduction state with a lower advantage (in this example, a time reduction state with 7 times of time reduction, which is less than 99 times).

(Variation 5)
In addition, in the above-mentioned characteristic portion 120IW, after the rescue time reduction is activated, if the 900 variable display times are completed without a big win or small win occurring during the time reduction state C via the rescue time reduction, the rescue time reduction is activated again (the rescue time reduction loops), but this is not limited to such a case, and the time reduction state C via the rescue time reduction may be configured to end temporarily. Below, a description is given of a modified example 5 in which the time reduction state C via the rescue time reduction is configured to end temporarily.

Figure 281-42 is a flow chart showing the normal processing of special symbols in the modified example 5. In the modified example 5, in the normal processing of special symbols, the processing of steps 120IWS51 to S85 is the same as those shown in Figures 281-15 and 281-16. In the modified example 5, if the value of the rescue time-saving counter after subtraction is 0 (Y in step 120IWS85), the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag C is set (step 120IWS85A). If the time-saving flag C is set (i.e., if 900 variable displays have been completed without a big win or a small win during the time-saving state C via the rescue time-saving), the CPU 103 sets the rescue time-saving counter to "900" (step 120IWS85B). Note that the processing from step 120IWS86 onwards is the same as those shown in Figure 281-16.

Figure 281-43 is a flow chart showing the special symbol stop processing in the modified example 5. In the modified example 5, the processing of steps 120IWS to S148 in the special symbol stop processing is the same as those shown in Figures 281-19 and 281-20. In the modified example 5, when the rescue time reduction determination flag is set (Y in step 120IWS148), the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time reduction counter to "900", the combined time reduction counter to "900", and the small win counter to "1" (step 120IWS149Z). That is, in the modified example 5, the rescue time reduction counter is not set at the end of the variable display in which the rescue time reduction has occurred. Note that the processing from step 120IWS150 onwards is the same as those shown in Figures 281-20 and 281-21.

By executing the above process, in variant 5, the rescue time reduction counter is not set at the end of the variable display in which the rescue time reduction has occurred, and then the rescue time reduction counter is set if 900 variable displays have ended without a big or small win during time reduction state C via the rescue time reduction. Therefore, in variant 5, even if 900 variable displays have ended without a big or small win during time reduction state C via the rescue time reduction after the rescue time reduction has occurred, time reduction state C ends once and the rescue time reduction does not loop.

(Variation 6)
In the above-mentioned modified example 5, when the rescue time reduction occurs, the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0, so during the time reduction state C via the rescue time reduction, in the normal special pattern processing, Y is determined in step 120IWS83, and the subtraction processing of the rescue time reduction counter in step 120IWS84 is not executed. Note that the subtraction processing of the rescue time reduction counter may be executed during the time reduction state C via the rescue time reduction. Below, a description is given of modified example 6, which allows the subtraction processing of the rescue time reduction counter to be executed during the time reduction state C via the rescue time reduction.

Figure 281-44 is a flowchart showing the normal processing of special symbols in variant 6. In variant 6, the processing of steps 120IWS51 to S82 in the normal processing of special symbols is the same as those shown in Figures 281-15 and 281-16. In variant 6, there is no process of determining the value of the rescue time reduction counter in step 120IWS83, and the CPU 103 simply subtracts 1 from the value of the rescue time reduction counter (step 120IWS84).

Next, the CPU 130 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after the subtraction is less than 0 (i.e., a negative value) (step 120IWS84A). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after the subtraction is less than 0, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time reduction counter to "0" (step 120IWS84B). Then, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 120IWS87.

If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is not less than 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS84C). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 120IWS87.

If the value of the rescue time-saving counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag C is set (step 120IWS84D). If the time-saving flag C is set (i.e., 900 variable displays have been completed without a big win or small win during the time-saving state C via the rescue time-saving), the CPU 103 sets the rescue time-saving counter to "900" (step 120IWS84E). Note that the processing from step 120IWS86 onwards is the same as that shown in FIG. 281-16.

By executing the above process, in variant 6, as in variant 5, the rescue time reduction counter is not set at the end of the variable display in which the rescue time reduction has occurred, and the rescue time reduction counter is set when 900 variable displays are completed without a big hit or small hit during time reduction state C via the rescue time reduction. Therefore, in variant 6, even if 900 variable displays are completed without a big hit or small hit during time reduction state C via the rescue time reduction after the rescue time reduction has occurred, time reduction state C ends once and the rescue time reduction does not loop.

(Variation 7)
In the above-mentioned modified example 5 and modified example 6, it may be further configured to be able to execute the pre-reading advance notice performance. And, it may be configured to limit the pre-reading advance notice performance in a predetermined period and a specific period before and after the time-saving state C via the rescue time-saving is ended. Below, a description will be given of modified example 7 in which the pre-reading advance notice performance is limited in a predetermined period and a specific period before and after the time-saving state C via the rescue time-saving is ended.

In the seventh variant, in the start winning judgment process (step 120IWS101) of the special symbol process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs a look-ahead judgment of whether or not a big win or a small win will occur, whether or not the time-saving feature will be missed, the big win type, the small win type, the time-saving feature type, the variation pattern type, and the like. Then, the CPU 103 performs control to send a look-ahead judgment result designation command capable of identifying the look-ahead judgment result to the performance control CPU 120. In the look-ahead notice setting process (step S161) of the performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence and type of a look-ahead notice performance based on the look-ahead judgment result designation command received, and performs control to execute the look-ahead notice performance for one or more variation displays before the variation display to be predicted is executed.

Figure 281-45 is a timing chart showing the timing of the pre-reading preview performance restriction period in variant 7. As shown in Figure 281-45, when 900 variable displays have been completed without a big win, small win, or time-saving miss since the rescue time-saving count counter was set, rescue time-saving occurs and control is exercised in time-saving state C. Next, when another 900 variable displays have been completed without a big win or small win during time-saving state C via rescue time-saving (i.e., when the 1800th variable display has been completed counting from when the rescue time-saving count counter was set), time-saving state C ends.

The performance control CPU 120 also restricts the execution of the look-ahead preview performance during a predetermined period and a specific period before and after the time-saving state C ends. In this example, since the upper limit of the combined reserved memory number is 8, the execution of the look-ahead preview performance is restricted during a predetermined period from the change display 8 changes before the time-saving state C ends until the rescue time-saving state starts, and during a specific period from the rescue time-saving state starts until the change display 8 changes after the time-saving state C ends. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 281-45, when counting after the rescue time-saving count counter is set, it is determined that the look-ahead preview performance will be executed from the 1792nd change display to the 1808th change display.

The "restriction on look-ahead preview performance" may be controlled so that look-ahead preview performance is not executed at all, or the probability of execution of the look-ahead preview performance may be reduced, or only some of the multiple types of look-ahead preview performance may be executed.

(Variation 8)
In addition, in the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW and each modification, the control to a plurality of time-saving states may be configured to be executed simultaneously in parallel. Fig. 281-46 is a timing chart showing the timing of the control of various time-saving states in modification 8. In the example shown in Fig. 281-46, when the big win game state is ended (timing T1), a transition to time-saving state A with the time-saving number of times being 99 is shown.

Next, at timing T2 while the time-saving state A continues, a new time-saving occurrence condition (in this example, the occurrence of a time-saving failure) is established. In this case, in the modified example 8, as shown in FIG. 281-46, in parallel with the control of the time-saving state A, the control of the time-saving state B (in this example, 30 times of time-saving) based on the new time-saving failure is started. Then, when the 30 times of the fluctuation display are completed (timing T3), the control of the time-saving state B is terminated. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 281-46, the control of the time-saving state A continues because the 99 times of the fluctuation display have not yet been completed at the stage of timing T3. Note that, during the period from timing T2 to T3, the control of the time-saving state A and the control of the time-saving state B are executed in parallel internally, but it appears that the time-saving state continues as it is.

Next, at timing T4 while the time-saving state A is continuing, a new time-saving occurrence condition (in this example, the occurrence of a time-saving miss) is established. In this case, in the modified example 8, as shown in FIG. 281-46, in parallel with the control of the time-saving state A, the control of the time-saving state B (in this example, the number of time-saving times is 30) based on the new time-saving miss is started. Then, at timing T5 before the end of the 30-time variable display, the 99th variable display after the control to the time-saving state A is ended, and the control to the time-saving state A is ended. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 281-46, the control of the time-saving state B continues because the 30-time variable display has not yet been ended at the stage of timing T5. Then, when the 30-time variable display is ended (timing T6), the control to the time-saving state B is ended. Therefore, in terms of internal processing, the time-saving state A is ended at timing T5 after the end of the jackpot game, but the control of the time-saving state B is also executed in parallel, so it appears that the control to the time-saving state has been continued for more than 99 times after the end of the jackpot game.

(Variation 9)
In addition, in the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, by judging Y in step 120IWS1702 and executing steps 120IWS1703 and S1710, a common fluctuation pattern can be determined when the time reduction is not achieved but the time reduction is achieved. However, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, even when the time reduction is not achieved but the time reduction is achieved, a different fluctuation pattern can be determined.

(Variation 10)
In addition, in the above-mentioned characteristic unit 120IW, by switching to a background image corresponding to the special performance mode, the setting suggestion performance can be executed even after the variable display in which the rescue time reduction is established is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, based on the result of the look-ahead judgment, in the variable display before the variable display in which the rescue time reduction is established, a provocative performance such as "special performance mode??" can be executed to execute the setting suggestion performance.

As explained above, the characteristic part 120IW and each of the modified examples have the inventive configurations shown below in (Means A1) to (Means A10), (Means B1) to (Means B6), (Means C1) to (Means C5), and (Means D1) to (Means D5).

(Means A1) A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information including a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern) and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with special state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and update means (e.g., a part that executes step 120IWS84 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can update numerical information (e.g., a rescue time-saving count counter) based on the execution of the variable display, and the special state control means updates the numerical information updated by the update means to a specific value (e.g., a special state control means (for example, a part that executes steps 120IWS114 to S116 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can control the game to a special state (for example, a small win game state) different from an advantageous state when a special condition is established (for example, a rescue time reduction is established) by the counter value being set to "0" (for example, "0"); an updating means that updates numerical information when a variable display of the first identification information is executed and when a variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether a variable display of the first special pattern is executed or a variable display of the second special pattern is executed); and a special state control means (for example, a part that executes steps 120IWS114 to S116 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can control the game to a special state (for example, a small win game state) different from an advantageous state when a special display result (for example, a small win pattern) different from a specific display result is derived and displayed; and a counting means that counts the number of times the special state has occurred in the special state. and special state terminating means for terminating the special state (for example, a portion for executing step 120IWS73 in the game control microcomputer 100). The special state terminating means is capable of terminating the special state based on the number of times the special state counted by the special counting means has occurred reaching a specific number of times (for example, once) (for example, when Y is determined in step 120IWS74, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a time-saving end flag in step 120IWS75, and determines Y in step 120IWS141 and executes step 120IWS143). The special state control means is capable of controlling the special state during the special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed when a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which a special condition is established. (for example, even in the case of a small win variation, if the rescue time-shortening determination flag is set in 120IWS148 at the timing of the end of the pattern determination period, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS150, and in the subsequent small win game state, it is controlled to time-shortening state C), and the special counting means does not count a special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is established (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS73 at the start of the variation to subtract 1 from the small win number counter, and executes step 120IWS149 at the end of the variation in the case of rescue time-shortening to set the small win number counter, so in the small win variation in which rescue time-shortening is established, after the small win number counter is set in step 120IWS149, the small win number counter is not immediately subtracted in the variable display). Such a configuration allows for optimal control in situations where both special and special states occur. For example, it is possible to avoid a situation where a special condition is met and control is exercised to a special state, but a special display result is displayed and the special state ends immediately, preventing disadvantages to the player.

In this example, regarding "controllable to a special state during a special state," when the change display that is the time-saving relief is a small win change, the time-saving state C is changed at the end of the pattern determination period, and then the time-saving state C is controlled during the small win game, but the timing of the change to the time-saving state C is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, the time-saving state C may be changed from the start of the small win change that is the time-saving relief, or the time-saving state C may be changed halfway through the small win game. In this way, it is sufficient if there is a period during the small win game that is controlled to the time-saving state C in some form. In addition, when the time-saving state C is changed from the start of the small win change, the small win count counter may also be decremented at the start of the small win change.

In addition, although this example shows a case where the "specific number of times" is one time, this is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the time-saving state may be configured to end based on the occurrence of multiple small wins, such as two or three, during the time-saving state, and multiple times may be set as the specific number of times.

(Means A2) In means A1, the special state ending means may be configured to end the special state when the number of times the special state counted by the special counting means reaches a specific number (e.g., 1 time) and when a variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 1 time, 7 times, 99 times, 900 times) in the special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the time-saving end flag in step 120IWS75 when Y in step 120IWS74, sets the time-saving end flag in step 120IWS82 when Y in step 120IWS78 and when Y in step 120IWS81, and executes step 120IWS143 by determining Y in step 120IWS141). Such a configuration allows for suitable control in situations where both the special state and the special state occur. For example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a special condition is met and control is exercised to a special state, but a special display result is displayed and the special state ends immediately, thereby preventing disadvantages to the player.

(Means A3) In means A1 or A2, the special state control means can control the special state based on the advantageous state after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS537), and the special state termination means may be configured to terminate the special state when the number of times the special state is counted by the special counting means becomes the same (for example, 1 time) when the special state is controlled based on the establishment of a special condition and when the special state is controlled based on the advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the small win counter to "1" in step 120IWS149). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition from becoming too advantageous. For example, it is possible to prevent a game from being played so as to be controlled to an advantageous special state.

(Means A4) In any of the means A1 to A3, the special state control means may be configured to control the special state based on the advantageous state after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS537), and the special state termination means may be configured to terminate the special state when the number of times the special state is counted by the special counting means becomes different (for example, 2 times) when the special state is controlled based on the establishment of a special condition and when the special state is controlled based on being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, in variant 1, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the small win counter to "2" in step 120IWS149X). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition from becoming too advantageous. For example, it is possible to prevent a game from being played so as to be controlled to an advantageous special state.

In addition, it may be difficult for a player to immediately notice the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving function, but in variant 1, while in the normal time-saving state the time-saving state ends with one small win, the time-saving state ends with two small wins only when the time-saving state is controlled via the rescue time-saving function, so that even if the first small win misses a win in the second start winning hole (misses the charge of the second reserved memory), another chance to win a win in the second start winning hole can be given.

In addition, in variant 1, in the normal time-saving state, the number of time-saving times is often as small as 1 or 7, and there are relatively few cases in which the time-saving state ends when a small hit occurs, whereas in the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, the number of time-saving times is as high as 900, and there are many cases in which the time-saving state ends when a small hit occurs. Therefore, by reliably ending the time-saving state when a small hit occurs, it is possible to prevent players from playing in a strategic manner.

(Means A5) In any of the means A1 to A4, the special state control means may be configured to count the special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed in the variable display where the special condition is met (for example, in the modified example 2, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS463B at the end of a small win game, so that in a small win variation where the rescue time reduction is met, after the small win count counter is set in step 120IWS149, the small win count counter is immediately decremented in the variable display). With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately control in a situation where both the special state and the special state occur. For example, if a strategy element remains by controlling to the special state in a special state where a special condition is met, it becomes a strategy element for the player, and the risk of it becoming a disadvantage to the game center can be reduced.

(Means A6) In any of means A1 to A5, the special state control means may be configured such that, when a special display result is derived and displayed in a variable display in which a special condition is established, the special state can be controlled to a special state after a special state based on the derived and displayed special display result (for example, in variant example 3, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS462D at the end of a small win game, so that in a small win variation in which rescue time reduction is established, the time reduction state C is controlled at the end of the small win game). With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately control in a situation in which both a special state and a special state occur. For example, when a special condition is established and control is established to a special state, it is possible to wait until the control of the special state starts, making it easier to perform various controls.

(Means A7) In any of means A1 to A6, the special state control means can be controlled to a first special state (e.g., a time-saving state with one time of time saving) after being controlled to an advantageous state in the normal state (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S544), and can be controlled to a second special state (e.g., a time-saving state with seven times of time saving) that is more advantageous than the first special state after being controlled to an advantageous state in the special state (e.g., the game control microcomputer The game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute steps 120IWS537, S542), a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where a special condition is established, and when the special display result is derived and displayed in a special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to control to a first special state after the advantageous state when the game medium passes through a specific area (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S540). With such a configuration, it is possible to realize control of a special state that is not too advantageous for the player (i.e., not too disadvantageous for the game facility).

(Means A8) In any of means A1 to A6, the special state control means can be controlled to a first special state (e.g., a time-saving state with one time of time-saving) after being controlled to an advantageous state in the normal state (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S544), and can be controlled to a second special state (e.g., a time-saving state with seven times of time-saving) that is more advantageous than the first special state after being controlled to an advantageous state in the special state (e.g., the game control microcomputer The game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute steps 120IWS537, S542), a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where a special condition is established, and when the special display result is derived and displayed in the special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to control to a second special state after the advantageous state when the game medium passes through a specific area (for example, in variant 4, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S540X). With such a configuration, it is possible to realize control of a special state that is not too advantageous for the player (i.e., not too disadvantageous for the game facility).

(Means A9) In any of means A1 to A6, the special state control means can be controlled to a first special state (e.g., a time-saving state with 99 time-saving times) after being controlled to an advantageous state in the normal state (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S545), and can be controlled to a second special state (e.g., a time-saving state with 7 time-saving times) less advantageous than the first special state after being controlled to an advantageous state in the special state (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S54 2), a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where a special condition is established, and when the special display result is derived and displayed in the special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed, the advantageous state is controlled based on the game medium passing through a specific area, and the advantageous state can be controlled to the first special state after the advantageous state (for example, when the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S542, if a V win occurs due to a small win fluctuation based on the variable display of the second special pattern, the time-saving state is controlled to 99 times). With such a configuration, it is possible to realize control of the special state that is not too advantageous for the player (i.e., not too disadvantageous for the game facility).

(Means A10) In any of means A1 to A6, the special state control means can be controlled to a first special state (e.g., a time-saving state with 99 time-saving times) after being controlled to an advantageous state in the normal state (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S545), and can be controlled to a second special state (e.g., a time-saving state with 7 time-saving times) that is less advantageous than the first special state after being controlled to an advantageous state in the special state (e.g., the game control microcomputer The game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute steps 120IWS537, S542), a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where a special condition is established, and when the special display result is derived and displayed in a special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to control to a second special state after the advantageous state when the game medium passes through a specific area (for example, in variant 4, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S540X). With such a configuration, it is possible to realize control of a special state that is not too advantageous for the player (i.e., not too disadvantageous for the game facility).

(Means B1) A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information including a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern) and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes special state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, update means (e.g., a part that executes step 120IWS84 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can update numerical information (e.g., a rescue time-saving counter) based on the execution of the variable display, and presentation execution means (e.g., a presentation control CP) that can execute a presentation corresponding to the variable display. and a part for executing steps S170 to S173 in U120), the special state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established (for example, a rescue time-saving is established) by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value (for example, "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 900 times) (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS150), the update means updates the numerical information when a variable display of the first identification information is executed and when a variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, regardless of whether a variable display of the first special pattern is executed or a variable display of the second special pattern is executed, the value of the rescue time-saving number counter is updated uniformly), and the special state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special display result (for example, a pattern that does not cause a time-saving) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed. (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS160), controls to a special state when a special display result is derived and displayed in a variable display where a special condition is satisfied, and there are a plurality of types of special display results including a first special display result (e.g., the pattern "6" in the time-saving miss A) and a second special display result (e.g., the pattern "8" in the time-saving miss A), and the special state control means is capable of controlling to the same special state when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS160 regardless of whether the pattern "6" is derived and displayed or the pattern "8" is derived and displayed), and the performance execution means controls to a special state when the first special display result is derived and displayed in a variable display where a special condition is not satisfied in a normal state, The present invention is characterized in that different presentations are executed in the cases where the first special display result is displayed and the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, when step 120IWS1706 is N, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS1707 and S1710, and when step 120IWS1706 is Y, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS1708 and S1710, and can determine different variation patterns), and when a variable display in which a special condition is satisfied in the normal state is executed, a common presentation is executed in the cases where the first special display result is displayed and the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, when the time-saving misses but a rescue time-saving occurs, the game control microcomputer 100 judges Y in step 120IWS1702 and executes steps 120IWS1703 and S1710, and can determine a common variation pattern). With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately control even in a situation where both a special state is controlled due to the establishment of a special condition and a special state is controlled due to a derived display of a special display result occur. For example, it is possible to provide an appropriate presentation when a special state is controlled due to the establishment of a special condition.

In this example, the "same special state" is controlled to the time-saving state B of 100 times the same number of times when the time-saving miss A occurs (see step 120IWS155, S160), regardless of whether the pattern "6" is derived and displayed or the pattern "8" is derived and displayed. However, this is not limited to such a case. For example, the "same special state" may be configured to execute one or more of the following: (1) controlling to the same number of times the time-saving, (2) determining the variation pattern of the special pattern using the same variation pattern table, (3) determining the variation pattern of the normal pattern using the same variation pattern table, and (4) controlling the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) to the open state using the same opening pattern, or may be configured to execute all of (1) to (4).

In this example, a case where a different variation pattern is determined as "executing a different presentation" is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a different added time may be added to the variation time indicated by the variation pattern when the pattern "6" is derived and displayed and when the pattern "8" is derived and displayed. Also, for example, a configuration may be made to execute either (1) a process to determine a different variation pattern or (2) a process to add a different added time, or a configuration may be made to execute both.

In addition to differentiating the change time, the pattern determination period at the end of the change may also be different.

(Means B2) In means B1, the effect execution means may be configured to be capable of executing a common effect when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed in a special state (for example, if step 120IWS1704 is Y and step 120IWS1705 is Y, the game control microcomputer 100 can execute steps 120IWS1709 and S1710 to determine a common variation pattern). With such a configuration, it is possible to provide suitable control even in a situation where both a special state is controlled due to the establishment of a special condition and a special state is controlled due to the derived display of a special display result occur. For example, a suitable effect can be provided when a special state is controlled due to the establishment of a special condition.

In this example, when the first special pattern change display is executed, there is a probability of about 1/200 that the time-saving feature has failed, and when the second special pattern change display is executed, there is a probability of about 1/400 that the time-saving feature has failed. However, this is not the only possible embodiment, and for example, the probability of the time-saving feature failing when the second special pattern change display is executed may be further lowered (for example, to 1/800) to make it less likely that the time-saving feature will fail during the time-saving mode.

Also, for example, the probability of the time-saving feature missing when the second special symbol change display is executed may be increased so that if there is a second reserved memory when the time-saving feature ends, the revival effect is more likely to be executed by the second special symbol change display after the time-saving feature ends.

(Means B3) Means B1 or B2 may be provided with a display result determination means (e.g., a part that executes step 120IWS93 in the game control microcomputer 100) that determines the display result, and the display result determination means may be configured to execute a common process for determining the type of display result that will be controlled to an advantageous state when controlled to an advantageous state, and for determining the type of special display result when a special display result is obtained (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS93 in common when determining a jackpot pattern and when determining a time-saving miss pattern). With such a configuration, the common processing can be used to suppress an increase in program capacity.

(Means B4) In any of means B1 to B3, a variable display control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided that executes control of the variable display, and the variable display control means determines a variable display period during which the variable display is executed according to the type of display result (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 determines a variation pattern), and when a variable display is executed in which a special condition is met in the normal state, determines a different variable display period for when the first special display result is derived and displayed and for when the second special display result is derived and displayed (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 determines a variable display period for when the first special display result is derived and displayed, in step 12 When 0IWS1706 is N, steps 120IWS1707 and S1710 are executed, and when 120IWS1706 is Y, steps 120IWS1708 and S1710 are executed, and different variation patterns can be determined), when variable display is executed in a special state, a common variable display period is determined for the case where the first special display result is derived and the case where the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, when the time reduction is missed but the time reduction is rescued, the game control microcomputer 100 judges Y in step 120IWS1702 and executes steps 120IWS1703 and S1710, and a common variation pattern can be determined). With such a configuration, the display result and the variable display period can be suitably adjusted according to the situation.

(Means B5) In any of means B1 to B4, the effect execution means may be configured to execute different effects when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed when a variable display is executed for which a special condition is met in the normal state (for example, in variant example 9, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to determine different variation patterns even when the time-saving misses and a rescue time-saving occurs). With such a configuration, the display result and the variable display period can be optimized according to the situation.

(Means B6) Any of means B1 to B5 may be provided with a variable display control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) that controls the variable display, and the variable display control means may be configured to determine a fixed display period for the display result, and the fixed display period may be changed depending on the type of display result (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS1127, S1133, S1135, S1137). With such a configuration, the display result and the variable display period can be suitably adjusted depending on the situation.

In this example, the pattern determination period is varied depending on whether a rescue time reduction has occurred and the display result, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the pattern determination period may be constant (e.g., 0.5 seconds) regardless of whether a rescue time reduction has occurred or the display result.

(Means C1) A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information including a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern), and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and has a special state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and a numerical information (e.g., a rescue and a setting means (for example, a portion that executes step 120IWS11 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can set the numerical information updated by the update means to a specific value (for example, "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 900 times) so that a special condition is established (for example, a rescue time reduction is established). The game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS150, the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether the variable display of the first special pattern is executed or the variable display of the second special pattern is executed), and a notification effect execution means (for example, an execution means) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a rescue time reduction entry effect) that notifies that the special state is controlled by the special state control means based on the establishment of a special condition. The display control CPU 120 further includes a part for executing steps 120IWS808, S845 in the output control CPU 120) and a suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part for executing steps 120IWS808, S845 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a rescue time setting suggestion effect) that suggests the setting value set by the setting means, and the suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing a suggestion effect when a notification effect is executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 120IWS808, S845, and is capable of executing a rescue time setting suggestion effect when a rescue time short entry effect is executed). With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control even in a situation where both a case where a special state is controlled by the establishment of a special condition and a case where a special state is controlled by the derived display of a special display result occur. For example, a suitable effect can be produced when a special state is controlled by the establishment of a special condition. In addition, the probability that the special condition will be met changes depending on the set value, so by executing suggestive effects depending on the probability that the special condition will be met, it is possible to increase the player's interest when the special state is reached.

In this example, the probability of a jackpot varies depending on the setting value, and as a result, the likelihood of a rescue time reduction occurring also varies, with rescue time reduction occurring more easily when the setting value is set low. Therefore, when a rescue time reduction occurs, there is a possibility that the setting value may be set low. Therefore, in this example, a rescue time setting suggestion effect is executed during the rescue time reduction, which gives the player some sense that the setting value is high, making it difficult for the player's interest to decrease. Therefore, in this example, the rescue time setting suggestion effect is configured to be executed when the setting value is set to a relatively high value of "4" to "6," and the execution rate is different from the setting suggestion effect executed at other times, such as the jackpot setting suggestion effect.

(Means C2) In means C1, the setting suggestion effect execution means may be configured to execute a suggestion effect when the variable display where a special condition is met is not controlled to an advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 does not process rescue time reduction in the event of a jackpot fluctuation). With such a configuration, the suggestion effect can be executed without interfering with other effects.

In this example, we show a case where rescue time reduction processing is not performed for large hit fluctuations, while rescue time reduction processing is performed for small hit fluctuations, but this is not limited to such a case, and the configuration may be such that rescue time reduction processing is not performed for small hit fluctuations either.

(Means C3) In means C1 or C2, the setting suggestion effect execution means may be configured to execute the suggestion effect even after a special condition is met (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step 120IWS640 when step 120IWS638 is Y). Such a configuration allows for suggestion of setting values over a long period of time, which can increase interest.

(Means C4) In any of means C1 to C3, the setting suggestion effect execution means may be configured to execute a suggestion effect before a special condition is met (for example, in variant 10, the effect control CPU 120 executes a setting suggestion effect in a variable display prior to a variable display in which the rescue time reduction is met, based on the results of a look-ahead determination). Such a configuration allows for suggestions of setting values over a long period of time, thereby increasing interest.

(Means C5) In any of the means C1 to C4, the setting suggestion effect execution means may be configured to execute other suggestion effects (e.g., a setting suggestion effect at the time of a big win) that can be executed at a timing different from the suggestion effect when a special condition is established (e.g., the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 120IWS887, S889 and step S176), and suggestion effects that suggest favorable setting values are more likely to be executed when a special condition is established than other suggestion effects (e.g., as shown in FIG. 281-30, the setting suggestion effect at the time of rescue is configured to be executable when the setting value is set to "4" to "6", so that the setting suggestion effect at the time of rescue is a setting suggestion effect that suggests that a relatively high setting is set). With such a configuration, the more favorable the setting value, the lower the probability of the special condition being established, so by executing the suggestion effect, the player's interest when the special condition is established can be increased.

In this example, the setting suggestion effect at the time of the jackpot is executed during the fanfare period of the jackpot game, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to be executed during the round period or the ending period of the jackpot game.

(Means D1) A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information including a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern), and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes a special state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control the game machine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and a controller that controls the game machine to perform the variable display. and updating means (for example, a part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can subtract and update numerical information (for example, a rescue time shortening counter) from a set initial value (for example, "900") based on the fact that the numerical information is updated by subtracting it from a set initial value (for example, "900"), and the special state control means can control to a special state when the numerical information that the update means subtracts and updates becomes a specific value (for example, "0") (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS150), and the update means controls the special state when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed. The numerical information is updated by subtracting it when a variable display is executed (for example, the value of the rescue time shortening counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether a variable display of the first special symbol or a variable display of the second special symbol is executed), the numerical information that is updated by subtracting it is set to an initial value when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, in the fifth and sixth modified examples, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps S120IWS85B and S84E), and the special state control means changes the state from the normal state to the special state based on the fact that the numerical information that is updated by subtracting it by the update means has become a specific value. After the control, during the period until the predetermined condition is satisfied and the initial value is set, the update means does not control again from the normal state to the special state based on the fact that the numerical information updated by subtraction has become a specific value (for example, in the modified example 5, the game control microcomputer 100 does not execute the processing of steps 120IWS84 to S86 when Y is determined in step S120IWS83. In the modified example 6, the game control microcomputer 100 does not execute the processing of steps 120IWS84D to S86 when Y is determined in step S120IWS84A or when N is determined in step 120IWS84C). With such a configuration, when controlling the transition to the special state according to the number of variable displays, the subtraction update processing can be performed in common before and after the numerical information becomes a specific value, so that an increase in the capacity of the program can be prevented and suitable control can be achieved. For example, if the transition to the special state is not performed when the numerical information becomes a specific value, a reduction in capacity due to the preparation of a dedicated program for the period after the specific value is reached can be prevented.

The specified conditions include the case where the rescue time reduction counter is set when the time reduction state via rescue time reduction ends by executing steps 120IWS85B and S84E, as well as the case where step 120IWS13 is executed to set the rescue time reduction counter when the initialization process is executed when the power is turned on, and the case where step 120IWS135 is executed to set the rescue time reduction counter when a jackpot occurs.

When the rescue time reduction counter is set when a jackpot occurs, it may be set at the start of the jackpot game, during a round of the jackpot game, or at the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, when setting the rescue time reduction counter when the initialization process is executed when the power is turned on, the process may be different depending on whether the setting is changed or not. For example, the rescue time reduction counter may be set when the setting is changed and the initialization process is executed, but the current value of the rescue time reduction counter may be maintained when the initialization process is executed without changing the setting. Conversely, the rescue time reduction counter may be configured to be maintained when the setting is changed and the initialization process is executed, but the rescue time reduction counter may be set when the initialization process is executed without changing the setting.

(Means D2) In means D1, the update means may be configured to be capable of subtractively updating the numerical information in cases where variable display is executed when the subtractively updated numerical information is greater than a specific value and where variable display is executed when the subtractively updated numerical information is a specific value (for example, in variant example 6, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS84), and when the subtractively updated numerical information is greater than a specific value, the numerical information is updated to the numerical information after subtraction (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS84C to S86 when step 120IWS84A is N), and when the subtractively updated numerical information is less than the specific value, the numerical information is updated to the specific value (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS84B when step 120IWS84A is Y). With this configuration, when controlling the transition to a special state according to the number of times the variable display is made, the subtraction update process can be performed in common before and after the numerical information becomes a specific value, which prevents the program capacity from increasing and enables suitable control. For example, if the transition to a special state is not made when the numerical information becomes a specific value, it is possible to prevent a reduction in capacity due to the need to prepare a dedicated program for the period after the specific value is reached.

(Means D3) Means D1 or D2 may be configured to include an operating means (e.g., a clear switch) for performing an operation, and an initial value setting means (e.g., a part that executes step 120IWS13 in the game control microcomputer 100) for setting the numerical information updated by the update means to an initial value in response to the operation of the operating means. With such a configuration, it is possible to select whether or not to set the numerical information to an initial value by operating the operating means, thereby improving convenience in terms of operation.

In addition, a dedicated operating means (button or switch) other than the clear switch may be provided as an operating means for changing settings or setting the rescue time reduction counter.

(Means D4) In any of the means D1 to D3, the special state control means may be configured to be able to control to a special state when a special display result (e.g., a time-saving missing pattern) different from the specific display result is displayed (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS160), and to be able to control to a special state when a special display result is displayed even when the numerical information updated by the update means is a specific value, and to be able to control to a special state when a special display result is displayed even after the numerical information updated by the update means has become a specific value (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 can execute step 120IWS88 regardless of whether or not the game is in time-saving state C via rescue time-saving). With such a configuration, it is possible to control to a special state after the numerical information updated by subtraction becomes a specific value again, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Means D5) In any of means D1 to D4, a decision means (e.g., a part that executes step 120IWS62 in the game control microcomputer 100) that decides whether or not to control to an advantageous state, a judgment means (e.g., a part that executes step 120IWS101 in the game control microcomputer 100) that judges whether or not to control to an advantageous state before the decision of the decision means, and a pre-reading preview performance execution means (e.g., a part that executes step 120IWS102 in the performance control CPU 120) that can execute a pre-reading preview performance based on the judgment result of the judgment means. S161), and a pre-reading notice performance limiting means for limiting the execution of the pre-reading notice performance during a predetermined period before the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value and during a specific period after the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value (for example, in modified example 7, as shown in FIG. 281-45, the execution of the pre-reading notice performance is limited during a predetermined period from the change display 8 changes before the time-saving state C ends to the time-saving relief state, and during a specific period from the time-saving relief state C ends to the change display 8 changes after the time-saving state C ends). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game because there is a possibility that the numerical information updated by the subtraction will be controlled to a special state after it becomes a specific value again.

In the above characteristic part 120IW and each modified example, the number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached is uniformly 900 times, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the rescue time reduction may be configured to occur based on the number of times the variable display is executed depending on the set value. For example, when the set value is "1" to "5", the rescue time reduction occurs based on 900 times of variable display being executed without a big hit, a small hit, or a time reduction miss, while when the set value is "6", the rescue time reduction may be configured to occur based on 600 times of variable display being executed without a big hit, a small hit, or a time reduction miss, and the number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached may be different only for specific set values.

Also, for example, the number of times the time is changed before the rescue time reduction is triggered may be different for each setting value for all of the setting values "1" to "6". In this case, for example, the ratio of the denominator of the jackpot probability to the number of times the time is changed before the rescue time reduction is triggered may be configured to be approximately 3 times. Also, for example, the number of times the time is changed before the rescue time reduction is triggered may be different within the range of 2.5P≦n≦3.0P (P=denominator of the jackpot probability, n=number of times the time is changed before the rescue time reduction is triggered).

In addition, even if the time-saving state is reached via rescue time-saving, the time-saving state may not necessarily continue until the next big win occurs. In this case, the time-saving state may be configured to end when a small win occurs as shown in characteristic part 120IW above, or the time-saving state may be configured to end when the variable display has ended a specified number of times (900 times in this example) as shown in variant 5 and variant 6.

Also, as shown in variants 5 and 6, after the variable display ends a specified number of times (900 times in this example) in the time-saving state via rescue time-saving and transitions to the normal state, if the variable display ends a specified number of times (for example, 900 times) without a big win, small win, or time-saving miss, the time-saving state may be changed to rescue time-saving again and transitions to the time-saving state, or it may be configured not to enter rescue time-saving again. In this case, if it is configured not to enter rescue time-saving again, for example, if the value of the rescue time-saving counter becomes 0, the process of decrementing the rescue time-saving counter may be controlled not to be performed from the next processing, or the process of decrementing the rescue time-saving counter from the next processing and resetting it to 0 if it becomes a negative value may be configured.

In addition, the configurations shown in (Means 1A) to (Means 10A) below may be applied to the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW and each of the modified examples.

(Means 1A) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and that includes a state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control the machine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and an update means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS84 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display. ), and the state control means can control to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times and a special condition is established (for example, a part that executes steps 120IWS85, S86 in the game control microcomputer 100; a part that executes step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100). The update means may be configured to update the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, a part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, the player can be rescued in an appropriate manner. Specifically, even if the game state changes and the variable display of any identification information is executed, the numerical information continues to be updated, making it easier for the player to be rescued and increasing the player's motivation to play.

(Means 2A) In means 1A, the special condition may be configured to be established based on a predetermined display result (e.g., a losing pattern) different from the specific display result being derived and displayed a special number of times in succession as the display result of the variable display (e.g., the part that executes steps 120IWS85, S86 in the game control microcomputer 100; the part that executes step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, the player is rescued when a display result unfavorable to the player is derived and displayed consecutively, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

(Means 3A) In means 1A or means 2A, the update means may be configured to update the numerical information (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100) when a variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (for example, a time-saving state, or a guaranteed bonus state). Such a configuration can effectively realize rescue of the player. Specifically, the numerical information is updated fairly, and since the state can be controlled to the special state again even after it has been controlled to the special state, it is possible to control the state to the special state until it is effectively controlled to an advantageous state, which can reduce the player's investment and prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

(Means 4A) In any of means 1A to 3A, the update means may be configured to set the numerical information to an initial value when a predetermined condition is met (for example, the part that executes steps 120IWS13, S135, S149, and S161 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, when the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent the tendency to gamble more than necessary.

(Means 5A) Means 4A may be configured so that the predetermined condition is to be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS135 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, when the advantageous state is controlled, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent the player from becoming more gambling than necessary.

(Means 6A) In means 4A, the state control means may be configured to be able to control to a special state when a special display result (e.g., a time-saving miss) different from a specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state (e.g., a portion that executes step 120IWS160 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the predetermined condition is that the special display result is derived and displayed (e.g., a portion that executes step 120IWS161 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, when the special state is controlled, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so that it is possible to prevent excessive gambling.

(Means 7A) In means 4A, the predetermined condition may be configured so that the variable display is executed a special number of times (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS149 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, it is essentially possible to control the special state until the next advantageous state, thereby increasing the degree of salvation for the player.

(Means 8A) Means 4A may be provided with a backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding the numerical information updated by the update means even when the power supply is stopped, and the update means may be configured to set the numerical information held by the backup storage means to an initial value when a specific condition is met (e.g., execution of an initialization process) (e.g., a portion that executes step 120IWS13 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the predetermined condition is that the specific condition is met (e.g., a portion that executes steps S8 and 120IWS13 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the game center to operate, since if numerical information up to the special number of times is held when initialization is performed in the game center, it may be too disadvantageous for the game center.

(Means 9A) Any of means 1A to 8A may be provided with a presentation control means corresponding to variable display (e.g., a portion executing steps S170 to S172 in the presentation control CPU 120), and the state control means may be capable of controlling to a special state for a specific period of more than a special number of times based on the execution of a special number of variable displays (e.g., a portion executing steps 120IWS83 to S86, S150 in the game control microcomputer 100), and may be capable of controlling to a special state for a specific period again based on the execution of a special number of variable displays in a special state (e.g., a portion executing steps 120IWS83 to S86, S150 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means may be configured to execute different presentations in the first specific period and the second specific period. With this configuration, when the special state is controlled during the second specific period, it is not controlled to an advantageous state for a long period of time, so by taking measures such as shortening the execution time of the variable display to add changes to the presentation mode, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

(Means 10A) Any of means 1A to 8A may be provided with a presentation control means corresponding to variable display (for example, a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the presentation control CPU 120), and the state control means may be capable of controlling to a special state for a specific period of more than a special number of times based on the execution of a special number of variable displays (for example, a part that executes steps 120IWS83 to S86, S150 in the game control microcomputer 100), and may be capable of controlling to a special state for a specific period again based on the execution of a special number of variable displays in a special state (for example, a part that executes steps 120IWS83 to S86, S150 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means may be configured to execute a common presentation in the first specific period and the second specific period. With this configuration, when the special state is controlled during the second specific period, the player is not controlled to an advantageous state for a long period of time, so by deliberately executing the same presentation, the player is not made more aware than necessary that the player is not controlled to an advantageous state for a long period of time, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

In addition, the configurations shown in (Means 1B-1), (Means 1B-2) to (Means 5B) below may be applied to the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW and each of the modified examples.

(Means 1B-1) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and is controllable to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and has a gaming area in which gaming media can be shot into a first path (e.g., a path by hitting left) and a second path (e.g., a path by hitting right), a state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and a numerical value based on the execution of the variable display. The present invention is provided with an update means capable of updating information (e.g., a portion executing step S120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a process execution means (e.g., a portion executing step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100) that updates a data value indicating a game progress state required to execute a plurality of types of processes including control of variable display and control of advantageous state, and executes a process corresponding to the data value, and the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., a portion executing step S120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100). a portion for executing step S120IWS85, S86 in the game control microcomputer 100; and a portion for executing step S120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100.), the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, a portion for executing step S120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), the process execution means executes a first process relating to the variable display when the data value is a first numerical value (for example, a portion for executing steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100), and executes a second process relating to the advantageous state when the data value is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value. The game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute a third process for controlling the state to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition when the data value is a third value different from the first and second values (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute a next change postponement process), and may be configured to include a launch promotion notification means that issues a launch promotion notification to the effect that the game medium should be launched to the second path during the execution of the third process, in which the game is played by launching the game medium to the first path in the normal state and the game is played by launching the game medium to the second path in the special state. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by issuing a launch promotion notification to the second path before the special state is controlled, it is possible to execute a performance related to the launch promotion notification early when the special state is controlled.

(Means 1B-2) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and that includes a state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control the game machine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and an update means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display. and a processing execution means (for example, a portion executing step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100) that updates a data value indicating a game progress state required to execute a plurality of types of processing including control of variable display and control of advantageous state, and executes processing corresponding to the data value. The state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special count (for example, a portion executing step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100). a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps S120IWS85 and S86; and a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step S120IWS150; an updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step S120IWS84), a processing execution means executes a first processing relating to the variable display when the data value is the first numerical value (for example, a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps S110 to S113), When the data value is a second value different from the first value, a second process related to the advantageous state is executed (for example, a part that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100), and when the data value is a third value different from the first value and the second value, the state control means executes a third process for controlling to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute a next change postponement process), and may be configured to include a presentation execution means that executes a notification presentation that notifies the player that the special state will be controlled during the execution of the third process. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by issuing a launch promotion notification to the second path before the special state is controlled, a presentation related to the launch promotion notification can be executed early when the special state is controlled.

(Means 2B) In means 1B-1 and 1B-2, the process execution means may be configured to execute a second process after the first process when a specific display result is derived and displayed in a variable display where a special condition is met. With such a configuration, priority is given to control of an advantageous state, so that a disadvantageous result is not reached for the player, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game can be suppressed.

(Means 3B) In means 1B-1, 1B-2 or 2B, the update means updates the numerical information when variable display is started (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the process execution means may be configured to change the special information from the first information to the second information when the numerical information updated by the update means reaches a specific value, and to change the special information from the second information to the first information when the state control means controls to a special state, and to execute different processes when the special information is the first information and when it is the second information. With such a configuration, the process of transitioning to a special state can be executed preferably by managing the special information.

(Means 4B) Means 3B may include a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., a portion that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) that determines the variable display pattern of the variable display, and the variable display pattern determination means may be configured to determine a different variable display pattern when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information. With such a configuration, it is possible to perform an appropriate presentation when the special number of variable displays is executed.

(Means 5B) Means 3B may include a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., a portion that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) that determines the variable display pattern of the variable display, and the variable display pattern determination means may be configured to determine a variable display pattern in which the confirmation time of the display result differs when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information. With such a configuration, it is possible to perform an appropriate presentation when the special number of variable displays is executed.

In addition, the configurations shown in (Means 1C) to (Means 6C) below may be applied to the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW and each of the modified examples.

(Means 1C) A gaming machine that can execute variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with a gaming control means (e.g., a part that executes step S25 in a gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in a presentation control CPU 120) that controls the presentation corresponding to the variable display, and the gaming control means controls a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. The game control system includes a state control means (e.g., a portion executing steps S120IWS150, S160, S537 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling numerical information based on execution of a variable display (e.g., a portion executing step S120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a state information control means for controlling state information that can specify the state controlled by the state control means, and the state control means is capable of controlling a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on a specific display result being derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display (e.g., The update means can control the game to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, thereby establishing a special condition (for example, the portion executing steps 120IWS85, S86 in the game control microcomputer 100; the portion executing step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100). The update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the portion executing step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100). The state information control means may be configured to set the state information to a first numerical value in a normal state, set the state information to a second numerical value when the state is controlled to a special state after the state is controlled to an advantageous state based on the specific display result being derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, and set the state information to a third numerical value different from the first and second numerical values when the state is controlled to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition, and the game control means may be configured to transmit specific information to the presentation control means and to transmit specific information corresponding to the case where the state information is the second numerical value or the third numerical value when the state is in a special state. With such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be achieved. For example, control becomes easier because different game states can be suitably identified, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, a suitable presentation can be performed when the presentation control means performs a different presentation.

(Means 2C) In means 1C, the state information control means may be configured to set the state information to a fourth numerical value different from the first, second and third numerical values when a special condition is satisfied again after the state information has been controlled to a special state based on the satisfaction of a special condition. Such a configuration allows for suitable control even when new functions are added and the specifications become more complex. For example, control becomes easier as different game states can be suitably identified, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, a suitable presentation can be executed when the presentation control means executes a different presentation.

(Means 3C) In means 1C or means 2C, the presentation control means may be configured to be able to execute different presentations when the state control means controls to a special state based on the derived display of a specific display result and when the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition. With such a configuration, the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition can be efficiently consumed, making it possible to execute presentations according to the situation, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(Means 4C) In any of means 1C to 3C, the presentation control means may be configured to execute a common presentation (for example, display a common background image) when the state control means controls to a special state based on the derived display of a specific display result, and when the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition. Such a configuration makes it possible to make the presentation in the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition the same every time, which prevents an increase in development costs since new presentations are not required, and increases the interest of the game since it does not confuse the player.

(Means 5C) In any of means 1C to 4C, the state control means can control to a special state when a special display result (e.g., a time-saving miss) different from the specific display result in the normal state is derived and displayed (e.g., a part that executes step 120IWS160 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means can be configured to execute different presentations when the state control means controls to a special state based on the derived and displayed special display result and when the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition. With such a configuration, the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition can be efficiently consumed, making it possible to execute presentations according to the situation, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(Means 6C) In any of means 1C to 4C, the state control means may be configured to control to a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state, and the presentation control means may be configured to execute a common presentation (for example, display a common background image) when the state control means controls to a special state based on the derived display of the special display result and when the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the presentation in the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition the same every time, which prevents an increase in development costs since a new presentation is not required, and increases the interest of the game since it does not confuse the player.

In addition, the configurations shown in (Means 1D) to (Means 4D) below may be applied to the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW and each of the modified examples.

(Means 1D) A gaming machine that can execute variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes a gaming control means (e.g., a part that executes step S25 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., steps S170 to S17 in the presentation control CPU 120) that controls the presentation corresponding to the variable display. The game control means includes a state control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S120IWS150, S160, and S537 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can control to a special state (for example, a time-saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, an update means (for example, a portion that executes steps S120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, and a control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S120IWS150, S160, and S537 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display when the power supply is stopped. and a backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information relating to the number of times the variable display is executed, and the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times and a special condition is established (e.g., a portion executing steps 120IWS85, S86 in the game control microcomputer 100; a portion executing step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100). The update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (e.g., a portion executing step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100). The game control means is capable of transmitting predetermined information to the presentation control means when power supply is started, and the presentation control means may be configured to be capable of executing a suggestive presentation relating to the number of times the variable display is executed during a predetermined period after power supply is started based on receiving the predetermined information. With such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be achieved. For example, this will motivate players to start playing from the opening of the amusement arcade, which can increase the utilization rate of gaming machines.

(Means 2D) In means 1D, the game control means may be configured to be able to transmit specific information capable of identifying the numerical information stored in the backup storage means to the performance control means when power supply is started. Such a configuration makes it possible to provide suitable control even if new functions are added and the specifications become more complex. For example, this can motivate players to play from the opening of the gaming facility, increasing the operating rate of gaming machines while suppressing an increase in the processing load.

(Means 3D) In means 1D or 2D, the game control means can transmit specific information to the performance control means in relation to the execution of the variable display, and the performance control means can execute a special performance related to being controlled to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition based on the specific information, and the specific information may be configured to include first specific information (e.g., a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command) that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number is equal to or less than a predetermined value, and second specific information (e.g., a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command) that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number is greater than the predetermined value. Such a configuration can enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by periodically suggesting functions to the player, the risk of unknowingly causing losses can be reduced and processing related to the specific information can be suitably realized.

(Means 4D) In any of means 1D to 3D, the presentation control means may be configured to be capable of executing a suggestion presentation that suggests that the game will be controlled to a special state when a special condition is met based on the execution of a first predetermined number of variable displays that is less than the special number of times, and to be capable of executing a suggestion presentation each time a second predetermined number of variable displays that is less than the first predetermined number of times is executed before the execution of the special number of variable displays. Such a configuration makes it possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become more complex. For example, by periodically suggesting functions to the player, the risk of unknowingly causing losses can be reduced.

In addition, the configurations shown in (Means 1E-1) and (Means 1E-2) below may be applied to the above characteristic part 120IW and each of the modified examples.

(Means 1E-1) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with a gaming control means (e.g., a part that executes step S25 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the presentation control CPU 120) that controls the presentation corresponding to the variable display, and the gaming control means controls a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. a state control means (e.g., a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps S120IWS150, S160, and S537) capable of controlling the game to a state where a predetermined display result is derived and displayed in succession (e.g., a time-shortened state); an update means (e.g., a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps S120IWS84) capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of a variable display; a backup storage means (e.g., a RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information relating to the number of times the variable display has been executed when power supply is stopped; and a backup storage means including information relating to the number of times a predetermined display result has been derived and displayed in succession when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The state control means can control the state to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times and a special condition is established (for example, a portion that executes steps 120IWS85 and 120IWS86 in the game control microcomputer 100, a portion that executes step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100). The update means executes a variable display of the first identification information and a variable display of the second identification information. The numerical information is updated when the display is executed (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means may be configured to execute different presentations when the special state is controlled by the state control means based on the establishment of a special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized, and when the special state is controlled by the state control means based on the establishment of a special condition after the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, since it is possible to know that the memory contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, the number of elements such as guessing setting values increases, which can improve the interest of the game.

(Means 1E-2) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with a gaming control means (e.g., a part that executes step S25 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the presentation control CPU 120) that controls the presentation corresponding to the variable display, and the gaming control means controls a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. a state control means (e.g., a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps S120IWS150, S160, S537) capable of controlling the game to a state where a predetermined display result is derived and displayed in succession (e.g., a time-shortened state); an update means (e.g., a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps S120IWS84) capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of a variable display; a backup storage means (e.g., a RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information relating to the number of times the variable display is executed when the power supply is stopped; and a backup storage means (e.g., a RAM 102) which holds numerical information relating to the number of times a predetermined display result has been derived and displayed in succession when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The state control means can control to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, a portion executing steps 120IWS85, S86 in the game control microcomputer 100, a portion executing step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100). The update means executes variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information. The numerical information is updated when the display is executed (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means may be configured to execute different presentations after being controlled to the special state when the state control means controls the state to the special state based on the establishment of a special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized, and when the state control means controls the state to the special state based on the establishment of a special condition after the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized. Such a configuration makes it possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, since it is possible to know that the memory contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, the number of elements such as guessing set values increases, which can improve the interest of the game.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 090IW)
Next, the characteristic part 090IW of this embodiment will be described. In this characteristic part 090IW, the game state is controlled to either the normal state (non-time-saving state) or the time-saving state. As will be described in detail later, it is possible to control from the normal state to the time-saving state via the small win game state based on the derivation and display of the small win pattern. In addition, the display result of the small win includes the display result of the small win A or the small win B that can be controlled in the time-saving state, and the display result of the small win C that cannot be controlled in the time-saving state. And, the ratio of the display result of the small win A or the small win B being derived and displayed is different between the case where the display result of the small win is derived and displayed by performing the variable display of the first special pattern and the case where the display result of the small win is derived and displayed by performing the variable display of the second special pattern.

(Big hit type determination table, small hit type determination table)
282-1(A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 282-1(A) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Also, FIG. 282-1(B) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 282-1(A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is a table that is referenced to determine the type of jackpot to be a "10R time-limited jackpot" based on a random number for determining the type of jackpot when a decision is made to make the variable display result a jackpot symbol.

As shown in FIG. 282-1(B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is a table that is referenced to determine the type of jackpot to be a "10R time-saving jackpot" based on the random number for determining the type of jackpot when it is determined that the variable display result is to be a jackpot symbol.

A "10R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the game to a 10-round jackpot game state, and transitions to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends. Once the game transitions to the time-saving state, the time-saving state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

As shown in FIG. 282-1(A), in this example, if the first special symbol is displayed and a jackpot is reached, it is determined to be a 10R time-saving jackpot with a 100% probability. Also, as shown in FIG. 282-1(B), in this example, if the second special symbol is displayed and a jackpot is reached, it is determined to be a 10R time-saving jackpot with a 100% probability.

The type of jackpot is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, multiple types of time-saving jackpots with different number of time-saving times (e.g., 3 times or 5 times) or multiple types of time-saving jackpots with different number of rounds (e.g., 2 rounds or 4 rounds) may be provided. In addition, this example shows a case where only time-saving jackpots that transition to a time-saving state after the jackpot game ends are provided, but it is also possible to configure it so that a non-time-saving jackpot (normal jackpot) that does not transition to a time-saving state after the jackpot game ends is provided. In addition, this example shows a case where a 100R time-saving jackpot is determined with a 100% probability when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, but it is also possible to configure it so that multiple types of jackpot types are determined even when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed.

Figure 282-1 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing the small win type determination table stored in ROM 101. As shown in Figure 282-1 (C), the small win type determination table is a table that is referenced to determine the type of small win as either "small win A", "small win B", or "small win C" based on a random number for determining the type of win when a decision is made to make the variable display result a small win pattern.

A "small win A" is a small win that transitions to a time-saving state after the end of a small win game, on the condition that the game ball that entered the special winning port during the small win game (first round) did not win a V (it is detected by the non-V winning port switch and it is detected that it did not pass through the V winning port). Once it transitions to the time-saving state, the time-saving state is maintained until the 10 variable displays are completed. Note that a "small win A" is a small win that controls the game to a big win game state for the second to fourth rounds, on the condition that a V win has occurred, and transitions to the time-saving state after the big win game state ends. However, when a "small win A" occurs, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device is controlled so that a V win does not occur.

A "small hit B" is a small hit that transitions to a time-saving state after the end of a small hit game, on the condition that the game ball that entered the special winning port during the small hit game (first round) did not make a V win (it is detected by the non-V winning port switch and it is detected that it did not pass through the V winning port). Once it transitions to the time-saving state, the time-saving state is maintained until the end of the five variable displays. Note that a "small hit B" is a small hit that, on the condition that a V win has occurred, controls the game to a big hit game state for the second to fourth rounds, and transitions to the time-saving state after the big hit game state ends. However, when a "small hit B" occurs, the opening pattern is first controlled to open the special variable winning ball device so that a V win does not occur.

A "small hit C" is a small hit that does not transition to a time-saving state after the end of a small hit game, even if the game ball that entered the special winning port during the small hit game (first round) does not enter the V (it is detected by the non-V winning port switch and it is detected that it did not pass through the V winning port). Also, a "small hit C" is a small hit that, on the condition that a V win has occurred, controls the game to a big hit game state for the second to fourth rounds, and transitions to a time-saving state after the big hit game state ends. And when a "small hit C" occurs, the opening pattern is controlled to open the special variable winning ball device so that a V win occurs in most cases.

As shown in Figure 282-1 (C), in this example, when the first special pattern is displayed in a variable manner and a small win occurs, 25% of the time it is determined to be a "small win A," 25% of the time it is determined to be a "small win B," and 50% of the time it is determined to be a "small win C."

As shown in Figure 282-1 (D), in this example, when the second special pattern is displayed in a variable manner and a small win occurs, 5% of the time it is determined to be a "small win A," 5% of the time it is determined to be a "small win B," and 90% of the time it is determined to be a "small win C."

The types of small wins are not limited to the ones shown in this example. For example, multiple types of time-saving big wins with different times of time saving (e.g., 3 times or 5 times) may be provided. Also, it may be configured to provide a small win without V winning, in which a V win is practically impossible during small win play and there is no transition to a big win play after a small win play.

In addition, since the probability of a small win is higher when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed than when the variable display of the first special pattern is executed, the rate of small win A or small win B (i.e., a small win with time reduction) is higher when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, but when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, the rate of a small win with time reduction may be 100%.

(Small win game opening pattern)
Next, the opening pattern of the small win game will be described. Figure 282-2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of the small win game. As shown in Figure 282-2, after the small win game is started at timing S1, when the pre-opening period t1 (fanfare time) has elapsed, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to be in the open state at timing S2.

As shown in FIG. 282-2(A), in the case of a small win A or B (with time reduction), when the V winning port opening and closing plate is controlled to the closed state, the special variable winning ball device (special winning port) is opened for 0.05 seconds, then after a closing time of 1 second, the special winning port is opened and closed again for 0.05 seconds, and after a closing time of 12 seconds, the special winning port is opened and closed twice in the same manner.

Also, as shown in Figure 282-2 (B), in the case of small win C (no time reduction), when the V winning hole opening and closing plate is controlled to the open state, the special variable winning ball device (special winning hole) is controlled to the open state, so that the special winning hole is opened for 0.05 seconds, closed for 1 second, and then opened again for 0.05 seconds, repeating this action, so that the special winning hole is opened 10 times with one small win.

The operation of the V prize opening and closing plate is the same for small win A or small win B (with time reduction) and small win C (without time reduction), and in either case it is open for 8 seconds.

In this example, the opening time of each special winning port in the event of a small win is extremely short at 0.05 seconds, but as already explained, the special variable winning ball device is formed with multiple regulating pieces, and about 2 to 3 game balls meander down the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device, so even if the opening time is short, if the bottom member is controlled to be in the open state, the game balls on the bottom member can fall and enter the special variable winning ball device.

And, in the case of small win C (no time reduction), when the V prize opening plate is open, the special variable prize ball device is in the open state, so it is possible for the game ball to enter the V prize opening. Also, in the case of small win A or B (with time reduction), when the V prize opening plate is closed, the special variable prize ball device is in the open state, so it is impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the V prize opening.

In the case of a small win C (no time reduction), if the game ball that entered the special winning port does not pass through the V winning port, it is not controlled to the time reduction state, but in the case of a small win A or B (with time reduction), if the game ball that entered the special winning port does not pass through the V winning port, it is controlled to the time reduction state. As a result, in the case of a small win C (no time reduction), it is highly likely that the game ball will pass through the V winning port and be controlled to the big win state, but it will not be controlled to the time reduction state, and in the case of a small win A or B (with time reduction), it is highly unlikely that the game ball will not pass through the V winning port and be controlled to the big win state, but it is highly likely that it will be controlled to the time reduction state.

If the game ball enters the special winning hole and a V win occurs, after the final opening of the special winning hole, a predetermined period of closing time (interval time) and the end time of the small win (ending time) have elapsed, and then the game moves to a big win game state, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be in the open state from the second round to the fourth round.

In addition, in both cases of small hit A or B (with time reduction) and small hit C (without time reduction), the ending period starts from timing S3 to S4, but the ending period t3 in the case of small hit A or B (with time reduction) is longer than the ending period t4 in the case of small hit C (without time reduction). For example, the ending period t3 is 10 seconds longer than the ending period t4. This makes it possible to ensure time to display the start screen for the time-saving state (see FIG. 282-9 (N)) in the case of small hit A or B (with time reduction).

In addition, in the case of small win A or B (with time reduction), the ending period may be changed depending on whether or not the game ball enters the V winning hole (i.e., whether or not the game transitions to the time reduction state). Specifically, when the game ball does not enter the V winning hole, the game is controlled to the time reduction state, so in this case the ending period is lengthened.

In this way, in this example, the special variable winning ball device can be controlled to an open state using different patterns (in this example, the number of openings) when the display result for small win A or small win B is derived and displayed, and when the display result for small win C is derived and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control the device to a time-saving state.

Specifically, in this example, a V winning hole opening and closing plate is provided that performs the same operation when the display result of small win A or small win B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of small win C is derived and displayed, when the display result of small win A or small win B is derived and displayed, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state when the V winning hole opening and closing plate is in a state that blocks the passage of the game ball to the V winning hole, and when the display result of small win C is derived and displayed, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state when the V winning hole opening and closing plate is in a state that does not block the passage of the game ball to the V winning hole. Therefore, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to the time-saving state.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
FIG. 282-3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the feature part 090IW. Among these, FIG. 282-3 shows a specific example of a variation pattern table for the first special symbol. Also, FIG. 282-4 shows a specific example of a variation pattern table for the second special symbol.

First, the variation pattern of the first special symbol will be explained using FIG. 282-3. As shown in FIG. 282-3, in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if there is a miss during the normal state, the variation pattern is determined to be one of the following: variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation), variation pattern PA1-2 (non-reach in normal variation → development performance), variation pattern PA1-3 (shortened variation), variation pattern PA1-4 (non-reach in shortened variation → development performance), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (normal reach → development performance), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach α), and variation pattern PA2-4 (super reach β). Also, when executing the change display of the first special symbol, if there is a miss during the time-saving state, the change pattern is determined to be one of the following: change pattern PA1-5 (shortened change), change pattern PA1-6 (shortened change with no reach → developing effect), change pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), change pattern PA2-2 (normal reach → developing effect), change pattern PA2-3 (super reach α), or change pattern PA2-4 (super reach β).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 282-3, in this example, when the first special symbol variable display is executed, if a jackpot occurs during the normal state, the variable pattern is determined to be one of the variable patterns PB1-1 (normal reach), PB1-2 (super reach α), and PB1-3 (super reach β). In addition, when the first special symbol variable display is executed, if a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state, the variable pattern is determined to be one of the variable patterns PB1-1 (normal reach), PB1-2 (super reach α), and PB1-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in FIG. 282-3, in this example, when the first special symbol variable display is executed, if a small hit C (no time reduction) occurs during the normal state, the variable pattern is determined to be one of the following: variable pattern PC1-1 (normal reach), variable pattern PC1-2 (super reach α), or variable pattern PC1-3 (super reach β).Also, when the first special symbol variable display is executed, if a small hit C occurs during the time reduction state, the variable pattern is determined to be one of the following: variable pattern PC1-1 (normal reach), variable pattern PC1-2 (super reach α), or variable pattern PC1-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in FIG. 282-3, in this example, when the first special symbol is changed to display a small win A or B (with time reduction) during the normal state, the change pattern is determined to be one of the following: change pattern PC1-4 (non-reach with normal change → development effect), change pattern PC1-5 (non-reach with shortened change → development effect), or change pattern PC1-7 (normal reach → development effect). Also, when the first special symbol is changed to display a small win A or B (with time reduction) during the time reduction state, the change pattern is determined to be one of the following: change pattern PC1-6 (non-reach with shortened change → development effect), or change pattern PC1-7 (normal reach → development effect).

Next, the variation pattern of the second special symbol will be explained using FIG. 282-4. As shown in FIG. 282-4, in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if there is a miss during the normal state, the variation pattern is determined to be either variation pattern PA3-1 or variation pattern PA3-2 (non-reach in normal variation → development performance). Also, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if there is a miss during the time-saving state, the variation pattern is determined to be either variation pattern PA3-3 (shortened variation), variation pattern PA3-4 (non-reach in shortened variation → development performance), variation pattern PB3-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PB3-2 (normal reach → development performance), variation pattern PB3-3 (super reach α), variation pattern PB3-4 (super reach β).

As shown in FIG. 282-4, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if a jackpot occurs during the normal state, the variable pattern is determined to be variable pattern PA3-5 (normal reach). Also, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state, the variable pattern is determined to be either variable pattern PC3-1 (normal reach), variable pattern PC3-2 (super reach α), or variable pattern PC3-3 (super reach β).

As shown in FIG. 282-4, when the second special symbol variation display is executed, if small wins A to C occur during normal state, the variation pattern is determined to be variation pattern PA3-6 (normal reach). Also, if small win C occurs during time-saving state, the variation pattern is determined to be either variation pattern PD3-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PD3-2 (super reach α), or variation pattern PD3-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in FIG. 282-4, in this example, when the second special symbol change display is executed, if small win A or B (with time reduction) occurs during the time reduction state, the change pattern is determined to be either change pattern PD3-4 (non-reach with shortened change → development effect) or change pattern PD3-5 (normal reach → development effect).

In this example, in the normal symbol process processing (step S26), the CPU 103 determines whether the result of the normal symbol variable display is a hit (normal symbol hit), and controls the execution of the normal symbol variable display based on the result of the determination. In this example, in the normal state, it is determined that there is a 10% probability of a normal symbol hit, and in the time-saving state, it is determined that there is a 90% probability of a normal symbol hit. In addition, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) to an open state based on the determination that there is a normal symbol hit in the normal symbol process processing (step S26).

In this way, in this example, the rate at which the development performance is executed as a specific performance during the variable display differs between when the display result of small hit A or small hit B is derived and when the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed. Specifically, in the case of small hit A or small hit B, the paste performance is executed, but in the case of small hit C, the development performance is not executed. This avoids inconsistencies between the look-ahead preview performance and the performance after the big hit game state or the time-saving state, allowing the look-ahead preview performance to be executed optimally.

In addition, when a small hit A or small hit B (with time reduction) occurs, a common fluctuation pattern may be set for a small hit C (without time reduction), a miss, or a big hit.

(Processing after closing small hit)
FIG. 282-5 is a flow chart showing the small win closing post-processing (step 090IWS116) in the special pattern process processing in the feature part 090IW. In the small win closing post-processing, the CPU 103 checks whether the small win end display timer is set (step 090IWS451), and if the small win end display timer is set, proceeds to step 090IWS453. If the small win end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 sets the small win end display timer to a value equivalent to the display time corresponding to the time during which the small win end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (small win end display time) (step 090IWS452), and ends the process.

In step 090IWS453, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the small win end display timer. The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the small win end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the small win end display time has elapsed (step 090IWS454). If it has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the small win end display time has elapsed, the CPU 103 checks whether the V winning flag is set (step 090IWS455). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time-saving flag and the time-saving count counter (step 090IWS456). The CPU 103 also resets the V winning flag (step 090IWS457). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a big win start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 090IWS458). The CPU 103 also sets the time timer before the big win opening (step 090IWS459).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the pre-hit processing (step 090IWS117) (step 090IWS460).

When it is confirmed in the processing of step 090IWS456 that the V winning flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether or not it is a small win A (step 090IWS461). If it is a small win A, it checks whether or not the non-V winning flag is set (step 090IWS461a). If the non-V winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 090IWS465. If the non-V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the time-saving flag (step 090IWS462). The time-saving counter is set to "10" (step 090IWS463). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a small win end designation A command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 090IWS464). Then, the process proceeds to step 090IWS465.

If the CPU 103 confirms that the winning is not a small win A (step 090IWS461: N), it checks whether the winning is a small win B (step 090IWS467). If the winning is a small win B, it checks whether the non-V winning flag is set (step 090IWS467a). If the non-V winning flag is not set, it proceeds to step 090IWS465. If the non-V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the time-saving flag (step 090IWS468). It sets the time-saving counter to "5" (step 090IWS469). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a small win end designation B command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 090IWS470). It then proceeds to step 090IWS465.

If the CPU 103 determines that the winning combination is not a small win B (step 090IWS467: N), it sends a small win end command C to the performance control CPU 120 (step 090IWS471). Then, it proceeds to step 090IWS465.

In step 090IWS465, the CPU 103 resets the small win flag (step 090IWS465). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a small win end command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 090IWS462). The CPU 103 then updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special symbol processing (step 090IWS110) (step 090IWS463).

The timer that measures the ending period after the small hit closes is set to a value depending on whether it is a small hit A or B (with time reduction) or a small hit C (without time reduction), but the value is set so that the ending period in the case of a small hit A or B (with time reduction) is longer than the ending period in the case of a small hit C (without time reduction).

(Waiting for special drawing)
282-6 and 282-7 are flow charts showing the special symbol hit waiting process (step S173) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 280 in the characteristic part 090IW. In the special symbol hit waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks whether the big win stop flag is set (step 090IWS871). The big win stop flag is a flag indicating that the big win symbol has already been derived and displayed but the big win start designation command has not yet been received, and is set in step 090IWS875 described later. If the big win stop flag is set, the process proceeds to step 090IWS876.

If the big win stop flag is not set, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the small win stop flag is set (step 090IWS872). The small win stop flag is a flag that indicates that the small win pattern has already been derived and displayed but that the small win start command has not yet been received, and is set in step 090IWS883, which will be described later. If the small win stop flag is set, the process proceeds to step 090IWS885.

If the small win stop flag is also not set, the performance control CPU 120 performs control to stop and display the determined stop pattern (miss pattern, big win pattern, small win pattern) (step 090IWS873).

If the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed in step 090IWS873 (Y in step 090IWS874), the presentation control CPU 120 sets the jackpot stop flag (step 090IWS875). Next, the presentation control CPU 120 checks whether a jackpot start command has been received (step 090IWS876). Whether a jackpot start command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether a jackpot start command reception flag (see step 090IWS622) has been set. If a jackpot start command has not been received, the process ends.

If a jackpot start command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 resets the jackpot stop flag (step 090IWS877). Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the performance during the jackpot (step 090IWS878). Then, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 090IWS879), and executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as a performance component, and speaker 27 as a performance component) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 090IWS880).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during the jackpot (step 090IWS881).

If the big win symbol is not displayed in the process of step 090IWS873 (N in step 090IWS874), the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the small win symbol is displayed in the process of step 090IWS882 (step 090IWS882). If the small win symbol is displayed in the process of step 090IWS882 (Y in step 090IWS882), the performance control CPU 120 sets the small win stop flag (step 090IWS883). Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the small win start command has been received (step 090IWS885). Whether the small win start command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether a flag indicating that the small win start command has been received is set in the command analysis process. If the small win start command has not been received, the process ends as is.

If a small hit start command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 resets the small hit stop flag (step 090IWS886). Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether it is a small hit A or a small hit B (with time reduction) (step 090IWS887a). If it is a small hit A or a small hit B, a process table for a small hit notification performance that notifies the player that it is a small hit and a right hit instruction A that instructs a right hit is selected (step 090IWS887b). Also, if it is not a small hit A or a small hit B, that is, if it is a small hit C (without time reduction), a process data for a V winning promotion performance that encourages the game ball to enter the V winning hole and a right hit instruction B that instructs a right hit is selected (step 090IWS887b). Note that the right hit instruction A and the right hit instruction B have different aspects. Also, the right hit instruction is also different from the right hit instruction C in the time reduction state. For example, the size, position, and content of the image for the right-hit instruction differ.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 090IWS888), and executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as a performance component, and speaker 27 as a performance component) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 090IWS889). The performance control CPU 120 also sets a small win performance period measurement timer to measure the performance period during small win play (step 090IWS890).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during the small win (step 090IWS891).

In this example, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to be in an open state during small win play, so in the small win performance processing, a performance corresponding to the opening of the special variable winning ball device is executed as a small win performance.

If it is determined that there will be neither a big win nor a small win (N in step 090IWS882), i.e., if it is determined that there will be a miss, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 090IWS895).

(Example of performance)
Next, specific examples of the presentation when small hit A or small hit B (with time reduction) occurs, and when small hit C (without time reduction) will be explained.

Figures 282-8 to 282-10 show the screen transitions when small hit A or small hit B (with time reduction) occurs in normal conditions (low probability/low base state).

As shown in FIG. 282-8(A), when controlled in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the image display device 5 displays small symbols 090IW100 on the left, center, and right, which correspond to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in the upper left. In this example, since in the normal state, a start winning occurs almost always in the first start winning hole, an example is shown in which a game ball wins in the first start winning hole and the variable display of the small symbol 090IW100 is started. Then, in conjunction with the variable display of the small symbol 090IW100, decorative symbols 090IW101 on the left, center, and right, which are larger than the small symbol 090IW100, start to vary in the center of the screen.

As shown in Figure 282-8 (B) and (C), let's say that the left and right decorative symbols 090IW101 stop and the big win symbol creates a normal reach. At this time, the small symbol 090IW100 remains in a fluctuating display.

As shown in Figure 282-8 (D), let us assume that the decorative pattern 090IW101 in the middle has stopped and the missing pattern has stopped. At this time, the decorative pattern 090IW101 is not completely stopped, but is in a temporary stopped state that involves shaking. Note that the small pattern 090IW100 continues to be displayed in a fluctuating manner.

As shown in Figure 282-8 (E), the temporarily stopped decorative symbol 090IW101 is temporarily erased and the development performance is executed. In this example, the word "Time reduction?" 090IW102, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a time-saving state, is displayed in the center of the screen larger than the small symbol 090IW100. Note that the small symbol 090IW100 remains displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in Figure 282-8(F), after the development effect shown in Figure 282-8(E) is executed, the temporarily stopped decorative pattern 090IW101 is displayed again. At this time, the small pattern 090IW100 remains displayed.

As shown in Figure 282-8 (G) (H), let's say that the left and right decorative symbols 090IW101 have stopped and a small win A or small win B is in reach. At this time, the small symbol 090IW100 remains in a fluctuating display.

As shown in Figure 282-9 (I), the remaining decorative pattern 090IW101 stops, and the small win pattern "135" for small win A or small win B stops. At this time, the small pattern 090IW100 also stops at "135".

As shown in Figure 282-9 (J), when the small win pattern "135" stops on the small pattern 090IW100 and the decorative pattern 090IW101, during the pre-opening time before the special variable winning ball device is opened, the words "Small win!" 090IW103, indicating that a small win is about to begin, are displayed in the center of the screen larger than the small pattern 090IW100.

As shown in FIG. 282-9 (K), when a small win game starts, the background A during the small win is displayed, and the text "small win in progress" 090IW105 is displayed to inform the player that a small win game is in progress. In addition, in the case of small win A or small win B, it is difficult to make the game ball enter the V winning hole, making it difficult to generate a big win. For this reason, it is more disappointing for the player than small win C, which is easier to generate a big win, but in the case of small win A or small win B, the V is not won, and the game is controlled to a time-saving state. Therefore, in order to make the game ball enter the special variable winning ball device, the right hit instruction display (right hit instruction A) 090IW106 is displayed, and the right hit instruction display (right hit instruction A) 090IW106 is displayed in a small and inconspicuous manner at the bottom right of the screen so as not to unnecessarily stir up the player's disappointment. The right hit instruction display 090IW106 is composed of the words "right hit" and an arrow pointing to the right. In order to make the right hit instruction display 090IW106 less noticeable, the small win background A is a flashy background that attracts the player's interest, such as by featuring a character.

As shown in Figure 282-9 (L), when the small win game state ends without winning the V winning slot, an ending screen is displayed during the ending period of the small win. For example, a background or character corresponding to the ending screen is displayed.

As shown in Figure 282-9 (M), after the end screen of the small win game is displayed, the start screen of the time-saving mode is displayed. For example, an image indicating that the time-saving mode is starting and the number of times the time-saving mode will change are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 282-9 (N), when the display of the start screen of the time-saving state ends, the small pattern 090IW100 and the decorative patterns 090IW101 on the left, center, and right start to change, and the control of the time-saving state starts. When the control of the time-saving state starts, the background during the time-saving state is displayed, and the remaining number of changes in the time-saving state 090IW107 is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. Furthermore, during the time-saving state, a right-hit instruction display (right-hit instruction C) 090IW108 is displayed at the top of the screen to allow the game ball to enter the passing gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B. The right-hit instruction display 090IW108 during the time-saving state is composed of the characters "right hit" and two arrows pointing to the right. The right-hit instruction display 090IW108 is displayed larger than the right-hit instruction display 090IW106, and the display position is also different.

As shown in Figure 282-9 (O), Figure 282-10 (P) (Q), assume that the decorative pattern 090IW101 stops, the small pattern 090IW100 stops, and the loss pattern stops.

As shown in FIG. 282-10 (R), the next change is then started, and when the display of the decorative pattern 090IW101 and the small pattern 090IW100 changes starts, the remaining number of changes 090IW107 is subtracted. After that, the same control is performed until the time-saving state ends.

Figures 282-11 to 282-12 show the screen transitions when a small hit C (no time reduction) occurs in normal conditions (low probability/low base state).

As shown in FIG. 282-11(A), when controlled in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the image display device 5 displays small symbols 090IW100 on the left, center, and right corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the upper left. In this example, since in the normal state, a start winning occurs almost always in the first start winning hole, an example is shown in which a game ball wins in the first start winning hole and the variable display of the small symbol 090IW100 is started. Then, in conjunction with the variable display of the small symbol 090IW100, decorative symbols 090IW101 on the left, center, and right, which are larger than the small symbol 090IW100, start to vary in the center of the screen.

As shown in Figures 282-11 (B), (C), and (D), let us say that the decorative patterns 090IW101 on the left, center, and right stop, and the small win pattern "357" for small win C stops. At this time, the small pattern 090IW100 also stops at the same time as "357".

As shown in Figure 282-11 (E), when the small win pattern "357" stops on the small pattern 090IW100 and the decorative pattern 090IW101, during the pre-opening time before the special variable winning ball device is opened, the words "Small win!" 090IW103, indicating that a small win is about to begin, are displayed in the center of the screen larger than the small pattern 090IW100.

As shown in FIG. 282-11(F), when a small win game is started, the background B during the small win is displayed, and the characters "Aim for V!" 090IW109 are displayed to inform the player that the game ball will be launched aiming at the V winning hole of the special variable winning ball device. In addition, in the case of a small win C, the game ball is more likely to enter the V winning hole, making it easier to generate a big win. This makes the player happy because they can get a large number of balls. Therefore, in order to cause the game ball to enter the special variable winning ball device and generate a big win, a right hit instruction display (right hit instruction B) 090IW110 is displayed, and the right hit instruction display 090IW110 is displayed in a large and noticeable manner in the center of the screen. The right hit instruction display 090IW110 is composed of the characters "right hit" and three arrows pointing to the right. In order to make the right hit instruction display 090IW107 stand out, the background B during the small win is a simple screen without any characters, making it a plain background that does not attract the player's interest. The right hit instruction display 090IW110 is displayed larger than the right hit instruction display 090IW106 during a small win A or B and the right hit instruction display 090IW108 during the time-saving mode, and the display position is also different.

In this way, the right hit instruction display 090IW106 for small hit A or small hit B, the right hit instruction display 090IW110 for small hit C, and the right hit instruction display 090IW108 during time-saving are all different in size, display position, and display format (number of arrows).

As shown in Figure 282-11 (G), when a prize is won in the V prize slot and the small win game state ends, the letter "V" 090IW104 is displayed in the center of the screen during the ending period of the small win, indicating that a prize will be won in the V prize slot and a big win will occur.

As shown in FIG. 282-12(H), the word "ROUND2" 090IW111, indicating that the big win game (second round) is about to begin, is then displayed in the center of the screen, larger than the small symbol 090IW100.

As shown in FIG. 282-12 (I), when a jackpot game (second round) starts, a jackpot background is displayed and the game is played in the jackpot game state. The same applies to the third and fourth rounds. Note that in this example, an example of a small jackpot C occurring during normal play is described, but if a small jackpot C occurs during the time-saving state, the same presentation as above is performed during small jackpot play, and a larger right-hit instruction display is displayed than for small jackpots A and B. Also, different presentations may be performed for a small jackpot C occurring during normal play and for a small jackpot C occurring during the time-saving state, and the size of the right-hit instruction display may be different.

In this way, in this example, when the display result of small win A or small win B is derived and displayed, the presentation executed when the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state is different from when the display result of small win C is derived and displayed. Specifically, when small win A or small win B is generated, the characters "small win in progress" 090IW105 are displayed during small win play to notify that a small win is in progress (Fig. 282-9 (K)), while the characters "Aim for V!" 090IW109 are displayed to notify that the game ball will be launched aiming at the V winning hole of the special variable winning ball device (Fig. 282-11 (F)). Therefore, the presentation can be executed appropriately when the display result of a small win is derived and displayed.

In this example, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided so that game balls can enter through a right-hit path that allows game balls to flow down by hitting the game ball on the right side of the game area. A launch promotion display is displayed to promote the launch of game balls into the right-hit path, and the launch promotion display is displayed in a different manner when a display result of small hit A or small hit B is derived and displayed, and when a display result of small hit C is derived and displayed. Specifically, since a small hit C is easier to generate a big hit than a small hit A or B, a right-hit instruction display 090IW106 (see FIG. 282-9 (K)) is displayed when a small hit A or B is reached, and a right-hit instruction display 090IW110 (see FIG. 282-11 (F)) is displayed when a small hit C is reached. This allows the game to proceed smoothly.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 282-8(E), it is possible to execute a presentation suggesting that the reel will be controlled to a time-saving state as a preview presentation of a small win. In other words, an extended presentation is executed, and the word "Time-saving?" 090IW102 is displayed, suggesting that the reel will be controlled to a time-saving state. This increases the variety of pre-read preview presentations, thereby improving the excitement of the game.

(Modification)
Next, a modified example of the performance executed in this feature part 090IW will be described. In the modified example, in FIG. 282-2, when the display result of small hit A or small hit B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device is made different, so that the ease of winning the game ball into the V winning port is made different, and whether or not to control to the time-saving state is controlled. In the modified example, when the display result of small hit A or small hit B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed, the special variable winning ball device is opened by the same pattern, but by making the time before opening the special variable winning ball device different, the ease of winning the game ball into the V winning port is made different, and whether or not to control to the time-saving state is controlled. Note that the explanation of the parts common to FIG. 282-2 is omitted.

Figure 282-13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of small win games. Note that the operation of the V prize opening and closing plate is the same for small win A or small win B (with time reduction) and small win C (without time reduction).

As shown in Figure 282-13 (A), in the case of small win A or B (with time reduction), after the small win game starts at timing S1, when the pre-opening period t1 (fanfare time) has elapsed, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state at timing S2. By setting the pre-opening period t1 in this way, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state when the V winning hole opening and closing plate is controlled to the closed state. Then, by repeating the operation of opening the special winning hole for 0.05 seconds, closing it for 1 second, and then opening it again for 0.05 seconds, the special winning hole is opened 10 times with one small win.

As shown in Figure 282-12 (B), in the case of small win C (no time reduction), after the small win game starts at timing S1, when the pre-opening period t2 (fanfare time) shorter than the pre-opening period t1 has elapsed, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state at timing S2. By setting the pre-opening period t2 in this way, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state when the V winning hole opening and closing plate is controlled to the open state. Then, by repeating the operation of opening the special winning hole for 0.05 seconds, closing it for 1 second, and then opening it again for 0.05 seconds in the same pattern as Figure 282-13 (A), the special winning hole is opened 10 times with one small win.

As described above, in this example, the special variable winning ball device can be controlled to an open state using the same pattern when the display result for small win A or small win B is derived and displayed, and when the display result for small win C is derived and displayed. This allows for optimal control over whether or not to control to the time-saving state, and prevents the user from knowing in advance which small win result will be derived and displayed.

In addition, in this example, a V-winning opening and closing plate is provided that performs the same operation when the display result of small win A or small win B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of small win C is derived and displayed, and the period until the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state differs when the display result of small win A or small win B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of small win C is derived and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to the time-saving state.

(Other variations)
In addition, in this characteristic part 090IW, it is possible to provide multiple types of small wins that do not allow the game ball to enter the V winning port. As multiple types of small wins, a small win that transitions to a time-saving state when the game ball enters the special winning port but does not enter the V winning port, and a small win that does not transition to a time-saving state when the game ball enters the special winning port but does not enter the V winning port are provided. It is possible to configure the small win that transitions to a time-saving state when the game ball enters the special winning port but does not enter the V winning port, and the small win that does not transition to a time-saving state when the game ball enters the special winning port but does not enter the V winning port, to execute different effects. The effects may be different during either the fluctuation or the small win game state, or both.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned features and variations, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) is exemplified as always passing through the big win state or small win state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) may be made without operating the special variable winning ball device 7.

The time-saving symbols mentioned above may be part of the losing symbol or part of the small winning symbol.

In addition, when performing lottery processing for the derivation and display of time-saving patterns, the lottery may be performed using a random number dedicated to the lottery of time-saving patterns, or the lottery may be performed using a random number for other lotteries such as a lottery random number for a losing pattern, a lottery random number for a big win pattern, a lottery random number for a small win pattern, a random number for determining a big win lottery, or a lottery random number for a fall lottery.

In addition, these time-saving symbols may be of multiple types, and may be used in combination with other symbols that are displayed as losing symbols.

In addition, when a lottery is held for the time-saving symbols and the setting value can be changed, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols does not change according to the setting value; in other words, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols is the same for all setting values, but the probability of drawing these time-saving symbols may be different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, the timing of obtaining the random number when drawing the time-saving pattern can be when the ball enters the start hole (first start hole, second start hole), regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used.

In addition, when a lottery for a time-saving pattern is held, if a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used, the result of the lottery using the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is the winning value, if a small win pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific small win pattern random number value is the winning value, and if a random number for a fall lottery judgment value is used to draw the time-saving pattern, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value is the winning value. In addition, a lottery using a structure may be held, for example, a time-saving area may be set inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the time-saving pattern may be won when the game ball passes through the time-saving area.

In addition, when drawing a lottery for the time-saving pattern, if a losing pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific losing pattern random number value can be the winning value, and if a winning pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific winning pattern random number value can be the winning value. However, when using these random number values as the winning value, this is only possible for machines whose settings cannot be changed, since the settings can affect performance other than the probability of winning.

The timing of the lottery results for the time-saving symbol may be determined after the jackpot has been determined. The lottery for the time-saving symbol is not performed in the time-saving state (high base) or when there is a high probability, regardless of the random number value used in the lottery, but only in the low probability/low base state. However, if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed when the time-saving state is already in, the number of time-saving symbols may be reset or the lottery may not be performed, as long as this is determined for each gaming machine.

In addition, the number of times the time-saving symbol is displayed can be set to a number of predetermined times depending on the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, the conditions for granting the time-saving symbol can be different for each time-saving symbol.

In addition, when the number of time-saving patterns differs depending on the time-saving pattern, the lottery for allocating the time-saving patterns can be changed between Special Pattern 1 and Special Pattern 2.

In addition, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-saving periods awarded may differ depending on the game state at that time. However, this must be determined in advance for the game state.

In addition, the lottery result for the time-saving pattern in a low-probability, low-base state can include the lottery result of "0 time-saving times."

In addition, a lottery for deriving the time-saving end pattern (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of times the time-saving function is played may be set to the number of times after the start of the time-saving function until the time-saving end pattern is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of times the time-saving function is played may not be set, and may be unlimited in principle.

The number of time-saving times and the conditions for granting the time-saving state may be different between the time-saving state controlled by the time-saving symbol and the time-saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

In addition, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the point at which the symbol determination time for the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, when a small win symbol random number is used to select the time-saving symbol, if a small win is won and the time-saving state is entered, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the end of the small win operation.

In addition, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in a game state in which the structure is operated (for example, a small win state).

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high-probability, low-base state for a specified number of variable displays after a jackpot (a so-called specified-number-of-times-variable-game machine (ST machine)), the machine may be in the high-probability, low-base state when the gaming center opens, and after the high-probability, low-base state has ended after the specified number of variable displays have been executed, it may be controlled to a time-saving state.

In addition, if a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times the time-saving limiter is activated will be updated.

The time it takes for the time-saving symbol to be confirmed may also be different from the time it takes for the other symbols to be confirmed.

In this example, it is possible to configure the device so that the game is controlled to the time-saving state (so-called ceiling) when the number of times the pattern changes in the normal state reaches a predetermined number. Specifically, a counter is provided to count the number of times the game changes before the game is controlled to the time-saving state, and the counter starts counting when the RAM is initialized (when the clear switch is operated, when the settings are changed, etc.) or when a jackpot is completed. The game is controlled to the time-saving state when the counted number of times the game changes reaches a predetermined number. The counting method may be to determine whether the number of times the game changes has reached a predetermined number by subtracting the value set in the counter each time the game changes and determining whether the count value has become 0, or to determine whether the number of times the game changes has reached a predetermined number by adding to the counter value each time the game changes. The predetermined number of times until the game is controlled to the time-saving state may be determined by lottery. This makes it impossible to know when the game will be controlled to the time-saving state, which increases the interest of the game.

The predetermined number of times n, which is the number of times the pattern changes before the time-saving state is controlled, can be set to 2.5P≦n≦3.0P, for example, when the denominator of the jackpot probability is P (for example, when the jackpot probability is 1/319, P=319). The predetermined number of times N, which is the number of times the pattern changes before the time-saving state is controlled, can be set to 0.4P≦N≦3.8P, for example, when the denominator of the jackpot probability is P (for example, when the jackpot probability is 1/319, P=319). Note that these are just examples, and P is not limited to these ranges.

In addition, the setting of the predetermined number of times P when initializing the RAM (when operating the clear switch, changing the settings, etc.) or when a jackpot occurs may be the same as the number of times before initialization. In this case, it is expected that the number of times of fluctuation will reach the predetermined number of times P soon after starting the game and will be controlled to the time-saving state, so that the operating rate of the pachinko game machine can be increased.
On the other hand, the setting of the predetermined number of times P when initializing the RAM (when operating the clear switch, changing the settings, etc.) or when a big win occurs may be set so as not to carry over the number of times before the initialization. In this case, all players can play under fair conditions.

In addition, when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number and is controlled to a time-saving state, the time-saving state may be ended when the number of fluctuations reaches an upper limit, or the time-saving state may be continued until the next jackpot.

When the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number, counting of the number of fluctuations may be started again. In such a configuration, for example, if an upper limit number of times for the time-saving state is set and the upper limit number is set to a number greater than the predetermined number of times until the time-saving state is entered, the count value will reach the predetermined number during the time-saving state and the upper limit number will be set again, so that the time-saving state can be continued until the next jackpot while the upper limit number is set.

It is also possible to not count the number of changes during the time-saving state. In this case, if a maximum number of times the time-saving state can be entered is set, the time-saving state will end when the number of changes reaches the maximum number.

Also, when the number of fluctuations in the normal state reaches a first number, a lottery may be held to determine whether or not to control to the time-saving state, and if the lottery is not won, the time-saving state may be controlled when the number of fluctuations reaches a second number (the so-called pattern of reaching the ceiling via a false ceiling).

In addition, if a ceiling is set in the feature part IW090 and it is configured to control to the time-saving state when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number, the counter value continues counting without being reset regardless of whether it is a small hit A or a small hit B (with time-saving). In the case of a small hit C (without time-saving), if no big hit occurs, the counter value continues counting without being reset. As a result, if it is a small hit A or a small hit B (with time-saving), the count value may reach the predetermined number during the time-saving state after the small hit play ends, and the time-saving state may be extended. Therefore, it is possible to create a sense of expectation for the development after the small hit play ends. Also, even if it becomes a small hit C (without time-saving) and no big hit occurs, there is a possibility that it will be controlled to the time-saving state immediately after the small hit play ends, so it is possible to create a sense of expectation for the development after the small hit play ends.

As explained above, this feature section 090IW discloses the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 1) to (Means 8).

(Means 1)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) being derived and displayed,
A state control means capable of controlling the display to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state;
A variable means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device) that has a special area (e.g., a V winning hole) and can be controlled to a first state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can easily enter and a second state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot or has difficulty entering;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 280, a part that executes step S76 in the performance control CPU 120) is provided;
When a special display result (e.g., a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result is displayed, the variable means can be controlled to the first state (for example, as shown in FIG. 282-1, a part that executes step S118 in the game control microcomputer 100),
The special display result includes a first special display result (e.g., a display result of a small win A or a small win B) and a second special display result different from the first special display result (e.g., a display result of a small win C),
The state control means includes:
In the normal state, when the first special display result (for example, a display result of small win A or small win B) is derived and displayed, if the game medium does not pass through the special area, control is performed to the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 282-5, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processing of step 090IWS462 when Y is determined in step 090IWS461a, and step 090IWS468 when Y is determined in step 090IWS467a),
In the normal state, if the game medium does not pass through the special area when the second special display result (for example, a display result resulting in a small win C) is derived and displayed, the game is not controlled to the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 282-5, when step 090IWS467 in the game control microcomputer 100 is N, the process of step 090IWS461a and step 090IWS462, or step 090IWS467a and step 090IWS468 is not executed).
The ease of passing through the special area of the game medium is different when the first special display result is derived and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, the part shown in FIG. 282-2).
The performance execution means is capable of executing different performances when the variable means enters the first state in the cases where the first special display result is derived and displayed and in the case where the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 282-7, the part that executes steps 090IWS887b, 887c in the performance control CPU 120, the part shown in FIG. 282-9 (K) and FIG. 282-11 (F)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably execute a presentation when the special display result is derived and displayed.

In this example, the game is switched to the time-saving state after the end of the small win game on the condition that the special winning port wins but the V win does not occur, but this is not limited to the above. For example, if a small win occurs, the game may be switched to the time-saving state after the end of the small win game on the condition that the game ball does not win the special winning port.

(Means 2) In Means 1,
The rate at which a specific effect is executed in the effect during variable display differs between when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in Figures 282-3 and 282-4, an advanced effect is executed when there is a small hit A or a small hit B, but is not executed when there is a small hit C).
With such a configuration, inconsistencies between the look-ahead preview performance and the performance after an advantageous state or a special state can be avoided, so that the look-ahead preview performance can be executed preferably.

(Means 3) In means 1 or means 2,
The variable winning device is provided so that a game medium passing through a predetermined path (for example, a right-hitting path) can enter the variable winning device,
A launch promotion display means for displaying a launch promotion display (e.g., a right-hit instruction display) for promoting the launch of the game medium to the predetermined path (for example, a part for executing steps 090IWS887b and 887c in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 282-7),
The launch promotion display means performs the launch promotion display in different manners when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in Figure 282-7, the part that executes steps 090IWS887b, 887c in the performance control CPU 120, the part shown in Figures 282-9 (K) and 282-11 (F)).
Such a configuration allows the game to progress smoothly.

In this example, when small win A or small win B occurs, which transitions to the time-saving state after the end of the small win game on the condition that the V has not been won, the special variable winning ball device is set to an open state so that the V is not won, but this is not limited to the above. For example, a small win may be provided that transitions to the time-saving state after the end of the small win game on the condition that the V has not been won, and that opens the special variable winning ball device to make it easier to win a V.

(Means 4) In any one of means 1 to 3,
The variable winning means can be controlled to the first state using different patterns when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, the part shown in FIG. 282-2).
With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to a special state.

(Means 5) In any one of means 1 to 4,
The variable winning means can be controlled to the first state in the same pattern when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately control whether or not to control to a special state, and it is also possible to prevent the special display result that will be derived and displayed from being guessed in advance.

(Means 6) In any one of means 1 to means 5,
the variable winning means includes a movable member (e.g., a V winning opening opening plate) that performs a common operation when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed;
When the first special display result is derived and displayed, the variable winning means is controlled to the first state when the movable member is in a state that obstructs the passage of the game medium to the special area,
When the second special display result is derived and displayed, the variable winning means is controlled to the first state when the movable member is in a state that does not obstruct the passage of the gaming medium into the special area (for example, the part shown in Figure 282-2).
With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to a special state.

(Means 7) In any one of means 1 to 6,
the variable winning means includes a movable member (e.g., a V winning opening opening plate) that performs a common operation when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed;
The period until the variable winning means is controlled to the first state differs between when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, the part shown in Figure 282-13).
With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to a special state.

(Means 8) In any one of means 1 to means 7,
a plurality of types of special display results in which the game medium does not pass through the special area;
the plurality of types of special display results include a special display result that is controlled to the special state when the game medium does not pass through the special area, and a special display result that is not controlled to the special state when the game medium does not pass through the special area,
Different presentations are executed when the special display result controlled to the special state is derived and displayed when the game medium does not pass through the special area and when the special display result not controlled to the special state is derived and displayed when the game medium does not pass through the special area.
With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to a special state.

(Explanation of Characteristic Part 113IW)
Next, the characteristic part 113IW of this embodiment will be described. In this characteristic part 113IW, the game state is controlled to be either a normal state, a time-saving state, or a probability-changing state (also controlled in the time-saving state). In this example, in the time-saving state, the average special-diagram fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, and the average normal-diagram fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of a "normal-diagram hit" in the normal-diagram game is higher compared to the normal state. For example, while the normal-diagram hit probability is 10% in the normal state, the normal-diagram hit probability is increased to 90% in the time-saving state, making it easier for the game ball to win the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port). It is not limited to such a mode, and for example, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be lengthened compared to the normal state, so that the game ball is easier to win the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port).

In addition, in this example, the probability of a jackpot (jackpot probability) is increased in the special state compared to the normal state and the time-saving state. In this example, when the special state is entered, the time-saving state is also entered.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the case where the variable display result is a jackpot and the game is controlled to a guaranteed bonus state or a time-saving state after the jackpot game ends, even if the variable display result is a miss, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state based on the derived display of a time-saving miss pattern.

Furthermore, in this example, the machine may be controlled to a time-saving state (rescue time-saving) after the power is turned on (when the RAM clear process is executed) or after a jackpot occurs, if the next jackpot does not occur even after a predetermined number of variable displays (800 times in this example) have ended. This time-saving time-saving state is provided to rescue players who have played for a long period of time but have not yet won a jackpot (for example, to reduce the amount of money invested in the game), and is a game state called "play time".

In the following, the time-saving state controlled based on the occurrence of a jackpot will be referred to as "time-saving state A" or "time-saving state via jackpot", the time-saving state controlled based on the stopping of the time-saving failure symbol will be referred to as "time-saving state B" or "time-saving state via time-saving failure", and in this example, the time-saving state controlled when the next jackpot does not occur even after the variable display has ended a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) after the power to the gaming machine is turned on (when the RAM clear process is executed) or after the occurrence of a jackpot, "time-saving state C" or "time-saving state via rescue time-saving".

In the time-saving state, (1) control to increase the probability of hitting a normal symbol, (2) control to shorten the time for which the normal symbol changes, (3) control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port), and (4) control to shorten the time for which the special symbol changes can be performed. All of the controls (1) to (4) may be performed, or some of the controls (1) to (4) may not be performed. For example, the controls (1) to (4) performed may be different or the same in the time-saving state via a jackpot, the time-saving state via a missed time-saving state, and the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state.

For example, the probability of a normal hit in the non-time-saving state (normal state) may be set to 100% (no misses on normal), or the probability of a normal miss may be made extremely low so that the probability of a normal hit is effectively 100%, and in the time-saving state, control (1) may not be performed (i.e., the probability of a normal hit may not be changed from the non-time-saving state) and some or all of the controls (2) to (4) may be performed.

The number of fluctuations n before control is exercised in rescue time reduction and the number of time reductions N in rescue time reduction are preferably specified as follows:

2.5P≦n≦3.0P
0.4P≦N≦3.8P
(P = denominator of the jackpot probability ML, n = number of fluctuations, N = number of time reductions)
Specifically, for example, when the probability of a jackpot is 1/300, the number of fluctuations n is 750 to 900, and the number of time-saving times N is 120 to 1140. In this example, the probability of a jackpot for each set value s is Since the number of fluctuations for each setting value is different, ns (setting value s: 1 to 6) is as follows. Since the probability of a big win when the setting value is "1" is about 1/319, the number of fluctuations n1 is The range is 797.5 to 957. When the setting value is "2", the probability of a big win is about 1/310, so the number of fluctuations n2 is 775 to 930. When the setting value is "3", the probability of a big win is Since the probability of a big win is about 1/300, the number of fluctuations n3 is 750 to 900. Since the probability of a big win when the setting value is "4" is about 1/290, the number of fluctuations n4 is 725 to 870. Since the probability of a jackpot when the setting value is "5" is about 1/280, the number of fluctuations n5 is 700 to 840. Since the probability of a jackpot when the setting value is "6" is about 1/270, The number of fluctuations n6 is 675 to 810. The following description will be given on the assumption that the number of fluctuations n is set to "800", which can be applicable to any of the set values. The time-saving count N is set to "800", which may be the case even when the setting value is set to "1".

Note that although we have set a value for the number of fluctuations n that can be applied regardless of which setting value is set, it is sufficient to set a value that can be applied when the setting value "1" with the lowest probability of winning is set (as described above, the number of fluctuations n1 is 797.5 to 957). In other words, a value such as "900" may be set as the number of fluctuations n.

Similarly, the number of time-saving times N is set to a value that can be applied regardless of which setting value is set, but it is sufficient to set a value that can be applied when the setting value "1", which has the lowest probability of winning, is set.

In this example, the number of fluctuations n and the number of time-saving times N are the same value of 800, but the number of fluctuations n may be greater than the number of time-saving times N, or conversely, the number of fluctuations n may be less than the number of time-saving times N.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
FIG. 283-1 and FIG. 283-2 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature part 113IW. Among these, FIG. 283-1(A) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table A for the big win excluding the rescue time-saving entry fluctuation. Also, FIG. 283-1(B) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table B for the miss in the normal state. Also, FIG. 283-1(C) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table C for the miss in the time-saving state controlled via the big win. Also, FIG. 283-1(D) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table D for the miss in the time-saving state controlled via the time-saving miss.

Also, FIG. 283-1 (E) shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table E for a miss during a time-saving state controlled via rescue time-saving. Also, FIG. 283-2 (F) and (G) show specific examples of fluctuation pattern tables F and G for a miss within 10 fluctuations immediately before a rescue time-saving state. Of these, the fluctuation pattern table F shown in FIG. 283-2 (F) is a fluctuation pattern table for immediately before a rescue time-saving state that is selected when the number of reserved memories (for example, the combined number of reserved memories) is 3 or less. Also, the fluctuation pattern table F shown in FIG. 283-2 (G) is a fluctuation pattern table for immediately before a rescue time-saving state that is selected when the number of reserved memories (for example, the combined number of reserved memories) is 4 or more.

If a miss occurs within the 10 fluctuations immediately prior to the rescue time reduction, the fluctuation pattern is selected using fluctuation pattern tables F and G shown in Figures 283-2 (F) and (G). However, during the period from when the RAM is cleared to when a jackpot occurs, the fluctuation pattern is selected using fluctuation pattern table B shown in Figure 283-1 (B) even if the miss occurs within the 10 fluctuations immediately prior to the rescue time reduction.

In addition, FIG. 283-2 (H) shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table H for when a player misses during a high probability state. However, in this example, even if the player is in a high probability state or a time-saving state, if the number of reserved memories is not 1 or more (if there are no reserved memories), the fluctuation pattern is determined using fluctuation pattern table B.

Furthermore, Figures 283-2 (I) and (J) show specific examples of fluctuation pattern tables I and J for misses during rescue time-saving entry fluctuations. Of these, fluctuation pattern table I shown in Figure 283-2 (I) is the fluctuation pattern table selected when in a non-time-saving state (normal state). Furthermore, fluctuation pattern table J shown in Figure 283-2 (J) is the fluctuation pattern table selected when in a time-saving state.

In addition, if the rescue time shortening entry fluctuation results in a miss, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern tables I and J shown in Figures 283-2 (I) and (J).However, during the period from when the RAM is cleared to when a jackpot is hit, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern table B shown in Figure 283-1 (B) even if the rescue time shortening entry fluctuation results in a miss.

Furthermore, Figures 283-2 (K) and (L) show specific examples of fluctuation pattern tables K and L for jackpots during rescue time-saving entry fluctuations. Of these, the fluctuation pattern table K shown in Figure 283-2 (K) is the fluctuation pattern table selected when in a non-time-saving state (normal state). Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern table L shown in Figure 283-2 (L) is the fluctuation pattern table selected when in a time-saving state.

When a jackpot occurs during a rescue time short entry fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern tables K and L shown in Figures 283-2 (K) and (L). However, during the period from when the RAM is cleared to when a jackpot occurs, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern table A shown in Figure 283-1 (A) even when a jackpot occurs during a rescue time short entry fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 283-1(A), in this example, when a jackpot is hit, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PB2-1 (normal reach), PB2-2 (super reach α), and PB2-3 (super reach β). The fluctuation pattern for a jackpot has a special chart fluctuation time that is 10,000 ms longer than the fluctuation pattern for a miss that performs the same reach effect. This is because after a reach effect of the same length as the miss fluctuation is performed, a congratulatory effect is performed to celebrate the jackpot, or a re-draw effect is performed to make it look like a new lottery is being held (for example, a re-draw effect is performed in which the jackpot symbol showing a 10R jackpot A is temporarily stopped and changed to a jackpot symbol showing a 10R jackpot B).

Also, as shown in FIG. 283-1 (B), in this example, if a miss occurs during normal conditions, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in FIG. 283-1(C), in this example, if a miss occurs during the time-saving state controlled via a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in FIG. 283-1 (D), in this example, when a time-saving state controlled via a time-saving miss occurs, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in FIG. 283-1 (E), in this example, if there is a deviation during the time-saving state controlled via rescue time-saving, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

As shown in Figures 283-1(C), 283-1(D), and 283-1(E) in this example, in the time-saving state, the probability that fluctuation patterns PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation), and PA1-4 (ultra-ultra-shortened fluctuation) are determined is high, and the average fluctuation time is shorter than in the normal state. Furthermore, even in the same time-saving state, in the time-saving state controlled via a time-saving miss, the selection probability of fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation) is 80%, which is higher than in the time-saving state controlled via a jackpot, and the average fluctuation time is shorter. In addition, in the time-saving state controlled via a rescue time-saving, the selection probability of fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (ultra-ultra-shortened fluctuation) is 99%, which is higher than in the time-saving state controlled via a time-saving miss or a jackpot, and the average fluctuation time is even shorter.

Also, as shown in Figure 283-2 (F), in this example, if a miss occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately prior to the rescue time reduction, if the number of reserved memories (e.g., the combined number of reserved memories) is 3 or less, the fluctuation pattern will be determined to be one of fluctuation patterns PA1-1 (normal fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β), with the probability of it being determined to be fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) being as high as 90%. Also, as shown in FIG. 283-2 (G), in this example, if the number of reserved memories (e.g., the combined number of reserved memories) is 4 or more and the miss occurs within 10 fluctuations before the rescue time reduction occurs, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β), with the probability of being determined to be fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation) being as high as 90%.

Also, as shown in FIG. 283-2 (H), in this example, if a miss occurs during a special probability state, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in Figures 283-1 (C) and (E), when determining the variation pattern of the miss variation, the selection rate of the variation pattern having a shorter variation time is higher for the time-saving state that has gone through the rescue time-saving state than for the time-saving state that has gone through the jackpot game state. This makes it possible to suppress the decline in interest when the rescue time-saving state is reached after playing for a long period of time.

Also, as shown in Figures 283-1 (C) and (E), when determining the variation pattern of the miss variation, the selection rate of the variation pattern with reach effects is lower in the time-saving state that has passed through the rescue time-saving state than in the time-saving state that has passed through the jackpot game state. This makes it possible to suppress the decline in interest when the rescue time-saving state is reached after playing for a long period of time.

As shown in Figure 283-2 (H), in this example, during the special probability state, there is a high probability of 90% that the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation) is determined, and the average fluctuation time is even shorter than during the time-shortened state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 283-2(I), in this example, if the rescue time-saving entry fluctuation results in a miss in a non-time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (miss to enter time-saving). If fluctuation pattern PA3-1 is determined, a time-saving entry presentation is performed to notify the player of a transition (entry) to a time-saving state via rescue time-saving.

Also, as shown in FIG. 283-2 (J), in this example, if the rescue time-saving entry fluctuation in the time-saving state results in a miss, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be fluctuation pattern PA3-2 (miss for time-saving promotion). If fluctuation pattern PA3-2 is determined, a time-saving promotion effect is performed to notify the user of a transition (promotion) to a time-saving state via rescue time-saving. Hereinafter, the transition from a time-saving state via a time-saving miss to a time-saving state via rescue time-saving may be referred to as "promotion."

The time-saving entry effect and the time-saving promotion effect are both effects that are performed when the player is controlled to the time-saving state C, but the content of the effects is different. Specifically, the time-saving entry effect displays a character string on the image display device 5 indicating that the player will be controlled to the time-saving state C (see FIG. 283-12 (G)), while the time-saving promotion effect displays a character string on the image display device 5 indicating that the player will be controlled to the time-saving state C and promoted (see FIG. 283-15 (D)). In addition, the time-saving entry effect displays a right-hit notification image to promote right-hitting (see FIG. 283-12 (H)), while the time-saving promotion effect does not display the right-hit notification image (see FIG. 283-15 (D)). In this way, the notification mode of the player being controlled to the time-saving state C is different between the case where the player is controlled from the normal state to the time-saving state C and the case where the player is controlled (promoted) from the time-saving state B to the time-saving state C. This gives players a special feeling when the time-saving state is upgraded, which can increase interest.

The notification manner of control to time-saving state C may be the same when controlling from the normal state to time-saving state C and when controlling (promoting) from time-saving state B to time-saving state C. For example, in either case, variation pattern PA3-1 may be selected and a time-saving entry performance may be performed. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in the number of variation patterns and performance data, and to save on memory capacity.

Also, as shown in FIG. 283-2 (K), in this example, if a jackpot occurs in a non-time-saving state due to a time-saving rescue entry fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA3-3 (time-saving pseudo-jackpot). When fluctuation pattern PA3-3 is determined, a time-saving entry effect is performed to notify the player of the transition (entry) to a time-saving state via the time-saving rescue state, and then a jackpot is notified and a congratulatory effect or a re-draw effect is performed. Note that the effect performed after the time-saving entry effect may be an effect that can be performed when other fluctuation patterns are selected, but it may also be an effect that is not performed when other fluctuation patterns are selected, which can give the player a sense of surprise and specialness.

Also, as shown in FIG. 283-2 (L), in this example, if a jackpot occurs in a non-time-saving state due to a time-saving rescue entry fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA3-4 (time-saving promotion pseudo jackpot). When fluctuation pattern PA3-4 is determined, a time-saving promotion effect is performed to notify the player of the transition (promotion) to a time-saving state via a time-saving rescue, and then a jackpot is notified and a congratulatory effect or a re-draw effect is performed. Note that the effect performed after the time-saving promotion effect may be an effect that can be performed when other fluctuation patterns are selected, but it may also be an effect that is not performed when other fluctuation patterns are selected, which can give the player a sense of surprise and specialness.

Note that the length of the fluctuation time is different between when the rescue time shortening fluctuation results in a miss and when the rescue time shortening fluctuation results in a jackpot, but it is also possible to select a fluctuation pattern with the same length of fluctuation time, or a common fluctuation pattern. This can reduce memory capacity.

Note that the method for setting the fluctuation pattern table shown in Figures 283-1 and 283-2 is just one example, and various configurations are possible.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 283-1 (E), during the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern PA1-4, which is an extremely short fluctuation of 1.5 seconds, is high, and the speed at which the fluctuation display is consumed is fast, so there are few types of preview effects and pre-reading preview effects that can be executed. For example, during the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, effects such as displaying an effect image at the edge of the display screen of the image display device 5, lighting up lamps or LEDs, outputting a specified sound effect or a sound that stops the fluctuation that is different from normal are executed.

In addition, this example shows a case where a fluctuation pattern table E is provided specifically for the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, but it is also possible to configure it so that, for example, without providing a fluctuation pattern table E specifically for the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, the fluctuation pattern is determined using a fluctuation pattern table C (see FIG. 283-1 (C)) for the time-saving state via a jackpot.

In addition, in this example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10 or less, the variation pattern table F or G (see FIG. 283-2 (F) or (G)) is switched to, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the variation pattern table may be configured to switch so that the reach rate gradually decreases as the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached decreases, or the variation pattern table may be configured to switch so that the remaining number of fluctuations can be suggested only when the number of remaining fluctuations is a dividing line such as 100 or 200.

(Test terminal treatment)
283-3 and 283-4 are flow charts showing an example of processing related to the output of each test signal in the test terminal processing. Note that the test terminal processing is executed in the game control timer interrupt processing.

In the test terminal process, the CPU 103 first clears the bits of each signal in the test signal output buffer of the output port buffer (step 113IWS31). Then, if it is during the jackpot pattern determination period (Y in step 113IWS32), during the jackpot period including the fanfare period and the ending period (Y in step 113IWS33), or if any of the time-saving flags are set (Y in step 113IWS34), it sets the bit of the launch position designation signal 3 in the test signal output buffer (step 113IWS35). The time-saving flags include a time-saving flag A indicating time-saving state A, a first time-saving flag B indicating time-saving state B, and a time-saving flag C indicating time-saving state C.

If it is not during the jackpot pattern determination period, not during the jackpot period including the fanfare period and ending period, and none of the time-saving flags are set (N in step 113IWS34), the bit of the launch position designation signal 1 in the test signal output buffer is set (step 113IWS36).

When a jackpot symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the normal state, the launch position designation signal 3 is output when the symbol stop period begins (Y in step 113IWS32), whereas when a time-saving loss symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the normal state, the time-saving flag B is set when the symbol stop period of the time-saving loss symbol ends, and the launch position designation signal 3 is output when the symbol stop period ends (Y in step 113IWS34). In other words, the timing of switching the launch position designation signal is configured to differ depending on the trigger for controlling the transition to the time-saving state.

In addition, in this embodiment, by switching the output of the launch position designation signals 1 and 3, information indicating which playing style the player is expected to use can be notified to an external device (test device), but by setting/resetting a single launch position designation signal, information indicating which playing style the player is expected to use can be notified to an external device (test device). For example, if N is found in step 113IWS34, the process proceeds to step 113IWS37 without processing step 113IWS36, or the process of step 113IWS31 is not performed, and instead of processing step 113IWS36, the process clears the bit of the launch position designation signal 3, so that information indicating which playing style the player is expected to use can be notified to an external device (test device) depending on whether the bit of the launch position designation signal 3 is set.

In addition, if the first special symbol is in the winning symbol confirmation period (Y in step 113IWS37A), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 1 signal (step 113IWS37B) and sets the bit of symbol 1 data bit2 (step 113IWS37C).

Also, when the first special symbol is in the period in which the time-saving failure symbol is confirmed (Y in step 113IWS37D), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 1 time-saving failure signal (step 113IWS37E) and sets the bit of the symbol 1 data bit1 (step 113IWS37F). Note that the processing of steps 113IWS37E and S37F can be output even if the rescue time-saving count counter has reached 0. As described below, when the time-saving failure symbol is displayed as stopped during a rescue time-saving entry fluctuation, the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving state is given priority over the time-saving state via the time-saving failure, but even in this case, a signal indicating that the time-saving failure symbol has been displayed as stopped is appropriately output to the outside.

In addition, if the first special symbol is in a pattern confirmation period without time reduction (Y in step 113IWS37G), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the symbol 1 data bit 0 (step 113IWS37H).

In addition, if the jackpot pattern determination period for the second special pattern is in progress (Y in step 113IWS38A), the CPU 103 sets the bit for the special pattern 2 hit signal (step 113IWS38B) and sets the bit for pattern 2 data bit2 (step 113IWS38C).

Also, if the second special symbol is in the period in which the time-saving failure symbol is confirmed (Y in step 113IWS38D), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 2 time-saving failure signal (step 113IWS38E) and sets the bit of the symbol 2 data bit1 (step 113IWS38F). Note that the processing of steps 113IWS38E and S38F can be output even if the rescue time-saving count counter has reached 0. As described below, when the time-saving failure symbol is displayed as stopped during a rescue time-saving entry fluctuation, the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving state is given priority over the time-saving state via the time-saving failure, but even in this case, a signal indicating that the time-saving failure symbol is displayed as stopped is appropriately output to the outside.

In addition, if the second special symbol is in a pattern confirmation period without time reduction (Y in step 113IWS38G), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the symbol 2 data bit 0 (step 113IWS38H).

In addition, when the number of rescue time reductions is reached based on the variation of the first special symbol (Y in step 113IWS39A), the CPU 103 sets a bit of a special symbol 1 rescue time reach signal (step 113IWS39B). In addition, when the number of rescue time reductions is reached based on the variation of the second special symbol (Y in step 113IWS39C), the CPU 103 sets a bit of a special symbol 2 rescue time reach signal (step 113IWS39D). Specifically, when the time reduction flag C is set, a flag is set depending on whether the data "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, and based on the flag, it is possible to specify which special symbol variation is the basis for which rescue time reduction. In this example, the special pattern 1 rescue count reaching signal is output instantaneously when the rescue time reduction count is reached based on the variation of the first special pattern, but the special pattern 1 rescue count reaching signal may be output continuously during the period in which the time reduction state via rescue time reduction is controlled based on the variation of the first special pattern. Similarly, in this example, the special pattern 1 rescue count reaching signal is output instantaneously when the rescue time reduction count is reached based on the variation of the second special pattern, but the special pattern 2 rescue count reaching signal may be output continuously during the period in which the time reduction state via rescue time reduction is controlled based on the variation of the second special pattern.

If the high probability state is being controlled based on the variation of the first special symbol (Y in step 113IWS40A), the CPU 103 sets a bit for the special symbol 1 high probability state signal (step 113IWS40B). If the high probability state is being controlled based on the variation of the second special symbol (Y in step 113IWS40C), the CPU 103 sets a bit for the special symbol 2 high probability state signal (step 113IWS40D). Specifically, a flag is set depending on whether the data "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer when the high probability state flag is set, and it is possible to specify based on the flag which special symbol variation has been used to control the high probability state.

If the time-saving state is being controlled based on the variation of the first special symbol (Y in step 113IWS41A), the CPU 103 sets a bit for the special symbol 1 variation time-saving state signal (step 113IWS41B). If the time-saving state is being controlled based on the variation of the second special symbol (Y in step 113IWS41C), the CPU 103 sets a bit for the special symbol 2 variation time-saving state signal (step 113IWS41D). Specifically, when the time-saving flag is set, a flag is set depending on whether the data "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, and based on the flag, it is possible to specify which special symbol variation has been used to control the probability variable state.

Furthermore, if the time-saving flag A is set (Y in step 113IWS42A), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the easy-to-win state designation signal 1 (step 113IWS42B). If the time-saving flag B is set (Y in step 113IWS42C), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the easy-to-win state designation signal 2 (step 113IWS42D). If the time-saving flag C is set (Y in step 113IWS42E), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the easy-to-win state designation signal 3 (step 113IWS42F). As described below, when a jackpot occurs in the time-saving state, the time-saving flags are reset when the jackpot fluctuation stops, and the time-saving flag A can be set when the jackpot ends. Therefore, when a 10R jackpot A occurs in the time-saving state A, the easy-to-win state designation signal 1 is temporarily turned off during the period from when the jackpot fluctuation stops to when the jackpot ends.

Then, the CPU 103 outputs the contents of the test signal output buffer to the output port (step 113IWS43), thereby transmitting each signal as a test signal to the test signal terminal. By outputting the test signals in this manner, the internal state of the gaming machine can be identified on the testing device side.

(Customer waiting demo performance control process)
FIG. 283-5 is a flow chart showing the customer waiting demo performance control process. The customer waiting demo performance control process is a process that is performed after step S161 in the performance control process and before steps S170 to S177. In other words, the customer waiting demo performance control process is a process that is performed every time the performance control process is performed. In the customer waiting demo performance control process, when 10 seconds have passed since the performance control CPU 120 received the customer waiting demo designation command, the performance control CPU 120 performs a telop display execution lottery process to determine whether or not to execute a telop display performance (Y, S251 of step 113IWS250). Specifically, the performance of the telop display performance is determined by using a telop display execution lottery table according to the set value.

Figures 283-6 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the caption display execution lottery table. In the caption display execution lottery table, a judgment value corresponding to whether or not a caption display effect will be executed is assigned for each remaining number of times until the rescue time reduction, but in the example shown in Figures 283-6 (A) and (B), the ratio of the assigned judgment value is shown to simplify the explanation. The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for the caption display execution lottery and determines the decision item to which a judgment value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

Figure 283-6 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the caption display execution lottery table used when the setting value "1" is set. Figure 283-6 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the caption display execution lottery table used when the setting value "6" is set. The caption display execution lottery table used when the setting values "2" to "5" are set is not shown.

When the caption display execution lottery table (set value "1") shown in FIG. 283-6 (A) is used, if the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 201 or more, it is determined 30% of the time that the caption display effect will be executed, and 70% of the time that the caption display effect will not be executed. If the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 101 to 200, it is determined 40% of the time that the caption display effect will be executed, and 60% of the time that the caption display effect will not be executed. If the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 11 to 100, it is determined 50% of the time that the caption display effect will be executed, and 50% of the time that the caption display effect will not be executed. If the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less, it is determined 55% of the time that the caption display effect will be executed, and 45% of the time that the caption display effect will not be executed.

When the caption display execution lottery table (set value "6") shown in FIG. 283-6 (B) is used, if the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 201 or more, it is determined 60% of the time that the caption display effect will be executed, and 40% of the time that the caption display effect will not be executed. If the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 101 to 200, it is determined 70% of the time that the caption display effect will be executed, and 30% of the time that the caption display effect will not be executed. If the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 11 to 100, it is determined 80% of the time that the caption display effect will be executed, and 20% of the time that the caption display effect will not be executed. If the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less, it is determined 85% of the time that the caption display effect will be executed, and 15% of the time that the caption display effect will not be executed.

In this way, the system is configured so that the rate at which the caption display effect is executed is higher when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less than when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 11 or more. This increases interest by making the player look forward to the number of times the rescue time reduction can be changed, and also prevents the player from suffering a disadvantage due to ending play just before the number of times the rescue time reduction can be changed is reached.

In this way, the system is configured to execute the telop display effect at a higher rate when the setting value is set to "6" than when the setting value is set to "1." This allows the player to predict the setting value based on the frequency with which the telop display effect is executed.

The system is also configured so that the fewer the number of remaining changes until the rescue time-saving feature is activated, the higher the rate at which the caption display effect is executed. This allows the player to predict the number of remaining changes until the rescue time-saving feature is activated based on the frequency at which the caption display effect is executed.

The number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction can be specified by the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. In other words, before the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is received indicating that there are 200 times until the rescue time reduction, the lottery is held assuming that the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 201 or more, and after the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is received indicating that there are 200 times until the rescue time reduction but before the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is received indicating that there are 100 times until the rescue time reduction, the lottery is held assuming that the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 101 to 200, and after the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is received indicating that there are 100 times until the rescue time reduction, the lottery is held assuming that the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 100 or less.

When it is decided to execute a subtitle display effect, the effect control CPU 120 performs a subtitle display mode determination lottery process to determine the mode of the subtitle display effect (step 113IWS253). Specifically, the subtitle display mode determination lottery table according to the set value is used to determine the mode of the subtitle display effect.

Figures 283-6 (C) and (D) are explanatory diagrams showing the caption display mode determination lottery table. In the caption display mode determination lottery table, a judgment value corresponding to the performance mode of the caption display performance (the color of the frame of the caption display area; blue, red) is assigned for each remaining number of times until the rescue time reduction, but in the example shown in Figures 283-6 (C) and (D), the ratio of the assigned judgment value is shown to simplify the explanation. The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for the caption display mode determination lottery and determines the decision item to which a judgment value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

Figure 283-6 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing the caption display mode determination lottery table used when the setting value "1" is set. Figure 283-6 (D) is an explanatory diagram showing the caption display mode determination lottery table used when the setting value "6" is set. The caption display mode determination lottery table used when the setting values "2" to "5" are set is not shown.

When the telop display mode determination lottery table (set value "1") shown in FIG. 283-6(C) is used, if the number of remaining times until the rescue time reduction is 201 or more, the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be red at a rate of 40%, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be blue at a rate of 60%. If the number of remaining times until the rescue time reduction is 101 to 200, the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be red at a rate of 70%, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be blue at a rate of 30%. If the number of remaining times until the rescue time reduction is 11 to 100, the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be red at a rate of 80%, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be blue at a rate of 20%. If the number of remaining times until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less, the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be red at a rate of 85%, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be blue at a rate of 15%.

When the telop display mode determination lottery table (set value "6") shown in FIG. 283-6 (D) is used, if the number of remaining times until the rescue time reduction is 201 or more, the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be red at a rate of 70%, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be blue at a rate of 30%. If the number of remaining times until the rescue time reduction is 101 to 200, the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be red at a rate of 80%, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be blue at a rate of 20%. If the number of remaining times until the rescue time reduction is 11 to 100, the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be red at a rate of 90%, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be blue at a rate of 10%. If the number of remaining times until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less, the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be red at a rate of 95%, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be blue at a rate of 5%.

In this way, the frame of the caption display area is configured to be displayed in red more frequently when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10 or less than when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is reached is 11 or more. This increases interest by making the player look forward to reaching the number of times the rescue time reduction can be changed.

In this way, the frame of the telop display area is configured to be displayed in red more frequently when the setting value is set to "6" than when the setting value is set to "1." This allows the player to predict the setting value based on the presentation mode of the telop display presentation.

In addition, the fewer the number of remaining changes until the rescue time-saving feature is activated, the higher the percentage of the frame of the telop display area that is displayed in red. This allows the player to predict the number of remaining changes until the rescue time-saving feature is activated based on the presentation mode of the telop display presentation.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 starts a caption display performance that displays the caption display area in the determined manner (step 113IWS254).

In addition, if three minutes have passed since receiving the customer waiting demo designation command, the performance control CPU 120 starts displaying the demo movie (Y in step 113IWS255, S256).

The captions and demo movie displayed here will end when the game ball passes through the starting hole, the next variation begins, or a player operation is detected.

Figure 283-7 is a flowchart showing an example of the advance notice setting process. In the advance notice setting process shown in Figure 283-7, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a new start winning command has been received (step 113 IWS 1011), and if not, ends the advance notice setting process.

The start winning command is a command that indicates the winning judgment result obtained when the game control microcomputer 100 extracts a random number value to determine the display result (including the type of jackpot) and the fluctuation pattern when a start winning occurs in the winning ball device 6A or the variable winning ball device 6B, and predicts and judges the display result and the fluctuation pattern based on the extracted random number value. The start winning command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when a start winning occurs in the winning ball device 6A or the variable winning ball device 6B. Examples of start winning commands include a pattern designation command, a fluctuation category command, a start winning designation command, and a combined reserved memory number designation command.

The pattern designation command is a presentation control command that indicates whether or not a winning combination will result in a jackpot and the type of winning combination. The variable category command is a presentation control command that indicates the range of judgment values that the value of the random number for determining the type of variable pattern falls within (the result of determining the type of variable pattern). The start winning combination command is a presentation control command that indicates which of the first and second start winning combinations has been selected as the start winning combination. The combined reserved memory number designation command is a presentation control command that specifies the total number (combined reserved memory number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number.

In this embodiment, it is possible to determine, based on the fluctuation category command, whether the fluctuation is accompanied by a super reach, a normal reach, a pseudo-consecutive, or if it is a pseudo-consecutive, how many times the fluctuation is repeated, or whether it is undetermined. "Undetermined" refers to a case where the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determination random number obtained at the time of the start winning differs depending on the number of reserved memories at the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the start winning.

The start-win command received from the game control microcomputer 100 is temporarily stored in a start-win command storage area formed in RAM. Specifically, in the command analysis process (step S75), the performance control CPU 120 stores the commands in the first free storage area of the start-win command storage area in the order in which they were received. Then, each time the display of the decorative pattern begins to change (each time a combined reserved memory count subtraction command is received), each command stored in the start-win command storage area is deleted from the one stored in the first storage area 1, and the contents of the start-win command storage area are shifted.

If a new start winning command is received in step 113IWS1011, the performance control CPU 120 starts displaying a new pending display (step 113IWS1012). Then, it is determined whether or not a look-ahead flag indicating that a look-ahead preview performance is being executed is set (step 113IWS1013), and if it is set, the look-ahead preview setting process ends. If it is not set, it is determined whether or not it is controlled to a time-saving state (step 113IWS1014), and if it is controlled to a time-saving state, it proceeds to step 113IWS1016.

If the time-saving state is not being controlled, the number of reserved memories is compared with the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving state (step 113IWS1015), and if the number of reserved memories is greater than the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving state, the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. If the number of reserved memories is equal to or less than the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving state, it is determined whether or not the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving state is 10 or less (step 113IWS1016). If the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving state is 10 or less, the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. If the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving state is not 10 or less, a pre-reading performance execution lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice performance. Specifically, a pre-reading notice performance execution lottery table is used to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice performance.

In the lottery table for the execution of the pre-reading preview performance, a judgment value is assigned for each winning judgment result (jackpot, miss with time-saving feature, miss without time-saving feature) as to whether or not the pre-reading preview performance will be executed, and if so, the performance mode (first mode, second mode) of the pre-reading preview performance.

The first aspect of the look-ahead preview performance is a performance in which the number of changes until the predicted target of the look-ahead preview performance starts to change is displayed in red as a countdown, and the second aspect of the look-ahead preview performance is a performance in which the number of changes until the predicted target of the look-ahead preview performance starts to change is displayed in blue as a countdown.

For example, if the winning judgment result is a jackpot, there is a 70% chance that the first mode of pre-reading preview performance will be performed, and a 30% chance that the pre-reading preview performance will not be performed. If the winning judgment result is a miss with no time reduction, there is a 40% chance that the second mode of pre-reading preview performance will be performed, and a 60% chance that the pre-reading preview performance will not be performed. If the winning judgment result is a miss with no time reduction, there is a 4% chance that the first mode of pre-reading preview performance will be performed, a 6% chance that the second mode of pre-reading preview performance will be performed, and a 90% chance that the pre-reading preview performance will not be performed.

In this way, the first mode of the look-ahead preview performance can be performed in both cases of a jackpot and a miss with no time-saving feature, so it is a look-ahead preview performance that suggests control will be made to a jackpot. Also, the second mode of the look-ahead preview performance can be performed in both cases of a miss with no time-saving feature and a miss with no time-saving feature, so it is a look-ahead preview performance that suggests control will be made to a miss with no time-saving feature.

If it is decided to execute a look-ahead preview performance, the performance control CPU 120 displays the look-ahead display area and countdown display on the image display unit 5 (step 113IWS1019) and sets the look-ahead flag (step 113IWS1020).

In this way, by processing step 113IWS1015, when the number of reserved memories is greater than the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction, that is, when the number of reserved memories is greater than the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction, the execution of a look-ahead preview performance is restricted (prohibited) for a reserved memory that is stored before the rescue time reduction change is reached and corresponds to a change that occurs after control is given to a time reduction state via the rescue time reduction. This makes it possible to restrict the execution of look-ahead preview performances that span before and after the control of the rescue time reduction, and to avoid malfunctions in the performance.

In addition, by performing the processing of step 113IWS1016, if the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10 or less, the execution of the look-ahead preview performance is restricted (prohibited). This prevents the countdown performance corresponding to the control of the rescue time reduction and the look-ahead preview performance from being executed at the same time.

For example, in a gaming machine capable of displaying a countdown when the number of times the rescue time reduction has been reached and a countdown display as a look-ahead preview effect, if the countdown display when the number of times the rescue time reduction has been reached and the countdown display as a look-ahead preview effect are allowed to be executed in an overlapping manner, it is expected that the presentation will become complicated. In particular, if the presentation showing the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction and the look-ahead preview effect both involve countdown displays, it will be difficult to know which countdown display to pay attention to, which is likely to reduce the presentation effect. Therefore, by configuring the presentation showing the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction and the look-ahead preview effect not to be executed in an overlapping manner, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the presentation effect.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 283-8 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 280. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads out the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 113IWS801). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop pattern) of the decorative pattern according to the variable pattern command read out in step 113IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 113IWS802). That is, the performance control CPU 120 executes the process of step 113IWS802, thereby realizing a display result determination means that determines the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the stop pattern of the decorative pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. In addition, when a pseudo consecutive win is specified by the variation pattern command, the performance control CPU 120 also determines a chance pattern (for example, a combination of patterns that are not a reach but are one pattern away from the jackpot pattern, such as "223" or "445") as a provisional stop pattern during the pseudo consecutive win in step 113IWS802. The performance control CPU 120 stores data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. In addition, in step 113IWS802, the performance control CPU 120 may determine whether or not a jackpot has been reached based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop pattern of the decorative pattern based only on the variation pattern command.

In step 113IWS802, if the received display result designation command indicates "10R jackpot A", the performance control CPU 120 determines a decorative pattern combination in which three symbols are the same even number symbols as the stopping symbols (10R jackpot A symbol). Also, if the received display result designation command indicates "10R jackpot B", the performance control CPU 120 determines a decorative pattern combination in which three symbols are the same odd number symbols as the stopping symbols (10R jackpot B symbol).

In the case of a "miss", a combination of decorative symbols other than those mentioned above is determined. However, if a reach performance is involved, a combination of decorative symbols where the two symbols on the left and right are aligned is determined. Also, even if there is a miss, if it is a "time-saving miss", a combination of decorative symbols of the losing symbols including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) is determined. Note that the system may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of the losing symbols including different special symbols (for example, a heart-shaped symbol or a diamond symbol) depending on the type of time-saving.

The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for determining the stopping pattern, and determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern using a stopping pattern determination table in which data indicating the combination of decorative patterns is associated with a numerical value. In other words, the stopping pattern is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative patterns that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

As for decorative patterns, stopping patterns that evoke a jackpot (a combination of patterns in which the left, center, and right are all the same) are called jackpot patterns. Stopping patterns that evoke a loss are called loss patterns.

The performance control CPU 120 also performs a preview performance setting process to set a preview performance that indicates the reliability of controlling to a jackpot game state (step 113IWS802A). Specifically, in the preview performance setting process, a preview performance execution lottery table according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is used to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance, and if it is decided to execute a preview performance, a preview performance mode determination lottery table according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is used to determine the performance mode of the preview performance to be executed, and sets the execution of the preview performance of the determined performance mode. Then, although not shown in the figure, the process table including the preview performance set here is selected in steps 113IWS804, S806, and S807 described later.

In the preview performance execution lottery table, a judgment value corresponding to whether or not a preview performance will be executed is assigned for each variable display result (jackpot, miss). The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for the preview performance execution lottery and determines the decision item to which a judgment value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

When the preview performance execution lottery table (number of remaining changes until rescue time reduction > 10) is used, if the variable display result is a jackpot, there is a 70% chance that the preview performance will be executed, and a 30% chance that the preview performance will not be executed. If the variable display result is a miss, there is a 10% chance that the preview performance will be executed, and a 90% chance that the preview performance will not be executed.

When the preview performance execution lottery table (number of remaining changes until rescue time reduction ≦ 10) is used, if the variable display result is a jackpot, there is a 70% chance that the preview performance will be executed, and a 30% chance that the preview performance will not be executed. If the variable display result is a miss, there is a 1% chance that the preview performance will be executed, and a 99% chance that the preview performance will not be executed.

In this way, the configuration makes it easier to execute a preview performance when the fluctuation indicates a big win than when the fluctuation indicates a miss.

In addition, in this way, the configuration is such that the probability of executing a preview performance when the variable display result is a miss is lower when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less than when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is more than 10. This makes it possible to suppress a decrease in interest during the period when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less.

In the preview performance mode determination lottery table, a judgment value corresponding to the preview performance mode (color of the character to be displayed; blue, red) is assigned for each variable display result (jackpot, miss). The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for the preview performance mode determination lottery and determines the decision item to which a judgment value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

When the preview performance mode determination lottery table is used, if the variable display result is a jackpot, red is determined as the color of the characters displayed in the preview performance 70% of the time, and blue is determined as the color of the characters displayed in the preview performance 30% of the time. If the variable display result is a miss, red is determined as the color of the characters displayed in the preview performance 10% of the time, and blue is determined as the color of the characters displayed in the preview performance 90% of the time.

When the preview performance mode determination lottery table is used, if the variable display result is a jackpot, red is determined as the color of the characters displayed in the preview performance 70% of the time, and blue is determined as the color of the characters displayed in the preview performance 30% of the time. If the variable display result is a miss, red is determined as the color of the characters displayed in the preview performance 1% of the time, and blue is determined as the color of the characters displayed in the preview performance 99% of the time.

In this way, red is more likely to be selected as the color of the character displayed in the preview performance in the case of a jackpot fluctuation than in the case of a miss fluctuation.

In addition, in this way, red is more likely to be selected as the character color when the variable display result is a miss when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less than when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is more than 10. This makes it possible to suppress a decrease in interest during the period when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less.

Next, if the look-ahead flag is set, the performance control CPU 120 updates the countdown display in the look-ahead preview performance (steps 113IWS802B, S802C). Then, it checks whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, or 700 (step 113IWS803). Note that whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, or 700 can be determined, for example, by checking whether a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command has been received.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, or 700, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table including a promotional performance corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached (step 113IWS804). For example, if the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is "01 (H)" (if the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached is 100), a process table including a promotional performance corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations "100 times" is selected. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is "07 (H)" (if the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached is 700), a process table including a promotional performance corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations "800 times" is selected. Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS808.

If the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs is not 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, or 700, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs is 10 or less (step 113IWS805). Note that whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs is 10 or less can be determined, for example, by checking whether the value of the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 1 designation command is 10 or less.

If the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table including a countdown performance and an effect performance according to the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached (step 113IWS806). For example, if the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 1 designation command is "0A (H)" (if the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10), a process table including a countdown performance according to the count number "10" until the rescue time reduction is reached is selected. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 1 designation command is "01 (H)" (if the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 1), a process table including a countdown performance according to the count number "1" until the rescue time reduction is reached is selected. Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS808.

In this example, the remaining number of changes until the rescue time reduction occurs is determined based on the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command and rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, and a teasing effect or a countdown effect is executed, but this is not limited to the above. For example, when a background designation command that designates a background image is transmitted, the EXT data of the background designation command may be set to a value corresponding to the remaining number of changes until the rescue time reduction occurs and transmitted. The performance control CPU 120 may then determine the remaining number of changes based on the EXT data of the received background designation command, and execute a teasing effect or a countdown effect.

In addition, in this example, even if the number of fluctuations for the rescue time reduction is reached, if a jackpot fluctuation occurs, the same fluctuation pattern for a jackpot as usual is used, but this is not limited to this, and the fluctuation display may be configured to be executed using a fluctuation pattern that specifies a reach performance with a short fluctuation time.

In addition, in this example, if the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10 or less, an effect presentation is performed in which an effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. For example, the fewer the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached, the wider the display range of the effect image on the image display device 5 becomes.

In addition, the processing of steps 113IWS803 to S806 can be performed regardless of the game state. This makes it possible to execute hype effects, countdown effects, and effect effects according to the remaining number of plays, just as when controlled to the normal state, even when controlled to the time-saving state B, and provides a sense of relief time-saving even in the time-saving state B, thereby increasing interest.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction occurs is not 10 or less (N in step 113IWS805), the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (step 113IWS807). Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS808.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table (step 113IWS808).

The process table is a table in which process data is set that the performance control CPU 120 refers to when controlling the performance device. That is, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (performance parts) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data that is a collection of multiple combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating the manner of change that constitutes the change manner during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is included. In addition, the process timer setting value is set to the change time for that change manner. The performance control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display of the decorative pattern in the change manner set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer setting value. In addition, the process table is stored in the ROM in the performance control board 80. In addition, a process table is prepared according to each change pattern.

The process table used when controlling the performance of a variation pattern involving a reach performance has process data set therein which indicates that the left pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and that the right pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a further predetermined time has elapsed. In addition, instead of setting the pattern to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the pattern may be generated by synthesizing according to the determined stopping pattern, or the provisional stopping pattern in the pseudo consecutive or sliding performance.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 113IWS809). For example, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the audio control board 13 to output audio from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In this characteristic section 113IW, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern command.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value equivalent to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 113IWS810).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 113IWS811).

(Variable display performance processing)
283-9 and 283-10 are flow charts showing the variable display performance process (step S172) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 280. In the variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 113IWS841) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step 113IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 113IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer is set to the next process timer setting value in the process table (step 113IWS844). In addition, the control state for the performance device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data that are set next (step 113IWS845).

Next, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance checks whether or not it has received the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command (step 113IWS846). Specifically, it checks whether or not the first confirmation A command reception flag or the second confirmation A command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If it has received the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance selects a process table corresponding to the mode transition designation (a designation that notifies the player of a transition to a time-saving state (time-saving mode)) and the right-hit notification (step 113IWS847). Next, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance starts the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table (step 113IWS848). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 113IWS849). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 20 seconds to a determined performance period timer for measuring the pattern determination period on the performance control means side (step 113IWS850). Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS861A.

In this example, when the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command is received, there are cases where the time-saving function has missed during normal operation and cases where the time-saving function has rescued. In step 113 IWS847, if the time-saving function has missed during normal operation, a process table corresponding to the mode transition effect for time-saving function misses and the right-hit notification is selected, and if the time-saving function has rescued, a process table corresponding to the mode transition effect for rescue time-saving function and the right-hit notification is selected. Whether the time-saving function has rescued and the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command has been received can be determined by, for example, checking whether the EXT data of the received rescue time-saving count 1 designation command is "00 (H)".

If neither the first pattern confirmation A designation command nor the second pattern confirmation A designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the first pattern confirmation B designation command or the second pattern confirmation B designation command has been received (step 113IWS856). Specifically, it checks whether the first confirmation B command reception flag or the second confirmation B command reception flag has been set in the command analysis process. If the first pattern confirmation B designation command or the second pattern confirmation B designation command has been received, it proceeds to step 113IWS858.

If neither the first pattern determination B designation command nor the second pattern determination B designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variable time timer has timed out (step 113IWS857). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the first pattern determination B designation command or the second pattern determination B designation command is received (Y in step 113IWS856), or when the variable time timer has timed out (Y in step 113IWS857), the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the normal pattern determination display (step 113IWS858). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 113IWS859). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 113IWS860). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds to a determined performance period timer for measuring the pattern determination period on the performance control means side (step 113IWS861). Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS861A.

In this example, in addition to when a pattern determination command is received, if the variable time timer times out (see step 113IWS857), the process proceeds to step 113IWS858 and onwards and the pattern determination period begins. However, unless a pattern determination command is missed, step 113IWS857 will normally be judged as Y and the process will not proceed to step 113IWS858 and onwards.

In step 113IWS861A, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the change is the target change of the look-ahead preview performance (step 113IWS861A). For example, the value of the number of reserved memories when the look-ahead preview performance starts is set as the number of times K the look-ahead preview performance is executed, and the number of times K is subtracted by one when the change starts. When the subtraction result becomes 0, the change can be determined to be the target change of the look-ahead preview performance. If the change is the target change of the look-ahead preview performance, the look-ahead flag is reset (step 113IWS861B) and the process proceeds to step 113IWS862. In this way, the look-ahead flag is set when the look-ahead preview performance starts, and the look-ahead flag is reset when the change of the preview target change of the look-ahead preview performance stops, and the look-ahead preview performance targeting the reserved memory that occurred while the look-ahead flag was set is not performed, so that multiple look-ahead preview performances are not executed in duplicate. Note that multiple look-ahead preview performances may be executed in duplicate.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the special chart hit waiting process (step S173) (step 113IWS862).

(Example of performance)
Next, a specific example of the performance mode until the transition to the time-saving state C, which is the rescue time-saving, will be described. Fig. 283-11 to Fig. 283-15 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a specific example of the performance mode until the transition to the time-saving state. In Fig. 283-11 to Fig. 283-15, the performance screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

Figures 283-11 to 283-14 show specific examples of the presentation mode when the normal state is controlled to time-saving state C. Figure 283-15 shows a specific example of the presentation mode when the time-saving state is controlled to time-saving state C from time-saving state B.

As shown in FIG. 283-11(A), the remaining number of changes until the rescue time reduction is displayed every 100 spins when the symbols stop. In this example, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol 113IW100 is displayed in the center of the screen, and the small symbol 113IW101 is displayed in the upper right. Then, for example, when there are 700 spins remaining until the transition to the rescue time reduction, the decorative symbol 113IW100 and the small symbol 113IW101 stop and a missing symbol (in this example, the combination of symbols "134") is derived and displayed. At this time, the remaining spin count display 113IW102 is displayed in the upper left, saying "700 spins left to start the rescue time reduction!". At this time, an explanation of the effects of the rescue time reduction is displayed at the bottom of the screen by the caption display 113IW103.

Also, as shown in FIG. 283-11(B), for example, when there are 600 spins remaining until the transition to the rescue time-saving mode, the decorative symbol 113IW100 and the small symbol 113IW101 stop and a missing symbol (in this example, the symbol combination "423") is derived and displayed. At this time, as in FIG. 283-11(A), the remaining spins display 113IW102 is displayed in the upper left corner saying "600 spins left until rescue time-saving mode begins!" At this time, an explanation of the effects of the rescue time-saving mode is displayed at the bottom of the screen by the caption display 113IW103.

In this example, as shown in Figures 283-11 (A) and (B), a teasing effect suggesting the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is performed every 100 changes, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the teasing effect may be configured not to be performed when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is between 400 and 700, but to be performed when the remaining number is 300 or less (i.e., the remaining number is 300, 200, or 100).

In addition, instead of necessarily executing the teasing effect when the number of remaining fluctuations is reached, for example, when a command specifying the number of rescue time reductions to be 2 is received, a lottery process based on random numbers is performed, and if it is decided to execute the teasing effect, the teasing effect is executed in the manner shown in Fig. 283-11 (A) and (B). In this case, it is desirable to configure so that the execution rate of the teasing effect increases as the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached decreases.

As shown in Figures 283-11(C) to 283-12(E), when there are 10 spins remaining before the transition to the rescue time-saving mode, the decorative symbol 113IW100 is not displayed when the symbol stops, but only the small symbol 113IW101 is displayed, and a countdown display 113IW104 according to the number of remaining spins is displayed in the center of the screen. For example, the countdown display 113IW104 shows a countdown from "10" to "1" each time the symbol stops after the display of the changing symbols ends. Each figure shows an example in which a losing symbol (in this example, a combination of symbols "653", "844", "278", and "216") is derived and displayed.

As shown in Fig. 283-11(C) to Fig. 283-12(E), after 10 spins remaining until the transition to the rescue time-saving mode, an effect effect is performed in which an effect image in a display range according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time-saving mode is displayed, and as shown in Fig. 283-12(F) to Fig. 283-12(H), in a fluctuation in which the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time-saving mode is 0, a time-saving entry effect is performed, the symbols stop, and the losing symbols (in this example, the combination of symbols "254") are displayed. At this time, the decorative symbols may not be displayed, and the losing symbols may be displayed only in the small symbols. Note that Fig. 283-12(G) and (H) show a period in which the losing symbols as small symbols are temporarily stopped, and the special symbols continue to fluctuate. Fig. 283-13(I) to Fig. 283-14(M) show a period in which the losing symbols as small symbols are displayed as confirmed, and the special symbols also stop fluctuating.

In addition, in FIG. 283-12 (G), a character string indicating that the time-saving state will be controlled to 800 times is displayed on the image display device 5, thereby notifying the control to time-saving state C. Then, in FIG. 283-12 (H), a right-hit promotion image to promote right-hitting is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that since the case of controlling from the normal state to time-saving state C is shown here, the right-hit promotion image is displayed, but since right-hitting has already been performed when controlling from time-saving state B to time-saving state C, the display of the right-hit notification image is limited when the pattern stops (see FIG. 283-15 (D)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 283-13(I), when the pattern determination period begins, the mode effect start display 113IW105 "Super Hot!" is displayed, and the mode transition effect begins. Note that from this point on, in the mode transition effect, the decorative pattern 113IW100 is not displayed, and only the small pattern 113IW101 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 283-13(J), when the mode transition presentation starts, an operation suggestion image 113IW106 is displayed, which suggests operating (pressing) the push button 31B. For example, the operation suggestion image 113IW106 displays the word "press" together with an image encouraging the pressing of the push button 31B.

As shown in FIG. 283-13(K), when the push button 31B is operated when the operation suggestion image 113IW106 is displayed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the operation suggestion image 113IW106, the text display 113IW107 "V STOCK x 1" is displayed, notifying the start of the rescue time reduction. In addition, the right-hit instruction display 113IW108 instructing the player to hit to the right is displayed next to the small pattern 113IW101.

In this example, even if a jackpot is hit, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) can be configured to execute a presentation that displays the text "V STOCK x 1" in the same manner as in FIG. 283-13 (K). In this case, for example, in the start winning judgment process (step S101), the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs a look-ahead judgment process to determine whether or not a jackpot will be hit and the type of fluctuation pattern, and transmits a look-ahead judgment result designation command that can identify the look-ahead judgment result. Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes a performance (so-called reserved consecutive performance) in the same manner as in FIG. 283-13 (K) based on the look-ahead judgment result designation command received. For example, if it is determined that there is one item in the reserved memory that will be a jackpot based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command, the reserved consecutive performance is executed by displaying the text "V STOCK x 1". Also, for example, if it is determined based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command that there are two jackpots in the reserved memory, the text display "V STOCK x 2" is displayed to execute the reserved consecutive performance.

On the other hand, when the rescue time reduction is activated, there is a high probability that the extremely short fluctuation display of 1.5 seconds will be executed during the time reduction state via the rescue time reduction (see FIG. 283-1 (E)), so the fluctuation display will be consumed very quickly and a jackpot is likely to occur at a relatively early timing. Therefore, during the fluctuation display that has been activated by the rescue time reduction (in this example, the pattern determination period), the effect of displaying the text display "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 283-13 (K) is executed without checking the results of the pre-reading judgment. Therefore, the effect of displaying the text display "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 283-13 (K) is an effect in the same manner as the pseudo-reserved consecutive effect, and is an effect that notifies the user that the rescue time reduction has been activated.

In addition, if the fluctuation that has reached the rescue time reduction is a jackpot fluctuation, for example, 30 seconds may be secured as the fluctuation time, and a performance that appears to be the rescue time reduction may be executed first, followed by a performance that notifies of a jackpot.

Although the example shows a case where the display of the right hit instruction display 113IW108 starts from the timing of the display of the text display 113IW107 "V STOCK x 1", the timing of the display start of the right hit instruction display 113IW108 is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, the display of the right hit instruction display 113IW108 may start from the timing of the confirmation display of the stop pattern shown in FIG. 283-12 (H), and various modes are possible.

Then, as shown in FIG. 283-13 (L), a mode selection screen 113IW109 is displayed to select the presentation mode for the rescue time reduction. For example, a screen to select one of modes A to D is displayed. The mode is selected by moving the cursor by operating the stick controller 31A, and is confirmed by operating the push button 31B. Note that if a predetermined time has passed without selecting a presentation mode, the presentation mode that the cursor is aligned with is automatically confirmed. Also, even when the mode selection screen 113IW109 is displayed, the right hit instruction display 113IW108 remains displayed next to the small pattern 113IW101.

Then, as shown in FIG. 283-14 (M), when the selection of the presentation mode is finished, a start notification screen 113IW110 is displayed to notify the user that the rescue time reduction will begin. For example, the words "Rescue time reduction entered" are displayed. Then, when the next fluctuation begins, the game transitions to time reduction state C, and the rescue time reduction begins.

In this example, when the pattern stops, the remaining number of spins until the rescue time-saving feature and the explanation of the effects during the rescue time-saving feature and a countdown are displayed, but this may also be done when the pattern starts to change or while it is changing.

In addition, in this example, a pattern determination period of 20 seconds is secured in the variable display that results in rescue time reduction, and a mode transition effect and right-hit notification are executed, but the pattern determination period may remain the usual 0.5 seconds, and the game may be configured to transition directly to the time-saving state via rescue time reduction without performing a mode transition effect, etc.

In addition, this example shows a case where the rescue time reduction counter is initially set to "800" when the RAM clear process is executed or when a jackpot is hit, but for example, when configuring to execute a story-based presentation (for example, a story reach presentation or a story such as whether to perform high-speed fluctuation), the selection buffer for that story and the story counter may also be cleared. Also, it may be possible to configure it so that a story can be set when the rescue time reduction is activated, or so that different stories can be set depending on the game state.

In this way, Fig. 283-11 to Fig. 283-14 show the case where control is made from the normal state to the time-saving state C, while Fig. 283-15 shows a specific example of the presentation mode when control is made from the time-saving state B to the time-saving state C. For example, Fig. 283-15 (A) and (B), which show display examples of the timing when there are 10 spins and 1 spin remaining until the transition to the rescue time-saving state in the time-saving state B, in addition to the display of Fig. 283-11 (C) and Fig. 283-12 (E), which show display examples of the timing when there are 10 spins and 1 spin remaining until the transition to the rescue time-saving state in the normal state, a right-hit notification presentation (display of a right-pointing arrow image) is performed because the time-saving state is in progress. This right-hit notification presentation is performed continuously while the time-saving state is controlled. Note that the value of the time-saving state counter in Fig. 283-15 (A) is 60, and the value of the time-saving state counter in Fig. 283-15 (B) is 51.

As shown in Figures 283-15 (C) and (D), when the value of the rescue time-saving counter changes to 0, a time-saving promotion effect is performed. Specifically, as shown in Figure 283-15 (D), a character string indicating the promotion is displayed. At this time, unlike Figure 283-12 (H), the right-hit notification image is not displayed again because the game is already controlled to the time-saving state.

The countdown effect and the effect effect are executed only when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is 10, but this is not limited to this. For example, the countdown effect and the effect effect may be executed at a timing other than when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is 10 (by executing a so-called false effect) to make the player expect to enter the rescue time reduction. In this case, for example, the change when the time reduction counter value is 50 may be ended, and the countdown display and the effect display may be started when the next change is started, and the countdown display and the effect display may be performed over multiple changes, and the countdown display and the effect display may be ended at a predetermined timing (in the illustrated example, the third change after the countdown display and the effect display were started). This false effect is not limited to being executed when the time reduction counter value is 50, but may also be executed when the time reduction counter value is 100 or 200.

The rate at which false effects are executed may also differ depending on the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time-saving period; for example, the rate at which they occur may be higher the fewer the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time-saving period. This allows the player to feel that the rescue time-saving period is approaching, increasing interest. Also, this false effect may not be executed when a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation pattern involving an SP reach) is selected.

As explained above, this characteristic part 113IW includes the following inventions:

As described in JP2005-95449A, there have been gaming machines that count the number of times the pattern changes, and control the machine to a certain variable state when the counting result reaches a value corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 1000 times) without a jackpot occurring (i.e., when a special number of times (e.g., 1000 times) changes without a jackpot occurring). Similarly, there have been gaming machines that control the game state to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state in which the pattern changes frequently) when the counting result reaches a specific value. However, in the gaming machine described in JP2005-95449A, there was room for improvement in the presentation control in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state based on the number of times the variable display occurs. Therefore, the following gaming machines (means 113-1) to (means 113-7) are described in this characteristic section 113IW.

(Means 113-1) A gaming machine capable of controlling a game machine to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot game state) advantageous to a player based on a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) being derived and displayed by executing a variable display of a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a variable display of a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern),
A variable display execution means (e.g., a part that executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a game ball into the first start winning hole or the second start winning hole) and the establishment of a start condition (e.g., neither a jackpot game state nor a fluctuating game state);
A reserved memory means (e.g., a first reserved memory number buffer, a second reserved memory number buffer) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied;
A determination means capable of determining to control to an advantageous state;
A determination means (for example, a part that executes step S101 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of determining that the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state before the determination by the determination means;
a specific suggestion performance execution means (for example, a part that executes step 113IWS1019 in the performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific suggestion performance (for example, a first mode of foresight notice performance. Specific examples of foresight notice performance are not limited to a countdown display, but may be a performance in which a special decorative pattern (chance eye) is stopped and displayed, a hold change performance in which the color or shape of the hold display is changed, or a zone performance in which a special background is displayed), which suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state based on the judgment result by the judgment means;
A state control means capable of controlling the engine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more easily satisfied than in a normal state;
updating means for updating numerical information (e.g., a relief time reduction counter);
The update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the rescue time reduction counter when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes),
The state control means can control the state to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value (e.g., a value of a rescue time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed,
The device further includes a special suggestion effect execution means (e.g., a portion that executes steps S113IWS804, S806, and S254 in the effect control CPU 120) that can execute special suggestion effects (e.g., teasing effects, countdown effects, effect effects, and subtitle display effects) related to the establishment of a special condition,
The specific suggestion performance execution means is
It is possible to restrict the execution of a specific suggestion performance that targets a variable display subsequent to the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied among the variable displays corresponding to the reserved information stored before the special condition is satisfied (for example, when Y is determined in step 113IWS1015, the performance control CPU 120 prohibits the execution of a first mode of pre-reading preview performance that spans before and after the start of control for the rescue time reduction by not executing 113IWS1019).
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of a specific suggestion presentation is restricted during a specified period from when the numerical information updated by the update means reaches a specific value from a specified value (e.g., the value of the rescue time reduction counter is "10") corresponding to a specified number of times (e.g., 790 times) that is less than the special number of times (e.g., 790 times) (e.g., when step 113IWS1016 in the presentation control CPU 120 is Y, step 113IWS1019 is not executed, thereby prohibiting the execution of a first type of pre-reading preview presentation in the fluctuation immediately before control to the rescue time reduction).

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent problems with the presentation while preventing the presentation from becoming too complicated and reducing a decline in interest.

In this example, if the game is already controlled to the time-saving state, the execution of a pre-reading preview performance that spans both before and after the start of control to the rescue time-saving state is not prohibited (if step 113IWS1014 is Y, step 113IWS1015 is not performed), but this is not limited to this, and even if the game is controlled to the time-saving state, the execution of a pre-reading preview performance that spans both before and after the start of control to the rescue time-saving state may be prohibited.

In addition, in this example, a special suggestion effect is executed during a specified period until the numerical information updated by the update means reaches a specific value from a specified value corresponding to a specified number of times less than the special number of times, and the execution of the specific suggestion effect is restricted during the specified period. Specifically, when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction reaches 10, the execution of the countdown effect is started and the execution of the look-ahead preview effect is prohibited. This prevents the special suggestion effect and the specific suggestion effect from being executed at the same time, which prevents the effect from becoming complicated and reduces a decline in interest.

In addition, in this example, the execution of a look-ahead preview performance that spans both before and after the start of control to reduce the rescue time is prohibited, but the restriction method is not limited to this. For example, in a gaming machine capable of executing multiple types of look-ahead preview performances, some of the multiple types of look-ahead preview performances may be prohibited from being executed if they span both before and after the start of control to reduce the rescue time, while other look-ahead preview performances may not be prohibited from being executed (may be executed) even if they span both before and after the start of control to reduce the rescue time.

Similarly, in this example, the execution of the look-ahead preview performance in the fluctuation immediately before control to the rescue time reduction is prohibited, but the restriction method is not limited to this. For example, in a gaming machine capable of executing multiple types of look-ahead preview performance, some of the multiple types of look-ahead preview performance may be prohibited from being executed in the fluctuation immediately before control to the rescue time reduction, while other look-ahead preview performances may not be prohibited from being executed (may be executed) in the fluctuation immediately before control to the rescue time reduction.

(Means 113-2) In the means 113-1, the state control means can control to a special state when a special display result (for example, a time-saving pattern) different from the specific display result in the normal state is derived and displayed,
The degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed;
The state control means, when a special condition is established and a special display result is derived and displayed, can control to a special state of advantage corresponding to the establishment of the special condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to the time-shortened state via rescue time-shortened by giving priority to control to a time-shortened state via a time-shortened state rather than control to a time-shortened state via a time-shortened state, and thereby controls to the time-shortened state via rescue time-shortened when a time-shortened miss pattern is stopped and displayed in a fluctuation that results in rescue time-shortened (fluctuation that causes the rescue time-shortened count counter to become 0)).
The display control device further includes a special suggestion effect execution means (e.g., a portion that executes step 113IWS1019 in the effect control CPU 120) that can execute a special suggestion effect (e.g., a pre-reading notice effect of the second mode) that suggests that a special display result will be derived and displayed based on the determination result by the determination means,
The special suggestion effect execution means may restrict the execution of the special suggestion effect during a specified period from when the numerical information updated by the update means reaches a specific value from a specified value (e.g., the value of the rescue time reduction counter is "10") corresponding to a specified number of times (e.g., 790 times) that is less than the special number of times (e.g., 790 times) (e.g., when step 113IWS1016 in the effect control CPU 120 is Y, 113IWS1019 is not executed, thereby prohibiting the execution of the second type of pre-reading preview effect in the fluctuation immediately before control to the rescue time reduction).

This configuration makes it possible to prevent the presentation from becoming too complicated, suppressing a decline in interest, and increasing the degree of relief for the player.

(Means 113-3) In means 113-1 or 113-2, the execution rate of the special suggestion effect may be higher in a predetermined period before the special condition is met (for example, a period in which the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is activated is 10 or less) than in a period before the predetermined period (for example, a period in which the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is activated is 11 or more) (see Figs. 283-6 (A) and (B)).

This configuration can increase interest by making players look forward to the realization of special conditions, and can also prevent players from suffering disadvantages due to ending play just before the special conditions are realized.

(Means 113-4) In any of means 113-1 to 113-3, the special suggestion effect execution means may vary the proportion of the special suggestion effect to be executed by one of a plurality of effect modes depending on the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction) (see Figures 283-6 (C) and (D)).

This configuration makes players look forward to the realization of special conditions, increasing interest.

In addition to the caption display effects, if the execution of promotional effects, countdown effects, and effect effects that indicate the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving feature is activated is determined by lottery, the execution rate may vary depending on the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving feature is activated.

(Means 113-5) Any of means 113-1 to 113-4 may be provided with an explanation performance execution means capable of executing an explanation performance regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (see Figs. 283-11 (A) and (B)).

Such a configuration can improve players' understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

The explanation performance may also be executed at a different rate or at a different rate depending on the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction. For example, the explanation performance may be executed at a higher rate the fewer the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction. In addition, when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less, the execution rate of the explanation performance may be lowered to prevent a reduction in the performance effect of the countdown performance or effect performance that indicates the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction.

(Means 113-6) In any of means 113-1 to 113-5, the special suggestion effect execution means may execute, as the special suggestion effect, a first special suggestion effect (e.g., a teasing effect, a countdown effect) in which it is easy to identify the number of times the variable display is executed until a special condition is met, and a second special suggestion effect (e.g., an effect effect, a caption display effect) in which it is more difficult to identify the number of times the variable display is executed until a special condition is met than the first special suggestion effect (see Figures 283-11 (C) to 283-12 (E)).

Such a configuration can increase the player's interest in playing the game.

(Means 113-7) In any of the means 113-1 to 113-6, when variable display is not being performed and hold information is not stored in the hold storage means, a predetermined image display means (for example, a part that executes step 113IWS256 in the performance control CPU 120) capable of displaying a predetermined image (for example, a demo movie) is provided;
The special suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing a special suggestion effect (e.g., a caption display effect) when a specified image is displayed (e.g., a caption display effect and a demo movie effect can be executed in overlapping order. Either the display of the specified image or the suggestion effect can be executed first, or they can be executed simultaneously), and the rate at which the special suggestion effect is executed when a specified image is displayed may differ depending on the number of times the variable display is executed until a special condition is met (see Figures 283-6 (A) and (B)).

With this configuration, it is possible to increase interest by drawing attention to whether or not a special suggestion effect is being performed, and to promote operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, the selection ratio of the special suggestion effect mode when a specific image is displayed may be varied depending on the number of times the variable display is executed until a special condition is met (see Fig. 283-6 (C) and (D)). With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to the special suggestion effect mode, and operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

Also, as described in JP2005-95449A, there have been machines that count the number of times the pattern changes, and control the machine to a certain variable state when the count result reaches a value corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 1000 times) without a jackpot occurring (i.e., when a special number of times (e.g., 1000 times) changes without a jackpot occurring). Similarly, there have been machines that control the game state to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state in which the pattern changes frequently) when the count result reaches a specific value. However, in the gaming machine described in JP2005-95449A, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state based on the variable display number, there was insufficient interest when the special condition for the variable display number was established. Therefore, the following gaming machines (means 114-1) to (means 114-8) are described in this characteristic section 113IW.

(Means 114-1) A gaming machine capable of controlling a game machine to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot game state) advantageous to a player based on a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) that is derived and displayed by executing a variable display of a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a variable display of a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern),
A state control means capable of controlling the display to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state;
updating means for updating numerical information (e.g., a relief time reduction counter);
The update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the rescue time reduction counter when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes),
The state control means is
The numerical information updated by the update means can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established by a specific value (e.g., the value of the rescue time reduction counter is “0”) corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed,
When a special display result (for example, a time-saving pattern) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state, the special state can be controlled;
The degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed;
The state control means can control to a special state of an advantageous degree corresponding to the establishment of a special condition based on the establishment of the special condition when the state is controlled to a special state of an advantageous degree corresponding to the derivation and display of the special display result (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 controls (promotes) to a time-shortening state via a rescue time-shortening state based on the reaching of a rescue time-shortening fluctuation when controlled to a time-shortening state via a time-shortening loss);
Further, when a special condition is satisfied, a notification effect execution means (for example, a part in the effect control CPU 120 that performs steps S113IWS806, S809, and S845) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a time-saving entry effect, a time-saving promotion effect) that notifies the satisfaction of the special condition is provided.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the notification effect execution means is capable of executing a notification effect based on the establishment of a special condition when the special display result is controlled to a special state of advantage corresponding to the derived display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes a time-saving promotion effect when the variation pattern PA3-2 is selected).

With this configuration, when the special display result is controlled to a special state with a degree of advantage corresponding to the derived display, if a special condition is met, a special feeling can be given through the notification effect, thereby increasing interest.

(Means 114-2) In means 114-1, the notification effect execution means can execute a notification effect when a special condition is met in the normal state, and the presentation manner of the notification effect differs between when a special condition is met in the normal state and when a special condition is met in the special state (for example, the presentation control CPU 120 executes steps 113IWS806, S809, and S845 to execute a time-saving entry presentation when control is switched from the normal state to time-saving state C, and executes a time-saving promotion presentation when control is switched from time-saving state B to time-saving state C).

With this configuration, notifications can be presented in a way that is appropriate to the situation, giving players a sense of exclusivity and increasing their interest.

In this example, the presentation style of the notification effects (time-saving entry effect, time-saving promotion effect) performed during the change is different between a change in which the rescue time-saving count counter in the normal state = 0 and a change in which the rescue time-saving count counter in the time-saving state = 0, but the timing of the execution of the notification effects is not limited to during the change. For example, the presentation style of the notification effects performed during the pattern determination period from when the pattern stops to when the next change starts may be different between a change in which the rescue time-saving count counter in the normal state = 0 and a change in which the rescue time-saving count counter in the time-saving state = 0. In that case, the presentation style during the change may be the same.

(Means 114-3) In the means 114-1 or 114-2, a launch promotion notification means (for example, a part in the performance control CPU 120 that performs steps 113IWS806, S809, and S845) capable of executing a launch promotion notification (for example, displaying a right-hit notification image shown in FIG. 283-12 (H)) that promotes the launch of the game medium toward a special path is provided;
The launch promotion notification means may be capable of executing a launch promotion notification when a special condition is met in the normal state, while restricting the execution of the launch promotion notification when a special condition is met in the special state (for example, the performance control CPU 120 may display a right-hit notification image based on control from the normal state to time-saving state C (see FIG. 283-12 (H)), and may not display a right-hit notification image based on control from time-saving state B to time-saving state C (see FIG. 283-15 (D)). Note that in FIG. 283-15 (D), a right-hit promotion image (a right-facing arrow displayed under the small pattern) based on control to time-saving state B is displayed, but this right-hit promotion image is different from the right-hit notification image displayed based on control to time-saving state C).

Such a configuration can prevent the presentation from becoming too complicated.

If the execution of the launch promotion notification is restricted when a special condition is met in the special state, it may be possible to prohibit the execution of the launch promotion notification as shown in FIG. 283-15(D), or to execute the launch promotion notification in a more passive manner than when a special condition is met in the normal state. For example, the launch promotion notification may be made by reducing the display range or making the arrow transparent. In addition, when a special condition is met in the normal state, the launch promotion notification may be made on the image display device 5, which attracts a high level of attention from players, while when a special condition is met in the special state, the launch promotion notification may be made using light-emitting members or speakers 8L, 8R, which attract less attention from players than the image display device 5.

The launch promotion notification means can execute, in different modes, a first launch promotion notification (e.g., a right-facing arrow in FIG. 283-12 (H)) that promotes the launch of the gaming medium toward a special path when a special condition is met in the normal state, and a second launch promotion notification (e.g., a right-facing arrow in FIG. 283-15 (A) to (D)) that promotes the launch of the gaming medium toward a special path while the special state is under control. When a special condition is met in the special state, the first launch promotion notification may not be executed, but the second launch promotion notification may be executed. This makes it possible to prevent the presentation from becoming too complicated while issuing notifications according to the situation.

(Means 114-4) In any of means 114-1 to 114-3, the presentation style of the notification presentation may be the same when a special condition is met in the normal state and when a special condition is met in the special state (for example, the presentation executed when control is made from the normal state to time-saving state C may be the same as the presentation executed when control is made from time-saving state B to time-saving state C).

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of variation patterns and the amount of performance data, and reduce memory capacity.

(Means 114-5) In any of means 114-1 to 114-4, when a transition from a normal state to a special state occurs based on the establishment of a special condition, specific suggestion effects that predict the variable display executed after the special condition occurs may be restricted (for example, when N in step 113IWS1014, the performance control CPU 120 executes step 113IWS1015), while when a transition from a low-advantage special state (for example, time-saving state B with 100 time-saving times) to a high-advantage special state (for example, time-saving state C with 800 time-saving times) occurs based on the establishment of a special condition, specific suggestion effects that predict the variable display executed after the special condition occurs may be executed (for example, when Y in step 113IWS1014, the performance control CPU 120 executes step 113IWS1019).

With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately provide specific suggestion presentations while minimizing the occurrence of problems with presentation.

(Means 114-6) Any of means 114-1 to 114-5 may be provided with a special suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion in the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 113IWS806 regardless of whether or not the time-saving state is in effect) that can execute a special suggestion effect related to the establishment of a special condition in a special state.

With this configuration, it is possible to heighten interest by creating anticipation of the realization of special conditions in special situations.

The presentation style of the special suggestion effects may differ between the normal state and the time-saving state. For example, the text color of the countdown effects, or the color or pattern of the effects of the effect effects may be different.

(Means 114-7) In any one of the means 114-1 to 114-6, a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a part that performs step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern (for example, a variable pattern other than the variable patterns PA1-2 to PA1-4) and a shortened variable display pattern (for example, the variable patterns PA1-2 to PA1-4) in which the variable display period is shortened compared to the predetermined variable display pattern,
The variable display pattern determination means may be configured so that a special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied has a higher probability of determining a shortened variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result than a special state controlled based on the derived display of a special display result (see Figures 283-1 (D) and (E)).

Such a configuration can prevent a decline in interest. For example, if a player has played for a long period of time and a loss in a long fluctuation pattern is selected with a high probability even when the time-saving state is reached after rescue play, it is expected that the player will be stressed. Therefore, by configuring the game so that a loss in a time-saving state via rescue play is likely to select a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time, the stress felt by the player can be reduced.

(Means 114-8) In any one of the means 114-1 to 114-7, a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a part that performs step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern (for example, variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3) corresponding to the execution of a reach performance,
The variable display pattern determination means may be configured so that a special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied has a lower probability of determining a specific variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result than a special state controlled based on the derived display of a special display result (see Figures 283-1 (D) and (E)).

Such a configuration can prevent a decline in interest. For example, if the probability of a missed reach being selected is high even after a rescue time-saving state has been reached after playing for a long period of time, it is expected that this will cause stress to the player. Therefore, by configuring the game so that a missed reach variation pattern is less likely to be selected in a time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state, the stress caused to the player can be reduced.

Also, as described in JP2005-95449A, there have been machines that count the number of times the pattern changes, and control the machine to a certain variable state based on the count result reaching a value corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 1000 times) without a jackpot occurring (i.e., based on the machine changing a special number of times (e.g., 1000 times) without a jackpot occurring). Similarly, there have been machines that control the game state to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state in which the pattern changes frequently) based on the count result reaching a specific value. However, in the gaming machine described in JP2005-95449A, there was room for improvement in the control of the gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state based on the number of times the variable display occurs. Therefore, the following gaming machines (means 115-1) to (means 115-4) are described in this characteristic section 113IW.

(Means 115-1) A gaming machine capable of controlling a game machine to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot game state) advantageous to a player based on a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) that is derived and displayed by executing a variable display of a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a variable display of a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern),
A first passage area (e.g., a first start winning hole) is provided at a position where a game medium passing through a specific path (e.g., a left area) among a plurality of paths through which a game medium (e.g., a game ball) can move can pass;
A second passing area (e.g., a second start winning port) provided at a position where the game medium passing through a special path (e.g., a right area) different from the specific path can pass through;
a variable display execution means (e.g., a portion that executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing, as variable display of identification information, variable display of first identification information based on the establishment of a first start condition (e.g., the entry of a game ball into a first start winning hole) and variable display of second identification information based on the establishment of a second start condition (e.g., the entry of a game ball into a second start winning hole);
A state control means capable of controlling the engine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the second start condition is more likely to be satisfied than in a normal state;
updating means for updating numerical information (e.g., a relief time reduction counter);
The update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the rescue time reduction counter when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes),
The second starting condition is established based on the game medium passing through the second passing area,
The state control means is
The numerical information updated by the update means can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established by a specific value (e.g., the value of the rescue time reduction counter is “0”) corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed,
It is possible to control to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the specific display result being derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to the time-saving state A by performing step 113IWS537).
a special output means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that performs steps 113IWS42B and S42F) that can execute a special output (for example, output of easy-to-win state designation signals 1 and 3) that can distinguish between a special state that is controlled after an advantageous state (for example, a time-saving state via a jackpot (time-saving state A)) and a special state that is controlled when a special condition is established (for example, a time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state (time-saving state C));
Further, a specific output means (e.g., a part of the game control microcomputer 100 that performs step 113IWS35) capable of executing a specific output (e.g., output of a launch position designation signal 3) capable of specifying that the game medium should be launched toward a special path in a special state,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific output means is capable of executing a specific output commonly in a special state controlled after an advantageous state and in a special state controlled when a special condition is established (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 commonly performs step 113IWS35 regardless of which time-saving flag is set).

With such a configuration, the trigger for control to the special state can be specified externally, and the specific signal can be standardized. For example, it can be specified externally whether the trigger for control to the time-saving state is the occurrence of a jackpot or a rescue time-saving.

In this example, the test device outputs a signal that can distinguish between the time-saving state via a jackpot and the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state, and can output a common signal that can specify that a right hit should be made whether the machine is controlled to the time-saving state via a jackpot or the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state. Similarly, an external device such as a hall management computer can output a signal that can distinguish between the time-saving state via a jackpot and the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state, and can output a common signal that can specify that a right hit should be made whether the machine is controlled to the time-saving state via a jackpot or the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state. This allows the hall management computer to perform operational analysis such as the rate at which the rescue time-saving state is reached during actual operation and the customer demographics of players when the rescue time-saving state is reached, and also allows signals to be standardized.

(Means 115-2) In the means 115-1, the state control means can control to a special state when a special display result (for example, a time-saving pattern) different from the specific display result in the normal state is derived and displayed,
The special output means may be capable of executing a special output (e.g., output of easy-to-win state designation signals 2, 3) that can distinguish between a special state that is controlled when a special display result is derived and displayed (e.g., a time-saving state via a missed time-saving state (time-saving state B)) and a special state that is controlled when a special condition is met (e.g., a time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state (time-saving state C)) (e.g., a part that performs steps 113IWS42D, S42F in the game control microcomputer 100).

With such a configuration, it is possible to externally specify the trigger for control to the special state. For example, it is possible to externally specify whether the trigger for control to the time-saving state is the stopping of a symbol that fails the time-saving state or a rescue time-saving state.

(Means 115-3) In the means 115-1 or 115-2, the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special display result (for example, a time-saving pattern) different from the specific display result in the normal state is derived and displayed,
The degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed;
The state control means may be capable of controlling to a special state of advantage corresponding to the establishment of a special condition when a special condition is established and a special display result is derived and displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 may prioritize control to a time-shortened state via a rescue time-shortened state over control to a time-shortened state via a time-shortened state, so that when a time-shortened loss pattern is displayed in a fluctuation that results in a rescue time-shortened state (a fluctuation that causes the rescue time-shortened count counter to become 0), the state control means may control to a time-shortened state via a rescue time-shortened state).

Such a configuration can increase the player's chances of recovery.

(Means 115-4) In any of the means 115-1 to 115-3, the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special display result (for example, a time-saving pattern) different from the specific display result in the normal state is derived and displayed,
The degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed;
When a special condition is met and a special display result is derived and displayed, a signal control means (for example, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that performs step 113IWS37E when a time-saving missing pattern is displayed in a stopped state even if the fluctuation results in a time-saving rescue) may be provided.

With such a configuration, the display results can be properly notified to the outside.

The contents shown in this characteristic section 113IW may also be applied to the gaming machine configurations shown in (Means 105-1) to (Means 107-15) below.

(Means 105-1) A gaming machine that executes a variable display of a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a variable display of a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern) and is controllable to a favorable advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) being derived and displayed, the gaming machine comprising: a state control means that can control to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state; and an update means that can update numerical information (e.g., a rescue time-saving count counter) based on the execution of the variable display; The state control means can control to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on a specific display result being derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, and can control to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value (e.g., the value of the rescue time reduction counter: 0) corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed, and the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (e.g., The technique control microcomputer 100 updates the rescue time reduction counter when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes, and there are a plurality of types of advantageous states including a specific advantageous state (e.g., 10R jackpot A) and a special advantageous state (e.g., 10R jackpot B), and the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which of the plurality of advantageous states is controlled to, and the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the special advantageous state is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state. (For example, after a 10R jackpot A, it is mainly controlled to a 100-time time-saving state, and after a 10R jackpot B, it is mainly controlled to a time-saving state until the next jackpot occurs), and the advantage of the special state controlled when a special condition is met is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to a specific advantageous state (For example, after a 10R jackpot A, it is mainly controlled to a 100-time time-saving state, and it may be controlled to a 800-time time-saving state as a time-saving state via a rescue time-saving. Such a configuration can increase the degree of rescue for the player.

(Means 105-2) When the player is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when the player is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information, the ratio of players being controlled to a special state with a special advantageous degree (for example, a time-saving state that continues until the next jackpot occurs) after being controlled to an advantageous state is different (for example, the selection ratio of the jackpot type is different when the first special pattern changes and when the second special pattern changes, and the implementation of the variable display for the special condition to be established is different when the player is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when the player is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information). The number of rows may be common to the special number of times (for example, the number of times required to shorten the rescue time after a jackpot based on the variation of the first special symbol and after a jackpot based on the variation of the second special symbol is 800 times). With such a configuration, different gameplay characteristics are exhibited when the first identification information is variable displayed and when the second identification information is variable displayed, thereby increasing interest, while the special number of times is common to the first identification information and when the second identification information is variable displayed, preventing excessive gambling.

(Means 105-3) A setting means is provided that can set one of a plurality of setting values including an unfavorable setting value (e.g., setting value "1") with a first probability (e.g., about 1/319) of being controlled to an advantageous state, and an advantageous setting value (e.g., setting value "6") with a second probability (e.g., about 1/270) with a higher probability of being controlled to an advantageous state than the first probability, and when the setting is set to an unfavorable setting value, the special condition is more likely to be established than when the setting is set to an advantageous setting value, and the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, after a 10R jackpot A, the time-saving state is mainly controlled to 100 times, and the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving may be controlled to 800 times. With such a configuration, even when an unfavorable setting value is set, the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state, so that the player can be rescued more effectively.

(Means 105-4) A setting means is provided that can set one of a number of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the degree of advantage of the special state to which one of the multiple types is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state is common regardless of which setting value is set (for example, the selection ratio of the jackpot type is common regardless of which setting value is set, and the degree of advantage of the special state to which a special condition is established is common regardless of which setting value is set (for example, the length of the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving may be common regardless of which setting value is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in gambling tendency due to the setting value being set, and to realize healthy gameplay.

(Means 105-5) When the advantageous state is controlled in response to the variable display of the first identification information and when the advantageous state is controlled in response to the variable display of the second identification information, the proportion of the advantageous state among the multiple types is different, and when the special condition is established in response to the variable display of the first identification information and when the special condition is established in response to the variable display of the second identification information, the advantageous degree of the special state controlled after the special condition is established is common (for example, when the time-shortened state is controlled through a rescue time-shortened state based on the variation of the first special symbol and when the time-shortened state is controlled through a rescue time-shortened state based on the variation of the second special symbol, both may be controlled to a time-shortened state of 800 times. With such a configuration, while different gameplay characteristics are exhibited in the case of performing the variable display of the first identification information and the case of performing the variable display of the second identification information, the advantageous degree of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is common regardless of the setting value, so that an appropriate rescue degree can be achieved while suppressing an increase in gambling.

(Means 105-6) A variable display pattern determination means (for example, a part that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern (for example, fluctuation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3) and a shortened variable display pattern (for example, fluctuation patterns PA1-2 to PA1-4) in which the variable display period is shortened compared to the predetermined variable display pattern, and the variable display pattern determination means may be configured to determine the shortened variable display pattern more frequently when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in a special state controlled when a special condition is met than in a special state controlled after being controlled in an advantageous state (for example, in the case of a miss fluctuation, in the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, a fluctuation pattern is selected using fluctuation pattern table E shown in Figure 283-1 (E), and in the time-saving state via a jackpot, a fluctuation pattern is selected using fluctuation pattern tables C and H shown in Figures 283-1 (C) and 283-1 (H)). With this configuration, a decline in interest can be prevented by transitioning to a special state with a faster play speed (for example, a time-saving state with a shorter fluctuation time) based on having played for a long period of time.

(Means 105-7) A variable display pattern determination means (for example, a part that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern (for example, variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3) corresponding to the execution of a reach performance, and the variable display pattern determination means may determine a specific variable display pattern at a lower rate when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in the special state controlled when a special condition is established than in the special state controlled after being controlled in an advantageous state (for example, in the case of a miss variation, the variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table E shown in FIG. 283-1 (E) in the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, and the variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table H shown in FIG. 283-2 (H) in the time-saving state via a jackpot). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest by transitioning to a special state with a high game speed (for example, a time-saving state in which the frequency of reach occurrence is suppressed) based on playing for a long period of time.

(Means 105-8) The update means can update specific numerical information (e.g., time-saving counter) different from the numerical information based on the execution of variable display in the special state, and the state control means can control to a special state by setting special information (e.g., a time-saving flag) and can end the special state by canceling the setting of the special information, and can end the special state based on the specific numerical information becoming a predetermined value (e.g., value of the time-saving counter: 0) corresponding to a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100 times) in the special state, and can update the number of times updated by the update means even if the power supply is stopped. The game device includes a backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding value information, specific numerical information, and special information setting information, and an initialization means capable of initializing the storage contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is met (e.g., an output signal from a clear switch is on when the power is turned on), and the initialization means may initialize the special information setting information and specific numerical information when the predetermined condition is met, but not initialize the numerical information (e.g., resetting whether or not the time-saving flag is set and the value of the time-saving count counter, but not resetting the value of the rescue time-saving count counter). With such a configuration, the degree of rescue for the player can be increased even when the predetermined condition is met.

(Means 106-1) A gaming machine that executes a variable display of a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a variable display of a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) being derived and displayed, the gaming machine comprising: a state control means that can control the gaming machine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state; an update means that can update numerical information (e.g., a rescue time-saving count counter) based on the execution of the variable display; and a start condition (e.g., a first start winning slot or The present invention relates to a variable display executing means for executing a variable display when a start condition (e.g., a game ball entering the second start winning hole) is satisfied and a start condition (e.g., neither a jackpot game state nor a variable state) is satisfied, a reserved memory means (e.g., a first reserved memory number buffer, a second reserved memory number buffer) for storing information related to the variable display as reserved information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, a backup memory means (e.g., a RAM 102) for holding numerical information and reserved information when the power supply is stopped, and a predetermined condition (e.g., a clear when the power is turned on) for clearing a predetermined condition. and recovery means (e.g., a portion that executes step S6 in the game control microcomputer 100) that executes recovery control to restore the numerical information updated by the update means based on the memory contents of the backup memory means and the reserved information stored in the reserved memory means based on the memory contents of the backup memory means when power supply is started. The state control means may be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value (e.g., the value of a rescue time reduction counter: 0) corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed, and after the recovery control is executed, the state control means may be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established based on the execution of the variable display corresponding to the restored reserved information, and the update means may update the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 updates the rescue time reduction counter when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes). This configuration makes it possible to optimize control through initialization while minimizing the disadvantages to players when a power outage occurs.

(Means 106-2) When the player is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, the rate at which the player is controlled to a special state with a special advantageous degree (for example, a time-saving state that continues until the next jackpot occurs) after being controlled to an advantageous state differs from when the player is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the selection rate of the jackpot type differs when the first special pattern changes and when the second special pattern changes, and the implementation of the variable display for the special condition to be established differs between when the player is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when the player is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information). The number of rows may be common to the special number of times (for example, the number of times required to shorten the rescue time after a jackpot based on the variation of the first special symbol and after a jackpot based on the variation of the second special symbol is 800 times). With such a configuration, different gameplay characteristics are exhibited when the first identification information is variable displayed and when the second identification information is variable displayed, thereby increasing interest, while the special number of times is common to the first identification information and when the second identification information is variable displayed, preventing excessive gambling.

(Means 106-3) A setting means is provided that can set one of a plurality of setting values including an unfavorable setting value (e.g., setting value "1") with a first probability (e.g., about 1/319) of being controlled to an advantageous state, and an advantageous setting value (e.g., setting value "6") with a second probability (e.g., about 1/270) with a higher probability of being controlled to an advantageous state than the first probability, and when the setting is set to an unfavorable setting value, the special condition is more likely to be established than when the setting is set to an advantageous setting value, and the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, after a 10R jackpot A, the time-saving state is mainly controlled to 100 times, and the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving may be controlled to 800 times. With such a configuration, even when an unfavorable setting value is set, the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state, so that the player can be rescued more effectively.

(Means 106-4) A setting means is provided that can set one of a number of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the degree of advantage of the special state to which one of the multiple types of special states is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state is common regardless of which setting value is set (for example, the selection ratio of the jackpot type is common regardless of which setting value is set, and the degree of advantage of the special state to which a special condition is established is common regardless of which setting value is set (for example, the length of the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving may be common regardless of which setting value is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in gambling tendency due to the setting value being set, and to realize healthy gameplay.

(Means 106-5) When the advantageous state is controlled in response to the variable display of the first identification information and when the advantageous state is controlled in response to the variable display of the second identification information, the proportion of the advantageous state among the multiple types is different, and when the special condition is established in response to the variable display of the first identification information and when the special condition is established in response to the variable display of the second identification information, the advantageous degree of the special state controlled after the special condition is established is common (for example, when the time-shortened state is controlled through a rescue time-shortened state based on the variation of the first special symbol and when the time-shortened state is controlled through a rescue time-shortened state based on the variation of the second special symbol, both may be controlled to a time-shortened state of 800 times. With such a configuration, while different gameplay characteristics are exhibited in the case of performing the variable display of the first identification information and the case of performing the variable display of the second identification information, the advantageous degree of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is common regardless of the setting value, so that an appropriate degree of rescue can be achieved while suppressing an increase in gambling.

(Means 106-6) A variable display pattern determination means is provided for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern (for example, a variable display pattern PA2-1 to PA2-3) and a shortened variable display pattern (for example, a variable display pattern PA1-2 to PA1-4) in which the variable display period is shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern, and the variable display pattern determination means may determine the shortened variable display pattern more frequently when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in the special state controlled when a special condition is established than in the special state controlled after being controlled in an advantageous state (for example, in the case of a miss variation, the variable pattern is selected using the variable pattern table E shown in FIG. 283-1 (E) in the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving, and the variable pattern is selected using the variable pattern table H shown in FIG. 283-2 (H) in the time-saving state via the jackpot). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest by transitioning to a special state with a high game speed (for example, a time-saving state with a short variable time) based on having played for a long period of time.

(Means 106-7) A variable display pattern determination means is provided for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern (e.g., variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3) corresponding to the execution of a reach performance, and the variable display pattern determination means may determine a specific variable display pattern at a lower rate in the special state controlled when a special condition is established, when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result, than in the special state controlled after being controlled in an advantageous state (for example, in the case of a miss variation, a variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table E shown in FIG. 283-1 (E) in the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, and a variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table H shown in FIG. 283-2 (H) in the time-saving state via a jackpot). With such a configuration, a decline in interest can be suppressed by transitioning to a special state with a high game speed (for example, a time-saving state in which the frequency of reach occurrence is suppressed) based on playing for a long period of time.

(Means 106-8) The update means can update specific numerical information (e.g., time-saving counter) different from the numerical information based on the execution of a variable display in a special state, and the state control means can control to a special state by setting special information (e.g., a time-saving flag) and can end the special state by canceling the setting of the special information, and can end the special state based on the specific numerical information becoming a predetermined value (e.g., value of the time-saving counter: 0) corresponding to a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100 times) in the special state, and can update the number of times updated by the update means even if the power supply is stopped. The game device includes a backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding value information, specific numerical information, and special information setting information, and an initialization means capable of initializing the storage contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is met (e.g., an output signal from a clear switch is on when the power is turned on), and the initialization means may initialize the special information setting information and specific numerical information when the predetermined condition is met, but not initialize the numerical information (e.g., resetting whether or not the time-saving flag is set and the value of the time-saving count counter, but not resetting the value of the rescue time-saving count counter). With such a configuration, the degree of rescue for the player can be increased even when the predetermined condition is met.

(Means 107-1) A gaming machine that executes a variable display of a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a variable display of a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern) and is controllable to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) being derived and displayed, the gaming machine comprising: a state control means that can control the gaming machine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state; and an update means that can update numerical information (e.g., a rescue time-saving count counter) based on the execution of the variable display. The state control means can control to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value (e.g., the value of the rescue time reduction counter: 0) corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed, and the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the numerical information when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes). The display control unit 200 further includes a suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect (for example, a teasing effect, a countdown effect, an effect effect, a subtitle display effect) related to the establishment of a special condition, and the suggestion effect execution means may vary the proportion of a plurality of effect modes in which the suggestion effect is executed depending on the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, the selection proportion of the numerical value to be displayed varies in the countdown effect (a numerical value corresponding to the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is selected at a proportion of 100%, but the value to be displayed at a proportion corresponding to the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction may be determined by lottery), the range in which the effect is displayed varies in the effect effect (a range corresponding to the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is displayed at a proportion of 100%, but the range to be displayed at a proportion corresponding to the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction may be determined by lottery), and the color of the subtitle display area varies in the subtitle display effect (see Figures 283-6 (C) and (D))), and the performance mode of the suggestion effect may be a mode suggesting the period until the special condition is established (see Figures 283-11 and 283-12). Such a configuration can increase interest by drawing attention to the presentation style of the suggestive presentation, and can also promote operation of the gaming machine.

(Means 107-2) The presentation mode of the suggestive presentation (e.g., countdown presentation) may be such that the number of times the variable display is executed until a special condition is met can be specified (see Figs. 283-11 and 283-12). With such a configuration, the number of times the variable display is executed until a special condition is met can be clearly notified to the player.

(Means 107-3) The suggestion effect is an effect that displays a specific image (for example, an effect effect that displays an effect image), and the specific image may be displayed in multiple ways that differ in at least one of color and size (including the size of a single image and the size of the display range of multiple images), and the period until the suggested special condition is met may differ depending on the way the specific image is displayed (see Figures 283-11 and 283-12). With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to the aspect of the specific image.

(Means 107-4) A variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display when a start condition (e.g., a game ball entering the first start winning port or the second start winning port) is satisfied and a start condition (e.g., neither a jackpot game state nor a variable state) is satisfied, a reserved memory means (e.g., a first reserved memory number buffer, a second reserved memory number buffer) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a predetermined image (e.g., and a predetermined image display means capable of displaying a video (e.g., a demo movie), and the suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing a suggestive performance (e.g., a caption display performance) when the predetermined image is displayed (e.g., a caption display performance and a demo movie performance can be executed in overlapping order. Either the display of the predetermined image and the suggestive performance can be executed first, or they can be executed simultaneously). Depending on the number of times the variable display is executed until a special condition is established, the rate at which the suggestive performance is executed when the predetermined image is displayed may differ (see Fig. 283-6 (A) and (B)). With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestive performance is executed, and operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

(Means 107-5) A variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a game ball into the first start winning port or the second start winning port) and the establishment of a start condition (e.g., neither a jackpot game state nor a variable state), a reserved memory means (e.g., a first reserved memory number buffer, a second reserved memory number buffer) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved information when the start condition is established but the start condition is not established, and a predetermined image (e.g., a demo movie) when the variable display is not being executed and no reserved memory is stored in the reserved memory means. The game machine includes a predetermined image display means capable of displaying a bee, and the suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing a suggestive performance (e.g., a caption display performance) when the predetermined image is displayed (e.g., a caption display performance and a demo movie performance can be executed in overlapping order. Either the display of the predetermined image and the suggestive performance can be executed first, or simultaneously). Depending on the number of times the variable display is executed until a special condition is established, the rate at which the suggestive performance is executed in a predetermined manner when the predetermined image is displayed may differ (see Fig. 283-6 (C) and (D)). With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to the presence or absence of a suggestive performance mode, and operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

(Means 107-6) The device includes a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of a start condition (e.g., a game ball entering the first start winning port or the second start winning port) and a start condition (e.g., neither a jackpot game state nor a changing state), a reserved memory means (e.g., a first reserved memory number buffer, a second reserved memory number buffer) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a predetermined image display means capable of displaying a predetermined image (e.g., a demo movie) when the variable display is not being executed and no reserved memory is stored in the reserved memory means, and the suggestive performance execution means may be capable of executing a suggestive performance (e.g., a dialogue performance by audio output) based on at least one of detecting that an operation means (e.g., a hitting ball operation handle 30) has been operated and that a game medium has passed through a predetermined area (e.g., the first start winning port or the second start winning port) when the predetermined image is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to provide suggestive effects to players who actually play the game, which can promote operation of the gaming machine.

(Means 107-7) A setting means is provided that can set one of a number of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the suggestive effect execution means may vary the rate at which a suggestive effect (e.g., a caption display effect) is executed depending on which setting value is set (see Figs. 283-6 (A) and (B)). With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to whether or not a suggestive effect is executed, and operation of the gaming machine can be promoted by suggesting the setting value.

(Means 107-8) A setting means is provided that can set one of a number of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the suggestive performance execution means may vary the rate at which a suggestive performance (e.g., a caption display performance) is executed in a specific manner (e.g., "red") depending on which setting value is set (see Figs. 283-6 (C) and (D)). With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to the manner of the suggestive performance, and operation of the gaming machine can be promoted by suggesting the setting value.

(Means 107-9) A setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and a setting suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect suggesting the set setting value (for example, a part in the effect control CPU 120 of variant 1 that executes a setting suggestion effect as an effect during change), the setting suggestion effect execution means may have a different rate of executing a setting suggestion effect depending on which setting value is set, and the suggestion effect execution means may have a common rate of executing a suggestion effect regardless of which setting value is set. With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to whether or not a suggestion effect is executed, and the complexity of control can be suppressed.

(Means 107-10) A setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and a setting suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect suggesting the set setting value (for example, a part in the effect control CPU 120 of variant 1 that executes a setting suggestion effect as an effect during change), the setting suggestion effect execution means may have a different rate of executing a setting suggestion effect by a special mode (for example, a second mode) depending on which setting value is set, and the suggestion effect execution means may have a common rate of executing a suggestion effect by a specific mode (for example, "red") regardless of which setting value is set. With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to the mode of the suggestion effect, and the complexity of control can be suppressed.

(Means 107-11) The suggestive effect execution means may be configured to execute suggestive effects (for example, displaying an initial result according to the number of times until the rescue time reduction) at different rates during a specific period after the start of power supply, depending on whether an initialization process is executed when power supply is started or a recovery process is executed. With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to whether or not a suggestive effect is executed, and operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

(Means 107-12) A variable display pattern determination means (for example, a part that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern (for example, variable patterns PA3-1, PA3-2), and the variable display pattern determination means can determine a special variable display pattern when a special condition is met, and can further include a specific notification effect execution means that does not determine a special variable display pattern before the special condition is met (for example, variable patterns PA3-1, PA3-2 can be changed only when the value of the rescue time-saving counter becomes 0), and can execute a specific notification effect (for example, time-saving entry effect) that notifies the player that the special state will be controlled when the special condition is met. With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special state will be controlled when the special condition is met, and to clearly notify the player of the change in the game state, thereby increasing the interest when the special condition is met.

(Means 107-13) A variable display pattern determination means is provided for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern (e.g., variable patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4 not accompanied by a reach effect) and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern (e.g., variable patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3, PB2-1 to PB2-3 accompanied by a reach effect), and the variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a specific variable display pattern in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and where the specific display result is not obtained (see Figures 283-1 and 283-2), and when the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, the probability of determining a specific variable display pattern rather than a predetermined variable display pattern is higher. In the case where the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less is high (see FIG. 283-1 (A)), the rate of determining a specific variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display is not a specific display result is lower in a predetermined period before the special condition is established (for example, a variable period in which the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than in a period before the predetermined period (for example, a variable period in which the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 11 or more). (For example, when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 11 or more, a variable pattern is selected using the variable pattern table shown in FIG. 283-1 (B), and when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less, a variable pattern is selected using a variable pattern table in which the selection rate of the variable patterns PA2-2 and PA2-3 in FIG. 283-2 (F) and (G) is changed to 0%). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

(Means 107-14) A preview performance execution means is provided that is capable of executing a preview performance that notifies the user that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, and the preview performance execution means is capable of executing a preview performance in both cases where the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and where it is not the specific display result, and the preview performance may be executed more frequently when the display result of the variable display is the specific display result than when it is not the specific display result, and the preview performance may be executed less frequently in a specified period before the special condition is established than in a period prior to the specified period when the display result of the variable display is not the specific display result. With such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

(Means 107-15) A preview performance execution means (e.g., a portion in the performance control CPU 120 that executes step 113IWS802A) is provided that is capable of executing a preview performance that notifies the user that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, and the preview performance execution means is capable of executing a preview performance in a specific mode (e.g., "red") and a predetermined mode (e.g., "blue") in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and where the display result of the variable display is not a specific display result, the preview performance may be executed more frequently in the specific mode than in the predetermined mode when the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, and the preview performance may be executed more frequently in the specific mode during a predetermined period before the special condition is established than during a period prior to the predetermined period when the display result of the variable display is not a specific display result. With such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

(Explanation of Characteristic Part 116IW)
Next, the characteristic part 108IW of this embodiment will be described. In this characteristic part 108IW, the game state is controlled to one of low probability/low base state (normal state), low probability/high base state, high probability/high base state, and high probability/low base state. In this example, in the high base state, the average special chart fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, and the average normal chart fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, so that the probability of "normal chart hit" in the normal chart game is higher compared to the normal state. For example, while the normal chart hit probability is 10% in the normal state, the normal chart hit probability is increased to 90% in the time-saving state, making it easier for the game ball to win the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first start winning port) described later. However, this is not the only possible embodiment, and for example, in the high base state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab may be lengthened compared to the normal state, so that the game ball is more likely to win the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first start winning hole). Also, in a configuration in which the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning hole) shown in FIG. 274 is provided, in the high base state, the game ball may be more likely to win the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning hole) compared to the normal state.

In addition, in this example, the probability of hitting a jackpot (jackpot probability) is increased in the high probability state compared to the low probability state. Hereinafter, in this example, the high base state is also referred to as the time-saving state, and the high probability state is also referred to as the probability change state.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the case where the variable display result is a jackpot and the time-saving state (high base state) is controlled after the jackpot game ends, there are also cases where the variable display result is a miss and the time-saving state (high base state) is controlled based on the time-saving miss pattern being derived and displayed. Hereinafter, the time-saving state (high base state) controlled after the variable display result is a jackpot and the time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed is also referred to as the time-saving state via a miss.

Furthermore, in this example, even if the next jackpot does not occur even after the variable display has ended a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) after the power is turned on to the gaming machine or after the occurrence of a jackpot, the time-saving state (high base state) may be controlled (hereinafter, the time-saving state (high base state) controlled in this manner is also referred to as the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, or simply rescue time-saving. It is also referred to as "play time"). Note that in this example, even if the variable display has ended a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) without the next jackpot occurring after the rescue time-saving has occurred, it is not again controlled to the rescue time-saving state. However, this is not limited to such a configuration, and the configuration may be such that if the variable display has ended a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) without the next jackpot occurring after the rescue time-saving has occurred, the time-saving state may be controlled to the rescue time-saving state again. Also, for example, if the next jackpot or time-saving miss occurs after the variable display has finished a certain number of times (800 times in this example), the game may be configured to be controlled to the time-saving state (rescue time-saving).

In the high base state, (1) control to increase the probability of hitting a normal symbol, (2) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, (3) control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first start winning port) and the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port), and (4) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the special symbol may be performed, but all of the controls (1) to (4) may be performed, or some of the controls (1) to (4) may not be performed. For example, the controls (1) to (4) performed may be different or the same for the time-saving state via a jackpot, the time-saving state via a missed time-saving state, and the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state.

Also, for example, in a low base state, the probability of a normal hit may be 1/1, or the probability of a miss may be so low that the probability of a normal hit is effectively 1/1. In other words, even if the control described above in (1) is not performed when the rescue time reduction is activated, a high base state may be achieved by performing some or all of the controls described above in (2) to (4).

In addition, it is preferable to define the number of fluctuations n until control is applied to the rescue time reduction and the number of time reductions N in the rescue time reduction as follows.
2.5P≦n≦3.0P
0.4P≦N≦3.8P
(P = denominator of the jackpot probability ML, n = number of fluctuations, N = number of time reductions)
Specifically, for example, when the jackpot probability is 1/300, the number of fluctuations n is 750 to 900, and the number of time-saving times N is 120 to 1140. As described later, in this example, when the setting value "6" with the highest jackpot probability is set, the jackpot probability is about 1/270, so the number of fluctuations n is 675 to 810, and the number of time-saving times N is 108 to 1026. Also, when the setting value "1" with the lowest jackpot probability is set, the jackpot probability is about 1/319, so the number of fluctuations n is 797 to 957, and the number of time-saving times N is 127 to 1212. And, in this example, both the number of fluctuations n and the number of time-saving times N are set to "800", and the above-mentioned regulations are satisfied when they are set to any of the setting values. It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and may be configured to satisfy the above-mentioned regulations at least when the setting value "1" with the lowest jackpot probability is set.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with this characteristic part 108IW, it is possible to simultaneously execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel.

(First embodiment)
Next, a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the characteristic portion 116IW will be described.

(Type of time reduction)
284-1 is an explanatory diagram showing the types of time-saving in the first embodiment of the feature part 116IW. In this example, the time-saving state (high base state) can be distinguished into a time-saving state A that is a time-saving state via a big win (low probability/high base state), a time-saving state B that is a time-saving state via a time-saving miss (low probability/high base state), and a time-saving state C that is a time-saving state via a rescue time-saving (low probability/high base state).

Also, as shown in FIG. 284-1, in this example, if a 6R jackpot A occurs during the normal state (low base state) and the time-saving state (high base state) is controlled, the time-saving state is controlled to 100 times, and if a 6R jackpot A occurs during the time-saving state (high base state) and the time-saving state (high base state) is controlled, the time-saving state is controlled to 200 times. That is, in this example, the advantage of the time-saving state controlled after the jackpot game is different depending on the game state when the jackpot occurs. With this configuration, the advantage can be made different depending on the game state, and interest can be increased. In this example, if any of the 6R jackpots B to D occurs, regardless of whether the occurrence state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the time-saving state (high base state) is controlled until the next jackpot occurs after the jackpot game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 284-1, in this example, if a time-saving miss occurs during the normal state and the state is controlled to the time-saving state (high base state), the state is controlled to a time-saving state (high base state) with 100 times of time-saving. On the other hand, if a time-saving miss occurs during the time-saving state (high base state), the number of times of time-saving is not updated. In other words, even if a time-saving miss occurs in the time-saving state (high base state) and the remaining number of times controlled to the time-saving state (high base state) is 50 times, the remaining number of times controlled to the time-saving state (high base state) remains at 50 times and is not updated. Therefore, in this example, a time-saving miss that occurs during the time-saving state (high base state) is essentially invalid. Also, in this example, as described later, there is no case in which a time-saving miss is determined during the probability state (high probability state).

The method of controlling the number of times of time-saving when the time-saving miss occurs is not limited to that shown in FIG. 284-1. For example, when the time-saving miss occurs during the time-saving state (high base state), the remaining number of times controlled to the time-saving state (high base state) may be set again (for example, set to 100 times), or when the time-saving miss occurs only during the time-saving state (high base state) via the time-saving miss in the time-saving state (high base state), the remaining number of times controlled to the time-saving state (high base state) may be set again. Also, for example, even when a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times of time-saving may be controlled to 100 times during the normal state, and the number of times of time-saving may be controlled to 0 times during the time-saving state (i.e., the time-saving state falls to the normal state). Various modes of the method of controlling the number of times of time-saving when the time-saving miss occurs may be considered.

Also, as shown in FIG. 284-1, in this example, when rescue time-saving occurs during normal and time-saving states, the time-saving state is controlled to have 800 times the number of time-saving times. Thus, in this example, the time-saving state via rescue time-saving has a higher advantage than the time-saving state via a jackpot and the time-saving state via a missed time-saving state, because the number of time-saving times is greater.

In addition, although details will be described later, in this example, if a rescue time-saving state occurs during a time-saving state via a jackpot or a time-saving miss (high base state), the number of time-saving times is updated, whereas if a time-saving miss occurs during a time-saving state that includes a rescue time-saving state (high base state), the number of time-saving times is not updated. With this configuration, in this example, the advantage of the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving state can be secured, and the degree of rescue for the player can be increased (for example, the amount of investment by the player can be reduced).

In this example, after the game is controlled to a time-saving state of 800 times due to the rescue time-saving function, even if the 800 fluctuation display times end without a jackpot occurring, the game will not be controlled to the rescue time-saving function again.

Here, the rescue time-saving achievement rate for each set value will be explained. The rescue time-saving achievement rate is the rate at which the game is controlled to a time-saving state via rescue time-saving. The time-saving state via rescue time-saving is controlled by making n (800) fluctuations without being controlled to a jackpot game state, so the rescue time-saving achievement rate K can be calculated as follows.
K=(1-ML)n={(P-1)÷P}n
(K = rescue time reduction achievement rate, P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of activations)

For example, if the setting value is "1", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/319, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 8.1%; if the setting value is "2", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/310, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 7.5%; if the setting value is "3", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/300, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 6.9%; if the setting value is "4", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/290, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 6.3%; if the setting value is "5", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/280, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 5.7%; if the setting value is "6", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/270, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 5.1%.

In this way, the lower the set value of the jackpot probability, the higher the rescue time reduction achievement rate. This makes it possible to rescue the player even if the set value of the jackpot probability is low.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
Figures 284-2 to 284-4 are explanatory diagrams showing the variation patterns (variation times) of the special symbols and decorative symbols in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. EXT shown in Figures 284-2 to 284-4 is the second byte data of the performance control command (2 bytes) corresponding to each variation pattern.

In the examples shown in Figures 284-2 to 284-4, 14 types of first variation patterns #A to #N for the first special symbol and decorative symbol, and 13 types of second variation patterns #A to #M for the second special symbol and decorative symbol are used.

When the first special symbol variable display is executed, if it is in a low probability/low base state (normal state), the variable pattern table A for the first special symbol in a low probability/low base state shown in FIG. 284-2(A) is selected and the variable pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 284-2(A), if it is in a low probability/low base state (normal state), when the first special symbol variable display is executed, one of the first variable patterns #A to #F is determined.

In addition, when the first special symbol variation display is executed, if the state is high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), the variation pattern is determined by selecting the variation pattern table B for the first special symbol in the high probability/low base state shown in FIG. 284-2(B). As shown in FIG. 284-2(B), if the state is high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), when the first special symbol variation display is executed, one of the first variation patterns #G to #I is determined.

In the first special symbol fluctuation pattern table B shown in FIG. 284-2(B), the fluctuation time specified by each of the first fluctuation patterns #G to #I is extremely long at 10 minutes or 5 minutes, compared to the first special symbol fluctuation pattern table A shown in FIG. 284-2(A). Therefore, in this example, when the first special symbol fluctuation display is executed in the high probability/low base state (first probability fluctuation state), a long fluctuation display with a fluctuation time of 10 minutes or 5 minutes is executed.

In addition, when the first special symbol variation display is executed, if it is in a high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), the variation pattern is determined by selecting the variation pattern table C for the first special symbol in the high probability/high base state shown in FIG. 284-2(C). As shown in FIG. 284-2(C), if it is in a high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), when the first special symbol variation display is executed, in addition to the first variation patterns #A to #F, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns #J and #K.

As shown in FIG. 284-2(C), in the high probability/high base state (second probability state), if the display result of the first special symbol variation display is a miss or a small win, if the first reserved memory count is 0, the first variation pattern #J, #K with a variation time of 10 seconds is determined. On the other hand, if the first reserved memory count is 1 or more, the first variation pattern #A, #D with a variation time of 5 seconds is determined.

In addition, when the first special symbol variation display is executed, if the probability is low/base state is high, the variation pattern table D for the first special symbol in the low probability/high base state shown in FIG. 284-3(D) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 284-3(D), if the probability is low/base state is high, when the first special symbol variation display is executed, in addition to the first variation patterns #A to #F, one of the first variation patterns #J, #K, #L is determined.

As shown in FIG. 284-3 (D), in the low probability/high base state, if the display result of the first special symbol variation display is a miss or a small win, if the first reserved memory count is 0, the first variation pattern #J, #K with a variation time of 10 seconds is determined. On the other hand, if the first reserved memory count is 1 or more, the first variation pattern #A, #D with a variation time of 5 seconds is determined. Also, as described below, the low probability/high base state ends when a predetermined number of variation displays are executed, but when the variation display of the final variation of the low probability/high base state is executed, the first variation pattern #L (special variation pattern) with a variation time of 5 seconds is determined.

In addition, when the first special symbol variable display is executed, if the variable display results in a rescue time reduction (if the value of the rescue time reduction counter described below becomes 0), the variable pattern is determined by selecting the first special symbol variable pattern table E for when rescue time reduction is established, as shown in FIG. 284-3(E). As shown in FIG. 284-3(E), if the variable display results in a rescue time reduction, when the first special symbol variable display is executed, either the first variable pattern #M or #N is determined.

As shown in Figures 284-2 to 284-3, the first variation patterns #M and #N are variation patterns exclusively used when the rescue time reduction is established, and are not used for variation displays that do not result in rescue time reduction, but are used only for variation displays that result in rescue time reduction. In this example, when the first variation pattern #M (missing rescue time reduction entry) is determined, as described below, a time reduction entry presentation (see, for example, Figures 284-23 (B) and (C)) is executed to notify the player that the time reduction will be controlled (i.e., the rescue time reduction will be controlled to a low probability/high base state). With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the rescue time reduction has been established and that the time reduction will be controlled to a low probability/high base state, and it is possible to increase the interest when the rescue time reduction is established.

In addition, when the first variation pattern #N (a false jackpot with rescue time-saving entry) is determined, a presentation that is the same as the time-saving entry presentation (see, for example, Fig. 284-23 (B) and (C)) that notifies the player that the time-saving state will be entered (i.e., that the player will be controlled to a low probability/high base state as rescue time-saving) is executed, and then a presentation that notifies the player that a jackpot will be entered is executed. With this configuration, the player is informed that a jackpot will be entered after first recognizing that the rescue time-saving state has been entered, which provides a sense of surprise to the player and increases interest.

When the second special symbol variation display is executed, if it is in a high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), the variation pattern is determined by selecting the variation pattern table A for the second special symbol in a high probability/low base state shown in FIG. 284-4(A). As shown in FIG. 284-4(A), if it is in a high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), when the second special symbol variation display is executed, in addition to the second variation patterns #A to #F, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns #J and #K.

As shown in FIG. 284-4(A), in the high probability/low base state (first probability state), if the display result of the second special symbol fluctuation display is a miss or a small win, if the second reserved memory count is 0, the second fluctuation pattern #J, #K with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is determined. On the other hand, if the second reserved memory count is 1 or more, the second fluctuation pattern #A, #D with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is determined.

In addition, when the second special symbol variation display is executed, if the state is not high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), the variation pattern is determined by selecting the variation pattern table B for the second special symbol for states other than the high probability/low base state shown in FIG. 284-4(B). As shown in FIG. 284-4(B), if the second special symbol variation display is executed when the state is not high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), one of the second variation patterns #G to #I is determined.

In the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table B shown in FIG. 284-4(B), the fluctuation time specified by each of the second fluctuation patterns #G to #I is extremely long at 10 minutes or 5 minutes, compared to the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table A shown in FIG. 284-4(A). Therefore, in this example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed in a state other than the high probability/low base state (first probability variable state) (low probability/low base state, high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), low probability/high base state), a fluctuation display of a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 10 minutes or 5 minutes is executed.

In addition, when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, if the variable display is one that results in rescue time reduction (if the value of the rescue time reduction counter described below becomes 0), the variable pattern is determined by selecting the variable pattern table E for the second special pattern when rescue time reduction is established, as shown in FIG. 284-4(C). As shown in FIG. 284-4(C), if the variable display is one that results in rescue time reduction, when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, it is determined to be one of the second variable patterns #L or #M.

As shown in FIG. 284-4, the second variation patterns #L and #M are variation patterns exclusively used when the rescue time reduction is established, and are not used for variation displays that do not result in rescue time reduction, but are used only for variation displays that result in rescue time reduction. In this example, when the second variation pattern #L (missing rescue time reduction entry) is determined, a time reduction entry presentation (see, for example, FIG. 284-23 (B) and (C)) is executed to notify the player that the time reduction will be controlled (i.e., the rescue time reduction will be controlled to a low probability/high base state), as described below. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the rescue time reduction has been established and that the time reduction will be controlled to a low probability/high base state, and it is possible to increase the interest when the rescue time reduction is established. Furthermore, if the second variation pattern #M (a false jackpot with rescue time-saving entry) is determined, a presentation that is the same as the time-saving entry presentation (see, for example, Figs. 284-23 (B) and (C)) that notifies the player that a jackpot will be hit is executed after the presentation is executed, which notifies the player that a jackpot will be hit after the player first recognizes that the rescue time-saving entry has been started, thereby providing the player with a sense of surprise and increasing interest.

In this example, the time-saving state via the jackpot, the time-saving state via the miss time-saving state, and the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving state are configured to use the same fluctuation pattern table (i.e., the average fluctuation time is the same) in all cases, but this is not limited to the above. For example, different fluctuation pattern tables may be used (i.e., the average fluctuation time is different) in the time-saving state via the jackpot, the time-saving state via the miss time-saving state, and the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving state. For example, the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving state may be configured to have a higher rate of being determined as a fluctuation pattern with a shortened fluctuation time than the time-saving state via the jackpot or the miss time-saving state, and the average fluctuation time may be shorter. With this configuration, when the rescue time-saving state occurs (i.e., when a jackpot has not occurred for a long period of time), the period until the next jackpot is controlled is shortened, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed. Also, for example, in a time-saving state controlled via rescue time-saving, unlike a time-saving state controlled via a time-saving miss or a jackpot, a fluctuation pattern that results in a reach (or a reach with a particularly high expectation) at the time of a miss is not determined (or the rate at which it is determined is low), and the average fluctuation time may be shortened. With this configuration, when the time-saving state is rescued (i.e. when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), a reach (or a reach with a particularly high expectation) does not result in a miss, so a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

(First special symbol normal processing)
284-5 to 284-7 are flow charts showing the first special symbol normal processing (step S110A) in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. The first special symbol normal processing is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A. Note that the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A when the first special symbol display device 4A is not displaying the first special symbol.

In the first special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the value of the reel control process flag is a value indicating normal reel control processing (step S120) (step 061IWS50A). Note that when the value of the reel control process flag is a value indicating normal reel control processing (step S120), that is, when the value of the reel control process flag is not a value indicating the gate passage waiting processing (step S121) to small win end processing (step S128), and when neither a big win game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor a small win game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened) is in progress.

If the value of the reel control process flag indicates normal reel control processing (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 checks the value of the first reserved memory number (step 061IWS51A). Specifically, it checks the count value of the first reserved memory number counter. If the first reserved memory number is 0, it sends a first customer waiting demo display designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS52A).

If the first reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer of RAM 102 and stores it in the first random number buffer area of RAM 102 (step 061IWS53A), decreases the value of the first reserved memory number by 1 (decreases the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1), and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 061IWS54A). In other words, each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of RAM 102 is stored in the storage area corresponding to first reserved memory number = n-1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first reserved memory number are extracted always matches the order of first reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the variable display start condition is met, so the order in which each random number value was extracted can be identified. Note that in this example, the random number values stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number and the random number values stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number are also stored in such a way that the order in which they were extracted can be identified.

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the transmission of a setting value command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the performance control board 12 (step 061IWS55A). Note that in this example, the processing of step 061IWS55A is executed, so that a setting value command is sent each time the variable display starts, but a setting value command is also sent when the setting change processing (processing to change the setting value) is executed when the power is turned on.

The timing of sending the setting value command is not limited to that shown in this example, and may be, for example, configured to send a setting value command each time the variable display ends, or configured to send a setting value command during the variable display.

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS56A). Specifically, if the probability change flag and high base flag are off, it determines that the state is a low probability/low base state and transmits a low probability/low base background designation command; if the probability change flag is off and the high base flag is on, it determines that the state is a low probability/high base state and transmits a low probability/high base background designation command; if the probability change flag is on and the high base flag is on, it determines that the state is a high probability/high base state and transmits a high probability/high base background designation command; and if the probability change flag is on and the high base flag is off, it determines that the state is a high probability/low base state and transmits a high probability/low base background designation command.

The processing of step 061IWS56A (and step 061IWS56B described later) in which a background designation command corresponding to the current game state is sent to the performance control CPU 120 may be executed after the update processing of the rescue time-saving count counter and the high base count counter and the control processing related to the high base flag are performed in the first special symbol normal processing (and the second special symbol normal processing described later). That is, when the fluctuation starts, if the rescue time-saving count counter is updated and the rescue time-saving state (low probability/high base state) is controlled due to the establishment of the rescue time-saving state, a low probability/high base background designation command may be immediately sent to change the background, or if the high base count counter is updated and the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) is ended and the state is controlled to the normal state, a low probability/low base background designation command may be immediately sent to change the background.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the high probability flag is set (step 061IWS5601A). If the high probability flag is set, i.e., if the game is in a high probability state (high probability state), the game proceeds to step 061IWS5617A.

In this example, by executing the processing of step 061IWS5601A (and step 061IWS5601B described later), if the game is in a high probability state (high probability state), the update processing of the rescue time reduction counter after step 061IWS5602A (and step 061IWS5602B described later) is not executed. Therefore, in this example, if the game is in a high probability state (high probability state), the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction does not decrease even if the change display is executed, and only if the game is not in a high probability state (low probability state), the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction decreases when the change display is executed. Note that this is not limited to the configuration of this example, and the game may be configured so that the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is uniformly decreased when the change display is executed even in a high probability state (high probability state).

When the probability flag is not set, that is, when the probability is low, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 061IWS5602A). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 061IWS5617A. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the rescue time reduction counter (step 061IWS5603A). In this example, the process of step 061IWS5603A and the process of step 061IWS5603B described later are executed, and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether the first special pattern variable display is executed or the second special pattern variable display is executed. That is, in this example, the rescue time reduction counter is configured to be updated at the timing when the first special pattern variable display starts and the timing when the second special pattern variable display starts. This configuration allows for optimization of the update of the rescue time reduction counter in a configuration in which the display of the first special symbol changes and the display of the second special symbol changes are executed in parallel.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 061IWS5604A). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 126 or less (N in step 061IWS5604A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter to the EXT data and controls to send a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5605A). For example, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 1, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to send command 9501 (H) as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command. Also, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 126, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to send command 957E (H) as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command.

The game control microcomputer 100 then checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 061IWS5606A). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the game proceeds to step 061IWS5617A. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the high base flag based on the occurrence of rescue time reduction (step 061IWS5607A). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets "800" to the high base counter, which indicates the remaining total number of times that the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display that can be executed in the high base state (step 061IWS5608A).

In this example, when the value of the rescue time-saving counter subtracted at the start of the fluctuation becomes 0 by the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5608A (and steps 061IWS5606B to S5608B described later) and a rescue time-saving occurs, the time-saving state is controlled to 800 times (low probability/high base state). Also, if the state in which the rescue time-saving occurs is a time-saving state via a jackpot or a missed time-saving state (low probability/high base state), the time-saving state is controlled again to 800 times (low probability/high base state). Therefore, in this example, if the next jackpot does not occur even after the 800 fluctuation display is executed after the RAM clear processing or after the end of a jackpot game, a rescue time-saving occurs and the state is controlled to the time-saving state.

As described above, in this example, as shown in FIG. 284-1, the time-saving state via rescue time-saving has a higher advantage than the time-saving state via a jackpot or a time-saving miss because the number of time-saving times is greater. In this example, steps 061IWS5606A to S5608A (and steps 061IWS5606B to S5608B described later) are processed so that the number of time-saving times is updated if a rescue time-saving occurs during a time-saving state via a jackpot or a time-saving miss (high base state). For example, when a rescue time-saving occurs during a time-saving state via a jackpot or a time-saving miss (high base state) with 50 remaining times controlled to the time-saving state (high base state), the remaining number of times controlled to the time-saving state (high base state) is updated to 800. On the other hand, in this example, the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A (and steps 061IWS061IWS2030B to S2031B) described later is configured so that if a time-saving deviation occurs during a time-saving state (high base state) including a rescue time-saving, the number of time-saving times is not updated. For example, in a time-saving state (high base state) via rescue time-saving, when the remaining number of times controlled to the time-saving state (high base state) is 500, even if a time-saving deviation occurs, the remaining number of times controlled to the time-saving state (high base state) remains at 500 and is not updated. With this configuration, in this example, in a configuration in which the variable display of the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern are executed in parallel, the advantage of the time-saving state via rescue time-saving can be secured, and the degree of rescue for the player can be increased (for example, the amount of investment by the player can be reduced).

In this example, the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5608A (and steps 061IWS5606B to S5608B described below) and the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A (and steps 061IWS061IWS2030B to S2031B described below) are configured to control the state to a time-saving state due to the rescue time-saving effect, which is more advantageous than a time-saving effect that is not achieved, when a time-saving effect miss is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the rescue time-saving effect is achieved. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special pattern in which the rescue time-saving effect is achieved (time-saving effect miss) begins, control is performed to transition from the normal state (low probability/low base state) to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A). Then, the time-saving miss is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol where the time-saving rescue is established, but in this case the number of time-saving times is not updated due to the time-saving miss (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS2030B to S2031B). With this configuration, even if the time-saving miss is derived and displayed in the variable display where the time-saving rescue is established, the advantage of the time-saving state due to the time-saving rescue can be secured, and the degree of rescue for the player can be increased (for example, the amount of investment by the player can be reduced).

In addition, in this example, when the value of the rescue time reduction counter subtracted at the start of the fluctuation becomes 0 and a rescue time reduction occurs, the value of the high base counter is set to "800", but the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not set. If a rescue time reduction occurs, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is set to "800" when the RAM clear process is executed after the rescue time reduction occurs, or when a jackpot occurs. Therefore, in this example, even if the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) without a jackpot occurring after the rescue time reduction occurs, a rescue time reduction does not occur (i.e., the rescue time reduction is not controlled continuously to the 800th rescue time reduction).

Specifically, if the variable display is executed 800 times without a jackpot occurring during the rescue time reduction, the rescue time reduction ends and the game transitions to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (i.e., no new rescue time reduction occurs). Also, even if 800 variable displays are executed in the normal state to which the game transitions without a jackpot occurring, a rescue time reduction does not occur. After a rescue time reduction occurs, the rescue time reduction occurs again, for example, when a jackpot occurs after the rescue time reduction occurs and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is set to "800", and the next jackpot does not occur even if 800 variable displays are executed after the jackpot game ends, or when a RAM clear process is executed after the rescue time reduction occurs and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is set to "800", and the next jackpot does not occur even if 800 variable displays are executed after the RAM clear process.

In addition, the configuration is not limited to this example. For example, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is set to "800" when the rescue time reduction occurs, and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is subtracted by 1 each time a variable display is executed during the rescue time reduction. As soon as the rescue time reduction ends, a new rescue time reduction is established, and the rescue time reduction is continuously controlled until the next jackpot occurs.

In addition, for example, when the rescue time reduction is established, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "800", and the process of updating the rescue time reduction counter is not executed during the rescue time reduction. This means that even if 800 variable display cycles are executed without a jackpot occurring during the rescue time reduction, the rescue time reduction will not control the player (i.e., the player will not be continuously controlled to the rescue time reduction of 800 cycles), but if 800 variable display cycles are executed without a jackpot occurring after the rescue time reduction ends, the rescue time reduction may occur.

In addition, for example, when the rescue time reduction is established, the rescue time reduction count counter is set to "800" and the high base count counter is set to "200". In this way, if the variable display is executed 200 times during the rescue time reduction without a jackpot occurring, the rescue time reduction ends and the normal state (low probability/low base state) is entered, and if the variable display is executed 600 times without a jackpot occurring in the normal state to which the rescue time reduction is entered, the rescue time reduction may be initiated.

In addition, in this example, the processing of step 061IWS5608A (and step 061IWS5608B described later) is executed to set the number of time-saving times to 800, which is the same as the number of fluctuations until a rescue time-saving occurs, but this is not limited to the above. For example, in step 061IWS5608A (or step 061IWS5608B described later), the high base number counter may be set to a value greater than "800," or a value less than this.

In addition, in step 061IWS5608A (and step 061IWS5608B described later), the high base count counter may be configured to be set to values corresponding to multiple types of time reductions. For example, the high base count counter may be configured to be set to "100" if a rescue time reduction occurs the first time, and to be set to "800" if a rescue time reduction occurs the second time.

Also, for example, the number of time-saving times may be determined by performing a lottery process based on random numbers, and in step 061IWS5608A (and step 061IWS5608B described later), a value corresponding to the number of time-saving times determined by the lottery process may be set in the high base number counter. In this case, for example, the number of time-saving times may be determined to be 100 times with a 10% probability, and 800 times with a 90% probability. Also, when the number of time-saving times is determined by a lottery process, the number of time-saving times may be determined by using the type-determining random numbers used to determine the jackpot type and the time-saving type, or the number of time-saving times may be determined by using a dedicated random number.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a rescue fluctuation flag indicating that the fluctuation display is one in which rescue time reduction is established (step 061IWS5609A). By processing step 061IWS5609A, it becomes possible to identify that the fluctuation display is one in which rescue time reduction is established in the first fluctuation pattern setting process described below, and to determine the fluctuation pattern to be used exclusively when rescue time reduction is established.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the right-hit display 26 to start lighting (step 061IWS5610A) and also controls the transmission of a right-hit lighting start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5611A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

In this example, the processing of steps 061IWS5610A to S5611A (and steps 061IWS5610B to S5611B described later) is executed, and in this example, when the rescue time reduction is established, the right-hit indicator 26 starts to light up. That is, in this example, in a low probability/high base state, the first special symbol variable display is executed in the normal variable time, whereas the second special symbol variable display is executed in the long variable. However, since it is in a high base state, the normal symbol hit probability is high at 999/1000, and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is frequently in the open state. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to aim at the right side of the game area and perform the launch operation of the game ball (right hit) in order to make the game ball enter the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first start winning port and execute the variable display of the first special symbol, and the right-hit indicator 26 is lit up. In addition, if the right-hit indicator 26 is already lit, such as when a rescue time-saving event occurs during time-saving mode, the processing of steps 061IWS5610A to S5611A (and steps 061IWS5610B to S5611B described below) may be omitted.

If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (Y in step 061IWS5604A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets 7F (H) uniformly as the EXT data and controls to send the command 957F (H) as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5614A). Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100 (in this example, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800) (step 061IWS5615A). Whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by checking the value of the rescue time reduction counter. If the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter to the EXT data and controls to send a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5616A). For example, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 100, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to send command 9601 (H) as the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. Also, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 800, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to send command 9608 (H) as the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. Then, proceed to step 061IWS5617A.

In this example, the game control microcomputer 100 counts the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction and transmits a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command or a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the presentation control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction and execute a presentation suggesting that the rescue time reduction will be established or a presentation suggesting the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction (for example, a teasing presentation or a countdown presentation, which will be described later).

In addition, for example, unlike the configuration of this example, in a configuration in which rescue time reductions can occur consecutively, the configuration may be configured to send a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command or a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command only when a rescue time reduction occurs the first time, and not to send a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command or a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command when a rescue time reduction occurs the second time or later.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the value of the high base count counter is "0" (step 061IWS5617A), and if it is "0", proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

In this example, the state is controlled to one of the low probability/low base state, low probability/high base state, high probability/high base state, and high probability/low base state, so that when in the high base state, the state is controlled to one of the low probability/high base state and the high probability/high base state. However, in the high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), the high probability/high base state (second probability variable state) is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2269, S2274 described below), so the number of times the variable display is executed in the high base state is not managed, and the value of the high base count counter is set to "0". Therefore, when the value of the high base count counter is not "0", the state is controlled to the low probability/high base state.

In the first embodiment, as described later, the high base flag is set and the number of times the variable display is executed in the high base state is managed when the state is controlled to the low probability/high base state at the end of the jackpot game based on 6R jackpot A, when the state is controlled to the low probability/high base state via a time-saving miss, and when the state is controlled to the low probability/high base state via a rescue time-saving. In this example, when the state is controlled to the low probability/high base state, the low probability/high base state is ended and the state is transitioned to the normal state (low probability/low base state) based on the fact that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol have been executed a total of a predetermined number of times (in this example, 100 times, 200 times, or 800 times. See FIG. 284-1).

If the value of the high base count counter is not "0", i.e., if it is in a low probability/high base state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base count counter (step 061IWS5618A) and determines whether it has become "0" (step 061IWS5619A). If the value of the high base count counter has not become "0", the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A. In this example, the process of step 061IWS5618A and the process of step 061IWS5618B described later are executed, and the value of the high base count counter is updated regardless of whether the variable display of the first special pattern or the variable display of the second special pattern is executed.

When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that the game is in a high base state (step 061IWS5620A). In this example, if step 061IWS5619A (or step 061IWS5619B described later) judges to be Y, it judges that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol have been executed a total of a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times, 200 times, or 800 times; see FIG. 284-1), and the processing of step 061IWS5620A (or step 061IWS5620B described later) is executed, ending the low probability/high base state and transitioning to the normal state (low probability/low base state).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-hit display 26 should be extended until the end of the fluctuation (step 061IWS5621A). The lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is intended to continue the right-hit notification and continue the right-hit state until the fluctuation display ends.

The game control microcomputer 100 then determines whether or not the second special symbol is fluctuating during a jackpot (step 061IWS57A). Specifically, if the second jackpot flag, which indicates that a jackpot will occur based on the display of the fluctuating second special symbol, is set, it is determined that the second special symbol is fluctuating during a jackpot. If it is determined that the second special symbol is fluctuating during a jackpot, it proceeds to step 061IWS71A without carrying out any processing beyond step 061IWS58A. As a result, if the first special symbol starts fluctuating during a jackpot fluctuating second special symbol, it is configured to forcibly determine a miss regardless of whether or not a jackpot determination value has been stored.

The method of forcibly determining a miss is not limited to the above. For example, if the second special symbol is fluctuating between big wins, a process may be performed to set a miss random number (fixed value) as the random number for winning judgment in step 061IWS57A, and the process may proceed to step 061IWS59A to forcibly determine a miss regardless of which random number for winning judgment was obtained at the time of the initial winning.

In addition, for example, if the second special symbol is fluctuating as a big win in step 061IWS57A, the processing of steps 061IWS58A to S63A may not be performed, and a miss random number (fixed value) may be set as the random number for winning judgment to perform a small win judgment, forcing a miss regardless of which random number for winning judgment was obtained at the time of the initial winning.

If the second special symbol is not in the jackpot fluctuation state, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the random number for hit determination from the first random number storage buffer (step 061IWS58A) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 061IWS59A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot has occurred if the random number for hit determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. In step 061IWS59A, the game state is taken into account and a determination is made as to whether or not a jackpot has occurred is made using either the non-variable jackpot determination table or the variable jackpot determination table.

As described above, in this example, the advantage of the time-saving state controlled after a jackpot game is different depending on the game state when the jackpot occurs. Specifically, when a 6R jackpot A occurs during a normal state (low base state) and the time-saving state (high base state) is controlled, the time-saving state is controlled to have 100 times the number of time-saving times, and when a 6R jackpot A occurs during a time-saving state (high base state) and the time-saving state (high base state) is controlled, the time-saving state is controlled to have 200 times the number of time-saving times. With this configuration, in this example, the execution of the jackpot determination module in step 061IWS59A (described later and step 061IWS59B) is configured to be executed after the update process of the rescue time-saving count counter and the setting process of the high base flag in steps 061IWS5602A to S5608A (described later and step 061IWS5602B to S5608B).

Therefore, in this example, if the display result of the variable display that establishes the rescue time reduction is a jackpot, it is assumed that a jackpot has occurred in the time-saving state due to the rescue time reduction, and the advantage of the time-saving state to be controlled after the end of the jackpot game is determined. Specifically, if the display result of the variable display that establishes the rescue time reduction is a 6R jackpot A, it is assumed that a 6R jackpot A has occurred in the time-saving state due to the rescue time reduction, and it is controlled to a time-saving state with 200 time reductions after the end of the jackpot game (the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS2284, S2286 to S2287 described later). With this configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of rescue for the player due to the rescue time reduction (for example, to reduce the amount of investment by the player).

When it is decided that a jackpot has been reached (step 061IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot has been reached based on the varying display of the first special symbol (step 061IWS61A). Then, based on the random number for determining the type of jackpot, it determines whether the jackpot type is 6R jackpot A, 6R jackpot B, 6R jackpot C, or 6R jackpot D (step 061IWS62A), stores the jackpot type (step 061IWS63A), and proceeds to step 061IWS71A.

In addition, if the big win is not determined in step 061IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small win determination module (step 061IWS64A). The small win determination module is a program that determines that a small win will occur if the random number for winning determination (which may be a random number for small win determination) matches a predetermined small win determination value. If it is determined that a small win will occur (step 061IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first small win flag indicating that a small win will occur based on the variable display of the first special pattern (step 061IWS66A). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small win type based on the winning type determination random number (step 061IWS67A) and stores the small win type (step 061IWS68A). Then, it proceeds to step 061IWS71A. In addition, there may be multiple types of small wins, each with a different opening pattern (i.e., ease of winning) for the variable winning ball device 061IW17 (special winning port), or there may be only one. If there is only one type of small win, the processing of steps 061IWS67A to S68A may be omitted.

Also, if a small win is not determined in step 061IWS65A, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the high probability flag is set or not (step 061IWS69A). If the high probability flag is set (i.e., if the high probability state (high probability state) is reached), the process proceeds to step 061IWS71A. In this example, by executing the process of step 061IWS69A (and step 061IWS69B described later), if the high probability state (high probability state) is reached, it is determined that the win will be a miss without time reduction without performing the process of determining whether time reduction has been missed in step 061IWS70A (and step 061IWS70B described later).

If the probability of winning is not set (i.e., if the probability is low), the game control microcomputer 100 uses a time-saving loss judgment table to determine whether or not the time-saving loss has occurred, and performs a lottery process based on the random number for time-saving loss judgment to determine whether or not the time-saving loss has occurred (step 061IWS70A). In this case, it is determined that the time-saving loss has occurred with a probability of approximately 1/400. Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS71A.

In this example, if a time-saving deviation occurs during the time-saving state (high base state), the deviation is effectively invalidated by a configuration in which the number of time-saving times is not updated (see steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A described later). However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, when the time-saving state (high base state) is in the time-saving state (high base state), the process of determining whether or not the time-saving deviation has occurred in step 061IWS70A (and step 061IWS70B described later) is not executed, and it may be determined that the deviation has occurred without time-saving.

For example, among the time-saving state via a jackpot, the time-saving state via a time-saving miss, and the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state, in the case of the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state, the process of determining whether the time-saving miss is in step 061IWS70A (and step 061IWS70B described later) may not be executed, and in the case of the time-saving state via a jackpot and the time-saving state via a time-saving miss, the process of determining whether the time-saving miss is in step 061IWS70A (and step 061IWS70B described later). In other words, in the case of the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state, a time-saving miss may not occur, but in the case of the time-saving state via a jackpot and the time-saving state via a time-saving miss, a time-saving miss may occur.

When multiple types of time-saving misses are provided, each with a different degree of advantage (e.g., the number of times the time-saving is applied), the type of time-saving miss is determined to be the type corresponding to the value that matches the value of the type-determining random number stored in the random number buffer area. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out the type-determining random number extracted in the first start winning determination process (step S101A) and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer, and determines the type of time-saving. In this case, the determination process can be configured to use a common type-determining random number not only for the big win type determination and the small win type determination, but also for the time-saving type determination.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the stopping pattern of the special pattern according to the determination result of the jackpot type and the time-saving type (step 061IWS71A). In this case, for example, if it is determined to be a 6R jackpot A, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "1", if it is determined to be a 6R jackpot B, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "3", if it is determined to be a 6R jackpot C, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "5", if it is determined to be a 6R jackpot D, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "7", if it is determined to be a small jackpot, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "9", if it is determined to be a time-saving miss, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "2", and if it is determined to be a miss (no time-saving), the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "-". In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 stores the determined special symbol stop pattern in a stop pattern storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 061IWS72A).

Then, in step 061IWS89A, the value of the first special chart process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step 061IWS89A).

(First variation pattern setting process)
284-8 is a flow chart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first embodiment of the feature part 116IW. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the rescue variation flag is set (step 061IWS17091A).

When the rescue fluctuation flag is set, i.e., when the fluctuation display indicates that rescue time reduction is established, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the rescue fluctuation flag (step 061IWS17092A) and selects the first special symbol fluctuation pattern table E for when rescue time reduction is established, shown in FIG. 284-3 (B), as the fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 061IWS17093A). Then, it proceeds to step 061IWS1717A.

If the rescue variation flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the high probability variation flag is set (step 061IWS1710A). If the high probability variation flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the high base flag is set (step 061IWS1711A). If the high base flag is not set (i.e., if the probability/low base state is present), the game control microcomputer 100 selects the variation pattern table A for the first special symbol for the low probability/low base state shown in FIG. 284-2 (A) as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern (step 061IWS1712A). If the high base flag is set (i.e., low probability/high base state), the game control microcomputer 100 selects the first special symbol variation pattern table D for the low probability/high base state shown in FIG. 284-3 (D) as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern (step 061IWS1713A).

If the probability variable flag is set, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the high base flag is set (step 061IWS1714A). If the high base flag is not set (i.e., if the game is in a high probability/low base state), the game control microcomputer 100 selects the first special symbol fluctuation pattern table B for the high probability/low base state shown in FIG. 284-2 (B) as the fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 061IWS1715A). If the high base flag is set (i.e., if the game is in a high probability/high base state), the game control microcomputer 100 selects the first special symbol fluctuation pattern table C for the high probability/high base state shown in FIG. 284-2 (C) as the fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 061IWS1716A).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 determines which of the variation patterns shown in Figures 284-2 and 284-3 will be used based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 061IWS17093A, 061IWS1712A, S1713A, S1715A, and S1716A and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special pattern determination buffer (step 061IWS1717A).

Once the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to send a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1704A).

In addition, when the first special symbol fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) is determined in step 061IWS1717A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first fluctuation time timer and starts measuring the fluctuation time (step 061IWS1705A), and starts displaying the fluctuation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 061IWS1706A).The game control microcomputer 100 then updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation process (step 061IWS1707A).

In this example, by executing the above process, when the first special symbol variation display is executed, if the game state is a high probability/low base state, the first special symbol variation pattern table B is selected and the long variation display is executed. On the other hand, if the game state is a state other than the high probability/low base state, the first special symbol variation pattern table A is selected and the normal variation time variation display is executed. Also, in the case of the first special symbol variation display that establishes the rescue time reduction, the first special symbol variation pattern table E is selected and the variation display dedicated to when the rescue time reduction is established is executed.

(First special symbol variation process)
FIG. 284-9 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) (step 061IWS1120A). The case where the value of the accessory control process flag is a value indicating the accessory control normal process (step S120) is when the value of the accessory control process flag is not a value indicating the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small win end process (step S128), and when the big win game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) or when the small win game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened) is not being played.

If the value of the reel control process flag is a value indicating normal reel control processing (step S120), the CPU 103 performs control to send one of the display result designation commands to the performance control CPU 120 based on the decision result of whether or not a jackpot has been determined and the decision result of the jackpot type, if they have not been sent yet (step 061IWS1121A).

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first variable time timer (step 061IWS1122A), and when the first variable time timer times out (step 061IWS1123A), it performs control to send a first symbol determination command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 061IWS1130A).

If the first variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 checks whether or not a jackpot pattern is being derived and displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B (step 061IWS1125A). Whether or not a jackpot pattern is being derived and displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the value of the second special pattern process flag is a value corresponding to the second special pattern stop processing and whether or not a second jackpot flag is set, which indicates that a jackpot will be obtained based on the variable display of the second special pattern.

If the second special pattern display device 4B is not deriving and displaying a big win pattern, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the second special pattern display device 4B is deriving and displaying a small win pattern (step 061IWS1126A). Whether or not the second special pattern display device 4B is deriving and displaying a small win pattern can be determined, for example, by checking whether the value of the second special pattern process flag is a value corresponding to the second special pattern stop processing and whether or not the second small win flag, which indicates that a small win will occur based on the variable display of the second special pattern, is set. If the second special pattern display device 4B is not deriving and displaying a small win pattern, the process ends.

When the second special pattern display device 4B derives and displays a big win pattern (Y in step 061IWS1125A) or a small win pattern (Y in step 061IWS1126A), the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a first forced pattern determination command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1129A). In this case, if the first big win flag or the first small win flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the first big win flag or the first small win flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the first special pattern stop process (step S113A) (step 061IWS1130A).

By executing the processing of steps 061IWS1125A to S1126A and S1129A, in this characteristic section 116IW, if the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped, so that a situation in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol simultaneously produce a big hit or a small hit does not occur. In this case, if the variable display of the first special symbol is a forced miss, the performance control CPU 120 side controls to forcibly stop and display a miss symbol as a result of the variable display of the decorative symbol, based on the second forced symbol determination designation command sent in step 061IWS1129A.

In this example, when the second special pattern display device 4B derives and displays a stop pattern of the variable display that results in a rescue time reduction, control is not performed to send the first forced pattern determination command. Also, when the first special pattern display device 4A derives and displays a stop pattern of the variable display that results in a rescue time reduction, control is not performed to send the second forced pattern determination command (see steps 061IWS1125B to S1126B, S1129B described below). In other words, in this example, even if rescue time reduction is established by executing the variable display of the other special pattern while executing the variable display of one of the first and second special patterns, the variable display of the one special pattern is not forcibly stopped.

In this example, if the second special symbol becomes a small win while the first special symbol is being displayed, the first special symbol is forced to stop regardless of the display result, but this is not limited to the configuration. For example, if the second special symbol becomes a small win while the first special symbol is being displayed, if the display result of the first special symbol is a big win, or if it is a big win and the big win type is high in favor (for example, 6R big win B), the first special symbol is not forced to stop, and the first special symbol change process may be terminated as it is. In this case, based on the fact that the second special symbol becomes a small win, the value of the role control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small win opening pre-processing (step S126), and the game moves to a small win game. Therefore, after the next timer interruption, step 061IWS1120A is judged as N, the processing of steps 061IWS1121A to S1130A is skipped, and the first variable time timer of step 061IWS1122A is not updated. Therefore, if the variable display of the second special symbol is a small win and the variable display of the first special symbol, which is a big win with a high advantage, is being executed, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted during the small win game, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small win game ends, the value of the role control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the role control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is resumed.

Also, in this example, if the second special pattern changes to a small win while the first special pattern is being changed, and the first special pattern is being changed to a miss or small win, the first special pattern change process ends (see N in step 061IWS1127A). Therefore, even if the second special pattern changes to a small win while the first special pattern is being changed to a miss or small win, the update of the first change time timer is interrupted during the small win game, and the first special pattern continues to be changed, and when the small win game ends, the update of the first change time timer resumes.

(First special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 284-10 and FIG. 284-11 are flow charts showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 checks whether the lighting extension flag is set or not (step 061IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that was set (step 061IWS2011A). In addition, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-hit display 26 (step 061IWS2012A) and also controls to send a right-hit lighting end designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2013A).

In this example, the processing of steps 061IWS5617A to S5621A and S5617B to S5621B is executed, and the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) ends and the normal state (low probability/low base state) is entered when the variable display for the specified number of times (100th, 200th, or 800th time; see FIG. 284-1) begins, and the processing of steps 061IWS2010A to S2013A and S2010B to S2013B is executed, and the right-hit display 26 is turned off when the variable display for the specified number of times (100th, 200th, or 800th time; see FIG. 284-1) ends.

Next, the CPU 103 causes the first special pattern display device 4A to derive and display the stopping pattern of the first special pattern (step 061IWS2014A). In this case, if the first forced pattern determination command was sent in step 061IWS1129A of the first special pattern change process, the CPU 103 causes the missing pattern to be forcibly derived and displayed as the stopping pattern of the first special pattern, regardless of the result of the determination at the start of the change.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step 061IWS2015A). If the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot start flag indicating that a jackpot has started (step 061IWS2016A). The CPU 103 also clears the first jackpot flag (step 061IWS2017A).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-hit display 26 (step 061IWS2018A) and also performs control to send a right-hit lighting start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2019A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS2027A.

By executing the processing of steps 061IWS2018A and S2019A, in this example, when a jackpot occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right-hit indicator 26 starts to light up. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided to the right of the play area, it is more advantageous for the player to perform a right-hit operation during jackpot play, and the right-hit indicator 26 is turned on.

In this example, after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the jackpot game starts when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41. Therefore, the right-hit display 26 may be configured to start lighting up when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41.

If the first big win flag is not set (N in step 061IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first small win flag is set (step 061IWS2020A). If the first small win flag is set, control is performed to send a small win start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2021A). The CPU 103 also clears the first small win flag (step 061IWS2022A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the role control process flag to a value corresponding to the small win opening pre-processing (step 061IWS2026A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS2027A.

In step 061IWS2027A, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the first special pattern normal processing (step 061IWS2027A).

If the first small win flag is not set (N in step 061IWS2020A), the CPU 103 checks whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving effect will be lost (step 061IWS2030A). Note that whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving effect will be lost can be determined, for example, by checking the stopping pattern of the special pattern stored in the stopping pattern memory area in step 061IWS72A.

If it is decided that the time-saving feature should be disabled, the CPU 103 checks whether the high base flag is set (step 061IWS2031A). If the high base flag is set (i.e., the game is in a low probability/high base state), the CPU 103 proceeds to step 061IWS2036A.

When the high base flag is not set (in this example, the time-saving miss does not occur in the high probability state (high probability state), so the normal state (low probability/low base state) is in effect), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag based on the occurrence of a time-saving miss (step 061IWS2032A). The CPU 103 also sets the high base count counter to "100" (step 061IWS2033A).

In this example, by processing steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A (and steps 061IWS2030B to S2033B described below), if a time-saving error occurs in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the state is controlled to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state) with 100 time-saving times, and if a time-saving error occurs in the time-saving state (low probability/high base state), the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) continues and the number of time-saving times (i.e. the value of the high base number counter) is not updated.

In this example, the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A (and steps 061IWS2030B to S2033B described below) is configured so that if a time-saving deviation occurs during a time-saving state including rescue time-saving (high base state), the number of time-saving times is not updated. With this configuration, in this example, in a configuration in which the variable display of the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern are executed in parallel, the advantage of the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving can be secured, and the degree of rescue for the player can be increased (for example, the amount of investment by the player can be reduced).

In this example, when a time-saving miss occurs in the time-saving state (low probability/high base state), the number of time-saving times (i.e., the value of the high base number counter) is not updated. However, this is not the only possible configuration. For example, when a time-saving miss occurs in a time-saving state (low probability/high base state) via a jackpot or a time-saving miss (low probability/high base state) (or when the remaining number of times in the time-saving state is less than 100 times due to a time-saving miss), the number of time-saving times (i.e., the value of the high base number counter) may be updated and the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) with 100 time-saving times may be controlled again.

In addition, in step 061IWS2033A (and step 061IWS2033B described later), the high base count counter may be configured to be set to values corresponding to multiple types of time-saving counts. For example, if the time-saving count is not achieved the first time, the high base count counter may be set to "100," and if the time-saving count is not achieved the second time, the high base count counter may be set to "200."

Also, for example, the number of time-saving times may be determined by performing a lottery process based on random numbers, and in step 061IWS2033A (and step 061IWS2033B described below), a value corresponding to the number of time-saving times determined by the lottery process may be set in the high base number counter. In this case, for example, the number of time-saving times may be determined to be 100 times with a 90% probability, and 200 times with a 10% probability. Also, when the number of time-saving times is determined by a lottery process, the number of time-saving times may be determined by using the type-determining random numbers used to determine the jackpot type and the time-saving type, or the number of time-saving times may be determined by using a dedicated random number.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the right-hit display 26 to start lighting (step 061IWS2034A) and transmits a right-hit lighting start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2035A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS36A.

By executing the processing of steps 061IWS2034A to S2035A (and steps 061IWS2034B to S2035B described below), in this example, the right-hit indicator 26 starts to light up when the time-saving feature is missed.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step 061IWS2036A).

In this example, when the time-saving feature does not work, the value of the rescue time-saving counter is not set to "800" (i.e., the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving feature is activated is not reset), but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. The value of the rescue time-saving counter may be set to "800" (i.e., the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving feature is activated is reset) even when the time-saving feature does not work, such as when a jackpot occurs or when the rescue time-saving feature is activated.

As shown in Figures 284-10 to 284-11, in this example, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as the first special pattern, and when a time-saving miss occurs, a right-hit notification is configured to be executable to prompt the player to launch the game ball to the right of the game area. Also, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as the first special pattern, a gate notification may be configured to be executable as the right-hit notification to prompt the player to aim at the passing gate 41 and launch the game ball.

Also, when the jackpot pattern is displayed in a stopped state with the second special pattern, the right hit notification or gate notification is not executed, and when the game ball enters the first start winning hole in that state, the right hit notification or gate notification is executed (in this case, since the game ball is waiting to pass through the gate, even if the game ball enters the first start winning hole, the display of the first special pattern does not start immediately, and the first reserved memory is entered).

Conversely, when the passing of a game ball through the passage gate 41 is detected in a normal state (low probability/low base state) (i.e., when a right-hit operation is likely to be performed), a left-hit notification may be configured to be issued in a manner with a low degree of recognition (e.g., low-volume sound output or small-screen display) to encourage the player to launch the game ball to the left of the game area. On the other hand, when the winning of a game ball into the second start winning hole (or a special winning hole provided on the right side of the game area) is detected in a normal state (low probability/low base state) (i.e., when a right-hit operation is suspected to be performed intentionally), a left-hit notification may be configured to be issued in a manner with a high degree of recognition (e.g., high-volume sound output or large-screen display). With such a configuration, the launch notification can be issued accurately. In particular, with the above configuration, a mild left-hit notification may be given to a player who accidentally launches a game ball to the right of the game area in a manner that reduces awareness of the surroundings of the gaming machine, while a left-hit notification may be given to a player who intentionally performs a right-hit operation in a manner that increases awareness of the surroundings of the gaming machine. With this configuration, a player who intentionally performs a right-hit operation can be prompted by a staff member at the gaming establishment to return to a left-hit operation.

In the above case, the system may be configured to issue a left-hit notification when the number of game balls detected on the right side of the game area, such as at the passing gate 41 or the second start winning port, reaches a certain number. The system may also be configured to issue a left-hit notification when the passing gate 41 detects game balls multiple times (e.g., five times) within a specified period (e.g., one minute), and to issue a left-hit notification when the second start winning port (or a special winning port provided on the right side of the game area) detects a specific number of game balls (e.g., one ball) or more that are less than the specified number.

In addition, this feature unit 116IW displays a demo when a specific condition is met, but if a game ball is detected entering the passing gate 41 or the second start winning hole (or a special winning hole provided to the right of the game area) while the demo display is being displayed in the normal state, the execution of the demo display that was being executed may be terminated and a left-hand hit notification may be issued.

(Second special symbol normal processing)
284-12 to 284-14 are flow charts showing the second special symbol normal processing in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. The state in which the second special symbol normal processing is executed is when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing. Note that the state in which the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing is when the second special symbol display device 4B is not displaying the second special symbol.

In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the value of the reel control process flag is a value indicating normal reel control processing (step S120) (step 061IWS50B). Note that when the value of the reel control process flag is a value indicating normal reel control processing (step S120), that is, when the value of the reel control process flag is not a value indicating the gate passage waiting processing (step S121) to small win end processing (step S128), and when neither a big win game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor a small win game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened) is in progress.

If the value of the reel control process flag indicates normal reel control processing (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 checks the value of the second reserved memory number (step 061IWS51B). Specifically, it checks the count value of the second reserved memory number counter. If the second reserved memory number is 0, it sends a second customer waiting demo display designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS52B).

If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer of RAM 102 and stores it in the second random number buffer area of RAM 102 (step 061IWS53B), decreases the value of the second reserved memory number by 1 (decreases the count value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1), and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 061IWS54B). In other words, each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of RAM 102 is stored in the storage area corresponding to second reserved memory number = n-1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each second reserved memory number are extracted always matches the order of second reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. In other words, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the variable display start condition is met, so the order in which each random number value was extracted can be determined.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the transmission of a setting value command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the presentation control board 12 (step 061IWS55B). Note that in this example, the processing of step 061IWS55B is executed, so that a setting value command is sent each time the variable display starts, but a setting value command is also sent when the setting change process (processing to change the setting value) is executed when the power is turned on.

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 sends a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the presentation control CPU 120 (step 061IWS56B). Note that the specific method of sending the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step 061IWS56A of the first special pattern normal processing.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the high probability flag is set (step 061IWS5601B). If the high probability flag is set, i.e., if the game is in a high probability state (high probability state), the game proceeds to step 061IWS5617B.

If the probability of a special bonus is not set, i.e., if the probability is low, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 061IWS5602B). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0, the game control microcomputer 100 proceeds to step 061IWS5617B. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the rescue time reduction counter (step 061IWS5603B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 061IWS5604B). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 126 or less (N in step 061IWS5604B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter to the EXT data, and performs control to send a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command to the presentation control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5605B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 061IWS5606B). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the game proceeds to step 061IWS5617B. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the high base flag based on the occurrence of rescue time reduction (step 061IWS5607B). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets "800" to the high base counter, which indicates the remaining total number of times that the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display that can be executed in the high base state (step 061IWS5608B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a rescue fluctuation flag indicating that the fluctuation display indicates that rescue time reduction is established (step 061IWS5609B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the right-hit indicator 26 to start lighting up (step 061IWS5610B) and also controls the performance control CPU 120 to send a right-hit lighting start command (step 061IWS5611B). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS57B.

If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (Y in step 061IWS5604B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets 7F (H) uniformly as the EXT data and controls to send command 957F (H) as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5614B). Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100 (in this example, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800) (step 061IWS5615B). If the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter to the EXT data, and performs control to send a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5616B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the value of the high base count counter is "0" (step 061IWS5617B), and if it is "0", proceeds to step 061IWS57B.

If the value of the high base count counter is not "0", i.e., if it is in a low probability/high base state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base count counter (step 061IWS5618B) and determines whether it has become "0" (step 061IWS5619B). If the value of the high base count counter has not become "0", the process proceeds to step 061IWS57B.

When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag, which indicates that a high base state is in progress (step 061IWS5620B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-hit display 26 should be extended until the end of the fluctuation (step 061IWS5621B).

The game control microcomputer 100 then determines whether or not the first special symbol is fluctuating during a jackpot (step 061IWS57B). Specifically, if the first jackpot flag, which indicates that a jackpot will occur based on the display of the fluctuating first special symbol, is set, it is determined that the first special symbol is fluctuating during a jackpot. If it is determined that the first special symbol is fluctuating during a jackpot, it proceeds to step 061IWS71B without carrying out any processing beyond step 061IWS58B. As a result, if the second special symbol starts fluctuating during a jackpot fluctuating first special symbol, it is configured to forcibly determine a miss regardless of whether a jackpot determination value has been stored.

The method of forcibly determining a miss is not limited to the above. For example, if the first special symbol is fluctuating between jackpots, a process may be performed to set a miss random number (fixed value) as the random number for determining a win, and then the process may proceed to step 061IWS59B, forcing a miss regardless of which random number for determining a win was obtained at the time of the initial winning.

In addition, for example, if the first special symbol is fluctuating between big wins in step 061IWS57B, the processing of steps 061IWS58B to S63B may not be performed, and a miss random number value (fixed value) may be set as the random number for hit determination and a small win determination may be performed, forcing a miss regardless of which random number for hit determination was obtained at the time of the initial winning.

If the first special symbol is not in the jackpot fluctuation state, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the random number for hit determination from the second random number storage buffer (step 061IWS58B) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 061IWS59B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot has occurred if the random number for hit determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. In step 061IWS59B, the game status is taken into account and a determination is made as to whether or not a jackpot has occurred is made using either the non-variable jackpot determination table or the variable jackpot determination table.

When it is decided that a jackpot has been reached (step 061IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot has been reached based on the variable display of the second special symbol (step 061IWS61B). Then, based on the random number for determining the jackpot type, it determines whether the jackpot type is 6R jackpot A, 6R jackpot B, 6R jackpot C, or 6R jackpot D (step 061IWS62B), stores the jackpot type (step 061IWS63B), and proceeds to step 061IWS71B.

In addition, if the big win is not determined in step 061IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small win determination module (step 061IWS64B). The small win determination module is a program that determines that a small win will occur if the random number for winning determination (which may be a random number for small win determination) matches a predetermined small win determination value. If it is determined that a small win will occur (step 061IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small win flag indicating that a small win will occur based on the variable display of the second special pattern (step 061IWS66B). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small win type based on the winning type determination random number (step 061IWS67B) and stores the small win type (step 061IWS68B). Then, it proceeds to step 061IWS71B. In addition, there may be multiple types of small wins, each with a different opening pattern (i.e., ease of winning) for the variable winning ball device 061IW17 (special winning port), or there may be only one. If there is only one type of small win, the processing of steps 061IWS67B to S68B may be omitted.

Also, if a small win is not determined in step 061IWS65B, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the high probability flag is set or not (step 061IWS69B). If the high probability flag is set, i.e., if the game is in a high probability state (high probability state), the game proceeds to step 061IWS71B. In this example, by executing the processing of step 061IWS69B, if the game is in a high probability state (high probability state), it is determined that the game will be a miss without time reduction without performing the process of determining whether or not the game will be missed with time reduction in step 061IWS70B.

If the probability of winning is not set, i.e., if the probability is low, the game control microcomputer 100 uses a time-saving loss judgment table to determine whether or not the time-saving loss has occurred, and performs a lottery process based on the random number for time-saving loss judgment to determine whether or not the time-saving loss has occurred (step 061IWS70B). In this case, it is determined that the time-saving loss has occurred with a probability of approximately 1/400. Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS71B.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the stopping pattern of the special pattern according to the determination result of the jackpot type and the time-saving type (step 061IWS71B). In this case, for example, if it is determined to be a 6R jackpot A, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "1", if it is determined to be a 6R jackpot B, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "3", if it is determined to be a 6R jackpot C, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "5", if it is determined to be a 6R jackpot D, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "7", if it is determined to be a small jackpot, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "9", if it is determined to be a time-saving miss, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "2", and if it is determined to be a miss (no time-saving), the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "-". In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 stores the determined special symbol stop pattern in a stop pattern memory area provided in the RAM 102 (step 061IWS72B).

Then, in step 061IWS89B, the value of the second special chart process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step 061IWS89B).

(Second variation pattern setting process)
284-15 is a flowchart showing the second variation pattern setting process in the first embodiment of the feature part 116IW. In the second variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the rescue variation flag is set (step 061IWS17091B).

If the rescue fluctuation flag is set, i.e., if the fluctuation display indicates that rescue time reduction is established, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the rescue fluctuation flag (step 061IWS17092B) and selects the fluctuation pattern table C for the second special symbol when rescue time reduction is established, shown in FIG. 284-4 (C), as the fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 061IWS17093B). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS1717B.

If the rescue variation flag is not set, it is checked whether the high probability variation flag is set (step 061IWS1710B). If the high probability variation flag is set, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the high base flag is set (step 061IWS1711B). If the high base flag is not set (i.e., if the game is in a high probability/low base state), the game control microcomputer 100 selects the variation pattern table A for the second special symbol in a high probability/low base state shown in FIG. 284-4 (A) as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern (step 061IWS1712B). If the high probability flag has not been set (N in step 061IWS1710B) or if the high base flag has been set (Y in step 061IWS1711B), the game control microcomputer 100 selects the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table B for times other than the high probability/low base state shown in FIG. 284-4 (B) as the fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 061IWS1713B).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 determines which of the variation patterns shown in FIG. 284-4 will be used based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 061IWS1712B and S1713B and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the second special pattern determination buffer (step 061IWS1717B).

Once the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the transmission of a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1704B).

In addition, when the second special symbol fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) is determined in step 061IWS1717B, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the second fluctuation time timer and starts measuring the fluctuation time (step 061IWS1705B), and starts displaying the fluctuation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 061IWS1706B). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol fluctuation processing (step 061IWS1707B).

In this example, by executing the above process, when the second special symbol variation display is executed, if the game state is a high probability/low base state, the second special symbol variation pattern table A is selected and the normal variation time variation display is executed. On the other hand, if the game state is a state other than the high probability/low base state, the second special symbol variation pattern table B is selected and the long variation variation display is executed. Also, in the case of the second special symbol variation display that establishes the rescue time reduction, the second special symbol variation pattern table C is selected and the variation display dedicated to when the rescue time reduction is established is executed.

(Second special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 284-16 is a flow chart showing the second special symbol variation process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the value of the reel control process flag is a value indicating the reel control normal process (step S120) (step 061IWS1120B). The case where the value of the reel control process flag is a value indicating the reel control normal process (step S120) is when the value of the reel control process flag is not a value indicating the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small win end process (step S128), and when the game is not a big win game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) or a small win game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened).

If the value of the reel control process flag is set to a value indicating normal reel control processing (step S120), the CPU 103 performs control to send one of the display result designation commands to the performance control CPU 120 based on the decision result of whether or not a jackpot has been determined and the decision result of the jackpot type, if they have not been sent yet (step 061IWS1121B).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second variable time timer (step 061IWS1122B), and when the second variable time timer times out (step 061IWS1123B), it performs control to send a second symbol determination command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 061IWS1130B).

If the second variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the first special symbol display device 4A is displaying a jackpot symbol (step 061IWS1125B). Whether or not the first special symbol display device 4A is displaying a jackpot symbol can be determined, for example, by checking whether the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing and whether or not the first jackpot flag, which indicates that a jackpot will occur based on the variable display of the first special symbol, is set.

If the first special pattern display device 4A is not deriving and displaying a big win pattern, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the first special pattern display device 4A is deriving and displaying a small win pattern (step 061IWS1126B). Whether or not the first special pattern display device 4A is deriving and displaying a small win pattern can be determined, for example, by checking whether the value of the first special pattern process flag is a value corresponding to the first special pattern stop processing and whether or not the first small win flag, which indicates that a small win will occur based on the variable display of the first special pattern, is set. If the first special pattern display device 4A is not deriving and displaying a small win pattern, the process ends.

When the first special pattern display device 4A derives and displays a big win pattern (Y in step 061IWS1125B), or when the first special pattern display device 4A derives and displays a small win pattern (Y in step 061IWS11256), the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a second forced pattern determination command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1129B). In this case, if the second big win flag or the second small win flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the second big win flag or the second small win flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the second special pattern stop processing (step 061IWS1130B).

By executing the processing of steps 061IWS1125B to S1126B and S1129B, in this characteristic section 116IW, if the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit or a small hit while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped, so that a situation in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol simultaneously produce a big hit or a small hit does not occur. In this case, if the variable display of the second special symbol is a forced miss, the performance control CPU 120 side controls to forcibly stop the display of a miss symbol as a result of the variable display of the decorative symbol, based on the second forced symbol determination designation command sent in step 061IWS1129B.

In this example, if the first special symbol becomes a small win while the second special symbol is being displayed, the second special symbol is forced to stop regardless of the display result, but this is not limited to the configuration. For example, if the first special symbol becomes a small win while the second special symbol is being displayed, and the display result of the second special symbol is a big win and the big win type has a high advantage (for example, 6R big win C), the second special symbol is not forced to stop, and the second special symbol change process may be terminated as it is. In this case, based on the fact that the first special symbol becomes a small win, the value of the role control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small win opening pre-processing (step S126), and the game moves to a small win game. Therefore, after the next timer interruption, step 061IWS1120B is judged as N, the processing of steps 061IWS1121B to S1130B is skipped, and the second variable time timer of step 061IWS1122B is not updated. Therefore, if the variable display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variable display of the second special symbol that will result in a sure-win is being executed, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted during the small hit game, and the variable display of the second special symbol continues to be executed. Then, when the small hit game ends, the value of the reel control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the reel control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is resumed.

Also, in this example, if the first special pattern changes to a small win while the second special pattern is being changed, and the second special pattern is being changed, which would result in a miss or small win, the second special pattern change process ends (see N in step 061IWS1127B). Therefore, even if the first special pattern changes to a small win while the second special pattern is being changed, which would result in a miss or small win, the update of the second change time timer is interrupted during the small win game, and the second special pattern change display continues to be executed, and when the small win game ends, the update of the second change time timer resumes.

In this example, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the player aims the game ball at the left side of the play area and shoots it (hits it from the left) in order to make the game ball enter the winning ball device 061IW6Aa, which serves as the first start winning hole, and cause the first special symbol to change and be displayed. In principle, the game ball will not enter the second start winning hole located on the right side of the play area and cause the second special symbol to change and be displayed. However, the player may mistakenly perform the shooting operation (or may intentionally aim for the second special symbol, which is more advantageous than the first special symbol, even if a long change is performed), and the second special symbol may change and be displayed. In other words, there is a risk that a jackpot symbol will be derived and displayed in a change and displayed that the player does not intend, or that the player may intentionally aim for the second start winning hole.

Therefore, in this example, during the execution of the variable display of one of the first and second special symbols, a losing symbol can be forcibly derived and displayed in the variable display of the other special symbol based on the derived and displayed small winning symbol in the variable display of the other special symbol. For example, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), even if the player wins in the second start winning hole unintentionally and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the variable display of the second special symbol will be forcibly stopped at the losing symbol if the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is a small winning. Also, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), even if the player intentionally performs a firing operation (right hit) aiming for a win in the second start winning hole and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is a long fluctuation (for example, a fluctuation time of 10 minutes), so the fluctuation efficiency is extremely poor. Then, if the first special symbol is displayed and a small win symbol is derived during the second special symbol display, the second special symbol display is forcibly stopped at a losing symbol. This configuration makes it possible to avoid the big win symbol being derived from the unintended special symbol display, and to minimize the effect of the player's intentional strategy.

(Second special symbol stop processing)
284-17 and 284-18 are flow charts showing the second special symbol stop processing. In the second special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 checks whether the lighting extension flag is set or not (step 061IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that was set (step 061IWS2011B). In addition, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-hit display 26 (step 061IWS2012B) and also controls to send a right-hit lighting end designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2013B).

Next, the CPU 103 causes the second special symbol display device 4B to derive and display the stopping symbol of the second special symbol (step 061IWS2014B). In this case, if the second forced symbol determination command was sent in step 061IWS1129B of the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 causes the second special symbol to be forcibly derived and displayed as the stopping symbol of the second special symbol, regardless of the result of the determination at the start of the variation.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second jackpot flag is set (step 061IWS2015B). If the second jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot start flag (step 061IWS2016B). The CPU 103 also clears the second jackpot flag (step 061IWS2017B).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-hit display 26 (step 061IWS2018B) and also performs control to send a right-hit lighting start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2019B). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS2027B.

By executing the processing of steps 061IWS2018B and S2019B, in this example, when a jackpot occurs in the variable display of the second special pattern, the right-hit indicator 26 starts to light up. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided to the right of the play area, it is more advantageous for the player to perform a right-hit operation during jackpot play, and the right-hit indicator 26 is turned on.

If the second big win flag is not set (N in step 061IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether the second small win flag is set (step 061IWS2020B). If the second small win flag is set, the CPU 103 performs control to send a small win start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2021B). The CPU 103 also clears the second small win flag (step 061IWS2022B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the reel control process flag to a value corresponding to the pre-processing for the small win (step 061IWS2026B).Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the normal processing for the second special symbol (step 061IWS2027B).

If the second small win flag is not set (N in step 061IWS2020B), the CPU 103 checks whether it has been decided that the time reduction has been missed (step 061IWS2030B).

If it is decided that the time-saving feature should be disabled, the CPU 103 checks whether the high base flag is set (step 061IWS2031B). If the high base flag is set (i.e., the game is in a low probability/high base state), the process proceeds to step 061IWS2036B.

If the high base flag is not set (i.e., in the normal state (low probability/low base state)), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag based on the occurrence of a time-saving miss (step 061IWS2032B). The CPU 103 also sets the high base count counter to "100" (step 061IWS2033B).

Next, the CPU 103 controls the right-hit display 26 to start lighting (step 061IWS2034B) and transmits a right-hit lighting start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2035B). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS36B.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal processing of the second special pattern (step 061IWS2036B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal processing of the second special pattern (step 061IWS2037B).

(External output signal)
FIG. 284-19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal output from the pachinko game machine 1. In this example, in step S23, a process is performed to output a signal as shown in FIG. 284-19 to an external device such as a hall management computer. As shown in FIG. 284-19, in this example, the external output signals are a jackpot 1 signal, a jackpot 2 signal, a jackpot 3 signal, a jackpot 4 signal, a fluctuation stop signal, a security signal, a door open signal, a prize ball signal, and an out ball signal. Among these, the jackpot 1 signal is a signal output during a jackpot game. The jackpot 2 signal is a signal output during a jackpot game and during a high base state. The jackpot 3 signal is a signal output during a pattern determination period when the time reduction is not performed. The jackpot 4 signal is a signal output at the start of a variable display that becomes a rescue time reduction. The fluctuation stop signal is a signal output at the start of a pattern determination period. The security signal is a signal output at the time of error detection. The door open signal is a signal outputted to the outside when the door is opened. The prize ball signal is a signal outputted to the outside when 10 prize balls are dispensed. The out ball signal is a signal outputted to the outside when 10 out balls are detected. In an external device such as a hall management computer, the number of jackpots can be measured by the jackpot 1 signal, the number of consecutive wins can be measured by the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal, the number of high base control via time reduction misses can be measured by the jackpot 3 signal, and the number of high base control via rescue time reduction can be measured by the jackpot 4 signal.

In this example, in addition to the case where the high base state is transitioned to when the time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the high base state may also be transitioned to when the time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, so when the time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the external output of the jackpot 3 signal is started at the end of the pattern determination period. Also, since the high base state may also be transitioned to when the time-saving rescue is activated, when a variable display that results in a time-saving rescue is executed, the external output of the jackpot 4 signal is started at the start of the variable display. Note that, for example, when the high base state is transitioned to when the time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, a signal may be output from a dedicated terminal different from the terminal that outputs the jackpot signal 2, so that it may be possible to externally identify that the transition to the time-saving state was triggered by the time-saving miss pattern being derived and displayed. Also, for example, the jackpot 2 signal may be output externally during jackpot play and during a high probability/high base state, and the jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal may be output externally at the start of a low probability/high base state (or during a low probability/high base state), making it possible to distinguish between a high probability/high base state and a low probability/high base state externally.

In this example, when the rescue time is reduced, the external output of the jackpot 4 signal is started in response to the start of the variable display that results in the rescue time reduction, and the variable stop signal is output to the outside at the start of the pattern determination period in response to the end of the variable display. With this configuration, a signal that can be specified to be controlled to a high base state based on the rescue time reduction can be output to the outside at an appropriate timing. In addition, when the jackpot 4 signal and the variable stop signal are output, it is possible to avoid missing signals externally. In addition, the number of times that the rescue time is reduced by the output of the jackpot 4 signal can be specified externally. In this way, it is possible to specify the trigger, timing, and number of times that the high base state is controlled in an external device such as a hall management computer, so that it is possible to perform operational analysis of gaming machines in gaming establishments, such as the actual operational rescue time reduction achievement rate and the type of customer demographic when the number of rescue times is reached.

In this example, when the variable display that results in the rescue time-saving starts, the high base flag is set and the state transitions to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state). However, if the high base flag is set and the state transitions to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) when the variable display that results in the rescue time-saving stops being displayed or at the start or end of the pattern determination period, for example, the external output of the jackpot 4 signal may be started when the high base flag is set and the state transitions to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state).

The jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal may be configured to be output even during jackpot play. In addition, while this example shows a case where separate external output signals (jackpot 3 signal and jackpot 4 signal) are output when the time-saving feature is missed and when the time-saving feature is rescued, a shared external output signal may be output.

The jackpot 3 signal and jackpot 4 signal may also be configured to be output at a timing after the fluctuation stop signal is output during the pattern determination period.

For example, the change stop signal may be output at the start of the pattern determination period of the losing pattern, and the jackpot 3 signal may be output during the pattern determination period after the change stop signal is output, or the change stop signal may be output at the start of the pattern determination period of the variable display that results in a rescue time reduction, and the jackpot 4 signal may be output during the pattern determination period after the change stop signal is output. This configuration makes it possible to avoid signals being missed externally when the change stop signal and the jackpot 3 signal or jackpot 4 signal are output simultaneously.

The jackpot 3 signal may be configured to continue to be output even during a high base state via a time-saving miss. The jackpot 4 signal may be configured to continue to be output even during a high base state via a rescue time-saving. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to appropriately determine the type of time-saving even during a high base state.

(Game state transition)
Next, the transition of the game state in the first embodiment of the feature part 116IW will be described. FIG. 284-20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the way of transition of the game state in the first embodiment of the feature part 116IW. In the first embodiment, in the low probability/low base state (normal state), the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal variable time, whereas the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the long variable. Also, since it is in the low base state, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is low at 1/1000, and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is opened less frequently. Therefore, in order to make the game ball win the winning ball device 061IW6Aa as the first start winning hole and execute the variable display of the first special symbol, the player performs the launch operation of the game ball (left shot) aiming at the left side of the game area. Therefore, in the low probability/low base state (normal state), the start winning occurs mainly in the winning ball device 061IW6Aa as the first start winning hole, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Also, since the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a jackpot occurs in the low probability/low base state, mainly a 6R jackpot A or a 6R jackpot B occurs.

As shown in FIG. 284-20, when a 6R jackpot B occurs in a low probability/low base state, if the game ball enters V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will transition to a high probability/low base state (first special probability state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/low base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2240). However, if the game ball does not enter V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, if a 6R jackpot A occurs in a low probability/low base state, the game will transition to a low probability/high base state after the jackpot play ends, and the low probability/high base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the variable display ends a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) (see steps 061IWS2284, S2286, S2288).

As shown in FIG. 284-20, even if a miss occurs in the low probability/low base state (normal state), if a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the state is controlled to the low probability/high base state (see steps 061IWS2032A, S2032B). Furthermore, even if a miss occurs, if a rescue time-saving occurs (after RAM clear processing or after a jackpot game, when the number of fluctuations reaches 800 without the next jackpot occurring), the state is controlled to the low probability/high base state (see steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B).

When the game moves to the high probability/low base state (first probability change state), the second special symbol is displayed in the normal time, whereas the first special symbol is displayed in the long time. Also, because the game is in the low base state, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is low at 1/1000, and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is opened less frequently. Therefore, in order to make the game ball enter the winning ball device 061IW6B as the second start winning hole and to display the second special symbol, the player aims at the right side of the game area and performs the firing operation (right shot). Therefore, in the high probability/low base state (first probability change state), the starting winning occurs mainly in the winning ball device 061IW6B as the second start winning hole, and the second special symbol is mainly displayed. In addition, because the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a jackpot occurs in a high probability/low base state, a 6R jackpot C or a 6R jackpot D will mainly occur.

As shown in FIG. 284-20, when a 6R jackpot C occurs in a high probability/low base state, if the game ball enters V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will transition to the high probability/low base state (first special probability state) again after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/low base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2253 to S2260). However, if the game ball does not enter V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, if a 6R jackpot D occurs in a high probability/low base state, after the jackpot play ends, the game transitions to a high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), and the high probability/high base state (second probability variable state) is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2269, S2274).

When the game moves to the high probability/high base state (second probability state), the first special symbol is displayed in the normal display time, whereas the second special symbol is displayed in the long display time. However, since the game is in the high base state, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is high at 999/1000, and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is frequently in the open state. Therefore, in order to make the game ball enter the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first start winning hole and to cause the first special symbol to be displayed, the player aims at the right side of the game area and performs the firing operation (right shot). Therefore, in the high probability/high base state (second probability state), the start winning mainly occurs in the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first start winning hole, and the first special symbol is mainly displayed. In addition, because the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a jackpot occurs in a high probability/high base state, a 6R jackpot A or a 6R jackpot B will mainly occur.

As shown in FIG. 284-20, when a 6R jackpot B occurs in a high probability/high base state, if the game ball enters V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will transition to a high probability/low base state (first high probability state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/low base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2240). However, if the game ball does not enter V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, if a 6R jackpot A occurs in a high probability/high base state, after the jackpot game ends, the state transitions to a low probability/high base state, and the low probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the variable display ends a predetermined number of times (200 times in this example) (see steps 061IWS2284-S2286, S2288).

When the game moves to the low probability/high base state, the first special symbol is displayed in the normal display time, whereas the second special symbol is displayed in the long display time. However, because the game is in the high base state, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is high at 999/1000, and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is frequently in the open state. Therefore, in order to make the game ball enter the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first start winning hole and to cause the first special symbol to be displayed, the player aims the game ball at the right side of the game area and performs the shooting operation (right shot). Therefore, in the low probability/high base state, the start winning mainly occurs in the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first start winning hole, and the first special symbol is mainly displayed. In addition, because the first special symbol is primarily displayed in a variable manner, if a jackpot occurs in a low probability/high base state, a 6R jackpot A or 6R jackpot B will typically occur.

As shown in FIG. 284-20, when a 6R jackpot B occurs in a low probability/high base state, if the game ball enters V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will transition to a high probability/low base state (first special probability state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/low base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2240). However, if the game ball does not enter V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, if a 6R jackpot A occurs in a low probability/high base state, the game will transition back to the low probability/high base state after the jackpot play ends, and the low probability/high base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the variable display ends a predetermined number of times (200 times in this example) (see steps 061IWS2284-S2286, S2288).

Also, as shown in FIG. 284-20, in the case where a rescue time-saving mode is activated in the low probability/high base state (after the RAM clear process or after a jackpot game, when the number of fluctuations reaches 800 without the occurrence of another jackpot), the game is again controlled to the low probability/high base state with the time-saving number of 800 (see steps 061IWS5607A-S5608A, S5607B-S5608B).

Also, as shown in FIG. 284-20, when the variable display of the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern are executed a total of a predetermined number of times in the low probability/high base state, the low probability/high base state ends and transitions to the low probability/low base state (normal state).

Specifically, when the low probability/high base state is controlled via a time-saving miss, if the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display are executed a total of 100 times, the low probability/high base state ends and the state transitions to the low probability/low base state (normal state) (steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A, S5617A to S5620A, S2030B to S2033B, S5617B to S5620B).

In addition, if the state is controlled to a low probability/high base state via a jackpot that occurs in a low base state, when the display of the first special pattern changes and the display of the second special pattern changes are executed a total of 100 times, the low probability/high base state ends and the state transitions to a low probability/low base state (normal state) (steps 061IWS2284, S2286, S2288, S5617A-S5620A, S5617B-S5620B). Also, if the game is controlled to a low probability/high base state via a jackpot that occurred in a high base state, when the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol changes are executed a total of 200 times, the low probability/high base state ends and the game transitions to a low probability/low base state (normal state) (steps 061IWS2284, S2286, S2287, S5617A-S5620A, S5617B-S5620B).

In addition, when the low probability/high base state is controlled via the rescue time reduction, if the display of the first special symbol changes and the display of the second special symbol changes are executed a total of 800 times, the low probability/high base state ends and the state transitions to the low probability/low base state (normal state) (steps 061IWS5607A to S5608A, S5617A to S5620A, S5607B to S5608B, S5617B to S5620B).

Also, as shown in FIG. 284-20, in this example, in the high probability/low base state (first probability state), a 6R jackpot C is generated and the state is controlled again to the high probability/low base state (first probability state), or a 6R jackpot D is generated and the state is controlled to the high probability/high base state (second probability state), so even if a jackpot occurs, there is a 100% probability of the state returning to the probability state. Therefore, in the high probability/low base state (first probability state), it can be said that at least two more jackpots are guaranteed to occur during the probability state (two loops). On the other hand, in the high probability/high base state (second probability state), if a 6R jackpot B occurs, the state is controlled to the high probability/low base state and the probability state continues, but if a 6R jackpot A occurs, the state transitions to the low probability/high base state and the probability state ends. Therefore, in the high probability/high base state (second probability state), it can be said that only one more jackpot is guaranteed to occur during the probability state (one loop).

In this example, the jackpot types are all 6-round jackpots, 6R jackpots A to D, but this is not the only possible embodiment. For example, this example shows a case where the jackpot is controlled to a low probability/high base state when a 6R jackpot A occurs, but even when controlled to the same low probability/high base state, it may be configured to have a 4-round jackpot, 4R jackpot A, or a 10-round jackpot, 10R jackpot A, with different numbers of rounds. Similarly, even when controlled to the same high probability/high base state, it may be configured to have a 4-round jackpot, 4R jackpot D, or a 10-round jackpot D, with various possible embodiments.

As shown in Figures 284-2 to 284-4 and 284-19, in this example, in the low probability/low base state (normal state), low probability/high base state, and high probability/high base state (second probability state), the first special symbol's variable display is executed in a normal variable time, whereas the second special symbol's variable display is executed in a long variable time. In other words, the first special symbol's variable display is executed in a shorter variable time (or the probability of execution is high) than the second special symbol's variable display. Thus, in this example, the low probability/low base state (normal state), low probability/high base state, and high probability/high base state (second probability state) are states in which the first special symbol's variable display is more likely to have a shorter variable time than the second special symbol's variable display (hereinafter, such a state is also referred to as the first shortened state). In this example, in the low probability/low base state (normal state), low probability/high base state, and high probability/high base state (second probability change state) that are the first shortened state, the percentage of the first special symbol variable display having a shorter variable time than the second special symbol variable display is 100%, but the configuration is not limited to such a percentage. For example, in the first shortened state, the percentage of the first special symbol variable display having a shorter variable time than the second special symbol variable display may be lower than 100%, but may be configured to be at least higher than the second shortened state described below.

In addition, in this example, in the high probability/low base state (first probability state), the first special symbol is displayed in a long fluctuation, whereas the second special symbol is displayed in a normal fluctuation time. In other words, the second special symbol is displayed in a shorter fluctuation time than the first special symbol (or the rate at which it is displayed is high). Therefore, in this example, the high probability/low base state (first probability state) is a state in which the second special symbol is displayed in a shorter fluctuation time than the first special symbol (hereinafter, such a state is also referred to as the second shortened state). In this example, in the high probability/low base state (first probability state) which is the second shortened state, the rate at which the second special symbol is displayed in a shorter fluctuation time than the first special symbol is 100%, but the present invention is not limited to such a ratio configuration. For example, in the second shortened state, the percentage of times that the second special symbol's variable display has a shorter variable time than the first special symbol's variable display may be configured to be lower than 100%, but at least higher than in the first shortened state.

In this example, in the first shortened state, the image display device 5 mainly displays the decorative pattern in response to the display of the first special pattern, and in the second shortened state, the image display device 5 mainly displays the decorative pattern in response to the display of the second special pattern.

As described above, in this example, even if the display of one of the first and second special symbols is being changed and the other special symbol is changed, the display of the one special symbol is not forcibly stopped. In this configuration, for example, when the display of the second special symbol is being changed and a rescue time reduction is achieved by the display of the other special symbol, in the normal state, if the display of the second special symbol is being changed and a rescue time reduction is achieved by the display of the first special symbol, and the display is controlled to the rescue time reduction (high base state), the display of the second special symbol being changed continues without being forcibly stopped. Here, as the control of the rescue time reduction (high base state), in addition to the control related to the normal symbols, such as the control to increase the probability of winning the normal symbol, the control to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the control related to the normal symbol, such as the control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first starting winning port), if the control related to the special symbols is performed, such as the control to shorten the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (i.e., control to a second shortened state in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is more likely to have a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation display of the first special symbol), the fluctuation display of the second special symbol with the shortened fluctuation time (i.e., improved fluctuation efficiency) cannot be executed until the fluctuation display of the second special symbol being executed (for example, a fluctuation time of 10 minutes) ends, and the benefit of the rescue time reduction cannot be enjoyed. In such a state, even if the rescue time reduction is controlled, the progress of the game will be significantly delayed and interest will decrease.

In this example, when the rescue time reduction is established, the rescue time reduction (high base state) is controlled by shortening the change time of the first special symbol (i.e., the change display of the first special symbol is controlled to the first shortened state (in this example, low probability/high base state) in which the probability that the change display of the first special symbol will be a change display with a shorter change time than the change display of the second special symbol) in addition to the control of the normal symbols. With this configuration, when the rescue time reduction is established, it is controlled to the first shortened state (low probability/high base state), so even if the change display of the second special symbol (long change) that is being executed continues, it is possible to execute the change display of the first special symbol with a shortened change time (i.e., improved change efficiency), and the benefit of the rescue time reduction can be enjoyed. In addition, when the rescue time reduction is controlled, the game can be played smoothly, and interest can be increased.

The display of the second special symbol (long fluctuation) that is currently in progress continues even after the transition to the first shortened state's rescue time reduction (high base state), but if a jackpot occurs due to the display of the first special symbol with the shortened fluctuation time, it will be forcibly stopped at the losing symbol (e.g., this corresponds to the processing of steps 061IWS1125B, S1129B).

(Example of control of game state)
Next, an example of control of the game state will be described. Fig. 284-21 is a time chart for explaining an example of control of the game state in the first embodiment.

Of Figures 284-21, Figure 284-21(A) shows an example of control of the game state when, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the display of a second special symbol that results in a time-saving miss is started, and while the display of the second special symbol is being displayed, the display of a first special symbol that results in a rescue time-saving miss (no time-saving) is started.

As shown in Figure 284-21 (A), when the variable display of the first special pattern that establishes the rescue time-saving starts (T1 timing), control is performed to transition from the normal state (low probability/low base state) to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A).

After that, as shown in FIG. 284-21(A), a losing symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol that establishes the rescue time reduction (T2 timing), but at this time, the losing symbol is not forcibly derived and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol that is being executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 284-21(A), after the rescue time-saving effect is established and a transition is made to the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving effect (low probability/high base state), the time-saving effect is deduced and displayed in the display of the second special symbol that started before the display of the first special symbol that established the rescue time-saving effect (T3 timing), but at this time the number of time-saving effects is not updated due to the time-saving effect not being achieved (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS2030B to S2031B). In other words, the time-saving effect due to the rescue time-saving effect, which has a higher number of time-saving effects and is more advantageous than the time-saving effect not being achieved, is maintained.

In the example shown in FIG. 284-21(A), the display result of the first special symbol variable display for which the rescue time-saving effect is established is a miss (no time-saving effect), but even if the display result of the first special symbol variable display for which the rescue time-saving effect is established is a miss for the time-saving effect, the control of the game state does not change. Specifically, when the first special symbol variable display for which the rescue time-saving effect is established (miss for the time-saving effect) starts (T1 timing), control is performed to transition from the normal state (low probability/low base state) to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A). Then, the miss for the time-saving effect is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol for which the rescue time-saving effect is established (T1 timing), but at this time the number of time-saving effects is not updated due to the miss for the time-saving effect (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS2030B to S2031B). In other words, the time-saving state due to the rescue time-saving feature, which has more time-saving attempts and is more advantageous than the time-saving feature that is missing, will be maintained.

Of Figures 284-21, Figure 284-21(B) shows an example of control of the game state when the time-saving state due to the rescue time-saving ends at the start of a variable display that results in a time-saving error.

As shown in FIG. 284-21 (B), in the time-saving state due to rescue time-saving (low probability/high base state), when the variable display that is the time-saving deviation starts, the high base count counter is updated and the value becomes 0 (t1 timing), control is performed to end the rescue time-saving and transition to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS5617A to S5620A).

After that, as shown in FIG. 284-21 (B), when the display of the first special pattern indicates that the time-saving feature has failed (t2 timing), control is performed to transition from the normal state to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state) due to the time-saving feature having failed (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A).

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 284-22 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 280. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads out a variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 100IWS801). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop pattern) of the decorative pattern according to the variable pattern command read out in step 100IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 100IWS802). That is, the performance control CPU 120 executes the process of step 100IWS802, thereby realizing a display result determination means that determines the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the stop pattern of the decorative pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. In addition, when a pseudo consecutive win is specified by the variation pattern command, the performance control CPU 120 also determines a chance pattern (for example, a combination of patterns that are not a reach but are one pattern away from the jackpot pattern, such as "223" or "445") as a provisional stop pattern during the pseudo consecutive win in step 100IWS802. The performance control CPU 120 stores data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. In addition, in step 100IWS802, the performance control CPU 120 may determine whether or not a jackpot has been reached based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop pattern of the decorative pattern based only on the variation pattern command.

In step 100IWS802, for example, if the received display result designation command indicates a 6R jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative patterns in which three symbols are the same even numbers as the stopping symbols (normal jackpot pattern). Also, for example, if the received display result designation command indicates a 6R jackpot B to D, the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative patterns in which three symbols are the same odd numbers as the stopping symbols (variable jackpot pattern). Also, if the received display result designation command indicates a "small jackpot", the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative patterns of "135" as the stopping symbols (small jackpot pattern).

In the case of a "miss", a combination of decorative symbols other than those mentioned above is determined. However, if a reach effect is involved, a combination of decorative symbols where the two symbols on the left and right are aligned is determined. Also, even if there is a miss, if it is a "time-saving miss", a combination of decorative symbols of the miss symbols including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) is determined. If there are multiple types of time-saving misses, the system may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of the miss symbols including different special symbols (for example, a heart-shaped symbol or a diamond-shaped symbol) according to the type of time-saving miss.

However, in this example, even if a time-saving miss occurs in a high base state, it is effectively invalidated, so when in a high base state, even if the received display result designation command indicates a "time-saving miss," the combination of decorative patterns for a "miss" is displayed, rather than a combination of decorative patterns for a miss pattern including a special pattern (e.g., a star pattern). Note that in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, even if a time-saving miss occurs in a high base state, a special pattern corresponding to the time-saving miss is displayed.

The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for determining the stopping pattern, and determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern using a stopping pattern determination table in which data indicating the combination of decorative patterns is associated with a numerical value. In other words, the stopping pattern is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative patterns that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

As for the decorative patterns, stopping patterns that evoke a jackpot (a combination of the same patterns on the left, center, and right) are called jackpot patterns. Among jackpot patterns, stopping patterns that evoke a chance jackpot (a combination of the same odd-numbered patterns on the left, center, and right) are called chance jackpot patterns. Among jackpot patterns, stopping patterns that evoke a normal jackpot (non-chances jackpot) (a combination of the same even-numbered patterns on the left, center, and right) are called non-chances jackpot patterns. Among jackpot patterns, stopping patterns that evoke a miss are called miss patterns.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the execution of a preview performance to be executed during the display of the fluctuation (step 108IWS802A). As a preview performance, for example, a timer performance can be executed in which a countdown is started after the fluctuation starts, and when the count reaches "0", a performance image suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot is displayed, and in step 108IWS802A, the execution setting of the timer performance can be set.

In this example, the preview effect can be executed in both cases where the display result is a jackpot or a miss, and is configured so that the preview effect is executed more frequently in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a miss. Therefore, the execution of the preview effect suggests that there is a high probability of a jackpot.

In this configuration, the rate at which the preview performance is executed is lower in the predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than in the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is more than 10). With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a preview performance is executed but does not result in a jackpot during the predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) . In addition, the pre-reading preview performance may also be configured to be executed at a lower rate in the predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than in the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is more than 10).

In addition, if a display (e.g., a countdown display) that suggests the upcoming rescue time reduction can be executed during a specified period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when there are 10 or fewer plays remaining until the rescue time reduction), then by restricting the execution of a timer display as a preview display at this time, it is possible to avoid multiple numbers indicating the counter being displayed, preventing them from interfering with each other.

In addition, in this example, a preview effect can be executed in a red presentation mode (e.g., a red presentation image is displayed) and a blue presentation mode (e.g., a blue presentation image is displayed), and the system is configured so that the probability of executing a preview effect in the red presentation mode is higher in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a miss. Therefore, the execution of a preview effect in the red presentation mode suggests that there is a high probability of a jackpot.

In this configuration, the ratio of executing the preview performance in the red performance mode when the display result is a miss is lower in the predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than in the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is more than 10). With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the preview performance is executed in the red performance mode in the predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) but does not result in a jackpot. In addition, the pre-reading preview performance may also be configured to be executed in the predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than in the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is more than 10).

In addition, when multiple types of preview effects (and pre-reading preview effects) with different jackpot expectations are configured to be executable, only the preview effects (and pre-reading preview effects) with a high jackpot expectation may be restricted from being executed during a predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less). For example, when the jackpot expectation is classified into five stages, only the preview effects (and pre-reading preview effects) with a jackpot expectation of the fourth stage or higher may be restricted from being executed. In addition, for example, when a preview effect (and pre-reading preview effect) that suggests that the time reduction will be missed is configured to be executable, the execution of the preview effect (and pre-reading preview effect) that suggests that the time reduction will be missed may be restricted during a predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less).

In addition, for example, even if there are 10 or fewer plays remaining until the rescue time-saving feature is activated, if a variable display is executed that indicates a jackpot or a time-saving feature failure, the execution of the preview effect (and the look-ahead preview effect) may not be restricted.

In addition, in the time-saving state due to the rescue time-saving, the execution of the look-ahead preview performance or the preview performance may be restricted (for example, the execution rate may be reduced (or not executed). In this case, the execution rate of the preview performance in the case of a miss may be reduced (or not executed), or the execution rate of the type of preview performance with a high expectation may be reduced (or not executed). In addition, if the number of reserved memories is a value greater than the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving, that is, the reserved memories are stored before the fluctuation of the rescue time-saving is reached and are executed after being controlled to the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving, It may be configured to restrict (prohibit) the execution of a look-ahead preview performance that targets reserved memory corresponding to the fluctuation that will be performed after control of the time-saving rescue is performed. This makes it possible to restrict the execution of look-ahead preview performances that span before and after the control of the time-saving rescue is performed, and to avoid malfunctions in the performance. Note that even if the number of reserved memories is a value greater than the number of times remaining until the time-saving rescue is performed, when in a time-saving state (for example, a time-saving state via a jackpot or a time-saving state via a missed time-saving rescue), it may be possible to execute a look-ahead preview performance that targets reserved memory corresponding to the fluctuation that will be performed after control of the time-saving rescue is performed.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 0 (step 108IWS805). Note that whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 0 can be determined, for example, by checking whether the value of the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 1 designation command is 0.

When the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 0, the presentation control CPU 120 checks whether the display result is a jackpot or not (step 108IWS806A). When the display result is not a jackpot, the presentation control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving entry presentation that notifies the player that the rescue time reduction will control the player to the time-saving state (step 100IWS806B). With this configuration, the time-saving entry presentation can notify the player that the rescue time reduction will control the player to the time-saving state at the appropriate time, thereby increasing the player's interest when the rescue time reduction is reached.

On the other hand, if the display result is a jackpot, the presentation control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving entry pseudo presentation that notifies the player that a jackpot has been reached after executing a presentation of a common type to the time-saving entry presentation (step 100IWS806C). Then, the process proceeds to step 108IWS812. With this configuration, the player is notified of a jackpot after first recognizing that the number of remaining changes until the time-saving rescue period is reached is 0, which provides a sense of surprise to the player and increases their interest.

In this example, if the display result is a jackpot when the number of times the time-saving feature has been changed is reached, a special change pattern (second change pattern #M) is used to execute a time-saving feature appearance effect, but this is not limited to this. For example, a full rotation effect (i.e., a jackpot is confirmed) in which the three decorative symbols change while remaining aligned, which is not executed except when the number of times the time-saving feature has been changed, may be executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and specialness, and to increase interest.

In addition, for example, if the display result is a jackpot when the number of times the rescue time-saving fluctuations is reached, the same fluctuation pattern for a jackpot as usual may be used, or a fluctuation pattern that specifies a reach effect with a short fluctuation time may be used.

In addition, in this example, if the display result is a miss when the number of times the time-saving change is reached, a dedicated time-saving change pattern for a miss is used, but this is not limited to the above. For example, a normal miss pattern may be used, or a change pattern that specifies a reach effect with a short change time may be used. By configuring in this way, the change pattern can be made common before and after the number of times the time-saving change is reached, and data capacity can be reduced. In this case, when the next change display starts, the image display device 5 switches to a background image corresponding to the time-saving state (see steps 061IWS56A, S56B), and this change in background image can notify the user that the time-saving state has been controlled by the time-saving change.

If the number of remaining changes until the time reduction is reached is not 0, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance selects a process table corresponding to the change pattern (step 108IWS811). Then, the process proceeds to step 108IWS812. If the number of remaining changes until the time reduction is reached is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, or 700, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance may select a process table including a promotional effect (for example, an effect that suggests the number of remaining changes until the time reduction is reached) corresponding to the number of remaining changes until the time reduction is reached. If the number of remaining changes until the time reduction is reached is 10 or less, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance may select a process table including a countdown effect (for example, an effect that counts down the number of remaining changes until the time reduction is reached) or an effect effect (for example, an effect that changes depending on the number of remaining changes until the time reduction is reached).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

The process table is a table in which process data is set that the performance control CPU 120 refers to when controlling the performance device. That is, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (performance parts) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data that is a collection of multiple combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating the manner of change that constitutes the change manner during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is included. In addition, the process timer setting value is set to the change time for that change manner. The performance control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display of the decorative pattern in the change manner set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer setting value. In addition, the process table is stored in the ROM in the performance control board 12. In addition, a process table is prepared according to each change pattern.

The process table used when controlling the performance of a variation pattern involving a reach performance has process data set therein which indicates that the left pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and that the right pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a further predetermined time has elapsed. In addition, instead of setting the pattern to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the pattern may be generated by synthesizing according to the determined stopping pattern, or the provisional stopping pattern in the pseudo consecutive or sliding performance.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 108IWS813). For example, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the audio control board 13 to output audio from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In this characteristic section 108IW, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern command.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value equivalent to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 108IWS814).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Example of performance)
Next, a specific example of the performance mode until the time-saving state C, which is the rescue time-saving state, will be described. FIG. 284-23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode until the time-saving state in the first embodiment is shifted to. In FIG. 284-23, the performance screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

In the example shown in FIG. 284-23, as shown in FIG. 284-23(A), when the variable display immediately before the variable display that results in the rescue time reduction is stopped and then the variable display that results in the rescue time reduction is started, as shown in FIG. 284-23(B), a time reduction entry effect (blackout effect) is started that makes it difficult to see the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100, etc.) that was displayed immediately before on the image display device 5. Also at this time, right-hit instruction display 100IW108 that instructs right-hit is displayed on the image display device 5.

Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 284-23(C), the blackout state is resolved, and an image is displayed (for example, a "Chance mode has been entered" display shown in FIG. 284-23(C)) to notify the player that control of the time-saving state (rescue time-saving) has begun, and a special sound effect is output.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 284-23, the time-saving entry effect is executed when the rescue time-saving mode begins, so that a notification that the time-saving mode will be entered can be issued at an appropriate time based on the establishment of the rescue time-saving mode, thereby increasing interest.

In addition, in the configuration shown in FIG. 284-23, when a change display is being executed based on a change pattern (for example, first change pattern #M) that is specifically designed for when rescue time-saving is established, the time-saving entry effect is executed, so that the player can be clearly notified by the time-saving entry effect that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state based on the establishment of rescue time-saving.

In addition, in the configuration shown in FIG. 284-23, when the time-saving entry effect is executed (i.e., when control of the time-saving state by the rescue time-saving is started), the right-hit instruction display 100IW108 is displayed, so that the right-hit notification can be executed appropriately.

When the time-saving state, including the rescue time-saving state, ends and transitions to the normal state, a left-hand hit instruction display instructing the player to hit left may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, in the time-saving entry performance, notifications that are generally made during the ending period of the first win, such as a warning to not forget to remove the prepaid card or a warning to prevent addiction, may be made, or the logo of the gaming machine manufacturer may be displayed. In this case, the notifications and logo display in the time-saving entry performance may be made in the same manner as the notifications and logo display in the ending period of the first win, or may be made in a simplified manner. In addition, these notifications and logo displays may not be made during the time-saving entry performance, but may be made during the ending period of the first big win after the time-saving state has been entered by the rescue time-saving.

When the display result is a jackpot when the number of times the time-saving time-saving time-saving time-saving time-saving effect is reached, as shown in FIG. 284-23(B), a blackout effect is started in the same manner as the time-saving time-saving effect, making it difficult to see the effect display (e.g., decorative pattern 100IW100, etc.) that was displayed immediately before on the image display device 5, and a right-hit instruction display 100IW108 that instructs a right hit is displayed. Then, instead of the effect shown in FIG. 284-23(C), the blackout state is eliminated and an effect is executed in which a jackpot pattern (e.g., the combination of patterns "777") is stopped and displayed. Then, the game moves to a jackpot game. With this configuration, the player is notified of a jackpot after once recognizing that the time-saving time-saving time-saving time-saving effect has been achieved, so that the player can be surprised and the interest can be increased.

In addition, when the configuration of this feature unit 116IW is applied to a gaming machine that is configured to be able to execute a special feature game in which control is made to a big win game based on the game ball winning (V winning) in a specific area (V winning area) in the special feature during a small win game, when the display result of the variable display that results in a rescue time-saving feature is a small win, a fake time-saving entry performance may be executed, and then a notification of a small win may be made.

(Modification 1-3)
Next, the configuration of modified example 1-3 will be described. In this example, in the variable display where the rescue time reduction is established, a time reduction entry presentation is configured to notify that control of the time reduction state (rescue time reduction) will start, but since it is also configured to start control of the time reduction state (rescue time reduction) at the start of the variable display where the rescue time reduction is established, it may be configured to execute the time reduction entry presentation in the variable display immediately before the variable display where the rescue time reduction is established.

In this case, for example, in the first special pattern normal processing and the second special pattern normal processing, when the value of the updated rescue time reduction counter is "1", a rescue immediately before rescue fluctuation flag is set, indicating that the fluctuation display is immediately before the fluctuation display in which rescue time reduction is established, and in the first fluctuation pattern setting processing and the second fluctuation pattern setting processing, if the rescue immediately before rescue fluctuation flag is set, a dedicated fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern #M or the first fluctuation pattern #N) is determined to be used only for the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display in which rescue time reduction is established. Then, in the variable display start setting processing, if the remaining number of rescue time reductions is 1, a process table including a time reduction entry performance is selected. By such processing, a time reduction entry performance can be executed in the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display in which rescue time reduction is established.

Figure 284-24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode up to the transition to the time-saving state in variant 1-3 of the first embodiment. In Figure 284-24, the presentation screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

In the modified example 1-3 shown in FIG. 284-24, the time-saving entry effect is executed in the variable display immediately before the variable display that establishes the rescue time-saving effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 284-24(A), when the variable display two times before the variable display that results in the rescue time-saving effect is stopped and then the variable display immediately before the variable display that results in the rescue time-saving effect starts, as shown in FIG. 284-24(B), a time-saving entry effect (blackout effect) is started that makes it difficult to see the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100, etc.) that was displayed immediately before on the image display device 5. However, since the time-saving state has not been entered at this point, the right-hit instruction display 100IW108 instructing a right hit is not displayed.

Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed, as shown in FIG. 284-24(C), the blackout state is cleared and an image is displayed (for example, the "Entering Chance Mode" display shown in FIG. 284-24(C)) to notify the user that control of the time-saving state (rescue time-saving) has begun, and sound effects are output. At this point, the time-saving state has not yet been entered, so the right-hit instruction display 100IW108 instructing the player to hit to the right is not displayed.

After that, when the variable display that results in the rescue time-saving starts, control of the time-saving state begins, and as shown in FIG. 284-24 (D), the right-hit instruction display 100IW108 instructing a right hit is displayed.

In the configuration of modified example 1-3 shown in FIG. 284-24, the time-saving entry effect is executed immediately before the rescue time-saving feature begins, so the player can prepare to hit the right button in anticipation of the start of the rescue time-saving feature. In this respect, too, a notification that the time-saving feature will be activated based on the establishment of the rescue time-saving feature can be issued at the appropriate time, improving the player's interest.

In addition, when a time-saving entry effect is executed in the change display immediately before the change display in which the rescue time-saving is established, the change display in which the rescue time-saving is established executes the change display using a change pattern that is also used in other change displays (i.e., a change pattern that is not exclusive to when the rescue time-saving is established). With this configuration, the change pattern can be made common when the rescue time-saving is established and before it is established, and data capacity can be reduced. Note that the change display that executes the time-saving entry effect (the change display immediately before the change display in which the rescue time-saving is established) may also execute the change display using a change pattern that is also used in other change displays (i.e., a change pattern that is not exclusive to when the rescue time-saving is established).

In addition, in the configuration of modified example 1-3 shown in FIG. 284-24, the time-saving entry effect is executed immediately before the rescue time-saving feature starts, but the right-hit instruction display 100IW108 is displayed when the variable display indicating that the rescue time-saving feature is established starts (i.e., when control of the time-saving state by the rescue time-saving feature starts), so the right-hit notification can be executed appropriately.

In addition, when the display result of the variable display immediately before the variable display in which the rescue time-saving feature is established is a jackpot, it may be possible to execute a performance that gives the illusion of entering the time-saving feature. With this configuration, the player is informed of the jackpot after first recognizing that the rescue time-saving feature has been established, which provides a sense of surprise to the player and increases their interest.

In addition, the configuration that enables the execution of a time-saving entry effect and a time-saving entry appearance effect when a variable display that establishes a rescue time-saving effect is executed, or when a variable display immediately prior to a variable display that establishes a rescue time-saving effect is executed, is not limited to gaming machines with the configuration shown in the first embodiment of this characteristic section 116IW, but can also be applied to gaming machines with other configurations, such as a gaming machine with a high probability/low base state (small hit RUSH) in which small hits occur frequently, as shown in the second embodiment.

Second Embodiment
Next, a second embodiment of the characteristic part 116IW will be described. Note that in this embodiment, detailed descriptions of parts that perform the same configurations and processes as those in the first embodiment will be omitted, and the description will focus mainly on parts that are different from the first embodiment.

In the second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW, the game state includes a normal state (low probability/non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT state: a first KT state and a second KT state. In the second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW, the game state includes a state controlled to a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state: normal state), a state controlled to a low probability and a first KT state (low probability/first KT state), a state controlled to a high probability and a first KT state (high probability/first KT state), and a state controlled to a high probability and a second KT state (high probability/second KT state).

In the first KT state among the KT states, small hits are likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in an open state, but the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is extremely long, and even if a small hit occurs, there are very few cases in which the game ball wins in the downstream special variable winning ball device 17 (for example, about one ball per 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, it is controlled to a state in which small hits are likely to occur and is controlled to a high base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is long. In addition, in the second KT state among the KT states, the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is likely to win in the downstream special variable winning ball device 17. Specifically, in the second KT state, it is controlled to a state in which small hits are likely to occur and is controlled to a low base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is short.

In the second embodiment, the first special symbol is configured so that the display result is a small win (or the rate of small wins is higher than that of misses (no time reduction)) when the display result is other than a big win or a miss in the time reduction. In other words, the first special symbol is configured so that the display result is either a big win, a small win, or a miss in the time reduction, and the display result is not a miss (no time reduction) (or the rate of small wins is higher than that of misses (no time reduction)). However, in the non-KT state (normal state), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is short when the display result of the first special symbol is a small win, making it extremely difficult (or practically impossible) to win a game ball in the special variable winning ball device 17.

(Transition of Game State in the Second Embodiment)
The transition of the game state in the second embodiment of the feature part 116IW will be described. FIG. 285-1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the way of transition of the game state in the second embodiment of the feature part 116IW. First, in this feature part 116IW, in the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal variable time, whereas the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the long variable, so that the player performs the launch operation (left hit) of the game ball aiming at the left of the game area. Therefore, in the normal state, the start entry into the first start entry hole mainly occurs, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Also, since the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a jackpot occurs in the low probability/low base state, a 10R sure-change jackpot, a 6R sure-change jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 285-1, when a 10R variable probability jackpot occurs in a low probability/low base state, if a game ball enters V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state transitions to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if a game ball does not enter V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, when a 6R variable probability jackpot occurs in a low probability/low base state, if a game ball enters V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state transitions to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs in the low probability/low base state, after the jackpot game ends, it will transition to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and the low probability/high base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50 variable display times are completed.

Also, in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the time-saving state (in this example, low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state)) is controlled via the time-saving miss and the rescue time-saving state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 285-1, even if a miss occurs in the low probability/low base state (normal state), if a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the state is controlled to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) (e.g., this corresponds to the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS2032A and S2032B in the first embodiment). Furthermore, even if a miss occurs, if a rescue time-saving state occurs (after the RAM clear processing or after a jackpot game, if the next jackpot does not occur and the number of fluctuations reaches 800), the state is controlled to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) (e.g., this corresponds to the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS5607A and S5607B in the first embodiment).

In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel, and the rescue time reduction counter can be updated at the timing when the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol are started (e.g., this corresponds to the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B in the first embodiment).

After transitioning to the KT state (high probability/high base state, low probability/high base state, high probability/low base state), in the second embodiment of this feature unit 116IW, the first special symbol is displayed in a long variation, whereas the second special symbol is displayed in a normal variation time, so the player aims the game ball to the right of the game area and performs the firing operation (right hit). Therefore, in the KT state, the start entry into the second start entry port mainly occurs, and the second special symbol is mainly displayed. Also, since the second special symbol is mainly displayed in a variation, when a jackpot occurs in the KT state, it mainly occurs as a 10R special jackpot, a 6R special jackpot, or a 2R special jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 285-1, when a 10R or 2R guaranteed jackpot occurs in a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), if the game ball enters V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state will transition to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/low base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R jackpot occurs in a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state transitions to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if a game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, in the second embodiment of this feature part 116IW, when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, the probability of a 6R jackpot is 50% in total, so once the high probability/high base state is entered, the high probability/high base state will loop at a rate of 50%.

As shown in FIG. 285-1, when a 10R or 2R guaranteed jackpot occurs in a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), if the game ball enters V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state will transition to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/low base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, if a 6R guaranteed jackpot occurs in a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state will transition to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/high base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. Note that after a 6R normal jackpot occurs and the state becomes low probability/high base state, if the next jackpot does not occur and 50 variable displays end, the state will transition to a low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) as shown in FIG. 285-1.

As shown in FIG. 285-1, in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the rescue time-saving is activated in the low probability/high base state (after the RAM clear process or after a jackpot game, when the number of changes reaches 800 without the next jackpot occurring), the game is again controlled to the low probability/high base state (first KT state) with the number of time-saving times of 800 (for example, this corresponds to the part that executes the processes of steps 061IWS5607A to S5608A and S5607B to S5608B in the first embodiment). Note that the number of time-saving times in the second embodiment corresponds to the remaining number of times that the first special symbol change display and the second special symbol change display can be executed in the low probability/high base state (first KT state).

Also, as shown in FIG. 285-1, in the second embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, when the variable display of the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern are executed a total of a predetermined number of times in the low probability/high base state, the low probability/high base state ends and transitions to the low probability/low base state (normal state).

For example, if the state is controlled to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) via a time-saving miss, when the display of the first special symbol changes and the display of the second special symbol changes are executed a total of 100 times, the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) ends and the state transitions to a low probability/low base state (normal state) (e.g., this corresponds to the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS2030A-S2033A, S5617A-S5620A, S2030B-S2033B, S5617B-S5620B in the first embodiment).

In addition, when the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) is controlled via the rescue time reduction, when the display of the first special symbol changes and the display of the second special symbol changes are executed a total of 800 times, the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) ends and the state transitions to the low probability/low base state (normal state) (e.g., this corresponds to the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS5607A-S5608A, S5617A-S5620A, S5607B-S5608B, S5617B-S5620B in the first embodiment).

In the example shown in FIG. 285-1, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, the state is controlled to a low probability/high base state with 50 time-saving times, but as in the first embodiment, the advantageous degree of the time-saving state controlled after the jackpot game may be different depending on the game state when the jackpot occurs. For example, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs during a normal state (low base state), the state may be controlled to a low probability/high base state with 100 time-saving times, and when a 6R normal jackpot occurs during a high base state, the state may be controlled to a low probability/high base state with 200 time-saving times. In this case, as in the first embodiment, if the variable display that establishes the rescue time reduction is a jackpot, it may be determined that the jackpot has occurred in a high base state, and the state may be controlled to a low probability/high base state of 200 time reductions after the jackpot game ends (for example, the execution of the jackpot determination module of steps 061IWS59A and S59B in the first embodiment corresponds to the part that is executed after the update process of the rescue time reduction counter and the setting process of the high base flag in steps 061IWS5602A to S5608A and S5602B to S5608B). This configuration can increase the degree of rescue for the player.

As shown in FIG. 285-1, when a 10R or 2R jackpot occurs in a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state transitions to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if a game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, in the second embodiment of this feature part 116IW, when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, the probability of a 10R or 2R jackpot is 50%, so once the high probability/low base state is entered, the high probability/low base state will loop at a rate of 50%. Also, when a 6R jackpot occurs in a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will transition to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/high base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state.

Note that in FIG. 285-1, a case where the first special symbol is displayed in a low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is described, but there is also a possibility that the second special symbol is displayed in a low probability. In this case, if a 10R or 2R guaranteed jackpot occurs, and the game ball enters V area 061IW104 during jackpot play, the state will transition to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). Also, if a 6R guaranteed jackpot occurs, and the game ball enters V area 061IW104 during jackpot play, the state will transition to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state).

In addition, in FIG. 285-1, a case where the second special symbol is displayed in the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) is described, but there is also a possibility that the first special symbol is displayed in a low rate. In this case, if a 10R sure-variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state will transition to the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). In addition, if a 6R sure-variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state will transition to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs, the state will transition to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and the low probability/high base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs or 50 variable displays are completed.

In addition, in FIG. 285-1, a case where the second special symbol is displayed in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) is described, but there is also a possibility that the first special symbol is displayed in the low probability. In this case, if a 10R sure-variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state will transition to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). In addition, if a 6R sure-variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state will transition to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs, the state will transition to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and the low probability/high base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs or 50 variable displays are completed.

In addition, in FIG. 285-1, a case where the second special symbol is displayed in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) is described, but there is also a possibility that the first special symbol is displayed in a low rate. In this case, if a 10R sure-variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state will transition to the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). In addition, if a 6R sure-variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state will transition to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs, the state will transition to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and the low probability/high base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs or 50 variable displays are completed.

As shown in FIG. 285-1, in the second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW, in the low probability/low base state (normal state), the first special symbol is displayed in a normal change time, whereas the second special symbol is displayed in a long change. In other words, the first special symbol is displayed in a shorter change time (or the rate at which it is displayed) than the second special symbol. Thus, in the second embodiment, the low probability/low base state (normal state) is a first shortened state in which the rate at which the first special symbol is displayed in a shorter change time than the second special symbol is high. Note that in the second embodiment, in the low probability/low base state (normal state) which is the first shortened state, the rate at which the first special symbol is displayed in a shorter change time than the second special symbol may be configured to be, for example, 100%, or may be configured to be lower than 100% but at least higher than the second shortened state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 285-1, in the second embodiment of the feature part 116IW, in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and the high probability/low base state (second KT state), the first special symbol is displayed in a long fluctuation, whereas the second special symbol is displayed in a normal fluctuation time. In other words, the second special symbol is displayed in a shorter fluctuation time (or the rate at which it is displayed is high) than the first special symbol. Thus, in the second embodiment, the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and the high probability/low base state (second KT state) are second shortened states in which the second special symbol is displayed in a shorter fluctuation time than the first special symbol. In the second embodiment, in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and high probability/low base state (second KT state) which are the second shortened state, the percentage at which the second special pattern fluctuation display is a fluctuation display with a shorter fluctuation time than the first special pattern fluctuation display may be configured to be, for example, 100%, or may be configured to be lower than 100% but at least higher than the first shortened state.

In the second embodiment, when the rescue time reduction is established in the normal state, the rescue time reduction is controlled by increasing the probability of winning the normal symbol, shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port). In addition, in addition to the control related to the normal symbol, the rescue time reduction is controlled by shortening the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (i.e., controlling to a second shortened state in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is more likely to have a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation display of the first special symbol). In other words, a transition is made to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) (e.g., corresponding to the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS5607A and S5607B in the first embodiment).

However, in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, even if the rescue time reduction is established by the execution of the rescue time reduction by executing ...

Therefore, in the second embodiment, as described above, the display of the first special pattern is configured so that when the display result is other than a big win or a miss with the time-saving function, it will be a small win (or the rate of small wins is higher than a miss (without time-saving function)). In other words, the display of the first special pattern is configured so that the display result is either a big win, a small win, or a miss with the time-saving function, and it will not be a miss (without time-saving function) (or the rate of small wins is higher than a miss (without time-saving function)). In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, if a small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the first and second special symbols while the variable display of the other special symbol is being executed, a losing symbol can be forcibly derived and displayed in the variable display of the one special symbol (e.g., this corresponds to the part that executes the processes of steps 061IWS1126A, S1129A, S1126B, and S1129B in the first embodiment).

In the second embodiment, by combining these configurations, when the first special symbol is displayed during the second special symbol display (long change), a rescue time reduction is established by executing the first special symbol display. In addition to the control for the normal symbols, the rescue time reduction (high base state) is controlled by shortening the second special symbol's change time (i.e., the second special symbol is controlled to a second shortened state (in this example, a low probability/high base state (first KT state)) in which the probability that the second special symbol display will have a shorter change time than the first special symbol display is high). In this case, the display result of the first special symbol display that establishes the rescue time reduction is a small win unless it is a big win or a time reduction miss. Then, based on the fact that a small win pattern is derived and displayed in the first special symbol display, the second special symbol display (long change) being executed is forcibly stopped at a miss pattern. Therefore, without waiting for the long fluctuation time (for example, 10 minutes) to expire, it is possible to execute the fluctuation display of the second special symbol with a shortened fluctuation time (i.e., improved fluctuation efficiency), and it is possible to enjoy the benefits of the rescue time reduction. In addition, when controlled by the rescue time reduction, the game can be smoothly progressed, and interest can be increased.

(First special symbol normal processing in variant example 2)
Figures 285-2 to 285-5 are flowcharts showing the normal processing of the first special pattern in variant example 2.

In variant 2, the processes in steps 061IWS50A to S56A are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 285-3, in the second modification, the processing of step 061IWS5601A shown in the first embodiment is not executed, so the update processing of the rescue time reduction counter is executed even in the high probability state (high probability state). In other words, not only in the non-high probability state (low probability state), but also in the high probability state (high probability state), the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is executed is uniformly decreased when the fluctuation display is executed. Therefore, in the second modification, when the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction becomes "0", the high probability flag may be set.

When the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction becomes "0", if the special chance flag is set (Y in step 061IWS56061A), i.e., if a rescue time reduction is established in the special chance state, the process moves to step 061IWS5701A.

In addition, in variant 2, the high base count counter is set to "100" after a special jackpot, and each time a change display is executed, the high base count counter is decremented by 1 by the processing of steps 061IWS5717A to S5719A. Here, if the special jackpot flag is set when the value of the high base count counter after the decrement becomes "0", that is, if the special jackpot state after a special jackpot play has reached 100 changes but has not fallen out of special jackpot state, the process of resetting the high base flag (step 061IWS5620A) is not executed. In this case, the high probability state and high base state are maintained until the state falls out of special jackpot state.

On the other hand, if the high base count counter value after subtraction becomes "0" and the high probability flag is not set, i.e., if the game falls into the high probability state after a jackpot game due to a high probability jackpot with less than 100 fluctuations and only the high probability flag is reset (when the processing of steps 061IWS5705A and S5711A described below is executed), or if the game was controlled to a low probability/high base state after a normal jackpot, the high base flag is reset (step 061IWS5620A). In variant 2, if the game falls into the high probability state after a jackpot game due to a high probability jackpot with less than 100 fluctuations, the high probability state (high probability state) ends immediately, but the time-saving state (high base state) continues until it reaches 100 fluctuations due to the processing of step 061IWS56191A.

In addition, in the second modification, the processes of steps 061IWS5607A to S5611A, S5614A to S5616A, S5617A to S5619A, and S5620A to S5621A are the same as those shown in the first embodiment. In the second modification, when step 061IWS5621A is completed, the process proceeds to step 061IWS5702A.

In step 061IWS5701A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a rescue time reduction flag indicating that rescue time reduction has been achieved in the special probability state (step 061IWS5701A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the probability of winning is set (step 061IWS5702A), and if it is not set, proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

If the probability of a bonus is set (Y in step 061IWS5702A), the game control microcomputer 100 reads out the random number for fall judgment stored in the random number buffer area (different from the random number for jackpot judgment or the random number for jackpot type judgment, and is a random number dedicated to fall judgment) and performs a fall lottery process based on the random number for fall judgment (061IWS5703A). In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out the random number for fall judgment extracted in the start winning judgment process (step S101) and stored in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer in advance, and performs a probability of a bonus fall lottery judgment. When the value matches the fall judgment value, the game control microcomputer 100 decides to end the probability of a bonus. In the modified example 2, in the process of step 061IWS5703A, it is decided to end the probability of a bonus with a probability of 1/800, for example.

If the special probability state is not to be dropped (the special probability state is not to be ended) (N in 061IWS5704A), the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A. If it is decided to end the special probability state (Y in step 061IWS5704A), the game control microcomputer 100 judges whether there have been less than 100 fluctuations after a jackpot game (step 061IWS5705A). For example, by providing a counter that can count the number of fluctuations in the special probability state after a jackpot game, and checking the counter in step 061IWS5705A, it is possible to determine whether there have been less than 100 fluctuations after a jackpot game.

If the change after the big win is less than 100 (Y in step 061IWS5705A), the game control microcomputer 100 resets the probability change flag (step 061IWS5711A) and sets the provocation reach A flag indicating that provocation reach A will be executed (step 061IWS5713A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

In variant 2, by processing step 061IWS5711A, if the probability of dropping out of ...

If the fluctuation is not less than 100 after the jackpot (N in step 061IWS5705A), the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the rescue time-saving flag is set (step 061IWS5706A), and if it is not set, it resets the high probability flag and high base flag, and ends the high probability state and the time-saving state (step 061IWS5712A). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the provocative reach A flag, which indicates that provocative reach A will be executed (061IWS5713A).

In this example, the same provocation reach A is executed in both cases where the player falls out of the special mode less than 100 times after a special mode jackpot play and where the player falls out of the special mode after 100 times. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, if the player falls out of the special mode less than 100 times after a special mode jackpot play, the player may be notified that the player will fall out of the special mode and then be notified that the time-saving state will continue. This can prevent the player from becoming too disappointed when the player falls out of the special mode in a short period of time.

If the rescue time-saving flag is set (Y in step 061IWS5706A), the game control microcomputer 100 resets the rescue time-saving flag (step 061IWS5707A) and sets the high base count counter to "800" (step 061IWS5708A). The game control microcomputer 100 also resets the probability change flag (061IWS5709A). After that, it sets the provocation reach B flag, which indicates that provocation reach B will be executed (061IWS5710A), and proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

If the rescue time reduction is established after the probability change, the state is controlled to the time reduction state (high base state) due to the rescue time reduction from the time when the rescue time reduction is established, and if the rescue time reduction is established before the probability change, the state is controlled to the normal state from the time of the probability change, the benefit received depending on the timing of the rescue time reduction will be significantly different, and there is a risk of insufficient rescue. Therefore, in the second modification, the processing of steps 061IWS5706A to S5708A is configured so that if the rescue time reduction is established in the probability change state, the state is controlled to the time reduction state due to the rescue time reduction when the probability change occurs. Therefore, the count of 800 times of the time reduction due to the rescue time reduction will not start when the rescue time reduction is established, but after the probability change occurs and the transition to the time reduction state occurs. With this configuration, rescue due to the rescue time reduction can be received appropriately.

In addition, by processing step 061IWS5707A, the rescue time-saving flag is reset when the game falls into the special probability state and is controlled to a time-saving state due to the rescue time-saving. This configuration allows the information that the rescue time-saving has been established in the special probability state to be properly managed.

Information indicating the state of the rescue time-saving flag is stored, for example, in RAM 102. When the RAM clear process is executed, the rescue time-saving flag and the special probability flag are reset. In other words, when the RAM clear process is executed during a special probability state in which the rescue time-saving flag has been established, the game state becomes a normal state (low probability/low base state) in which the rescue time-saving flag is not set. With this configuration, information indicating that the rescue time-saving flag has been established during a special probability state can be appropriately managed.

In the RAM clear process, the high probability flag is reset, but the rescue time reduction flag is maintained. Also, if the high probability flag is not set at the start of the fluctuation but the rescue time reduction flag is set, control may be made to the rescue time reduction (low probability/high base state). In other words, if the RAM clear process is executed when the game is in a high probability state where rescue time reduction has been established, the game state will be the normal state (low probability/low base state), but when the fluctuation display starts, control may be made to the rescue time reduction.

In addition, in step 061, IWS5710A processes the display result of the ongoing variable display, suggesting whether it will be a jackpot or whether it will fall into the high probability state and end the high probability state, and then executes a provocative reach B that first notifies the player that it will fall into the high probability state and then notifies the player that it will be controlled to a time-saving state (high base state) by the rescue time-saving function.

As shown in FIG. 285-5, in variant 2, when a jackpot is determined to have occurred by execution of the jackpot determination module, the rescue time reduction flag is reset if set (step 061IWS631A). By processing step 061IWS631A, it is possible to appropriately manage information that rescue time reduction has been established in a high probability state. It is also possible to prevent excessive rescue from being performed.

In addition, in variant 2, when a jackpot is determined to have occurred by execution of the jackpot determination module, if the sure-win flag is set (Y in step 061IWS632A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the provocative reach C flag, which indicates that provocative reach C will be executed (061IWS633A).

Step 061: IWS632A to S633A processes the ongoing variable display to indicate whether it will result in a jackpot or a drop into the probability variable state, ending the probability variable state, and then a provocative reach C is executed to notify the player that a jackpot will occur.

In addition, in the second modification, the processes in steps 061IWS57A to S63A and S64A to S89A are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

In the first variation pattern setting process of the second variant, it is determined whether any of the provocation reaches A to C is set, and if set, the variation pattern for executing the corresponding provocation reach is determined. The other processes are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

In the second modification, the second special symbol normal processing and the second variation pattern setting processing execute the same processing as the first special symbol normal processing and the first variation pattern setting processing. Therefore, in the second modification, in both the first special symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display, it is possible to execute a probability drop lottery or an instigation reach.

In the first variation pattern setting process and the second variation pattern setting process, when any of the provocation reaches A to C is set and the number of variations in the high probability state after a jackpot game exceeds 100 variations, a provocation reach may be executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 285-6, a common presentation (for example, a common background image may be displayed) may be executed regardless of whether or not a high probability state has occurred until the number of variations in the high probability state after a jackpot game reaches 100 variations. In other words, the player may not be able to recognize whether a high probability state has occurred or not until the 100th variation. Also, as shown in FIG. 285-6, a high probability state fall judgment presentation may be executed to notify whether a high probability state has occurred or the high probability state is continuing at the 100th variation.

For example, if the probability of falling into the probability variation state has already been reached, a probability of falling into the probability variation state determination presentation of pattern A is executed to notify the player that the probability of falling into the probability variation state has already been reached. Also, if the probability of falling into the probability variation state has already been reached but the player is under control of the rescue time reduction, a probability of falling into the probability variation state determination presentation of pattern B is executed to notify the player that the rescue time reduction is under control after notifying the player that the probability of falling into the probability variation state has already been reached.
In addition, if a jackpot is hit at the 100th variation, a probability change fall judgment presentation in the form of pattern C that notifies the player of the jackpot is executed. In addition, if the probability change state continues, a probability change fall judgment presentation in the form of pattern D that notifies the player of the continuation of the probability change state is executed.

The configuration shown in Figure 285-6 can create tension for the player during the period from the 100th change onwards in the special probability state, increasing interest.

In addition, in the second variant, when the rescue time reduction is established in the high probability state, the player is notified that the game has fallen out of the high probability state, and then the player is notified that the rescue time reduction will occur. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, when the rescue time reduction is established in the high probability state, no notification may be given even if the game falls out of the high probability state. In other words, even if the game falls out of the high probability state, no notification may be given or the presentation may change, and the game may fall out of the high probability state without the player noticing.

(Example of the second modification)
Next, a specific example of the presentation mode of a provocation reach in Modification 2 will be described. Fig. 285-7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode of a provocation reach in Modification 2. Note that in Fig. 285-7, the presentation screen transitions in the order of (1) (2) (3-1) for provocation reach A, (1) (2) (3-2) (4) for provocation reach B, and (1) (2) (3-3) for provocation reach C.

In the probability bonus state, as shown in FIG. 285-7(1), when the left and right decorative patterns are aligned, a provocative reach begins in which the friendly character 014IW002 and the enemy character 014IW003a battle, as shown in FIG. 285-7(2).

In the case of provocation reach A, as shown in FIG. 285-7 (3-1), a probability drop image 014IW004a is displayed to inform the player that the ally character 014IW002 has lost the battle and will drop out of the probability drop state. After that, the game will transition to the normal state (low probability/low base state).

In the case of a provocation reach B, as shown in FIG. 285-7 (3-2), a probability drop image 014IW004a is displayed to notify the player that the ally character 014IW002 has lost the battle and will fall into probability drop, but as shown in FIG. 285-7 (4), a text display of "Entering Chance Mode" and a rescue time-saving image 014IW004c are displayed to notify the player that the rescue time-saving control will be applied. Note that this is not limited to the form shown in FIG. 285-7 (4), and for example, the time-saving entry performance shown in FIG. 284-23 may be executed. After that, the game transitions to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state).

In the case of the provocation reach C, as shown in FIG. 285-7 (3-3), the ally character 014IW002 wins the battle, and a jackpot image 014IW004b is displayed to notify the player that a jackpot has been achieved. After that, the game moves to the jackpot game state.

In the second modification, when a rescue time reduction is established in the high probability state, a rescue time reduction establishment notification is executed to notify the fact. For example, as shown in FIG. 285-8 (1) and (2), when a rescue time reduction is established at the start of the fluctuation, a "Chi" icon 014IW003d is displayed on a part of the image display device 5, indicating that the game will be controlled to a chance mode (rescue time reduction). The rescue time reduction establishment notification as shown in FIG. 285-8 can be realized, for example, by transmitting a presentation control command indicating that a rescue time reduction has been established to the presentation control board 12 when the main board 11 determines that a rescue time reduction has been established, and by controlling the presentation control board 12 to display a "Chi" icon 014IW003d on a part of the image display device 5 when the presentation control command is received. This configuration allows the player to recognize that the game will be controlled to a time reduction state after the high probability state ends, giving the player a sense of security and increasing the interest.

Note that the notification of rescue time-saving activation as shown in FIG. 285-8 may be made (or drawn by lottery) not only in the special state, but also when rescue time-saving activation is activated in the normal state, or when the game is controlled to the time-saving state by rescue time-saving activation.

(Example of control of game state in Modification 2)
Next, a description will be given of an example of control of the gaming state in Modification 2. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 285-9 (A), if the rescue time reduction has not been established in the high probability state before the drop to high probability state occurs, the high probability state flag and high base flag are reset when the drop to high probability state occurs (T1 timing), and the game state transitions from a high probability/high base state to a low probability/low base state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 285-9(B), if the rescue time reduction is established in the high probability state before the drop to high probability state, for example, if the rescue time reduction is established at timing t1 in FIG. 285-9(B), the rescue time reduction flag is set at timing t1. Then, when the drop to high probability state occurs (timing t2), the high probability flag and rescue time reduction flag are reset, and the high base flag is maintained. In other words, the game state transitions from a high probability/high base state to a low probability/high base state.

The configuration shown in variant example 2 can be applied to both the first and second embodiments described above. When applied to the configuration of the first embodiment, for example, a fall lottery may be executed when in a high probability/high base state (second special probability state), and if the lottery is won, a transition to the normal state (low probability/low base state) may occur. When applied to the configuration of the second embodiment, for example, a fall lottery may be executed when in a high probability/high base state (first KT state), and if the lottery is won, a transition to the normal state (low probability/low base state) may occur.

In addition, in both the first and second embodiments described above, the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, but the configuration is not limited to this configuration. The configuration shown in variant example 2 can also be applied to a configuration in which the display of the special symbols is executed in the order of the start winning, or a configuration in which either the display of the first special symbol or the display of the second special symbol is executed with priority.

In addition, the characteristic unit 116IW and each modified example shown above are applied to a gaming machine that controls to a big win game based on the variable display result, but this is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the configuration of controlling to a time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state shown in the characteristic unit 116IW and each modified example shown above may be applied to a gaming machine that is configured to be able to execute a role game that controls to a big win game based on the game ball winning (V winning) in a specific area (V winning area) in the role game during a small win game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples shown above, the number of times the time until the rescue time reduction occurs is fixed at 800, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the value set in the rescue time reduction counter may be switched to "800" or "900" depending on whether the RAM clear process is being executed or a jackpot has occurred, or the value set in the rescue time reduction counter may be switched randomly to "800" or "900".

In addition, in the characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples described above, information that can identify the number of times the rescue time reduction has occurred may be retained. For example, the high base flag set for the second rescue time reduction after a transition may be different from the high base flag set for the first rescue time reduction.

In addition, in the characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples shown above, different effects may be executed in the time-saving state via a jackpot, the time-saving state via a missed time-saving state, and the time-saving state via a rescue (for example, a different background display may be displayed, or a different fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) may be determined).

In addition, in the characteristic part 116IW and each modified example shown above, when controlling to a high probability state after the end of a high probability state, a case has been shown where the characteristic part 116IW and each modified example are applied to a gaming machine in which high probability control is performed until the next high probability state occurs (or until the game falls into high probability state), but this is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when controlling to a high probability state after the end of a high probability state, a configuration for controlling to a time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state shown in the characteristic part 116IW and each modified example shown above may be applied to a so-called ST machine in which an upper limit is set for the number of special symbol games (i.e., the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol) in which high probability control is performed.

Specifically, a case will be described in which a configuration for controlling to a time-saving state via rescue time-saving shown in the characteristic part 116IW and each modified example described above is applied to a gaming machine configured as a so-called ST machine, in which the probability of a jackpot is about 1/100, the game state is controlled to a probability variable state at a rate of 100% after the end of the jackpot game state, and the upper limit number of times (e.g., 8 times) of the special game in which the probability variable control is performed is set. Note that in the ST gaming machine, multiple types of jackpots (e.g., 10R probability variable jackpot and 5R probability variable jackpot, etc.) are provided as the display results of the first special pattern change display and the second special pattern change display, and when a jackpot occurs, the jackpot with the highest degree of advantage (e.g., 10R probability variable jackpot) is set at a predetermined rate (e.g., 5%). In addition, when the jackpot with the highest degree of advantage is obtained, the game state is controlled to a probability variable state (high probability/high base state) after the end of the jackpot game state, and the upper limit number of times of the special game in which the probability variable control is performed is set to 8 times. If no jackpot occurs in the 8 special game games where the probability control is performed, the game is controlled to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state), and the upper limit number of special game games where the high base control is performed is set to 249. In other words, after the jackpot game state ends, if the next jackpot does not occur, the game is controlled to a probability state (high probability/high base state) with 8 probability games, and then to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state) with 249 time games.

The ST gaming machine described above can be configured so that if, after the power is turned on to the gaming machine or after a jackpot occurs, the next jackpot does not occur even after a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 250 times) have ended in a non-probability state (low probability state), a rescue time-saving state is established and the machine is controlled to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state).

When this configuration is applied, if a jackpot with the highest degree of advantage occurs, after the jackpot game state ends, the game will first be controlled to a high probability state (high probability/high base state) with 8 high probability states. At this time, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is reset (for example, set to "250") due to the occurrence of a jackpot. And since it is a high probability state (high probability state), the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not updated.

When the 8-time chance state (high probability/high base state) ends without a jackpot occurring, the game is controlled to a 249-time time-saving state (low probability/high base state). At this time, the game is in a non-chances-of-chance state (low probability state), so the value of the rescue time-saving count counter is updated (e.g., decremented by 1) each time a special game (i.e., the first special pattern change display and the second special pattern change display) is played.

When the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) of 249 times ends without a jackpot, the state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state). However, at this time, the value of the rescue time-saving counter is "1". Therefore, when the next special game (display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern) is executed, the rescue time-saving state is established and the state is controlled to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state). Here, if there is a reserved memory stored during the time-saving state of 249 times (low probability/high base state), the rescue time-saving state is established by executing the special game (display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern) based on the reserved memory, and the state is controlled to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware that the state has been changed to the low base state (normal state), and it is possible to increase interest.

When the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) ends and the state is controlled to the low base state (normal state) before the rescue time-saving state occurs, the background image corresponding to the high base state may be continuously displayed. In this case, for example, it may be determined whether the number of reserved memories stored at the time when the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) ends is greater than the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time-saving state is established, and if it is determined to be greater, the background image corresponding to the high base state may be continuously displayed. Hereinafter, the normal state controlled after the time-saving state ends with 249 times of time-saving and before the rescue time-saving state is established (i.e., the normal state controlled once after the time-saving state and in which the rescue time-saving state is established within a short period (for example, the period until the reserved memories stored in the time-saving state are consumed)) is also referred to as the special normal state to distinguish it from other normal states.

In addition, for example, when the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) controlled after the probability change state (high probability/high base state) ends and the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) is controlled by the rescue time-saving state, a mode transition effect may be executed to indicate that control of the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) by the rescue time-saving state will begin. In this case, after the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) ends, the mode transition effect may be executed during the execution of the variable display in the low base state (normal state) before the rescue time-saving state occurs (for example, the variable display immediately after the time-saving state ends or the variable display immediately before the rescue time-saving state is established), or the mode transition effect may be executed during the execution of the variable display that causes the rescue time-saving state to occur.

For example, in the ST gaming machine described above, if a jackpot with a low degree of advantage (e.g., a 5R special jackpot) occurs among multiple types of jackpots, the machine will be controlled to a special jackpot state with 8 special jackpots (high probability/high base state) after the jackpot game state ends, and if no next jackpot occurs, the machine will be controlled to a time-saving state with 32 time-saving jackpots (low probability/high base state). In other words, if a jackpot with a low degree of advantage occurs, even if the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) after the special jackpot state (high probability/high base state) ends, rescue time-saving will not be established within a short period of time (e.g., the period until the reserved memory stored in the time-saving state is consumed).

In this case, if the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) controlled after the probability change state (high probability/high base state) is 32 (i.e., if the rescue time-saving is not established within a short period of time), a left-hit notification (for example, display of a left-hit instruction display instructing a left-hit on the image display device 5) corresponding to the normal state (low probability/low base state) is executed after the final fluctuation in the time-saving state, while if the number of time-saving times is 249 (i.e., if the rescue time-saving is established within a short period of time), a similar left-hit notification may not be executed after the final fluctuation in the time-saving state. In other words, a left-hit notification (for example, display of a left-hit instruction display instructing a left-hit on the image display device 5) may not be executed when transitioning to the special normal state. With this configuration, if the rescue time-saving is established within a short period of time after the end of the time-saving state, the player is not made aware that he or she has once transitioned to the low-base state (normal state), which can improve interest.

In addition, for example, by differentiating the types of presentation control commands such as background designation commands, jackpot start designation commands, and jackpot end designation commands sent from the main board 11 side between the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) controlled after the probability change state (high probability/high base state) where the number of time-saving times is 32 (i.e., when the rescue time-saving is not established within a short period of time) and the time-saving time is 249 (i.e., when the rescue time-saving is established within a short period of time), the presentation control board 12 side may distinguish between these time-saving states and perform presentation control that matches each time-saving state (for example, displaying the corresponding background image, character image, story image, etc., outputting BGM, etc.). The method of distinguishing between time-saving states on the presentation control board 12 side is not limited to this, and for example, the type of jackpot or the number of time-saving times after jackpot play may be specified by the received display result designation command.

In addition, when the number of time reductions is 249 (i.e., when the rescue time reduction is established within a short period of time), even if the configuration is such that the left-hit notification (for example, the display of the left-hit instruction display on the image display device 5 instructing left-hit) is not executed on the performance control board 12 side after the final fluctuation in the time reduction state is completed, the main board 11 side executes processing (for example, turning off the right-hit indicator 26, stopping the output of the right-hit test signal output as a test signal, changing the launch position designation signal, etc.) corresponding to the transition to the normal state (i.e., switching from the state of right-hit to the state of left-hit). During the transition to the normal state (i.e., the special normal state), the main board 11 side may temporarily stop the external output of the signal corresponding to the high base state (for example, the jackpot 2 signal), or may continue the external output. In addition, while continuing the external output of the signal corresponding to the high base state (for example, the jackpot 2 signal), the output of the launch position designation signal output as a test signal may be changed (or the output of the right-hit test signal may be stopped).

In addition, for example, the effects executed may be different between the time-saving state (or a time-saving state with 249 times the time-saving count) and the normal state (or a normal state other than the special normal state). For example, effects (such as a countdown effect) that indicate that a rescue time-saving count will be achieved or the number of times until it is achieved may be executed in the normal state (or a normal state other than the special normal state), but may not be executed in the time-saving state (or a time-saving state with 249 times the time-saving count) in which the number of remaining times of the time-saving count is indicated. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the effects from becoming complicated.

The configuration that can obtain the above-mentioned effect is not limited to the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state controlled after the probability-changing state used in the above explanation, or the number of changes (non-probability-changing state) at which the rescue time-saving is established. For example, the number of changes (non-probability-changing state) at which the rescue time-saving is established may be configured to be greater than the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state, and smaller (or equal) than the sum of the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state and the upper limit memory number (e.g., 4) of the special game based on the entry into the start winning hole (e.g., the second start winning hole) that is easy to enter in the time-saving state. With such a configuration, even if the game moves to the low base state (normal state) after the end of the jackpot game state through the probability-changing state (high probability/high base state) and the time-saving state (low probability/high base state), the rescue time-saving can be established without generating a new start winning in the low base state (normal state), so that the player is not aware that the game has moved to the low base state (normal state) before the rescue time-saving is established, and interest can be improved.

In addition, for example, if the number of fluctuations (non-high probability state) at which the rescue time reduction is established is smaller (or the same) than the number of time reductions in the time reduction state, the rescue time reduction can be established before the time reduction state (low probability/high base state) controlled after the high probability state (high probability/high base state) ends (i.e., the number of time reductions can be updated by the establishment of the rescue time reduction).

In addition, in the above-mentioned ST gaming machine, the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) that is controlled after passing through a special probability state (high probability/high base state) after the end of the jackpot gaming state may be different when a jackpot occurs due to the changing display of the first special pattern and when a jackpot occurs due to the changing display of the second special pattern (or the proportion of advantageous time-saving times among the multiple types of time-saving times may be different). In this case, for example, when a jackpot occurs due to the variable display of the first special symbol, after the jackpot game state ends, the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) controlled through the high probability state (high probability/high base state) may be 32 (or the number of time-saving times is 32, with a high probability of 32 out of 249), and when a jackpot occurs due to the variable display of the second special symbol, after the jackpot game state ends, the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) controlled through the high probability state (high probability/high base state) may be 249 (or the number of time-saving times is 32, with a high probability of 249 out of 249).

In addition, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may be different (or the ratio of advantageous rounds among multiple types of round numbers may be different) when a jackpot occurs due to the variable display of the first special symbol and when a jackpot occurs due to the variable display of the second special symbol. For example, when a jackpot occurs due to the variable display of the first special symbol, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may be 5 rounds (or the ratio of 5 rounds out of 5 rounds or 10 rounds is high), and when a jackpot occurs due to the variable display of the second special symbol, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may be 10 rounds (or the ratio of 5 rounds out of 5 rounds or 10 rounds is high). With this configuration, the degree of advantage can be made different between the game state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed and the game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, thereby improving interest.

In addition, even in the above ST gaming machine, different variation pattern tables may be used for the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) controlled after the probability change state (high probability/high base state) and the time-saving state due to the rescue time-saving state (low probability/high base state). For example, in the time-saving state due to the rescue time-saving state (low probability/high base state), a variation pattern table may be used in which the variation time is shortened at a higher rate (and, for example, the variation pattern in which a reach (or a reach with a particularly high expectation) is executed at the time of a miss is lower) than in the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) controlled after the probability change state (high probability/high base state). With this configuration, when the rescue time-saving state is reached (i.e., when a jackpot has not occurred for a long period of time), the period until the next jackpot is controlled is shortened, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed. Also, for example, when the rescue time-saving state is reached (i.e., when a jackpot has not occurred for a long period of time), the rate of misses in the reach (or a reach with a particularly high expectation) is lower, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in the gaming machine of the characteristic part 116IW and each modified example shown above, for example, the types of jackpots may be a sure-variable jackpot in which the sure-variable state (high probability/high base state) continues after the jackpot game state ends until the next jackpot occurs, a non-sure-variable jackpot A which is controlled to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state) with 100 time-saving cycles, and a non-sure-variable jackpot B which is controlled to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state) with 249 time-saving cycles, and a rescue time-saving mode may be established if the next jackpot does not occur even after 250 variable display cycles have ended in the non-sure-variable state after the gaming machine is powered on or a jackpot occurs. That is, a jackpot type may be set in which the time-saving state is controlled until just before the rescue time-saving is established (specifically, the sum of the number of times the time-saving state is activated and the upper limit number of memories (e.g., 4) of the special game based on entering a start entry port (e.g., a second start entry port) that is easier to enter in the time-saving state is greater than (or the same as) the number of fluctuations (non-variable state) at which the rescue time-saving is established). With this configuration, a transition of the game state is made from the time-saving state after the jackpot game to the time-saving state due to the rescue time-saving (actually, the game is controlled to the normal state (i.e., special normal state) once before the rescue time-saving is established), which can increase interest.

As explained above, this characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 116-1-1) to (Means 116-6).

(Means 116-1-1) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information (e.g., first special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (e.g., second special symbol), and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., jackpot symbol), and includes update means (e.g., a game control microcomputer 100 in step 061IWS560) that can update numerical information (e.g., rescue time reduction counter). and a special state control means (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps S061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, a high base state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (for example, a low probability/low base state). The update means is a means for updating the timing at which variable display of the first identification information is started and the timing at which the second identification information is started. The numerical information is updated at the timing when the variable display of the identification information is started (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B), and the special state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value (for example, the value of the rescue time-saving count counter being "0") corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A and S5606B to S5607B), and further includes an announcement effect execution means (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS806B) capable of executing an announcement effect (for example, the time-saving entry effect shown in FIG. 284-23) that notifies that the special state will be controlled based on the establishment of the special condition when a variable display in which a special condition is established is being executed. With this configuration, a notification that a special state will be entered based on the establishment of a special condition can be issued at an appropriate time, enhancing interest.

(Means 116-1-2) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information (e.g., first special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (e.g., second special symbol), and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., jackpot symbol), and includes update means (e.g., a game control microcomputer 100 when step 0) that can update numerical information (e.g., rescue time reduction counter) and a special state control means (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps S061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, a high base state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (for example, a low probability/low base state). The numerical information is updated at the timing when the display is started and the variable display of the second identification information is started (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B), and the special state control means can control to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value (for example, the value of the rescue time-saving count counter is "0") corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B), and the means further includes an announcement effect execution means capable of executing an announcement effect (for example, the time-saving entry effect shown in FIG. 284-24) that notifies that the special state will be controlled based on the establishment of a special condition when a variable display immediately before the variable display in which the special condition is established is being executed. With this configuration, a notification that a special state will be entered based on the establishment of a special condition can be issued at an appropriate time, enhancing interest.

(Means 116-2) Means 116-1-1 includes a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS1717A and S1717B) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern (for example, a first variable pattern #M (missing entry into rescue time reduction) and a second variable pattern #L (missing entry into rescue time reduction)), and the variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a special variable display pattern when a special condition is met (for example, , the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS17093A, S17093B), before the special condition is established, the special variable display pattern is not determined, and the notification effect execution means can execute the notification effect when variable display using the special variable display pattern is being executed (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS17093A, S17093B, or the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 108IWS805, S806B). With such a configuration, the notification effect can clearly notify the player that the special state will be controlled based on the establishment of the special condition.

(Means 116-3) Means 116-1-2 includes a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS1717A and S1717B) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns, and when a special condition is met, the variable display pattern determination means determines a variable display pattern that can be determined even before the special condition is met (for example, the configuration of the modified example shown in FIG. 284-24). With such a configuration, the variable display pattern can be made common when and before the special condition is met, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 116-4) In any of means 116-1-1 to 116-3, the special state control means can control the special state to a different degree of advantage after the end of the advantageous state depending on whether the advantageous state was controlled in a special state or a non-special state (e.g., a low base state) (for example, the part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes the processing of steps 061IWS2284, S2286 to S2287. If a 6R jackpot A occurs during a normal state (low base state) and is controlled to a time-saving state (high base state), it is controlled to a time-saving state with 100 time-saving times, and if a 6R jackpot A occurs during the time-saving state (high base state), When a special condition occurs and the time-saving state (high base state) is controlled, the time-saving state is controlled to 200 times. See FIG. 284-1), and when the variable display result of the variable display where the special condition is established is a specific display result, it is considered to have been controlled to an advantageous state in the special state, and the advantageous degree of the special state to be controlled after the advantageous state ends is determined (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the jackpot determination module of steps 061IWS59A, S59B after updating the rescue time-saving count counter and setting the high base flag in steps 061IWS5602A-S5608A, S5602B-S5608B). With such a configuration, the degree of rescue for the player can be increased.

(Means 116-5) In any of means 116-1-1 to 116-4, a game area in which the game medium can be shot into a first path (e.g., a path by hitting with the left) and a second path (e.g., a path by hitting with the right), and a launch promotion notification means capable of executing a launch promotion notification to the effect that the game medium should be shot toward either the first path or the second path (e.g., a portion in the image display device 5 that displays the right hit instruction display 100IW108 or the left hit instruction display), are provided, and the launch promotion notification means is capable of executing a launch promotion notification to the effect that the game medium should be shot toward the second path when a notification performance is executed (e.g., the right hit instruction display 100IW108 is displayed when a time-saving entry performance is executed. See Figs. 284-23 (B) and (C)). With such a configuration, the launch promotion notification can be executed appropriately.

(Means 116-6) Any of means 116-1-1 to means 116-5 is provided with a signal output means (e.g., see FIG. 284-19) capable of outputting a signal (e.g., a jackpot 4 signal) capable of specifying that the special state will be controlled based on the establishment of a special condition in response to the start of a variable display in which the special condition is satisfied, and capable of outputting a signal (e.g., a variable stop signal) capable of specifying that the variable display has been executed in response to the end of the variable display. With such a configuration, a signal capable of specifying that the special state will be controlled based on the establishment of a special condition can be output to the outside at an appropriate timing.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 117-1) to (Means 117-5).

(Means 117-1) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information (e.g., first special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (e.g., second special symbol), and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., jackpot symbol), and has update means (e.g., a game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A, S56 03B) and a special state in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (for example, a low probability/low base state) (for example, in a high base state, control is performed to increase the probability of a normal winning, control to shorten the variation time of a normal pattern, and control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first start winning port)). 2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284), a variable display execution means capable of executing the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel (for example, a part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps S25A and S25B), and a first shortened state in which the variable display of the first identification information is more likely to be a variable display with a shorter variable display period than the variable display of the second identification information (for example, a part where the variable display of the first special symbol is more likely to be a variable display with a shorter variable display period than the variable display of the second special symbol). 284-2 to 284-4, 284-19), and a second shortened state in which the variable display of the second identification information is more likely to be a variable display with a shorter variable display period than the variable display of the first identification information (for example, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in a shorter variable display time than the variable display of the first special symbol, and the high probability/low base state in the first embodiment (see FIG. 284-2 to FIG. 284-4, FIG. 284-19). state (first probability variable state. See Fig. 284-2 to Fig. 284-4, Fig. 284-19), and a shortened state control means (for example, a part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps S061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284, S2514, S2206), and an update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, For example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B), the special state control means can control to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value (for example, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5606B). 7A, S5606B to S5607B), the variable display execution means, during execution of the variable display of one of the first and second identification information, does not derive and display the display result of the variable display of the one of the first and second identification information based on the establishment of a special condition by the execution of the variable display of the other identification information (for example, see FIG. 284-21 (A)), and during execution of the variable display of the second identification information, based on the deriving and displaying of a specific display result in the variable display of the first identification information, is capable of deriving and displaying a predetermined display result (for example, a losing pattern) different from the specific display result in the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS1125B, S1129B), and the shortened state control means, when controlled to the special state based on the establishment of a special condition, is capable of control to the first shortened state (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B). When the rescue time reduction is established, the game transitions to a low probability/high base state in which the first special symbol changes over a shorter time than the second special symbol. See FIG. 284-20.) With this configuration, the game is controlled to the first shortened state after the special condition is established, allowing the game to proceed smoothly and increasing interest.

(Means 117-2) In means 117-1, the variable display execution means is capable of deriving and displaying a special display result (e.g., a pattern that does not match the time-saving pattern) different from the specific display result and the predetermined display result as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and the special state control means is capable of controlling to a special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed (e.g., the part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS2032A and S2032B), and when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which a special condition is established, the special condition is established. Based on this, it is possible to control to a special state (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2030A to S2031A, S2030B to S2031B. See FIG. 284-21 (A)), and the degree of advantage of the special state controlled based on the special display result being derived and displayed is lower than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled based on the special condition being established (for example, the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state via rescue time-saving is 800 times, while the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state via time-saving loss is 100 times. See FIG. 284-1). With such a configuration, even if the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where the special condition is established, the special state is controlled based on the special condition being established, so the degree of rescue for the player can be increased.

(Means 117-3) In means 117-1 or 117-2, the special state control means is capable of controlling to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition during the execution of a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, which is a special display result, if a special condition is established by the execution of a variable display of the other identification information before the display result of the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A and S5607B), and even if a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information, it does not control to a special state with a degree of advantage based on the special display result being derived and displayed (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A, S2030B to S2031B). With such a configuration, in which the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, it is possible to ensure the advantage of a special state based on the establishment of a special condition, thereby increasing the degree of relief for the player.

(Means 117-4) In any of means 117-1 to 117-3, the variable display execution means can derive and display a special display result (e.g., a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result and the predetermined display result as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and can derive and display the predetermined display result in the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information based on the special display result being derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS1126A, S1129A, S1126B, and S1129B). With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the specific display result being derived and displayed in the variable display of the unintended identification information, and to minimize the effect of the player's intentional strategy.

(Means 117-5) In any of Means 117-1 to 117-4, the update means can update the numerical information at the timing when the variable display of the first identification information starts and the timing when the variable display of the second identification information starts (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B). With such a configuration, it is possible to optimize the update of the numerical information in a configuration where the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 118-1) to (Means 118-5).

(Means 118-1) A gaming machine that can execute variable display of first identification information (e.g., first special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (e.g., second special symbol) and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., jackpot symbol), and includes update means (e.g., a part that executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B in the first embodiment) that can update numerical information (e.g., rescue time reduction counter), and special state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B in the first embodiment) that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a state in which control is performed to increase the probability of a normal hit in a high base state, control to shorten the fluctuation time of a normal symbol, and control to lengthen the opening time of a variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port)) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., a low probability/low base state). 5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284), a first shortened state in which the variable display of the first identification information is more likely to have a shorter variable display period than the variable display of the second identification information (for example, a low probability/low base state (normal state) in the second embodiment in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed for a shorter variable time than the variable display of the second special symbol. See FIG. 285-1), The variable display of the second identification information is more likely to have a variable display period shorter than that of the first identification information (for example, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in a variable time shorter than that of the first special symbol, in the second embodiment, a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and a high probability/low base state (second KT state). See FIG. 285-1). and a special state control means capable of controlling the special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value (for example, the value of the relief time shortening counter is "0") corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, steps 061IWS5606A to 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284, S2514, and S2206 in the first embodiment). The update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the part that executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B in the first embodiment). the variable display execution means is capable of deriving and displaying a special display result (e.g., a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and while the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is being executed, based on the special display result being derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, a specific display result and a predetermined display result different from the special display result can be derived and displayed in the variable display of the one of the identification information (e.g., a part that executes steps 061IWS1126A, S1129A, S1126B, and S1129B in the first embodiment), and the shortened state control means is capable of control to the second shortened state when controlled to the special state based on the establishment of a special condition (e.g., controlled to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) in the second embodiment). With this configuration, while the variable display of one identification information is being executed, a specific display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information based on the derived special display result, and the variable display of the one identification information is controlled to the second shortened state after the special condition is met, allowing the game to proceed smoothly and increasing interest.

(Means 118-2) In means 118-1, the variable display execution means is capable of deriving and displaying a special display result (e.g., a pattern that does not match the time-saving pattern) different from the specific display result and the predetermined display result as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and the special state control means is capable of controlling to a special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed (e.g., corresponding to the part that executes steps 061IWS2032A and S2032B in the first embodiment), and when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where a special condition is met, the special state control means A special state can be controlled based on the fulfillment of a condition (e.g., this corresponds to the part that executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2030A-S2031A, and S2030B-S2031B in the first embodiment), and the advantage of the special state controlled based on the special display result being derived and displayed is lower than the advantage of the special state controlled based on the fulfillment of a special condition (e.g., in a time-saving state via rescue time-saving, the number of time-saving times is 800, whereas in a time-saving state via time-saving loss, the number of time-saving times is 100. See FIG. 285-1). With such a configuration, even if a special display result is derived and displayed in a variable display where a special condition is fulfilled, the special state is controlled based on the fulfillment of the special condition, so that the degree of salvation for the player can be increased.

(Means 118-3) In means 118-1 or 118-2, the special state control means is capable of controlling to a special state based on the special condition being satisfied during the execution of a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, which is a special display result, if a special condition is satisfied by the execution of a variable display of the other identification information before the display result of the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed (for example, this corresponds to the part that executes steps 061IWS5607A and S5607B in the first embodiment), and even if a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information, it does not control to a special state of advantage based on the special display result being derived and displayed (for example, this corresponds to the part that executes steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A, S2030B to S2031B in the first embodiment). According to such a configuration, in a configuration in which the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, it is possible to ensure the advantage of a special state based on the establishment of a special condition, thereby increasing the degree of relief for the player.

(Means 118-4) In any of means 118-1 to 118-3, the variable display execution means can derive and display a special display result (e.g., a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result and the predetermined display result as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and can derive and display the predetermined display result in the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information based on the special display result being derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information (e.g., corresponds to the part that executes steps 061IWS1126A, S1129A, S1126B, and S1129B in the first embodiment). With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the specific display result being derived and displayed in the variable display of the unintended identification information, and to minimize the effect of the player's intentional strategy.

(Means 118-5) In any of Means 118-1 to 118-4, the update means can update the numerical information at the timing when the variable display of the first identification information starts and the timing when the variable display of the second identification information starts (e.g., this corresponds to the part that executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B in the first embodiment). With such a configuration, in a configuration in which the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, it is possible to optimize the updating of the numerical information.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 119-1) to (Means 119-6).

(Means 119-1) A gaming machine that can execute a variable display of a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a variable display of a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern) and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes an update means (e.g., a part that executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B in the first embodiment) that can update numerical information (e.g., a rescue time reduction counter), and a special state control means (e.g., a step in the first embodiment that executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B) that can control to a special state (e.g., a high base state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., a low probability/low base state). a specific state control means capable of controlling the specific state (for example, a high probability state) which is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than the normal state (for example, a portion that executes step 061IWS2206 in the first embodiment); an end determination means for determining by lottery that the specific state is to be ended in the specific state (for example, a portion that executes step 061IWS5703A in the second modified example); and a normal state control means capable of controlling the specific state to the normal state based on the determination by the end determination means (for example, a portion that executes steps 061IWS5704A and S5712A in the second modified example). and notification performance execution means (for example, a portion that executes the processes of steps S061IWS5710A, S5713A, and S633A in the second modified example, and the process of determining a variation pattern depending on the state of the provocation reach flags A to C in the first embodiment) capable of executing notification performance capable of notifying whether a specific state will end or a specific display result will be derived and displayed in relation to the control of the specific state, the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, a portion that executes steps S061IWS5603A and S5603B in the first embodiment), and the special state control means updates the numerical information updated by the update means. When a special condition is established by the numerical information becoming a specific value (for example, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed, the special state can be controlled (for example, the part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B), and when a special condition is established in the special state, the special state can be controlled after the end determination means determines that the special state will end after the special condition is established (for example, the part in variant example 2 that executes steps 061IWS56061A, S5701A, S5704A, S5701A to S5709A. See FIG. 285-9), and the notification effect execution means can notify, when a special condition is established in the specific state, by a notification effect (for example, the provocative reach B shown in FIGS. 285-7 (3-2) and (4)). With this configuration, even if the specific state ends, the notification effect will notify the player that the special state will be entered based on the establishment of a special condition, which gives the player a sense of security and increases the player's interest.

(Means 119-2) Means 119-1 includes special information storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of storing special information (e.g., a rescue time-shortening flag) indicating the establishment of a special condition when the special condition is established in a specific state, and the special information is erased based on control being exercised to an advantageous state (e.g., the part that executes step 061IWS631A in variant 2). With such a configuration, information indicating that a special condition has been established in a specific state can be appropriately managed.

(Means 119-3) Means 119-1 or 119-2 includes special information storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of storing special information (e.g., a rescue time reduction flag) indicating the establishment of a special condition when the special condition is established in a specific state, and the special information is erased based on control being exercised in the special state after the specific state ends (e.g., the part that executes step 061IWS5707A in variant 2). With such a configuration, information indicating that a special condition has been established in a specific state can be appropriately managed.

(Means 119-4) Means 119-1 to 119-3 include special information storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of storing special information (e.g., a rescue time-shortening flag) indicating the establishment of a special condition in a specific state when the special condition is established in the specific state, and the specific state control means can end control of the specific state by executing an initialization process (e.g., the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8), and the special information is erased by executing the initialization process. With such a configuration, information indicating that a special condition has been established in a specific state can be appropriately managed.

(Means 119-5) Means 119-1 to 119-4 are provided with a special condition fulfillment notification effect execution means capable of executing a special condition fulfillment notification effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-8(2), a "Chi" icon 014IW003d is displayed on a part of the image display device 5, indicating that the game will be controlled to a chance mode (rescue time reduction)). With such a configuration, the player can recognize that the game will be controlled to a special state after the end of the specific state, which gives the player a sense of security and increases the interest.

(Means 119-6) In means 119-1 to 119-5, the special state control means can control the special state until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in a specific state, if the specific state ends before the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, the part that executes steps 061IWS5705A, S5711A, S5717A to S5720A in modified example 2), and the notification effect execution means can execute a notification effect that notifies the player that the specific state will end or that a specific display result will be displayed when the variable display is executed more than a predetermined number of times (for example, the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS5710A, S5713A, S633A in modified example 2 and the processing that determines the variable pattern depending on the state of the provocative reach flags A to C after the 100th change after being controlled to the probability variable state. See FIG. 285-6). With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension and increase the interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine configurations shown in (Means 1A) to (Means 8A) below may be applied.

(Means 1A) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with a state control means that can control to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and an update means that can update numerical information (e.g., a rescue time-saving count counter) based on the execution of the variable display, and the state control means can control to the special state when a special condition is met by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times the variable display is executed, and the update means The stage further includes a predetermined suggestion effect execution means that updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and is capable of executing a predetermined suggestion effect (e.g., a notice effect) when the variable display is executed, and a special notification effect execution means that is capable of executing a special notification effect (e.g., a time-saving entry effect) that notifies the player that control of a special state will begin based on the establishment of a special condition, and the predetermined suggestion effect execution means has a common ratio of executing the predetermined suggestion effect during the period before the special condition is established (for example, the execution ratio of the notice effect does not change between a period when the number of times remaining until the time-saving rescue is 10 or less and a period when the number of times remaining is 11 or more). With such a configuration, the sudden execution of the special notification effect can provide a sense of surprise to the player, thereby increasing the interest.

(Means 2A) In means 1A, the special notification effect execution means is capable of executing a special notification effect when a variable display that meets a special condition is started, and the special notification effect is a form in which the effect display displayed on the display means before the special notification effect is started is made difficult to see (for example, blacked out when the variation starts). Such a configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player, increasing interest.

(Means 3A) Means 1A is provided with a variable display execution means for effect that can execute a variable display of the effect identification information (e.g., decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and the special notification effect execution means can execute a special notification effect when the variable display that meets the special condition ends, and the special notification effect is in a form that makes the effect identification information difficult to see (e.g., blacking out when the variation ends). Such a configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player and increase interest.

(Means 4A) In means 1A, the special notification effect execution means is capable of executing a special notification effect when a variable display subsequent to the variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is being executed, and the special notification effect is a form in which the background display in the display means is changed to a background display corresponding to a special state (for example, when the next variable display is executed, a background image corresponding to a time-saving state due to rescue time-saving is displayed). Such a configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player, increasing interest. It can also prevent the effects from becoming cumbersome.

(Means 5A) Any of means 1A to 4A is provided with an explanatory effect execution means capable of executing explanatory effects regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, displaying a caption including an explanation regarding the rescue time reduction (for example, an explanation of the rescue time reduction function and the effects during the rescue time reduction)). Such a configuration can enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 6A) Any of means 1A to 5A includes a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns, and when a special condition is established, the variable display pattern determination means determines a variable display pattern that can be determined even before the special condition is established, and the special notification effect execution means can execute a special notification effect after a non-specific display result (for example, a losing pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display where the special condition is established (for example, in the variable display where the rescue time reduction is established, a variable pattern dedicated to the rescue time reduction is not used. Then, after the losing pattern is derived and displayed, the establishment of the rescue time reduction is notified). With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special state is being controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and it is possible to clearly notify the player of the change in the game state, thereby increasing the interest when the special condition is established.

(Means 7A) In any of means 1A to means 6A, a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of a start condition and the satisfaction of a start condition, a hold memory means (e.g., a first hold memory number buffer and a second hold memory number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, a backup memory means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of retaining the numerical information updated by the update means and the hold information stored in the hold memory means even when the power supply is stopped, an initialization means (e.g., a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8) capable of executing an initialization process to initialize the memory contents of the backup memory means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a recovery means (e.g., a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S6) capable of executing a recovery process to restore the numerical information updated by the update means and the hold information stored in the hold memory means based on the memory contents of the backup memory means when the power supply is started. With this configuration, control can be optimized through initialization processing, and disadvantages to players can be reduced when a power outage occurs in a situation where reserved memory corresponding to a special number of variable displays is stored before the power supply is stopped.

(Means 8A) Any of means 1A to 6A includes a state storage means capable of storing special state information (e.g., the state of the high base flag) that can identify that the device is being controlled to a special state, an execution count storage means capable of storing execution count information (e.g., the value of a time-saving count counter) that can identify the number of times a variable display has been executed in a special state, a backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) that can retain the special state information, execution count information, and numerical information even when power supply is stopped, and an initialization means (e.g., a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8) that can execute an initialization process to initialize the stored contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is met, and when the special state information, execution count information, and numerical information are held by the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is met, the initialization means initializes the special state information and the execution count information in the initialization process but does not initialize the numerical information (e.g., initializes the state of the high base flag and the value of the time-saving count counter, but does not initialize the value of the rescue time-saving count counter (i.e., sets the value before power outage)). Such a configuration can prevent the numerical information from being intentionally initialized, increasing the degree of relief available to the player.

In addition, in this characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine configurations shown in (Means 1B) to (Means 5B) below may be applied.

(Means 1B) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, and a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., a part in which the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern, and the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is met by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed, and the update means is configured to control the state to a special state when the variable display of the first identification information is executed. The numerical information is updated in the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed and in the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a specific variable display pattern in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and where it is not a specific display result (for example, it is capable of determining a reach (or a reach with particularly high expectations) variation pattern in both cases of a jackpot and a miss), and when the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, the probability of determining a specific variable display pattern is higher than that of a predetermined variable display pattern (for example, the reach (or a reach with particularly high expectations) variation pattern is more likely to be determined in the case of a jackpot), and when the display result of the variable display is not a specific display result, the probability of determining a specific variable display pattern is lower in a predetermined period before a special condition is established than in a period before the predetermined period (for example, immediately before the rescue time reduction occurs, the probability of determining a reach (or a reach with particularly high expectations) variation pattern in the event of a miss is lower). With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a specific display result is not derived and displayed even though a variable display using a specific variable display pattern is executed during a predetermined period before the special condition is met.

(Means 2B) Means 1B is provided with a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing suggestive effects related to the establishment of a special condition (for example, a countdown effect or effect that suggests the establishment of a rescue time-saving function, or a caption display while waiting for customers), and the suggestive effect execution means is more likely to execute suggestive effects in a specified period before the special condition is established than in the period before the specified period. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player look forward to the establishment of a special condition, thereby increasing interest. It is also possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage caused by ending play just before the special condition is established.

(Means 3B) Means 1B or 2B includes an explanatory effect execution means capable of executing explanatory effects regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, displaying a caption including an explanation regarding the rescue time reduction (for example, an explanation of the rescue time reduction function and the effects during the rescue time reduction)). Such a configuration can enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 4B) Any of means 1B to 3B includes a preview performance execution means capable of executing a preview performance (e.g., a timer performance) that notifies the player that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, and the preview performance execution means is capable of executing a preview performance in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and where the specific display result is not the case, and the preview performance is executed more frequently when the display result of the variable display is a specific display result than when the specific display result is not the case, and the preview performance is executed less frequently in a specified period before the special condition is met (e.g., a period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than in the period before the specified period when the display result of the variable display is not a specific display result. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a preview performance is executed in a specified period before the special condition is met but a specific display result is not derived and displayed.

(Means 5B) In any of means 1B to 4B, a notice performance execution means is provided that can execute a notice performance (e.g., a timer performance) that notifies the player that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, and the notice performance execution means can execute a notice performance in a specific mode (e.g., performance mode "red") and a predetermined mode (e.g., performance mode "blue") in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and where the notice performance is executed in a specific mode more frequently than in a predetermined mode when the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, and the notice performance is executed in a specific mode less frequently in a predetermined period before the special condition is established (e.g., a period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than in a period before the predetermined period when the display result of the variable display is not a specific display result. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a notice performance is executed in a specific mode but a specific display result is not derived and displayed in a predetermined period before the special condition is established.

In addition, in this characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine configurations shown in (Means 1C) to (Means 8C) below may be applied.

(Means 1C) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes a state control means that can control the gaming machine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, and a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., a part in which the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern (e.g., a first variable pattern #M (missing entry into rescue time-saving mode)). , and the state control means can control to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed, the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the variable display pattern determination means can determine to a special variable display pattern when the special condition is established, and further includes a specific notification effect execution means that does not determine to a special variable display pattern before the special condition is established and can execute a specific notification effect (e.g., time-saving entry effect) that notifies the player that the special state will be controlled when the special condition is established and variable display by the special variable display pattern is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the special state will be controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and it is possible to increase the interest when the special condition is established.

(Means 2C) In means 1C, the specific notification effect execution means is capable of executing a specific notification effect when a variable display in which a special condition is met is executed and a non-specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, and is equipped with a special notification effect execution means capable of executing an effect in a common form with the specific notification effect and then executing a special notification effect (e.g., an effect that looks like a time-saving mode has started) that notifies the player that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when a variable display in which a special condition is met is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. With such a configuration, the player is notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state after once recognizing that a special condition has been met, which provides a sense of surprise to the player and increases interest.

(Means 3C) In means 1C or means 2C, when a variable display in which a special condition is met is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, a predetermined notification effect execution means is provided that can execute a predetermined notification effect (e.g., a full rotation effect) that notifies the player that a specific display result is derived and displayed in a manner that is not executed before the special condition is met. Such a configuration can provide the player with a sense of surprise and specialness, and can increase interest.

(Means 4C) In means 1C or means 2C, when a variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, notification effect execution means is provided that can execute a notification effect to notify that the specific display result is derived and displayed in the same manner as before the special condition is satisfied (for example, even when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0, this is realized by determining the jackpot variation pattern in the same manner as when the value is not 0). With such a configuration, the variable display pattern can be made common when the special condition is satisfied and before it is satisfied, and data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 5C) In any of means 1C to 4C, the display period (e.g., 20 seconds) of the display result of the variable display when a special condition is met is longer than the display period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) of the display result of the variable display before the special condition is met, and a notification effect execution means is provided that can execute a notification effect (e.g., a mode transition effect that notifies that control of the time-saving state by rescue time-saving will begin) that notifies players that control of the time-saving state will begin during the display period of the display result of the variable display when a special condition is met. With such a configuration, a period for executing a notification effect in the normal state can be secured, the effect can be clarified when switching game states, and interest can be increased.

(Means 6C) Any of means 1C to 5C includes a signal output means for outputting a specific signal (e.g., a variable stop signal) corresponding to the start of a display period of the display result of the variable display when a special condition is met, at the start of the display period, and outputting a special signal (e.g., a jackpot 4 signal) corresponding to the control of a special state after outputting the specific signal. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid signals being missed externally when a specific signal and a special signal are output simultaneously.

(Means 7C) In means 6C, the signal output means outputs a special signal at the start of a special process (e.g., a next change postponement process for extending the period until the start of the next change) that is executed after the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied has elapsed. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of signal omissions externally when a specific signal and a special signal are output simultaneously.

(Means 8C) In any of means 1C to 6C, a first passing area (e.g., a first start winning port) provided at a position where a gaming medium passing through a specific path (e.g., a path by hitting from the left) can pass through, a second passing area (e.g., a second start winning port) provided at a position where a gaming medium passing through a special path (e.g., a path by hitting from the right) can pass through, and a variable display execution means capable of executing, as variable display of identification information, a variable display of a first identification information based on the first start condition being satisfied and a variable display of a second identification information based on the second start condition being satisfied, and a means capable of specifying that the gaming medium should be launched toward the special path. and a special output means capable of executing a special output (for example, outputting a test signal or an external output signal indicating that the game is in a gaming state in which the player is expected to perform a right hit, or an announcement that the game is in a state in which the player will perform a right hit), where the first start condition is established based on the game medium passing through the first passing area, the second start condition is established based on the game medium passing through the second passing area, and the special output means is capable of executing a special output at the start of a special process (for example, a next change postponement process for extending the period until the start of the next change) that is executed after the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is established has elapsed. With such a configuration, a special output that can specify that the game medium should be launched toward a special path at an appropriate timing can be executed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine configurations shown in (Means 1D) to (Means 5D) below may be applied.

(Means 1D) A gaming machine that executes a variable display of a first identification information and a variable display of a second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) being derived and displayed, and that is equipped with a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, and a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., a part in which the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns, and the state control means determines whether the numerical information updated by the update means is in accordance with the number of times the variable display has been executed. The special state can be controlled when a special condition is established by the number of times being a specific value corresponding to the number of times of special play as the number of times of ...

(Means 2D) In means 1D, a variable display execution means (e.g., a part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112A) capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the satisfaction of the start condition, a reserved memory means (e.g., a first reserved memory number buffer and a second reserved memory number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as reserved information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a pre-reading preview effect (e.g., an effect in which a special decorative pattern (chance eye) is displayed in a stopped state, or an effect in which the color or shape of the reserved display is changed) that predicts the variable display corresponding to the reserved information stored in the reserved memory means. and a look-ahead notice execution means capable of executing a look-ahead notice performance that predicts a variable display when a special condition is satisfied among the variable displays corresponding to the reserved information stored before the special condition is satisfied, a zone display that displays a special background, etc., and the look-ahead notice execution means is capable of executing a look-ahead notice performance that predicts a variable display when a special condition is satisfied among the variable displays corresponding to the reserved information stored before the special condition is satisfied, while restricting the execution of the look-ahead notice performance that predicts a variable display after the variable display when the special condition is satisfied (for example, restricting (prohibiting) the execution of a look-ahead notice performance that predicts a reserved memory that is stored before the change in the rescue time-saving is reached and corresponds to a change that occurs after the time-saving state is controlled via the rescue time-saving). With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the control process becoming complicated and to avoid the occurrence of inconsistencies in the performance content.

(Means 3D) In means 1D or 2D, the special notification effect execution means is capable of executing a special notification effect when a variable display subsequent to the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is being executed, and the special notification effect is a mode in which the background display in the display means is changed to a background display corresponding to a special state (for example, when the next variable display is executed, a background image corresponding to a time-saving state due to rescue time-saving is displayed). Such a configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player, increasing interest, and prevent the effects from becoming complicated.

(Means 4D) Any of means 1D to 3D is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing suggestion effects related to the establishment of a special condition (for example, a countdown effect or effect that suggests that a rescue time-saving feature will be established, or a caption displayed while waiting for customers, etc.), and the suggestion effect execution means limits the execution of the suggestion effect during a predetermined period before the special condition is established (for example, a period when there are 10 or fewer plays remaining until the rescue time-saving feature is established). With such a configuration, the special notification effect is suddenly executed, which gives the player a sense of surprise and increases his interest.

(Means 5D) Any of means 1D to 4D includes an explanatory effect execution means capable of executing explanatory effects regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, displaying a caption including an explanation of the rescue time-saving function or the effects during rescue time-saving). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

In addition, in this characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine configurations shown in (Means 1E) to (Means 4E) below may be applied.

(Means 1E-1) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) being derived and displayed, and that is equipped with a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, and a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., a part in which the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shortened compared to the predetermined variable display pattern, and the state control means determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shortened compared to the predetermined variable display pattern, The special state can be controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the derivation and display of the fixed display result, and the special state can be controlled when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed, the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the variable display pattern determination means has a higher probability of determining the shortened variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display becomes a non-specific display result in the special state controlled when the special condition is established than in the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving is more likely to be determined to be a variable pattern with a shortened variable time than the time-saving state via the jackpot). With such a configuration, when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a specific number, the variable display is executed by the shortened variable display pattern at a higher rate, and the period until the next advantageous state is controlled is shortened, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

(Means 1E-2) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) being derived and displayed, and that is equipped with a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, and a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., a part in which the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern (e.g., a first variable pattern #C) corresponding to the execution of a reach performance, and the state control means determines a variable display pattern even when a specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. The special state can be controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display, and the special state can be controlled when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed, and the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the variable display pattern determination means has a lower rate of determining the specific variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display becomes a non-specific display result in the special state controlled when the special condition is established than in the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving has a lower rate of determining the variable pattern that becomes a reach (or a reach with a particularly high expectation) when the display result is a miss than in the time-saving state via the jackpot). With such a configuration, when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a specific number, the rate at which the display result of the variable display by the specific variable display pattern becomes a non-specific display result is lower, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

(Means 2E) Means 1E is provided with background display means capable of displaying different background displays on the display means for the special state controlled after control to an advantageous state and the special state controlled when a special condition is met (for example, different background images for the time-saving state via a jackpot and the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving). With such a configuration, the difference in game state can be clearly notified to the player, enhancing interest.

(Means 3E) In means 1E or means 2E, a variable display execution means (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112A) capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the satisfaction of the start condition, a hold storage means (for example, a first hold memory number buffer or a second hold memory number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a look-ahead notice execution means capable of executing a look-ahead notice performance (for example, a chance eye performance or a hold change performance) with the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means as the preview target, and the look-ahead notice execution means has a different ratio of executing the look-ahead notice performance and a different ratio of which of the multiple types of look-ahead notice performance is executed between a special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state and a special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied (for example, a different ratio of executing the look-ahead notice performance and a different ratio of which of the multiple types of look-ahead notice performance is executed between a time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state and a time-saving state via a jackpot). With this configuration, the frequency and type of pre-reading preview effects can be made different between the special state that is controlled after control to an advantageous state and the special state that is controlled when a special condition is met, which can increase interest.

(Means 4E) In any of means 1E to 3E, a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the satisfaction of the start condition, a hold storage means (e.g., a first hold storage number buffer and a second hold storage number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a pre-reading preview effect (e.g., a performance in which a special decorative pattern (chance eye) is displayed in a stopped state, a hold change effect in which the color or shape of the hold display is changed, a special background display, etc.) and a look-ahead notice execution means capable of executing a look-ahead notice performance in which the variable display when the special condition is established is the subject of a notice among the variable displays corresponding to the reserved information stored before the special condition is established, while restricting the execution of the look-ahead notice performance in which the variable display after the variable display in which the special condition is established is the subject of a notice (for example, restricting (prohibiting) the execution of a look-ahead notice performance in which the reserved memory corresponding to a change that is stored before the change in the rescue time-saving is reached and that is performed after the time-saving state is controlled via the rescue time-saving is the subject of a notice). With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complication of the control process and to avoid the occurrence of inconsistencies in the performance content.

The configuration shown in the above characteristic part 120IW can be configured by appropriately combining the configurations shown in the above characteristic part 090IW, characteristic part 113IW, and characteristic part 116IW. For example, when applying the configuration shown in the above characteristic part 090IW to the configuration shown in the above characteristic part 120IW, the value of the small win counter can be decremented by 1 to end the time-saving state when a small win with a V win occurs during the time-saving state, while the value of the small win counter can be configured not to be decremented when a small win without a V win occurs during the time-saving state.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 Game board, 3 Game machine frame, 5 Image display device, 5C, 5L, 5R Decorative pattern display area, 6A Winning ball device, 6B Variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R Speaker, 9 Game effect lamp, 10 General winning port, 11 Main board, 12 Performance control board, 13 Sound control board, 15 Relay board, 20 Special pattern LED board, 21 Gate switch, 22A First start port switch, 22B Second start port switch, 23 Count switch, 24 V winning switch, 30 Ball hitting operation handle, 31A Stick controller, 31B Push button, 32 Movable body, 35A Controller sensor unit, 35B Push sensor, 41 Passing gate, 50 Fourth pattern unit, 81, 82, 83 Solenoid, 100 Game control microcomputer, 101, 121 ROM, 102, 122 RAM, 104, 124 random number circuit, 106 RTC, 110 switch circuit, 111 output circuit, 123 display control unit.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is to be performed after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
The first notification performance includes a first notification performance introduction part until the result of controlling to the advantageous state is notified, a first notification performance first epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled, and a first notification performance second epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will not be controlled,
The second notification performance includes a second notification performance introduction part until the result of controlling to the advantageous state is notified, a second notification performance first epilogue part executed when it is determined that the state will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second notification performance second epilogue part executed when it is determined that the state will not be controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
In the first notification performance introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the first notification performance introduction part;
In the second notification performance introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the second notification performance introduction part;
The brightness data table corresponding to the first notification performance introduction part includes a brightness data table for a specific light-emitting mode and a brightness data table for a special light-emitting mode different from the specific light-emitting mode,
The brightness data table corresponding to the second notification performance introduction part includes a brightness data table for a specific light-emitting mode and a brightness data table for a special light-emitting mode different from the specific light-emitting mode,
The luminance data table for setting a specific light-emitting mode in the luminance data table corresponding to the first notification performance introduction part and the luminance data table for setting a specific light-emitting mode in the luminance data table corresponding to the second notification performance introduction part are a common luminance data table,
The luminance data table for the special light emission mode is composed of a plurality of luminance data representing chromatic colors.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images